1973-1975
University Catalog of Curricula,
Courses and Degree Requirements
Lehigh
,H U if
Digitizecfbyjhejnte
in 20
Lyrasis MemberS
J/
MAR 30 1973
t Archive
ip$ from
oan Foundation
http://www.archive.org/details/lehighcoursecata1973
Lehigh
University Catalog of Curricula,
Courses and Degree Requirements
1973-1975
The Lehigh University Catalog is published biennially.
The next edition will be published in April, 1975.
Lehigh University reserves the right to change at any
time the rules governing admission, tuition, fees,
courses, the granting of degrees, or any other regula-
tions affecting its students. Such changes are to take
effect whenever Lehigh University deems necessary.
Lehigh is published four times annually during the
calendar year by Lehigh University, Bethlehem,
Pennsylvania 18015. Issues of Lehigh include the
Summer Session (March), the University Catalog
(April), Introduction to the University (August),
and the Report of the President (October). Volume
47, Number 2, April 1973. Second class postage
paid at Bethlehem, Pennsylvania 18015. Edited
and designed by the Lehigh University Office of
University Publications: George L. Beezer, Director;
Marvin H. Simmons, Assistant Director; Lynn D.
Klein, Production Assistant; Sara L. Paden, Admini-
strative Assistant. Composition set in Aldine Roman;
display type in Palatino. Printing by Holben Printing,
Inc., Allentown, Pa. 40M, 3-73.
Krameria triandra, from Hippolyto Ruiz et Josepho Pavon,
Flora Peruviana et Chilensis (1798), from the Bassler Collec-
tion, Linderman Library, Lehigh University.
Tlie white stock used in this
catalog is 60% recycled paper.
Contents
\ idemii I lalendai . 3
Lehigh University: History and Purpose. 5
Undergraduate Admission. 7
Tuition and Fees. 1 1
Undergraduate Scholarships and Loans, 16
Student Personnel Services, 18
Genera] Information, 24
The Scene, 29
Campus and City Maps, 32
College or Arts and Science, 35
College ot Business and Economics, 39
College ot Engineering, 44
Special Academic Opportunities. 49
The Graduate School, 57
The School of Education, 67
Interdisciplinary Graduate Programs, 69
Research Centers and Organizations, 71
Description of Courses, 85
Accounting, 86
American Studies, 89
Arts-Engineering, 90
Biology, 94
Chemical Engineering, 100
Chemistry, 106
Civil Engineering, 113
Classics. 121
Economics, 124
Education. 128
Electrical Engineering, 134
English. 140
Environmental Sciences and Resource Management, 149
Fine Arts. 150
Five-Year Programs, 153
Foreign Careers, 157
Fundamental Sciences, 158
Geological Sciences, 159
Government, 164
History, 170
Industrial Engineering, 176
International Relations, 180
Management and Finance, 183
Mathematics, 188
Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics, 195
Metallurgy and Materials Science, 203
Miidcin r.ni-ign I align. ige.s .mil Literatures. 210
Music, 2 1 9
Natural Science, 221
Philosophy. 222
Physics, 228
Psychology, 233
Religion Studies, 238
Reserve Officers' Training Corps, 239
Social Relations, 243
Physical Education and Athletics, 248
Board of Trustees, 250
University Administration, 257
Faculty and Staff, 265
Registration Statistics, 294
Index, 297
2 Contents
Academic Calendar
1973-1974
1972-1973
April 2 (Mon.)
Pre -registration begins
Last day for filing of applications for degrees to be
conferred in May
April 6 (Fri.)
Pre-registration ends
April 13 (Fri.)
Last day for May Ph.D. candidates to arrange for
final examinations
Last day for May Ph.D. candidates to deliver to
Dean of Graduate School approved dissertation draft
April 18 (Wed.), 10 p.m.
Easter vacation begins
April 23 (Mon.), 8:10 a.m.
Easter vacation ends
May 3 (Thurs.)
Last day of classes for Arts seniors taking compre-
hensive examinations
Last day for submission of honors theses to thesis
advisors tor May graduation
May 4-8 (Fri.-Tues.)
Comprehensive examinations for Arts seniors
May 4 (Fri.)
Last day for October Ph.D. candidates to arrange
for final examinations
Last day for May candidates for master's degrees
to deposit with Dean of Graduate School unbound
copies of theses
May 5 (Sat.)
Last day of classes in spring semester
May 7 (Mon.)
Review-Consultation-Study period begins
May 8 (Tues.)
Review-Consultation-Study period ends
Last day for May Ph.D. candidates to complete all
degree requirements
May 9 (Wed.)
Course examinations begin
May 17 (Thurs.)
Course examinations end
May 27 (Sun.)
University Day
August 20-28 (Mon. -Tues.)
Graduate registration for fall semester
August 26 (Sun.)
Freshman check-in
August 27-28 (Mon. -Tues.)
Freshman orientation
August 29 (Wed.)
Undergraduate registration for fall semester
August 30 (Thurs.)
Fall semester instruction begins
September 4 (Tues.)
Last day for October doctoral candidates to deliv-
er to Dean of Graduate School approved disserta-
tion drafts
September 10 (Mon.)
Last day for filing applications for degrees to be
conferred on Founder's Day
First faculty meeting
September 11 (Tues.)
Last day for October candidates for master's de-
grees to deposit with Dean of Graduate School
unbound copies of theses
September 12 (Wed.)
Last day on which registration for fall courses wOl
be permitted
September 28 (Fri.)
Last day for October doctoral candidates to com-
plete all degree requirements
October 1-3 (Mon. -Wed.)
Engineering inspection trips
October 4 (Thurs.)
Tuesday classes meet
October 5 (Fri.)
Monday classes meet
October 8-9 (Mon. -Tues.)
Columbus Day holiday
October 14 (Sun.)
Founder's Day
October 29 (Mon.)
Pre-registration begins
Mid-semester reports due
November 2 (Fri.)
Pre-registration ends
Academic Calendar 3
No\ i mbei 9 Fri,
I ist daj foi submission ,>! honors theses to thesis
advisors foi January graduation
November 15 (Thurs.)
I .ist day for filing applications for degrees to be
granted in January
Novembei 16 (Fri,
I .ist day for [anuary doctoral candidates to
deliver to Dean ot Graduate School approved dis
sertation drafts
Novembi i 21 Wed.), 10 p.m.
Thanksgiving vacation begins
November 2(> (Mon.), 8:10 a.m.
Thanksgiving vacation ends
Friday classes meet
November 27 (Tues.)
Thursday classes meet
December 7 (Fri.)
Last day of classes for Arts seniors taking compre-
hensive examinations
Last day for January candidates for master's de-
grees to deposit with the Dean of Graduate School
unbound copies of theses
December 10-13 (Mon. -Thurs.)
Comprehensive examinations for Arts seniors
December 11 (Tues.)
Last day of classes
December 12-13 (Wed.-Thurs.)
Review-Consultation-Study period
December 14 (Fri.)
Last day for January doctoral candidates to com-
plete all degree requirements
Course examinations begin
December 22 (Sat.)
Course examinations end
January 2-11 (Wed. -Fri.)
Graduate registration for spring semester
January 14 (Mon.)
Undergraduate registration for spring semester
January 15 (Tues.)
Spring semester instruction begins
January 28 (Mon.)
Last day on which registration for spring courses is
permitted
February 18-19 (Mon. -Tues.)
Washington's Birthday holiday
February 20 (Wed.)
Monda) t lasses meet
March ') (Sat.). 1 p.m.
Mid-term vacation begins
March 18 (Mon.), 8:10 a.m.
Mid-term vacation ends
Last day tor tiling application tor degrees in May
March 21 (Thurs.)
Mid-semester reports due-
March 25-29 (Mon. -Fri.)
Pre-registration
April 10 (Wed.)
Last day for May doctoral candidates to arrange
for final examinations
Last day for May doctoral candidates to deliver to
Dean of Graduate School approved dissertation draft
April 10 (Wed.), 10 p.m.
Easter vacation begins
April 15 (Mon.), 8:10 p.m.
Easter vacation ends
May 2 (Thurs.)
Last day for classes for Arts seniors taking compre-
hensive examinations
Last day for submission of honors theses to thesis
advisors for May graduation
May 3-7 (Fri. -Tues.)
Comprehensive examinations for Arts seniors
May 3 (Fri.)
Last day for October doctoral candidates to ar-
range for final examinations
Last day for May candidates for master's degrees
to deposit with Dean of Graduate School unbound
copies of theses
May 4 (Sat.)
Last day of classes in spring semester
May 6-7 (Mon. -Tues.)
Review-Consultation-Study period
May 8 (Wed.)
Course examinations begin
May 10 (Fri.)
Last day for May doctoral candidates to complete
all degree requirements
May 16 (Thurs.)
Course examinations end
May 26 (Sun.)
University Day
4 Academic Calendar
Lehigh University
History and Purpose
The charter granted Lehigh by the state of Pennsyl-
vania states with simple directness that this University
was established "for the education of youth." The
institution was founded by the Honorable Asa
Packer, industrialist and philanthropist, as an expres-
sion of faith in certain concepts of professional
education.
Born a poor farm boy in Connecticut, in 1805,
Asa Packer moved to Pennsylvania in 1822 and be-
came one of America's pioneer captains of industry.
He helped open the anthracite fields ol Pennsylvania
by developing a network of transportation canals and
the Lehigh Valley Railroad which carried coal to
market. He was elected to the state legislature, was
appointed a county judge, was elected to Congress,
was Pennsylvania's favorite-son candidate for presi-
dent, and was Democratic candidate for governor of
Pennsylvania.
Judge Packer foresaw the great industrial develop-
ment that was just beginning and which he had help-
ed to initiate in the mineral-rich area of eastern Penn-
sylvania. He desired to contribute still further to the
development of the region that had benefited him so
much. In 1865, he asked Episcopal Bishop William
Bacon Stevens to help him plan a university.
Judge Packer founded his university in the midst
of educational revolution. Originally, he conceived of
his institution as primarily technical. Yet, its original
experimental programs were greatly modified in the
fourteen years in which he guided its destiny. The
general plan of study when the new institution
accepted students in 1866 consisted of a two-year
common core of courses for all students, with a pro-
fessional elective to be chosen by the student for the
final two years of study. The professional elective
could be in general literature, civil engineering, mech-
anical engineering, metallurgy, or analytical chemis-
try. From the beginning, Lehigh combined the tradi-
tional American college of liberal arts, the continental
university, and the new technical institute of universi-
ty rank.
The coincidence of Judge Packer's concepts with
those popular in his day can be seen in the fact that
Lehigh was founded the same year as another im-
portant technically-oriented university, Cornell, and
shortly after MIT. Also, the Morrill Act, which estab-
lished our land-grant colleges, was being debated
when Judge Packer was a member of Congress. He fits
well into the movement from the traditional liberal
education of England to the more technical German
programs.
Lehigh's founder was also in the avant-garde of
public industrialists. During his lifetime, and by be-
quest, he gave Lehigh over three million dollars, in-
cluding land, buildings and endowment. The generosi-
ty of the Packer family and friends, the distinguished
faculty originally assembled, and the prominence of
early alumni firmly established the reputation of
Lehigh in higher education.
Lehigh University is fully accredited by the Middle
States Association of Colleges and Secondary
Schools. In addition, specialized programs in business
administration are accredited by the American Asso-
ciation of Collegiate Schools of Business, the engi-
neering curricula are accredited by the Engineers
Council for Professional Development, and Council
for Professional Development, and various School of
Education programs are accredited by the National
Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education, in-
cluding Commonwealth of Pennsylvania approval for
certification programs.
The current market value of the endowment fund
of the University exceeds fifty million dollars. The
value of equipment, buildings, and grounds is more
than sixty million dollars.
Organized as a Small University
When Lehigh opened its doors in 1866, it was given
the character of a small university. The undergraduate
enrollment is 3,659; the graduate enrollment 2,035.
Lehigh desires to remain a small university, and with
its faculty of more than 400, to provide the best pos-
sible education for a co-educational student body of
its size.
Lehigh is primarily a residential university. Approxi-
mately eighty percent of the undergraduate students
reside in University-operated residence halls on the
campus or in the houses of national social fraternities
which maintain chapters at Lehigh.
History and Purpose 5
Current undergraduates come from 900 public and
pi ivate secondai \ schools in 40 states and 26 foreign
countries.
I . ■■:<. [wo percent ol the undergraduate studenl
bods .no enrolled in the College ol Engineering;
thirty-six percent in the College ol Arts and Science;
and twenty percent in the College ol Business and
Economics. The remaining two percent are enrolled
in the five-year arts-engineering sequence.
Lehigh continues to base its program on the pre-
mise that an education tor successful living must com-
bine the acquisition of knowledge and skills funda-
mental in the professions with courses designed to
broaden the vision and to enrich the personal life of
the individual. Therefore at Lehigh requirements for
graduation include studies preparatory to a career, a
generous number of courses to acquaint the student
with the nature and problems of the world in which
he lives, and opportunities to develop himself as an
individual.
rei onstructed. Each spring, the city ami the campus
receive thousands of music lovers who come to hear
the Bach Ch oil in Lehigh's Packer Memorial Church.
Situated in the center of the Lehigh Valley industrial
complex, Bethlehem is preeminently a city ol steel, as
the home site of the main administrative offices, re-
search laboratories, and a major production facility of
the Bethlehem Steel Corporation.
There are five colleges in the Lehigh Valley besides
Lehigh, all private: Lafayette (coed), Allcntown
College of St. Francis dc Sales (coed), Moravian
(coed), Muhlenberg (coed), and Cedar Crest (women).
A cooperative program is maintained between the
colleges and Lehigh. There are also two two-year
community colleges in the area.
Campus and Community
Located on a 200-acre hillside campus on the south
side of the Lehigh River, the towers of Lehigh Univer-
sity overlook the city of Bethlehem, which has a pop-
ulation of 73.000. and is located in eastern Pennsyl-
vania, approximately 60 miles north of Philadelphia
and 90 miles west of New York City.
In founding his university, Judge Packer provided
the site for the campus '"in the midst of a noble park
of forest trees." A century later, there remains abun-
dant evidence of the source of Judge Packer's inspira-
tion, for the trees continue to create the quiet cam-
pus atmosphere. Most of the University's buildings
are located on the north slope of South Mountain. An
additional 500 acres in Saucon Valley, on the south
side of South Mountain, are used as playing fields.
With the addition of land acquired through a coopera-
tive venture with Bethlehem's Urban Renewal pro-
gram, the University has added new library, class-
room, and laboratory facilities.
Settled in 1741 by Moravians seeking religious
asylum, the city of Bethlehem is rich in historic tradi-
tion. The city became an important point for early
colonial travelers stopping between New York and
Philadelphia. Twenty-one remarkably preserved pre-
Revolutionary War buildings remain in the heart of
the city. Many have been restored and others will be
6 Lehigh University: Campus
Undergraduate Admission
Requirements
The enrollment of Lehigh University is strictly limit-
ed by action of its board of trustees, with a resulting
limitation in the number of candidates who can be
admitted each year to the several divisions of the
University. The University seeks candidates without
regard to race, color, religious creed, or national ori-
gin.
In the selective procedure necessitated by this
limitation, the University, through its Office of Ad-
mission, takes into account a number of criteria
which are believed to have some individual validity
and in combination a high degree of validity in pre-
dicting probable success in college work.
Secondary School Preparation
The admission policy of the University is designed to
encourage students with varied backgrounds to con-
sider Lehigh while insuring that any individual stu-
dent is not guided into a program of studies for which
he or she is inadequately prepared.
The courses or units required for admission repre-
sent the quantitative equivalent of the usual four-year
college preparatory program and include certain pre-
scribed subjects for candidates depending upon their
college and curriculum choice.
An applicant's full potential as a Lehigh student,
including evidence of academic growth and the desire
to learn, are special qualities which may not be re-
flected in mere accumulation of units.
All applicants should have completed four years of
English, two to four years of history and social
studies, three years of mathematics and two to four
years of laboratory science. (Chemistry is required
and physics recommended for candidates planning
studies in science or engineering.)
Students planning to enter the College of Engi-
neering or the College of Business and Economics, or
the bachelor of science program in the College of Arts
and Science, must have studied mathematics through
trigonometry.
Students planning a bachelor of arts degree in the
College of Arts and Science must present at least two
years of one foreign language.
One of the major features of Lehigh is the ease
with which a student may normally transfer from one
curriculum or college to another. Such transferring
may, however, necessitate a student's obtaining addi-
tional background for his new discipline area on cam-
pus or elsewhere.
Summary of Minimum Subject Matter Requirements
(1 6 units)
English 4
Foreign Language* 2
College Preparatory Mathematics** 4
Electives 6
*Waivers of the requirement in foreign language are
granted to otherwise well-qualified candidates for
admission to the College of Engineering or the Col-
lege of Business and Economics.
**Waivers of the requirement in mathematics are
granted to otherwise well-qualified candidates for
admission who propose to major in one of the follow-
ing fields offered by the College of Arts and Science:
American studies, fine art, classics, English, modern
foreign languages, government, history, international
relations, journalism, music, philosophy, social rela-
tions.
Note: Chemistry is required and physics is recom-
mended for candidates planning programs in science,
arts-engineering, and engineering. Electives should
include such college preparatory subjects as langu-
ages, social studies, and sciences.
Quality of Work
The quality of the candidate's work is more impor-
tant than merely meeting minimum subject matter
requirements. The strength of his preparation is judg-
ed primarily by his rank or relative grade in class; by
the extent to which he has made grades distinctly
higher than the average grade; by evidence of im-
provement or deterioration in quality of record as he
has progressed through secondary school; by his rela-
tive success or failure in the particular subjects which
he proposes to continue in college; and by the com-
ments and recommendations of his principal or head-
master.
Undergraduate Admission: Requirements 7
Inn .iiu I- I xaminations
All candidates for admission to the freshman class at
Lehigh University are required to write entrance tests
prepared and administered b) the College Entrance
Examination Board, Tests required by Lehigh Univer-
sity are listed below.
Scholastic [ptitude Test
Each candidate is required to write the Scholastic
Aptitude Test (SAT) to provide the University with a
measure, on a national scale, ot his aptitude and read-
iness tor college study. Lehigh prefers that this test be
written cither on the November, December or the
January testing date of the senior year.
Achievement Tests
Each candidate is required to write three additional
College Board Achievement Tests. One of these must
be English Composition. Candidates for a science
program in the College of Arts and Science or for a
program in the College of Engineering are expected to
write a Mathematics (Level I or Level II) Achieve-
ment Test. Candidates for Engineering are expected
to write a Science (chemistry or physics) Achieve-
ment Test. Candidates for B.A. programs in Arts and
Science, including five-year Arts-Engineering candi-
dates, should write an Achievement Test in the
foreign language to be studied in college. Other candi-
dates write tests which they may choose in consulta-
tion with their advisors. The English Composition and
two additional Achievement Tests should be written
in December. January, or March of the senior year,
unless satisfactory junior year scores were submitted
to Lehigh University.
Test information and applications should be
secured from the College Entrance Examination
Board at one of the following addresses (whichever is
closer to the candidate's home or school): P. O. Box
592, Princeton, New Jersey 08540 or P. O. Box 1025,
Berkeley, California 94701 or from the candidate's
school.
Candidates should register for the tests early in the
senior year and not later than one month prior to the
test date (two months for the candidates who will be
tested in Europe, Asia, Africa, Central and South
America, and Australia).
The candidate is responsible for requesting that his
tesl score be senl to Lehigh eithei by indicating
Lehigh on his College Board application or.il he fail
cd to do this, by special rcque I ' o the College Board
office. In addition to requesting that his College
Board scores be sent to Leliigli, the Candidate must
submit an application for admission to the freshman
class at Leliigli.
Other Criteria and Interviews
Information about other qualifications of candidates
is obtained from principals, headmasters, and counsel-
ors. Such information relates to the candidate's
health, emotional stability, intellectual motivation,
social adjustment, participation in school activities,
and established habits of industry and dependability.
Each candidate is urged to visit Lehigh whenever
possible so that he may see the University and talk
with an officer of admission. An appointment should
be made in advance of the visit.
The Office of Admission is open for interviews
every weekday between 9:00 a.m. and 1 1 :00 a.m.
and from 1 :30 p.m. to 4:00 p.m. Interviews are also
granted on Saturday mornings, but classes are not in
session. Tours of the campus are available every week-
day afternoon and Saturday mornings. The Office of
Admission is closed Sundays, national holidays,
Saturday afternoon during the school year, and all
day Saturday during the summer months. Visitors are
welcome during the summer months.
Although a personal interview is not required of all
candidates, the University reserves the right to require
an interview whenever this appears desirable or neces-
sary and to base determination of admission in part
on the report of the interviewing officer.
Procedures
Admission to the Freshman Class
If a candidate has determined that he is sincerely
interested in Lehigh and if he believes that he will
meet admission requirements of subject matter and
school record, he should secure from the Office of
Admission an application for the freshman class en-
tering in September. (Lehigh does not admit a fresh-
man class in February.)
The application should be submitted early in the
last year of preparation for college. Every effort
8 Undergraduate Admission: Procedures
should be made to submit an application during the
fall semester of the senior year and definitely not
later than March first.
Application Fee
Each undergraduate application for admission to the
freshman class or with advanced standing or to the
General College Division must be accompanied by an
application fee in the amount of $15.00. The check
or money order for the application tee should be
made payable to Lehigh University. The application
fee is non-refundable in the event the candidate does
not matriculate at Lehigh University. It is not applied
toward tuition if the candidate matriculates. An
application cannot be accepted without the applica-
tion fee.
Early Decision
Lehigh will give a candidate an early favorable deci-
sion on his application if he meets the following crite-
ria: (1) His preliminary credentials, including Schol-
astic Aptitude Test scores show clear qualification for
admission to Lehigh; (2) He is certain that Lehigh is
his first choice of college.
On this basis the Committee on Admission selects
candidates who have submitted requests for early
decision by November 1. Lehigh's decisions will be
made by December 1. If the decision is favorable, it is
assumed the candidate's academic strengths will con-
tinue throughout the senior year and that he will
complete all normal admission requirements. On re-
ceiving a favorable decision the candidate promptly
withdraws other applications.
Early Decision candidates whose parents have sub-
mitted Parents' Confidential Statements will receive
notice by December 1 of the action taken on requests
for financial aid.
This plan is not appropriate for all of our candi-
dates. There are many candidates who are unable to
make an early college choice. Such candidates are not
penalized. Candidates who do not receive favorable
replies to their requests for "early decision" should
not feel discouraged. Only a portion of the class is
selected under this plan, since the Committee on Ad-
mission still prefers to take action on most applica-
tions later in the year.
Advanced Placement
There are several means whereby able students with
superior preparation may obtain advanced placement
and/or college credit at Lehigh.
In many secondary schools able and well-qualified
students have opportunities to enroll in one or more
Advanced Placement courses given under the auspices
of the College Entrance Examination Board. Lehigh
encourages students to enroll in these college-level
courses and to write the Advanced Placement tests
offered by the C.E.E.B. each May. Entering freshmen,
who ask the C.E.E.B. to submit their test scores and
papers to Lehigh, and who are recommended by their
schools, are considered for advanced placement
and/or college credit.
Advanced Placement test scores range from a low
of 1 to a high of 5. Students who earn the recom-
mendations of their schools and scores of 3 or higher
on the Advanced Placement tests receive advanced
placement and/or credit in most departments. A few
departments regularly offer special examinations dur-
ing Freshman Orientation to students who completed
college-level courses in secondary school, who did not
write Advanced Placement examinations, and who
request permission to write the tests. The current
practices at Lehigh follow:
English. Advanced Placement and six semester hours
of Lehigh credit for English 1 and 2, 10, 14, or 16
(the standard freshman courses) to students who earn
scores of 3 or higher on the C.E.E.B. Advanced Place-
ment Test in English. Other students who earn a score
of 700 or higher on the SAT-Verbal Aptitude Test
receive equal credit.
Mathematics. Advanced Placement and four semester
hours of Lehigh credit for Mathematics 21, Analytic
Geometry and Calculus I, to students who earn scores
of 3 or higher on the Calculus AB examination: ad-
vanced placement and eight semester hours of Lehigh
credit for Mathematics 21 and Mathematics 22, Ana-
lytic Geometry, and Calculus I and II, to students
who earn scores of 3 or higher on the Calculus BC
examination. Other students, selected by the depart-
ment of mathematics on the basis of entrance creden-
tials, are invited to participate in an accelerated cal-
culus sequence, Mathematics 31 and 32. Upon com-
pletion of Math. 31 and 32, each of which carries
four credit hours, and upon certification by the de-
Undergraduate Admi
Procedures 9
partment ol mathematics ol superioi performance,
the student receives four hours ol advanced pl.u ■>■
ment credit in calculus. The department also admini-
sters placement tests iluring Freshman Orientation to
students who did not write the Advanced Placement
examination and who request permission to write .1
Lehigh test.
Chemistry. Advanced Placement and five semester
hours of Lehigh credit for Chemistry 21 and Chemis-
try 22 to students who earn scores ot 4 or 5. Other
students who earn scores ot 750 or higher on the
Chemistry Achievement Test of the C.E.E.B. also
receive equal credit. The department administers tests
during Freshman Orientation to students who did not
write the Advanced Placement examination and who
wish to establish credit tor the first Lehigh course.
History. Consideration for advanced placement
and/or credit to students who earn scores of 3 or
higher on the American History or European History
Advanced Placement examinations. Special courses,
History 51 and History 52, are available to students
who earn advanced placement and/or credit.
Biology. Advanced Placement and/or 3 semester
hours of Lehigh credit for Biology 21 to students
who earn scores of 3 or higher. Examinations are not
offered during Freshman Orientation.
Physics. Advanced Placement and four semester hours
ot Lehigh credit for Physics 11. Introductory Physics,
to students who earn scores of 4 or 5 on the Physics
C examination. Placement or credit is not granted to
students who write the Physics B examination. The
department administers tests during Freshman Orient-
ation to students who did not write the Advanced
Placement test and who request permission to write a
Lehigh examination.
Foreign Languages. The department of modern
foreign languages and literatures does not normally
offer advanced placement or credit based on the Ad-
vanced Placement Test. However, students scoring
600 or above on the College Board Achievement Test
are exempt from the language requirement and may
elect advanced language or foreign literature courses.
Each language section determines student placement
according to criteria which may include Achievement
Test scores, Advanced Placement Test scores, years of
prior study, or a personal interview.
The University encourages the initiative which
secondary school students are showing in enrolling in
advanced courses, in requesting advanced standing in
college, and in assuming responsibility for a greater
share ol theii own education, In addition to the
opportunities for advanced placement of freshmen,
suggested in the preceding paragraphs, sophomores
are invited to consider the advantages of enrolling in
some junior courses. This may be accomplished by
special examinations available in certain courses for
students who performed particularly well as fresh-
men.
In the junior year students may register tor inter-
departmental honors seminars and in some programs
may take what is referred to as "unscheduled work."
where they have an opportunity to do individual
work in consultation with a member of the faculty.
In the senior year students may continue with the
interdepartmental honors seminars and may under-
take departmental honors programs. Particularly
well-qualified students are permitted to take a limited
number of graduate courses. Some students engage in
research projects in connection with their senior
thesis.
The opportunities for able and well-motivated
students are increasing each year and more students
are qualifying each year for advanced sections and
courses and honors programs.
Acceptance of Admission and Deposit
Selection of candidates for the freshman class en-
tering in September is made between the end of Feb-
ruary and the first of April following receipt of Janu-
ary College Board scores and preliminary secondary
school records. Lehigh subscribes to the "Candidates'
Reply Date," which has been set at May first.
When a candidate's preliminary credentials are
complete and he has been offered formal admission
to Lehigh University, he will be asked to notify the
Director of Admission of his acceptance of the offer
of admission by making a deposit of $50 to hold a
place for him in the limited enrollment. This deposit
is not an additional fee but is applied toward tuition
charges for the first semester. However, the deposit is
forfeited in case of failure to enroll for the specified
semester.
Presidential Prizes
Ten Presidential Prizes are awarded to entering fresh-
men based on merit and without regard to financial
need. (See statement on page 54 of the Special
10 Undergraduate Admission: Procedures
Academic Opportunities section of this catalog.
Tuition and Fees
Transfer Students
Candidates for admission from other institutions are
admitted with advanced standing to the three colleges
of the University. Such candidates must have met the
subject matter entrance requirements prescribed for
undergraduates at Lehigh. No entrance examinations
are required.
A candidate who has studied at another college
prior to applying tor admission to Lehigh will be con-
sidered on the basis of the quality of his record at
that college. A candidate who has been dropped from
another college for disciplinary reasons or for poor
scholarship or who is not in good standing at his
former college is not eligible for admission to Lehigh
University.
A student who is planning to transfer to Lehigh
University should so arrange his work in college that
he will cover as many as possible of the subjects of his
chosen curriculum at Lehigh.
A student who desires to transfer to Lehigh Uni-
versity from another college must submit an applica-
tion for admission (on a special transfer form) with
the SI 5 application fee. He must request each college
previously attended to submit to the Office of Admis-
sion at Lehigh University an official transcript of his
academic record. Catalog pages describing the courses
completed at other colleges should be enclosed with
the application. It is not necessary to send complete
catalogs.
A candidate who has attended more than one uni-
versity, college, or junior college must present a
record from each institution. Failure to submit a
complete record of former academic experience will
result in cancellation of admission or registration.
Lehigh University reserves the right to change at any
time the rules governing tuition and fees.
The comprehensive tuition in the undergraduate
colleges is 12,850 a year. A student regularly enrolled
in any of the undergraduate divisions of the Universi-
ty who registers for fewer than the normal hours of
work will pay either S 1 1 9 for each semester-hour
carried, or the regular tuition, whichever amount is
lower.
Undergraduate Expenses
Items of personal expense are dependent upon each
student's personal habits and circumstances. There
are certain basic expenses in addition to tuition which
must be met. For example, books, stationery, and
drawing instruments may be purchased at the book-
store in Maginnes Hall at an average annual expense
of S150 to 1170. This allowance does not include
personal expenditures.
Since Lehigh is primarily a residential university,
provision is made for student-living quarters and
dining facilities, and social fraternities. Not all upper-
classmen live in residence halls or fraternity houses.
Many elect to live in off-campus apartments or room-
ing houses. Students living in residence halls are re-
quired to eat in the University dining facilities. Three
basic meal plans are available, and are described later
in this section. There are no fees for athletics, health
service, library, student activities, or student concerts
and lectures. In addition, there are no matriculation,
graduation, or laboratory fees.
Undergraduate fees are payable prior to registra-
tion. A bill will be rendered by the Bursar's Office
which will indicate the payment date. If desired, pay-
ment may be made in installments of 60 percent, plus
a service charge of $3 per semester, due prior to regis-
tration, 20 percent due one month after registration,
and 20 percent due two months after registration.
The $3 service charge is not refundable.
Tuition and Fees: Undergraduate Expenses 1 1
Residence 1 lalls
About 50 percent of 1 ehigh undergraduates live in
University residence halls. Lehigh has seven residence
halls tor undergraduate men .nut women. Most rooms
are designed for two students, but a limited number
of single, triple, and suite arrangement rooms are
available. Another residence hall, comprised ol apart-
ment units, will be completed in 1974.
Room rental charges in the residence halls range
from S265 to S310 per semester in 1973-74. An addi-
tional charge of S45 to S52.50 per semester is made
for single rooms. Maid service is included in the room
fee, and all essential furniture is provided. Rooms are
rented on an annual lease basis only.
When a candidate accepts an offer of admission to
the freshman class, the candidate is sent a Room and
Board Application-Contract. Those desiring accom-
modations in the residence halls are urged to return
this application-contract promptly because priority of
assignment is based on date of receipt of this applica-
tion, acceptance of admission, and application for
admission. A non-refundable advance deposit of $100
must accompany the application. The deposit will be
credited to the fall semester room and board charges.
Normally freshman room assignments are made in
early August by the Office of the Dean of Residence.
Freshmen who wish to room together must make
special request with their applications, and letters
from parents or guardians of each student should be
submitted in support of the request. Any questions
concerning residence halls should be directed to the
Office of the Dean of Residence.
Students desiring to continue in the residence halls
as upperclassmen are permitted to file application-
contracts in early spring. Based on priorities and avail-
ability, contracts are accepted April 1 for the follow-
ing academic year. A S100 advance deposit is re-
quired.
Each student in the residence halls is provided
with a bed, mattress, chest of drawers, and chairs.
Residents supply such personal items as pillows,
wastepaper baskets, quilts, ash trays, and radios. Most
residents must supply their own desk lamp. Students
may supply their own bed linen and towels and make
their own arrangements to have these laundered, or
they may subscribe to a linen service which provides
clean bed linen and towels each week. The present
charge for this service is approximately $35 for the
ioI year.
Personal laundry is handled by the student on an
individual basis. A laundry service is made available in
the residence halls by a local firm at approximately
S80 per war . ( )i her students use coin-operated wash-
ers.
Residents will be held responsible for any damage
done to their rooms or any other part of the resi
dence halls and their equipment.
The University is not responsible for the loss or
destruction of any student property whether such
losses occur in the residence halls, lockers, class-
rooms, etc. The safekeeping of student property is
the responsibility of each individual student and no
reimbursement from the University can be expected
tor the loss of such property. Insurance protection, if
desired, may be obtained by a student or his parents
from an insurance broker or agent.
Information on off-campus housing may be secur-
ed from the Office of the Dean of Residence.
Social Fraternities
Approximately one-third of the male students live in
fraternity houses. Such accommodations are available
only to upperclassmen who receive invitations to join
the groups.
Of the thirty-one social fraternities with chapters
at Lehigh, twenty -seven occupy houses on the cam-
pus. The remaining houses are in Bethlehem adjacent
to the campus. Freshmen are "rushed" during the
first semester of the freshman year, but they do not
move into fraternity houses until the sophomore
year. Many commodities and services needed by the
fraternities are provided by the co-operative Fraterni-
ty Management Association. Students who accept
invitations to live in fraternities are required to for-
malize their acceptance in a written contract with the
fraternity. These contracts are based on budgets pre-
pared with the Fraternity Management Association
and approved by the fraternity chapters and alumni
corporations. These contracts are binding in the fra-
ternity segment of the University's residential system.
Accordingly, upon registration for the academic
period covered by contract, fraternity members are
obligated to pay approved fraternity bills through the
University.
Living costs in fraternities vary with the individual
chapters but are generally of the same order of ex-
12 Tuition and Fees: Undergraduate Expenses
pense as residence (room and board) in University-
operated halls.
Dining Services
Each student who lives in the residence halls is pro-
vided with board in the University dining services.
The following three board plans are available:
Plan A. Twenty-one meals per week at $340 per
semester. This includes three meals daily beginning
with the evening meal before the first day of classes
and continuing except for announced holidays
through the noon meal of the last day of the examin-
ation period each semester.
Plan B. Seventeen meals per week at $307.50 per
semester. This includes Monday breakfast through
and including Saturday lunch beginning with the
evening meal before the first day of classes and con-
tinuing, except for holidays, through the last day of
classes for each semester. Meals during the examina-
tion periods, ending with the noon meal of the last
day of examinations are also included.
Plan C. Fifteen meals per week at $295 per semester.
This includes Monday breakfast through Friday din-
ner beginning with the evening meal before the first
day of classes and continuing, except for announced
holidays, through the last day of classes each semes-
ter. Meals during the examination periods, ending
with the noon meal of the last day of examinations,
are also included.
Plan A is required for freshmen residing on the
campus. Upperclassmen residing on the campus have
the choice of any of the three plans.
The board plans and the student dining rooms are
open primarily to students of the residence halls.
These plans may be extended to non-residence hall
students on a limited basis. In addition, a five meal
per week plan is available (the noon meal, Monday
through Friday) at a cost of $87.50 per semester.
Students who do not live in the residence halls may
apply to the Bursar for participation in one of the
dining plans. A Snack Bar is operated in the Universi-
ty Center and is open to all students of the Universi-
ty-
Freshmen residing on the campus are required to
eat their meals in the University dining facilities dur-
ing Freshman Orientation. There will be an additional
charge for serving the three meals per day during
Freshman Orientation.
Each student who participates in one of the board
plans will receive a dining service identification card
which is not transferable. Use of the card by someone
other than to whom it is issued is illegal and will re-
sult in disciplinary action. New cards will be issued to
replace lost cards upon the payment of a fee of $5.
Visitors on campus may eat in the Asa Packer
Room, the faculty and guest dining room, in the Uni-
versity Center.
Special Fees
Military and Band Deposits. A deposit of $25 is made
by each student enrolling in military or air science or
in band. This deposit is refunded when the property
issued to the student is returned.
Chemistry Breakage. Students taking chemistry labora-
tory courses are required to reimburse the University
for returnable equipment broken or otherwise
damaged and for all chemicals used in excess of
reasonable amounts.
Examination Fees. Students who for satisfactory
reasons absent themselves from final examinations
will be allowed, upon petition, to take make-up
examinations without payment of an examination
fee. A fee of $5 is charged for any examination subse-
quent to the first regular final or make-up examina-
tion allowed upon petition in any course. This regula-
tion applies to the psychological and placement ex-
aminations required of new students if taken at some
time other than those scheduled.
Late Registration Fees. The penalty for procuring a
registration ticket after the time specified by the
Registrar shall be $10. A student who does not com-
plete his registration within three days after the date
of his registration ticket is subject to a penalty of
$10. No registration will be accepted later than the
tenth day of instruction in a regular semester or the
fifth day of instruction in any summer term.
Late Pre-Registration Fee. The penalty for a late pre-
registration or a change in pre-registration is $10. This
will be waived for cause upon the recommendation of
the college dean.
Change-of -Roster Fee. Having once registered in any
semester, a student may not drop any course except
on the recommendation of the director of his curricu-
lum. There will be a $10 change -of-roster fee for each
change unless it is waived by the college dean.
Late Installment Payment. In certain cases, students
Tuition and Fees: Undergraduate Expenses 13
arc permitted to pay scmestei bills in three paymeni
In othei cases, emergency short term loans are grant-
ed to be repaid in period installments within the
semestei in which the loan is granted. A penalty fee
o( SIO is levied on any student who fails to make
payment in accordance with the agreed schedule.
Late Payment oj Fees. University fees are payable
prior to registration. It payment, or provision tor
p.ivment s.itist.utoi v to the University, i.s not made
prior to registration, a fee 'it SIO will be assessed it
sueli payments, or provisions for payments, are made
atter the registration date.
Late Ipplication foi Degree Fee. A fee ot SIO is
charged for late filing. See Notice ot Candidacy for
Degree tor dates.
Application for Admission Fee. A fee of $15 is re-
quired with each application tor admission to the
undergraduate colleges ot the University.
Listener 's Fee. Undergraduate students enrolled in
less than a full program who wish to attend a course
or courses without obtaining credit will be charged a
listener's fee of SI 19 for each such course attended.
Transcripts. Each student is entitled to one copy of
liis record free of charge. This can be an official or
unofficial transcript. Unofficial copies are released to
the student; official copies are sent directly to the
educational institution, company, state board, etc., as
the circumstances may require. After the first copy is
released a tee of SI is assessed for each subsequent
copy.
Refunds
Tuition. In the event of the death of a student or his
involuntary induction into the armed forces, tuition
will be refunded in proportion to the fraction of the
semester remaining at the time of his death or induc-
tion.
It a student withdraws from the University, he is
entitled to receive a refund of his tuition less SI 00
and less a deduction of 2 percent of the tuition for
each day of instruction completed, computed from
the first day of instruction in the semester. No stu-
dent who is suspended or expelled from the Universi-
ty shall be entitled to any refund.
A summer session student who formally withdraws
from the University is entitled to receive a refund of
his total tuition less $5 for each credit hour for which
he is registered and less a deduction for each day of
rcgulai instruction ol I perceni "I the total tuition
paid computed from the first day ol instruction in
.|i HI.
Refunds will be made through the tenth day of
instruction in a regular semestei to undergraduate
students for reductions of schedules below twelve
. redil hours lull time). The refund shall be in .in
amount equal to the number ot credit hours remain-
ing multiplied by the credit hour rate deducted from
the semester tuition paid. Refunds will be made
through the tilth day of instruction in the summer
session for reductions of schedules in an amount
equal to the credit hours dropped multiplied by the
credit hour rate. No refunds will be made to any un-
dergraduate student for any reduction in his schedule
atter the tenth day of instruction in a regular semes-
ter or the fifth day of instruction in a summer
session.
Residence Hall Rental and Dining Service Charge.
Residence hall rooms are rented on an annual lease
basis only. A student who signs a Room and Board
Application-Contract is expected to occupy a room in
the residence halls for the full college year.
An advance deposit on residence hall rental and
dining service charges of S100 will be required with
the signing of the contract. The deposit will be credit-
ed to the fall semester room and board charges.
A full refund of all residence hall rental and dining
service charges paid, including advance deposits, will
be made in the event a student does not register be-
cause of illness, injury, death, induction into the arm-
ed forces, or if the student is dropped from the Uni-
versity for academic reasons. In such cases the Univer-
sity must be notified within 10 days to be eligible for
refund. Should the student be readmitted to the Uni-
versity for the following fall or spring semester and
there are accommodations available in the residence
halls system at the time of readmission, the student is
bound by the contract to accept residence halls ac-
commodations. Except for the reasons stated above,
no refund will be granted to incoming freshmen stu-
dents.
No student who is suspended or expelled from the
University for disciplinary reasons shall be entitled to
any refund of deposit or residence hall room and
dining service charges.
Currently enrolled students who sign Room and
Board Application-Contracts in the spring for resi-
14 Tuition and Fees: Undergraduate Expenses
dence as upperclassmen in the following year are en-
titled to a partial refund of advance deposit if the
following requirements are satisfied:
A. In the event of voluntary withdrawal from the
University.
B. In the event of desired voluntary withdrawal
from the residence halls if the lease can be transferred
to another student for whom no other accommoda-
tions exist. If the lease cannot be transferred to
another student, for whom there are no other accom-
modations, there will be no refund of deposit and the
student will be held liable for the full amount of the
residence halls and dining service charges contracted.
C. Partial refund schedule;
Notification received by Amount of
the University on or before Refund
May 1 $60
July 1 $40
August 15 $20
After August 15 no refund
A refund of residence halls rentals and dining ser-
vice charges will be made on a proportionate basis
after registration in the event of a student's involun-
tary withdrawal from the University due to illness, in-
jury, death, or induction into the armed forces. In
the event of voluntary withdrawal from the Universi-
ty no refund will be made except in the case of a
transfer of lease to another student for whom no
other accommodations exist. In the event of a trans-
fer of lease to another student under these conditions
a proportionate refund of residence hall rental and
dining service charges less $50 will be made. The max-
imum proportionate refund cannot exceed the total
of residence hall rental and dining service charges less
$100.
No residence hall or dining service refund will be
considered until (and date for calculation of propor-
tionate refund will be determined by) such date that
room is vacated and door key(s) and dining service
meal ticket are returned to the Residence Halls
Office.
A student who forfeits a room and dining service
reservation in the fall semester and who returns to the
University in the spring semester is still obligated for
room rental and dining service charges for the the
spring semester providing such facilities are available.
A refund shall be certified to the Bursar by the
Dean of Residence.
Payment. All refunds, including overpayments of
charges resulting from scholarship awards, loans,
financing arrangements with banks, etc., will be made
by check payable to the student. A minimum of ten
days is normally required to process refund checks.
Tuition and Fees: Undergraduate Expenses 15
Undergraduate Scholarships
and Loans
Lehigh University extends grant and self-help oppor-
tunities to deserving and promising students who
would not otherwise be able to attend the University.
to the extent that tunds are available tor such assis-
tance. Approximately twenty-six per cent of the pre-
sent undergraduate enrollment was granted University
assistance. In addition, outside grants and loans were
awarded to Lehigh students from programs sponsored
by the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Army and
Air Force ROTC. and many private and state sponsor-
ed organizations.
Application Procedures
To be equitable in the awarding of financial assis-
tance, "need" must first be clearly evidenced. Fami-
lies are required to file the Parents' Confidential
Statement with the College Scholarship Service. Once
need has been established, the Committee on Under-
graduate Financial Aid endeavors to aid as many
well-qualified applicants as funds will allow. An in-
creasing number of students have been aided since the
advent of the "package" concept of awards, whereby
a student receives a combination of grant assistance
and self-help (loan and campus employment). Self-
help allows the student a greater degree of personal
involvement in the financing of his own education.
In the competition for financial aid funds, empha-
sis is placed upon exceptional academic achievement
and promise, commendable participation in activities
outside the classroom, and good citizenship. Awards
are made on a yearly basis. For an award to be renew-
ed, an updated Parents' Confidential Statement is
required to establish continued evidence of need and
the level of assistance indicated. Continuation of an
award assumes that the recipient will continue to
show scholastic excellence and leadership activity
commensurate with the promise shown when the
award was originally made.
Eligibility
A special scholarship application is not required by
Lehigh. Requests should not be made for a particular
type "I s( holarship. The submission oi a College
Scholarship Service I orm I" fori [anuary 15 estab-
lishes the candid. ile as an applii .ml for all types "I
financial aid foi which he is eligible, as outlined be-
low.
The Committee i in I inancial Aid makes first selec-
tions in March and notifies all candidates as prompt \)
as possible.
All uppet classmen applying tor financial aid con-
sideration may acquire their applications from the
Office of Financial Aid beginning two weeks prior to
the Christmas vacation. The Committee on Financial
Aid reviews uppcrclassman applications within three
weeks of receiving grades for the spring semester, and
notifies applicants as promptly as possible.
Transfer applicants for aid consideration are re-
viewed with the uppcrclassmen, provided that the
admission and financial aid dossier is complete.
Programs Available
Trustee Scholarships. These are awards covering the
tuition charges in whole or part, provided by alloca-
tion of the Board of Trustees from general funds in
order to supplement endowed scholarships.
Endowed and Supported Scholarships. These are pro-
vided by individuals and by corporations either
through endowments or by annual contributions, and
are granted to able and deserving students who other-
wise would not be able to attend college.
Leadership Awards. While still requiring evidences of
genuine financial need, good scholarship, and good
citizenship, these awards place more emphasis on
leadership attainments in non-academic activities.
These include Alumni Student Grants provided for
good students with both aptitude and achievement in
athletics. Leadership awards are restricted in terms of
the particular qualifications and interests of the appli-
cants as indicated in each instance.
Lehigh University Merit Scholarships. These are grant-
ed in cooperation with the National Merit Scholarship
Corporation. The corporation and Lehigh annually
award up to twenty four-year Merit Scholarships
financed through the Annual Giving Program of Le-
high alumni. The National Merit Scholarship Corpora-
tion conducts the competition for these scholarships
as well as all others under its supervision. Final selec-
tion of Lehigh University Merit Scholars is limited to
Merit Finalists who wish to attend Lehigh University
16 Undergraduate Scholarships and Loans: Application Procedures
and are qualified to do so. The individual stipend is
based on the candidate's need as estimated by the
University and is adjusted annually according to the
financial status of his parents and his own ability to
earn funds during vacation periods. Stipends range
from S100 to $1,500 per year.
Tuition Loans. Such loans are made on the basis of
merit and need, at the discretion of the Committee
on Undergraduate Financial Aid to the extent that
funds are available. No loan can be made to a student
on scholastic or disciplinary probation. The maxi-
mum indebtedness to the University that any student
may normally incur will generally not exceed one-half
of his total tuition obligations up to and including the
semester for which he is seeking tuition aid.
Each student qualifying for a tuition loan is asked
to sign a note, endorsed by his parents or guardian.
Repayment schedule satisfactory to the University
may be arranged through the Office of Financial Aid.
Tuition loans will bear interest at the rate of 4% from
the date of the note, with provision that the rates
shall be increased to 6% in the case of any note which
falls into default.
Short-Term Loans. These are emergency loans and
must be repaid, according to an acknowledged sched-
ule, before the end of classes of the semester for
which they are granted. Short-term loans bear interest
at the rate of four percent per year from the date of
the note. A minimum interest charge of fifty cents is
made for each short-term loan granted.
The maximum amount for which a short-term loan
may be granted, whether for tuition or for other pur-
poses, is sixty percent of the student's total bill to the
University for that semester.
Every student incurring indebtedness to the Uni-
versity is required to undertake to pay his debt in full
as rapidly as possible. Prompt repayment of loans
insures the availability of a continuing fund to help
other students.
Programs Sponsored by Office of Education. These
consist of the Supplementary Educational Opportuni-
ty Grant (SEOC) program, the College Work-Study
Program (CW-SP), and the National Direct Student
Loan (NDSL) program. All recipients are selected by
the University.
SEOG is for students of exceptional financial need
who without this grant would be unable to continue
their education. Grants up to $1000 a year are avail-
able tor 4 years of undergraduate study, and are
matched with at least an equal amount of University
assistance.
CW-SP assists students by providing job opportuni-
ties either with the college itself or with private or
public non-profit agencies working in cooperation
with Lehigh. Students may work an average of 15
hours weekly, with pay determined by the University.
NDSL makes it possible for the University to make
loan awards up to $1000 to needy students. The
financial aid officer is responsible for determining
eligibility. Repayment begins 9 months after gradua-
tion or termination of at least half-time study and
may extend over a 10-year period. Interest charges of
3 percent also begin at the start of the repayment
period. No repayment is required and no interest is
charged for any period up to 3 years of service in the
armed forces, Peace Corps, or VISTA. Graduate stu-
dents are eligible to borrow up to $2500 per year,
with deferment of previous loan repayment.
State Programs. These are important sources of both
grant and loan assistance. Students residing in the
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania may be eligible for a
PHEAA grant-in-aid up to $1,200 per year. Current
high school juniors and seniors should obtain infor-
mation from their guidance office. College students
check with the Office of Financial Aid. Lehigh stu-
dents have also received grant assistance from New
Jersey, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, and Connecti-
cut.
Guaranty loan programs exist in most states, al-
lowing students to borrow up to $1,500 annually
with low interest and deferred repayment. Applica-
tions may be obtained at participating lending institu-
tions.
Presidential Prizes. The Presidential Prizes are award-
ed to entering freshmen based on merit and without
regard to financial need. (See statement on page 54 of
the Special Academic Opportunities section of this
catalog.)
Undergraduate Scholarships and Loans: Programs Available 1 7
Student Personnel Services
Counseling and Assistance
General counseling ol individual students, especially
in the freshman year, begins with the residence hall
counselors. These counselors are carefully selected
upperclassmen, appointed by the president ot the
University, who help the freshman and who direct
him to more highly specialized aid when needed. The
entire program is conducted under the supervision of
the dean of residence.
Freshmen whose problems transcend the compe-
tence ol the residence halls counselors come to other
advisors for guidance in many areas of student life
and welfare. Problems of vocational choice and aca-
demic adjustment are not uncommon, particularly
during the freshman and sophomore years. At all
levels, academic and procedural questions, personal
problems, social adjustment difficulties, and many
other troubles are dealt with daily. The office of the
dean of students serves as a central agency in helping
students to meet their problems and concerns, both
through its staff and through referral to other student
personnel and academic offices.
Each student in the College of Arts and Science is
considered from the beginning of his course as an
individual and his choice of studies is carefully organ-
ized in terms of his specific backgrounds of prepara-
tion and his future objectives. Individual counseling
continues throughout the student's four years in the
college. In the College of Business and Economics
faculty advisors work with the individual student and
his individual problems for the same purposes. Simi-
larly, the associate dean of the College of Engineering
curriculum spends much time with the freshman engi-
neering students in an effort to help in the adjust-
ment of academic difficulties and in better definition
of vocational objectives. These forms of advisement
are carried on through the following years with the
student's academic advisors.
A student's problems often reveal the need of
more highly specialized attention, whereupon the
student is referred to the particular service which he
should consult. Problems of mental or physical well-
being are, ol course, referred to the Universil v I [eall h
Service which is described in another section. The
University Chaplain is available for the student with
religious, moral, or personal concerns that are inter-
fering with his peace of mind and his studies.
II .1 student is uncertain about his vocational plans
or he needs to know more about his own capacities,
interests or personal characteristics, the University
Counseling Service is available without charge. Confi-
dential interviews may be secured by any student
who wishes to review his own progress and further
evaluate and refine his thinking about his future
goals. Services offered include personal counseling for
those students who may need and desire it.
Later, in his senior year, the question of prime
importance is the decision of a position after gradua-
tion. The Director of Placement, in personal and
group conferences, advises on applying for a position,
on being interviewed, and on the relative advantages
and disadvantages in working for the different busi-
ness and industrial firms seeking the services of col-
lege graduates.
Financial problems can become a serious hazard
for a student. The Director of Financial Aid is availa-
ble for consultation on these problems and many
other related concerns.
If the student is a veteran of military service and
has questions involving relations with the Veterans
Administration, he will find the Registrar informed in
this field. The Registrar also is an advisor on the draft
and military service, on matters of transferred credits,
graduation requirements, and allied topics.
A serious hazard to success in a student's academic
life may be in poor study habits or reading skills. The
Reading and Study Clinic can provide help.
Not all student problems are individual problems.
Many are group problems, having to do with group
living in the residence halls, with student activities,
student organizations of many kinds, fraternity life,
and campus social life in general. The deans and their
aides give much of their time to this area of student
life.
Many members of the teaching faculty are deeply
interested in students and student life and spend a
great deal of time working with student groups. They
contribute their services as academic advisors, activity
sponsors, group sponsors and advisors, by entertain-
ing in their homes, and in friendly personal relation-
18 Student Personnel Services: Counseling and Assistance
ships with students. Their contributions are invalu-
able and appreciated all the more because they are
largely voluntary.
In these and in other ways Lehigh University en-
deavors to maintain the close contacts with students
which characterize the smaller institution. Services
are available for all student needs, and the student
need only turn to his nearest residence hall counselor,
professor, or closest campus friend to learn where he
can receive the help he needs.
Students' Health Service
A dispensary is maintained which is equipped and
staffed for routine medical and minor surgical care.
Routine care provided by the regular Health Service
physicians, nurses, etc., is provided at no cost to stu-
dents. Dispensary hours are regular University office
hours during the week, and one-half day on Saturdays
and Sundays.
A night medical attendant is on duty through the
fall and spring semesters. Facilities are available dur-
ing these hours for the treatment of minor injuries
and illnesses. A physician is on call at all times during
the fall and spring semesters.
Patients requiring more than a few days bed care
are sent home or to local hospital when indicated.
Any expenses so incurred must be paid by the stu-
dent.
Due to limited staff and multiplicity of dispensary
duties, Health Service physicians are not able to make
professional calls on students in living groups or in
rooms, except in cases of absolute emergency. If un-
able to visit the dispensary in the event of illness or
injury, students are advised to call local physicians for
treatment. Such physicians' fees will be paid by the
student, his family, or his Health Insurance Plan.
The Health Service wishes to work closely with the
student's family physician and, as far as possible, will
continue any treatment or follow-up requested by
him.
Physical Examinations. Prior to arrival on campus
each new undergraduate student is required to submit
a Health History Form and Record of Physical Exam-
ination completed and signed by his own physician. It
is essential that all parts of this form be completely
answered by the student and the examining physician
to be eligible for registration. At the appropriate time
these forms are mailed to new students with specified
date for completion and return to the Director of the
Health Service.
The physicians of the Health Service carefully
analyze the results of all physical examinations in
order to detect any latent or obvious physical, emo-
tional, or mental abnormality. When found, a person
involved may be invited for a conference and the
disability discussed with the student confidentially.
Close cooperation between the Department of
Physical Education and the Health Service permits
the establishment of rehabilitation measures, etc., as
indicated.
Immunization. All new and transfer students are re-
quired to show evidence of immunization to, or
booster dose of tetanus toxoid and oral polio vaccine
within the last six years.
Laboratory. Facilities are available for routine labora-
tory procedures. Additional procedures are perform-
ed at a local hospital at the expense of the student.
X-ray Services. The X-ray equipment of the Health
Service includes a diagnostic unit. Work is limited to
chest X-rays and extremity X-rays. No pictures are
taken of organs which require contrast media such as
dyes, barium, etc.
A small charge is made to cover the cost of reading
the films by a local radiologist.
Physiotherapy. A well-equipped physiotherapy sec-
tion is a valuable adjunct to the University Health
Service. A well-trained technician administers treat-
ment under the supervision of the University physi-
cians with such equipment as diathermy, whirlpool,
ultra-violet and infra-red lamps.
Personnel. Full-time Health Service personnel normal-
ly include three physicians, a physiotherapist, a labor-
atory and X-ray technician, two registered nurses,
two night medical attendants, a secretary, an admini-
strative assistant, and a receptionist.
Accident and Sickness Reimbursement Insurance.
The University offers students insurance coverage
against accident and sickness at nominal cost, and on
an entirely voluntary basis.
The Health Service highly recommends this in-
surance plan to both present and prospective stu-
dents. Past experience has emphasized the importance
of such protection. All students are urged to partici-
pate in this plan throughout their college careers. The
policy covers such items as prescription drugs, out-
patient X-rays which are not performed by the Health
Service, and consultations which are not covered by
Student Personnel Services: Students' Health Service 19
the usual hospitalization policies.
All foreign students and others who, in the opinion
of the administrative officers of the University,
may not be in .1 position to meet the costs of accident
or sickness .ire usually required to carry this insur-
ance.
Counseling Service
The University is actively interested in the progress of
its students as they pursue their educational and per-
sonal goals and wishes to provide assistance should
difficulties arise during their college years. This office
offers the opportunity for consultation with clinical
psychologists and other counselors in regard to a wide
variety of problems ranging in severity from those
concerns that arise during the course of normal devel-
opment to more debiliting emotional disturbances.
In cases where pertinent and objective information
about academic ability, vocational interest or social-
personal adjustment is desirable, psychological tests
are often administered. Such test batteries are avail-
able at every student's individual option. Interpreta-
tion of these tests are intended to help the student
achieve his maximum effectiveness in his course work
and studying, his professional development and his
campus life. The test scores are utilized as only one of
a number of sources of information important to wise
and effective planning. A library of educational and
occupational information is maintained by the Coun-
seling Service, to which students can refer as they
attempt to develop a clear conception of the educa-
tional and vocational world and their place in it.
Additionally, cross communication with other Uni-
versity personnel agencies is maintained in gathering
together information and expediting plans made
cooperatively with the student.
When a student is generally uncertain, confused
and unable to plan for the future with confidence, or
experiencing frustration with his studies and choice
of major, or very unhappy about his social success
and his ability with people, he may undertake per-
sonal counseling aimed at helping him understand his
direction and motivation. Psychotherapeutic counsel-
ing, in particular, encourages the student to explore
the sources of his feelings, to consider their influence
on his behavior and to discover new ways to manage
his own affairs more effectively. In these instances
personal psychotherapeutic interviews would be in-
tensive and likely to involve conferences over an ex-
tended period of time,
Both testing and counseling services are available,
without cost, to all University students and all inter-
views are held in confidence.
Although student counseling is the major profes-
sional activity of this office, the Counseling Service is
also the administrative center of a variety of local and
national testing programs in which students might
wish to participate during their college career. The
most frequently administered of these programs are
the Graduate Record Examination, Law School Ad-
mission Test, the Admission Test for Graduate Study
in Business, National Teacher Examination and Miller
Analogies Test.
The Service also engages in research on tests, coun-
seling and other personnel functions. The results of
such research are ultimately useful in the counseling
of individual students.
Placement Services
The University provides a centralized placement ser-
vice to alumni, graduate students and seniors. It also
serves underclassmen seeking summer employment.
In addition to arranging interviews with prospec-
tive employers, the Placement Office has a staff of
qualified counselors who are prepared to provide
career information and counseling. Lehigh students
and alumni are encouraged to avail themselves of this
counseling service in planning and establishing suit-
able career goals.
Alumni are asked to register with the Placement
Office if they wish assistance in changing positions or
seeking new employment.
Annually several hundred industries, business firms
and government agencies send representatives to the
campus to interview candidates. In addition to those
who visit the campus, there are many employers who
seek candidates by direct referral.
A well-developed library of employment literature
is maintained for the use of candidates.
The Educational Placement Office in the School of
Education handles placement of teachers and other
educational personnel.
Reading and Study Clinic
There are many factors which influence the perfor-
20 Student Personnel Services: Counseling Service
mance of college students. An important one is the
expertness with which they master the skills neces-
sary for college work. High level skills are needed in
preparing assignments, note-taking, outlining, listen-
ing, recalling information and facts, taking examina-
tions, preparing written and oral reports, and reading
critically and accurately. The Reading and Study
Clinic, School of Education, offers Lehigh students
an opportunity to develop satisfactory reading and
study habits. The following services are available to
all students: analysis of reading and study skills, read-
ing and study improvement programs, and individual
guidance on problems of academic adjustment.
First-year students, particularly, are encouraged to
arrange for a conference so that they can be assisted
in making an evaluation of their learning tools and in
planning for more effective work.
The improvement programs are offered periodical-
ly during the fall and spring semesters. Small group
instruction is scheduled for interested students. The
instruction is adapted to the needs of the individual
in well-equipped facilities.
Student Activities and Events
Extra-curricular activities provide special opportunity
for students to develop leadership, to participate in
interest groups and programs of their own choosing,
and to learn cooperation and group activity. At
Lehigh University the philosophy of extra-curricular
activities is to allow the students as much opportuni-
ty as possible for setting their own policies, devising
their own programs, and assuming full responsibility
for their organizations. This philosophy makes it pos-
sible for the activities to be extremely significant in
the personal development of the participating stu-
dents.
relevancy courses, and the academic calendar; social
life and regulations, extracurricular activities, and
athletics; and areas of academic environment such as
pass-fail grading, admission, registration, residence
and dining hall facilities, the library, bookstore, and
computer. The Forum also has the authority to
review with recommendations to the board of
trustees or other appropriate bodies, programs in
long-range planning, such as academic development,
staff requirements, physical facilities, and the overall
budget of the University; community relations pro-
grams; administrative appointments at the rank of
dean and above; and matters pertaining to curricu-
lum, research, and academic discipline.
While the board of trustees as the ultimate legal
authority of the University retains the authority over
all transactions of the University Forum, the strength
of the Forum lies in the establishment of a representa-
tive legislative body composed of equal numbers of
students and faculty, so that everyone can feel there
is a place where a valid project may be carefully con-
sidered. All meetings of the Forum are open to the
community, with the right to address the Forum pro-
vided to any requesting it.
National Honorary and Recognition Societies
Honorary scholarship societies at Lehigh include Phi
Beta Kappa (the oldest national honorary society),
Tau Beta Pi (national honorary engineering society
organized at Lehigh in 1885), Sigma Xi (pure and
applied science), Beta Gamma Sigma (business ad-
ministration), Phi Eta Sigma (freshman honorary),
and fifteen other national honorary and recognition
societies. These recognize service or achievement in
different fields of study, in leadership, in perfor-
mance in R.O.T.C., etc.
The University Forum
The question of student representation in University
policy-making has been a major one in this decade.
To give students a voice in all Lehigh affairs a Univer-
sity Forum, composed of 60 students, 60 faculty, and
five members of the administration, was established
in 1970 as the primary campus legislative body.
The University Forum has legislative responsibility
in setting policy on academic program and planning
in such areas as freshman seminars, high immediate
Volunteer Service
Varied opportunities for student expression of social
responsibility exist at Lehigh through programs spon-
sored by the Lehigh University Volunteers (LUV) and
the Office of the Coordinator of Volunteer Com-
munity Services. About 250 Lehigh students current-
ly participate in volunteer service efforts in the Le-
high Valley area in fifteen different programs. The
LUV is governed by a board composed of coordina-
tors of the various projects the Council sponsors.
Student Activities and Events 21
Most oi the volunteei work is done in cooperation
with community agencies or s, In » <l s, mie ,.i the
projects include tutorial and teaching aide programs
in public .uul private schools, recreation activities
through the YMCA and 4-H. Big Brothei . companion-
ship and group work with children and adults in resi-
dential mental health treatment facilities, aids to the
elderly through Fellowship in Service to Humanity
I ISII . legal aid research, income tax service at
neighborhood centers, blood assurance, and numerous
individual and short-term efforts.
The Foreign Opportunities Committee coordinates
programs involving the Peace Corps, VISTA, the
American Friends Service Committee, and Crossroads
Africa, a program through which North American
college students devote their summers to community
work projects in Africa supervised by Africans.
Student Interest Associations
At Lehigh, student organizations embrace a wide
range of activities. Course societies promote intellect-
ual interests in various fields of study and develop
professional spirit among the students. Interest and
hobby groups include art, bridge, chess, camera, lan-
guages, sailing, skiing, boxing, judo, and political
clubs, electronics and satellite tracking.
The musical groups (bands, instrumental ensem-
bles, and glee club) provide group training for quali-
fied students, present concerts and musical programs,
and combine their talents in several annual programs.
Lehigh's Marching Band, one of the best in the East,
is well known for its precision military drills at foot-
ball games. The band forms two concert bands for the
winter and spring seasons: The Concert and the
Varsity Bands. The bands perform a number of major
concerts during the year. In recent years the Concert
Band has performed at New York's Carnegie Hall and
Philadelphia's Town Hall, and the Glee Club has
toured Puerto Rico during spring vacation. In addi-
tion to giving joint concerts with the Lehigh Band,
the Glee Club also sings with the choirs of various
women's colleges. A significant part of the campus
musical scene is the ensemble and chamber recitals.
The musical programs are noteworthy for the perfor-
mances by non-majors.
The dramatic society of Lehigh, known as Mustard
and Cheese, presents several productions a year and a
series of special films. Of particular interest to many
students is the Ircqucnt showing ot foreign and
Ann-Mi .in .lit films.
The students ol Lehigh University publish a scmi-
w eekly newspaper, the Brown and White, and a year-
book, The Epitome. The students' modern radio
stations. WI.RN. 640 kc, and WLVR-FM, 91.3 MHZ,
both broadcast throughout the day.
A student-operated coffeehouse which scats about
fifty people is located in the undercroft of Packer
Memorial Church.
Religious Activities
The religious program is under the general supervision
of the University Chaplain, who also provides for
Protestant chapel services, broadly based and ecumen-
ical in form, varying from the traditional to the infor-
mal and innovative. Some services feature the Lehigh
University Glee Club while others utilize folk music.
Roman Catholic services are arranged by the Chaplain
to Catholic students.
The regular Protestant and Roman Catholic service
schedules are announced at the beginning of the year.
Attendance at all religious services is voluntary.
The Chaplain's Council, consisting of representa-
tives from the various religious groups of all faiths on
campus, sponsors a variety of programs together with
those organizations and separately under the Chap-
lain's Office. The Council has sponsored, for example,
a luncheon program and a film series, both with dis-
cussion, talks by religious leaders and faculty
members, and multi-media presentations. Council
programs are open to all members of the student
body.
The Newman Club carries on a program among
Catholic students under the guidance of a priest
assigned by the Diocese of Allentown to direct the
program. The Hillel Foundation program is available
to students of the Jewish faith, while various Protest-
ant churches in the community include fellowship
organizations for Lehigh students in their programs.
Athletics
Lehigh's intercollegiate program consists of varsity
teams in football, cross-country, soccer, wrestling,
basketball, hockey, rifle, swimming, tennis, track,
baseball, lacrosse and golf; Junior Varsity teams in
football, wrestling, basketball, swimming, and base-
ball: freshman teams in most of these sports. Sched-
22 Student Activities and Events
ules are arranged chiefly with eastern colleges which
have athletic policies similar to Lehigh's.
Normally Lehigh's athletic schedule includes four
or five home football games, six or seven home wrest-
ling meets, nine or ten home basketball games, nine
home baseball games, and four home swimming meets
as well as games or meets at other colleges in these
and other sports listed in the preceding section.
A comprehensive intramural sports program is
sponsored for the entire University, including teams
from the residence halls, fraternities, classes, town,
faculty, graduate students, and independent groups.
Twenty-four sports activities are included in the pro-
gram. Students are encouraged to participate in these
recreational sports, awards are given for group and
individual excellence. The fact that ninety teams par-
ticipated last year in the basketball leagues alone in-
dicates the extent of the intramural program.
Special Events
Students are encouraged to attend the many musical,
theatrical, and special events on the Lehigh calendar.
Programs of great variety and depth are arranged by
the Committee on Performing Arts, the Cleaver
Foundation, the Department of Music, the Student
Activities Council, and the music organizations of
Lehigh. Recent concert series have included the New-
port Folk Festival, the Turnau Opera Players, the
Bach Aria Group, the Aeolian Chamber Players, the
Cologne Chamber Orchestra, the Vienna Octet, and
the New York Pro Musica. In conjunction with
choruses of women's colleges the Glee Club has per-
formed choral masterpieces including the Stravinsky-
Cocteau opera-oratorio, "Oedipus Rex." The annual
Pops Concert, presented by the combined musical
organizations at the end of the spring semester, is one
of Lehigh's most popular events.
Among the outstanding speakers brought to the
Lehigh campus in recent years, in addition to scholars
in many academic disciplines, were Charles Goodell,
Dick Gregory, Wehrner Von Braun, Jane Fonda,
Howard Zinn, Charles V. Hamilton, Daniel Mahoney,
Joseph Heller, Isaac Asimov, and Tom Hayden. Many
of these speakers have appeared under the auspices of
the Forum for Visiting Lecturers.
A noteworthy feature of the special events calen-
dar for any year is the annual Jacob Blaustein Lec-
tures in International Relations which presents an
outstanding public figure speaking on crucial ques-
tions of international relations. Lecturers have in-
cluded Sir Denis Brogan, General Maxwell D. Taylor,
Belgium's Paul Henri Spaak, Israel's Abba Eban, W.
Averell Harriman, James Reston, and Harold Wilson.
The lecture series was established at Lehigh through
an endowment gift from the Jacob and Hilda
Blaustein Foundation of Baltimore. Mr. Blaustein,
Class of 1913, was a pioneer in the petroleum indus-
try and an international statesman of some note.
In 1971 the Berman Lectures in Economics began
with Paul Samuelson, the Nobel Prize winner.
Another recent addition to the program is the
Globus Series in the Avant-Garde Creative Arts. This
series, begun in 1969 through an endowment gift
from New York investment banker Morton Globus,
features theatrical productions, art and sculpture
exhibits, multi-media shows, and experimental films.
The department of fine arts arranges a series of
monthly exhibits, including works by contemporary
American artists and sculptors, as well as industrial,
photographic, and student art shows. The University's
permanent collection of art is displayed in several
buildings on the campus.
Student Activities and Events 23
General Information
V ademic Regulal ions
General College Division
Tlic General College Division, plans tor which wen
approved by the faculty on April 6. 1942, was organ-
ized to supplement the work ol the established under
graduate curricula by meeting the educational needs
of certain special groups of students. The division
aims to provide an opportunity for individuals, not
planning a four-year program, to pursue such work,
either of a general or a more specialized nature, as
their preparation and interests make desirable; a trial
period for those who wish to become candidates for
baccalaureate degrees but whose preparatory training
does not fully satisfy the entrance requirements for
the curricula of their choice; and facilities for quali-
fied adults to continue their education without being
committed to a restricted or specialized program.
Although all work available through the General
College Division will be found at present among the
regular offerings of the several departments, the work
taken by students enrolled in this division is not re-
garded as primarily preparation for admission to the
upper classes of the University; rather, the courses are
looked upon as complete in themselves.
Each student in the General College Division has
an individual program, one not subject to distribution
or curriculum requirements, yet one limited by the
student's ability to meet the prerequisites of the
courses which he desires to take. With but few excep-
tions, the student enrolled in this division enjoys the
same privileges as all other undergraduates in the Uni-
versity, including eligibility to unrestricted prizes,
access to student aid, and the right of petition; and he
is also subject to the same general regulations, those
pertaining to scholastic probation not excepted. The
General College Division student will not, however,
be a candidate for a degree, save in those instances
where transfer to one of the undergraduate programs
of study leading to degrees is approved by the Com-
mittee on Standing of Students.
Eligibility foi Degree
In order to be graduated, a candidate for a bacca-
laureate degree must achieve .1 minimum cumulative
average of 1 .70.
To be eligible for a degree from Lehigh University,
,1 student not only must have completed all of the
scholastic requirements for the degree, but also he
must have paid all University fees, and in addition all
bills for the rental of rooms in the residence halls, or
for damage to University property or equipment, or
for any other indebtedness for scholarship loans or
for loans from trust funds administered by the Uni-
versity which are protected by properly executed
notes approved by the Treasurer.
Final Date tor Completion of Requirements
For graduation all requirements, scholastic and finan-
cial, must have been satisfied prior to the graduation
exercises.
Notice of Candidacy for Degree
Candidates for graduation on University Day file with
the Registrar on or before March 15 a written notice
of candidacy for the degree; candidates tor gradua-
tion in January file a notice of candidacy on or be-
fore December 1 ; candidates for graduation on
Founder's Day file a notice cf candidacy on or before
September 10. Failure to file such notice by the dates
mentioned debars the candidate from receiving the
degree at the ensuing graduation exercises. If a peti-
tion for late filing is granted, a fee of $10 is assessed.
Graduating Theses
Undergraduate theses, when required, are accompani-
ed by drawings and diagrams, whenever the subjects
need such illustration. The originals are kept by the
University, as a part of the student's record, for
future reference; but copies may be retained by stu-
dents and may be published, provided permission has
first been obtained from the faculty.
Credit and Grades
A semester hour of college work consists of one hour
24 General Information: Academic Regulations
a week of lectures or classwork, or two or three hours
of laboratory work (or laboratory work combined
with classwork) a week for one semester. The normal
assumption is that the student will be expected to do
at least two hours of study in preparation for each
hour of classwork.
Latest Date for Registration. No registration is
accepted later than the tenth day of instruction in
any semester.
Grading System. Final grades in courses are A, B, C,
D, and F. A, B, C, and D are passing. The key to
grades is as follows: A— Excellent; B— Good; C— Con-
tinuation Competency, defined to mean that the stu-
dent has achieved a level of proficiency such that the
instructor believes that he is prepared to take any
subsequent course which has this course as a prerequi-
site; D— Unsatisfactory, but passing, defined to mean
that the student has achieved a level of proficiency
such that he can apply the course toward graduation,
but in the estimate of the teacher he has not acquired
adequate proficiency to perform satisfactorily in any
subsequent course which has this course as a prerequi-
site; F— Failure. Courses taken under the Pass-Fail
system are graded P (passing) or F (failure).
A student who withdraws from a course during the
first twelve weeks of instruction will receive a grade
of "W." A student who withdraws from a course after
the first twelve weeks of instruction will receive
"WF" unless the committee on standing of students,
for cause, allows a grade of "W" to be recorded.
A student officially withdrawn from the Univer-
sity after the twelfth week of instruction shall receive
from each instructor a "WP" or "WF."
The letters "Abs." (absent) are used to indicate
absence from a final examination in a course. The
grade of "Abs." is reported with a letter grade in
parentheses, such letter grade representing the depart-
ment's estimate of the student's work up to the close
of instruction with the provision that in cases where a
department does not feel justified in reporting an
estimated grade, a report of "Abs. (X)" will be
returned.
The letters "Inc." are used to indicate that the
work in a course is incomplete. In such cases, an ap-
propriate letter grade shall accompany the "Inc."
designation (e.g., "Inc.[B] ") if the instructor has suf-
ficient basis to report such a grade. Otherwise, the
grade shall be reported as "Inc.(X)." A student who
incurs an "incomplete" in any course and fails to
remove the "incomplete" within one calendar year,
loses all equity in the course.
Pass-Fail System. The pass-fail grading option is in-
tended to encourage student exploration of challeng-
ing courses that would normally be avoided for fear
of depressing grade-point averages. It is intended par-
ticularly for exploration outside the major field. Stu-
dents should avoid wasting this option on unsuitable
courses, such as certain basic introductory courses
having no college-level prerequisite or corequisite.
The restrictions on the use of the system are listed
below. Students who desire to take particular courses
pass-fail shall consult (at the time of preregistration)
with their curriculum directors or registration ad-
visors for guidance in this area. Each curriculum
director or registration advisor should consider the
intent of this system and the demands of the particu-
lar curriculum, then formulate suitable guidelines to
aid students in the intelligent use of this option. At
the same time, instructors should be prepared to ad-
vise particular students as to the suitability of their
particular courses for the pass-fail option.
The restrictions on the use of the system are:
1. Before a student can take a course pass-fail, he
must have achieved sophomore standing, have de-
clared a major, and he must be in good academic
standing.
2. A student may take no more than two courses
pass-fail in any one semester. He may take a maxi-
mum of six courses pass-fail per undergraduate career
if he is on a four-year program or a maximum of eight
courses per undergraduate career if he is on a five-
year, two-degree program.
No course may be taken pass-fail that satisfies any
part of the graduation requirements for his current
major.
4. A student must have his registration advisor's
approval to take a course pass-fail. A student must
designate the course(s) taken pass-fail by the tenth
day of instruction in a regular semester or the fifth
day of instruction in any summer term. Prior to this
deadline, the student may transfer from pass-fail grad-
ing to regular grading or vice versa without penalty.
After this deadline, the student cannot transfer from
regular grading to pass-fail grading or vice versa.
5. The instructor giving the course is not officially
notified which of his students is taking the course
Academic Regulations 25
pass fail. Therefore, he reports ■> regular lettei grade
foi the p.iss fail students. The registrar will then
,1 "P" foi reported lettei grades ol A. B, C, and
D and an "F" foi a reported letter grade ot F.
6. Under this system, the student surrenders Ins
equity to letter grades ol A. B, C or I ) it he passes the
course. A passing grade shall apply to the student's
graduation requirements but shall not be used in the
computation ol his cumulative average. An F grade
shall be computed in the normal manner.
Probation and Drop Regulations
The scholastic requirements tor each student are ex-
pressed in terms ot his cumulative scholastic average
(the weighted point average of all grades received in
residence). The cumulative scholastic average will be
computed at the end of each semester (and full sum-
mer session, i.e., one in which 12 or more semester
hours have been rostered). Grades are weighted as
follows: A. 4: B,3:C. 2; D, 1; F, WF, Abs.(F),
Inc.(F), 0. It a course in which a D or lower grade was
received is repeated, the grade received upon repeti-
tion of the course shall be counted in the cumulative
average, and the grade(s) and credit hours received
when the course was previously taken shall be drop-
ped from the cumulative average. W. WP, Abs. (X),
and Inc. (X) grades are not included in averages. WF
is counted as an F. When grades of "absent" or
"incomplete" include a letter designation, this letter
shall be used in determining the average.
Probation. A student will be placed on scholastic
probation when either:
(a) His cumulative scholastic average falls below
these levels:
Freshman, 1st Semester 1.30
Freshman, 2nd Semester 1.40
Sophomore, 1st Semester 1.50
Sophomore, 2nd Semester 1.60
Junior, 1st Semester, and thereafter 1.70
(b) He fails more than 7 semester hours in one
semester.
The designation "Freshman, 1st Semester," etc., is
the classification officially determined by the Regis-
trar irrespective of the number of semesters the stu-
dent has attended college.
Disabilities of Scholastic Probationers. A student who
is on scholastic probation is ineligible for (a) intercol-
legiate competition and all other activities publicly
representative "I the I Iniversity, (b i major of! ice
(elective or appointive) in any University organiza
lit mi. and (c) such other activity as may require mori
time than should be diverted from primar) purposes
by any student whose academic survival is at risk. All
students however, have the right to petition to the
Committee on Standing ot Students tor exception to
this rule.
Removal from Probation. A student who has been
placed on scholastic probation is restored to good
standing it at the end ot his next semester or full sum-
mer session all incompletes incurred during the pre-
vious semester have been removed and if he meets the
standards indicated.
Dropped for Poor Scholarship. A student who makes
a 2.20 average or better in his probationary semester
but fails to meet the standards set forth in paragraph
three above is continued on scholastic probation for
another semester. A student who makes less than a
2.20 average in his probationary semester and fails to
meet the standards in paragraph three above is drop-
ped for poor scholarship.
Honors
Honors are of four kinds: class honors, graduation
honors, departmental honors, and interdepartmental
honors. (For departmental and interdepartmental
honors, see Comprehensive Honors Program in the
Special Academic Opportunities section of this catalog.
Class Honors. Upon completion of the work of the
freshman and sophomore years, on recommendation
of the Registrar and by vote of the faculty, class
honors are awarded to those individuals who have
made an average of 3.00 or better during the preced-
ing year.
The names of these students are announced at the
Founder's Day exercises and published in the Found-
er's Day Program.
Graduation Honors. Degrees "with honors" are
awarded by vote of the University faculty to those
students who have attained an average of not less
than 3.25 in their junior and senior years' work at the
University.
Degrees "with high honors" are awarded by vote
of the University faculty to those students who have
an average of not less than 3.50 in their junior and
senior years' work at the University.
26 Academic Regulations
Degrees "with highest honors" are awarded by the
vote of the University faculty to those students who
have an average of not less than 3.75 in their junior
and senior years' work at the University.
Students who spend all or part of their junior or
senior years at another institution may qualify for
graduation honors under the following conditions:
1 . The student must have at least 90 hours of work
at Lehigh and an average during his last four semes-
ters in residence at Lehigh which qualified him for
graduation honors. This average determines the high-
est category of graduation honors that it is possible
for the student to attain.
2. The student's average at the other institution
when computed with the last four semesters at
Lehigh must be such as to still qualify the student for
graduation honors. This average may lower the overall
average of the student from one category of gradua-
tion honors to another one.
Graduation honors are announced on University
Day and published in the official commencement
program.
In all cases, it is required that each student have
not less than forty-eight hours of work graded A, B,
C, D, or F.
In computing the averages of candidates for gradu-
ation honors, semester grades are weighted according
to the number of credit hours in the course concern-
ed on the basis: A equals 4, B equals 3, C equals 2, D
equals 1, and F equals 0.
Review— Consultation— Study Period
The Review— Consultation — Study (R.C.S.) period is
intended to provide a few days for informal academic
work between the end of the formal instruction
period and the beginning of final examinations. It is
expected that students will use this period to consoli-
date their command of the material of their courses.
Faculty members will make themselves available to
their students at announced times during the R.C.S.
period, for example, at the hours when they meet
classes during the formal instruction period. No quiz
may be given during this period.
Social Regulations and Procedures
Lehigh University exists for the transmission of
knowledge, the pursuit of truth, the development of
students, and the general well-being of society . Free
inquiry and free expression are indispensable to the
attainment of these goals. All members of the
academic community are encouraged to develop the
capacity for critical judgment and to engage in a sus-
tained and independent search for truth.
Out of concern for individuality and respect for
the privacy of all persons, the University does not
seek to impose a common morality on its members.
However, institutional existence is a privilege granted
by public trust, subject to the sanctions and responsi-
bilities defined by the society of which Lehigh Uni-
versity is a part. Furthermore, society generally pro-
vides legal canons, ethical mores, and conduct expec-
tancies pertaining to individual and collective be-
havior. For these reasons the University has the
obligation to establish certain standards of conduct
appropriate and applicable to the University commu-
nity.
Lehigh University accepts its responsibility as an
institution within the broader social community. The
standards of behavior expected of its members are
those which the University regards as essential to its
educational objectives and the University as a com-
munity.
In accordance with these purposes and objectives,
disciplinary action will be taken when necessary to
protect the academic integrity of the University and
the welfare of its members. An emphasis on counsel-
ing and learning will accompany such action.
In general, University regulations are not concern-
ed with conduct on the campus, but all must recog-
nize that whether on campus or off-campus, they are
subject to the laws of the Commonwealth of Pennsyl-
vania and the United States. Their responsibilities as
citizens require that they conform to the laws of the
land, realizing that the University shall not provide a
sanctuary for individuals who violate their citizenship
obligations. At the same time, the University is con-
cerned with the students' rights as citizens with equal
protection under the law, and will endeavor to direct
them to legal counsel as may be necessary.
For educational purposes the University reserves
the right to review any action taken by civil authori-
Social Regulations and Procedures 21
tit-s regarding its members. Although ordinarily the
University will not impose further sanctions aftei law
enforcement agencies have disposed ol the case, it
does have the obligation to introduce counseling
and 01 disciplinary action il the individual's conduct
has interfered with the University's exercise of its
education.il objectives or responsibilities to its mem-
bers.
The University as a part of the community lias an
obligation to its members to report serious crimes to
the appropriate civil authorities.
The University relies primarily on general princi-
ples and statement of expectation for the guidance of
conduct, and it is assumed that those admitted to the
academic community ot Lehigh are capable of
governing themselves accordingly. Specific regulations
are kept to a reasonable minimum and arc intended
to avoid necessary limitations having no educational
relevance. Students are advised to consult the Student
Handbook for details governing applicable regula-
tions, disciplinary procedures, and due process codes.
Alcoholic Beverages. While in attendance at Lehigh,
students are subject to the laws of the Common-
wealth ot Pennsylvania. Their responsibilities as citi-
zens require that they conform to the laws of the
Commonwealth. In this respect, attention is called to
the Pennsylvania Liquor and Penal Codes which pro-
vides that any person less than 21 years of age who
attempts to purchase, purchases, consumes, possesses,
or transports any alcoholic beverages within Pennsyl-
vania is subject to fine or imprisonment or both. The
selling or furnishing of alcoholic beverages of any
kind to persons under 21 years of age by any agency
or person is prohibited. It is also illegal to misrepre-
sent one's age to obtain such beverages or to possess
or transport liquor not purchased according the Penn-
sylvania law.
In accordance with these regulations, the Universi-
ty has the following policy with respect to alcoholic
beverages:
(1) Alcoholic beverages are prohibited on all Uni-
versity grounds, in all non-residential buildings, in
Taylor Stadium and all playing fields.
(2) A student with a guest at the University is re-
sponsible for his conduct and for making Pennsyl-
vania law known to him.
Drugs. In recent years there has been considerable
publicity regarding the illegal traffic in drugs and
increased activity of enforcement agencies involving
college students. State and Federal laws prohibit .ill
use and distribution of illegal or dangerous drugs
without medical prescription. It is most necessary
that students familiarize themselves with these laws,
some "i which are very se> :re, ind recognize that the
University campus is not a sanctuary from the law. A
summary of relevant laws is made available to stu-
dents by the University.
The University is particularly concerned with drug
use which leads to behavior harmful to others and to
the drug user himself. The University undertakes,
through student and staff (e.g., Counseling and
Health Services), to provide objective information
about drugs and to offer assistance to students with
problems associated with drugs, in recognition of the
fact that in all cases of drug involvement the responsi-
bility clearly rests with the individual student. When a
student's involvement with drugs impairs his effec-
tiveness as a student, his student status may be dis-
continued until he can again function effectively in
the academic community.
No student can expect the University to serve as a
cover for an illegal drug market, whether consumers
be on campus or off. Where there is serious involve-
ment or a repeated problem in the trafficking of
drugs, decisive action will be taken.
Guests. Recent liberalization of visiting regulations
for guests is to be understood in terms of the Univer-
sity's essential character and some fundamental
educational principles. As a predominantly residential
institution, the right of each student to privacy is
naturally limited by the rights of his roommate. Thus,
the use of a room for social purposes would not be at
the expense of another's legitimate use of the room
for sleep or study.
Motor Vehicles. Students at Lehigh University are
permitted under certain circumstances to have motor
vehicles while attending the University provided that
the vehicles are properly registered with the Office of
the Dean of Students. This privilege will be revoked
whenever it appears that a student is guilty of reckless
or inconsiderate driving, or that he willfully disobeys
University regulations governing the use of or parking
of his vehicle. The term "motor vehicle" includes
automobiles, motorcycles, motor scooters, etc. New
students are not permitted to have or to operate
motor vehicles during their freshman year. Exception
may be made by the dean of students for commuting
freshmen, for freshmen living at home, or for medical
28 Social Regulations and Procedures
or other exceptional reasons upon petition from the
student. Also, financial aid students may not own or
operate motor vehicles while at the University unless
they accept a 1300 decrease in aid or make petition
to the Financial Aid Committee.
Dissent. The University faculty has a policy on
dissent which emphasizes the responsibility of all
members of the University community. The guide-
lines adopted broadly set forth acceptable forms of
dissent on campus.
Generally, the policy on dissent provides the fol-
lowing:
(1) Free inquiry and free expression, including the
right to open dissent, are indispensable in achieving
the goals of an academic community.
(2) Coercive activities employed by individuals or
groups either to repress legitimate dissent or to
demonstrate dissent are a threat to the openness of
the academic community and will be dealt with as an
extremely serious matter.
(3) Where physical coercion is employed or physi-
cal obstruction persists and the University is prevented
from resolving the matter through its established dis-
ciplinary procedures, legal sanctions will be employ-
ed.
This statement provides that orderly and peaceful
demonstrations on campus are not forbidden unless
they interfere with legitimate University function.
The authority for making the initial judgment in de-
termining the permissible limits of protest rests with
the president and counsel of an advisory committee
consisting of four faculty members and four students.
Conduct which exceeds permissible limits will be met
with University sanctions ranging in severity from
admonition to expulsion, or in cases of aggravated or
persistent violation of defined rights, with civil arrest
and prosecution under an appropriate charge. Primary
authority for discipline rests with the faculty and its
Committee on Discipline.
The Scene
The map on page 32 of this catalog shows the
buildings on the campus, including the fraternity
houses and residence halls. The following listing pro-
vides a brief description of those buildings most fre-
quented by students and faculty and an introduction
to the educational facilities.
The Alumni Memorial Building, the administrative
center of the University, was built as a memorial to
Lehigh men who served in World War I. The building
houses the offices of the president and his staff, the
treasurer and the business offices, the registrar, ad-
mission, development, public information, and
alumni association offices.
A varied display of paintings, drawings, prints or
sculpture by two or more nationally recognized
artists is presented in the Alumni Memorial Building
Galleries. These exhibitions are changed each month.
The Permanent Collection, comprising a group of
finely chosen works presented to or acquired by the
University are displayed in these galleries and are
shown in the offices and library areas about the cam-
pus. Several of the finest pieces are displayed on the
walls of the University Center and in the Allen
Corson DuBois Gallery of Maginnes Hall.
The James Ward Packard Laboratory, gift of the
founder of the. Packard Motor Car Company and
Lehigh graduate in 1884, houses the offices of the
dean of the College of Engineering, classrooms, and
laboratories of the departments of electrical, indus-
trial, and mechanical engineering and engineering
mechanics. The Computing Center with its Control
Data Corporation (CDC) 6400 computer, library, and
offices is also located in Packard Lab. A major feature
of the building is the 600-seat auditorium located on
the ground floor.
Christmas-Saucon Hall has historic interest
because Christmas Hall is the first building of Lehigh
University. The double building has offices and class-
rooms primarily used by the department of mathe-
matics, as well as office facilities for the University
placement and personnel services.
Fritz Engineering Laboratory is named for the late
The Scene 29
John Fritz, known .1-. the fathei ol the steel indu
in the United States and .1 member ol Lehigh's
original board ol trustees, who gave the l fniversity
I mill:, in I »ll>) I hi t he ei eel ion and complete equip-
ment ol an engineering laboratory. In 1955. .1 seven
Story addition to the original structure was opened. It
houses a universal hydraulic testing machine, capable
ol applying a 5.000,000-lb. load to tension or com-
pression members up to 40 feet in length. Equipment
tor applying loads to structures, the latest strain and
repeated deformation measuring instruments, and
impact ,md hardness testing machines are also avail-
able. The lab is used by the department of civil engi-
neering tor offices, various research projects, and for
laboratory work in conjunction with instruction in
the mechanics of materials, hydraulics, and properties
of cement and concrete.
Packer Memorial Church, a gift of the late Mrs.
Mary Packer Cummings. daughter of the founder of
the University, was built in 1887. Sunday services,
special religious programs, music recitals, and the
annual Bethlehem Bach Festival are held in the
chapel. A coffee house operated by students is
located in the basement.
Taylor Gymnasium and Field House were donated
by the late Charles L. Taylor, class of 1876. Follow-
ing World War II the gymnasium was remodeled, re-
equipped, and expanded as one of the major projects
of the Lehigh Progress Fund. The gymnasium in-
cludes a swimming pool, 75 by 42 feet, ranging in
depth from 5 to 10 feet; five basketball courts:
weight room: fencing room; and class and meeting
rooms. Adjacent to the gymnasium and field house is
Taylor Stadium, a nine-acre facility providing football
and baseball fields, with a seating capacity of 16,000.
The Physics Building is a five-story structure
devoted entirely to the teaching of and research in
physics. It contains laboratories for undergraduate
and graduate classes, research laboratories, reading
room, and shops. Extensive renovations were com-
pleted in 1960-61.
The William H. Chandler Chemistry Building is
named in recognition of Dr. Chandler's 35 years'
service as professor of chemistry, 1871-1906. The
east wing, built in 1939, is named the Harry M.
Ullmann Chemistry Laboratory in recognition of Dr.
Ullmann's service as department head. The three-
story fireproof building provides spaces for offices.
. 1. 1 -.si 001 ns, .nul student laboratories, in addition to
laboratory space and equipment for re search in-
stitutes.
Sinclair Laboratory, a gifi ol the late Mrs. fennie
H. Sinclair and named for her late husband, Francis
MacDonald Sinclair, houses the ('enter tor Surface
and Coatings Research !CSCR) and the National
Printing Ink Research Institute, a research facility
sponsored by several industrial tirms which was
formed at Lehigh in 1946. The laboratory also pro-
vides offices for the University Provost.
The University libraries include Lindcrman
Library, which incorporates the original library build-
ing, a gift of the founder and named in memory of his
daughter Lucy Packer Linderman, and a more
modern edifice built in 1929, and the Mart Science
and Engineering Library, opened in 1969.
Linderman Library houses 525,000 volumes in the
humanities and social sciences, the Rare Book Collec-
tion of 6,000 volumes, and the University Archives.
Collections are particularly strong in the classics,
English literature, and British colonial history. The
annual acquisition rate averages about 1 5,000
volumes. The library receives over 4,500 periodicals
and serials, including important newspapers, both
foreign and domestic, and has long been a repository
for a wide selection of U.S. government documents.
A special feature of Linderman Library is the music
listening room located on the ground floor. The
building also houses the offices for the library,
research, administrative systems, university publica-
tions, and physical planning staffs.
Mart Library houses 100,000 volumes in the fields
of engineering, mathematics, and natural and physical
science, and includes facilities for an all-night study
room. A special feature is the use of the library by
the Center for Information Science for information
retrieval experiments. The three-story structure is
named for two deceased alumni from Kansas: Leon
T. Mart, class of 1913, and his son, Thomas L. Mart,
class of 1951.
Whitaker Metallurgical and Chemical Engineering
Laboratory, a five -story laboratory with a two-story
classroom wing, opened in 1965. Among the more
than twenty separate areas for scientific and engi-
neering investigations are laboratories for high pres-
sure research and reaction kinetics, nuclear studies,
analog computation, process control, high tempera-
30 The Scene
ture thermodynamics and kinetics, analytical studies,
and fine structures and metallography. The classroom
wing includes an auditorium-lecture hall with a seat-
ing capacity of 225.
Maginnes Hall, a four-story structure opened in
1970, houses the office of the dean of the College of
Arts and Science, offices and classrooms for the de-
partments of English, history, government, inter-
national relations, classics and religion. It also pro-
vides offices for the curator and director of exhibi-
tions. From this office, students and faculty can
arrange for rental of more than 600 framed reproduc-
tions from the collection of lithographs, etchings, dry
points and other graphics. Guide service and gallery
talks can also be scheduled.
The University Bookstore is located on the ground
floor of Maginnes Hall, with its main entrance on the
north side of the building. In addition to all required
textbooks and supplies, the bookstore carries a large
selection of paperback and hardcover books,
stationery items, specialized engineering require-
ments, and an assortment of greeting cards, phono-
graph records, posters, magazines and newspapers,
and drug sundries.
Williams Hall, donated by the late Dr. Edward H.
Williams, Jr., class of 1875, professor of mining and
geology at Lehigh for 21 years, contains classrooms,
laboratories, and museum collections of the depart-
ments of biology, geological sciences, psychology,
and the Center for Marine and Environmental
Studies. The building was renovated in 1956, when a
fourth story was added to the original structure.
Eugene Gifford Grace Hall, named for the donor, a
member of the class of 1899 and president of the
Lehigh Board of Trustess from 1924 to 1956, is
devoted to sports and recreation. The building is used
primarily for basketball and wrestling, and also serves
as an assembly room for concerts and lectures. It
seats over 3,000. The third floor provides classrooms
and offices for the ROTC departments.
Coppee Hall, named for the first president of
Lehigh, contains offices and classrooms for the de-
partments of fine arts and speech. Some foreign
language offices are also housed in this building,
which at one time was the first University gym-
nasium.
The interior of Packer Hall, the University Center,
the original structure given Lehigh by its founder, was
razed and completely reconstructed in 1958, and a
large addition was built to the rear and west of the
original building. The UC, as the building is known on
campus, provides student, faculty, and guest dining
rooms, lounges, a snack bar, offices for the student
newspaper and radio stations, the University Forum,
student organizations, meeting and conference rooms,
and offices for the Vice President and Dean of Stu-
dent Affairs and the Dean of Student Life and their
staffs. The University Center walls are hung with
many excellent pieces from the University's Perma-
nent Art Collection.
Drown Memorial Hall was erected by friends and
alumni as a memorial to the late Dr. Thomas M.
Drown, fourth president of the University from 1895
to 1904. It provides offices, classrooms, reading
rooms, and lecture rooms for the dean and depart-
ments of the College of Business and Economics.
Lamberton Hall houses the department of modern
foreign languages and literatures. The department
of music also uses the building, with rehearsal rooms
for the band and glee club.
The Scene 31
r^
o
cc
o
no
cu
©
in
NO
.3
CO
3
CM
<L>
0>
CO
a
o
OS
u
no
o\
O
60
CD
CO
3
CO
a
0
X
X
IS
U
Q
X
_o
0
X
CO
0
nl
a!
rt
3
^
ri
hh
>.
u
cu
a)
0
3
£
rt
3
-3
-3
_=
o
H
H
p
H
H
i-
£
u
-d
rt
<
C
rt
fi
rt
C 1>
rt S3
w s
CJ <U
0! Q
60
c
33 •
3
m
3
o ■
-d
33
3
CQ
E -22
3 _£
-d -5
U-
U
to
u
.2 Oh
3 <
"0 J3
=3 .<
w
CO
o
3 S
pq U
« n d
-o .2
rt "
Oh .2
w' 2
M g
c -3
O 33
CO
E C
.2 E
SP "So
S3 oc £ _2
00 33
60 'V* co
2 C.2
-3 -=•
" u cj -3 >-i
r* -h co
C
O
(-i t_; i_) <s vi
60
-d
E
u
3
>-s
c
O
60
.ej
'—
_0
'u
>
o
co
3
15
3
0
0
T3
-3
'£
3
ph « ac
Ph Ph
<HH <HH
o o
3 3
O O
O .2
+h cj .S .
>
Q Q
oa >
.5 3
S .2
-3 >
Ph
CJ *h hcc.
-H H H
2 .o ,0
a -a
§1
o
3
60
SP
Bi
-a
3
-d
3
J o
60
3
co oo
cO
1- hJ
CO
Xi
CO
' — 1
4
60
c
nl
i-4
>^
3
-d
co
0
-d
O
CD
C/3
U
-a
3
U
C4
CM
O
J3
(3
-d
3
al
CJ
-° 2 <m
m « ->
4_, to 1-H
^ i)
3 ~- '
3 -°
P cJ
h-1
2 o
3 en
pLH
5 w "^T"
a) aj
o
u u
u
CJ D-,
3 E
CJ O
u u
3
1—1 nl
- 1-.
o t2
Oh ^
o
U
<u
H C
O <u
Ih-3U
— 2-3
2 3 °
V -3 S3
^ *H CJ
2 S '
CO X
LO
CO
ON n!
X
|H
nl
1H
3
33 3
nj ^ O
I 0 h
3
'So •
2 J
CJ
3
aj H3 ^
-3
SO ^
C4
. E
OJ O
U CJ
3 HI
U -rH
■hh n3
" 3
C3 nl
'd co
3 nl
S
3
CO
"2 -°
co -.
JS "
CJ 1H
nl OJ
Oh J4
• CO
60 ."3
3 J3
cj C^
cj
.3 "3
60 O
3 _3
O cj
CO
CN
60
3
3
M
3
O
Uh O
rt rt oJ '-m
« £ S S 2 O m
o o
CJ oj oj rt
60 60 60 3
CJ CJ CJ -73
"3 "3 "3 2
u o u O
3
0
X
%
c
S
cfl
E
CU
u
c
<u
CU
o
-3
ON
on m
Ph E
CO
ao
3
o
DC
NO
Oh
< <
m -o
-C -
CL. nl
—. cj
< m
in
2 -*
1-1 oo
Oh Oh
cj nl -3 -3
M U U U
H -g
CN
CN
CO CO
3 CO
■2 M
O On
CnI 00
CO 00
U-l NO
3 -3 _B la
O U O Oh
tj^ ca aj rt
O 1) cu cu
0 O Q Q
" (U
S 3
.SP rt
co H
nl n!
3
O
C3
CO
Oh
D
cu u aj u "u
Q Q Q Q Q
<s> co
Oh >
3
O
X
3 ^ °
"S NO CO "^
-3 .. lo .,
3 -«
O Oi
X <3
>h n!
1H CU
2 S
E cf
b j3
.SP u
c/3 to
« "S
Oh -5
Oh S
I .2
Jj 3
"S 3
o
3
O
X
3
3
O
U
-^ JhI 2 S
QJ CJ
a o w
-3 _C
Oh Oh
O
ON
00
CO ON
Oh _,
rt -d
£ -2
.SP E
C/5 nl
.-4 —
ON
i- -H CO ^1
■a -d <
u
3 _3
• -H CJ
CN
On
CM
O
Oh ■"
"H CO
ffl 3
• -H O
7? ffi
Oh
<N
in
cj in
on
3
o
ac
3
O
-3
Ph
3
O
CO -3
rt co rt nl co
>> 3
S C/5
E E E E E
60 60 60 60 60
00 CO 00 00 C/3
3 CJ Oh
«Q W
"033
■4_t 4-j rt rt
w w h H
cN
■*
T— 1
3
CO
bJD— -
o
O
C >N
is ^
rt
IH °
en
rt
|H
E
CU
^ rt
U
CO
J3
m S
">
's
rt
•S 3
u
<u
'E
2
CA
-d
CHH
CO in
-o
Ci
o
bH OJ
C
60
3
3
0
60^
-r- 3
•-C nl
r— 1
CO
CO
CM
Crt
be
is
in
CNl
rt
(J
cj -3
"3
a:
CO
_C
3
M
—
"Oh
"2 60
3
CN
CO
CO
60
CO
"3
3
ea
u
1
3
0
E
(U
"3
o
-3
U
CO
-
E
Oh
<
CU
-£
■S-)
3 3
co .3
6o2
.3 '3
ac i-
3
O
o
3
rt
CO
rt
E
CO
O
lH
o
-d
3
rt
CO
60
CO
CO
X
>->
u
O
rt
tH
0
nl
in
co
13
X
3
"3
C3
3
«
3
0
>■
■~
0
lH
0
rt
rt
4!
'S
E
c
OJ
*-*
1-4
CD
-n .2
a E
3
0)
CU
Oh
h-l
CJ
a
4-J
rt
o
l-l
N
3
3
C
3 CJ
'lH
—
Oh
«
o
3
<i
1)
CU
cj -3
J3
3
o
O
lH
-0
' ^
u
CJ
O U
u
pq
(J
CJ
Q
w
PL,
NO
CO
60
3
3
cq
-d
3
oo
ON 1*
co CJ
_ 3
cu *t3
rt rt
u cu
o aa
o
CO
rt -2
aa j
3 3
O co
tt E
CJ lH
-O CJ
S .3
J hJ
3
>. -3
5 u
rt rt
O
i-i i—l
c
3
bio S
nl n
2 S
00
60 NO CN
3 rt
3 .3
Ph "d
-P CQ
Oh ^
O w
o
—
-3
oo
o
CO
NO
=3 CO
rt 0
aa "
o
60 Chh
.3 E
3 O
NO
CM
O
rt
00
CO
3
o
aa
^j
S
-d
3
co
1h 33 CJ —
-2 aa
>> CJ
-3 u
Oh Oh
C
O
_o
CJ J3
CJ 4-i
CO
o
15
Oh h-1
3 ro
3
'S 3
co 3
3 2
O co
ON
<N
- J3 o o
>> 3 ^^
O
-O
CO
-d
m c
rt
&" cj
co
in CM
U 3
>, c
.« ac
co -O
3
O r-
aa "^i
is «
Cu fX c^j c/d oo H H
oX
CJ Oh co
H £,_« t, g
CU .S CO 3 CO
•S " -S s2 ifj
3 d h? 9 31
D > £ £ =5
C
JL .
i r '
____
JLJLJL JL JL^L ® 1 1 ■
■"li — inr ir ir *isr "Bob™ -S, =*u
- in in
J L JlL jl JL
[ jjLJu^JL"
-l u
i[~;r" lit
Jl_]L_JL
^
College of Arts and Science
John W. Hunt, Dean
G. Mark Ellis, Assistant Dean
The Curricula
The College of Arts and Science offers several curri-
cula options: (a) a four-year curriculum in arts and
sciences, leading to the degree of Bachelor of Arts;
(b) a four-year curricula in the fields of biology, geo-
logical sciences, psychology, and environmental
science and resource management, leading to the de-
gree of Bachelor of Science in the designated field;
and (c) a five-year curriculum in Arts-Engineering
leading to a baccalaureate degree from the College of
Arts and Science and a B.S. degree in the student's
field of engineering.
Freshman English
Students in all of these curricula must meet a require-
ment for freshman English. The normal requirement
is English 1 and 2, 10, 14, or 16. For exceptions, see
Advanced Placement.
The Bachelor of Arts Degree
The curriculum in Arts and Science emphasizes a
liberal education. It asks the student, in collaboration
with his advisor, to select courses to fill three general
categories, namely, distribution to insure breadth of
education, a major field of concentration to provide
depth, and free electives to adjust both breadth and
depth to the student's individual needs.
Distribution Requirements
The object of the distribution requirements is to give
the student an elementary knowledge of the fields of
contemporary thought and to orient him in the world
of man and nature. The requirements also provide
opportunities for students to take additional work in
fields related to their major field of concentration.
Distribution requirements are administered by the
Dean of the College of Arts and Science in accor-
dance with the group regulations given below. The
student has a wide choice of offerings from which to
select courses to fulfill distribution requirements.
Honors students may, with the approval of the
dean, substitute Creative Concepts seminars for distri-
bution courses other than foreign languages.
Mathematics
One course: Math. 21, 31, 41, or Phil. 14 or equiva-
lent.
Foreign Languages
The principal purpose of studying a foreign language
in the College of Arts and Science is to develop a
means of perceiving and thinking of a culture other
than one's own. Accordingly, the student is asked to
choose his language of study on the basis of a desire
to know more about some non-English speaking part
of the world.
Each student is required to achieve working profi-
ciency in the four language skills— speaking, listening,
reading and writing. The number of hours varies de-
pending on the language selected and previous study
in the language.
A student is not allowed to receive college credit
for course work in a language taken at a level lower
than his previous study of that language warrants.
With the approval of the Dean of the College, an
option is offered those who find it necessary to pur-
sue in college the study of two foreign languages,
provided that neither language was studied in secon-
dary school. Such students may offer in satisfaction of
the language requirement second-year level profi-
ciency in one foreign language and first-year level
proficiency in another.
Qualified students are encouraged, to the extent
that their courses of study permit it, to participate in
approved Study Abroad programs as these may from
time to time be maintained by the University or ap-
proved for participation by Lehigh students.
Humanities
Twelve semester hours must be chosen from at least
two of the following groups:
1. Literature (Courses in English or American
Literature; Greek, Latin, or modern foreign literature
in translation; or literature courses at the third-year
College of Arts and Science: Bachelor of Arts Degree 35
level or higher in .1 foreign language, provided that
such courses .ire not also used to satisfy tlie toreign
language requirement 1
1. Fine Arts. Music or Archaeology
3. Philosophy
-t. Religion Studies
Natural Sciences and Mathematics
Twelve semester hours, chosen from at least two of
the following groups:
1. Astronomy
2. Biology
3. Chemistry
4. Geological Sciences
5. Mathematics
6. Physics
7. Psychology
Social Sciences
Twelve semester hours, chosen from at least two of
the following groups:
1. Sociology, Cultural Anthropology, Social Psy-
chology
2. Ancient Civilization, History, Archaeology
3. Government, International Relations,
Economics
4. Urban Studies
Major Field of Concentration
During the second semester of the freshman year if
possible, and in any event no later than the end of the
sophomore year, each student in the curriculum of
Arts and Science will select some sequence of studies
as his major field of concentration. A major consists
of at least twelve hours of advanced work in the field
chosen. Including preliminary college work, the mini-
mum number of hours constituting a major is
twenty -four.
The major field of concentration is designed to
enable a student to master an area of knowledge so
far as that is possible during the undergraduate years.
In all fields certain courses are prescribed, but the
mere passing of courses will not satisfy the major
requirements. A student must achieve a minimum 2.0
average in his major courses. It is expected that the
student will prepare himself largely through his own
reading.
Standard Majoi Sequences
The student may wish to choose one oi the stand. ml
major sequences. See pages under the appropn.ii.
alphabetical listing.
When a student selects one of these standard
majors, the chairman of the department offering the
major or the oflicial director of a non-departmental
major becomes a student's major advisor and makes
out his major program. The final responsibility for
meeting both major and non-major requirements,
however, rests with the student.
Special Interdisciplinary Majors
In addition to the standard major programs, specially
structured interdisciplinary major sequences are possi-
ble. For example, a student interested in a profession-
al school of urban or regional planning might be in-
terested in structuring a special major consisting
primarily of courses in government and economics, or
of economics and social relations.
Any student may, with the aid of members of the
faculty chosen from the disciplines involved, work
out an interdisciplinary major program to include not
less than twenty-four hours of related course work, of
which at least twelve hours shall consist of advanced
courses. The program must be approved by the major
advisors and the Dean of the College.
Multiple Majors
Some students choose to fulfill the requirements of
more than one major sequence. A student initiates
this by having separate major programs made out by
different major advisors. Because successful comple-
tion of only one major program is required for a bac-
calaureate degree, a student with more than one pro-
gram is asked to designate one as the official major
and is expected to maintain normal progress in ful-
filling its requirements.
The Bachelor of Science Degree
Students desiring to major in the fields of biology,
geological sciences, psychology, or environmental
sciences and resource management may elect to work
for a Bachelor of Science degree. This option is also
open to Arts-Engineers desiring to major in one of
these fields.
36 College of Arts and Science: Bachelor of Science Degree
Normally, a student electing to work for the B.S.
degree will have a strong pre-professional orientation.
He will take more courses in his major field of con-
centration than will his counterpart in the Bachelor
of Arts program. In all other respects the student in a
B.S. curriculum will meet the same requirements as
will the student in the Bachelor of Arts program,
except that the B.S. candidate is not asked to fulfill
the same distribution requirements.
For the specific requirements of the B.S. curricula
in biology, geological sciences, psychology, and envir-
onmental sciences and resource management please
see pages under the appropriate alphabetical listing.
Arts-Engineering
The curriculum in Arts-Engineering is especially de-
signed for students wishing a regular professional
education in a field of engineering and also the
opportunity to study broadly or in a second field.
Arts-Engineers fulfill all requirements for the profes-
sional engineering degree for which they are working.
However, the first three years of science and engineer-
ing courses are scheduled over four years for the
Arts-Engineer. During this period the Arts-Engineer is
a student in the College of Arts and Science pursuing
a B.A. or B.S. major program. In normal circum-
stances he will complete work for his degree in the
College of Arts and Science at the end of four years.
He will transfer for his fifth year to the appropriate
department of engineering, where he will pursue a
regular fourth year of science and engineering course
work in his chosen field of engineering.
These arrangements make it difficult for an Arts-
Engineer to qualify for his B.S. in the College of Engi-
neering before he has met all requirements for his
baccalaureate in the College of Arts and Science. In
some instances it may be advisable to take the two
degrees at the end of the fifth year. To qualify for
both degrees a student must submit for the second
degree thirty credit hours in addition to the number
required for the B.S. in Engineering alone.
Arts-Engineers working for the baccalaureate of
art automatically fulfill the engineering general
studies requirements while filling the distribution
requirements of the College of Arts and Science.
Arts-Engineers working towards the Bachelor of
Science in biology, geological sciences, psychology, or
environmental science and resource management
must pay special attention to the engineering general
studies requirements, which must be met in time for
the student to qualify for the Bachelor of Science
degree in Engineering.
Arts-Engineers have the same opportunities for
multiple majors and special interdisciplinary majors as
are available to students working for the degree of
Bachelor of Arts.
Pattern rosters which show the normal combina-
tion of courses for the first four years of the Arts-
Engineering curriculum will be found under descrip-
tion of courses.
Graduation Requirements
The Bachelor of Arts Degree
1. The completion with the required average of a
minimum of 120 credit hours of collegiate work,
apportioned so as to cover the distribution and con-
centration requirements. Basic courses in military or
air science are carried in addition. No more than six
hours of advanced aerospace studies or military
science may be counted towards graduation credit;
2. A cumulative average of 2.00 or better in the
courses required in the student's major program;
3. Completion of all general requirements applying
to all candidates for baccalaureate degrees described
under Academic Regulations.
The Bachelor of Science Degree in Biology, Geological
Sciences, Psychology, or Environmental Science and
Resource Management
1. The completion with the required average of the
minimum number of credit hours of collegiate work
indicated for the curriculum. Basic courses in aero-
space studies or military science are carried in addi-
tion. No more than six hours of advanced R.O.T.C.
credit may be counted towards graduation credit;
2. Completion of all general requirements applying
to all candidates for baccalaureate degrees described
under Academic Regulations.
Special Requirements
Regular Progress
Each student in the college is expected to maintain
regular progress towards the baccalaureate degree by
College of Arts and Science: Arts-Engineering 37
ing .1 noi in .il course load eat h semester. The
normal course load m.i\ varv between fourteen and
seventeen hours depending on the number and ditli-
culty of the courses involved. Courses in military
science or aerospace studies are usually carried in
addition. Normal semester course loads for Arts-
Engineering students are detailed in the pattern
rosters tor Arts-Engineers.
Comprehensive Examination or Senior Thesis
The comprehensive examination in the major field or
a senior thesis is required of students in a few major
fields of concentration. The student should consult
the major sequences to determine which majors re-
quire successful completion of a senior comprehen-
sive examination or a senior thesis.
The comprehensive examination is given under the
direction of the chairman of the major department.
No student is allowed to take a senior comprehensive
examination more than twice in any one field. In case
of failure on the first attempt, a second trial is not
permitted until a period of three months has passed.
Special Opportunities
Arts-M.B.A. Program
This five year, two-degree program is designed to
meet the needs of competent students in any of the
Arts and Science majors (other than accounting,
economics, or finance) who wish to supplement their
liberal education with graduate training in business
management.
The normal over-all time involved in the two-
degree program is five years. During his first four
years the student takes background courses in busi-
ness and economics. If he successfully completes
these and is admitted to the graduate phase of the
program, he may expect to complete remaining re-
quirements for the M.B.A. degree in one additional
year.
The background courses to be taken during the
undergraduate years will be found listed under the
Five-Year Programs under description of courses,
together with additional information concerning the
M.B.A. program.
Honors and Independent Study
Qualified students in .ill curricula ot the college may
choose to work for either departmental or interde-
partmental honors. Particularly well-qualified stu-
dents sometimes work for both. These programs are
described under the comprehensive honors program
later in this catalog.
Students will find various opportunities for inde-
pendent study in all curricula and in most major se-
quences. They work out such programs of indepen-
dent study in collaboration with their major advisors.
On the advice of the chairman of the student's major
department and with the consent of the dean of the
college, a junior or a senior of unusual merit who
wishes to concentrate in his chosen field may be
allowed to substitute not more than four or six hours
respectively of unscheduled work per semester for an
equal number of hours of elective work otherwise
required for graduation.
Acceleration
Opportunities for a student to accelerate towards
graduation include, in addition to advanced place-
ment and work in summer school, rostering course
overloads during the regular semester and passing
special examinations for credit. The student should
see his major advisor or the dean of his college con-
cerning these opportunities.
38 College of Arts and Science: Special Opportunities
College of Business and
Economics
Brian G. Brockway, Dean
Max D. Snider, Assistant Dean
Programs of Study
The College of Business and Economics, which is a
member of the American Association of Collegiate
Schools of Business, offers a program of study design-
ed to provide an understanding of the complexities of
the managerial process in society, both within and
outside of the business firm. Many of the most diffi-
cult societal problems today involve decision-making,
conflict resolution, and the efficient and effective
management of human and physical resources.
Studies of business and economics provide fundamen-
tal bases for understanding and approaching solutions
to many aspects of these problems, particularly as
they present themselves to business leaders and ad-
ministrators in other fields.
Thus the college's undergraduate business program
stresses analytical and communication skills for the
development and articulation of problem-solving
techniques. Educational breadth is provided, equiva-
lent to many liberal arts programs, but with depth of
study of business processes such as accounting infor-
mation systems, financial flows and markets, manage-
ment processes and the impact of economic variables
and forces upon business and social issues. In essence,
the undergraduate education deemed most suitable
for young men and women who will be the business
leaders of tomorrow is formulated as analytically
rigorous but with broad educational foundations
combined with an exercise in depth of understanding
of business processes in the economy in which we
live.
This education in fundamentals, principles, and
problem-solving mental agility provides the graduates
with various options. Some of the young men and
women choosing this curriculum have already settled
upon business careers. Others will use it as a base for
further professional studies, in law, graduate business
schools, or specialized graduate training in economics,
operations research, or other related fields. Still
others go into administrative careers in government or
non-profit institutions such as hospitals and universi-
ties. Others apply their talents to professional
accounting, financial investment, or management
consulting careers. Others go into teaching of eco-
nomics or administrative science. Undergraduate
education must first of all provide the solid base of
analytical skills and acquaintance with a segment of
significant and relevant phenomena of our society.
Equipped then with learning skills and intellectual
facility in problem solving, the student's ultimate
career must be of his own making.
Business today can no longer be approached with
narrow or superficial vocational training. Its problems
are strongly conditioned by the state of the economy
and even by social issues confronting modern business
executives. Thus a strong basis in the social sciences is
essential to understanding the nature of business or-
ganizations. The student must also touch base with
physical sciences and technology. Finally mathe-
matics and computer systems are essential elements
of modern decision-making processes. An introduc-
tion to all of these is provided in Lehigh's undergrad-
uate program in business and economics.
At the same time the student of today must be
provided with options. Initiative and motivation
would be stultified in a straight-jacketed curriculum.
To avoid such rigidity, the necessary exposures to
science, language, and other arts are accomplished by
optional requirements, within each of which the stu-
dent has wide choice. Thus the basic curriculum
rationale is similar to a distribution requirement in
liberal arts, to guarantee breadth of undergraduate
educational experience. Additionally, however, ap-
proximately twenty percent of credits required for
graduation are completely open for selection on a
free elective basis. Thus some students take double
majors, since intensive specialization is not required,
others carry majors into more advanced levels, while
still others choose work across the University ranging
from humanities to technical engineering subjects,
achieving even greater breadth or more specially
tailored combinations than provided in standard re-
quirements.
Thus the degree of Bachelor of Science in Business
and Economics represents a liberal educational ex-
perience coupled with a solid understanding of
business and the economy. It is frequently combined
College of Business and Economics: Programs of Study 39
iii five-year programs with other bachelor's degrees in
.irts or engineering, and nuv load directly to a tit til
year achievement ol the M.B.A. degree in the college
or in some other institution.
Objectives
Objectives ot the College of Business and Economics
are to provide an understanding (at the undergraduate
level) and managerial and/or research-teaching exper-
tise (at graduate levels) of the nature of business en-
terprise decision-making and resource management in
the economy. Undergraduate objectives may be sum-
marized as follows:
1. To provide tools ot analytical rigor and perspec-
tive for continuing learning abilities with respect to
the nature of business and its role in the economy;
2. To increase communication skills;
3. To provide breadth of appreciation of the
scientific, technological, social science and humanity
features of the world in which business is carried on;
4. Through a common body of knowledge to
stimulate interest in and acquaint a student with basic
business and economic systems of pricing, financial
accounting, distribution and management processes;
5. Through a major, to provide each student with a
learning exercise in depth in at least one area of busi-
ness or the economy in which business operates such
as accounting systems, finance, economics, economic
statistics, foreign careers, management or marketing.
6. To work increasingly with mature students for
intermediate and upper class subject areas of business
and economics, as an introduction to professional
work or a sound basis for acquiring experience in the
tield or for graduate education.
Graduate programs leading to the degrees of
Master of Business Administration, Master of Arts
and Master of Science as well as the Ph.D. and Doctor
of Arts degrees are described on following pages.
Curriculum for B.S. in Business and Economics
120 hours required for degree.
College Core Requirements (52 credits)
English and Mathematics (15 credits)
Engl 1 Composition and Literature (3)
Engl 2, 10, 14, or 16 Composition and Literature (3)
Math 41 BMSS Calculus I (3)
Math 42 BMSS Probability (3)
Math 43 BMSS Linear Algebra (3)
Business and Economics Core (37 credits)
Eco 1 Economics (4)
Eco 45 Statistical Method (3)
Eco 129 Money and Banking (3)
Eco 206 Microcconomic Analysis (3)
Eco 219 Macrocconomic Analysis (3)
Acctg 51 Essentials of Accounting (3)
Acctg 52 Essentials of Accounting (3)
Acctg 1 1 1 Computers in Business (3)
Law 101 Business Law (3)
Mkt211 Marketing (3)
Fin 225 Business Finance (3)
Mgt 201 Development of Management Thought
(3)
Note: BMSS stands for biological, management and
social science.
Major Program (15 credits)
Before the end of the first semester of their junior
year, students will select a major or field of concen-
tration. A major program will consist of sequential or
related courses in accordance with one of the desig-
nated major programs, as detailed on following pages
under department course listings. Seven majors are
offered: accounting, economics, economic statistics,
finance, foreign careers, management, and marketing.
Optional Courses (30 credits)
The student must elect three hours from each of the
following four groups:
(1) English, speech, journalism or modern
foreign languages departments.
(2) Government, history, international relations,
and social relations departments (including the Divi-
sion of Urban Studies).
(3) Fine arts, classics, mathematics, music, religion
studies, and philosophy departments.
(4) Biology, chemistry, geological sciences, physics
and psychology departments.
The remaining hours (18) must be taken in any one
or more of the departments listed in the four groups
above or any one or more the departments in the
40 College of Business and Economics: Bachelor of Science Curriculum
College of Arts and Science, as follows: biology,
classics, English, fine arts, geological sciences, govern-
ment, history, international relations, mathematics,
modern foreign languages, music, philosophy, psy-
chology, religion studies, and social relations. One-
hour courses will not be accepted for the optional
courses but may be counted toward electives.
Electives (23 credits)
Normally any courses in the University for which a
student has the prerequisites may be used as electives
as long as such courses carry University credits. Ad-
vanced military science and aerospace studies courses
may be counted as electives up to 6 credits, but fresh-
man and sophomore level courses in military science
and aerospace studies do not carry credit against the
120 hours required for graduation.
Planning Courses of Study
In addition to freshman English and mathematics
requirements, each freshman enrolled in the College
of Business and Economics will register for Econom-
ics 1 his freshman year. For the fourth and possibly
fifth courses, he will take courses toward the optional
requirement each semester of his freshman year. The
normal program for freshmen is fifteen hours each
semester.
Accounting 51 is normally taken in the first semes-
ter of the sophomore year. Other business and eco-
nomics core requirements should be selected with
some sampling of introductory courses that may help
the student choose his major by fall pre -registration
in his junior year.
The pass-fail option is available for students in the
college for elective credits. Courses with passing letter
grades must be submitted to meet the core, major
program, and optional requirements. Courses taken
on a pass-fail basis will be classified as elective
courses.
Graduate Study in Business and Economics
The College of Business and Economics offers three
degrees at the master's level: the M.B.A., the M.A.
and M.S. On a more advanced level, the college offers
the Ph.D. and Doctor of Arts degrees.
Graduate education in the College of Business and
Economics distinguishes by emphasis between profes-
sional management training through the M.B.A.,
which is generally though not always terminal at the
master's level, and graduate pursuit of business and
economics subjects in depth for research and/or
teaching expertise through the doctoral and related
M.A. -M.S. programs.
A candidate for admission to graduate study in the
College of Business and Economics must offer either
the Admission Test for Graduate Study in Business
(ATGSB) or the Graduate Record Examination
(GRE) Aptitude Tests.
The M.B.A. Degree
The M.B.A. degree is designed to give candidates con-
ceptual, analytical, and operational knowledge of
decision-making processes in the management of
human and physical resources. Both internal and ex-
ternal aspects of enterprise and organizations in
modern economic systems impinge upon managerial
roles. Education in the business profession or profes-
sions requires understanding of business functions but
also integration of these in the management process.
The program requires generalized managerial compe-
tence but permits, if the student desires, advanced
concentration in such fields as finance, marketing,
quantitative or behavioral management, professional
accountancy or economics, international trade and
finance, labor relations, etc.
All candidates for this program are required to
take the Admission Test for Graduate Study in Busi-
ness. Information about this test may be obtained at
many counseling centers or by writing to the Educa-
tional Testing Service, Box 966, Princeton, New
Jersey 08540.
The courses listed below are available in the even-
ing or on Saturday morning to permit qualified can-
didates to obtain the degree on a part-time basis.
Ordinarily graduates of a four-year program in busi-
ness and economics complete the M.B.A. in one year
on a full-time basis. Normally, two years on a full-
time basis are required to complete the M.B.A. degree
for those candidates who have not previously com-
pleted any of the first year program courses listed
below. A comprehensive examination is required of
all candidates for the M.B.A. degree.
College of Business and Economics: Graduate Study 41
Firs! Year Program , 30 hours)
Quantitative Methods and Systems
Acctg 108 Fundamentals of Accounting (3)
Acctg 1 1 1 Computers in Business (3)
Eco 45 Statistical Methods (3)
Mgt 302 Quantitative Models— Conceptual (3)
or
Mgt 314 Operations Analysis (3)
Functional and Organization Studies
Fin 225 Business Finance (3)
Mkt211 Marketing (3)
Mgt 321 Organization Behavior (3)
or
Mt;t 201 Development of Management Thought
(3)
Economic and Legal Environment
Eco 129 Money and Banking (3)
Eco 206 Microeconomic Analysis (3)
Law 101 Business Law (3)
Note: Students who have had Acctg. 51 and 52 or the
equivalent are not required to take Acctg. 108.
Students are usually given credit without examina-
tion for one of the foregoing courses with grades of C
or better if taken toward a prior degree earned not
more than eight years before first matriculation in the
M.B.A. program.
Required Advanced Courses (15 hours)
Acctg 422 Managerial Accounting (3)
Eco 431 Managerial Economics (3)
or
Eco 432 Advanced Microeconomic Analysis (3)
Fin 421 Financial Management (3)
Law 401 Legal Problems in Business (3)
Mgt 451 Managerial Policy and Decision-Making
(3)
Note: Students who majored in accounting substitute
Acctg. 431, Accounting Theory and Thought, for
Acctg. 422.
Mgt. 451 should be taken the last semester before
graduation.
Elective Courses | 15 hours)
Elective credit hours may be selected from desired
combinations of 300- and 100 level courses offered in
the College of Business and Economics, as described
under the various departmental listings. However,
each candidate is urged to take at least 6 to 9 credits
of electives in one of the fields in which work is offer-
ed in the college. He will be considered to have
majored in the field if he takes 9 hours of electives in
a field including at least six hours at the four hundred
level. Thus, for example, he may major in accounting,
finance, labor relations, international trade and
finance, management science, marketing, etc.
Of the total of 60 credits, the last 30 credits are
taken in residence and must meet the University
graduate requirements for any master's degree.
Graduate Work for Research and/or Teaching in
Business and Economics
The Ph.D. Degree
The philosophy of the Ph.D. program is to nurture
the individual's intellectual growth so that he may
independently pursue professional objectives. It is
assumed that the individual's level of proficiency,
attained at the completion of his degree program, will
continue to increase with his professional develop-
ment.
The student is expected to pursue an intellectual
and scholarly interest in four areas, including eco-
nomic theory. His program of study in these four
areas is arranged with the chairman of the Ph.D. com-
mittee of the college. This program of study is design-
ed to prepare the student to pass general examina-
tions in his four areas so that he may be admitted to
candidacy. Course requirements include competence
in quantitative analysis at least through Economics
352, Statistical Methods (3) and Management 314,
Operations Analysis (3) and a course in the history of
economic thought. Once the student has satisfactorily
completed his general examination, a dissertation
committee is organized and its chairman guides the
candidate in the preparation of his dissertation.
The Doctor of Arts Degree
The philosophy of the Doctor of Arts degree is to
provide advanced graduate work with breadth of
42 College of Business and Economics: Graduate Study
knowledge, sensitivity and teaching skills in prepara-
tion of teaching faculty particularly for two-year and
four-year colleges. A sensitivity core of 18 hours is
required. Additional classwork of at least 36 hours
(of which 24 must be at the 400-level) is required in
preparation for doctoral examinations in four fields
(of which one may be outside the college) including
an examination in economic theory. Additional re-
quirements include an internship and research project
dealing with learning, teaching, or research problems
in business or economics.
vantageous in dealing with the increasingly complex
problems of industrial, commercial, and public service
organizations.
The Master of Arts and the Master of Science Degrees
The Master of Arts degree is offered to students who
qualify in the field of general economic theory and in
one other field within the college. For the Master of
Science degree, the requirements are as specified
above plus Economics 352, Advanced Economic
Statistics (3), and Management 314, Operations
Analysis (3).
Eighteen of the minimum of thirty hours required
for a master's degree must be taken within the Col-
lege of Business and Economics. Up to twelve hours
of the thirty hour requirement may be elected from
related fields in any department of the University
with the consent of the chairman of the doctoral
committee.
The Master of Science in Management Science
The management science program is directed toward
integrating the scientific method with the functional
aspects of organizations by investigating the applica-
tion of quantitative methodology and systems analy-
sis in the context of such areas as accounting, finance,
marketing, production and public service. This inte-
gration will provide the student with a broader per-
spective toward managerial decision-making in private
enterprise and/or public administration. Undergradu-
ate students with prior exposure to engineering, busi-
ness, economics, mathematics or the physical sciences
who desire a professional career as a staff specialist in
management science will be ideal candidates for the
program. In addition, those students who are experi-
enced in, or intend to fill, line manager positions
would find the management science background ad-
College of Business and Economics: Graduate Study 43
College of Engineering
John | . Karakash, Dean
Robert Gallagher, Associate Dciiii
The Curricula
Tlic College of Engineering offers curricula in chemi-
cal engineering, chemistry, civil engineering, electrical
engineering, mechanical engineering and engineering
mechanics, engineering physics, fundamental sciences,
industrial engineering, and metallurgical engineering
and materials science. Each leads to the degree of
bachelor of science in the designated area.
Each of the curricula includes course requirements
in the physical sciences, mathematics, engineering
sciences, and the advanced engineering or science
course work essential for the particular degree. In
addition, each curriculum has General Study require-
ments in the humanities and social sciences.
In the past engineering education was identified
explicitly and uniquely in terms of the need of indus-
trial life. Present-day programs continue to provide
and emphasize such preparation. However, the flexi-
bility inherent in the curricula enables students to
design personalized programs leading directly into
other professional colleges or professions such as
medicine, law, government, management or architec-
ture. The college encourages such mobility. Experi-
ence shows that the background provided through the
college programs, including "the engineering
approach" to identification and resolution of prob-
lems, finds increasingly wider applicability in those
areas of activity which call for a combination of prac-
tical and conceptual intelligence.
The science curricula of the college stress funda-
mentals while providing opportunities for electives in
each of the substantive fields within the sciences.
Senior year programs in the sciences can be planned
to facilitate transition to either graduate school or
industrial laboratories.
Undergraduates with interests in such topical areas
as environmental control, biomedical instrumenta-
tion, computer or computing sciences, aerospace, or
management can pursue their interests through elec-
tives provided in each o) the curricula. Effective pre
paration foi graduate study in such specialties con-
sists ot basic programs in science and engineering
science and of electives especially chosen for the field
of interest. Such electives may be chosen from among
all the offerings of the University and are usually
taken during the last two years.
The freshman choice of a specific curriculum may
be changed prior to the sophomore year without loss
of time. During the first year, any student who is
uncertain as to his curriculum should consult with his
faculty advisor. In the second semester of the fresh-
man year, just prior to prcrcgistration for the sopho-
more year, each student elects a particular curricu-
lum. Since the sophomore year programs for several
curricula are very much alike, it is possible for a stu-
dent to transfer from one curriculum to another as
late as the end of the sophomore year without having
to make up courses. There are instances, however,
where such a transfer will require one or two courses
to be taken during a summer session at Lehigh or
elsewhere.
The college recognizes that the four-year programs
are not intended to train specialists in a given area but
rather to educate students in terms of principles so
that they may be able to apply these to the problems
they encounter following graduation. It is for this
reason that the degree awarded upon graduation is
bachelor of science in a particular division of engi-
neering or science.
Five-year programs combining the liberal arts and
engineering, business administration and engineering,
or electrical engineering and physics are also pro-
vided. In each of these combined curricula one bache-
lor degree is awarded upon the successful completion
of four years of study, and a second bachelor degree
is awarded at the end of the fifth year. Completion of
one additional year at the graduate level leads to the
master of science degree in the preferred field. Similar
programs lead to an M.S. in Materials, or a Master in
Business Administration.
Students initially planning four year programs
leading to bachelor of science degrees in any one of
the college programs and who later decide to also
earn a bachelor degree in any other major field of
study, can proceed toward this objective provided
they have reached this decision prior to their third
year. In many instances this can be accomplished
44 College of Engineering: Tlie Curricula
with one additional year of study.
The college curricula are designed to provide stu-
dents with as much latitude as can be made available
without compromising the balance and integrity ex-
pected of them by accrediting agencies. This is
satisfied with the "minimum" program identified
with each curriculum.
On the other hand, the college expects each of its
students to take full advantage of all opportunities
open to them and to complete "normal" programs
which call for six to twelve credit hours over the
"minimum" programs. Actually, the college, through
its advisors, will be prepared to help students to use
these six to twelve hours of "personal electives" along
with other electives as available, toward a personal
interest development program. This may take the
form of some concentration in an option or specialty
within a students' own degree program, or alternately
in a topical area not necessarily within a student's
own department.
Recommended Freshman Year
The following outline of work for the freshman year
is most easily scheduled and satisfies the appropriate
requirements for all engineering students. For sched-
ules of the work required of the following three
years, please refer to the specific curricula under de-
scription of courses.
Freshman Year, First Semester (15 or 16 credit
hours)
Engl 1 Composition and Literature (3)
Chem 21, 22 Introductory Chemistry Principles &
Lab (5)
or
Phys 11,12 Introductory Physics I & Lab (5)
Math 21 Analytic Geometry & Calculus (4)
Engr 1 Introduction to Engineering Problems
(3)
or
Social Science GS Elective (3 or 4)
Freshman Year, Second Semester (15 or 16 credit
hours)
Engl 2* Composition and Literature (3)
Phys 11,12 Introductory Physics I & Lab (5)
or
Chem 21, 22 Introductory Chemistry Principles &
Lab (5)
Math 22 Analytical Geometry and Calculus II
(4)
Engr 1 Introduction to Engineering Problems
(3)
or
Social Science GS Elective (3 or 4)
*Note: A student is free to substitute for English 2
any one of the following three courses: English 10,
14, or 16. (See page 141.)
Engineering 1, Introduction to Engineering Prob-
lems, is a three-hour course offering programming of
elementary engineering problems in compiler langu-
age through lecture and preparation of problem solu-
tion in fields represented by the college curricula.
Students may choose to elect a three-credit social
science course (GS) from the fields of government,
history, international relations, or social relations.
Alternately, freshmen may elect to complete Eco-
nomics 1, which is required of all students in the col-
lege, and thereby postpone their choice of a social
science elective.
General Studies
The General Studies program is designed to enable
students to range widely or to delve deeply in the
humanities and the social sciences with the purpose
of exposing them to the value systems, assumptions,
and methodologies contained in these areas. Since all
students in the college are expected to complete
specified sequences of courses in the physical
sciences, and other electives are available for related
courses in natural sciences, the general studies pro-
gram is restricted to the humanities and social
sciences.
In addition a student pursuing the B.S. program in
the College of Engineering can, if he so chooses, or-
ganize his general study program in a manner which
also achieves the equivalent of a "minor" in any one
of the established areas in the humanities or social
sciences. This requires:
1, Identifying the area of interest, i.e., sociology,
philosophy, fine arts, literature, etc., and obtaining
the approval of the chairman of general studies. In-
terested students initiate action by arranging a con-
ference with the chairman of general studies.
College of Engineering: Recommended Freshman Year 45
2. Submitting to the chairman of general studies a
proposed course program in the area ol concentration
as formulated jointly by the student and a member of
the faculty representing the area ol concentration.
Tlie names of such faculty representatives will be
forwarded to students by the chairman ol general
studies upon approval of their choice of area of con-
centration.
In general, the "minor" is earned upon completion
of a program of not less than 15 credit hours in the
area of concentration. In each and every case the
faculty advisor in the area of concentration must
recommend the student's work for such recognition.
It is desirable that students planning to earn a minor
through general studies apply soon after their fresh-
man year but not later than the beginning of their
fifth term.
The general studies sequence starts in the freshman
year with six hours of English composition and litera-
ture, and in the sophomore year four hours of eco-
nomics. By the end of the senior year, a minimum of
15 additional hours (5 courses) are elected to satisfy
the requirement of a total of twenty-five hours in
general studies. Several courses such as History 1 and
2, Course of Civilizations, and Philosophy 100, Phi-
losophy of Contemporary Civilizations, have been
developed particularly to meet general studies objec-
tives.
The general studies courses are as follows:
Required Courses (10 credit hours):
English 1, and one course from among English 2, 10,
14, or 16.
Economics 1
Elective Courses in Humanities and Social Sciences
(15 credit hours):
Cl
assies: any course
Economics:
Eco 129 Money & Banking (3)
Eco 206 Microeconomic Analysis (3)
Eco 303 Economic Development (3)
Eco 305 The Economic Development of Latin
America (3)
Eco 307 History of Economic Thought (3)
Eco 308 History of Economic Thought (3)
Eco 309 Comparative Economic Systems (3)
Eco 310 Economic Evolution (3)
Eco 31 1 Economics of Resource Use (3)
Eco 312 Urban Economics (3)
Eco 316 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory
(3)
Eco 335 Manpower Economics (3)
Eco 337 Transportation and Spatial Economics
(3)
Eco 338 Labor Market Institutions (3)
Eco 343 European Economic Integration (3)
English: any literature course
Fine Arts: any course
Foreign Language: any language course on the inter-
mediate or elementary level, classical or modern. (If
elementary language study is elected, a minimum of
five hours must be in one language in order to receive
general studies credit. A student may not elect for
elementary study in any language in which he has
entering credit.)
Government: any course
History: any course
International Relations: any course
Journalism:
Journ 12 Reporting of Public Affairs (3)
Journ 21 Creative Writing (3)
Journ 22 Creative Writing (3)
Journ 111 Problems in Advanced Reportage (3)
Journ 115 Interpretive Writing (3)
Journ 118 History of American Journalism (3)
Journ 120 Journalism Proseminar (3)
Journ 121 Law of the Press (3)
Journ 122 Law of the Press II (3)
Music: any course except Music 1-4, 5-8, 9, 10.
Philosophy: any course
Psychology:
Psych 4 Psychology as a Social Science (3)
Psych 21 (SR 21) Social Psychology (3)
Psych 107 Developmental Psychology (3)
Psych 121 Encountering Self and Others (3)
Psych 251 Psychological Perspectives in Tech-
nological Society (3)
Psych 331 Humanistic Psychology (3)
Psych 361 Personality (4)
Religion Studies: any course
Social Relations: any course
46 College of Engineering: General Studies
Speech:
Speech 30
Speech 61
Speech 62
Fundamentals of Speech (3)
Theatre Production (3)
Theatre Production (3)
Graduation Requirements
Students in good academic standing earn their degree
by meeting the requirements of their specific bache-
lor of science curriculum and the University require-
ments described under the academic regulations
section of this catalog. Waiver of program require-
ments is approved through petition endorsed by the
department and the Committee on Standing of Stu-
dents. Students are expected to satisfy the credit
hour requirements of their chosen curriculum. Basic
military science credit hours are in addition to the
credit hours specified by the curriculum. Students are
encouraged to confer with their curriculum advisor
on all matters related to their program.
Honors Programs
Outstanding students in the college may participate in
the Comprehensive Honors Program. Each depart-
ment offers honors work, and adapts this to its cur-
riculum.
Outstanding students may receive permission to do
independent study on an unscheduled basis, thereby
proceeding more rapidly and more deeply than is
possible in regular programs. This enables students
who are qualified for and interested in this work to
proceed in a direction agreed upon with their honors
advisor, leading to the preparation of an undergradu-
ate thesis. For further information see the section on
the Comprehensive Honors Program.
Inspection Trips
Inspection trips to industrial plants are a required
part of specific courses in various engineering curricu-
la. Written reports may be required. These trips are
generally held during the senior year and involve an
average expense of $25 to $50. The location of the
University in the center of industrial activities of
various types furnishes unusual opportunities for
visits of inspection to engineering plants.
Arts-Engineering Curricula
Under the five-year plan the student is in the College
of Arts and Science for four years, earning the B.A.
degree on completion of a program which includes,
along with specific B.A. training, the fundamental
mathematical, scientific, and engineering subjects of
the engineering curriculum of his choice. In the fifth
year the student is enrolled in the College of Engi-
neering, carrying on a program leading to the degree
of B.S.in the selected curriculum.
Engineering students who decide at any stage of
their program to work for both the B.A. and B.S.
degrees are urged to work with their advisors toward
the formulation of an augmented program meeting
the requirements of both degrees. If the decision is
made prior to the third year both degree require-
ments may be satisfied within a total of five years.
College of Engineering: Arts-Engineering Curricula 47
Special Academic Opportunities
Lehigh's Interdisciplinary Tradition
Lehigh has traditionally taken advantage of its rela-
tively small size and lack of rigid departmental lines
to develop flexible and interdisciplinary programs. On
the graduate level, a student may choose to pursue
work by field rather than department in such areas as
computer science, applied mathematics and manage-
ment science (see Interdisciplinary Graduate Programs,
p. 69). The graduate student may also do his thesis
or dissertation research in one of the eight interdis-
ciplinary centers, which are described in detail on
pages 71 to 81.
Interdisciplinary work on the undergraduate level
can be arranged in each of the colleges for the student
desiring a concentration in a field outside a usual
major. In the College of Engineering, a student may
develop a minor in a field of his interest, not neces-
sarily even in his college. In the College of Arts and
Science, special interdisciplinary majors may be in-
dividually developed to suit a student's needs (see
page 36). Current examples of such programs include
such combinations as fine arts and history, informa-
tion science and electrical engineering, business and
psychology, mathematics and social relations, and
journalism and urban studies.
Alert to the increasing desire of students for
courses related to contemporary and political prob-
lems, the faculty has developed interdisciplinary pro-
grams in such areas as urban studies, oceanography,
environmental sciences and resource management,
fundamental science, American studies, and Afro-
American studies.
The program in urban studies, outlined under
government in the description of courses, is intended
to provide undergraduate instruction for students
who wish to enter professional careers that require
interdisciplinary knowledge of the problems of urban
life or who will be pursuing graduate studies in urban
affairs. Several cooperating departments, associated
with the Center for Marine and Environmental
Studies, provide instruction in marine ecology,
biological oceanography, sanitary microbiology,
water supply and transport, and environmental plan-
ning. Because environmental studies are interdisciplin-
ary in nature, the emphasis in these courses is to pro-
vide a general introduction to the undergraduate plan
ning graduate study in a specialized area.
In addition, there is the Social Welfare Education
Program, designed to provide semi-professional train-
ing in social work. The program is desirable for stu-
dents interested in various areas of counseling and
guidance work, the ministry and in urban planning.
The program constitutes a minor of four courses
taken in sequence at various colleges of the Lehigh
Valley.
Further information on the other programs listed
above may be found by consulting the index.
Opportunities
High Immediate Relevance Courses
In addition to the sensitive topics outlined above, a
program of High Immediate Relevance (HIR) courses
enables all instructional departments to introduce
courses temporarily within a semester. HIR courses
are normally either experimental courses or courses
based on contemporary social and scientific issues.
They may later become part of the regular curriculum
if proved successful. HIR courses can be taken on a
pass/fail basis. Since most HIR courses are not devel-
oped in time to be included in this catalog listing,
they are identified with a 97-98 number and are in-
corporated in the Registrar's official semester roster
for a maximum of two semesters. A sample listing of
HIR courses includes: Media and Values; Fiction and
the Technological Vision; Physics for Poets; Art,
Technology and Environmental Sculpture; Economics
and Society; Seminar in Oriental Religions; Television
Workshop; and The Black in American Literature.
Change of Major
There is a great flexibility in undergraduate curricula
at Lehigh intended to take into consideration the
changing interests and needs of students. For exam-
ple, in the College of Engineering, each department
provides a range of hours needed for graduation to
provide flexibility to the student who wants to take
more or less work outside the department. This flexi-
Special Academic Opportunities: Lehigh's Interdisciplinary Tradition 49
bility extends to late changes ol tnajoi 01 even college
without loss "i credits.
The graduate student may find !> is interests shift
ing to a now field .is he progresses in liis educational
program or he may wish to strengthen his preparation
. areer by advanced study in ,\ related field or in
.m interdisciplinary progr.im. The policy ot the
Graduate School is to provide as much flexibility as
possible to the student who wishes to change to a
new but related Held ot study after either his bacca-
laureate or liis master's degree.
The student should consult with the director of liis
previous program and with the director of the new
field in which he is interested to establish the course
program that will remedy any deficiencies in back-
ground and will be of maximum value to him. Stu-
dents who have just completed a bachelor's degree in
one field at Lehigh University may find it advantage-
ous to study for a graduate degree in a related field
under a new group of the faculty without losing the
continuity and familiarity provided by staying on this
campus.
Five-Year, Two-Degree Programs
Another feature ot Lehigh's flexibility is the oppor-
tunity for five-year, two-degree programs which en-
able a student to receive either two bachelor degrees
or a bachelor and a master's degree upon completion
of five years of study.
Most five-year, two-degree programs appear in the
description of courses under Arts-Engineering and
Five-Year Programs. It is possible to arrange for a
dual bachelor degree program even after studying at
Lehigh for some period of time. An engineering stu-
dent, for example, who decides at any stage of his
study that he wishes to meet the requirements for
both the bachelor of arts and the bachelor of science
degree may complete the combined requirements in
five or possibly six years, depending on when he de-
cided to try for both degrees.
Of increasing interest to undergraduates are the
two-degree, five-year programs which enable one to
secure a bachelor and a master's degree. Because
Lehigh's well-established graduate programs are
closely integrated with the undergraduate programs,
it is possible to consider programs leading to the engi-
neering-master of business administration degree, the
arts-M.B.A. degree, the engineering-master of science
in materials program, 01 the lilih yeai program in the
"il of Education which enables those receiving a
h.A. degree to accomplish professional teacher train-
ing and serve as a salaried intern in the public schools.
After the completion of one year ol lull time teach-
ing, the student can receive the master of arts for
secondary teachers or the master of education degree
for elementary teachers. Many other five-year,
graduate-level combination programs exist, and the
student is advised to consult with his advisor in plan-
ning such a program.
Pre-Law and Pre-Mcdical Programs
Although no formal programs exist, Lehigh students
have been very successful in attaining entrance to
medical, dental and law schools. Pre-med and pre-law
programs can be worked out for students in each of
the three undergraduate colleges. Coordinated six-
year undergraduate programs are now being develop-
ed with several medical colleges in Philadelphia.
Interested students should consult with their curricu-
lum advisor or the pre-med or pre-law advisor.
Research Initiates
Undergraduate students who seek or are considering a
career involving research are encouraged to investigate
the possibility of becoming research initiates in their
junior or senior years. A research initiate is attached
to a specific research project in progress on the cam-
pus, serving as an assistant to an advanced graduate
student or to a staff member. He assists in experi-
ments, sits in on project conferences, and if occasion
permits, undertakes small side investigations appropri-
ate to his competence.
The research initiate may receive degree credit by
registering for unrostered work for up to 6 hours per
semester. In a few cases, a nominal stipend may be
paid for his work, and summer employment is also
occasionally available. The student should explore the
possibility of becoming a research initiate with his
curriculum advisor.
Accelerated Programs
It is possible for Lehigh students to accelerate their
programs so that they may graduate in as little as
three years. Such programs are made possible by
credits awarded for advanced standing upon admis-
50 Special Academic Opportunities: Research Initiates
sion, credit by examination, overloads, and summer
work. Again, interested students should consult with
their curriculum advisors.
Special Summer Opportunities
In addition to the normal opportunities offered to
students, both graduate and undergraduate, in
summer school for both remedial and accelerated
work, special programs are available for intense in-
depth experiences as well as for field work. Examples
include the Robert A. Taft Institute of Government
and the Field Work in Archaeology program (History
403) run by the department of history and Moravian
College. Summer short courses and workshops are
offered in a wide variety of subject areas. Interested
students should consult with their curriculum
director or the Director of Summer Session.
Apprentice Teaching
Apprentice teaching is designed for advanced stu-
dents, normally in their senior year, who wish to
learn about teaching under the guidance of an experi-
enced teacher. Master and apprentice teachers are,
with the approval of the chairman of the department
in which the apprentice teaching is done, free for the
most part to work out whatever arrangements best fit
the needs of the course. Apprentices typically receive
three hours of credit for attending all classes, doing
some lecturing or leading of discussion sections,
assisting in making up and grading some written
assignments and tests, and being available for some
individual consultation with students. A student may
register for apprentice teaching only once each semes-
ter, and only twice (for credit) in his college career,
for a maximum total of six hours of credit. He may
be an apprentice teacher (for credit) in a given course
only once. A graduate student who is not a paid
teaching assistant may register for apprentice teach-
ing, but his department must decide whether the
credit he receives for the course will count toward
fulfilling his course requirements for a graduate de-
gree. The apprentice will be graded by his master
teacher. Students who wish to do apprentice teaching
in extra-departmental courses, such as those offered
as Freshman Seminars or Creative Concepts courses,
may do so with the approval of the director of the
program. Such students will be registered for course
number 300 in the appropriate program (e.g., F.S.
300: Apprentice Teaching in F.S. 97C; or C.C. 300:
Apprentice Teaching in C.C. 101).
Study in Foreign Countries
To the extent that their courses of study permit it,
students maintaining a "B" average or better are
encouraged to consider spending one or two semes-
ters of study in acceptable "junior year abroad" pro-
grams or as regularly enrolled students in a foreign
university. Among the accepted programs are New
York University in Spain, Smith College and Wayne
State University in Germany, Sweet Briar and
Hamilton in France, and Dickinson College at
Bologna, Italy. Students declared qualified for accept-
able foreign study remain eligible to apply for finan-
cial aid from Lehigh University.
To emphasize further University interest in inter-
national study, the University has provided funds to
cover transportation, tuition, and living expense
stipend for a graduating senior desiring to study
abroad.
The Modern Foreign Languages Department
offers, subject to annual approval by the admini-
stration, a second semester program in academic
subjects available at a German university with Lehigh
credit. The program is open to students with junior
standing or above.
The Modern Foreign Languages Department also
offers summer language and literature programs in
Paris, France, Salzburg, Austria, and Santander,
Spain. These programs provide up to six hours of
academic credit, and are open to undergraduate and
graduate students in good standing at an accredited
school of higher learning, and to elementary and
secondary school teachers in service.
The Washington Semester
Opportunity is available each year for several selected
juniors or seniors to spend one semester of study in
the nation's capital through cooperation with
American University in Washington, D.C., and some
sixty other colleges and universities.
The students enroll at Lehigh but spend the semes-
ter in residence at American University with the stu-
dents from the participating colleges.
Special Academic Opportunities: The Washington Semester 51
Freshman Seminars
Interdisciplinary problem-centered Freshman
Seminars (FS) are offered each semestei to freshmen
enrolled in any curriculum. The seminars deal with
primary problems of contemporary culture and are
intended to challenge the ciiucntion.il idealism ol
freshmen. A three credit hour seminar will tultill
general studios requirements in the College ot Engi-
neering or distribution requirements in the College ol
Arts and Science.
Most freshmen courses are introductions to disci-
plines, that is, courses in which the student learn
procedures that will enable him to take more special-
ized courses. Problem-centered Freshman Seminars
are based on the premise that these typical courses
should be complemented by studies that relate con-
temporary cultural problems to the many disciplines
in the humanities and in the sciences.
Enrollment in the seminars is limited. Freshman
interested in enrolling arc invited to complete the
appropriate forms distributed with other pre -registra-
tion materials and to consult with their faculty ad-
visor.
Typical Freshman Seminars offered in recent
semesters include Energy and Society, Change and
Crisis in American Colleges, Man and His Man-Made
World, Science and Moral Values, The Revolt of the
Inarticulate, and Environmental Crises. Freshman
Seminars are also offered on a regular basis by some
departments as a part ot their normal course offer-
ings, for example. History 51 and 52.
Afro-American Studies
The University offers a number of courses that are
relevant to Afro-American studies. Representative
courses are S.R. 368, Urban Community; Hist. 331,
The Negro in America; Govt. 352, Civil Rights; and
Engl. 345, Themes in American Literature. Students
who are interested in Afro-American studies work out
their individual programs with their major advisors or
with the dean of their college.
Cooperative College Program
Lehigh is a member of the incorporated LVAIC
(Lehigh Valley Association of Independent Colleges).
This consortium also includes Allentown College of
St. Francis de Sales in Center Valley, Cedar Crest and
Muhlenbi es in Allentown, Moravian College
in Bethlehem, and I afayette College in Easton.
Under an agrecmem among the coll < "i IVAIC
students on "in- 1 ampus may cross register lor courses
given on another campus. Students desiring to take
advantage of this opportunity must obtain the con-
sent of the course instructors and advisors concerned
and accept differences in ( alendar and course schedul-
ing. They must provide their own transportation. A
student taking a course on another campus under this
arrangement does not pay extra tuition tor the privi-
lege, and the course he takes and the grade he makes
in it arc recorded on the transcript ol his home insti-
tution. The agreement applies only to undergraduate
students and extends to both the academic year and
summer sessions.
A cooperative Social Welfare Education Program
designed to provide preparation for entrance-level
professional competence in social welfare positions is
sponsored by LVAIC. Lehigh students wishing to
participate in this program should consult with the
chairman of the department of social relations.
Comprehensive Honors Program
The Comprehensive Honors Program is designed to
permit students who demonstrate unusual academic
ability and interest to explore more widely than their
curricula would normally allow and to engage in inde-
pendent study and research.
Freshman-Sophomore Years. These are the years in
which a student normally chooses his major field of
study and lays the required groundwork for it. Thus,
honors opportunities are limited.
Honors opportunities for freshmen consist of
assignment before registration of those most qualified
to honors courses in place of certain required fresh-
man courses, and acceleration through the attainment
of advanced standing. Advanced standing may be
certified by the Office of Admission and the registrar
on the basis of college credit granted for certain
special secondary school courses. Generally, however,
students who seek advanced standing should arrange
to take the relevant tests under the CEEB Advanced
Placement Program.
There are no specific sophomore honors opportu-
nities. However, second-semester freshmen and all
sophomores who wish to accelerate their programs
may seek waiver of the junior-standing prerequisite
52 Special Academic Opportunities: Cooperative College Program
for courses numbered "100" to "399," if they have
the course prerequisites. Students interested in so
doing should consult the dean of the college in which
they are registered.
Any undergraduate may accelerate his program by
passing by special examination any course he feels he
already has mastered. Interested students should con-
sult with the chairman of the department indicated.
Junior-Senior Years. Honor students are those with a
cumulative average of 3.0 or higher. In the first or
second semester of his junior year, an honor student
may choose to work for Interdepartmental Honors,
or Departmental Honors. Particularly well-qualified
students sometimes work for both. An honor student
enrolled in one or both of these programs is desig-
nated a "University Scholar."
Students with cumulative averages of less than 3.0
may under some circumstances by permitted to work
for Departmental Honors.
Departmental Honors
These programs give the University Scholar the op-
portunity to study in his major field more intensively
and in greater depth than the standard program pro-
vides. The precise nature of the program for each
student is determined by his major department. The
program may include:
a) Unscheduled work or independent study (up to
four hours per semester in the junior year; up to six
hours per semester in the senior year).
b) Waiver of graduate standing: undergraduate
students will be permitted by petition to the Gradu-
ate School to register in a 400 course for which they
have the necessary prerequisites under the conditions
that they: (1) have maintained a 3.00 average in each
of the two semesters prior to the date of the petition,
and (2) will carry a course load not to exceed 15
hours unless 4-credit courses, R.O.T.C. and the like,
raise it to 17 hours maximum.
c) Honors thesis or project.
A candidate for Departmental Honors must announce
to his major advisor during his junior year, or no later
than the beginning of his senior year, his intention to
work for Departmental Honors. Each major advisor
must submit to the registrar, the dean of the college,
and the chairman of Honors Programs, no later than
the close of registration of each fall semester, the
names of seniors who are working for Departmental
Honors in his major. The names of those students
who attain Departmental Honors will be announced
at the graduation exercises.
Interdepartmental Honors
The Interdepartmental Honors Program offers quali-
fied undergraduates the opportunity to devote part of
their junior and senior years to independent study
through a series of limited enrollment seminars
known as Creative Concepts Seminars, and the pre-
paration of a thesis or other project.
The seminars are each based on one of the four
large areas of human knowledge: humanities; life
sciences; physical sciences; and social sciences. To-
gether with the final thesis or project, they provide a
foretaste of the kind of work and of the standards the
students will encounter in graduate and professional
schools.
University Scholars in this program are graduated
with Interdepartmental Honors if, in addition to
meeting all requirements for graduation, they have:
(a) Completed three Creative Concepts Seminars
with an average grade of at least 3.33, or four semi-
nars with an average grade 3.25.
(b) Completed an Honors Thesis or Project with a
grade of "A."
No student who enrolls in the Interdepartmental
Honors Program is obligated to complete it; he may,
if he wishes, register for only such seminars as appeal
to him.
Admission. Each sophomore eligible for admission to
the Interdepartmental Honors Programs will be noti-
fied of his eligibility before the pre-registration period
in his fourth semester. A student is eligible to apply
for admission if he has a cumulative three-semester
average of at least 3.0.
Each applicant must submit to the chairman of
Honors Program an application approved by the
chairman of the department in which he is majoring.
(Forms are obtained from the chairman of Honors
Program.)
The Program. A student admitted to the Interdepart-
mental Honors Program must:
(a) Continue to pursue a major program since an
Honors Program does not constitute a major.
(b) Schedule at least three Creative Concepts Semi-
nars during his junior and senior years. It is possible
to schedule only one seminar per semester. The semi-
Special Academic Opportunities: Comprehensive Honors Program 53
ii.ii ^ offered carry the following course numbers and
broad titles:
Creative Concepts 101: The Humanities (3)
ative Concepts 102: The I ife S< iences (3)
Creative Concepts 103: The Physical Sciences (3)
Creative Concepts 104: The Social Sciences (3).
Under these headings .i variety of courses is offer
ed. Instructors are selected trom the University
faculty, and each is given liberty to pursue any topic
and course of inquiry lie wishes, guided only by the
idea that he will deal in some way with concepts he
considers significant in man's attempt to understand
himself and his world. Ideally the student should
sample at least three of the broad areas, but this is
not always possible.
(c) Produce an Honors Thesis or other approved
project by scheduling Creative Concepts 190: Honors
Thesis (3 to 6 credits) during one or both semesters
of his senior year (or during the preceding summer),
if unusual circumstances prevent such scheduling, the
student can develop other procedures in consultation
with the chairman of Honors Programs. The thesis or
project must be supervised by a member of the facul-
ty who has agreed to work with the student and who
has been approved to do so. The student should sub-
mit a proposal signed by the advisor and by the chair-
man of the student's major department to the chair-
man of Honors Programs no later than the beginning
of his eighth semester.
Presidential Prizes
Lehigh University offers each year ten Presidential
Prizes valued at S4.000 each, for four years of
college. These are reserved for entering freshmen and
are awarded on a competitive basis, irrespective of
financial need. Each prize provides S500 per semes-
ter, credited toward tuition, in any of the three
undergraduate colleges of the University.
The prizes once assigned continue in force for the
full four years of the student's residence at Lehigh
University, unless the holder fails to meet the normal
scholastic requirement of a 3.00 average or better and
the qualifications of a good citizen. In rare instances
this requirement may be waived upon unanimous
vote of the prize committee and the approval of the
president. The prize is based strictly on merit, with-
out regard to financial need.
In order to compete for one of the prizes .i fresh -
indidate must:
(1) Be a successful candidate for admission in any
ol the three undergraduate colleges. Arts and Science,
Business and Economics, or Engineering, with evi-
dence of promise of high academic achievement.
(2) Submit a separate prize application providing
more detailed information regarding any important
piece of creative work, independent study, evidence
of leadership potential, notable accomplishments
which do not appear on the regular record submitted
for admission, or the promise of making an extra-
ordinary contribution to the life of Lehigh. Thus the
applicant may show high achievement in such diverse
areas as the arts, the sciences, athletics, original
scholarship, literature, or music.
(3) Be interviewed by a member of the Lehigh
faculty, generally a member of the prize committee.
If distance prohibits a campus visit, the interview may
be with a selected alumni.
All candidates for admission are automatically
eligible to compete for one of these prizes and will be
so considered. A preliminary selection of finalists will
be made in January when prize applications will be
distributed and interviews conducted. Winners will be
announced in April. It is possible to receive a Presi-
dential Prize and also qualify for other forms of
financial aid. The Parent's Confidential Statement,
however, is not required to be considered for a prize.
Prizes will be made in the order of the contestants'
ratings on such weighted factors as secondary school
scholastic record, evidences of effective leadership
and distinguished group service, character and person-
ality, and performance in the College Entrance Exam-
ination Board tests. The prizes follow the general plan
of the prestigious academic scholarships typified by
the Rhodes Scholarships. Geographic location will
play some part in the final selection. Men and women
students are equally eligible.
54 Special Academic Opportunities: Presidential Prizes
The Graduate School
Robert Daniel Stout, Dean
Areas of Graduate Study
Graduate study was a part of the original plan of the
University and was announced in its first Register in
1866. More definite organization of the work along
lines that are now generally accepted dates from
1883. Since that time the degrees of Master of Arts
and Master of Science have been offered without
interruption. The degree of Doctor of Philosophy was
also announced for a time and twice conferred. In the
middle nineties this degree was withdrawn and
doctoral work not again offered until 1936, when it
was once more authorized by the trustees. In the
same year the Graduate School was organized, with a
graduate faculty which had full power to enact the
necessary legislation governing the work of the
school. In 1960 a program of studies leading to the
degree of Doctor of Education was first offered. A
Doctor of Arts program was begun in 1971.
The rules and regulations of the faculty are devel-
oped by a Graduate Committee composed of the
President or his representative, the Dean of the
Graduate School, and twelve elected members of the
faculty.
The Graduate School, in certain areas, offers quali-
fied students opportunity for intensive advanced
study and for specialized training in methods of in-
vestigation and research, with a view to their develop-
ment as scholars and independent investigators. The
school also aims to serve the needs of teachers and
prospective teachers in elementary and secondary
schools by providing opportunities for advanced pro-
fessional training, and by preparing them for adminis-
trative positions.
Major work leading to the master's degree may be
taken in the following fields: applied mathematics,
applied mechanics, biology, business and economics,
chemical engineering, chemistry, civil engineering,
computer science, economics, education, electrical
engineering, English, geology, government, history,
industrial engineering, information sciences, inter-
national relations, management science, mathematics,
materials, mechanical engineering, metallurgy and
materials science, modern foreign languages and
literatures, physics, political science, psychology, and
social relations. In the fields of Greek and Latin, ad-
vanced degrees are not offered; but students majoring
in other fields may take collateral work in these fields
from the list of courses acceptable for graduate
credit.
Work leading to the doctor's degree is offered in
the following fields: applied mathematics, applied
mechanics, biology, business and industrial econom-
ics, chemical engineering, chemistry, civil engineering,
economics, education, electrical engineering, English,
geology, government, history, industrial engineering,
information sciences, mathematics, mechanical engi-
neering, metallurgy and materials science, physics,
and psychology.
Admission to Graduate Standing
A graduate of an accredited college, university, or
technical institution is eligible for consideration for
admission to the Graduate School at Lehigh Universi-
ty. Actual admission is subject to enrollment limita-
tions in each department and is therefore competi-
tive. An application for admission to the Graduate
School may be secured from the Office of Admission.
The candidate should file this application as far in
advance as possible of the beginning of the semester
when he wishes to undertake his graduate work. In
addition to the application the candidate should also
request that each institution of higher learning which
he has attended send directly to the Office of Ad-
mission a transcript of his academic record. An appli-
cation fee of S10 will be charged.
A prospective graduate student is invited to com-
municate directly with the chairman of the depart-
ment in which he is interested. If it is convenient for
him to visit the University prior to completing his
admission or prior to registration, a consultation with
the chairman of the department (or his representa-
tive) will assist the department in working out a
program for the student and will aid the student by
giving him a better understanding of the facilities and
opportunities for graduate study at the University.
The submission of Graduate Record Examination
The Graduate School: Admission 57
- by i student applying foi admission is urged.
n I hi m. it ion about this examination, write to the
itionaJ Testing Service, 20 Nassau St., Princeton,
New Jersey.) It .1 student is applying foi admission to
graduate work in education, scores may be submitted
tot either the Graduate Record Examination or the
Miller Analogies Test. Candidates lor graduate work
in business administration may submit scores for the
Admissions Test for Graduate Students in Business.
In all three instances, test scores may under certain
circumstances be required.
Foreign students are required to submit evidence
of competence in use of English. Tests such as those
administered by the International Institute of Educa-
tion or the Educational Testing Service arc suitable
for this purpose.
Admission to graduate standing permits the stu-
dent to take any course for which he has the neces-
sary qualifications. It does not imply admission to
candidacy for a degree. Admission to candidacy for
an advanced degree is granted in accordance with the
provisions set forth below under degrees.
A graduate student who is absent from the Univer-
sity tor a semester or more must obtain the written
approval of the chairman of his major department in
order to be readmitted to graduate standing. If the
student has not established a major, he must obtain
the approval of the Dean of the Graduate School.
Students of Lehigh University who are within a
few hours of meeting the requirements for the bache-
lor's degree may, if given permission by the Graduate
Committee, enroll for a limited amount of work for
graduate credit.
Resident Graduate Student
A resident graduate student is one whose primary
activity is work toward an advanced degree. He must
spend at least 20 hours per week on research and/or
course work toward the degree, and he may not
receive income from any employment requiring
services totaling more than 20 hours per week.
A student is recognized as a candidate for the doc-
toral degree if (a) he has completed at least one year
as a resident graduate student (as defined above) or
holds a master's degree or its equivalent, (b) he has
maintained a minimum average of 3.0 in his graduate
courses, and (c) he has formally notified the dean of
the Graduate School through his department his in-
tention to studv loi ilu- ,1,,, toral degree.
This recognition ol the student's status as a
d iral candidate is not necessarily an assurance thai
the student will be able to meet the requirements of
the degree.
Special Student
A student who docs not wish to or may not qualify
for admission to the Graduate School as a graduate
student may apply to the Office of Admission foi
admission as a special student. He must hold a bacca-
laureate degree or have equivalent experience. He
may register for courses up to and including the
300-level at the standard graduate tuition rate. Ad-
mission depends on approval by both the relevant
major department and the Graduate School office.
Status as a special student does not prohibit a later
application for admission as a graduate student.
Registration
Several days are set aside for graduate registration just
prior to the beginning of the semester as indicated in
the calendar. However, a student, once admitted, can
complete advance registration anytime in January,
June, or August as the case may be, by obtaining a
registration ticket in the office of the Registrar and
arranging in advance for an interview with his advisor.
Anyone who can register in advance is urged to do so.
Normally students are expected to complete their
registration before the close of the third day of in-
struction. Registration after the tenth day of instruc-
tion in a regular semester or the fifth day in a summer
session is permitted only when the express consent of
the Dean of the Graduate School has been obtained.
A $10 late registration fee will be charged. Unregister-
ed students are not permitted to attend classes
beyond the 10-day grace period.
It should be noted that graduate work itself starts
promptly at the beginning of the term, and it is fre-
quently true that graduate courses can be given only
if there is a certain minimum demand for them. Delay
in enrolling for a given course may therefore cause
the course to be withdrawn.
58 The Graduate School: Registration
Tuition and Fees
The tuition in the Graduate School is $1425 per
semester or SI 19 per semester hour for 1973-74. A
listener's fee of SI 19 for 1973-74 is charged for each
course audited, unless the student is already paying
the full tuition fee. The maximum full-time roster of
graduate courses, including audited courses, is 15
semester hours. No exception to this rule is made. All
students using the resources of the University must be
registered.
In addition to the usual tuition an intern student is
required to pay a S400 per year intern fee.
Bills are paid at the Bursar's Office. If desired,
payment may be made in installments: 60 percent plus
a service charge of $3 per semester, due prior to regis-
tration; 20 percent due one month after registration;
20 percent due two months after registration. The $3
service charge is not refundable.
The University will award educational grants to all
qualified elementary and secondary school personnel
enrolled in the Graduate School. These grants for
teachers, either in full-time service or on leave from
such appointment, amount to S660 per semester or
S55 per semester hour in 1973-74.
To qualify for the doctorate, all students must pay
tuition fees equivalent to three full years (90 credit
hours) beyond the bachelor's degree or two full years
(60 credit hours) beyond the master's degree. Until
these fees are met, resident doctoral candidates must
pay a minimum registration fee of SI, 000 each semes-
ter and summer period. Similarly, part-time doctoral
candidates must register for a minimum of 3 credit
hours of courses or dissertation until the fees are met.
Thereafter doctoral candidacy must be maintained by
a registration fee of S100 per semester and summer
period until work for the degree is completed. How-
ever, resident students who, during their entire doc-
toral program, have paid continuously full tuition (or
10 hours per semester in the case of TA's and RA's)
will be considered as having satisfied the tuition re-
quirements for the doctoral degree upon completion
of all other degree requirements.
Doctoral candidates registering for dissertation
should indicate credit hours corresponding to the
tuition paid (calculated at $119 per credit hour). This
procedure will assure that proper credit toward the
minimum tuition fees is recorded. When the sum of
course credits and dissertation credits rostered
beyond the master's degree (or its equivalent of 30
semester hours) reaches a total of 60 semester hours,
the minimum tuition fees will have been met. The
Dean of the Graduate School should be consulted in
any case where the proper amount of the registration
fee is in doubt.
The fee for each language examination required of
the student by his department is $8.
The fee for microfilming and binding of the
master's thesis is S15, the receipt for which is pre-
sented with the completed thesis to the Graduate
School Office.
In the case of the doctorate, the publication fee is
S35. If a copyright of the dissertation is desired, an
additional fee of $15 is required.
Identification cards, entitling the holder to attend
the various campus events, are issued to graduate
students at a fee of $10 for the full academic year,
and $5 for the period from January to June. Students
registered for 9 credit hours or more are entitled to
an identification card without charge.
Transcripts
Each student is entitled to one copy of his record free
of charge. This can be an official or unofficial tran-
script. Unofficial copies are released to the student;
official copies are sent directly to the educational
institution, company, state board, etc., as the circum-
stances may require. After the first copy is released a
fee of SI is assessed for each subsequent copy.
Refunds
A graduate student who formally withdraws from the
University or who, o'n the advice of his department
chairman and with the approval of the dean, finds it
necessary to reduce his roster below twelve hours in
any regular semester, may qualify for a tuition re-
fund. The amount of refund is equal to the tuition
paid for the course or courses being dropped less 15
percent of this tuition for each full or fractional week
of the semester computed from the date of the begin-
ning of instruction in courses open to graduate stu-
dents. There is no refund for semester hours dropped
if the remaining roster totals 12 or more hours.
A summer session student who formally withdraws
from the University is entitled to receive a refund of
his total tuition less $5 for each credit hour for which
The Graduate School: Tuition and Fees 59
he is registered and less .1 deduction foi each day ol
regulai instruction "I -I percent ol the total tuition
paid computed from the lust da) ol instrut tion in
the session,
In the event ol the death ol .1 student or his in-
voluntary induction into the armed forces, fees will
be refunded in proportion to the fraction ol the
semester remaining .it the time ol the student's de ith
or induction,
A student who is suspended or expelled from the
University is not entitled to any refunds.
Degrees
The maximum roster ot a full-time graduate student
is fifteen semester liours. Graduate students who are
employed elsewhere and can give only part of tlieir
time to graduate work must restrict the size of their
rosters accordingly.
Graduate students who hold University appoint-
ments of any kind are permitted to enroll for only a
limited amount of graduate work. Full-time em-
ployees of the University may not take more than six
semester liours ot graduate work in any one semester;
half-time employees may not take more than ten
semester liours.
With the consent of the chairman of his major
department and of the chairman of the department
concerned, a graduate student may be admitted as a
regular listener in one or more courses, which
course(s) shall be outside his approved program of
studies for the degree, provided that the total number
of hours in which he is registered and in which he is a
listener shall not exceed the limits set forth above. In
no case shall a student who has attended a course as a
listener be given an examination for credit in that
course. A listener's fee is charged for each course
audited.
Students desiring to qualify for graduate degrees in
the minimum time should have pursued an under-
graduate major in the subject equivalent to that offer-
ed at Lehigh. At the discretion of the chairman of the
department, a limited number of credits in closely
allied subjects may be accepted in lieu of courses in
the undergraduate major. Those with undergraduate
deficiencies who are admitted because they are other-
wise well-qualified will be expected to make up such
deficiencies in addition to satisfying the minimum
requirement for the degree sought.
I iling "i \pplii ation foi Degree
Candidates for degrees t<> be conferred in M.iv file
with the Registrar, on .1 form provided for the put
pose, on in befi ire April I . .1 writt n ni il ii 1 of their
1 andidat y; candidates for degrees to be conferred in
October file .1 similar notice on or before September
10; candidates for degrees conferred in December
must file on or before December I. Failure to file
such notice by the dates mentioned may bar the
candidate from receiving the degree at the ensuing
graduation exercises. If a late application can be
accepted, the candidate is assessed a $10 fee to help
cover the extra cost of processing.
In addition to the degree requirements set forth
below, there may be departmental requirements in
the field of the major. These requirements appear in
the separate departmental statements in the section,
description of courses.
Master's Degrees
The master's degree is granted to properly qualified
students who complete satisfactorily at least two full
semesters of advanced work. In meeting the require-
ments for the degree, the student must comply with
the following regulations.
Each candidate for the master's degree must sub-
mit for the approval of the Graduate Committee the
program of courses he proposes to take to satisfy the
requirements. This program must have the approval
of the chairman of the student's major department,
and all courses included which are not offered by the
student's major department must also be approved by
the chairman of the departments concerned. The
program should be submitted as soon as possible after
completion of 15 credits toward the degree. Approval
of the program by the Graduate Committee signifies
that the student has formally been admitted to candi-
dacy for the degree.
The minimum program for the master's degree
must include:
a. Not less than thirty semester hours of graduate
work;
b. Not less than eighteen hours of "400" level
course work;
c. Not less than eighteen hours in the major field;
d. Not less than fifteen hours of "400" courses in
the major field.
60 The Graduate School: Degrees
The eighteen hours required in the major field are
ordinarily taken in one department. Specific excep-
tions to this rule are mentioned in the departmental
statements at the head of course listings. The remain-
ing twelve hours of a minimum program, or any part
of them, may also be taken in the major department;
or they may be taken in any other field in which
courses for graduate credit are offered, as the needs
or interests of the student may indicate, subject to
the approval of the chairman of the major depart-
ment. In all cases, the work for the master's degree
must be taken under at least two instructors.
Graduate students registered in "200" and "300"
courses may be assigned additional work at the dis-
cretion of the instructor.
In order to qualify for the master's degree, candi-
dates will be required to submit a thesis or a report
based on a research course of at least 3 credit hours,
or to pass a comprehensive examination given by the
major department. The department will specify which
of these requirements applies, and may specify both.
If required, the thesis shall not count for more than
six semester hours. The credit to be allowed shall be
fixed by the chairman of the major department. One
unbound typewritten copy of the thesis, approved by
the faculty members under whom the work was done
and by the chairman of the major department, shall
be placed in the hands of the Dean of the Graduate
School with a receipt for SI 5. 00 to cover the fee for
microfilming at least three weeks before the day on
which the degree is to be conferred. Information as to
the form in which the thesis must be presented may
be obtained from the Office of the Graduate School.
The master's degree is not granted unless the can-
didate has earned the grades "A" or "B" in at least
eighteen hours of work of his program. No course in
which the grade earned is less than "C" is credited
toward the degree. A student who receives more than
four grades below "B" in courses numbered "200" or
higher becomes ineligible to qualify for the master's
degree or to register for any other "400" courses.
All work which is to be credited toward a master's
degree must normally be done in attendance at
Lehigh University, and must be completed within a
six-year period.
When all requirements have been met, the candi-
date is recommended by the faculty to the trustees
for the master's degree appropriate to the work
pursued.
Doctor of Philosophy
The degree of Doctor of Philosophy is conferred on
candidates who have demonstrated general profi-
ciency and high attainment in a special field of know-
ledge and capacity to carry on independent investiga-
tion in that field as evidenced by the presentation of
an acceptable dissertation embodying the results of
original research. The requirements for the degrees
are more specifically set forth in the following regula-
tions.
Candidacy
Time Requirements. A candidate ordinarily is ex-
pected to devote three or more academic years to
graduate study. In no case is the degree awarded to
one who has spent less than two full academic years
in graduate work. Study for any specified period of
time, however, is not in itself regarded as sufficient
ground for awarding of the degree.
Graduate work done in residence at other institu-
tions will be accepted in partial fulfillment of the
time requirements, provided such work is approved
by the Graduate Committee and by the departments
concerned.
Work of fragmentary character scattered over a
long period of years, or work completed many years
before the student becomes a candidate for the
degree, is subject to special review by the Graduate
Committee. The extent to which such work may be
credited towards the fulfillment of the time require-
ments will be decided by the committee. All post-
baccalaureate work submitted in a program for the
Ph.D. degree must be completed within a ten-year
period. Candidates entering the doctoral program
with a master's degree from another institution or
after a lapse of several years must complete work
within a five-year period.
Residence Requirements. A candidate for the degree
must complete at least one full academic year of resi-
dent graduate study at Lehigh University. The candi-
date is required to maintain continuous registration
until he completes all requirements for the degree,
including the semester in which the degree is granted.
Approval of the Doctoral Program. Candidates for the
doctorate are accepted in a limited number of depart-
ments only, and a department may limit the number
of candidates accepted in any year. In passing upon a
student's program, the committee will take into con-
The Graduate School: Degrees 61
sideration the applicant's general education, .is well .is
his special qualifications for work in his chosen field,
i applicant is notified by the Dean oi the ( Iradu-
ate School, in writing, ol the action ol the committee
upon his application.
Tin- student and liis faculty .idvisor arc expei ted
to initiate steps lor approval of the student's program
in the first semester following completion of 30 hours
oi graduate credit. The department will determine by
examinations or other credentials whether the stu-
dent is qualified. Application should be submitted to
the Graduate Committee not later than one year after
completion of the master's degree or its equivalent.
Information on the procedure to be followed can be
obtained at the Graduate School Office.
The application of a foreign student must be ac-
companied by a statement trom the department in
which he intends to specialize, certifying that he has a
satisfactory command of English.
A special committee is formed to guide the stu-
dent in his doctoral program. The student should
consult with his advisor on the naming of the com-
mittee and the preparation of the application as early
as possible after he has passed his qualifying examina-
tions or has been accepted by the department to
pursue the degree. The committee is charged with the
responsibilities of assisting the student and the ad-
visor in formulating a course of study and preparing a
suitable proposal for his dissertation, of overseeing
the progress of the student in his research, and of
assessing the final dissertation. Four members are
normally appointed, at least one of them from out-
side the department. The membership of the com-
mittee is approved by the Graduate Committee.
Plan of Work. Preparation for the degree is based on
the study of a major subject to which one or two
minors may be added. The program of work, to be
formulated by the candidate, his special committee,
and the chairman of his major department, should be
planned to lead to a general mastery of the major
field and to a significant grasp of any minor that may
be added.
While there is no definite requirement as to the
number of courses to be taken, two years devoted to
formal courses is customary.
Language Requirements. Language requirements for
the Doctor of Philosophy degree are the option of,
and in the jurisdiction of, the candidate's major de-
partment. They are n<>t .1 University requirement foi
the degree. Each major department shall decide which
languages, it any, shall form .1 part ol each candidate's
doctoral program
Language examinations are the responsibility of a
committee consisting of representatives of the langu-
age department concerned and ol the candidate's
major department. Fee for each examination is $8.
Permission to take the language examinations does
not imply admission to candidacy tor the degree.
Examinations and Dissertation
General Examination. The general examinations for
the doctorate are designed to test both the student's
capacity and his proficiency in his field of study. The
examinations are not necessarily confined to the con-
tent of courses that have been taken at Lehigh Uni-
versity or elsewhere. They are held not later than
seven months prior to the time when the candidate
plans to receive the degree. The student's special com-
mittee is in charge of the examination, which may be
both written and oral.
Should a candidate fail in any part of the general
examinations he may be permitted by the Graduate
Committee to present himself for a second examina-
tion not earlier than five months after the first. If the
results of the second trial are also unsatisfactory no
further examination is set.
Dissertation. The candidate is required to present a
dissertation prepared under the general direction of a
professor at Lehigh University. The dissertation shall
treat a topic related to the candidate's major subject,
embody the results of original research, give evidence
of high scholarship, and constitute a contribution of
knowledge. It must be approved by the professor
under whose direction it was written, by the candi-
date's special committee, and by the Graduate Com-
mittee. A copy bearing written approval of the pro-
fessor in charge must be presented to the Dean of the
Graduate School for transmission to the student's
special committee not later than April 15, if the de-
gree is to be conferred in May; not later than Septem-
ber 1, if the degree is to be conferred in October, not
later than November 9 if the degree is to be conferred
in January.
In order that the student receive proper credit for
tuition payments toward the miminum required,
62 Tlie Graduate School: Degrees
registration for dissertation should indicate the semes-
ter hours covered by the payment.
The candidate shall deposit with the Dean of the
Graduate School, at least two weeks before the
degree is to be conferred: (1) the original or perfect
black and white typescript of the accepted disserta-
tion, unbound, in standard form, and suitable for
microfilming; (2) the first carbon copy of the accept-
ed dissertation; (3) three copies of an abstract of the
dissertation, not exceeding 600 words, accompanied
by a letter from the dissertation supervisor stating
that the abstract is acceptable and suitable for publi-
cation; (4) a receipt from the Bursar for the payment
of the publication fee of thirty-five dollars ($35). The
publication fee is used by the University to defray the
cost of publishing the dissertation on microfilm
(through University Microfilms) and the abstract in
Dissertation Abstracts. If the candidate wishes to
copyright his dissertation, he may do so by paying
the copyright fee of S15 to the Bursar at the time the
publication fee is paid. Arrangements for the copy-
right in the author's name will then be made by the
University through University Microfilms.
Final Examination. After the rough draft of the dis-
sertation has been returned from the Graduate
School, the student should distribute copies to the
members of the special committee. He will arrange a
suitable date for the defense of his dissertation allow-
ing time for the special committee to examine the
draft. The date is sent to the Graduate School Office
for information. The examination is open to the
public, and the department may enlarge the member-
ship of the official examining committee as it sees fit.
Conferring of Degree in Absentia
The degree of Doctor of Philosophy will not be con-
ferred in absentia unless the candidate is excused by
the Dean of the Graduate School.
Doctor of Arts
The degree of Doctor of Arts is offered in the fields
of business and economics, government, and psychol-
ogy for students who wish to prepare for a career of
college teaching in one of those fields. In every
respect admission standards will be equal to those for
the Ph.D. programs, and the D.A. programs have been
developed in accordance with guidelines issued by the
Council of Graduate Schools.
The requirements for the D.A. degree parallel
those for the Ph.D. with the following exceptions: I] )
a broader distribution of graduate courses in the field,
(2) a minor area of study for those students wishing
bidisciplinary preparation for two-year college teach-
ing, (3) course work and training in interpersonal
awareness, (4) a supervised internship in college
teaching, and (5) a project appropriate to college
teaching in the field instead of a dissertation.
Doctor of Education
The degree of Doctor of Education is intended for a
limited number of carefully selected students engaged
in the fields of administration, counseling, founda-
tions, reading, measurement and research, and teach-
ing. Successful professional experience is required for
admission to candidacy for this degree.
In general, requirements for the Ed.D. degree
parallel those already stated for the Ph.D. degree with
the exception of the following: (a) language examina-
tions are not required, (b) a statistics competency
examination is required, (c) a residence requirement
which may be satisfied by an academic year of full-
time study or a semester of full-time study preceded
or followed by a summer session in which 12 semes-
ter hours of credit are earned. There is enough flexi-
bility in. this program to permit certain modifications
appropriate to the specific objectives and background
of the doctoral student. For more detailed informa-
tion, consult the Dean of the School of Education,
and see the section on the School of Education in this
catalog.
Postdoctoral Work
Students who have completed the requirements for
the doctorate may enroll for postdoctoral individual-
ized study under the guidance of selected members of
the faculty. Such a program of study contemplates a
broad educational and research development at ad-
vanced and mature levels, and provides opportunities
to prepare for specific positions. A formal certifica-
tion of such work as may be accomplished by the
student will be made.
The Graduate School: Degrees 63
Resources l<>i Graduate Study
Since the University began in 1961 to encourage the
growth oi its Graduate School, resources available for
gr.ulii.iti- study have greatly increased. Considering
the graduate program to be composed of formal
course instruction and .1 research experience, the Uni-
versity has developed means to enable students fruit-
tullv to pursue such work.
Research provides a principal method of training
and education at an advanced level by concentrated
study on a specific problem under close direction of
senior faculty members. Such study in theory and
experiment assures that classroom teaching is up-to-
date; thus research, classroom, and laboratory instruc-
tion complement each other.
Lehigh has numerous special laboratories to facili-
tate such research in the sciences and engineering.
These laboratories are located in Fritz Laboratory,
which houses the civil engineering department and
the world's second largest universal hydraulic testing
machine: Whitakcr Laboratory, completed in 1965
for the chemical and metallurgical engineering depart-
ments; Sinclair Laboratory, completed in 1970, for
surface chemistry and coatings research; Packard
Laboratory, for electrical engineering, mechanical
engineering, mechanics, and the Computing Center,
the most used laboratory on campus; Williams Hall,
tor biology, geological sciences, psychology, and the
bioelectric research laboratory; the Physics Building;
the Chemistry Building, with the Chandler and
Ullmann Laboratories; and Coxe Laboratory, for
metallurgy and the electronic microscopy laboratory.
The University's Linderman Library houses more
than 400,000 volumes in the humanities and social
sciences, including the rare book collection. The Mart
Science and Engineering Library houses 100,000
volumes and serves the fields of engineering, mathe-
matics and the natural and physical sciences. Re-
sources of other libraries are available through the
nation-wide Interlibrary Loan system.
Under certain programs, Lehigh graduate students
have access to facilities at various industries in the
area. Also, some of the major libraries of the country
are within an hour's drive.
The University's policy is to make these resources
available to all faculty and students, including under-
graduates, but graduate students dominate student
usage of the more sophisticated laboratory facilities
and library holdings.
( )ne 111. in if est. it ion of tin- growth "I gi.idu.it.
education .it Lehigh has been the organization oi
interdisciplinary centers and interdepartmental pro-
jects and co-operation. Recent success with mission-
oriented research using an interdisciplinary
approach — that is, scientists and engineers working
together on a basic problem— promises an interesting
kind of graduate education. Lehigh's interdisciplinary
centers offer an opportunity to implement this new
approach by directing continuous attention to a given
group of problems, stimulating interest in their solu-
tion, and, finally, mobilizing the talent across campus
required for meaningful research. Besides organizing
research, the centers create new courses relative to
their research.
Although most graduate students find their in-
terests served by programs available within a single
department, some may elect to work in interdisciplin-
ary areas, which reach into two or more departments.
Generally, each graduate student's program can be
designed to fulfill his own particular interests, subject
to the requirement that the field thus defined has
scope and depth appropriate for an advanced degree
regardless of whether its boundaries fall within a
single department. Faculty tend to regard departmen-
tal organization more as an administrative convenience
than as a limit to the bounds of their scholarly in-
terests.
General Information
Campus Events
The cultural and athletic events of the University are
open to graduate students who request identification
cards, and recreational facilities are for the use of all.
Lehigh University provides a wide range of social
and athletic activities, concerts and dramatic produc-
tions, and art and book exhibits for students and
their guests, for faculty, neighbors, and alumni.
Housing
Many resident graduate students live in rooms or
apartments near the campus, although from time to
time a limited number of living accommodations are
available in the undergraduate residence halls on the
University campus.
64 The Graduate School: Resources for Graduate Study
It is anticipated that a University-owned and
operated apartment complex for married and gradu-
ate students will open in fall, 1973. This facility,
located in Saucon Valley, will provide efficiency, one
bedroom, two bedroom, and three bedroom garden
style apartments in a rural setting.
Inquiries in regard to accommodations for gradu-
ate students, either married or single, can be directed
to the Office of the Dean of Residence, Lehigh Uni-
versity.
The University cannot assume responsibility for
locating housing. Since accommodations are
scarce, the student is advised to arrange for housing
well in advance of his beginning residence.
Parking Regulations
Graduate students are expected to comply with cam-
pus parking regulations. They should register their
automobiles, and secure instructions from the Office
of the Dean of Students. No fee is charged for this
registration.
Accident and Sickness Reimbursement Insurance
The University requires all resident graduate students
to carry the accident and sickness insurance coverage
which is available at nominal cost at the Bursar's
office, unless the student can present evidence of an
approved coverage of his own.
All students are required to carry insurance for
both accident and illness either through the Universi-
ty or by other approved policies.
Evening Classes
For the benefit of graduate students who by reason
of employment in the fields of teaching or industry,
cannot attend classes during the day, a certain
number of courses are generally offered in the late
afternoon, evening, and on Saturday morning. It
cannot be announced in advance which courses these
will be, but a student who is interested may receive
the necessary information by communicating, before
the beginning of each semester, with the chairman of
the department in the field in which he is interested.
In recent years evening and Saturday classes were
held in accounting, business law, chemical engineer-
ing, civil engineering, economics, English, finance,
government, history, industrial engineering, interna-
tional relations, marketing, mathematics, mechanical
engineering, metallurgy, and psychology. It is antici-
pated that in the future courses will be offered as the
demand warrants.
Summer Session
During the summer, the University offers a compre-
hensive program for undergraduates and graduate
students of two sessions of five weeks each. Many
workshops and special programs dealing with
extremely pertinent topics such as special engineering
courses in surveying, reading and study developmen-
tal laboratory programs, overseas programs, and a
variety of other special credit and non-credit work-
shops and conferences are offered. The special in-
terest programs are designed around the interest of
the student population which normally is in
attendance at Lehigh.
In addition to the summer session offerings at
Lehigh, students are encouraged to study programs
offered at other Lehigh Valley colleges.
Financial Assistance to Graduate Students
Scholarships and Assistantships
Financial support is available to graduate students
from a number of sources and in various forms-
scholarships, fellowships, traineeships, teaching and
research appointments.- The University recognizes the
high cost of graduate study, and encourages qualified
students to explore all available sources of aid.
Scholarships. A scholarship is a grant which covers or
helps to defray tuition. Each is awarded on the basis
of academic promise and financial need. No services
are expected in return.
Fellowships and Traineeships. A fellowship or trainee-
ship is a grant to a graduate student which covers his
tuition and provides an additional stipend to help
meet his living expenses.
The University receives funds from individual
donors and corporations which provide for the sup-
port of several graduate students on scholarships,
fellowships and traineeships. In addition, government
agencies and foundations offer fellowships and other
grants which they award either directly to outstand-
ing students for use at institutions of their choice or
to institutions for award by them directly to the stu-
The Graduate School: Financial Assistance 65
dent.
Appointment to these fellowships is foi .1 period
oi two semesters and may be renewed, provided the
work ot the holder is of such quality as to justify
continuation oi financial aid. Usually the research
WOrk win be used foi thesis OI dissertation.
Annual stipends foi most fellowships are $2400 or
more, depending upon the qualifications of the appli-
cant. Graduate tellows pay the regular tuition fees.
However, the graduate school, in awarding .1 fellow-
ship, may award at the same time a graduate tuition
grant. This grant provides remission of all tuition fees
during the period for which it is awarded.
Teaching and Graduate Assistantships. Many graduate
students hold junior academic staff positions as teach-
ing or graduate assistants. They assist the faculty in
grading undergraduate quizzes, instructing in the
classroom and laboratory, and conducting recitations.
The departments view seriously the benefits of a
teaching or graduate assistantship as a preparation for
a career in university teaching.
A limited number of teaching assistantships are
available in applied mechanics, biology, business ad-
ministration, chemistry, English, education, geology,
government, history, international relations, mathe-
matics, physics, political science, psychology, and in
chemical, civil, electrical, industrial, mechanical, and
metallurgical engineering.
Half-time assistants devote 15 to 20 hours per
week to their duties and receive $2650 ($2850 after
one year of satisfactory service or to holders of the
master's degree) for the academic year plus remission
of tuition fees. They may take up to 10 hours of
graduate work a semester with remission of tuition.
Appointments to assistantships are made upon
recommendation of the department chairman. A stu-
dent who wishes to be considered for such a position
should write directly to his departmental chairman.
Forms for admission to the Graduate School should
still be filed with the Office of Admission.
Research Assistantships. Lehigh University cooperates
with industrial concerns, technical associations and
government agencies in carrying on basic and applied
research. A number of research assistantships are
available to qualified graduate students who assist
with these research programs.
Many students value the opportunity to partici-
pate with senior faculty members in an on-going pro-
ject. The experience enlivens theii course work and
often determines one's thesis topic. Usually a research
assistant's thesis work parallels his contribution to the
projei 1 .
Applications for research assistantships should be
accompanied by evidence ol the candidate's qualifica-
tions lor the appointment sought and sent to the
Director of the Ollice of Research or to the chairman
of the department concerned.
Research assistants receive stipends which vary
from $150 to $550 per month, depending upon the
qualifications and academic programs of the
appointee and the time assigned to the project.
Appointments are generally for one year and normal-
ly are continued upon satisfactory academic progress.
Part- or full-time employment on research projects is
frequently available during the summer and entering
students who hold research appointments usually are
encouraged to begin their employment in June or
July before the commencement of formal graduate
study in the fall.
Research assistants holding appointments for half-
time or more pay a uniform tuition of $1000 per
semester until they have met the tuition requirements
of the degree for which they are candidates.
Applications. A student may apply for any of the
scholarships, fellowships or traineeships awarded or
administered by Lehigh University, including those
granted by national agencies for presentation by the
University, by completing the application form avail-
able from the Office of Admission. Each applicant is
automatically considered for all awards for which he
is eligible. Application must be completed on or
before February 1. Each application must be supple-
mented by an official transcript of the candidate's
college work, a statement concerning his practical
experience, and any other evidence of his qualifica-
tions which he may choose to submit.
Scores made by the applicant in the Graduate
Record Examination; or, for those in Education, the
National Teachers Examination; and for M.B.A. can-
didates, the Admissions Test for Graduate Students in
Business, are desired whenever possible.
Final actions on applications are taken on the re-
commendation of departments to the Graduate
School. Notices of award are mailed in March. In
accordance with a resolution of the Council of Gradu-
ate Schools in the United States, to which over 180
66 The Graduate School: Financial Assistance
graduate schools have signified their assent, a student
has until April 15 to decline an award.
The holder of a scholarship, fellowship or trainee-
ship may not accept any employment for pay with-
out written permission of the Dean.
The School of Education
Student Loan Funds
The University administers a sizeable loan fund pro-
gram under which financial assistance, long-term and
short-term, is available to graduate students. A stu-
dent may borrow when he has no other support from
the University, or to add to his income from a fellow-
ship or assistantship. To be considered, a student
must provide complete details of his budget.
Information concerning application for a loan may
be obtained from the Office of Financial Aid. Avail-
able loan funds include:
National Direct Student Loan Program (NDSLP). As
federal funds are available to the University, the
NDSLP makes it possible td borrow up to $2500 each
year for graduate study to a combined graduate/
undergraduate total of $10,000. The Office of Finan-
cial Aid is responsible for determining which students
are eligible and the amount of the loan. Repayment
begins nine months after the student ceases at least
half-time study, and may extend over a ten-year
period. Interest charges of three percent also begin at
the start of the repayment period. No payment is
required and no interest is charged for any period up
to three years during which the student serves in the
Armed Forces, Peace Corps or VISTA. The program
also provides for partial or total loan cancellation for
students who enter the field of special education, and
partial cancellation for military service.
University Tuition Loan Program (UTLP). Loans are
made available on the basis of need to graduate stu-
dents carrying at least a half-time academic load. In-
terest charges of four percent annually begin from the
date of the note. Repayment begins ninety days after
the student ceases at least half-time study, at a mini-
mum rate of $50 monthly.
John A. Stoops, Dean
History and Purpose
The School of Education was established in 1966,
elevating it from its former departmental status under
the College of Arts and Science. The School of
Education operates in conjunction with the Graduate
School. Its administrative procedures are identical or
similar to those of the Graduate School in regard to
admission, registration, tuition, fees, transcripts, and
other related matters. Degree requirements are also
consistent with those established by the Graduate
School. The School of Education offers the Master of
Arts in Education, the Master of Education, the
Master of Science in Education, and the Doctor of
Education. Details regarding the specific regulations
and requirements can be found in that section of this
catalog pertaining to the Graduate School. Course
offerings and other pertinent data may be found in
the section, "Description of Courses."
The school is interested in the preparation of ele-
mentary teachers, secondary teachers, community
college teachers, counselors, school psychologists,
administrators, reading specialists, curriculum special-
ists, research specialists, specialists in the foundations
of education, specialists in the education of mentally
and emotionally disturbed children, teachers of
nurses, teachers of vocational education and teachers
for social restoration of potential delinquents. The
Intern Teaching Program is specifically designed for
qualified persons holding B.A. degrees who wish to
enter the field of teaching. The school is particularly
interested in established teachers who wish to prepare
for leadership responsibility in the schools through
preparation at the master's and doctorate levels.
Two hundred nineteen doctoral students, 791
students engaged in MA. and M.Ed, programs, and
206 post-master's degree students were enrolled in
the School of Education in the past academic year.
Whereas graduate study in education was once
undertaken only by those preparing for leadership in
the schools, it is now a part of the training required
The School of Education 67
ol every qualified teacher. In the face ol this mourn
itiii trend, 1 ehigh joined the Lehigh Regional Con-
sortium, strengthened its graduate program, and dis-
continued profrssion.il pu-p.ii.it ion ol undergraduate
students.
Accordingly, .1 liltli yeai program is offered to
qualified holders oi II. A. degrees who wish to enter
teaching. Those admitted to the program have the
opportunity to accomplish their professional training
and serve as salaried interns in the public schools. At
the completion of one or two semesters of directed
lull time study, students may begin the teaching in-
ternship. After the completion of the fifth -year
program and the required semesters of intern teach-
ing, they would ordinarily have completed require-
ments for the Master of Arts (secondary teachers) or
the Master of Education (elementary teachers) de-
gree.
For the benefit of in-service teachers many courses
are offered in the evenings and on Saturday mornings.
Teachers of the Lehigh Valley and surrounding
regions are encouraged to participate in the life and
work of the University.
Programs ot Study
The School of Education offers the Master of Arts
degree, major in Education with an academic special-
ty. Candidates for this degree must include in their
program a minimum of twelve hours of graduate
work in an academic field. The balance of the pro-
gram is in the foundations of education and instruc-
tional process. The academic fields which now
cooperate with the School of Education in offering
this degree include: classical languages, mathematics,
English, modern foreign languages, economics,
government, social relations, history, international
relations, and physical and natural sciences.
Lehigh's program of training for advanced profes-
sional responsibility is planned in three stages. The
first is represented in the M.Ed.. M.A., or M.S.; the
second exists in the several specialist programs; and
the final stage is the Ed.D.
The Master of Education degree requires, in addi-
tion to broad study of the social foundations of
education, specialization in a professional field.
Special fields include elementary education, elemen-
tary administration, secondary administration,
general administration, elementary school counselors,
secondary school counselors, school psychologists,
spe< tal ition, vocational education, and reading,
mis within the Secondary Division give opportu-
nity for emphasis in reading instruction, the teaching
ol nurses, or social restoration. Although study at the
master's level is intense- and specialized, the school
recognizes that additional training is needed for pro-
fessional leadership in most areas. Therefore, pro-
grams designed for these specialists arc extended to
the post-master's level.
The Master of Science degree in educational
measurements and research, open to both full- and
part-time students, is designed to prepare its gradu-
ates for an increasing number of challenging positions
involving research, testing, and evaluation in school
districts, state departments of education, or other
educational institutions.
The Doctor of Education program provides for
major work in five areas: (1 ) administration, (2) read-
ing, (3) educational foundations, (4) counseling, and
(5) educational measurements and research. Students
are screened for admission in the fall and spring of
each year and begin doctoral study the following
semester. Formal admission to the Ed.D. program
usually occurs after the completion of 15-30 hours
beyond the master's level. When the student has his
proposal accepted by the Graduate School, he be-
comes eligible to take the general examination.
Divisions
Division of Educational Administration
Charles W. Guditus, Director
Elementary school principalship, secondary school
principalship, school business managership, curricu-
lum administration, school superintendency, com-
munity college teachers.
Division of Counselor Education
John A. Mierzwa, Director
School psychologist, counselor, elementary school
counselor, secondary school counselor.
Division of Elementary Education
Alfred J. Castaldi, Director
Elementary teachers (interns), elementary master
teachers, reading, special education.
68 The School of Education
Division of Secondary Education
Robert L. Leight, Director
Secondary school teachers (interns), secondary
master teachers, educational foundations, vocational
education, social restoration.
Division of Educational Measurements and Research
Paul VanR. Miller, Director
Interdisciplinary Graduate
Programs
Computer Science
An interdisciplinary program is offered in computer
science leading to the degree of master of science. It
is supported by departments of the University with
considerable resources in the field and an extensive
list of course offerings. These departments and divi-
sions also are active in research related to computer
science:
1. In electrical engineering, research is underway in
equipment organization, software engineering, coding
theory, and devices for digital systems.
2. In information sciences, research is conducted
in linguistics, information retrieval, and software sys-
tems.
3. In industrial engineering, research is concerned
with operations research and management systems.
4. In mathematics research includes automata
theory and mechanical theory -proving.
The computer science program is available to stu-
dents from many undergraduate disciplines. In some
cases background courses may be required to provide
necessary prerequisites. The student should have the
following preparation:
1. Skill in programming in a high-level language,
and familiarity with a machine or assembly language.
2. Two years of college -level mathematics.
While the intention is to keep the program as flexi-
ble as possible to meet individual interests and needs,
the student is normally expected to include in his
program the following core subjects:
1. Mathematical methods in computer science
2. Non-numerical programming
3. Switching theory
4. Data structures.
Elective courses may be chosen from one or more
of the areas listed below:
1. Software and automata theory
2. Hardware and logic design
3. Numerical analysis
4. Linguistics
Interdisciplinary Graduate Programs 69
5. Computability
6. Applications.
A master's thesis 01 .1 research course must be in-
cluded in the program to qualify for the degree. The
student must be enrolled tor administrative purposes
in one ol the following departments: electrical engi
neering, industrial engineering, information sciences,
or mathematics. The program, however, is in the
charge o( an interdisciplinary faculty committee
chaired by the dean of the graduate school.
Management Science
The industrial engineering department in conjunction
with the department of management offers an inter-
disciplinary degree in Management Science. The
Management Science program is directed toward in-
tegrating the scientific method with the functional
aspects of organizations by investigating the applica-
tion of quantitative methodology and systems analy-
sis in the context of such areas as accounting, finance,
marketing, and production. This integration will pro-
vide the student with a broader perspective toward
managerial decision-making in private enterprise
and/or public administration. Undergraduate stu-
dents, with a background in engineering, business,
economics, mathematics or the physical sciences, who
desire a professional career as a staff specialist in
management science will be ideal candidates for the
program. In addition, those candidates who intend to
seek line manager positions would find the manage-
ment science background advantageous in dealing
with the increasingly complex problems of industrial,
commercial, and public service organizations.
The candidate is assumed to have acquired basic
competence in the areas of accounting, marketing,
corporate finance, production, data processing,
microeconomics, linear algebra, calculus, statistics,
and introductory operations research.
Required courses include:
1. Simulation (I.E. 418)
2. Organizational Behavior and Structure (Mgt.
321, I.E. 334,orMgt. 412)
3. Management Science Project (Mgt. [I.E.] 430)
4. Nine hours of Quantitative Methods
5. Six hours selected from a functional area.
The minimum program consists of thirty (30)
hours ot approved course work.
Sample M.S. in Management Science Program
IE 4 1 8 Simulation
Mgt 321 Organization Behavior
IE 430 Management Science Project
IE 311 Decision Processes
IE 417 Mathematical Programming
Eco 455 Econometric Models
IE 325 Production Inventory Control
IE 425 Production Systems
Fin 421 Financial Management
Fin 431 Advanced Investment Analysis and
Portfolio Management
Applied Mathematics
The Committee on Applied Mathematics administers
programs leading to the degrees of Master of Science
and Doctor of Philosophy. The programs leading to
these degrees are interdepartmental and stress the
application of mathematics to the physical and social
sciences. They provide a broad, rather than a special-
ized, training in these fields. The programs are also
designed for candidates who have a basic training,
either at the B.A. or M.S. level, in a field other than
applied mathematics. The committee encourages such
applicants. The degrees will be in applied mathe-
matics with a minor in some specified field of the
physical and social sciences.
A candidate for these programs must have a know-
ledge of basic undergraduate mathematics which in-
cludes linear algebra and differential equations (for
example. Math. 205). If not taken previously, courses
in complex variable theory and partial differential
equations, although not prerequisites for admission to
these programs, must be added to the student's
course requirements.
All students in the Ph.D. program are required to
pass a qualifying examination before the end of their
fifth semester (not including summer session). For
the Master of Science degree, a thesis is required in
addition to the course requirements. M.S. candidates
can enter the Ph.D. program after completing all
course requirements (exclusive of thesis). The date of
the qualifying examination for a student entering the
program with an M.S. degree— not necessarily in
70 Interdisciplinary Graduate Programs
applied mathematics— will be determined on
admission.
Several types of programs which will.be available
to the student are listed below. These programs are
not the only possible ones. Others can be arranged
with the consent of the committee.
Core Courses
Math 320, 322, 450
ChE 462
(Physics 428 and 429 may be substituted for
Math. 320, 322)
Options
1. Engineering Sciences
Required:
Mech 450
Phys471
Electives:
Math 405
Mech 409, 421, 424, 458, 459
CE459
EE 350, 409, 457
Phys369,442
Geol 301
Biol 402
2. Econometrics
Required:
Eco 206 or 435, 316 or 436, 351
Electives:
Math 309, 334
Eco 453, 455,456
IE 416, 418, 425, 426, 427, 429, 311
3. Applied Analysis
Required:
Math 309, 350
Mech 450, 451
Electives:
To be chosen from lists under Options 1 and 2.
Research Centers and
Organizations
Currently, nine interdisciplinary research centers and
five institutes have been established at Lehigh Univer-
sity to assist the academic departments in developing
the full research and advanced education potential of
the University in special areas. The centers and insti-
tutes represent research thrusts based on the capabili-
ties and interests of the faculty at Lehigh. Frequent-
ly, they relate to the broad -based research needs of
government, industry and the social community.
The goal is to provide an effective interdisciplinary
framework for programs involving faculty members
and graduate students interested in combining tradi-
tional course programs with an interdisciplinary re-
search experience.
The research centers, institutes, and research re-
lated organizations are administratively responsible to
the Office of the Vice President— Research.
Research Centers
Center for the Application of Mathematics
Background and Purpose
The Center for the Application of Mathematics was
established in the fall of 1965. The purpose of the
center is to foster interdisciplinary research related to
the application of mathematics, to draw on other
disciplines for pertinent mathematical problems, and
to encourage the development of advanced courses in
the application of mathematics.
The center surveys the need for courses in the
application of mathematics and is concerned both
with the design of new courses and the reorganization
of existing courses so that these needs may be better
served.
Research Activities
Research programs are currently in progress in the
center in the areas of non-linear continuum mechan-
ics, the propagation of waves in non-linear media,
variational calculus, numerical analysis and probabili-
ty and statistics.
Research Centers and Organizations 71
The program on non linear continuum mechani
includes fundamental studies in the formulation ol
continuum theories, the study "I anomalous flow
phenomena in viscoelastic fluids, the study of finite
elastic deformations and stability, and the thermo-
mechanics ol materials in which irreversible processes
take place and long range forces may be present.
Tlie program on non-linear wave propagation in-
cludes luiulament.il mathematical studies of the prop-
agation ol both stress and electromagnetic waves in
non-linear media and the application of these studies
in a number ol areas of physics. Among the areas
currently being studied are the propagation of explo-
sive waves in laminated media, the formation of
severe storms, the formation of tidal waves and their
modification by ocean and shore topography, and the
generation of harmonics in high intensity light beams,
such as those produced by lasers.
Both the work on variational calculus and that on
numerical analysis are mainly directed to the solution
of non-linear elliptic differential equations.
The work on probability and statistics is mainly in
the area of time series analyses.
Edit ca tio rial Oppo rtun ities
Through the Committee on Applied Mathematics (see
page 70), personnel of the center administer an inter-
disciplinary program leading to the degrees of Master
of Science and Doctor of Philosophy. These programs
are interdepartmental and stress the application of
mathematics to the physical and social sciences.
For further information, write to the director,
Professor Ronald S. Rivlin.
Computing Center
Background and Purpose
With a long heritage of teaching and research in the
engineering and science disciplines, Lehigh has made
extensive use of computers for more than a decade.
In 1966, the need was recognized for an independent
organization serving the diverse needs of the academic
community and the Computing Center was formed.
Today the center is charged with the responsibility of
serving existing requirements while anticipating and
preparing for the future requirements of its user com-
munity.
Located in Packard Laboratory, the Computing
i serves as .1 laboratory foi departmental courses
ami research in computer theory and applications,
including developmental programs. The center also
provides computer services to all departments and
centers of the University for solution of instructional,
research, and administrative problems.
In the summer of 1968, the center installed a Con-
trol Data Corporation 6400 computing system. This
system consists of 65,536 (60 bits each) words of
central memory, ten peripheral and control proces-
sors, each with 4096 words ( 1 2 bits each) of memory,
approximately 1 billion characters of disk storage, 4
magnetic tape units, 2-1200 line-pcr-minute printers,
a 1200 card-per-minutc card reader, 2 incremental
plotters, and a communications computer capable of
supporting a wide variety of remote entry and display
terminals and teletypes. The principal programming
languages used with the large library of programs are
FORTRAN IV, FORTRAN EXTENDED, COBOL,
BASIC, and COMPASS (assembler). A Users Area is
provided containing teletypes, key-punch machines,
and reference materials.
Research Activities
To preserve its role of impartial support for all users,
the center does not engage in primary research. It has,
from time to time, conducted research-related activi-
ties on its own or in cooperation with academic de-
partments or research centers. Its Computing Associ-
ates Program, wherein the center provides the
mechanism for industry and government to work
with University faculty in the identification and solu-
tion of computer-related problems, is a good example
of such an on-going cooperative activity.
The center is funded by the National Science
Foundation as the lead institution of a regional,
educational computing network. Currently, six col-
leges and five high schools utilize the Lehigh com-
puter through its telecommunications facilities.
The center's primary role in research is to support
the computing activities of the research community.
Approximately one-third of the computer utilization
is devoted to this activity.
Educational Opportunities
Seminars are held or sponsored by the center for
faculty, staff and graduate students on varied subjects
72 Computing Center
relating to data processing.
The center works closely with the Computer
Society to meet the more independent inquiry needs
of undergraduates and its advisor is a member of the
center staff.
Graduate students desiring a more intensive educa-
tional experience in an operating environment may
apply for one of the four teaching assistantships pro-
vided by the center.
As with research, the center's primary method of
offering educational opportunities in the use of com-
puters is by providing computing resources for use by
the academic community. The majority of jobs pro-
cessed by the center are submitted by students as a
part of their normal academic activities. The growth
of interactive processing facilities is expected to bene-
fit immensely this group of users.
The University has established a multi-disciplinary
graduate program leading to the M.S. in Computer
Science degree. This program is described in detail on
page 69 of this catalog.
For further information, write to the director,
Professor John E. Walker.
Center for Health Sciences
Background and Purpose
The Center for Health Sciences was organized during
the latter part of 1972. It is concerned with inter-
disciplinary research and graduate and post-doctoral
training in various aspects of the biomedical sciences
and bioengineering. The center is comprised of four
divisions: (1) the Institute for Pathobiology, (2) the
Division of Biological Chemistry and Biophysics, (3)
the Division of Visual Science, and (4) the Division of
Bioengineering. Facilities are provided by these divi-
sions for its members, post-doctoral fellows, and
graduate students actively engaged in research in the
respective areas. A large part of the research conduct-
ed at the center is supported by private and public
agencies and all are related to either basic or applied
aspects of problems pertaining to human and animal
health.
Research Activities
The research opportunities and programs of each
division are described below:
The Institute for Pathobiology. The Institute for
Pathobiology, a branch of the Center for Health
Sciences, is an interdisciplinary unit involved with
research and graduate and post-doctoral education.
Fields currently represented in on-going research pro-
jects include virology, microbiology, protozoan and
metazoan parasitology, invertebrate pathobiology,
immunology, biological control, biochemistry, pollu-
tion research, epidemiology and epizootiology. A
number of the current research projects are being
funded by both public and private agencies, including
biological control and parasitological studies overseas.
The administrative offices and principal labora-
tories of the institute are housed in newly renovated
quarters in Chandler Laboratory. These facilities are
well-equipped for cytological, cytochemical, fine
structural, immunological, physiological, biochemical,
and tissue culture studies. Studies on diseases of
marine and estuarine fishes and shellfishes are being
conducted in conjunction with the University's South
Jersey Wetlands Institute.
The following are some examples of research pro-
jects presently being carried out in the institute: pos-
sible biological control of invertebrate vectors of
human and animal diseases by use of protozoan, bac-
terial, and viral pathogens; development of efficient
molluscicides for the control of vectors of schisto-
somiasis and fascioliasis; study of viral diseases and
virus-induced tumors in fish; study of the effects of
pollution (thermal, chemical, and biological) on
marine and freshwater organisms; studies on the inter-
mediary metabolism and other phases of the bio-
chemistry of helminth parasites.
Division of Biological Chemistry and Biophysics. This
research and graduate training unit is a part of the
Center for Health Sciences. Fields currently repre-
sented in on-going research include enzyme bio-
chemistry, intermediary metabolism, medicinal
chemistry, biosynthesis of organic molecules, the
physical basis of surface adhesion in biological sys-
tems, clinical chemistry, and effects of radiation on
nucleic acids. Much of the research is being funded
from private and federal agencies.
The administrative offices of the division and most
of the laboratories are housed in Chandler Labora-
tory. The laboratories are well-equipped and the
major pieces of equipment include infrared, ultra-
violet, and visible spectrophotometers, nuclear mag-
Center for Health Sciences 73
netic resonance instrumentation, mass spectrometers,
fermenters, gas and liquid chromatography facilities,
and other allied bioorganic apparatuses.
Division oj I 'isual Science. This research and graduate
training unit is also .1 part ot the Center for Health
Sciences. The major emphasis within this division is
concerned with the phenomenon of vision as ap-
prOached from the standpoint of the psychobiologist,
neurophysiologist, biochemist, and engineer. Most of
the division's facilities are currently in Williams Hall
as is the administrative office.
The division's laboratories are well-equipped and
among the major facilities are a ncurophysiological
laboratory for single nerve cell recording, human and
animal psychophysics laboratories, and the Color
Science Laboratory.
Lehigh scientists affiliated with the Division of
Visual Science have an on-going liaison program with
the Will's Eye Hospital and Research Institute in
Philadelphia and some of the projects, especially
those pertaining to human vision, are conducted at
that facility.
Division of Bioengineering. This research and gradu-
ate training unit of the Center for Health Sciences is
concerned with a number of health-related problems
that are best resolved by individuals with a back-
ground in engineering. Specifically, on-going projects
include measuring the rigidity and tension of healthy
and diseased blood cells, the mechanics of flow
through the mammalian respiratory system, the frac-
ture mechanics of skeletal units, and the development
of prosthetic apparatus.
The division's laboratories are housed primarily in
Packard Laboratory and the administrative office is in
the same building. In addition, several individuals
associated with this division are engaged in joint re-
search projects with personnel of the Hahnemann
Medical School in Philadelphia and some of the work
is being conducted at that facility.
Educational Opportunities
Graduate students working under the direction of
members of the various components of the center
may satisfy their course requirements towards the
M.S. and Ph.D. degrees by selecting from the offer-
ings of the departments of chemistry, physics,
biology, psychology, civil engineering, mechanical
engineering and mechanic s. as well as othei depart-
ments ol the University.
In addition to research, the center sponsors sym-
posia as well as an annual series of seminars on topics
pertinent to its objectives.
For further information write to the director,
Professor Thomas C. Cheng.
(enter tor Information Science
Background and Purpose
The Center for Information Science was established
in 1 962 as a division of the University library. It was
reorganized in 1967 as an independent center for
research and development with the objective of pro-
viding guidance and leadership in transdisciplinary
studies of information systems and their operations.
In the last twenty years, the products of science
and technology have not only posed unforeseen de-
mands on libraries, but have also generated an entire-
ly new complex of ideas concerning the processes of
communication. Information science has emerged as a
response to these needs and as the result of advances
in computer technology. The field is concerned with
the origin, dissemination, collection, organization,
storage, retrieval, interpretation, and use of informa-
tion.
Research Activities
The Center for Information Science supports on-
going research projects in the theory, design, develop-
ment, implementation, management, and operation
of computer-based information systems. The focus of
this activity is the LEADERMART system, which was
developed at Lehigh with the aid of a grant from the
National Science Foundation to provide a fully auto-
mated information retrieval system on-line to
Lehigh's time-shared CDC 6400 computer.
Research activity based on LEADERMART in-
cludes the development of a prototype health know-
ledge transfer system, the study of logic flows in
medical diagnosis, the application of computer tech-
nology to health care, and the design of a question-
answering system. The LEADERMART system has
been designated as a node in the emerging National
Science Computer Network, and serves as a model for
projected information dissemination resource-sharing
arrangements.
74 Center for Information Science
Facilities for LEADERMART research, develop-
ment, and operation include access to the CDC 6400
in both time-sharing and batch modes, remote card
readers, printers, CRT terminals in the Center for
Information Science, and teletypes.
There is substantial additional research in the
center with emphasis on psycholinguistics, mathe-
matical linguistics, and biomedical information
retrieval. Research in psycholinguistics involves ex-
perimental studies of lexical memory, while activities
in mathematical and computational linguistics con-
cern the development of algorithms for the automatic
analysis of English sentences. Biomedical information
system research deals with new techniques of full-text
searching, and means for interfacing the LEADER-
MART system with the teaching and practice of
clinical diagnosis.
Educational Opportunities
The Center for Information Science is closely affili-
ated with the Division of Information Science within
the Department of Philosophy (see course listing).
Programs leading to the M.S. and Ph.D. degrees are
offered by the division. In addition, the division co-
operates with the departments of mathematics, elec-
trical engineering, and industrial engineering in sup-
porting the master's degree program in computer
science.
In both the M.S. and Ph.D. programs in informa-
tion science, considerable emphasis is placed on
mathematics, computer programming, computer
languages, statistics, electrical engineering, psychol-
ogy, sociology, and management science. This wide-
spread involvement of different disciplines is
necessitated by the eclectic nature of information
science.
For further information write to the director, Pro-
fessor D. J. Hillman.
Center for Marine and Environmental Studies
Background and Purpose
Effective utilization of the resources of the oceans
requires the cooperation of many scientific and engi-
neering disciplines. Practical solutions for the many
urgent environmental problems will most likely be
achieved through a similar combination of scientific
and engineering talent. The purpose of the Center for
Marine and Environmental Studies (CMES) is to
foster a multi-disciplinary approach to research on
these broad problem areas. Originally established in
1962 as the Marine Science Center, the scope was
expanded to include environmental studies and ocean
engineering in 1968 under the new name. The staff of
the center includes faculty and graduate students
from the departments of biology, chemical engineer-
ing, chemistry, civil engineering, economics, geologi-
cal sciences, mechanical engineering and mechanics,
and physics.
A good marine scientist is one well-trained in a
classical field of science, i. e., biology, chemistry,
geology, or physics, who can apply the principles of
these disciplines to problems of the oceans. A good
ocean engineer is one well-trained in a traditional
engineering discipline who can apply engineering prin-
ciples to problems unique to operations in the ocean.
An environmental scientist or engineer needs a broad
background in many disciplines, as environmental
problems are invariably interdisciplinary in nature.
The Center for Marine and Environmental Studies
seeks to provide research opportunities in these fields
and to assist faculty and graduate students in apply-
ing their academic training and experience to the
acquisition of new knowledge and to the solution of
real problems.
Research Activities
The Center for Marine and Environmental Studies
includes a broad spectrum of research activities. Some
of the research in marine science and environmental
studies is done at the off-campus seashore facility of
the center, the South Jersey Wetlands Institute (see
separate listing in this section under institutes).
Lehigh University is a member of the Institute for
Development of Riverine and Estuarine Systems
(IDRES), a regional multi-institutional consortium
organized to conduct research on broad interrelated
environmental problems of effective utilizations of
riverine-estuarine resources, using the Delaware River
Basin and Delaware Bay as a model system. Water
quality and pollution studies are carried out on the
Lehigh and Delaware rivers and their smaller tribu-
taries. Waste water treatment research is performed in
cooperation with local industries and municipal
Center for Marine and Environmental Studies 75
sewage plants. Through cooperation with other insti
tutions having oceanography facilities .nul ships, stall
and students affiliated with the centei have .> v.iriety
.>t opportunities toi experience and work .it sea.
Current research activities include:
Marine Science. Biochemistry of proteolytic marine
bacteria; fate ot fatty acids in salt marshes; biologic. il
effects oi thermal pollution: immunological methods
for fish egg identification; winter flounder population
studies; ocean dumping pollution studies in New
York Bight: sublethal effects ot pollutants on key
Organisms; coastal salt marsh ecosystems; fine grained
sediment accumulation on a deep sea fan; deforma-
tion ot near-surface sediments at a subducting conti-
nental margin; shallow water near shore and estuarinc
sedimentation.
Ocean Engineering (Marine Geotechnical Labora-
tory). Development ot geotechnical instrumentation
for submersibles; establishment of geotechnical test
areas in San Diego Trough and Gulf of Maine; in-placc
measurement of geotechnical properties ot sea floor
soils in Gulf of Mexico; shear strength and consolida-
tion testing of soft cohesive sea floor soils.
Environmental Stitdies. Stream recovery after pollu-
tion: advanced waste water treatment methods; re-
search needs in regional planning (IDRES); biological
regeneration of activated carbon; fluidized bed en-
zyme treatment of acid whey waste; chemical treat-
ment of fly ash.
Educational Opportunities
Graduate students participating in the center's pro-
grams usually receive M.S. or Ph.D. degrees in the
traditional discipline of their choice, i.e., biology,
chemistry, geological sciences, civil engineering, etc.
Thesis or dissertation research required for the ad-
vanced degree may be performed within the frame-
work of the research activities of the center. The pro-
gram of courses to meet the student's special field of
interest and to satisfy the departmental and graduate
school degree requirements will be arrived at by con-
sultation with the chairman of the student's major
department, and will usually include courses in other
departments. Courses in marine science, i.e., biologi-
cal oceanography, chemical oceanography, marine
geology, ocean physics, etc., are offered in those and
other departments. Ocean engineering courses are
offered in the civil engineering department. Courses
related to enviionuiciit.il studies an offered in the
departments ot biology, chemistry, chemical engi-
neering, civil engineering, and geological sciences. For
course descriptions, see the catalog listings under the
various academic departments.
Further information concerning educational op-
portunities may be obtained from the chairman of
the prospective major department, or from the
director of the center, Professor James M. Parks.
Center for Surface and Coatings Research
Background and Purpose
The Center for Surface and Coatings Research is an
interdisciplinary endeavor in which faculty and stu-
dents with a broad range of scientific interests inter-
act on research relevant to surface and coating phe-
nomena. It combines the expertise and talents of
chemists, chemical engineers, metallurgists, physicists,
and mechanical engineers in a unified program of
research and education, for the most part at the
graduate level.
The importance of the center's research, its broad
scope, and the need for an integrated approach are
readily evident from several considerations: almost
every aspect of life involves a surface; surfaces are
rarely bare but are usually covered with coatings; the
diverse nature of surfaces and coatings requires that
many facets of interfaces, colloids, and related
sciences be understood.
The center's position of strength in these areas
began with the initiation of research in surface
chemistry at Lehigh in the early 1940's. The program
broadened into the field of chemical coatings in 1946
when the National Printing Ink Research Institute
undertook support of research at the University. The
two interrelated research programs initially function-
ed within the physical chemistry curriculum; how-
ever, because of the continual growth of the research
plus the increasing tendency to interact with other
departments, formal center status was conferred in
1966.
The purpose of the center is to encompass all per-
tinent disciplines in its efforts to develop and promul-
gate an understanding of surface and coating
phenomena. Interaction among faculty and students
76 Center for Surface and Coatings Research
is greatly facilitated by the fact that the center is
housed in a new building, the 36,000-square-foot
Francis MacDonald Sinclair Memorial Laboratory,
especially tailored to its needs.
Financial support for the center comes largely
from research projects contracted with various indus-
trial and governmental agencies. Opportunities for
cooperative sponsorship are provided by the center's
liaison programs, whereby fundamental nonproprie-
tary research is performed in areas of specific interest
to the participating sponsors. Current liaison pro-
grams are concerned with surface science and emul-
sion polymerization. A Laboratory for Color Science
is also cooperatively supported.
The center is particularly well-equipped with
specialty instrumentation needed for advanced re-
search. The Sinclair Laboratory houses equipment for
experimental studies employing electron spin
resonance, ferromagnetic resonance, flash desorption,
Mbssbauer spectroscopy, Auger spectroscopy, ellip-
sometry, and computerized spectrophotometry.
Other specialty equipment includes microbalances, a
materials testing machine, gas adsorption and heat of
immersion apparatus, wetting balances, and apparatus
for the preparation of reproducible dispersions and
films.
Research Activities
The center's research program includes a broad range
of topics vital to modern science and technology.
Some of the active topics are: rate of drying of latex
films; electrophoresis of latex particles; application of
latexes in medicine; emulsion polymerization in con-
tinuous stirred tank reactors; rheology and nip be-
havior in non-Newtonian fluids; adhesion and flow of
fluids on porous substrates; water purification by
flocculation; characterization of surfaces by adsorp-
tion; microelectrophoresis; computerized color
matching; estimation of color differences; color con-
stancy and metamerism; light scattering by micro-
voids; ice formation on low energy nucleants; wetting
in multiphase systems; theoretical studies of alumino-
silicate complexes; catalytic properties of fresh sur-
faces; optical spectroscopy of surfaces; Mossbauer
spectroscopy of surfaces; Auger spectroscopy of frac-
ture surfaces; environmentally affected crack growth
in metals; relation between surface properties and
fracture; hydrogen embrittlement of high strength
alloys; electrodeposition of intcrmctallic compounds;
pulse electroplating; resistance-capacitance studies of
polymeric coatings.
Educational Opportunities
CSCR is a facility in which graduate students under-
take dissertation research leading to the M.S. or Ph.D.
degree in existing science and engineering curricula.
Pertinent courses are offered in the departments of
chemistry, chemical engineering, physics, mathe-
matics, biology, metallurgy and materials science, and
mechanical engineering and mechanics.
Irrespective of source of financial support, poten-
tial and current graduate students whose interests are
consistent with the center's objectives are welcome to
associate with the research program and to avail
themselves of the experimental facilities. Since re-
search topics are selected by mutual agreement, in-
terested students are encouraged to explore research
opportunities with the center's director.
The center's research also forms the basis of con-
tinuing educational programs designed to up-date
industrial personnel. The conference center in the
Sinclair Laboratory is ideally suited for the special
seminars and short courses held periodically. Recent
topics include surface analysis, printing ink tech-
nology, emulsion polymerization, computer formula-
tion of colorants, and MOssbauer spectroscopy. The
center has also hosted national meetings such as
Colloid Symposium in 1970, the Carbon Conference
in 1971, and a conference on Ecology in the Graphic
Arts in 1972. In addition, the center provides oppor-
tunities for resident post-doctoral studies and for
visiting scientists.
For further information write to the director,
Professor Henry Leidheiser.
Center for Social Research
Background and Purpose
The Center for Social Research encourages research in
the social sciences particularly where current policies
necessitate cutting across traditional disciplinary lines
for the solution of social problems. Established in
1965, the center sponsors innovative research pro-
grams in economic and business forecasting,
Center for Social Research 7 7
urban studies, behavioral research and manpowei
studies. These programs involve active group;, ol gr.idu
ate students and selected undergraduates who have
found the center to represent .1 campus nucleus of
enthusiastic intellectual activity in these areas. Inter
actions are encouraged with governmental, business.
labor and other groups in the community to provide
communication, contacts, and common efforts
toward solutions of social science problems. Thus the
center serves to coordinate and facilitate research,
liaison, and problem -solving efforts by faculty and
graduate students in the social sciences.
Research Activities
Research activity in the center has ranged widely over
various topics in social science. Earlier business and
economics research included the development of resi-
dential housing forecasting models and college gradu-
ate manpower studies of mobility, turnover and
career attitudes. Current economic research stresses
policy issues in population, migration, and public
finance as well as newer aspects of the role of busi-
ness in a changing environment with respect to
growth.
Behavioral research includes on-going work on
social agency information systems and key social
psychological aspects of attitude and behavioral pat-
terns in modern life. Perceptions of crowding re-
present a social science dimension of the place of tall
buildings in our civilization as do certain aspects of
public decision-making in the context of planning for
growth. Governmental and economic as well as be-
havioral contributions are being explored through the
center in this connection.
One of the themes currently representing a chal-
lenge to social scientists emerges from the impact of
governmental fragmentation on delivery systems in
the public sector. In addition to cost and efficiency
questions, techniques and machinery for conflict
resolution and decision-making on these issues re-
present areas of interest to the cooperating scholars
from the several social science departments at the
University.
The Urban Studies program stresses research on
the inter-relatedness of social, political, economic,
physical and historical forces which affect urban life
and form.
Educational < )pportunities
Research seminars and 1 ourse ol ferings in the social
sciences are listed in the catalog under the respective
social science departments of the University in eai h
college. Thus economics courses and degree require
ments are listed under the College of Business and
Economics. The departments of government and
social relations in the College of Arts and Science
have numerous courses basic to research work in be-
havioral science and/or public policy problems and
political processes. The psychology department, the
School of Education, the industrial engineering de-
partment and the College of Engineering as well as
certain courses in the management and accounting
departments of the College of Business and Econom-
ics also involve course work with active faculty and
student interests in the Center for Social Research.
The urban studies graduate program is intended to
meet the pressing need for urban generalists who
possess interdisciplinary knowledge of urban pro-
cesses. Depending upon interest and choice of
courses, students will be prepared for careers in city
management, urban planning and redevelopment,
human relations and social rehabilitation. Master's
degree candidates work within the disciplines of
economics, government, history or social relations
and achieve an urban concentration through the com-
bined offerings of the social science departments
though all take U.S. 416 Urban Seminar. (See urban
studies division under government department for
recommended combinations of individual depart-
mental course offerings and graduate advisors.)
For further information, write to the acting
coordinator, Professor L. Reed Tripp.
Fritz Laboratory
Background and Purpose
Founded in 1909, the Fritz Engineering Laboratory
serves for the advancement of knowledge and tech-
niques in the fields of structures, structural mechan-
ics, materials, hydraulics and fluid mechanics, struc-
tural model analysis, soil mechanics, and sanitary
engineering.
The Fritz Engineering Laboratory is associated
primarily with the department of civil engineering. In
addition, there are cooperative research efforts with
78 Fritz Laboratory
other departments of the University and with other
institutes and universities. Research projects are
sponsored through the Office of Research by national
research councils, mechanics, structural model analy-
sis, soil mechanics, and sanitary engineering agencies.
Graduate studies combined with research investiga-
tions commenced at Fritz Engineering Laboratory in
1928. A major expansion of the facilities in 1955 has
been followed by addition of the necessary equip-
ment to meet the needs of new research opportuni-
ties.
The staff of the laboratory consists of Lehigh Uni-
versity faculty members, research associates, research
assistants, and supporting technical personnel. The
laboratory awards research assistantships and certain
fellowships to competent research personnel who are
candidates for advanced degrees. Students from de-
partments and divisions such as civil engineering,
metallurgy, mechanics and mechanical engineering
and information science are able to take advantage of
research opportunities with the laboratory. Through-
out their work in research programs, men are trained
for careers in teaching, in research, and in advanced
engineering design.
Research Activities
The current research divisions indicate present in-
terests and activities of the laboratory staff and in-
clude the following: fatigue and fracture (brittle
failure due to cyclic and impact loading); geotech-
nical engineering (soil, foundation, rock and pave-
ment mechanics); hydraulics and sanitary engineering
(stream and channel flow, hydrology, sediment trans-
port in pipes and channels, water quality control,
water resources, and waste water treatment); building
systems (behavior and strength of building com-
ponents, frames and overall systems, problems in-
volved in the design of high rise buildings, earthquake
and wind responses); structural concrete (prestressed
and reinforced concrete bridges and buildings); struc-
tural connections (welded and bolted joints, com-
posite structures); structural stability (buckling of
plates, beams, columns, and frames). The operations
division provides services for laboratory work, and
includes an instrumentation group and a computer
systems group, the latter maintaining close liaison
with the University CDC 6400 facility.
As a result of the research studies conducted by
the staff of the laboratory, it has been possible to
make basic changes to design procedures and specifi-
cations in numerous specialty fields. The laboratory
participates in a worldwide exchange of research in-
formation, maintains a special library of technical
papers appropriate to its fields, and stimulates the
publications of papers in technical journals both in
this country and abroad.
Educational Opportunities
Through the laboratory organization, technical semi-
nars and lectures are presented on current research
findings and on new design applications in the various
fields of civil engineering and related disciplines.
Courses students select are primarily in the depart-
ment of civil engineering; however to gain a broader
understanding many students choose courses from
the departments of biology, chemical engineering,
chemistry, geological sciences, mechanical engineering
and mechanics, and metallurgy and materials science.
For further information write to the director,
Professor Lynn S. Beedle.
Materials Research Center
Background and Purpose
The Materials Research Center was formally estab-
lished in February 1962 to fulfill the need for a
research and educational facility permitting intellec-
tual stimulation of faculty and students dedicated to
research in materials. Currently, approximately 180
persons, including graduate students and faculty
members representing science and engineering depart-
ments, are engaged in research pertaining to materials
science and engineering.
The fundamental objectives of the Materials Re-
search Center are to encourage interaction among the
science and engineering disciplines with an interest in
materials and to promote interdisciplinary research
activity and interdepartmental educational opportu-
nities. To achieve these objectives, the center seeks to
establish a climate in which faculty members, post-
doctoral associates, and graduate assistants develop an
awareness of materials; arrange for facilities and space
required to conduct interdisciplinary research; guides
the search for new materials by encouraging funda-
Materials Research Center 19
mental research and new approaches to materials
problems; and .issists in developing educational op-
portunities in materials, in particular, interdisciplin
.n v graduate programs devoted to training tor
research in materials.
Tile Materials Research ("enter .ilso conducts the
Materials Liaison Program with industry and govern-
ment. Founded in ll)(>3. this program encourages the
mutual intellectual stimulation of scientists and engi-
neers dedicated to a common problem. The program
serves as a means tor the exchange ot knowledge of
materials problems between scientists and engineers
associated with the center and their industrial and
governmental counterparts by semi-annual day semi-
nars, special lectures, consultation on materials prob-
lems and research, distribution of all M.S. and Ph.D.
theses abstracts on materials research, and monthly
seminars with outstanding invited speakers.
The staff consists of members of the departments
ot chemistry, chemical engineering, electrical engi-
neering, mechanical engineering and mechanics,
metallurgy and materials science, and physics. Mem-
bers of the departments of geological sciences and
industrial engineering are currently involved in
cooperative programs. Communication with these
associated departments is achieved through the
Materials Research Council, which is composed of
senior faculty members from all of the engineering
departments as well as from the department of
geological sciences. The council serves in an advisory
capacity as well as a channel for information.
Research Activities
The present organization of the Materials Research
Center, located at the Coxe Laboratory, includes four
laboratories, the advanced materials laboratory,
mechanical behavior laboratory, polymer laboratory,
and physical ceramics laboratory, and three service
laboratories, the electron microscopy laboratory, the
physical measurements laboratory, and the materials
clean room.
Current interdisciplinary research activities
include:
Advanced Materials. Characterization of metal oxide
films; defect structure of amorphous and crystalline
materials in both bulk and thin film form; diffusion
kinetics; eutectic research including solidification.
mi. restructure, and property studies; preparal ion .mil
properties of materials lor solid state devices; process-
ing ot metal insulator semi-conductor structures and
their evaluation and application to integrated circuits;
structure and properties of sputtered and evaporated
thin films; high temperature oxidation of metals.
Mechanical Hchavior. Electron fractography (scanning
and replica); effect of stress state and load history on
fatigue crack propagation; mechanical behavior of
eutectic composite materials; fatigue of polymeric
materials and adhesive joints; fracture of bridge steels;
low-cycle fatigue.
Physical Ceramics. Press forging (compressive deform-
ation); strengthening mechanisms; correlation
between surface condition and strength; thermal
stress fracture; strength and clastic deformation;
brittle composites; synthesis of mechanisms of wear
of ceramic alloy cutting-tools; static and cyclic
fatigue of ceramic solids; fracture toughness and
crack propagation behavior of refractories.
Polymers. Fatigue and relaxation processes in engi-
neering plastics; morphology and mechanical behavior
of interpenetrating networks; constrained-layer damp-
ing systems; structure, morphology, and mechanical
behavior of polyvinyl chloride; reinforcement of
elastomers and thermoelasticity; application of elec-
tron microprobe to salt diffusion in membranes;
strengthening mechanisms in polymer-modified con-
crete.
Educational Opportunities
This center facilitates interdisciplinary programs of
study and research that cross the traditional boun-
daries of science and engineering curricula, pro-
viding a fundamental, broad approach to the field of
materials science and technology. Graduate students
participating in the center's program usually receive
M.S. or Ph.D. degrees in the traditional discipline of
their choice, i.e., chemistry, physics, metallurgy and
materials science, electrical engineering, etc.; how-
ever, they are expected to pursue course work related
to a broader understanding of materials and conduct
research on an interdisciplinary materials problem in
one of the four center laboratories.
Course offerings in materials are summarized under
five-year programs as well as under department headings.
In addition, a special program leading to an M.S. in
80 Materials Research Center
materials is found under five-year programs.
Financial support for graduate students is available
through the Materials Research Center by means of
industrial fellowships as well as fellowships provided
from the operating funds of the center, and by re-
search assistantships related to sponsored research
programs.
For further information write to the director,
Professor Donald M. Smyth.
Institutes
Lawrence Henry Gipson Institute for
Eighteenth-Century Studies
Background and Purpose
The Lawrence Henry Gipson Institute for
Eighteenth-Century Studies, established in 1971,
serves as a lasting memorial to one of America's most
distinguished scholars. It helps to support the re-
search activities of the Lehigh community of human-
ists and social scientists interested in developing a
further understanding of the period of history
epitomized in Professor Gipson's monumental life
work, The British Empire before the American Revo-
lution (15 vols., 1936-1970).
Through its council, the Lawrence Henry Gipson
Institute for Eighteenth-Century Studies awards
research grants and fellowships from the income of its
endowment, a fund made possible by Professor
Gipson's bequest of his entire estate to Lehigh. To
further the scope of the original endowment, the
council of the institute seeks additional support by
promoting research and other programs related to the
eighteenth century.
to stimulate interdisciplinary research activities.
These seminars are broad in scope and will include
faculty from neighboring institutions.
Interdisciplinary graduate courses in eighteenth-
century studies to provide students, who normally
concentrate on one discipline, with a grasp of other
significant developments and an understanding of the
rich cultural and intellectual milieu of the eighteenth
century. Such courses will stress the inter-relationship
of history, politics, literature, fine arts, philosophy,
psychology and the sciences.
Annual symposia to honor the late Professor
Gipson, involving a distinguished scholar in
eighteenth-century studies to give lectures and also to
discuss opportunities for further scholarly explora-
tion.
Additional research resources for the Lehigh Uni-
versity Library, automatically available to the faculty
and students of all colleges and universities intercon-
nected with the library.
Faculty fellowships for the pursuit of research in
an eighteenth-century topic.
A national Lawrence Henry Gipson Fellowship to
be awarded on a competitive basis to a promising
graduate student in eighteenth-century studies.
Educational Opportunities
Among the academic departments involved in
eighteenth-century studies are English, government,
history, modern foreign languages, fine arts, music,
philosophy, psychology, and social relations.
For further information write to the coordinator,
Professor Lawrence H. Leder.
Institute of Fracture and Solid Mechanics
Research Activities
The income from the endowment of the Lawrence
Henry Gipson Institute for Eighteenth-Century
Studies, and other funds raised by the council, will
provide for:
Faculty research grants to defray travel costs,
microfilming, and other such expenses.
Graduate student grants to help support deserving
students during their dissertation year.
Internal seminars to bring together the eighteenth-
century interests of faculty and graduate students and
Background and Purpose
The Institute of Fracture and Solid Mechanics was
established in the fall of 1970 to enable faculty
members and students within the University to parti-
cipate in research relevant to fracture and solid
mechanics on a unique, interdisciplinary basis.
An area of special interest to the institute has been
in fracture mechanics which deals with the study of
structural and material sensitivity to flaws. Such flaws
can seriously affect the design and strength of ships,
aircrafts, automobiles, bridges and buildings. In
Institute of Fracture and Solid Mechanics 81
addition, fracture mechanics is rinding application in
such areas .is bone fracture, environmentally en
hanced cracking oi pavements and structural
members, tin- fracture >>i rocks, and the erosion of
materials by solid or watei particle impingement.
The institute centralizes many activities in the
lick! of solid and fracture mechanics. These activities
include: expansion of research capabilities to include
the application of concepts of fracture mechanics to
geology (rocks), medicine (bones), and composite
materials; editing books on timely subjects in fracture
and solid mechanics; compilation and collection of
written materials to establish and maintain a special
library of fracture mechanics; planning of conferences
on fracture and solid mechanics; offering short
courses and seminars on special topics; conducting a
liaison program with industry and with government
agencies.
Research Activities
Currently, there are several research programs
being conducted in solid and fracture mechanics.
Sponsors of these programs are from industrial corpo-
rations and government agencies. The programs cover
the following research topics:
Fracture Mechanics. Analytical: stress analysis of
engineering structures weakened by flaws; spherical
and cylindrical shells with mechanical imperfections;
crack extension in viscoelastic and rate sensitive
materials: thermoelastic analysis of crack problems;
heat generation at the crack tip region in metals;
vibration and impact of solids containing cracks;
three-dimensional studies of surface and through
cracks; fracture behavior of layered and fiber-
reinforced composites; elastic-plastic solutions of
crack problems.
Experimental: static and dynamic fracture tough-
ness testing of metallic, non-metallic and composite
materials; crack-extension resistance curve measure-
ments for aluminum and titanium alloys and steels;
glass-to-rubbery transition temperature in viscoelastic
materials; velocity measurements of running cracks;
fatigue crack propagation in pressurized shells and
shells under membrane load; combine loading
(biaxial, tension-bending, etc.) of thin plates with
cracks; photoelastic studies of stress distribution in
cracked and composite bodies; environmental effects
.mi crack propagation under static cyclic loads; fatigue
crack propagation under programmed loading;
gaseous hydrogen embi ittlcment .
Solid Mechanics. Analytical and Numerical Methods
of Analysis: conlumi.il mapping tei hnique applied to
potential solutions; two- and three-dimensional
asymptotic expansions near geometric discontinuities;
integral transform solutions leading to Frcdholin in
tcgral equations: singular integral equations with
generalized Cauchy Kernels; application of the
Chebyshev and Jacobi polynomials; methods based
on the Gauss-Jacobi quadrature formulas; special
applications of numerical treatment and finite
elements to continuum problems involving singulari-
ties; convergence of finite clement solutions for con-
tinuum mechanics problems.
Plates and Shells: development of advanced plate
and shell theories; load-deflection and instability
behavior of elastic and plastic shells of revolutions;
composite and sandwich shells subjected to static and
dynamic loadings; dynamics of magneto-elastic shells.
Educational Opportunities
Students interested in fracture and solid mechanics
should refer to course offerings in the departments of
mechanical engineering and mechanics, metallurgy
and materials science, civil engineering, chemistry and
biology.
For further information write to the director,
Professor George C. M. Sih.
Institute for Metal Forming
Background and Purpose
The Institute for Metal Forming, sponsored by the
department of metallurgy and materials science, was
formally established in 1970 with the following ob-
jectives: (1) to teach the principles and applications
of metal forming technology to graduate and under-
graduate students; (2) to provide instruction and
equipment for graduate research in metal forming
processes; and (3) to assist industry with solutions to
problems in metal forming.
Metal working processes are analyzed mathe-
matically (usually involving the computer). The
results of the analyses are checked and refined by
comparison with experimental data obtained in the
82 Institute for Metal Forming
fully instrumented metal forming laboratories which
are part of the facilities of the institute.
In addition, an important part of the effort of the
institute is the preparation of educational programs
using the latest audiovisual techniques. These pro-
grams are used in the classroom and in institute-
sponsored seminars on campus and at industrial facili-
ties.
Long-range planning, together with major equip-
ment acquisitions and construction, are supported by
University funds, federal funds, and an industrial
consortium group.
Research Activities
Several of the current research areas are: hydrostatic
extrusion; pressure -induced ductility; flow through
converging conical dies; effect of holes, inclusions and
pressure on the tensile properties; friction measure-
ment; cladding and forming of composite materials;
forming of polymers; deep drawing, impact extrusion
and ironing; powder consolidation.
Educational Opportunities
Students interested in metal forming should refer to
course offerings in the departments of metallurgy and
materials science and mechanical engineering and
mechanics. In addition, the institute offers special
informal seminars and lectures for graduate students.
For further information write to the director,
Professor Betzalel Avitzur.
South Jersey Wetlands Institute
Background and Purpose
This facility is a joint activity between the South
Jersey Wetlands Institute, incorporated as a non-
profit organization, and Lehigh University. The Uni-
versity operates the institute under the Center for
Marine and Environmental Studies at Lehigh.
The South Jersey Wetlands Institute which com-
menced operations in May 1972, is located on a
34-acre site on the edge of a coastal salt marsh near
Stone Harbor, New Jersey. It is a research and
teaching field station and following the practice of
other seaside marine research stations, educators and
researchers from other colleges and universities may
use the facilities of the Wetlands Institute for research
and education which falls within the general objects
of the institute. These objectives are: (1) to increase
the understanding of the natural processes controlling
the wetlands ecosystems through fundamental re-
search; (2) to investigate the renewability of the
natural resources and to increase the biotic potential
of the wetlands area; (3) to ascertain the effects of
disturbances caused by man's activities, and to find
methods of minimizing these effects through practical
and applied research; (4) to provide factual scientific
information which can serve others as a basis on
which to make intelligent decisions for the long-range
beneficial multiple use of coastal areas; (5) to train
scientists and engineers in methods of solving and of
preventing problems in the coastal zones; and (6) to
educate the general public, both resident and vaca-
tioning, in the importance of wetlands to the general
ecology of coastal areas, to the need for preserving
and for enhancing the wetlands in maintaining those
aspects of the coastal zones that make them attractive
to residents and vacationers, and what each person
can do to protect the environment.
The Wetlands Institute provides facilities for year-
round studies of the surrounding environment and
includes: 6 research laboratories, dormitory space and
kitchen facilities, lecture room and demonstration
area, flowing salt water system, maintenance shop,
scientific laboratory equipment, and a variety of out-
board motor skiffs.
Research Activities
Current research interests of the institute staff
include: salt marsh food webs; physiological criteria
for determining sub-lethal effects of various environ-
mental parameters; sedimentation studies; geo-
chemistry of coastal salt marsh waters; beach sand
studies; microbial mineralization of cellulose and
chitin in salt marshes; new techniques for identifica-
tion of planktonic fish eggs; viral diseases offish;
effect of sewage on marine organisms; and aqua-
culture offish and shellfish.
Educational Opportunities
Formal graduate studies are offered through the
graduate programs in the various departments of the
University. One facet of graduate student training is
related to preparation of scientists to continue studies
South Jersey Wetlands Institute 83
i>t the coastal area; the othei is concerned with pro-
viding school science teachers with sufficient training
so thai they are able to return to the classroom and
pass on vital information about the tidal wetlands to
tln-ir students, the future leaders of the country. In
conjunction with teacher training, every cttort is
made to provide lectures, demonstrations and tours
of the wetlands for classes. Hopefully, various class-
room projects may be developed where students and
scientists may work together. Selected undergraduate
courses are also offered as part of the summer pro-
gram.
For further information write to the director,
Professor Sidney S. Herman.
Council lor Research in Teaching and Learning
The University Council for Research in Teaching and
Learning is an interdisciplinary effort to support the
interests among groups of faculty members in re-
search and development activities to enhance the
teaching-learning process. Formed as task forces,
these groups pursue common interests in such areas as
computer applications, educational technology, pro-
grammed learning, delinquent education, and many
others. A significant aspect of the council's work is
that it encourages research and development activities
relevant to the Lehigh community and to the educa-
tional community at large.
Research Organizations
Bureau of Educational Service
The Bureau of Educational Service was organized in
1953 to provide professional assistance to public and
private schools and various other educational groups.
Among the purposes of the bureau are the render-
ing of professional assistance to educational institu-
tions by a cooperative study of their problems, foster-
ing research in the field of educational practice, and
helping to make the resources of the University more
readily available to communities and agencies in need.
In fulfilling these purposes the bureau obtains the
services of specialists from all areas of the academic
profession.
Detailed information on assistance with specific
problems can be secured from the Director, Division
of Educational Administration, School of Education.
Office of Research
The Lehigh Institute of Research was organized in
1924 to encourage and promote scientific research
and scholarly achievement in every division of learn-
ing represented in the organization of the University,
and in recognition of the need for further and more
exact knowledge in science and in the application of
science to the affairs of modern life. The institute was
reorganized in 1945 in recognition of the increasing
role of government agencies and industry in sponsor-
ing research, and renamed in 1968 in recognition of
its administrative function.
84 Research Organizations
Description of Courses
General Information
Following is a list of undergraduate and graduate
courses offered by Lehigh University. For purposes of
record, all approved courses are listed. It must be
understood, however, that the offerings in any given
semester are contingent upon a number of factors,
including student needs as determined at the time of
pre-registration.
Credit Hours
The number in parentheses following each course title
indicates the credit value of the course in terms of
semester hours. Three hours of drawing, of work in
the laboratory, or of practice in the field are regarded
as the equivalent of a recitation or lecture of one
hour's duration.
Course Numbering
The course numbering system specifies which courses
can be applied to the program of study as the student
progresses toward his undergraduate or graduate
degree. The numbering series is as follows:
0-99 Undergraduate courses, primarily for under-
classmen. Not available for graduate credit.
100-199 Advanced undergraduate courses. Not open
to freshmen except on petition. Not open to sopho-
mores except on petition, unless part of major pro-
gram or curriculum. Not available for graduate credit.
200-299 Courses open to advanced undergraduates
and graduates. Not available for graduate credit in the
major field.
300-399 Courses open to advanced undergraduates
and graduates. Available for graduate credit in the
major field.
400-499 Courses open to graduate students only, and
undergraduates by special petition.
High Immediate Relevance Courses
Each instructional department is authorized to offer
High Immediate Relevance courses— courses based on
contemporary social and scientific issues— within a
semester, with the option of having them become a
permanent part of the University curriculum. HIR
courses will be numbered, as is appropriate, . . . .97-
98, 197-198 297-298, .... 397-398, for a
maximum of two semesters.
Students may take 97-98 HIR courses Pass/Fail
under the standard procedures for Pass/Fail.
Apprentice Teaching
Apprentice teaching is designed for advanced stu-
dents, normally in their senior year, who wish to
learn about teaching under the guidance of an experi-
enced teacher. Master and apprentice teachers are,
with the approval of the chairman of the department
in which the apprentice teaching is to be done, free
for the most part to work out whatever arrangements
best fit the needs of the course. Apprentices typically
receive three hours of credit for attending classes,
doing some lecturing or leading of discussion sections,
assisting in making up or grading some written assign-
ments and tests, and being available for some indivi-
dual consultation with students. A student may
register for apprentice teaching only once each semes-
ter, and only twice for credit in his college career, for
a total of not more than six hours of credit. He may
register to be an apprentice teacher in a given course
only once. A graduate student who is not a paid
teaching assistant may register for apprentice teach-
ing, but his department must decide whether he may
receive credit which will count toward fulfilling
requirements for a graduate degree. The apprentice
will be graded for his work in the course by his
master teacher. Students who wish to do apprentice
teaching in extra-departmental courses, such as those
offered as Freshman Seminars or Creative Concepts
courses, may do so with the approval of the director
of the program. In High Immediate Relevance courses
or courses cross-listed in several departments, the
approval of the chairman of that department in which
the course is taught will be required. In such cases,
the student will be registered for the 300 course with
the same heading as the course in which he is an
apprentice (e.g., FS 300— Apprentice Teaching in FS
97C; CC 300-Apprentice Teaching in CC 101A; HIR
300— Apprentice Teaching in HIR 197, or as a depart-
mental 300 course if the HIR course is given as a
departmental offering).
Description of Courses 85
I'll i equisites
\cademi< preparation required tor admission to
courses is indicated under "Prerequisite following
course descriptions st.ited in most eases lor purposes
of convenience in terms ol Lehigh courses. Status
required tor admission, where numbering does not
fully describe this status, is also indicated under "Pre-
requisites."
A student who does not have the status or the
academic preparation set forth as prerequisites must,
in order to be admitted to a course, tile with the
Registrar at the time ot registration and on a standard
form provided by the Registrar a waiver of prerequi-
sites signed by the instructor teaching or in charge of
the course, the head of the teaching department, and
the student's curriculum director. Academic work
completed elsewhere must be attested in this manner
as being substantially equivalent to prerequisites
listed, unless the student's records in the Office of the
Registrar show that the proper officers have so evalu-
ated this preparation previously.
English 2, 10, 14, or 16 shall be prerequisite to all
100— or higher— level courses: exceptions may be
made only by petition to the Committee on Standing
ot Students.
Accounting
Pl otev,oi s
Robert H. Mills, Ph.D., C.P.A., Chairman
Alfred P. Koch. M.S.. C. P. A.
Carl L. Moore, M.S., C.P.A.
Wendell P. Trumbull, Ph.D.. C.P.A.
Adjunct Professor
H. Louis Thompson, M.B.A.
Associate Professor
Feng-Shyang Lull, Ph.D.
Assistant Professor
Kenneth P. Sinclair, Ph.D.
Instructors
Stuart K. Webster, M.B.A. , C.P.A.
Dunham R. Bainbridge, M.S., C.P.A.
Major in Business and Economics College
Required: 15 credits beyond the core, listed on page 40.
Acctg 315 Financial Accounting (3-4)
Accounting Electives (except Acctg 390)
(11-12)
Major in Arts and Science College
Required Preliminary Courses
Acctg 51,52 Essentials of Accounting (6)
Eco 1 Economics (4)
Eco 45 Statistical Methods (3)
Math 41 BMSS Calculus I (3)
Math 42 BMSS Probability (3)
Math 43 BMSS Linear Algebra (3)
Required Major Courses
Acctg 111 Computers in Business (3)
Acctg 315 Financial Accounting (3-4)
Eco 129 Money and Banking (3)
Eco 206 Microeconomic Analysis (3)
Law 1 Business Law (3)
Mgt 302 Quantitative Models— Conceptual (3)
or
Mgt 321 Organization Behavior (3)
86 Accounting
Plus nine semester hours of 300-level accounting courses ex-
cluding Acctg. 390, Internship.
Note: Students interested in qualifying for the CPA or CMA
certificate at either the bachelor or M.B.A. level should con-
sult the chairman of the department of accounting or their
major advisor.
Undergraduate Courses
51. Essentials of Accounting (3)
The organization, measurement and interpretation of eco-
nomic information. Introduction to accounting theory, con-
cepts and principles, the accounting cycle, and information
processing. Exposure to controversial issues concerning
income determination and valuation. Prerequisite: sopho-
more standing.
52. Essentials of Accounting (3)
Financial statement analysis for managerial and external use.
The use of economic information for managerial planning
and control. Introduction to job order, process, and standard
cost accounting, variable costing, and volume-mix-price-cost
relationships. Prerequisite: Acctg. 51 or 108.
108. Fundamentals of Accounting (3)
A one-semester survey of accounting principles and practices,
including an introduction to industrial cost systems designed
primarily for those students planning to take only one ac-
counting course. Other students should take the Acctg. 51,
52 sequence.
111. Computers in Business (3)
An introduction to computers with emphasis on business
applications. Develop a working knowledge of a computer
language sufficient to solve business problems. Basic know-
ledge of hardware, software, error control, integrated
systems, and simulation. Not open to students who have had
a previous equivalent (normally 3 credit hours) course in
computers.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
300. Apprentice Teaching in Acctg. (1-3)
307. Federal Tax Accounting (3)
An interpretation of the Federal income tax laws, rules, and
regulations applicable to income tax determination of in-
dividuals, partnerships, and corporations. Tax planning and
timing of transactions is emphasized. Prerequisite: Acctg. 51
or 108.
311. Accounting Information Systems
A general introduction to the development and implementa-
tion of an electronic data processing accounting information
systems. The course will consider the tools and techniques
used by someone performing the systems function. Prerequi-
site: Acctg. 52 or 108 and Acctg. 111.
315. Financial Accounting (3-4)
Intensive study of theory, generally accepted accounting
principles, and problems concerned with presenting fairly the
operating results, financial position, and changes in financial
position of business entities; preparation, analysis, and inter-
pretation of financial statements. Prerequisite: Acctg. 52 or
108.
317. Advanced Accounting (4)
Problems dealing with business combinations, partnerships,
fund accounting as it applies to non-profit entities, fiduciary
accounts, insolvent concerns, etc. Prerequisite: Acctg. 52 or
108.
318. Contemporary Issues (2-3)
Intensive study of A.I. C. P. A. pronouncements, research
studies, cases, reports, related to current external reporting
problems in public accounting. Prerequisite: Acctg. 315.
319. Development of Accounting Principles (3)
A critical and historical survey of the development of
accounting principles and theory in the twentieth century.
Prerequisite: Acctg. 315.
320. Auditing (3)
Survey of auditing theory, objectives, and practices relating
largely to the responsibilities of independent professional
accountants; ethics of the profession, generally accepted
auditing standards, internal control, examination of various
systems including EDP, statistical methods, report writing,
etc. Prerequisite: Acctg. 315.
324. Cost Accounting (3)
Principles and practices of industrial cost accounting, in-
cluding cost planning and budgeting, cost controls, job-lot
and standard and process systems, variance analysis, perfor-
mance reports, costs in management decisions. Prerequisite:
Acctg. 52 or 108.
371. Directed Readings (1-3)
Readings and research in various fields of accounting; design-
ed for superior students who have a special interest in some
topic or topics not covered by the regularly rostered courses.
Written term paper(s) required. Prerequisite: preparation in
accounting acceptable to the supervising professor and the
department chairman.
372. Special Topics (1-3)
Special problems and issues in accounting for which no
regularly scheduled coursework exists. When offered as group
study, coverage will vary according to interests of instructor
and students. Prerequisite: preparation in accounting accept-
able to instructor and department chairman.
Accounting 87
l>>(>. Internship ,11 (,]
Designed to give advanced students ol accounting, who have
maintained a satisfat toi \ standard of scholarship and who
show promise in the field of accounting, an opportunity to
acquire field experience and training with selected mdnsin.il
or public accounting firms or governmental agencies .is .1
complement to the academic learning process. Outside read-
ings will be assigned, Written reports will be submitted by
employer and students. The amount of credit will be in-
fluenced by the length ol the training period and the charac-
ter ot the experience afforded to the trainee, but will not
exceed sis hours tor a regular semester or three hours for a
summer period ol at least eight weeks. Prerequisite: junior
standing and approval of faculty committee on internship.
1 'ot t graduates
The specialized accounting courses at the 300-level are fre-
quently offered in graduate sections in addition to the
400-level courses. These graduate offerings permit MBA
students to take a limited concentration of 9-12 hours in
accounting. If they have taken 12 to 15 hours in accounting
as undergraduates, their total professional preparation of
21-27 hours represents a sound basis for a career in public,
industrial or governmental accounting. Undergraduates may
wish to plan ahead for a full five-year program including the
master's degree for professional accounting preparation.
(Note that Acctg. 422, Managerial Accounting, is for non-
accounting major MBA students and not open for credit to
master's candidates who majored in accounting as under-
graduates or who are carrying an accounting field of speciali-
zation at the graduate level.) For further information about
CPA requirements in different states, CMA certificates, or for
the selection of accounting electives, see the chairman,
accounting department.
406. Advanced Tax Planning & Research (3)
An advanced course in Federal tax laws, rules, and regula-
tions involving cases and problems relating to various tax
entities. Tax planning and utilization of research tools is
emphasized. Prerequisite: Acctg. 307.
408. (I.E. 408) Management Information Systems (3)
For description, see I.E. 408.
422. Managerial Accounting (3)
Survey course for non-accounting majors (related course for
accounting majors is Acctg. 324); uses of accounting data for
managerial planning and control, including cost control;
capital expenditure planning; product pricing decisions;
operations research applications. Prerequisite: Acctg. 52 or
108.
424. Advanced Management Accounting (3)
Managerial planning and control problems with emphasis on
the responsibilities of the accountant. Practical applications
using cases. Includes advanced treatment of management
control systems, managed costs, transfer pricing, and the
capital investment problem. Prerequisite: Acctg. 324 or 422.
I >1. Accounting Theory .mil Thought (3)
\ - nil, il and historical examination ol modern accounting
pts, Concerned with measuring enterprise income and
capital and related cconomii data, in both simplil icd and
realistic circumstances, and with communicating and inter-
preting such data effectively to interested parties. Prere-
quisite: 15 hours of accounting.
442. Professional Accounting Seminar (3)
Survey of technical and professional accounting problem, n
the advanced level. Advanced case studies in public
accounting and management services. Prerequisite: 15 hours
of accounting. Offered every other year.
471. Directed Readings (1-3)
An extended study of an approved topic in the field of
accounting. May be repeated.
472. Special Topics (1-3)
Special problems and issues in accounting for which no
regularly scheduled coursework exists. When offered as group
study, coverage will vary according to interests of instructor
and students. Prerequisite: preparation in accounting accept-
able to instructor and department chairman. May be
repeated.
88 Accounting
American Studies
Joseph Dowling, Ph.D., Professor of History and Director of
American Studies
This is an interdepartmental major emphasizing the idea that
the institutions and values of a society comprise a whole and
not merely a sum of separate parts. By concentrating on the
unique expressions of individuals contained in the literature
of America and by studying the historical movements within
which these expressions develop, American Studies reveals
relationships which may not be clearly seen within the frame-
work of a single discipline. By carefully chosen electives the
student can add to the insights of literature and history.
Thus, for example, a student may pursue the relationship of
the behavioral sciences to history and literature or use the
various disciplines to give greater comprehension of the prob-
lems of the American city. In addition, the study in depth of
one's own environment provides the student with a greater
awareness of the forces which have shaped his world and his
character and should produce a greater sensitivity to the
values of his own society.
The major consists of sequences in American history and
literature, followed by twelve hours of advanced study
divided equally between American history and American
literature, six hours of electives in any aspect of the
American experience and six hours of either European litera-
ture or European history. In his senior year the student will
take one history and one literature seminar organized around
a single theme in each respective field. The major require-
ments total 42 hours.
Because the emphasis is strongly placed on American
history and literature, an undergraduate American Studies
major will provide thorough preparation for graduate work in
American Studies and, with suitable collateral courses,
American literature or American history. In addition, the
major may help in preparing students for advanced work in
law, theology, and teaching in secondary schools and commu-
nity colleges.
Required Preliminary Courses
Hist 13, 14 American Civilization (6)
Engl 23, 24 American Literature (6)
Required Major Courses
Six credit hours to be chosen from each group.
Engl 331 20th Century American Literature (3)
Engl 341 Contemporary American Literature (3)
Engl 343 American Romanticism (3)
Engl 344 American Realism (3)
Hist 119 Colonial America (3)
Hist 120
Hist 327
Hist 328
Options
Hist
Engl
Revolutionary America (3)
American Intellectual History (3)
American Intellectual History (3)
European History (6)
European Literature (6)
Electives (6)
Choice of electives and options to be made in consultation
with advisor, selected from such disciplines as economics,
fine arts, government, philosophy, religion studies, social
relations.
Required Senior Seminars
Engl 345 Themes in American Literature (3)
Hist 374 Themes in American History (3)
Admission to honors in American Studies is by invitation
of the committee in the student's junior year. The student
must attain an average of 3.2 in major courses, in addition to
the University honors requirements. Those interested in
honors work are urged to consult the director.
American Studies 89
Arts — Engineering
The standard major for arcs-engineers working cowards a B.A.
degree is applied science. This includes all of the science and
engineering courses required in the freshman year and in die
pattern roster lor the chosen tield of engineering.
Arts engineers with special interests outside engineering
frequently combine another arts or science major with their
engineering program. Interested students should consult with
the Dean of the College of Arts and Science.
Recommended Freshman Year
Arts-engineering freshmen have the same roster of courses as
do engineering freshmen, with the exception that the arts-
engineering freshman takes Economics 1 the second semester
in place of an elective. Reter to the recommended freshman
year, College of Engineering.
Recommended Professional Sequences
Beginning with the sophomore year, the arts-engineering
student will be guided by the appropriate pattern roster in his
chosen tield. The pattern roster shows the most effective way
of combining arts and engineering courses to prepare for the
last year in the branch of engineering chosen.
Although the minimum number of credit hours needed
for the Bachelor of Arts is 1 20, a student in arts-engineering
should expect to earn more than this in order to qualify for
the Bachelor of Science degree in his chosen field of engineer-
ing at the end of the fifth year. The number needed for both
degrees is shown for each pattern roster.
Junioi Year, First Semestei tS credit hours
I anguage (4)
l hi in I'M Physical Chemistry (3)
Chem 192 Physical Chemistry Lab (1)
ChE 167 Unit Operations (3)
ChE 169 Unit Operations I ab I (1)
Distribution Elective (3)
Junior Year, Second Semester ( 1 7 credit hours)
Language (3)
ChE 170 Unit Operations Lab II (1)
ChE 286 Modelling, Simulation, and Control (3)
ChE 210 Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics (4)
Distribution Electives (6)
.Senior Year, First Semester (17 credit hours)
ChE 302 Chemical Engineering Kinetics (3)
Chem 51 Organic Chemistry (3)
Chem 55 Organic Chemistry Lab (2)
Electives for Engineering Major (3)
Distribution Electives (6)
Senior Year, Second Semester (15 credit hours)
ChE 174 Chemical Plant Design (3)
Electives for Engineering Major (9)
Distribution Electives (3)
Summer
ChE 100 Industrial Employment
Note: For senior year engineering electives, the student
should consult with department of chemical engineering
advisors.
Arts-Chemical Engineering
154 credit hours needed for B.A. and B.S.
Sophomore Year, First Semester (17 credit hours)
Language (5)
Math 23 Analytic Geometry and Calculus III (4)
Phys 21 Introductory Physics II (4)
Phys 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)
ChE 41 Cascade Processing Concepts (3)
Sophomore Year, Second Semester (IS credit hours)
Language (5)
Math 205 Linear Methods (3)
Chem 90 Physical Chemistry (3)
ChE 52 Introduction to Transport Phenomena (4)
Distribution Elective (3)
Arts-Civil Engineering
155-167 credit hours needed for B.A. and B.S.
Sophomore Year, First Semester (17 credit hours)
Language (5)
Math 23 Analytic Geometry and Calculus III (4)
Phys 21 Introductory Physics II (4)
Phys 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)
Distribution Elective (3)
Sophomore Year, Second Semester (17 credit hours)
Language (5)
Math Approved Mathematics Elective (3)*
Mech 1 Statics (3)
Distribution Electives (6)
90 Arts-Engineering
Junior Year, First Semester (16 credit hours)
Language (4)
Mechll Mechanics of Materials (3)
CE 13 Civil Engineering Concepts (3)
Distribution Electives (6)
Junior Year, Second Semester (15 credit hours)
Language (3)
Mech 102 Dynamics (3)
CE 40 Principles of Surveying (3)
Distribution Electives (6)
Summer (3 credit hours)
CE 41 Engineering Surveys (3)
Senior Year, First Semester (16 credit hours)
CE101 Computer Methods (1)
CE 121 Mechanics of Fluids (3)
CE 143 Soil Mechanics (3)
CE 159 Structural Analysis (3)
Electives (6)*
Senior Year, Second Semester (IS credit hours)
CE 110
CE 160
CE 170
CE 222
Summer
CE100
Civil Engineering Laboratory (3)
Structural Design (3)
Environmental Engineering (3)
Hydraulic Engineering (3)
Elective (3)*
Industrial Employment
Eight weeks of industrial employment
should precede fifth year. Consult chairman
of department.
Sophomore Year, Second Semester (15 credit hours)
Language (5)
Math 205 Linear Methods (3)
Mech 103 Principles of Mechanics (4)
Distribution Elective (3)
Junior Year, First Semester (15 credit hours)
EE 11 Introduction to Computer Engineering (3)
Math 231 Statistical Inference
or
Math 309 Theory of Probability (3)
Distribution Electives (9)
Junior Year, Second Semester (16 credit hours)
Language (3)
EE 20 Introduction to Circuit Theory (4)
Phys 31 Introduction to Quantum Mechanics (3)
Distribution Electives (6)
Senior Year, First Semester (1 7 credit hours)
EE 105 Electronic Circuits (4)
EE 104 Linear Systems and Signals (4)
Approved Electives (6)
Distribution Elective (3)
Senior Year, Second Semester (17 credit hours)
EE 103
EE231
EE 106
EE 142
Summer
EE 100
Physical Electronics (3)
Electric and Magnetic Fields (3)
Electromechanics and Machines (3)
Junior Lab (2)
Approved Electives (6)
Industrial Employment
* Electives which require approval of civil engineering
department.
Note: students must choose at least one elective in mathe-
matics and at least one elective in materials, thermodynamics,
fluid mechanics, or physical chemistry.
Arts-Electrical Engineering
157 credit hours needed for B.A. and B.S.
Sophomore Year, First Semester (1 7 credit hours)
Language (5)
Math 23 Analytical Geometry and Calculus III (4)
Phys 21 Introductory Physics II (4)
Phys 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)
Distribution Elective (3)
Arts-Engineering Physics
150 credit hours needed for B.A. and B.S.
Arts-engineering physics students will complete, during the
first four years, the physics major under the guidance of the
chairman of the department of physics.
Arts-Engineering 91
Aiis -Indiuo i.i I Engineering
152 credit hours needed fot B.A. and U.S.
Sophomore Yc.it, First Semestei \ 1 7 credit hours)
Language (5)
Math Analytic Geometry and Calculus HI (4)
Phys -I Introductory Physics II (4)
Phys 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)
IE 5 InduNtri.il Organization Models (3)
Sophomore Year, Second Semester (17 credit hours)
1 anguage (5)
Math 233 Statistical Inference (3)
IE 18 Information Processing Theory (3)
Engineering Science Elective (3)
Distribution Elective (3)
Junior Year, i'irst Semester (16 credit hours)
Language (4)
Math 205 Linear Methods (3)
IE 205 Engineering Statistics (3)
Engineering Science Elective (3)
Distribution Elective (3)
Junior Year, Second Semester (16 credit hours)
Language (3)
IE 206 Operation Research Techniques (4)
Engineering Science Elective (3)
Distribution Electives (6)
Senior Year, First Semester (16 credit hours)
IE 101 Fundamentals of Manufacturing Engineering
(4)
Engineering Science Elective (3)
Distribution Electives (9)
Senior Year, Second Semester (15 credit hours)
IE 102
Summer
IE 100
Work Systems (3)
Engineering Science Electives (6)
Distribution Electives (6)
Industrial employment should precede fifth
year. Consult chairman of department.
Note: Engineering science electives must be cleared with the
department of industrial engineering.
Arts Mechanical Engineering and Engineering Mechanics
155- 1 (il credit hours needed fot IV A. and U.S.
Sophomore Year, First Semestet (17 i redit hours
language (5)
Phys 21 Introductory Physics II (4)
Phys 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)
Math 23 Analytic Geometry and Calculus III (4)
Distribution Elective (3)
Sophomore Year, Second Semester ( 17 credit hours)
Language (5)
Mech 1 Statics (3)
Math 205 Linear Methods (3)
CE 1 1 Engineering Graphics (3)
Distribution Elective (3)
Junior Year, First Semester (17 credit hours)
Language (4)
Met 63 Engineering Materials and Processes (3)
or
Met 91 Elements of Materials Science (3)
ME 101 Mechanical Engineering Design I (1)
ME 104 Thermodynamics I (3)
Distribution Electives (6)
Junior Year, Second Semester (1 7 credit hours)
Language (3)
Mech 1 1 Mechanics of Materials (3)
Mech 13 Materials Testing Laboratory (1)
Math 208 Complex Variables
or
Math 231 Statistical Inference (3)
EE 160 Electrical Circuits and Apparatus (3)
EE 161 Electrical Problems (1)
EE 162 Dynamo Laboratory (1)
ME 102 Mechanical Engineering Design II (2)
Senior Year, First Semester (17 credit hours)
ME 105 Thermodyanmics II (3)
ME 108 Laboratory I (2)
Mech 102 Dynamics (3)
Mech 203 Advanced Strength of Materials (3)
Distribution Electives (6)
Senior Year, Second Semester (16 credit hours)
ME 231 Fluid Mechanics
or
CE121 Mechanics of Fluids (3)
CE 123 Fluid Mechanics Laboratory (1)
ME 242 Mechanical Vibrations (3)
ME 109 Laboratory (2)
Distribution Electives (6)
92 Arts-Engineering
Summer
ME 100
Senior Year, Second Semester (16-17 credit hours)
Summer employment should precede fifth
year. Consult department chairman.
Arts-Metallurgy and Materials Science
156-167 credit hours needed for the B.A. and B.S.,
depending on option selected.
Sophomore Year, First Semester (17 credit hours)
Met 63
Language (5)
Engineering Materials and Processes
or
Met 91 Elements of Materials Science (3)
Math 23 Analytic Geometry and Calculus III (4)
Phys 21 Introductory Physics II (4)
Phys 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)
Sophomore Year, Second Semester (15-1 6 credit hours)
Language (5)
Met 10
Metallurgy Laboratory (1)
Mech 1
Statics (3)
EE 160
Electrical Circuits and Apparatus
and
EE 161
Electrical Problems
Phys 31
or
Introduction to Quantum Mechai
Distribution Elective (3)
Junior Year, First Semester (16 credit hours)
Language (4)
Met 207 Electron and Crystal Structure (3)
Met 210 Metallurgical Thermodynamics (3)
Mech 11 Mechanics of Materials (3)
ChE 60 Engineering in Chemical Manufacturing (3)
Junior Year, Second Semester (18 credit hours)
Language (3)
Met 208 Phase Diagram and Transformations (3)
Met 21 8 Mechanical Behavior of Materials (3)
Chem 196 Physical Chemistry (3)
Distribution Electives (6)
Senior Year, First Semester (15 credit hours)
Met 307 Structure and Behavior of Materials (3)
Math 205 Linear Methods
or
Math 231 Statistical Inference (3)
Distribution Electives (9)
ME 166
Mech 102
Met 304
Met 101
Summer
Met 100
Procedures for Mechanical Design
or
Dynamics (2-3)
Extractive Metallurgy I (4)
Professional Development (1)
Distribution Electives (9)
Industrial employment should precede fifth
year. Consult chairman of department.
Note: students selecting Research Option should elect Met.
240, Research Techniques, in the second semester of the
senior year.
Arts-Engineering 93
Biology
Professors
Richard Griffith Malsbcrger, Ph.D., Chairman
Saul Benjamin Barber, Ph.D.
Thomas C. Cheng, Ph.D., Director, Center for Health Sciences
Sidney Samuel Herman, Ph.D., Director. South Jersey
Wetlands Institute
Basil Waldo Parker, Ph.D.
Associate Professors
Bradford Breckenridge Owen, Ph.D.
Hayden Nelson Pritchard, Ph.D.
Assistant Professor
Steven S. Krawiec, Ph.D.
Ann Cali, Ph.D.
Adjunct Professors
Edward John Benz. M.D.
Eugene M. Landis. M.D., Ph.D.
George John Jackson, Ph.D.
Jack B. Pearce, Ph.D.
Kenneth E. Wolf, Ph.D.
The biology department offers students choice of two
majors, the Bachelor of Arts in biology and the Bachelor of
Science in biology. The principal differences in requirements
for the two majors are:
1. The B.A. course of study requires the student to com-
plete the distribution requirements of the College of Arts and
Science in addition to the requirements of the biology major.
2. The B.S. course of study requires that, in addition to
the requirements of the biology major, the student complete
a group of courses with the only elective restriction being
that they be outside the fields of natural science and mathe-
matics.
3. The B.A. curriculum has a total of 53 hours of courses
in the major requirements as compared to 82 in the B.S. cur-
riculum.
The B.A. major in biology is not designed specifically for
pre-professional training but it does exceed the minimum
requirements for admission to medical, dental and allied pro-
fessional colleges as well as to study for advanced degrees in
most of the fields of graduate biology. It is, therefore, recom-
mended to those students who desire an adequate back-
ground in biology combined with the cultural background of
the arts college distribution requirements.
The B.S. major in biology is designed specifically for
optimal scientifn preparation foi entry into professional
graduate training in medicine, dentistry and allied pi"
onal fields as well in graduate biology. Such pre prof
si. in. 1 1 Ir.miiiij; is pun hascd 'I the i "'.: "I .i 1,'iliu I ion ill llir
number of non si ien< c courses a student will be able to take
during a normal four year undergraduate program. The stu-
dent should, therefore, consider carefully before committing
himself to cither program. An initial choice of one or the
other program is revisablc, although this becomes more diffi-
cult after the freshman year.
The Bachelor ol Arts Major
Required Courses
Biol 21 Principles of Biology (3)
Biol 22 Introduction to Biology Laboratory (1 )
Biol 28 Genetics (3)
Plus nine hours of organismic biology including one course in
botany, six hours of environmental biology, and six hours of
cellular biology.
Organismic Biology
Biol 34 Comparative Anatomy (4)
Biol 303 Advanced Invertebrate Zoology (3)
Biol 313 General Histology (3)
Biol 314 Vertebrate Embryology (3)
Biol 331 Non-vascular Plants (3)
Biol 332 Vascular Plants (3)
Environmental Biology (3)
Biol 306
Biol 309
Biol 333
Biol 324
Biol 317
Biol 361
Cellular Biology
Biol 35
Biol 320
Biol 353
Biol 333
Biol 371, 372
Biol 322
Ecology (3)
Aquatic Biology (3)
Symbiosis (3)
Animal Behavior (3)
Evolution (3)
Sanitary Microbiology (3)
Microbiology (3)
Cell Physiology (3)
Virology (3)
Symbiosis (3)
Biochemistry (3)
Animal Physiology (3)
Additional Required Courses
Math 41 BMSS Calculus (3)
Math 41 BMSS Probability (3)
Math 43 BMSS Linear Algebra (3)
Chem 21, 22 Chemical Principles & Laboratory (4)
Chem 51, 52, 55 Organic Chemistry & Laboratory (8)
Chem 39 Analytical Chemistry
or
Chem 194 Physical Chemistry (3)
Phys 13, 14 General Physics and Physics Laboratory (4)
94 Biology
Recommended Sequence of Courses
Freshman Year
Biol 21
Biol 22
Biol 28
Chem 21
Chem 22
Math 41
Math 42
Phys 11,12
Sophomore Year
Principles of Biology (3)
Introduction to Biology Laboratory (1)
Genetics (3)
Chemical Principles I (4)
Chemical Principles I Laboratory (1)
BMSS Calculus (3)
BMSS Probability (3)
Introductory Physics I (5)
Chem
51
Chem
52
Chem
55
Phys
L3, 14
Math 43
Biol
Junior Year
Chem
39
Chem
194
Biol
Organic Chemistry (3)
Organic Chemistry (3)
Organic Chemistry Laboratory (2)
General Physics (4)
BMSS Linear Algebra (3)
Electives (3 or 6)
Analytical Chemistry
or
Physical Chemistry (3)
Electives (3, 6, or 9)
Senior Year
Biol Electives (3, 6, or 9)
The Bachelor of Science Major
Required Courses
Biol 21 Principles of Biology (3)
Biol 22 Introduction to Biology Lab (1)
Biol 28 Genetics (3)
Plus nine hours from each of the following areas including at
least one course in botany.
Organismic Biology
Biol 34 Comparative Anatomy (4)
Biol 303 Advanced Invertebrate Zoology (3)
Biol 313 General Histology (3)
Biol 314 Vertebrate Embryology (3)
Biol 331 Non-vascular Plants
Biol 332 Vascular Plants (3)
Environmental Biology
Biol 306 Ecology (3)
Biol 309 Aquatic Biology (3)
Biol 333 Symbiosis (3)
Biol 324 Animal Behavior (3)
Biol 317 Evolution (3)
Biol 361 Sanitary Microbiology (3)
Cellular Biology
Biol 35
Biol 320
Biol 353
Biol 333
Biol 371, 372
Biol 322
Microbiology (3)
Cell Physiology (3)
Virology (3)
Symbiosis (3)
Biochemistry (6)
Animal Physiology
Additional R
Math 21, 22,
Math 41,42,
Chem 21
Chem 22
Chem 51
Chem 52
Chem 55
Chem 90
Chem 191
Chem 192
Phys 11
Phys 12
Phys 21
Phys 22
Geol 1
Psych 3
Psych 9
Phil 261
equired Courses
23 Analytic Geometry and Calculus (12)
43, 44 BMSS Calculus, Probability and Linear
Algebra (12)
or
Introductory Chemical Principles (4)
Chemical Principles Lab (1)
Organic Chemistry (3)
Organic Chemistry (3)
Organic Chemistry Lab (2)
Physical Chemistry (3)
Physical Chemistry (3)
Physical Chemistry Lab (1)
Introductory Physics I (4)
Introductory Physics Lab I (1)
Introductory Physics II (4)
Introductory Physics Lab II (1)
Principles of Geology (3)
and one of the following:
Psychology as a Natural Science (3)
Statistical Analysis (3)
Philosophy of the Natural Sciences (3)
Recommended Sequence of Courses
Principles of Biology and Lab (4)
Genetics (3)
Analytical Geometry and Calculus I, II (8)
or
BMSS Calculus and Probability (6)
Chemical Principles I and Lab (5)
Introductory Physics I and Lab (5)
Freshman Year
Biol 21, 22
Biol 28
Math 21, 22
Math 41,42
Chem 21,22
Phys 11, 12
Sophomore Year
Chem 51, 53, 55 Organic Chemistry and Lab (8)
Math 23 Analytic Geometry and Calculus III (4)
or
Math 42, 43 Calculus and Linear Algebra (6)
Phys 21, 22 Introductory Physics II and Lab (5)
Chem 90 Physical Chemistry (3)
Biol Electives (6)
Psych Elective
or
Phil Elective (3)
Biology 95
Junior Yeai
Cliom 191, 192 Physical Chemistry (4)
Gcol i Principles of Geology (3)
Psych Elective
or
Phil Elective (3)
Biol Blectives (6-12)
Senior Year
Biol
Elcctivcs (6-12)
( tndergraduate Courses
21. Principles ot Biology (3)
Introduction to biology by study of selected principles.
Topics covered include cell structure and function, plant and
animal structure and function, diversity and evolution of
organisms. Three lectures per week.
22. Introduction to Biology Laboratory (1)
Laboratory observations and experiments to illustrate how
biological information is acquired. Designed primarily as a
laboratory to accompany Biology 21. Prerequisite: Biology
21 previously or concurrently. One 3-hour laboratory per
week. Graded only pass-fail.
28. Genetics (3)
The basic laws governing inheritance in plants and animals,
chromosome behavior, nature of genes. The relation of en-
vironmental modifications, hybrid variation, and mutations
to the mechanics of evolution.
34. Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy (4)
A course in vertebrate zoology with emphasis on the study of
homologous body structures in the various vertebrate classes
and their relationship to the functional demands of habit and
environment in each class. Detailed dissections of representa-
tive vertebrates are made in the laboratory. Two lectures and
two laboratory periods each week. Prerequisite: Biol. 21 and
22, or equivalent; sophomore standing.
35. Microbiology (3)
Emphasis on the appearance, physiology, and taxonomy of
prokaryotes. Selected subjects pertaining to relations
between man and microorganisms. Prerequisite: a laboratory
course in biology.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
221. Undergraduate Research (3)
Laboratory work, field work, or both depending upon the
interest and competence of the student. Prerequisites: junior
standing and consent of the chairman of the department.
2.11. N.itui.il History and Urology (3)
A i oni cntratcd I nurse in recognition of species of plants and
.num. iK and study of their interrelationships in natural and
altered environments. Lectures and seminars in use of keys
and preservation of collections. Designed for secondary
school teachers in life sciences. Prerequisites: graduate
standing or consent of instructor.
232. Natural History and Ecology Workshop (3)
Field and laboratory work in natural history and erology.
Must be taken concurrently with Biol. 231.
241. Ecology of Wetlands (6)
Study of plants and animals of wetlands areas and their inter-
relationship with the environment. The importance of the
wetlands to the marine environment and methods of conser-
vation. Independent study will form part of the course.
Primarily designed for secondary school teachers of the
sciences. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. (Offered only in
summer session at Lehigh's South Jersey Wetlands Institute.)
261. Special Topics in Biology (1-3)
Research, conferences, and reports on selected topics not
covered in the general undergraduate offerings. May be taken
more than once for credit.
262. Special Topics in Biology (1-3)
Continuation of Biology 261.
303. Advanced Invertebrate Zoology (3)
A detailed survey of representative invertebrates. Anatomical
and histological examination of selected types. Concepts of
evolution and speciation. One lecture and two laboratories
per week. Prerequisite: two semesters of biology, one with
laboratory.
306. Ecology (3)
The basic principles of ecological interrelationships; training
in use of analytical keys and reference collections for the
identification of plants and animals; field trips for the study
of interrelationships of living organisms. Two lectures and
one laboratory period or field trip per week. Prerequisite:
two semesters of biology, one with laboratory.
309. Aquatic Biology (3)
Lectures on the physical, chemical and biological aspects of
the fresh water environment including cyclic and seasonal
changes. A consideration of the major groups of organisms
and their interactions. Influence of man-made alterations
including impoundments and waste disposal methods. Two
lectures and one laboratory period or field trip per week.
Prerequisites: Biol. 21 or 22 or equivalent.
96 Biology
313. General Histology (3)
The techniques of preservation and preparation of animal and
plant tissues for microscopical study; comparative studies of
fresh and preserved tissues. One lecture and two laboratory
periods per week. Prerequisite: Biol. 21 and 22 or equivalent,
Biol. 34 or equivalent recommended.
332. Evolution of Vascular Plants (3)
A comparative study of the ontogenetic and phylogenetic
development of vascular plants. The life cycles, ecological
importance and cellular morphology of the higher plants are
examined. Emphasis on the plants of Pennsylvania. Prerequi-
site: consent of instructor or Biol. 21.
314. Vertebrate Embryology (3)
A study of reproduction from germ cell formation through
establishment of the principal organ systems of the vertebrate
body. Various mechanical and physiological problems con-
fronting the growing embryo are considered, and direct ob-
servation of whole mounts, sections, and living material are
made in the laboratory. Two lectures and one laboratory
period each week. Prerequisite: Biol. 34 or equivalent.
317. (Geol. 317) Evolution (3)
The origin of species and higher categories with emphasis on
animals. Isolating mechanisms, population structure, rates of
evolution, extinction. Prerequisite: Biol. 21 or consent of
instructor.
320. Cell Physiology (3)
The fundamental processes of life at the cellular level, in-
cluding permeability and related membrane phenomena, en-
zymatic transformations, respiration, photosynthesis, gene
function, bioelectricity, and other aspects of neuron func-
tion, contractility and other kinds of protoplasmic motility.
Prerequisites: consent of instructor or two semesters of
biology, at least one with laboratory, and Chem. 52.
322. Animal Physiology (3)
The physiology of organs and organ systems in animals. Em-
phasis on mammalian systems, but lower vertebrates and
invertebrates are also included. Functions studied include
digestion, nutrition, metabolism, excretion, respiration, cir-
culation, locomotion, nervous and chemical coordination.
Prerequisites: consent of instructor or two semesters of
biology, at least one with laboratory, and Chem. 52.
324. Animal Behavior (3)
Discussion of the behavior of invertebrates and vertebrates
and analysis of the physiological mechanisms responsible for
behavioral actions. Emphasis on perception, environmental
stimuli, and adaptive value of specific behavior patterns. Pre-
requisite: consent of instructor or Biol. 21.
331. Non-vascular Plants (3)
A comparative study of the ontogenetic and phylogenetic
development of algae, fungi and bryophytes. The life cycles
and ecological importance of representative organisms are
examined. Two lectures and one laboratory. Prerequisite:
consent of instructor of Biol. 21.
333. Symbiosis (3)
Consideration of factors governing symbiotic relationships,
including phoresis, commensalism, parasitism, and mutual-
ism. Lectures and demonstrations emphasizing the theoretical
and applied aspects of morphological and physiological
adaptation, nutrient assimilation and metabolism, develop-
ment, host reactions, and the dynamics of host-symbiont
interactions are presented. Laboratory experiments designed
to acquaint the student with techniques, evaluation of data,
and to demonstrate principles are carried out. Prerequisite:
Biol. 21. Two lectures and one laboratory period per week.
336. Evolution of Land Plants (3)
Comparative study of the ontogenetic and phylogenetic
development of plants as they invaded the terrestrial environ-
ment. The algae are studied briefly, but stress is placed on the
bryophytes and tracheophytes (land plants). The life cycles
of representative plants are examined in detail. Two lectures
and a laboratory. Prerequisite: Biol. 21 or its equivalent.
341. Biology of Marine Animals (6)
Emphasis on comparative morphology and physiology of
marine animals. Field trips for ecological observation and
collection as well as anatomical study and physiological ex-
perimentation. Prerequisite: consent of instructor and two
semesters of biology. (Offered only in summer session at
Lehigh's South Jersey Wetlands Institute.)
353. Virology (3)
A lecture course on bacterial and animal viruses including
taxonomy, physical and chemical properties, and the bio-
chemical transformations of infected cells. Prerequisite: a
course in microbiology or biochemistry.
361. Sanitary Microbiology (3)
Laboratory, field work, and reports on the microbiology of
water supplies, waste disposal, and food processing. Prerequi-
site: one semester each of microbiology and analytical
chemistry.
371. (Chem. 371) Elements of Biochemistry (3)
For course description, see Chem. 371.
372. (Chem. 372) Advanced Biochemistry (3)
For course description, see Chem. 372.
For Graduates
The biology department accepts a limited number of students
who are interested in graduate study towards the Ph.D.
degree. Candidates for M.S. degrees are also accepted but
Biology 97
emphasis is on the formei degree. Currently the dcpartmcnl
averages aboul twenty lull time graduate students in resi
dence each year.
The training program initially emphasizes breadth in
biolog\ followed In concentration iii .1 special field of in-
terest. Because ol the small si/c of the department staff and
the restricted number of graduate students, stafl and students
work together vers closel) . especially during the years ol
student specialization.
The first two or two and one-half years are devoted
primarily to course work but some of these are special re-
search and readings courses that may serve as starting points
for thesis research. Stall members normally direct student
research programs only in the areas encompassed by their
own research interests. These are: comparative physiology of
nerve and muscle, capillary circulation, virology, biological
oceanography, histochemistry, aquatic biology, biological
aspects of water pollution, symbiosis and parasitism, and
biology of nucleic acids. Interdisciplinary programs in
biological aspects of marine sciences may also be arranged in
cooperation with the Center for Marine and Environmental
Sciences.
Special department requirements for the M.S. degree in-
clude one year of graduate biochemistry, two semesters of
graduate statistics and at least one semester of research, as
well as passing an M.S. qualifying examination. Requirements
for the Ph.D. degree are determined by the student's special
committee and are tailored to fit his special needs and in-
terests, but also include passing a special examination as well
as a defense of the Ph.D. thesis.
The prerequisite for graduate work in biology is under-
graduate training in biology, chemistry, physics and mathe-
matics approximately equivalent to that taken by biology
majors at Lehigh University. Minor deficiencies in these areas
may be completed during the first year of graduate study,
usually, however, without graduate credit. Candidates for
admission to graduate study in biology should take the
Graduate Record (G.R.E.) Advanced Test in Biology as well
as the G.R.E. Verbal and Mathematical Aptitude tests.
Failure to include results of these examinations with applica-
tion for admission can seriously delay or prevent action on
the application.
Current departmental projects of special interest are as
follows: neurophysiological mechanisms in animal behavior;
viral diseases of fresh-water fishes; biological surveys of lakes;
thermal and industrial pollution of the Delaware River; salt
marsh ecology; periphyton and water quality; cytochemistry
of lymphocystis tumor cells; capillary permeability, porosity
and dye cinematography studies; physiology of parasites,
physiological ecology of marine symbionts, invertebrate im-
munobiology, and nucleic acids of microorganisms.
402. Comparative Animal Physiology (3)
Lectures and seminars on selected areas in the comparative
physiology of animals. Introduction to the current literature
of subjects studied. These include mechanisms of osmotic
control, temperature effects, nerve and muscle physiology
and others. Prerequisite: Biol. 320 or equivalent.
405. Special lopus in Biology (1-3)
Research, > onferenccs, and reports mi selei ted lopii s mil
covered in the general graduate offerings, Maj be taken more
than once lor credit,
•100. Hiologii al Seminar (1 )
An advanced seminal in current developments including de
partmental research. Required for candidates for graduate
degrees. May be taken more than once for credit.
407. Biological Research (3)
Investigations in any phase of the biological sciences accord-
ing to the student's preparation and interests.
408. Biological Research (3)
Continuation of Biol. 407.
409. Advanced Morphology (3)
A laboratory course in special phases of morphology, such as
comparative osteology, comparative morphology, or embry-
ology of the vertebrates, etc., to meet the individual interest
of the student. Offered as required.
411. General Cytology (3)
Conferences, assigned readings, and laboratory work on the
structural features of the cell in relation to cellular function
and on modern methods of preparing living and fixed tissues
for cytological study. Included arc special studies of the cy-
tology of microorganisms. Prerequisite: Biol. 313 or its
equivalent.
412. Biological Membranes (3)
Membranes, structures essential to the organization of pro-
karyotes and eukaryotes, will be studied in terms of their
appearances, distributions, compositions, molecular organiza-
tions, and functions. The problems of genetic determination
and synthesis of membranes will also be approached.
Emphasis will be placed on membrane models generated by
results from current research. Readings, lectures, and recita-
tions.
414. Advanced Ecology (3)
Conferences and field work with emphasis in such areas as
aquatic ecology, limnology, and fisheries biology. Whenever
possible this will include participation in research problems
conducted by the Water Resources Council of the Lehigh
Office of Research. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
Offered as required.
415. Cytochemistry (3)
A study of morphological and biochemical events during cell
growth and differentiation including lectures, labs, and
student reports on current literature. Special emphasis is
placed on developmental patterns and laboratory procedures
of the cytochemist. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
Offered as required.
98 Biology
416. Immunology (3)
Consideration of antigen-antibody systems from theoretical
and practical aspects. Lectures and reports on the structure
and origins of antigens and antibodies and the mechanisms of
agglutination, precipitation, complement fixation, anaphy-
laxis, etc. Laboratory work on preparation, standardization,
and assay of antigens and antibodies. Prerequisite: Biol. 353,
Chem. 371 or equivalent.
417. Marine Ecology (3)
An advanced course in the ecology of the marine environ-
ment. Study of the physical and chemical factors, organisms
and their interrelations. Ecological theory pertaining to popu-
lation dynamics and energy flow. Two lectures and one
laboratory period per week. Prerequisite: consent of
chairman of department.
418. Biological Oceanography (3)
Surveys of marine plant and animal plankton, nekton and
benthos. Composition of various groups, productivity, inter-
relationships of plants and animals and the role of micro-
organisms in the sea. Three lectures per week. Prerequisite:
consent of chairman of department.
421. Morphogenesis of the Lower Invertebrates (3)
The structural and chemical aspects of normal and teratologi-
cal development among the acoelomate and pseudocoelomate
phyla are considered from the standpoint of cell and tissue
differentiation, comparative morphological and physiological
functions, exogenous stimulatory factors, and metabolic re-
quirements.
435. Ethology (3)
Advanced topics in behavior, including stereotyped action
patterns, receptor and central nervous information proces-
sing, and techniques of behavioral investigation. Seminar
format. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
441. Marine Botany (3)
A study of the morphological, physiological, biochemical and
ecological features of those plants found primarily in the salt
water environment. Emphasis will be placed on the evolu-
tionary and ecological significance of the phytoplankton,
benthic algae and rooted aquatic plant divisions associated in
and near the oceans. The economic importance of these
plants will be considered. Laboratory work, field work and
library searches and reports.
442. Marine Zooplankton (3)
A comprehensive study of neritic and oceanic plankton.
Studies on the life history, morphology and distribution of
both holoplanktonic and meroplanktonic animals. Prerequi-
site: consent of instructor.
480. (Geol. 480) Marine Science Seminar (1)
An advanced interdisciplinary seminar on various problems of
marine sciences, with visiting speakers and student presenta-
tions. May be substituted for Biol. 406.
423. The Biology of Transplantation (3)
The mechanisms, both cellular and humoral, responsible for
the recognition of 'self from 'nonself in the animal kingdom
and the reactive processes resulting from such are explored
from the viewpoint of immunity, nutritional uptake, and
ontogenetic factors.
425. Biological Electron Microscopy (3)
Uses of the transmission and scanning electron microscopes
in biology. Laboratory work in the preparation of biological
specimens for study with both kinds of E.M.'s and some in-
dependent work at the transmission E.M. Study of current
information on cell ultrastructure.
433. Growth and Development in Plants (3)
A comparative study of embryo and cellular development in
the plant kingdom including the algae, bryophytes and
tracheophytes. Emphasis is placed on morphology, physi-
ology and the role of macromolecular substances during
growth and differentiation. Literature search, experimental
work and oral reports. Two lectures, one laboratory.
Biology 99
Chemical Engineering
Professors
Leonard Andrew Wenzcl, Ph.D., Chairman
Alan Shivers Foust, Ph. D., McGinn Projcssor
Curtis William Clump, Ph.D.
Robert William Coughlin, Ph.D.
William Edward Schiesser, Ph.D.
Fred P. Stein, Ph.D.
Associate Professors
William L. Luyben, Ph.D.
Gary Wayne Poehlein, Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
Marvin Charles, Ph.D.
Anthony J. McHugh, Ph.D.
Leslie H. Sperling, Ph.D.
Lecturers
Jacob Myer Geist, Ph.D.
Abraham Lapin, Ph.D.
Clyde McKinley, Ph.D.
Research Associates
Francis X. Hasselberger, Ph.D.
Joseph V. Hoffman, Ph.D.
Chemical engineers play important roles in all activities
bearing on the chemical process industry. These include the
functions of research, development, design, plant construc-
tion, plant operation and management, corporate planning,
technical sales, and market analysis. The industries that pro-
duce chemical and/or certain physical changes in fluids in-
cluding petroleum and petrochemicals, rubbers and polymers,
pharmaceuticals, metals, industrial and fine chemicals, foods,
and industrial gases have found chemical engineers to be vital
to their success. Chemical engineers are also important parti-
cipants in pollution abatement, space exploration, and
national defense programs.
Preparation for this broad field requires a sound back-
ground in the fundamental sciences of physics, chemistry,
and mathematics plus a general background training in the
application of these fundamentals to carrying forward into
industrial production the new products and processes dis-
covered in the laboratory. This latter training is directly
called Chemical Engineering. In accord with this philosophy,
the student is not trained for any specific industry, but the
education is sufficiently broad that a graduate is competent
to enter any ot the chemical and allied industries,
The aim of the curriculum is to develop in the student
understanding of the scientific fundamentals, an ability with
mathematical tools, and the habits of precise analysis of pro-
cess engineering problems that will allow him to function
effectively in this broad field, and to grow into positions of
responsibility. Of course these technical abilities must be
coupled with an understanding of the economic, sociological,
and cultural environment within which the engineer operates.
The curriculum includes a relatively large commitment to
education in these latter areas.
The program is also designed to prepare a student for
graduate study in chemical engineering or in peripheral fields.
Further study at the graduate level leading to advanced de-
grees is highly desirable in preparation for careers in the more
highly technical aspects of manufacturing. The increasing
complexity of modern manufacturing methods requires
superior training for men working in the research, develop-
ment, and design fields or for teaching.
Recommended Sequence of Courses
Freshman Year (see p. 45)
Sophomore Year, First Semester (16 credit hours)
Math 23 Analytical Geometry and Calculus III (4)
Phys 21, 22 Introductory Physics II & Lab (5)
Eco 1 Economics (4)
ChE 41 Cascade Processing Concepts (3)
Sophomore Year, Second Semester (16 credit hours)
Math 205 Linear Methods (3)
Chem 196 Physical Chemistry (3)
ChE 52 Fundamentals of Transport Phenomena (4)
Electives (6)
Junior Year, First Semester (15—18 credit hours)
Chem 191, 192 Physical Chemistry & Lab (4)
Chem 51, 53 Organic Chemistry & Lab (4)
ChE 167, 169 Unit Operations & Lab I (4)
GS Requirement (3)
Elective (3)
Junior Year, Second Semester (1 7 credit hours)
ChE 286 Modeling, Simulation, and Control (3)
ChE 170 Unit Operations Laboratory II (1)
ChE 210 Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics (4)
GS Requirement (3)
Electives (6)
Summer
ChE 100
Industrial Employment
1 00 Chemical Engineering
Senior Year, First Semester (15-18 credit hours)
ChE 302 Chemical Engineering Kinetics (3)
GS Requirement (3)
Electives (9-12)
Senior Year, Second Semester (15-18 credit hours)
ChE 174 Chemical Plant Design (3)
GS Requirement (3)
Electives (9-12)
Note: The lower number of credit hours represents the load
required to meet the graduation requirement; the higher re-
presents the normal semester load.
The 30 hours of electives must be taken from the follow-
ing distribution:
Chemistry 6 hours
Engineering sciences, physics, and mathematics (including
Mech. 1 or Mech. 103) 12 hours
Free electives 12 hours
Undergraduate Courses
41. Cascade Processing Concepts (3)
Concepts of equilibrium in gas, liquid, and solid systems.
Engineering of sequential and cascade processing methods
from technical and economic considerations. Computer
modeling of leaching, extraction, and distillation processes.
Prerequisite: Engr. 1 or equivalent in programming.
52. Introduction to Transport Phenomena (4)
The principles of transport of energy, momentum, and mass
and the analogies between them. Transport coefficients and
their evaluation. Applications in variable-property fields
within a phase. Three recitations and one laboratory per
week.
60. Unit Operations Survey (3)
The theory of heat, mass, and momentum transport. Laminar
and turbulent flow of real fluids. Heat transfer by conduc-
tion, convection, and radiation. Application to a wide range
of operations in the chemical and metallurgical process in-
dustries.
100. Summer Employment
During the summer (preferably following the junior year)
candidates for the degree of B.S. in Chemical Engineering are
required to obtain industrial experience through employment
for at least eight weeks in a plant or laboratory or engineering
office and submit a report thereon.
165. Unit Operations I (4)
A laboratory-related study of the implications of transport
phenomena and conservation principles as applied to
chemical processing equipment. Two recitations, two labora-
tory periods per week. Prerequisite: Ch.E. 52.
166. Unit Operations II (4)
A continuation of Ch.E. 165. One recitation, three labora-
tory sessions per week.
167. Unit Operations (3)
Implications of transport phenomena and conservation prin-
ciples as applied to chemical processing equipment. Prerequi-
site: Ch.E. 52.
169. Unit Operations Laboratory I
Laboratory experience in unit operations. Prerequisite: Ch.E.
167 previously or concurrently.
170. Unit Operations Laboratory II
Laboratory experience with steady state and dynamic process
operations. Prerequisite: Ch.E. 286 previously or con-
currently.
174. Chemical Plant Design (3)
A study of the technical and economic aspects of the design,
location, and operation of chemical plants. Prerequisite:
Ch.E. 166 or Ch.E. 286.
185. Undergraduate Research I (3)
Independent study of a problem involving laboratory investi-
gation, design or theoretical studies under the guidance of a
senior faculty member.
186. Undergraduate Research II (3)
A continuation of the project begun under Ch.E. 185. Prere-
quisites: Ch.E. 185 and consent of the professor.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
200. Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics (3)
Energy relations and their application to chemical engineer-
ing. Consideration of flow and non-flow processes, evaluation
of the effect of temperature and pressure on thermodynamic
properties of ideal and actual fluids: prediction of the heat
effects accompanying phase changes and chemical reactions,
application to industrial processes. Prerequisites: Ch.E. 51,
Chem. 90 or equivalent.
210. Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics (4)
Energy relations and their application to chemical engineer-
ing. Consideration of flow and non-flow processes. Evalua-
tion of the effects of temperature and pressure on the ther-
modynamic properties of fluids. Prediction of heat effects
accompanying phase changes and chemical reactions. Deter-
mination of chemical and physical equilibrium status. Prere-
quisite: Chem. 90 or equivalent.
Chemical Engineering 1 01
>86. Modeling, Simulation, and Control (3)
Review "i physical laws thai arc the basis for mathemati il
models ol physical systems. Mathematical modeling <>i im
port. mi chemical engineering systems. Digital and analog
computet simulation techniques for solution ol ordinary
differential equations describing chemical processes. Practical
aspects ol process control system design and operation. Ex-
posure to control equipment: sensors, transmitters, control
lersand control valves. Prerequisite; Math 205.
>00. Appie ntu e Teaching in Ch.E.
(1-3)
301. Process Design (3)
Study of the strategy ol chemical process design with em-
phasis on optimum order ol steps, flow diagrams, energy
balances, recycle ratios and their effect on the economics of
the operation. Survey of methods for ordering equations.
Discussion of process optimization for non-linear systems.
Effects of uncertainty in process design.
302. Chemical Engineering Kinetics (3)
The application of chemical kinetics to the design and opera-
tion of reactors. Interrelations of kinetics, thermodynamics
and unit operations in steady or unsteady states. Prerequi-
sites: Ch.E. 166 or 286, Ch.E. 200 or equivalent, previously
or concurrently.
312. (Chem. 312, Met. 312) Fundamentals of Corrosion (3)
For description, see Chem. 312.
315. Transport Processes (3)
A combined study of the fundamentals of momentum trans-
port, energy transport and mass transport and the analogies
between them. Evaluation of transport coefficients for single
and multicomponent systems. Analysis of transport phenom-
ena through the equations of continuity, motion and energy.
320. Waste Water Control (3)
The physical processes of importance in the design of indus-
trial waste water treatment facilities. Topics will include sedi-
mentation and filtration processes as well as advanced
methods such as adsorption, ion exchange, osmosis, foaming,
freezing, and hydrate formation.
321. Fundamentals of Air Pollution (3)
Introduction to the problems of air pollution including such
topics as: sources and dispersion of pollutants; sampling and
analysis; technology of economics and control processes;
legislation and standards. Prerequisite: senior standing in the
college of engineering.
350. Special Topics (3)
A study of areas in chemical engineering not covered in
courses presently listed in the catalog. May be repeated for
credit if different material is presented.
351. Mathematical Modeling in I hemic. il Engineering (3)
Review ol physical laws which serve .is the h.isis lor mathe-
matical models of physical systems. Representative models
for discrete, itaged and distributed systems with examples
chosen from chemical processing. Numerical solution ol
algebraic and differential equations with emphasis on
chemical engineering systems analysis. Prerequisite: Math.
205 or equivalent and a knowledge of Fortran.
360. (M.E. 360) Nuclear Reactor Engineering (3)
Sec M.E. 360 for description.
380. Design Projects (1-6)
Design project work as a member of a team, preferably in-
cluding students from differing disciplines. The project will
attack a problem which, when possible, involves one of the
local communities or industries. Specific projects will normal-
ly be guided by faculty from several departments with con-
sultants from off the campus. The course will be offered both
semesters and may be repeated for credit.
386. Process Control (3)
Laplace transformation and transfer functions, frequency
response, feedback and feedforward control. Opcnloop and
closedloop stability analysis using root locus and Nyquist
techniques, design of feedback controllers with time and
frequency domain specifications. Experimental process iden-
tification, introduction to samplcd-data control theory. Pre-
requisite: Ch.E. 286 or equivalent.
392. (Chem. 392) Polymer Science (3)
Introduction to concepts of polymer science. Kinetics and
mechanism of polymerization, synthesis and processing of
polymers, characterization. Relationship of molecular con-
formation, structure and morphology to physical and
mechanical properties. A term paper based on literature or
laboratory work is required. Prerequisite: Chem. 90 or
equivalent.
393. (Chem. 393, Met. 343) Physical Polymer Science (3)
Structural and physical aspects of polymers (organic, inor-
ganic, natural). Molecular and atomic basis for polymer pro-
perties and behavior. Characteristics of glassy, crystalline, and
paracrystalline states (including viscoelastic and relaxation
behavior) for single and multi-component systems. Thermo-
dynamics and kinetics of transition phenomena. Structure,
morphology, and behavior. Prerequisite: one year physical
chemistry.
394. (Chem. 394) Organic Polymer Science (3)
Organic chemistry of synthetic high polymers. Functionality
and reactivity of monomers and polymers. Theory of step-
growth and chain-growth polymerization in homogeneous
and heterogeneous media. Polymerization by addition, elimi-
nation, substitution and coupling reactions. Ionic fee-radical
and coordinate catalysis. Prerequisite: one year physical
chemistry and one year organic chemistry.
102 Chemical Engineering
For Graduates
The department of chemical engineering at Lehigh University
is a department of moderate size active in research and teach-
ing emphasizing the theory of chemical processing opera-
tions. The teaching staff consists of eleven senior faculty men
plus three locally employed engineers who serve as lecturers.
The undergraduate enrollment has been stable over the past
several years at a figure that produces about forty B.S.
degrees each year. The graduate enrollment has grown
markedly so that there now are thirty-five full-time graduate
students enrolled in the department plus approximately an
equal number of locally employed engineers who enroll for
one or two graduate courses. Our graduate students have
come from many educational institutions. Some of these are:
M.I.T., R.P.I., Delaware, Rochester, Purdue, Drexel, Carne-
gie-Mellon, Newark College of Engineering, U.C.L.A., Case,
Penn State, Virginia, Maryland, N.Y.U., and Tufts. Last year
the department awarded nine M.S. degrees, and four Ph.D.
degrees.
Offerings of the department include courses in thermody-
namics, reaction kinetics, transport processes, heat transfer,
mass transfer, momentum transfer, process dynamics, and
applied mathematics. In addition, more specialized courses in
catalysis, cyrogenic engineering, and polymer processing are
offered on a rotating basis. The individual graduate student
builds his program out of these courses plus additional work
in mathematics, chemistry, mechanical engineering, physics,
and industrial engineering as his interests and goals dictate.
The net result is a training extending the breadth and depth
of understanding of the fundamentals of chemical engineer-
ing. There is very little additional material in specific applica-
tions or industries. Theses are chosen by the student accord-
ing to his own interest, but usually are consistent with this
basic departmental philosophy.
The research facilities of the department are continually
being expanded and are adequate to support the research
interests of the staff and graduate students. In addition to the
research equipment directly available in the department,
graduate students often find the CDC 6400 computer
operated by the University's computer center a valuable
research tool. Currently research is conducted in the fields
listed below.
Thermodynamic Properties of Multicomponent Systems:
Joule-Thomson coefficients of gas mixtures
Latent heat of vaporization at high pressure
Phase equilibria
Specific heats and heats of solutions of liquid mixtures
PVT measurement
Measurement of the effect of pressure on heat capacity
Adsorption equilibria from gas mixtures on various substrates
Fluid Dynamics:
Retention studies in process equipment
Eddy diffusivity measurements
Process dynamics and response in flow systems
Turbulence in annular flow
Rheology of heavily-doped suspensions
Viscoelastic properties of suspensions
Dynamics of film-splitting
Flow of non-Newtonian fluids
Heat and Mass Transfer:
Two-phase heat and momentum characteristics
Ice formation on cold surfaces
Pulsed extraction column performance
Mass transfer through dialysis membranes
Reaction Kinetics:
Immobilized enzyme catalysis
Kinetics of thermal decomposition of explosives
Reduction of metal oxides in plasmas
Ion exchange catalysis
Mechanism of explosion initiation
Catalysis in ortho-para hydrogen conversion
Influence of microstructure on gas adsorption and catalysis
Process Dynamics and Control:
Distributed parameter representation of engineering systems
Control systems for distillation columns with side-stream
draw-offs
Frequency response of process systems
Digital simulation of chemical process systems
Optimization of absorber operation
Feed-forward control of distillation columns
Polymer Science:
Morphology of polymer crystallization from solution
Characteristics of heterogeneous polymer systems
Interpenetrating polymer networks (IPN's)
Constrained layer damping with IPN's
Polymer-concrete system applications
Emulsion polymerization mechanisms
Diffusion through polymer films
The department occupies the Whitaker Metallurgical and
Chemical Engineering Laboratory. In this building some
40,000 ft. of space is available for the research, teaching, and
office needs of the department. The building is completely
air conditioned, and includes specially designed facilities for
analog computation, calibration standards, process dynamics
study, reaction kinetics and thermodynamics research,
nuclear engineering, high pressure research, and a wide range
of general research space.
In addition to activities that are traditionally chemical
engineering, the department cooperates with several other
campus groups to offer interdisciplinary programs. At present
these include a program in chemical metallurgy carried on in
cooperation with the department of metallurgy and materials
science, a program in polymer science through cooperation
with the Polymers Research Laboratory of the Materials Re-
search Center, a program in water resources through coopera-
tion with the departments of civil engineering and biology,
research in interfacial phenomena through the Center for
Surface and Coatings Research, and air and water pollution
with the Center for Marine and Environmental Studies. More
complete descriptions are available on all of these programs.
Of these, the most completely formulated is the chemical
Chemical Engineering 1 03
metallurgy program. Though Ph.D. programs are available,
this is basicall) M.S. oriented. Graduates from this program
should be uniquely prepared to contribute to the metal re-
fining industry . The program includes industi ial exposure as
well as .1 carefull) selected sequence ol courses and research
topic. Study in this program is underwritten by several in-
dustrial concerns. Students having an interest in this area
should write for .1 descriptive brochure.
A cooperative M.S. program has been initiated for those
specially interested in careers in design. An individually
tailored course sequence is coupled with a design project
which replaces the more conventional M.S. research project.
In order to assure complete support of the design work, and .1
professional evaluation of it, this project is done within the
process design group of one of several nearby design engineer-
ing companies. The student is supported by the host com-
pany.
Arrangements have been made with Air Products and
Chemicals, Inc., and with Bethlehem Steel Corporation to
allow a graduate student in chemical engineering to support
himself by part-time employment in their research or engi-
neering departments. Both of these installations are within
easy driving distance of the Lehigh campus, and in both
places the student would receive experience in the most ad-
vanced work being done in the industry. Typically, a student
would work 20 hours per week and would receive pay equiva-
lent to that of a teaching assistant. This would allow him to
enroll for about 10 hours of graduate course work per semes-
ter, and to progress toward the M.S. degree at a rate equiva-
lent to that of a teaching or research assistant. Under this
arrangement, the student pays his own tuition which he
accumulates from his industrial wage.
There are available within the department several oppor-
tunities for financial support for the graduate student. See
the Graduate School section for details.
Opportunities for financial support during graduate
studies are varied, depending upon individual interests and
needs. However, they are limited in number, and cannot be
offered to more than a few qualified applicants. The time
required for an M.S. degree can vary from twelve months to
two years depending upon the type of support and the pre-
paration, diligence, and ability of the student. A Ph.D. degree
is obtainable in a minimum of 36 months, but more normally
requires 4 years.
400. Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics I (3)
Applications of thermodynamics in chemical engineering.
Topics include prediction of physical and chemical equilibria,
heat effects accompanying solution, flow of compressible
fluids, refrigeration including solution cycles, vaporization
and condensation processes. Prerequisite: an introductory
course in thermodynamics.
401. Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics II (3)
A detailed study o! the uses ol thermodynamics in predicting
phase equilibria in solid, liquid, and gaseous systems. The
phase rule; solution theories; uses of equations of state.
Theoretical basis and development ol equations of state,
applications to azcotropic and cxtracivc distillation, multi
component separations, liquid extraction.
410. Chemical Engineering Kinetics (3)
The application of chemical kinetics to the engineering design
and operation of reactors. Non-isothermal and adiabatic reac-
tions. Homogeneous and heterogeneous catalysis. Residence
time distribution in reactors. Prerequisite: Ch.E. 302.
413. Heterogeneous Catalysis (3)
Surface area, pore structure and pore-size distribution of
catalysts. Influence of pore-diffusion on catalytic reactions
and the design of catalytic reactors. Chemical adsorption and
physical adsorption. Chemistry, energetics and kinetics of
adsorption, desorption, and surface reaction. Electronic
structure and catalysis; atomic orbital and bondstructure
models. Mechanisms of catalytic reaction of industrial im-
portance. Selection and classification of catalysts.
421. Heat Transfer (3)
Analysis of steady and unsteady state transfer. Radiation,
vaporization, and condensation. Heat transfer in high velocity
flow and in rarificd gases. Applications.
428. Rheology (3)
An intensive study of momentum transfer in elastic viscous
liquids. Rheological behavior of solution and bulk phase
polymers with emphasis on the effect of molecular weight,
molecular weight distribution and branching. Derivation of
constitutive equation based on both molecular theories and
continuum mechanics principles. Application of the momen-
tum equation and selected constitutive equations to geomet-
ries associated with viscometric flows.
430. Mass Transfer (3)
Equilibrium stage and continuous contact mass transfer
operations with emphasis upon distillation, absorption, and
extraction. Binary and multicomponent separations.
435. Simultaneous Heat and Mass Transfer (3)
Unit operations involving simultaneous heat and mass trans-
fer. Emphasis on drying, humidification, dehumidification,
and condensation in the presence of non-condensable gases.
440. Process Design (3)
Synthesis of flow sheets for various processes, investigation
of contributions to overall economy of various alternatives.
Evaluation of profitability of alternatives.
1 04 Chemical Engineering
441. System Dynamics and Control (3)
Survey of dynamic models for heat exchangers, reactors,
distillation columns and other processing units. Principles of
dynamic testing using periodic, transient and random signals.
Feedforward, adaptive and computer control.
442. System Design (3)
The state space formulation of dynamic systems. Concepts of
observability and controllability. The discrete and continuous
formulations of the maximum principle. Dynamic program-
ming. Optimization by systematic search.
450. Special Topics (3-12)
An intensive study of some field of chemical engineering not
covered in the more general courses. Credit above 3 hours is
granted only when different material is covered.
451. Problems in Research (1)
Study and discussion of optimal planning of experiments and
analysis of experimental data. Discussion of more common
and more difficult techniques in the execution of chemical
engineering research.
455. Seminar (1-3)
Critical discussion of recent advances in chemical engineering.
Credit above one hour is granted only when different material
is covered.
461. Mathematical Methods in Chemical Engineering I (3)
Application of ordinary and partial differential equations to
the solution of chemical engineering problems with emphasis
on chemical reactions and transport processes as they occur
in industrial chemical processing. Applications of solution in
series, separation of variables, and integral transforms. Prere-
quisite: Math. 322.
470. Cryogenic Engineering (3)
Liquefaction and separation of gases, physical and chemical
principles. Low temperature thermometry. Insulation. Pro-
perties of fluids and of structural materials. The behavior of
helium. Ultra-low temperature phenomena and theories.
471. Low Temperature Processes (3)
The problems and design of plants operating in the cryogenic
temperature range. Refrigeration demands. Distillation and
heat exchange at low temperatures. Analysis of processes for
thermodynamic and operating efficiency. Problems of safety,
non-steady state behavior and control.
480. Research (3-4)
Investigation of a problem in chemical engineering.
481. Research (3-4)
Continuation of Ch.E. 480.
492. (Chem. 492) Topics in Polymer Science (3)
Intensive study of topics selected from areas of current re-
search interest such as morphology and mechanical behavior,
thermodynamics and kinetics of crystallization, new analy-
tical techniques, molecular weight distribution, non-
Newtonian flow behavior, second-order transition phenom-
ena, novel polymer structures. Credit above 3 hours is
granted only when different material is covered. Prerequisite:
Chem. 392 or equivalent.
464. Numerical Methods in Engineering (3)
Applied computer-oriented mathematics including linear
difference operators, interpolation polynomials, numerical
quadrature based on the Newton Cotes open and closed
formulas, matrices and linear algebra with emphasis on the
solution of large sparse systems, algorithms for nonlinear
algebraic and transcendental systems. Major emphasis will be
given to the use of the computer for the solution of problems
selected from a number of scientific and engineering disci-
plines.
465. Numerical Methods in Engineering (3)
A continuation of Ch.E. 464 with emphasis on the numerical
integration of ordinary and partial differential equations.
Topics include: single step and multistep algorithms for
initial value problems in ordinary differential equations, error
monitoring and control, stability and the integration of stiff
systems, geometric classification of partial differential equa-
tions, explicit and implicit finite difference algorithms, con-
vergence, consistency and stability.
Chemical Engineering 1 05
Chemistry
Piotessiirs
Frederick Mayliew Fowkes, Ph.D., Chairman
Albert Charles Zettleinoyer, Ph.D. Distinguished Professor,
! 'ice President and Provost
Eugene Murray Allen, Ph.D.
Charles Stephen Kraihanzel, Ph.D.
Henry Leidheiser. Jr., Ph.D., Director, Center for Surface and
Coatings Research
John Alexander Manson, Ph.D., Director of the Polymer
I aboratoi v. Materials Keseari h i 'enter
Joseph Robert Merkel, Ph.D.
William Edward Ohnesorge, Ph.D.
Robert Stacy Sprague, Ph.D.
James Edward Sturm, Ph.D.
Thomas Edwin Young, Ph.D.
Associate Prolessors
Alfred James Diefenderfer, Ph.D.
Ned D. Hcindel, Ph.D.
Kamil Klier, Ph.D.
Roland William Lovejoy, Ph.D.
Fortunato Joseph Micale, Ph.D.
Donald Morgan Smyth, Ph.D., Director, Materials Research
Center
John W. Vanderhoff, Ph.D., Associate Director, Center for
Surface and Coatings Research
Assistant Professors
Matthew Harold Hulbert, Ph.D.
Keith J. Schray, Ph.D.
Gary W. Simmons, Ph.D., Assistant to the Director, Center
for Surface and Coatings Research
Daniel Zeroka, Ph.D.
Students majoring in chemistry receive an education which
provides a broad base for further specialization in a wide
variety of careers. A degree in chemistry (with biology elec-
tives) is the strongest preparation for medical school, and an
excellent background for graduate studies in other health-
related disciplines (biochemistry, pharmacology, immunolo-
gy, pathology, etc.). Graduate schools gladly accept
chemistry majors into a variety of other programs (physics,
material science, oceanography, environmental studies,
mineralogy, etc.). Within the field of chemistry, graduates are
prepared for research (in universities, government labora-
tories, or industrial laboratories), for teaching (in universities,
colleges, or high schools), for industrial positions (in product
development, sales, or management) and for government
positions (pollution control, I ood and Drug Administration,
etc.). Mosl i demists are employed in manufacturing indus-
tries (ph. it ni. i. .nil. als, plastii s, libers, rubbci . paper, coat-
ings, electronics, materials, automobiles, air craft, petroleum,
agricultural chemistry, etc.) and in many "I these industries
chemists rise to top management positions. Currently many
job opportunities are opening up after three years of relative-
job scarcity, although Lehigh chemistry graduates have had
little difficulty in finding jobs.
The undergraduate curriculum in chemistry contains
many of the prerequisites for biology, geology, metallurgy,
physics, and chemical engineering so that students can easily
transfer either way with no loss of credits, even in the junior
year.
Chemistry students have the opportunity to design their
undergraduate curriculum for specialization in a variety of
fields:
Health- Related Chemistry (Including Prcmedical Students)
Suggested biology electives: 21, 22, 35
Suggested chemistry electives: 352, 371, 372, 377, 378, 350
(Clinical Chemistry)
Suggested physics elective: 367
The above electives may be used in place of Math. 205 and
German 3.
Materials Chemistry (Polymer, Solid State, Surface)
Suggested physics electives: 31, 363
Suggested chemistry electives: 312, 392, 393, 394, 396, 397
The above electives may be used in place of German 3.
Environmental Chemistry
Suggested biology electives: 21, 22, 35
Suggested chemical engineering electives: 320, 321
Suggested chemistry electives: 303, 334, 397, 310
The above electives may be used in place of Math. 205 and
German 3.
Geochemistry
Suggested geology electives: 333, 334, 336, 352, 372
Suggested chemistry electives: 303, 396
The above electives may be used in place of Math. 205 and
German 3.
Chemistry Management
Suggested accounting electives: 108, 315
Suggested law elective: 101
Suggested management electives: 201, 211, 317, 321
Suggested chemistry electives: 392, 397
The above electives may be used in place of Math. 205 and
German 3.
106 Chemistry
The Five-Year Program
Five-year programs are available for students to receive B.S.
or B.A. degrees and an M.S. degree in several fields of chemis-
try (inorganic, organic, analytical or physical chemistry, poly-
mers, or biochemistry). A five-year program is also available
for a B.S. degree in chemistry and a master's degree in busi-
ness administration (M.B.A.).
The Bachelor of Arts and the Bachelor of Science Majors
Lehigh University offers a B.A. degree in chemistry from the
College of Arts and Science and a B.S. degree in chemistry
from the College of Engineering. In most classes, the B.S.
candidates outnumber the B.A. candidates in chemistry, but
not always. The required courses in science and mathematics
are identical for the two programs; these are shown in the
recommended sequence of courses for the B.S. degree. The
difference in the two programs lies in the distribution of
courses in the humanities and social sciences. At present can-
didates for the B.A. degree must obtain proficiency in a
modern foreign language. B.S. candidates need take no langu-
age courses, although German 3 is strongly recommended.
The minimum number of semester hour credits needed for
graduation is 120 for the B.A. degree and 122 for the B.S.
degree, but a larger number is recommended (131 semester
hours is considered to be a normal total for the B.S. degree. )
Recommended Sequence of Courses for the B.S. Degree
Freshman Year (See page 45)
Sophomore Year, First Semester (16 credit hours)
Chem 51 Organic Chemistry (3)
Chem 53 Organic Chemistry Lab (1)
Phys 21 Introductory Physics (4)
Phys 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)
Math 23 Analytical Geometry and Calculus III (4)
GS Requirement in Social Science (3)
Sophomore Year, Second Semester (16 credit hours)
Chem 52 Organic Chemistry (3)
Chem 54 Organic Chemistry Lab (2)
Chem 90 Physical Chemistry (3)
Ger 3 Elementary German (5) (or approved sub-
stitutes)
Math 205 Linear Methods (or approved substitute) (3)
Junior Year, First Semester (14-17 credit hours)
Chem 191 Physical Chemistry (3)
Chem 192 Physical Chemistry Lab (1)
Chem 234 Analytical Chemistry Lab (1)
Chem 302 Inorganic Chemistry (3)
Chem 332 Analytical Chemistry (3)
Chem 358 Advanced Organic Chemistry (3)
Electives (0-3)
Junior Year, Second Semester (1 6 credit hours)
Chem 280 Advanced Chemical Experimentation (3)
Chem 308 Coordination Chemistry (3)
Eco 1 Economics (4)
GS Requirement (3)
Elective (3)
Senior Year, First Semester (15-18 credit hours)
Chem 382 Electrochemistry and Kinetics (3)
Chem Elective (2-3)
GS Requirement (3)
Electives (6-9)
Senior Year, Second Semester (15-18 credit hours)
Chem 381 Radiation and Structure (3)
Chem Elective (2-3)
Electives (9-12)
Note: The lower number of credit hours represents the load
required to meet the graduation requirements; the higher the
normal semester load.
Chemistry electives: two electives, one of which must have a
lab, are to be chosen from the following list:
Chem 303 Nuclear and Radiochemistry (3)
Chem 306 Inorganic Lab (2)
or
Chem 368 Advanced Organic Lab (2)
Chem 310 Instrumentation Principles I (3)
Chem 312 Fundamentals of Corrosion (ChE 312, Met
312)
Chem 334 Chemical Oceanography (3)
Chem 350 Special Topics (3)
Chem 352 Heterocyclic Compounds (3)
Chem 371 Elements of Biochemistry (Biol 371) (3)
Chem 372 Advanced Biochemistry (Biol 372) (3)
Chem 375 Research Chemistry Lab (3)
Chem 377 Biochemistry Lab (2)
Chem 392 Introduction to Polymer Science (ChE 391)
(3)
Chem 393 Physical Polymer Science (ChE 393, Met
343) (3)
Chem 394 Organic Polymer Science (ChE 394) (3)
Chem 396 Solid State Chemistry (3)
Chem 397 Colloid and Surface Chemistry (3)
Undergraduate Courses
21. Introductory Chemical Principles (4)
An introduction to certain important principles of chemistry.
Topics include atomic structure and bonding, stoichiometry,
states of matter, and introductions to kinetics, chemical
equilibrium, acid-base theories, oxidation-reduction reac-
tions, and galvanic cells. Math. 21, 31, or 41 previously or
concurrently. Two lectures, two recitations.
Chemistry 107
22. Chemical Principles Lab (1 )
A laboratory course to be taken concurrently with Chemistry
21. An introduction to chemical laboratory techniques with
emphasis on quantitative measurements. One three houi
laboratory period per week.
23. Earth, Air. Fire, and Water (4)
A study of chemical principles underlying the impact of
society on the quality of our environment, particularly of air
and water. Emphasis is on examples in inorganic chemistry.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 21 or exemption from Chemistry 21
b\ examination. Two lectures, one two-hour demonstration
period.
39. Analytical Chemistry (3)
The fundamentals, theory, and practice of analytical chemis-
try for all students except chemistry majors. Selected topics
in the areas of classical and instrumental analysis. Funda-
mental techniques arc presented in the laboratory. Two
lectures, one laboratory period. Prerequisite: Chem. 21.
51. Organic Chemistry (3)
Systematic survey of the typical compounds of carbon, their
classification and general relations; study of synthetic reac-
tions. Prerequisite: Chem. 21.
52. Organic Chemistry (3)
Continuation of Chem. 51. Prerequisite: Chem. 51.
53. Organic Chemistry Laboratory (1)
Preparation of pure organic compounds. Prerequisite: Chem.
21.
54. Organic Chemistry Laboratory (2)
Continuation of Chem. 53 with particular emphasis upon
aromatic compounds and qualitative organic analysis. Prere-
quisite: Chem. 53 and Chem. 52, concurrently.
55. Organic Chemistry Laboratory (2)
A course in the preparation of pure organic compounds and
the techniques of organic chemistry applicable to both ali-
phatic and aromatic compounds. Prerequisites: Chem. 51 and
Chem. 52 concurrently.
90. Physical Chemistry (3)
Development of the principles of thermodynamics and their
application to systems in which composition is of major con-
cern: solutions, chemical and phase equilibria. Elements of
chemical reaction kinetics. Discussion of various states of
matter (gases, liquids, solids, interfaces). Prerequisites: Chem.
21; Math. 23, previously or concurrently.
191. Physical Chemistry (3)
Quantum chemistry of bonding and molecular structure.
Elements of statistical thermodynamics. Prerequisites: Chem.
21, Math. 23, Phys. 21.
192. Physical Chemistry Laboratory (I)
This i ourse provides a series of laboratory studies which
illustrate the various fields of study in experimental physical
chemistry. Prerequisite: Chem. 90.
194. Physical Chemistry for Biological Sciences (3)
The principles and applications of physical chemical concepts
to systems of biological interest, including the gas laws, ther-
modynamics of metabolic reactions, colligativc properties,
electrochemical equilibria, reaction kinetics and enzyme
catalysis, and transport of macromoleculcs and viruses. Prere-
quisite: Chem. 21.
196. Physical Chemistry (3)
Primarily for majors in metallurgical engineering. (Not for
chemistry or chemical engineering students.) Kinetic theory
and chemical kinetics; electrochemistry; topics in surface
chemistry and solid state chemistry. Prerequisite: Chem. 21.
234. Analytical Chemistry Laboratory (1)
Laboratory course: experiments coordinated with and
illustrating methods and principles discussed in Chem. 332.
250. Special Topics (3)
Selected topics in chemistry not included in other courses.
Prerequisite: consent of the chairman of the department.
280. Advanced Chemical Experimentation (3)
Laboratory course combining techniques of analytical, inor-
ganic, organic, and physical chemistry in the synthesis, purifi-
cation, and characterization of selected compounds. Prerequi-
sites: Chem. 54, 192, 234, 308, previously or concurrently.
300. Apprentice Teaching in Chem.
(1-3)
302. Principles of Inorganic Chemistry (3)
Application of the theories of atomic and molecular structure
and of chemical bonding to the periodic relationships and
selected descriptive chemistry of the non-transition elements.
Prerequisite: Chem. 191 previously or concurrently.
303. Nuclear and Radiochemistry (3)
A broad survey of nuclear science with particular emphasis
on aspects of importance to chemistry and biology. Elemen-
tary nuclear theory; production, separation and identification
of radioactive and stable isotopes; use of isotopes in the
study of chemical and biological systems; radiological safety;
nuclear engineering. Two lectures and one lecture-laboratory.
306. Inorganic Laboratory (2)
A laboratory course illustrating a variety of techniques for
the preparation and purification of inorganic compounds.
Hours equivalent to two laboratory periods per week will be
arranged by the instructor. Prerequisite: Chem. 302,
previously or concurrently.
108 Chemistry
308. Coordination Chemistry (3)
Continuation of Chem. 302. Introduction to transition metal
complex ions and coordination compounds and to the
theories of bonding in these substances. The thermodynamics
of metal ion complex formation in solution. Kinetics and
mechanisms of transition metal complex reactions. Isomerism
in complex compounds. Introduction to transition metal
organometallic chemistry. Prerequisite: Chem. 302 or its
equivalent.
310. Instrumentation Principles I (3)
A study of electrical, electronic, and optical principles in
modern instrumentation for measurement and control. Prin-
ciples and applications of semiconductors with associated
circuitry applied to modern instrumentation. Transducer
application to fields of electrical, optical and mechanical
measurement. Two lectures and one three-hour laboratory.
311. Instrumentation Principles II (3)
A continuation of Chem. 310 with emphasis on applications
and utilization of digital electronics. The development of the
complete instrument including optical instrumentation. Two
lectures and one three-hour laboratory. Prerequisite: Chem.
310 or equivalent.
312. (Ch.E. 312, Met. 312) Fundamentals of Corrosion (3)
Corrosion phenomena and definitions. Electrochemical
aspects including reaction mechanisms, thermodynamics,
Pourbaix diagrams, kinetics of corrosion processes, polariza-
tion and passivity. Non-electrochemical corrosion including
mechanisms, theories, and quantitative descriptions of at-
mospheric corrosion. Corrosion of metals under stress.
Cathodic and anodic protection, coatings, alloys, inhibitors
and passivators. Prerequisite: Met. 91, Chem. 90 or
equivalent or permission of instructor.
352. Heterocyclic Compounds (3)
The chemistry of thiophene, pyrrole, furan, pyridine and
their derivatives, considered from the viewpoint of recent
theories of organic structure and reaction mechanisms. Prere-
quisite: Chem. 358.
356. Quantitative Organic Analysis (1)
Quantitative analysis of organic compounds. One laboratory
period per week. Prerequisites: three hours of analytical
chemistry; a course in organic chemistry.
358. Advanced Organic Chemistry (3)
The study of modern theories of reaction mechanisms and
their applications to the problems of organic chemistry. Pre-
requisite: one year of organic chemistry.
368. Advanced Organic Laboratory (2)
The synthesis and study of organic compounds illustrating
the important techniques and special pieces of apparatus
commonly used in organic chemical research. Prerequisite:
one year of organic chemistry and laboratory.
371. (Biol. 371) Elements of Biochemistry (3)
A general study of carbohydrates, proteins, lipids, nucleic
acids and other biological substances and their importance in
life processes. Protein and enzyme chemistry are emphasized.
Prerequisite: one year of organic chemistry.
372. (Biol. 372) Advanced Biochemistry (3)
Dynamic aspects of biochemistry: enzyme reactions includ-
ing energetics, kinetics, and mechanisms; metabolism of car-
bohydrates, lipids, proteins, and nucleic acids; photosyn-
thesis, electron transport mechanisms, coupled reactions,
phosphorylations, and the synthesis of biological macro-
molecules. Prerequisite: Chem. 371.
332. Analytical Chemistry (3)
Theory and practice of chemical analysis. Principles of quan-
titative separations and determinations; theory and applica-
tion of selected optical and electrical instruments in analy-
tical chemistry; interpretation of numerical data, design of
experiments, solute distribution in separation methods. Prere-
quisite: Chem. 51, 90.
334. Chemical Oceanography (3)
Chemistry of the oceans and other natural water systems,
with emphasis on processes occurring at the interfaces with
the air, the sediments, the rivers, and living organisms. Op-
tional cruise. Prerequisite: two chemistry courses or consent
of instructor.
350. Special Topics (3)
Selected advanced topics in chemistry not included in other
courses. Prerequisite: consent of the chairman of department.
375. Research Chemistry Laboratory (3)
Advanced independent study or an investigation involving
intensive work with faculty guidance in laboratory and
library. Topics in active research in biochemistry, analytical,
inorganic, organic, and physical chemistry. Prerequisite: con-
sent of department chairman.
377. Biochemistry Laboratory (2)
Laboratory studies of the properties of chemicals of bio-
logical origin and the influence of chemical and physical
factors on these properties. Laboratory techniques used for
the isolation and identification of biochemicals. Prerequisite:
Chem. 371, previously or concurrently.
378. Biochemical Preparations (2)
A laboratory course involving the preparation or isolation,
purification and identification of chemicals of biological
origin. Prerequisite: Chem. 377 and 372, previously or con-
currently.
Chemistry 109
381 . Radiation and Stru< ture (3)
Quantum chemistry and group theory applied to molecular
orbital theory ol bonding and struc ture and to spci trosi opj
\ ; iy, electron, luminescence, Raman, mici owavc. Prcrcqui
sites: Chcm. 191 and I
3S J! . Electrochemistry and Kinetics (3-4)
A unified study of matter in the process of change. Elements
ol irreversible thermodynamics; electrochemistry; chemical
kinetics; electrokinctic phenomena. Three one-hour lectures
and (optional) three-hour laboratory. Prerequisite: Chcm. 90
and 332.
392. (Ch.E. 392) Introduction to Polymer Science (3)
For course description, see Ch.E. 392.
393. (Ch.E. 393. Met. 343) Physical Polymer Science (3)
For course description, see Ch.E. 393.
394. (Ch.E. 394) Organic Polymer Science (3)
Organic chemistry of synthetic high polymers. Functionality
and reactivity of monomers and polymers. Theory of step-
growth and chain-growth polymerization in homogeneous
and heterogeneous media. Polymerization by addition, elimi-
nation, substitution and coupling reactions. Ionic, free-radical
and coordination catalysis. Prerequisite: one year of physical
chemistry and one year of organic chemistry.
396. Solid State Chemistry (3)
Chemistry of ionic and electronic defects in solids and their
influence on chemical and physical properties. Intrinsic and
impurity-controlled defects, non-stoichiometric compounds,
ordering of defects at surfaces and interfaces. Properties to be
discussed include: diffusion, sintering, ionic and electronic
conductivity, solid-state reactions, photoconductivity, recti-
fyingjunctions, chemisorption, and catalysis. Prerequisite:
Chem. 90 or Met. 210 or equivalent.
397. Colloid and Surface Chemistry (3)
Physical chemistry of everyday phenomena. Intermolecular
forces and electrostatic phenomena at interfaces, boundary
tensions and films at interfaces, mass charge transport in col-
loidal suspensions, electrostatic and London forces in dis-
perse systems, gas adsorption, and heterogeneous catalysis.
Prerequisite: Chem. 90 or equivalent.
For Graduates
The department of chemistry offers graduate work leading to
both the M.S. and the Ph.D. degrees (the M.S. is not a prere-
quisite for the Ph.D.); facilities are available for post-doctoral
research. Forty-five M.S. and Ph.D. candidates were enrolled
in the department in the 1972-73 academic year.
A student may specialize in biochemistry, analytical, in-
organic, organic, physical, or polymer chemistry. The depart-
ment has numerous laboratory facilities and considerable
scientific equipment for chemical research as well as a
capable faculty which works closely with students in the
classroom and in the research laboratory.
The University libraries contain approximately a half-
million volumes and i urrently subscribe to some 6000 serials
and periodicals. There arc particularly strong collections
available for research in the physical and natural sciences.
The graduate program m chemistry at Lehigh has a two-
told purpose. It affords a student the opportunity to acquire
a modern advanced knowledge ol chemistry within the
framework of formal graduate courses and permits the devel-
opment ol techniques required of competent research
through independent scientific investigation. The graduate
program for the Ph.D. degree in chemistry consists of approx-
imately one-third formal course work and two-thirds inde-
pendent research and study. A student entering upon
graduate study with a teaching assistantship will spend an
average of three or four years of full time residency beyond
the bachelor's degree to complete all the requirements for the
Ph.D. degree.
During his first year of graduate work a student normally
takes basic graduate courses from the fields of analytical,
biological, inorganic, organic, and physical chemistry and
becomes acquainted with the research interest of the various
faculty members. From these contacts the student is able to
assess critically his own research interest, and thus choose a
research director. Having selected a research director, a re-
search problem is mutually agreed upon; a thesis committee
is appointed to serve in an advisory capacity.
It is assumed that an entering graduate student in chemis-
try will have satisfied the requirements for the bachelor's
degree that meet the minimum standards recommended by
the American Chemical Society Committee on Professional
Training. Thus, in addition to the usual chemistry courses, a
student's undergraduate curriculum should include at least
one year of physics, mathematics through calculus, and pre-
ferably at least one year of German. If a student shows a
deficiency in one or more of these undergraduate areas, these
can be rectified during the first year of graduate work and do
not affect a student's eligibility for an appointment to an
assistantship. Teaching and research assistantships, as well as
fellowships, are available to graduate students in chemistry.
The assistantships are regarded as half-time appointments,
permitting a student to enroll for up to ten credit hours of
course work per semester. Students on teaching appoint-
ments normally have an average of 8 hours per week of in-
structional duties in undergraduate recitation classes or
laboratories. The University does not charge tuition or other
fees of students on teaching appointments. Current research
projects of interest are listed below.
Analytical Chemistry: electron-reduction and oxidation
mechanisms of organic compounds; Hammett correlations
with electrochemical reduction potentials; analysis in marine
environment, luminescence of metal chelates; voltammetry in
non-aqueous solvents.
Biochemistry: production, isolation, and characterization
of proteolytic enzymes of marine bacteria; determination of
the amino acid specificity of bacterial proteases; mechanism
of action of proteolytic enzymes; nucleases of marine
110 Chemistry
bacteria; isolation and characterization of antimicrobial sub-
stances; physiology and biochemistry of marine bacteria and
other microorganisms; denitrification reactions; immobiliza-
tion of enzymes; sugar phosphate substrate utilization by
glycolytic enzymes; mechanism of phosphoglucose isomerase
and aldolase; phosphoryl transfer reactions of enzymes;
studies on choline acetyl transferase.
Inorganic chemistry: synthesis and characterization of
amide complexes of transition metals; silicon organometallic
compounds; substitution and rearrangement reactions in-
volving metal carbonyls; organic syntheses and catalysis in-
volving transition metal complexes.
Organic chemistry: synthesis of medicinal agents; correla-
tion of molecular structure and pharmacological behavior;
chemical models for biochemical reactions; photochemical
enolization processes; sulfur bonding in novel heteroaromatic
sulfur compounds; biosyntheses involving indole inter-
mediates; synthesis of new heterocyclic systems; synthesis of
phosphate esters of biological interest; kinetics and
mechanism of phosphate ester hydrolysis.
Physical chemistry: vacuum ultraviolet photochemistry;
radiation chemistry; flash photochemistry and kinetic spec-
troscopy; surface chemistry of metals, semiconductors, and
polymers; heterogeneous nucleation phenomena; catalysis;
heats of wetting; stability of colloidal dispersions; polymer
adsorption; molecular structure and bonding properties of
inorganic, organic, and organometallic compounds from
vibration-rotation spectra using infrared and Raman spectro-
scopy; molecular motion in the crystalline state; molecular
structure, conformation, and properties of polymers in solu-
tion and in the solid state; application of quantum mechanics
and statistical mechanics to problems of chemical interest;
heterogeneous catalysis; adsorption and chemisorption
kinetics; solid state chemistry; point defects in oxides.
Polymer chemistry: synthesis, structure, conformation,
and properties of high polymers; transition and viscoelastic
behavior; rubber elasticity; behavior of composites and other
multi-component systems.
The chemistry department has offices, laboratories, a
library, and other research facilities throughout the four
floors of Chandler Laboratories; biological chemistry is
located in nearby Williams Hall which also houses the biology
department. Physical chemistry of surfaces is located in
Sinclair Laboratory with the Center for Surfaces and Coat-
ings Research; polymer chemistry is partly in Coxe Labora-
tory (Materials Research Center) and partly in Sinclair
Laboratory. The specialized equipment available in the de-
partment for graduate research includes: mass spectrometer,
x-ray diffraction spectrometer, single-beam grating infrared
spectrometer, Raman spectrograph, nuclear magnetic reso-
nance spectrometer, electron spin resonance, emission spec-
trographs, atomic absorption spectrometer, spectrofluoro-
meter, phosphorescence spectrometer, infrared Fourier trans-
form, Auger, Mossbauer spectrometers, radiotracer equip-
ment, Geiger and scintillation counters, light scattering
photometer, differential refractometer, flash photolysis ap-
paratus, densitometers, preparative and analytical gas chrom-
atographs, ellipsometer, double-beam infrared and ultra-
violet-visible recording spectrometers, counting equipment
for radioactivity measurements, Wenking potentiostat,
recording-multipurpose polarographs, and chronopotentio-
meters, high speed centrifuges, automatic fraction collectors,
freeze dryers, high voltage electrophoreses apparatus, elec-
tron microscope, laboratory fermentor, walk-in cold room,
cell disintegrator, Warburg respirometer, zone and disc elec-
trophoresis apparatus, paper column chromatography equip-
ment, freeze-dryer, autoclave.
In addition to the facilities of the chemistry department,
there are several research centers located on the campus that
are maintained by the University; see page 71 of this catalog
for a listing of the centers and their facilities.
400. Inorganic Chemistry Research (1-4)
Investigation of a problem in inorganic chemistry.
401. Inorganic Chemistry Research (1-4)
Continuation of Chem. 400.
402. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry (3)
Theories of bonding. Group theoretical principles will be
utilized in studies of molecular orbital and ligand field
theories of bonding. Prerequisite: Chem. 302 or equivalent.
403. Advanced Topics in Inorganic Chemistry (3)
Subjects of contemporary interest in inorganic chemistry,
including quantitative treatment of acid-base chemistry in
non-aqueous solvents, mechanisms of inorganic reactions,
chemistry of organometallic compounds and metal carbonyls,
and chemistry of metal chelates. This course may be repeated
when a different topic is offered. Prerequisite: Chem. 302 or
its equivalent and consent of instructor.
429. Seminar in Inorganic Chemistry (1-6)
Reports and discussions of recent developments in inorganic
chemistry.
430. Analytical Research (1-4)
Investigation of problems in analytical chemistry.
431. Analytical Research (1-4)
Continuation of Chem. 430.
432. Advanced Analytical Chemistry (3)
Recent developments in analysis by chemical methods.
Statistical methods in analytical chemistry: treatment and
interpretation of numerical data; design of experiments;
application to and discussion of multistage and other
methods for separating chemical species. Prerequisite: Chem.
332 or equivalent. Offered alternate years.
Chemistry 111
433. Advanced [opicsin Electrochemistry (3)
TTieory and applications "l selected electrochemical tech
niqucs; solutions to mass transport problems, treatment o!
electron transfer kinetics ami kinetics nl .issnci.it cil chemical
reactions, .ind critical evaluation nl adsorption a nil other
factors associated with eleetroclieniic.il processes. Prerequi-
site: Chem. 332 or equivalent, Offered alternate years.
436. Advanced Methods ol Analytical Chemistry (3)
Theory and analytical applications ol" selected spectroscopic
techniques: e.g., luminescence, magnetic resonance, and
microwave spectroscopy. Prerequisite: Chem. 381 or Chem.
445, or equivalent. Offered alternate years.
458. Topics ill Organic Chemistry (3)
An intensive study of limited areas in organic chemistry. May
be repeated when a different topic is offered.
459. Seminar in Organic Chemistry (1-6)
Reports and discussions of recent important developments in
theoretical and applied organic chemistry.
460. Organic Chemistry Research (1-4)
Investigation of a problem in organic chemistry.
461. Organic Chemistry Research (1-4)
Continuation of Chem. 460.
439. Seminar in Physical Chemistry (1-6)
Reports and discussions of recent developments in physical
chemistry.
441. Chemical Kinetics (3)
A study of kinetic processes. Phenomenological chemical
kinetics: order, mechanism effect of external variables on
rate. Theories of the rate constant. Relation between thermo-
dynamics and kinetics. Applications to selected systems such
as unimolecular decompositions, adsorption and catalysis.
Prerequisite: one year of physical chemistry.
443. (Met. 443) Solid State Chemistry (3)
Crystal structure, diffraction in crystals and on surfaces,
bonding and energy spectra in solids, dielectrics, surface
states and surface fields in crystals. Prerequisite: Chem. 191
or equivalent.
445. Elements of Physical Chemistry (4)
Quantum chemistry of simple systems, molecular structure
and spectroscopy, statistical and classical thermodynamics,
and principles of kinetic processes.
449. Seminar in Analytical Chemistry (1-6)
Reports and discussions of recent developments in analytical
chemistry.
450. Theoretical Organic Chemistry (3)
An advanced study of topics in theoretical and mechanistic
organic chemistry: solvolyses, rearrangements, multi-center
reactions, carbenes, photochemistry and the application of
nuclear magnetic resonance to organic chemical problems.
Offered alternate years.
451. Theoretical Organic Chemistry (3)
The chemistry of benzenoid aromatic compounds, quinones
and non-benzenoid aromatic substances, including modern
theories of structure, electrophilic, nucleophiiic and homoly-
tic aromatic substitution and the less familiar addition reac-
tions of aromatic systems. Prerequisite: Chem. 358. Offered
alternate years.
466. Advanced Organic Preparations (2-3)
A laboratory course of instruction in advanced techniques of
the preparation of organic compounds.
471. Natural Products (3)
A survey of the chemistry of steroids, tcrpenes, alkaloids and
antibiotics with emphasis on instrumental methods of analy-
sis and structure proof, recent synthetic and biosynthetic
pathways. Offered alternate years.
473. Seminar in Biochemistry (1-4)
Reports and discussion of current developments in the field
of biochemistry.
474. Biochemistry Research (1-4)
Investigation of a problem in biochemistry.
475. Biochemistry Research (1-4)
Continuation of Chem. 474.
476. Microbial Biochemistry (3)
Composition, nutrition and metabolism of micro-organisms;
with emphasis on microbial enzyme reactions and products
of microbial metabolism. Prerequisites: Chem. 372 and Biol.
35 or their equivalents.
477. Topics in Biochemistry (3)
Intensive study of selected areas of biochemistry, such as
mechanisms of enzyme action, new developments in the
chemistry of lipids, nucleic acids, carbohydrates and proteins.
Prerequisite: consent of the chairman of the department.
479. Biochemical Techniques (1-3)
Laboratory studies of the techniques and principles involved
in the isolation, identification and biochemical transforma-
tion of carbohydrates, lipids, nucleic acids and proteins. Pre-
requisite: Chem. 371 or its equivalent, previously or con-
currently.
112 Chemistry
480. Advanced Biochemical Preparations (1-3)
An advanced laboratory course in the preparation, isolation,
purification and identification of biochemically produced
materials. Emphasis is placed on materials and procedures of
current interest in biochemistry. Prerequisite: consent of the
chairman of department.
490. Physical Chemistry Research (1-4)
Investigation of a problem in physical chemistry.
491. Physical Chemistry Research (1-4)
Continuation of Chem. 490.
492. (Ch.E.492) Topics in Polymer Science (3)
For course description, see Ch.E. 492.
494. Quantum Chemistry (3)
Principles and applications of quantum mechanics to
chemical problems. Applications to chemical bonding, mole-
cular structure, reactivity and spectroscopy. Prerequisite:
Chem. 445 or consent of chairman of department. Offered
alternate years.
495. Statistical Thermodynamics (3)
Principles and applications of statistical mechanics to
chemical problems. A study of the techniques for evaluating
the properties of matter in bulk from the properties of
molecules and their interactions. Offered alternate years.
497. Topics in Colloid and Surface Chemistry (3)
Applications of colloid chemistry; special topics in surface
chemistry. Lectures and seminar. Prerequisite: Chem. 397.
May be repeated for credit as different topics are covered.
498. Advanced Topics in Physical Chemistry (3)
An advanced study of some field of physical chemistry. Rota-
tion-vibration spectroscopy; theory of solutions; photo-
chemistry and radiation chemistry; irreversible thermody-
namics or other topics of current interest.
Civil Engineering
Professors
David Alan VanHorn, Ph.D., Chairman
Lynn Simpson Beedle, Ph.D., Director, Fritz Laboratory
George Clarence Driscoll, Jr., Ph.D.
John William Fisher, Ph.D.
John Orth Liebig, Jr., M.S.
Le-Wu Lu, Ph,D.
Alexis Ostapenko, Ph.D.
Adrian F. Richards, Ph.D.
Lambert Tall, Ph.D.
Associate Professors
Arthur William Brune, Ph.D.
Wai-Fah Chen, Ph.D.
John Hartley Daniels, Ph.D.
George Anson Dinsmore, M.S.
Hsai-Yang Fang, Ph.D.
Walter H. Graf, Ph.D.
Ti Huang, Ph.D.
Robert Leroy Johnson, Ph.D.
Celal Nizamettin Kostem, Ph.D.
Roger George Slutter, Ph.D.
Bung-Tseng Yen, Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
Terence John Hirst, Ph.D.
Willard Austin Murray, Ph.D.
Paul John Usinowicz, Ph.D.
Civil engineering, the stem from which have branched the
other types of engineering, is concerned with projects which
contribute to the comfort and needs of man. The profession-
al practice of a civil engineer includes the conception, design,
construction, operation, and maintenance of private and
public projects, including bridges, buildings, highways, air-
ports, railroads, harbors, docks, subways, tunnels, water
supply and purification systems, sewage collection and treat-
ment facilities, water power developments, the making of
surveys, and research. Many civil engineers are associated
with consulting engineering firms, contractors, industrial
concerns, or various governmental agencies.
In the undergraduate program, the work of the first two
years deals chiefly with the scientific and mathematical prin-
ciples which form the bases of engineering practice. The last
two years include the applications of these principles, along
with opportunities for elective courses in areas of individual
interest. All students receive instruction in engineering
Civil Engineering 113
measurements, soil mechanics, fluid mechanics and hy-
draulics, structural theory and design, transportation engi-
neering and environmental engineering. Special five ycai conv
bined programs leading to the degrees U.S. in C.E. and cither
B.S. i" M.E. or B.A. can be arranged. Also, a combined pin
gT.un leading to the degrees B.S. in C.E. and B.S. in Business
Administrate ind one-half years), M.B.A. in manage
ment science, or M.S. in foreign studies can be arranged.
Engineers, through their professional societies, have urged
that the engineering student be educated as a professional
man with a sound understanding of his place in society. This
education is provided through a well-planned civil engineering
program enriched by the humanistic-social courses taken
during the four years, and selected with the advice and
approval ot the curriculum director.
Recommended Sequence of Courses
Freshman Year (See page 45)
Sophomore Year, First Semester (15 credit hours)
Math 23 Analytic Geometry & Calculus III (4)
Phys 21 Introductory Physics II (4)
Phys 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)
Mech 1 Statics (3)
CE 13 Civil Engineering Concepts (3)
Sophomore Year, Second Semester (16 credit hours)
Math Elective (3)
CE 40 Principles of Surveying (3)
Eco 1 Economics (4)
Mech 11 Mechanics of Materials (3)
GS Requirement (3)
Summer (3 credit hours)
CE 41 Engineering Surveys (3)
Junior Year, First Semester (16-19 credit hours)
CE101 Computer Methods (1)
CE 1 21 Mechanics of Fluids (3)
CE 159 Structural Analysis I (3)
CE143 Soil Mechanics (3)
Mech 102 Dynamics (3)
Elective (3-6)
Senioi Year, First Semestet ti {8 credit hours)
l i 203 i'i ofcssional I Icvclopmcnl (3)
CE 207 Transportation Engineering (3)
( is Requirement (3)
Elective (6-9)
Senior Year, Sei ond Semester | 15 IS credit hours)
CE 200 Engineering Planning (3)
GS Requirement (3)
Elective (912)
Note: The lower number of credit hours represents the load
required to meet the graduation requirements; the higher
represents the normal semester load.
Elective opportunities total 15-27 credits, with at least 6
credits to be in engineering science courses. The engineering
sciences form the transition between basic sciences and engi-
neering design. For the civil engineering student, typical engi-
neering science clcctivcs would be M.E. 1 04, 105, and 242;
Mech. 203;Met. 63 or91;E.E. 20, 160, 161, and 162.
Undergraduate Courses
11. Engineering Graphics (2)
Use of drawing instruments; freehand lettering and shape
description; theory of orthographic projection, revolution,
and pictorial representation; theoretical problems in space
relationships between points, lines and planes; surfaces as
loci. Emphasis on visualization and geometric logic.
13. Civil Engineering Concepts (3)
Introduction to the analysis and design of civil engineering
systems. Graphical communication and analysis. Case studies
and student projects in the several areas of civil engineering
specialization. Oral and written reports.
40. Principles of Surveying (3)
Study of errors in measurements, their effect on field pro-
cedures and office computations and their use in determining
precisions for methods and equipment to meet prescribed
accuracies and in preparation of survey specifications. Study
of methods in the use of the tape, transit, and level in land,
engineering, and topographic surveying. Astronomical obser-
vations for true direction, state plane coordinate systems,
survey computations, theory of errors and statistics appli-
cable to second order, third order, and ordinary surveys.
Junior Year, Second Semester (15-18 credit hours)
CE 110 Civil Engineering Lab (3)
CE 170 Environmental Engineering I (3)
CE 160 Structural Design (3)
CE 222 Hydraulic Engineering (3)
GS Requirement (3)
Elective (0-3)
41. Engineering Surveys (3)
Applications of surveying to route location, topography,
highways, construction, and boundaries. Daily recitation and
field work for a three-week period. Prerequisite: C.E. 40.
Summer session.
Summer
CE 100
Industrial Employment
114 Civil Engineering
100. Industrial Employment
During the summer following the junior year, students are
required to spend at least eight weeks in approved office or
shop work or on engineering construction. A written report
on the shop work or project, outlining the experience ob-
tained is due on return from summer vacation.
101. Computer Methods (1)
Computer programming of problems encountered in civil
engineering, predicated on numerical techniques. Prerequi-
site: Engr. 1.
102. Civil Engineering Proseminar (1)
A study of current civil engineering projects and develop-
ments with written reports. At weekly meetings these reports
are presented orally in abstract. Prerequisite: senior standing.
103. Special Problems (1-6)
Supervised individual research problems with report, Prere-
quisite: consent of instructor.
104. Readings in Civil Engineering (1-3)
Study of selected technical papers, with abstracts and
reports. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
106. Structural Design (3)
Elementary theory and design of structures in steel, wood,
and concrete. An abridged course in stress analysis and design
for students other than civil engineers. Prerequisite: Mech.
11.
110. Civil Engineering Laboratory (3)
Experimental investigation of civil engineering problems. The
collection, evaluation and interpretation of data. Laboratory
work in the major disciplines of civil engineering concluded
with an experimental investigation in one or more areas of
the student's choice. Prerequisites: junior standing or consent
of the department chairman.
in engineering practice. Prerequisite: Mech. 11 or consent of
department chairman.
157. Concrete Laboratory (1)
Principles of the behavior of plain and reinforced concrete.
Design and preparation of concrete mixtures, and tests of
aggregates, control cylinders, and reinforced concrete beams.
Prerequisite: C.E. 160 previously or concurrently.
159. Structural Analysis I (3)
Elastic analysis of statically determinate frames and trusses;
deflections by the method of virtual work; force method
analysis of indeterminate structures; moment distribution
concept. Prerequisite: Mech. 1 1.
160. Structural Design (3)
Principles of structural design. Safety and economy.
Strength, stability and serviceability criteria. Selection of
simple structural members to resist tensile, compressive,
bending, and shearing loads. Various structural materials will
be covered, especially steel and reinforced concrete. Prerequi-
site: C.E. 159.
170. Environmental Engineering I (3)
Analysis and design of water distribution, waste water, and
storm water collection. Water and waste water sources and
treatment configuration. Laboratory work in water and waste
water evaluation with application to design. Prerequisite:
C.E. 121.
200. Engineering Planning (3)
Principles of systems planning of civil engineering projects. A
study of factors affecting the inception, evaluation, planning,
design and completion of typical engineering projects, includ-
ing technical, political, economic, social and environmental
factors; urban planning; plan implementation; decision
making; management techniques and reporting; optimal prin-
ciples. Prerequisite: junior standing.
121. Mechanics of Fluids (3)
Hydrostatics, fundamental laws of fluid motion, emphasis on
control volume methods. Potential flow, dynamic similitude,
boundary layers, pipe flow, and hydrodynamic forces on
objects. Prerequisite: Mech. 102 previously or concurrently.
123. Fluid Mechanics Laboratory (1)
Measurement of pressure, velocity and flow rate. Experimen-
tal error and test procedures. Exercises in closed conduit
flow, open channel flow, and hydraulic machinery. Prerequi-
site: C.E. 121 or M.E. 231.
143. Soil Mechanics (3)
Fundamental physical, chemical and mechanical properties
affecting the engineering behavior of soils. Identification;
classification; permeability; effective stress and pore water
pressures; compaction, compression and consolidation;
stress-strain behavior and shear strength; laboratory tests for
engineering properties; application of theories and principles
203. Professional Development (3)
Elements of professionalism and registration; responsibilities
of technical and professional societies, and of the civil engi-
neer as a professional and citizen. Principles of technical
writing, law, and engineering economics applicable to civil
engineers. Written and oral reports. Prerequisite: senior stand-
ing.
207. Transportation Engineering I (3)
Principles of the design, construction, and maintenance of
transportation facilities with emphasis on highways and air-
ports in the areas of geometric, drainage, and pavement
design. Properties and performance of materials used. Field
trips and design problems. Prerequisites: C.E. 41, C.E. 143.
222. Hydraulic Engineering (3)
Hydraulic measurements, open channel hydraulics, and sedi-
ment transport, hydraulic machinery, hydraulic structures,
coastal hydraulics. Prerequisite: C.E. 121 or equivalent.
Civil Engineering 115
244. Foundation I ngllll'ellllg i I)
Application ol the theories and print iples "i soil mechanics
indation design. S i t ■.- investigations engineering tc n
evaluate subsoil conditions, bearing capacity and settlement
analyses fot building foundations. I atcra] loads on retaining
walls Hid bulkheads. Slope stability and embankment design.
Seepage. Prerequisite: C.E. 143 or consent ol department
chairman.
259. Structural Analysis II (3)
Deflection ol beams and frames by moment area methods;
force analysis of complex structures; plastic analysis by
mechanism methods; influence coefficients; introduction to
displacement methods of analysis; computer applications.
Prerequisite: C.E. 159.
261. Structural Steel Design (3)
Design of steel structures, including plate girders, other built-
up members, trusses, frames, grillages, shell-type structures
and thin gage members. Additional topics include connec-
tions, composite beams, and fatigue and fracture concepts
related to structural design. Prerequisite: C.E. 160, C.E. 259
or consent of department chairman.
263. Structural Concrete Design (3)
Design of reinforced concrete structural elements and basic
systems, including continuous beams, frames, slabs, footings,
and walls. Serviceability criteria. Introduction to prestrcssing
and torsion. Prerequisite: C.E. 160, C.E. 259 or consent of
department chairman.
271. Environmental Engineering II (3)
Introduction to unit operations and unit processes involved
in water and waste water treatment facilities. Consideration
of combinations to meet water quality requirements, either
as water supply source or as receiving mantle. Prerequisite:
C.E. 170.
300. Apprentice Teaching in C.E. (1-3)
316. Civil Engineering Planning (3)
Project-oriented planning of one or two civil engineering pro-
jects of students' choice, with oral and written report; task
force approach, collection and analysis of data; consideration
of technical and environmental factors; cost analyses. Inter-
action with consulting engineers and planners. Prerequisite:
senior standing or consent of department chairman.
322. Hydromechanics (3)
Fundamental equations of fluid flow. Stress on viscous flow
with introductions to turbulence, boundary layers, and tur-
bulent shear flow. Hydraulic applications. Prerequisites:
Math. 205, C.E. 121.
323. Hydraulic Laboratory Practice (1-3)
Study of theory and methods of hydraulic experimentation.
324. (Mech. 323) Fluid Mechanics ol the Ocean and
Atmosphere (3)
For course description, see Mech. 323.
325. Hydrology (3)
Hydrologic cycle. Precipitation, evaporation, transpiration,
infiltration. Ground water. Stream flow, hydrographs, floods.
Statistical analysis applied to hydrology. Prerequisite: C.E.
121.
326. Ground Water Hydrology (3)
The study of subsurface water, its environment and dis-
tribution. Theory of ground water movement. Mechanics of
well flow. Sea water intrusion. Artificial recharge. Basin
development. Prerequisite: C.E. 121 or consent of depart-
ment chairman.
328. Channel and Oceanographical Hydraulics (3)
Hydraulics of fixed bed channels, specific energy concept,
secondary current, frictional resistance, flow stability, arti-
ficial obstruction. Oceanographical engineering and coastal
hydraulics, theory of waves, wave forces, wave refraction and
diffraction, coastal processes. Prerequisites: C.E. 121 and
consent of department chairman.
332. Ocean Engineering (3)
Quantitative oceanographic information for engineers, with
emphasis on the coastal zone. Navigation and energy systems;
materials; pollution problems; brief survey of the offshore
petroleum and mining industries; manned and telechiric un-
dersea operations. Prerequisite: consent of department chair-
man.
333. Ocean Engineering Field Investigations (1-3)
Field studies in ocean engineering involving participation in
research investigations conducted at sea. Prerequisite: con-
sent of department chairman.
341. Soil Stabilization (3)
The mechanisms of soil stabilization: compaction, use of
additives (aggregates, cement, asphalt, chemicals), special
techniques. Principles and techniques of soil stabilization for
use as foundation material in highways and airfields; theories
of flexible and rigid pavement design. Prerequisite: C.E. 143
or equivalent.
342. Experimental Soil Mechanics (3)
Experimental studies dealing with the measurement of soil
properties in the laboratory and in situ; application of these
properties to design; consolidation; strength of soils in tri-
axial compression and other shear tests, including measure-
ment of pore water pressures; model design and analysis; field
measurement of in situ soil properties; laboratory and field
instrumentation. Prerequisite: C.E. 143.
116 Civil Engineering
343. Seepage and Earth Structures (3)
Long- and short-term stability of embankments and cut
slopes; numerical and graphical methods of stability analysis;
seepage through soils; design of earth dams, embankments
and excavations; influence of seepage on embankment stabili-
ty; construction control and field measurement of pore
pressures and earth movements. Prerequisite: C.E. 143 or
equivalent.
352. Structural Dynamics (3)
Analysis of linear structural systems to time dependent loads.
Free and forced vibration. Classical and numerical methods
of solution. Lumped-mass techniques, energy methods, and
introduction to matrix formulation of dynamic problems.
Application to design. Prerequisite: Math. 205 or equivalent.
359. Plastic Analysis and Design (3)
Plastic analysis and design of steel structure. Strength and
behavior of frames and component parts beyond the elastic
limit. Methods of predicting strength and deformation in the
plastic range. Studies of industrial and multistory frames.
Comparison of plastic design techniques with allowable-stress
design methods. Current research. Prerequisite: C.E. 259 or
equivalent.
360. Advanced Structural Design (3)
Project-oriented advanced design of structures for bridges and
buildings in steel or reinforced concrete and combinations of
both materials. Emphasis on economy, strength and perfor-
mance. Consideration of design of timber or glued-laminated
structures, depending on student interest. Prerequisites: C.E.
261 and C.E. 263, or equivalent.
365. Prestressed Concrete (3)
Principles of prestressing. Analysis and design of basic flex-
ural members. Instantaneous and time-dependent properties
of materials. Prestress losses. Additional topics may include
continuity, partial prestressing, compression members, cir-
cular prestressing, etc. Prerequisites: C.E. 263; C.E. 259 pre-
viously or concurrently, or consent of department chairman.
371. Environmental Health Engineering (3)
Engineering applications to public health; food and milk sani-
tation, solid wastes, vector control, communicable disease
control. Institutional and industrial sanitation, housing, air
pollution, bathing and recreational water quality. Prerequi-
site: consent of department chairman.
374. Sanitary Engineering Analysis and Operations (3)
Applications of chemical theory, concepts of operations com-
monly used in water quality control and laboratory evalua-
tions for design of processes in water and waste-water treat-
ment. Prerequisite: C.E. 271 or consent of department
chairman.
376. Water Resources Engineering (3)
Utilization of principles of hydraulics, hydrology and envi-
ronmental engineering in problems of erosion and flood con-
trol, power, irrigation navigation, and water quality control;
economics and water law in river basin planning. Prerequi-
sites: C.E. 222 and C.E. 170 or consent of department chair-
man.
380. Design Projects (1-6)
Design project work as a member of a team, probably includ-
ing students from differing disciplines. The project will attack
a problem which, when possible, relates to a problem of one
of the local communities or industries. Specific projects will
normally be guided by faculty from several departments with
consultants from off the campus. The course will be offered
both semesters and may be repeated for credit. Prerequisite:
consent of department chairman.
381. Special Topics (1-3)
A study of selected topics in civil engineering, not included in
other formal courses.
385. Research Procedures Seminar (1)
Planning and execution of research projects, survey of cur-
rent research, elements of proposals and budgets. Literature
search procedures. Presentation of data, and of written and
oral reports. Guidelines for visual aids.
For Graduates
Graduate studies in civil engineering permit the student to
build upon the broad background of undergraduate training
in order to prepare for professional practice at an advanced
level, for research and development, or for teaching. The
selection of graduate courses and research opportunities
offered in the department permits the development of study
programs either encompassing a wide range of interests or
pursuing a special area of civil engineering in depth. The
department offers advanced work in structural engineering,
geotechnical engineering, geotechnical ocean-engineering,
hydraulic engineering and environmental engineering, leading
to the M.S. and Ph.D. degrees; 23 Ph.D. and 38 M.S. candi-
dates were enrolled in the department in the 1972-73
academic year.
A graduate program leading to the M.S. degree will nor-
mally consist of a number of courses in a major area plus at
least two courses in a minor area or areas. Each candidate for
a master's degree is expected to take at least one research
course (C.E. 429, 439, 449, 469, 479, 481, or 491), but a
minimum of 24 hours of the program should consist of
courses outside this group. Research assistants and fellows
normally will prepare a thesis.
A number of selected subjects offered by the departments
of mechanical engineering and mechanics, chemical engineer-
ing, metallurgy and materials science, biology, and geological
sciences may also be considered a part of the major field in
civil engineering. A list of such subjects is available through
the chairman of the department.
Civil Engineering 117
The Ph.D. degree program normal!) includes (1 | courses
in the major field, , J1 courses in minor in- Ids. and (3) ■< il is
serration presenting results ol original research. In addition,
andidatc is required to have some educ ation in one 01
two non-engineering fields. Tli is requirement may be met bj
taking two course. | !00 level 01 above), or by taking two
foreign language courses, or by passing a language proficiency
examination. Holders of master's degrees planning to become
candidates tor a Ph.D. must take a qualifying examination at
the first opportunity following one semester in residence.
Alter qualification, the program of work is formulated by the
candidate, his special committee, and the department chair-
man.
The laboratories of the department are located in the
Fritz Engineering laboratory. Established in 1909 by the
generosity of the late John Fritz, and improved through ad-
ditions to apparatus and equipment, the laboratory offers
complete tacilities for research and instruction in structural
engineering, geotechnical engineering, model analysis, fluid
mechanics and hydraulics, environmental engineering, and
other related fields. There is a considerable amount of inter-
disciplinary research currently underway in the laboratory.
Structural testing equipment includes dynamic testing
machines, a 5,000,000-pound universal hydraulic testing
machine, and other special loading apparatus. Hydraulic test-
ing equipment includes a dredge pump test facility, the
largest in this country, plus installations for testing models of
spillways, open channels, and beach facilities. A brochure
describing the research facilities and programs is available on
request.
An interdisciplinary relationship with the Center for
Marine Science and Environmental Studies enables the devel-
opment of academic and research programs in ocean engi-
neering.
A number of research assistantships and teaching assis-
tantships are available to provide financial aid to students of
outstanding promise. The half-time research or teaching
duties required of holders of assistantships provide valuable
training which supplements the formal course offering. The
graduate course offering of the department is programmed to
fit the schedule of half-time assistants. A very limited number
of scholarships and fellowships are available to provide finan-
cial aid for full-time study.
403. Analytical Methods in Civil Engineering (3)
Analytical and numerical methods used in various fields of
civil engineering. Matrix algebra in engineering analysis. Itera-
tive, differencing, and discretization techniques. Energy
principles and special methods. Treatment of typical differen-
tial equations in civil engineering. Introduction to theory of
elasticity with some engineering applications. Prerequisite:
Math. 205 or equivalent.
408. Computer Methods in Civil Engineering (3)
Numerical and computer-oriented methods specially applica-
ble to the solution of complex problems arising in various
fields of civil engineering. Solutions of well- and ill-condition-
ed linear and non-linear systems. Eigenvalue formulation of
Stability and dynamic problems. Reduction tci hniquc- ■..
applied linear graph theory, integration schemes lor large
structural systems. I Optimal design by linear programming.
Introduction to problem-oriented languages and computer-
ized design. Prerequisites: C.E. 403 or equivalent, and work-
ing knowledge of FORTRAN IV programming.
124. Surface Walet Hydrology (3)
The study of quantities in the flow of water in streams.
Meterology; hydrographs. Application of statistical analysis
and probability to hydrological problems. Drainage basin
analysis and planning. Prerequisite: C.E. 121 or consent of
department chairman.
425. Hydraulics of Sediment Transport (3)
Hydrodynamic forces on particles, settling velocity. Sediment
transport in open channel: tractive force theory, bed load
and suspension theory, total load and wash load. Bedform
mechanics, cohesive channel hydraulics. Sediment transport
in closed conduits. Shore processes and coastline hydraulics.
Prerequisites: C.E. 121 and C.E. 222, and consent of depart-
ment chairman.
428. Advanced Topics in Hydraulics (1-3)
Recent developments in hydromechanics and hydraulics.
Topics to be selected from: wave mechanics, theory of flow
through porous media, dispersion, hydrodynamic forces on
structures, potential flow, free streamline theory, open chan-
nel hydraulics, computer methods. Prerequisites: C.E. 322
and consent of department chairman. May be repeated for
credit.
429. Hydraulic Research (1-6)
Individual research problems with reports. May be repeated
for credit.
431. Geotechnical Ocean Engineering (3)
Study of the engineering and scientific aspects of soils floor-
ing the oceans; soils and their distribution; theory and
practice of sampling, laboratory and in situ testing, geo-
physical methods, and computerized data synthesis; biologic-
al, geochemical, and physical properties of the electrolyte-
gas-solid soil system of the sea floor and the response of this
system to applied static and dynamic forces. Prerequisite:
C.E. 143 or equivalent.
437. Advanced Topics in Geotechnical Ocean Engineering (1-3)
Advanced study of selected topics in geotechnical ocean engi-
neering, such as: physico-chemistry of ocean sediments;
foundation design in soft sediments; instrumentation for
deep-sea soil surveys; and others. Selection of topics will de-
pend on particular qualifications of the staff, as well as in-
terest of students. Prerequisite: consent of department chair-
man. May be repeated for credit.
439. Ocean Engineering Research (1-6)
Individual research problems with reports. May be repeated
for credit.
118 Civil Engineering
443. Advanced Soil Mechanics I (3)
The origin, composition, and physico-chemical properties of
soils and their influence on the engineering properties and
behavior of soils; transmission of water in saturated and un-
saturated soils; advanced theory of compaction; compression
and consolidation; theories of shear strength. Prerequisite: a
course in soil mechanics.
444. Advanced Soil Mechanics II (3)
Fundamental and advanced theories of soil mechanics appli-
cable to earth structures and foundation design; stresses in
homogeneous and layered systems for ideal elastic, plastic
and visco-elastic soils; lateral earth pressures; slope stability;
vibration and other dynamic forces. Prerequisite: C.E. 443.
453. Structural Members and Frames (3)
General torsion of thin-walled open, closed, and combined
open and closed cross-sections; general instability of thin-
wailed members; inelastic instability; special problems in
stability. Desirable preparation: C.E. 403 and Mech. 415.
454. Plate and Shell Structures (3)
Analysis and design of plates loaded transversely and in their
plane. Shear lag; influence surfaces. Buckling and post-
buckling behavior of elastic and inelastic plates. Membrane
and bending analysis of cylindrical, rotational and hyper-
bolic-paraboloidal shells. Exact and approximate engineering
methods. Design considerations. Prerequisite: consent of
chairman of department.
445. Advanced Foundation Engineering (3)
Current theory and practice relating to the design of founda-
tions for buildings and other structures. Analysis and limita-
tion of settlements; bearing capacity analyses of shallow
foundations and piles; flexible and rigid retaining wall design;
embankment design; control of seepage and other construc-
tion problems; site investigations. Prerequisite: a course in
soil mechanics.
447. Advanced Topics in Geotechnical Engineering (1-3)
Advanced studies in selected subjects related to geotechnical
engineering. The general areas in which studies may be taken
include: stress-strain-time relationships of soils, colloidal
phenomena in soils, ground water flow and seepage, soil dy-
namics, soil plasticity, numerical methods applied to soil
mechanics, earth dam design, theories of layered systems and
their application to pavement design, rock mechanics. The
studies specifically undertaken in any particular semester
depend on the availability of staff and the interest of stu-
dents. Prerequisite: consent of department chairman. Offered
on sufficient demand only. May be repeated for credit.
449. Geotechnical Research (1-6)
Individual research problems relating to soil engineering, with
report. Prerequisite: a course in soil mechanics.
450. Advanced Structural Theory I (3)
Introduction to force and displacement matrix analysis of
structures. Consideration of influence of support settlement,
temperature, and fabrication tolerances on stress resultants
and deformations. Prerequisite: C.E. 259 or equivalent.
451. Advanced Structural Theory II (3)
Specialized methods of analysis: column analogy, moment
distribution. General treatment of deformation methods
using matrix algebra. Selected topics in structural theory:
influence lines, multi-story building frames, space structures.
Introduction to finite element method; non-linear problems.
Prerequisite: C.E. 450.
455. Advanced Structural Dynamics (3)
Analysis and design of structures to resist wind, earthquake,
and blast loading. Matrix methods and computer applica-
tions. Non-linear and elasto-plastic response. Damping charac-
teristics of structures and structural components, spectral
analysis, dynamic instability. Characteristics of aerodynamic
and seismic forces and nuclear blast. Introduction to vibra-
tion of 3-dimensional structural systems. Prerequisites: C.E.
403, C.E. 352 or Mech. 406, and C.E. 450 or equivalent.
457. Theory and Design of Steel Structures (3)
Analysis and design of steel structures; structural connec-
tions; composite steel-concrete systems and other compo-
nents. Consideration of residual stress; brittle fracture;
fatigue strength; fastener systems. Study of current research
and application to design practice.
459. Advanced Topics in Plastic Theory (3)
Fundamentals of the mathematical theory of plasticity; the
general theorems of limit analysis and their applications to
beams under combined loading, arches, space frames, plates
and shells. Limit analysis of two- and three-dimensional prob-
lems in soil, concrete, rock, and metal. Current develop-
ments. Prerequisite: C.E. 359.
462. Experimental Methods of Structural Analysis (3)
Mechanical properties of structural materials and different
procedures of evaluating these properties; experimental
methods of stress analysis; statistical analysis of experimental
data.
463. Experimental Methods of Structural Research (3)
Mechanical properties of structural materials and different
procedures of evaluating these properties; experimental
methods of stress analysis; statistical analysis of experimental
data.
464. (Mech. 416) Theory of Plates and Shells (3)
For course description see Mech. 416.
Civil Engineering 119
165. Vdvanced Topics in Concrete Structures (3) 181. Special Problems (1-6)
Advanced topics in reinforced and prestressed concrete. An intensive study, with report, of some special Held of civil
I iin it design concepts. Yield line theorj foi concrete slabs. engineering which is not covered in the other courses. A
Composite members. Additional topics ni.iv iiuiiuli ilesmn ol design project or ,m interdisciplinary study of some problem
concrete bridge systems, shear walls, arches: seismic design. related to civil engineering may also be included. May be
Prerequisiti > 3 or equivalent. repeated for credit.
466. Concrete Shell Structures (3) 483. Graduate Seminar (1-3)
Analysis and design of various types of concrete shell struc- Study of current topics in the field of civil engineering.
tures. Folded plates, barrel shells and shells of double curva-
ture. Application of prcstressing. Prerequisites: C.E. 403, 491. Thesis (1-6)
C.E. 263, and C.E. 365 or equivalent. Desirable preparation:
C.E. 454 oi Mech. Hi..
467. Advanced Topics in Structural Engineering (1-3)
Advanced study of selected topics in structural mechanics
and engineering, such as: finite element methods, suspension
systems: space frames; stability of non-linear systems; cold-
formed and lightweight construction; optimization and relia-
bility: second-order phenomena in structures; interaction of
structures with environment; structural use of plastics; com-
posite construction, etc. Selection of topics will depend on
particular qualifications of the staff, as well as on the inter-
ests of the students. Prerequisite: consent of department
chairman. May be repeated for credit.
468. (Mech. 415) Stability of Elastic Structures (3)
For course description see Mech. 415.
469. Structural Research (1-6)
Individual research problems with reports. May be repeated
for credit.
471. Water Treatment Facilities (3)
Theory and design of water treatment facility components,
from source to distribution system. Laboratory work in
water chemical parameter determinations for design applica-
tions. Prerequisite: C.E. 374.
472. Water Pollution Control Facilities (3)
Fundamental principles and design of water pollution control
facilities for domestic and industrial waste waters. Physical-
chemical and biological studies in laboratory determination
of design parameters to be applied in design procedures. Pre-
requisite: C.E. 374.
475. Advanced Topics in Water Resources (1-3)
Advanced study of selected topics in areas such as: physico-
chemical methods of water quality control; biological sys-
tems for waste-water treatment; multiple use of water re-
sources; and others. Selection of topics will depend on par-
ticular qualifications of the faculty as well as interest of the
students. Prerequisite: consent of the department chairman.
May be repeated for credit.
479. Environmental Engineering Research (1-6)
Individual research problems in environmental engineering
with summary report. May be repeated for credit.
120 Civil Engineering
Classics
Professors
Joseph Abele Maurer, Ph.D., Chairman
Douglas David Feaver, Ph.D.
Associate Professor
Edna Sophia DeAngeli, Ph.D.
Assistant Professor
David Kent Silhanek, Ph.D.
Majors in Classics seek, through insight into the culture of
ancient Greece and Rome, to gain an appreciation of Greco-
Roman achievements in art, literature, philosophy, and
science, and to formulate an evaluation of the importance of
these for modern culture. Readings in the original languages
of masterpieces, chosen both for their usefulness in develop-
ing skill in the languages and for their intrinsic worth and
abiding importance, aim at developing an accumulative
growth in the mastery of the languages and in the ability to
interpret, criticize, and evaluate the achievements of classical
civilization.
The basic work is supplemented by studies in the history,
archaeology, art, philosophy, and literary history of Greece
and Rome, and by an introduction to the basic tools and
disciplines of scholarly research in this area. Students are
encouraged to undertake research in fields of their own inter-
est.
Classics as a major has stood the test of time, offering a
general cultural background for careers in widely diverse
fields in the professions, business, and public service. It has
particular relevance as a preparation for careers in teaching,
law, writing, archaeology, and the church.
Lehigh University is a cooperating institution of The
American School of Classical Studies at Athens. Graduates of
Lehigh University receive free tuition in the school.
Major in Greek
Required Preliminary Courses
Gk 1, 2 Elementary Greek (6)
Gk 3, 4 Intermediate Greek (6)
Required Major Courses
Gk316 Plato (3)
Gk 21 Ancient History (3)
Gk 50 Greek Literature in English Translation (3)
Gk 202 Greek Archaeology (3)
Majors in Greek will write a translation examination during
their seventh semester. No comprehensive examination is
required.
Major in Latin
Required Preliminary Courses
Elementary Latin (3)
Caesar (3)
Nepos and Cicero (3)
Vergil (3)
■ Courses
The Latin Lyric (3)
Latin Drama (3)
Ancient History (3)
Latin Literature in English Translation (3)
Archaeology of Italy (3)
and twelve hours from the following:
Readings (3)
Readings (3)
The Roman Epic (3)
Latin Historical Grammar (3)
Satire (3)
Roman Prose Writers (3)
will write a translation examination during
mester. No comprehensive examination is
Major in Classics
This major is designed for those planning to go on to gradu-
ate work in classics, ancient history, ancient philosophy,
classical archaeology, and classical linguistics.
Programs in this major will be worked out for each stu-
dent with due consideration to his particular preparation and
specific goals. In general the program will require as a mini-
mum:
(a) 18 hours of courses in either the Latin or Greek langu-
age at the "100" level or higher.
(b) 12 hours of courses in the second language.
(c) 6 hours in ancient history (Greek 21, Latin 22).
(d) 6 hours in Senior Seminars (Greek 381, Latin 381).
Depending upon specific goals the student will be strongly
urged to take courses in fine arts, mediaeval history, philoso-
phy, French and German.
Either a comprehensive examination or a senior essay will
be required for graduation.
Lat 61
Lat 62
Lat 63
Lat 65
Required
Major
Lat 166
Lat 168
Lat 22
Lat 51
Lat 203
Lat 211
Lat 212
Lat 303
Lat 304
Lat 305
Lat 306
Majors in
Latin
their seventh se
required.
Gk 111, 112
Gkll3
Gk203
Gk271
Greek Drama (6)
Greek Historians (3)
Greek Epic (3)
Readings (3)
Classics 121
Recommended Electives
i ii [dvanccd Undergraduates and Graduates
Astron 1
> \
FA 3
Phil 23]
SR I]
Greek
The Solar System (3)
Fundamentals of Art (3)
History of Architecture (3)
Ancient 1'liilosophy (3)
Introduction to Anthropology (3)
( Undergraduate < 'ourses
1. Elementary Greek (3)
For ill students who desire to obtain a knowledge of the
fundamentals of the Greek language. Early in the semester
there will be reading in stories and legends in easy Greek.
2. Elementary Greek (3)
Continued work in Greek vocabulary, forms, and syntax.
Selected readings in Greek prose. Prerequisite: Gk. 1,
3. Intermediate Greek (3)
Xenophon: Anabasis, and other works. Grammar review.
Prerequisites: Gk. 1 and 2, or one year of entrance Greek.
4. Intermediate Greek (3)
Plato: Euthyphro, Apology, and Crito, or other dialogues.
Prerequisite: Gk. 3.
21. (Hist. 21) Ancient History (3)
The development of civilization from palaeolithic times to
the world empire of Alexander the Great. The social, eco-
nomic, religious, philosophic, artistic, and literary develop-
ment of the ancient world; the origin of political institutions.
50. Greek Literature in English Translation (3)s,
The development of the major departments of Greek litera-
ture; required readings in English translations, with special
attention to the epic, drama, and lyric poetry. No knowledge
of the Greek language is required.
111. Greek Drama (3)
Representative plays of Sophocles, Euripides, and
Aristophanes. Literary study of the drama. Prerequisite: Gk.
4.
112. Greek Drama (3)
Continuation of Gk. 111. Prerequisite: Gk. 4.
113. Greek Historians (3)
Selections from Herodotus, Thucydides, or Xenophon. A
study of Greek historiography. Prerequisite: Gk. 4.
2()1 . Archeaology of the Near East (3)
Aims and methods <>1 archaeology. A chronological survey of
archaeological funis from Palaeolithic, Neolithic, Bronze Age.
Iron Age and later cultures in the Near East, concentrating on
the Nile, Tigris-Euphrates River basins, and the levant.
Material illustrating the cultures and events of the Bible.
202. Greek Archaeology (3)
Aims and methods. A chronological presentation of prehist-
oric civilizations including the Neolithic, Minoan, Hclladic,
and Mycenaean periods. A study of extant ancient monu-
ments, buildings, and city plans of important sites of the
classical and Hellenistic periods. Lectures, collateral readings,
and reports.
203. Greek Epic (3)
Reading of considerable portions of the Homeric Epics and a
study of the poems as works of literature. Studies of the
background of the poems, and introduction to scholarly
problems of interpretation and theories of origins. Prerequi-
sites: six hours of courses at the "100" level and consent of
the chairman of department.
251. Classical Mythology (3)
Readings in the major myths and legends of ancient Greece
and Rome, with intensive study of those having the greatest
relevance for modern man. The changing aspects of myth as
reflected in both ancient and modern literature. Considera-
tion of the transmission of myth in non-literary aspects of
our culture.
271. Readings (3)
Intensive reading in one author or in a selected genre. Prere-
quisites: six hours of courses at the "1 00" level and consent
of chairman of department.
316. Plato (3)
Tlie Republic, and other dialogues. Lectures on classical
philosophy. Prerequisites: six hours of courses at the
100-level and consent of chairman of department.
381. Senior Seminar (3)
A proseminar: introduction to classical scholarship with par-
ticular attention to the methods of research, bibliographical
aids, and scholarly literature. Surveys will be made of such
varied fields as archaeology, numismatics, hermeneutics,
palaeography, and epigraphy. Prerequisite: consent of chair-
man of department.
Latin
22. (Hist. 22) Ancient History (3)
Continuation of Gk. 21. The Hellenistic Age. Rome from its
origin to 395 A.D.
1 22 Classics
51. Latin Literature in English Translation (3)
A study of Latin literature by means of the best English
translations. The lives of the most important authors are
studied and their works read according to the major depart-
ments of literature— history, comedy, epic, lyric, etc. Em-
phasis is placed on the chronological development of the
literature and historical background necessary to the interpre-
tation of the author's works. Lectures and readings with
special reports. No knowledge of the Latin language is re-
quired.
61. Elementary Latin (3)
For all students who desire to obtain a knowledge of the
fundamentals of the Latin language. Special emphasis on
English derivations and the principles of grammar.
62. Caesar (3)
Selections from Caesar: The Gallic War. Prose composition
and syntax. Prerequisite: Lat. 61 or 2 entrance units.
63. Nepos and Cicero (3)
Nepos: de Viris Illustribus; Cicero's orations and either de
Senectute or de Amicitia. Prerequisite: Lat. 62 or 3 entrance
units.
65. Vergil (3)
Vergil: Aeneid, selections from the entire work; study of the
aesthetic, political, and philosophical values of Vergil's poet-
ry. Prerequisite: Lat. 63 or at least 3 entrance units.
166. The Roman Lyric (3)
Selected poems of Catullus. Lectures on the history and de-
velopment of lyric poetry; constant practice in reading the
more important meters; memorization of stanzas and
passages. Prerequisite: Lat. 65 or at least 4 entrance units.
168. Latin Drama (3)
Readings of selected plays of Plautus, Terence, and Seneca.
Prerequisite: Lat. 65 or at least 4 entrance units.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
203. Archaeology of Italy (3)
Neolithic, Terramara, Villanovan, and Etruscan cultures.
Rome the city: its buildings, monuments, and streets, its
destruction and rediscovery through excavation; origin and
growth of the city; the three periods, empire, republic, and
kingdom; methods of identifying and dating monuments. A
survey of Pompeii, Herculaneum, and Ostia. Lectures, read-
ings and reports.
211. Readings (3)
Intensive readings in one author or in a selected genre. Prere-
quisites: six hours of courses at the "100" level and consent
of chairman of department.
212. Readings (3)
Intensive reading in one author or in a selected genre. Prere-
quisites: six hours of courses at the "100" level and consent
of chairman of department.
301. The Roman Republic (3)
The final century of the Roman Republic (133-44 B.C.) stud-
ied through a close examination of the original sources in
translation. The course gives a broad comprehension of the
historical background to the Latin authors of the Roman
Republic normally read in secondary school.
302. The Roman Empire (3)
A continuation of Latin 301. The principate of Augustus and
the first century of the Roman Empire (44 B.C.-70 A.D.).
The course gives a broad comprehension of the historical
background to the Latin authors of the Augustan and Silver
Age normally read in secondary school.
303. The Roman Epic (3)
The epic in Latin literature with lectures on the Greek mod-
els; early Latin translations of Greek epics: later minor
writers of epic. Passages from Lucretius, Vergil, and Ovid; a
study of the Aeneid in its entirety. Prerequisites: six hours of
courses at the "100" level and consent of chairman of depart-
ment.
304. Latin Historical Grammar (3)
The development of Latin syntax with survey of early Latin.
Syntactical analysis of Caesar, Cicero, and Vergil. The devel-
opment of classical prosody and metrics with emphasis on
changes in the hexameter from Catullus and Lucretius to
Vergil. The course is designed primarily for teachers of Latin
in secondary schools and for majors in Classics planning to
teach. Prerequisites: six hours of courses at the "100" level
and consent of chairman of department.
305. Satire (3)
Selected satires of Horace and Juvenal. Lectures on the
history of Roman satire and its influence on modern litera-
ture; study of social conditions under the empire. Prerequi-
sites: six hours of courses at 100-level and consent of chair-
man of department.
306. Roman Prose Writers (3)
Selections from Cicero, Tacitus, and Seneca. Prerequisites:
six hours of courses at 100-level and consent of chairman of
department.
382. Senior Seminar (3)
Continuation of Gk. 381. Prerequisite: consent of chairman
of department.
411. History of Latin Literature (3)
A study of Latin literature from the earliest remains of Latin
to the age of Cicero. Intensive readings in Latin of selections
of representative authors and genres. Prerequisites: six hours
of courses at the "300" level or equivalent.
412. History of Latin Literature (3)
Continuation of Lat. 411. The Age of Vergil to the end of
Classical Literature. Prerequisite: Lat. 411.
Classics 1 23
Economics
l'l i itc.SMM s
Finn Bjorn Jensen, Ph.D., MacFarlanc Professor and Chair-
man
Jay Richard Aronson, Ph.D.
Nicholas W. Balabkins. Ph.D.
AJvin Cohen, Ph.D.
Gerald Garb, Ph.D.
Eli Schwartz. Ph.D.
L. Reed Tripp, Ph.D., Magee Professor
Associate Professors
Warren Aiken Pillsbury, Ph.D.
Ching Sheng Shen, Ph.D.
John E. Walker, Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
Jacob DeRooy, Ph.D.
Jon Terence Innes, Ph.D.
John Daniel Keefe, M.A.
John R. McNamara, Ph.D.
Robert J. Thornton, Ph.D.
Andrew B. Weintraub, Ph.D.
Adjunct Professors
Reese D. Jones, M.A.
S. Herbert Unterberger, Ph.D.
Instructor
David B. Smith, M.S.
Major in Arts and Science College
Required Preliminary Courses for B.A.
Freshman Year
Eco 1
Math
Economics (4)
Two courses (6)
Required Major Courses
Sophomore Year
Eco 206 Microeconomic Analysis (3)
Eco 219 Macroeconomic Analysis (3)
Eco 45 Statistical Method (3)
Eco 129 Money & Banking (3)
Junior Year
Eco or Fin Any 300-level course (6)
Senior Year
Eco or I in Any 300-level course (6)
Majors in Business and Economics College
Economics Major
Required: 15 credits of economics beyond the core listed on
page 40.
Economics Statistics Major
Required: 15 credits beyond the core as follows:
Eco 346 Business Cycles and Forecasting (3)
Eco 347 National Income Analysis (3)
Eco 352 Advanced Statistical Method (3)
Math 44 BMSS Calculus II (3)
Eco 300-level course (3)
Undergraduate Courses
1. Economics (4)
A course in the principles of economics. General topics cover-
ed are: the determination of national income; the determina-
tion of relative prices; money and banking; monetary and
fiscal policy; and government finance.
45. Statistical Method (3)
Descriptive statistics, elementary probability and probability
distributions, sampling, estimation of population parameters,
decision theory, regression and correlation, analysis of vari-
ance, non-parametric tests, time series analysis, and index
numbers. Prerequisites: Math. 41 and 42, or equivalent.
129. Money and Banking (3)
A general course dealing with the nature and functions of
money and commercial banking, monetary and banking de-
velopment in the United States, the value of money, and
monetary, credit and fiscal policies.
130. Money and Banking (3)
A course dealing with specific monetary and banking prob-
lems with suggested actions to resolve these problems. Prere-
quisite: Eco. 129.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
All of the following courses in economics have as a prere-
quisite Economics 1 or equivalent.
206. Microeconomic Analysis (3)
Determination of prices in terms of the equilibrium of the
business enterprise and consumer choices in markets of vary-
ing degrees of competition; determination of wages, rent,
interest, and profits.
124 Economics
219. Macroeconomic Analysis (3)
An introduction to macroeconomic measurement, theory,
and policy. Provides framework within which broad macro-
economic policy prescription can be formulated especially
with reference to such problems as inflation and unemploy-
ment.
300. Apprentice Teaching in Eco. (1-3)
303. Economic Development (3)
The principal determinants of economic development; eco-
nomic development in advanced and underdeveloped
countries.
305. The Economic Development of Latin America (3)
Forces at work in the changing economics in Latin America:
in addition to the economic variables, social and political
factors are considered and related to technological change
and the development process.
307. History of Economic Thought (3)
Emergence of economics as a separate discipline. Exposition,
comparison, and appraisal of the method and theories of the
classical, socialist, Austrian, and neo-classical schools of eco-
nomists concerning the economic order, valuation, produc-
tion, price formation and resource allocation, money, bank-
ing and credit, business cycles, social welfare, and the role of
the state.
308. History of Economic Thought (3)
The development of modern economics by means of the
historical and analytical approaches. The objective is to pro-
vide an understanding of the nature and the significance of
economic science by means of examining contributions of
leading economists or schools from Adam Smith to the pre-
sent.
309. Comparative Economic Systems (3)
A comprehensive examination of the philosophical, econom-
ic, and political tenets of American Capitalism, Soviet Social-
ism, and Nazi Fascism. Analysis of economic planning under
various socio-economic systems: study of comparable eco-
nomic growth of the U.S. and the Soviet Union.
310. Economic Evolution (3)
Long term economic growth and social transformation of the
United States.
311. Economics of Resource Use (3)
Economic aspects of environmental pollution and conserva-
tion will be considered, including benefit-cost analysis of
public projects for development of natural resources, policies
for controlling the quality of land and water resources, and
the relationship between economic activity and environmen-
tal quality.
312. Urban Economics (3)
A survey and analysis of economic problems related to urban
areas; the nature and function of cities; the economic and
spatial characteristics of urban activity including housing,
land value, land use, transportation, fiscal problems, urban
labor markets and poverty.
320. Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis (3)
A further course in macroeconomic theory and policy.
Primary consideration is given to alternative theoretical speci-
fications of complete monetary economies and the resulting
policy implications for achieving economic growth and sta-
bility. Prerequisite: Eco. 219 or consent of department
chairman.
332. Monetary-Fiscal Policy (3)
A course devoted to the study of monetary, credit, and fiscal
policies of governments and central banks with particular
reference to the policies of the United States Treasury and
the Federal Reserve System. Current problems will receive
special emphasis. Prerequisite: Eco. 129 or equivalent.
335. Manpower Economics (3)
The structure of the labor force; the theory of wages and
employment; the economics of legal and social aspects of the
labor market.
336. Business and Government (3)
Microeconomic theory and the American legal system.
Efforts by the state to maintain, moderate, and supercede
competitive private contracting as a social arrangement by
which to promote risk-taking, efficiency, equitable exchange,
progressiveness, conservation, and individual liberty. Eco-
nomic analysis of results.
337. Transportation and Spatial Economics (3)
The principles of transportation in theory and practice are
integrated with traditional and spatial economics. Transport
models and location theories are reviewed for varying condi-
tions of spatial separation of economic activity. Transporta-
tion policies are analyzed and evaluated in terms of their
efficiency in the allocation of resources for the firm and the
economy at the local, regional and national levels. Prerequi-
site: Eco. 206 or consent of instructor.
338. Labor Market Institutions (3)
The development of the social and legal status of trade
unions; the process of collective bargaining; the evolution of
modern social welfare programs.
339. International Trade (3)
The theory of international trade; the theory of tariffs;
United States commercial policies; the impact of growth and
development on the world economy.
Economics 125
) lii. International I inani c (3)
The balance of payments and the theorj of disturbances and
adjustment in the intcrii.ition.il economy; international
monetary policies.
> I \. I uriijicin luononiic Integration (3)
Analysis of the problems of economic integration with
special emphasis on the development of economit coopera-
tion and integration in Western Europe The methods and the
problem!, of economic planning in the Common Market.
.1 States ir.ule and investments and European economic
integration.
346. Business Cycles and Forecasting (3)
A study of economic conditions, involving short-term fluctu-
ations, growth, forecasting and stabilization proposals. Prere-
quisite: a course in statistics.
347. National Income Analysis (3)
Analysis of income and product aggregated from the point of
view of development arid structural breakdown, emphasizing
sector accounts, savings and investments; and integrated with
broad macroeconomic theory. Prerequisite: Eco. 346.
348. Advanced Business Cycles (3)
Recent business cycle theories; the evolution of the theories
and the problems of economic change which the theories
attempt to explain. Prerequisite: Eco. 346.
351. Introduction to Mathematical Economics (3)
Applies mathematical techniques to economic problems of
optimization and constrained optimization and to economic
models involving both comparative static and dynamic analy-
sis. Prerequisites: Math. 41 and 43, Eco. 206 and 219.
352. Advanced Statistical Methods (3)
A further course in quantitative method: sampling design,
probability distributions including the analysis of variance,
and multiple correlation and their application to common
situations. Prerequisite: Eco. 45 or equivalent.
353. Public Finance: Federal (3)
A course dealing with government expenditures and revenues,
the economics of taxation, and government administration.
354. Public Finance: State and Local (3)
The major issues regarding revenues, expenditures, debit and
budgeting policy will be examined in the light of fiscal princi-
ples and economic effects. Particular attention will be given
to current practices in Pennsylvania and contiguous states.
Prerequisite: Eco. 353.
355. Empirical Economic Analysis (3)
The course provides empirical content to the theoretical con-
cepts developed in intermediate economic theory (micro- and
macro-). Prerequisites: Eco. 45, 206, and 219.
171 . Readings in I i imomii s ( 1)
r adings in various fields ol economics, designed for the
student who has .1 special interest in some field of economics
not covered by the regularly rostcred courses. Prerequisite:
preparation in economics acceptable to the department
chairman.
372. Readings in Economics (3)
1 ontinuation of Eco. 371.
For Graduates
404. Development Theory and Problems (3)
The evolution of growth doctrines and the analysis of such
developmental problems as: structural versus monetary re-
form, ideological controversy of the appropriate economic
system, balanced investment programs as opposed to un-
balanced plans, the nature and changes in the aggregate pro-
duction function, and dependence upon domestic as opposed
to foreign source of savings. Prerequisite: Eco. 303.
407. History of Economic Thought (3)
Consideration of selected topics in the history of economic
thought, with special attention devoted to tracing the origins
of modern economic theory. Prerequisite: graduate exposure
to economic theory.
415. (Fin. 415) Capital and Interest Theory (3)
See Fin. 415 for course description.
425. Public Finance (3)
Major issues in taxation of income consumption, and capital;
principles of government debt management; budgeting and
fiscal planning for economic stability and growth.
431. Managerial Economics (3)
Problems of business enterprise: price and output determina-
tion analysis of cost and demand functions in markets of
various types and under various conditions of general busi-
ness. Emphasis will be on the application of economic theory
to business practice. Prerequisite: Eco. 206 or consent of the
instructor.
432. Advanced Microeconomic Analysis (3)
A survey of methods of decision-making at the micro-
economic level utilizing concepts developed in price theory
and econometrics. Prerequisite: Eco. 206 or equivalent.
435. Advanced Topics in Microeconomics (3)
Topics in resource allocation and price determination.
Theories of choice of consumers, firms, and resource owners
under monopoly, monopsony, competition, and alternative
market forms. Prerequisite: Eco. 432 or equivalent and con-
sent of the instructor.
126 Economics
436. Advanced Topics in Macroeconomics (3)
Theory of employment, income, and growth. Role of money
in theory of output. Policies for economic stability and
growth. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
437. Labor Economics (3)
The economic environment of labor and industrial relations
with some emphasis on current research involving theoretical
and empirical analyses of labor markets. Prerequisite: Eco.
335 or Eco. 338 or equivalent.
438. Labor-Management Administration (3)
A study of the administration of the relationship between
management and the labor force both where that relationship
is governed by a formal agreement and where it is not. The
concepts underlying the substantive provisions of labor agree-
ments are analyzed. The problem of agreement making and
the methods for peace keeping are subjected to critical
appraisal. Prerequisite: Eco. 335 or 338 or equivalent.
440. Regional Science-Metropolitan Analysis (3)
A study of the methodology of regional science with em-
phasis on metropolitan area analysis. A survey of the applica-
tions of this methodology to the economic problems of
regions and metropolitan areas.
442. Foreign Trade Management (3)
Current problems of foreign operations, including channels of
export in foreign markets, export and import financing,
foreign investments, policies of government and international
agencies as they affect foreign operations.
443. Soviet Economics (3)
The theory of central planning. Investment criteria in Soviet-
type economies. Repressed inflation and quantitative output
planning. Liberman's Economic Reforms. Prerequisite: Eco.
309 or consent of the instructor.
444. Banking and Monetary Policy (3)
Description and analysis of the U.S. monetary and banking
structure. The supply and demand for funds. Financial
markets. Central bank controls; monetary theory and policy.
Prerequisite: a course in money and banking.
445. International Economic Theory (3)
The theory of international economics, with emphasis on the
way in which general economic theory is applied to the prob-
lems and issues of international economics. Prerequisite: con-
sent of the instructor.
447. Systems of National Accounts (3)
A study of American National Accounts, relating the
theoretical analysis to actual and potential measurements;
also relation to National Accounts of other countries. Cover-
age includes national income, input-output, flow of funds,
national balance sheet and other systems of aggregation.
453. Index Numbers and Time Series Analysis (3)
Theory and construction of Index Numbers. Measurement
and analysis of irregular, seasonal, cyclical and secular com-
ponents. Exponential smoothing, distributed lags, and intro-
duction to spectral analysis.
454. Forecasting (3)
A study of the methods of business forecasting and its rela-
tion to planning with emphasis on the prediction of growth
and short-term movements. Prerequisite: Eco. 346 or
equivalent.
455. Econometric Methods (3)
Mathematical and statistical specification of economic
models. Statistical estimation and test of economic para-
meters in single and multiple equation models. Prediction and
test of structural changes. Prerequisites: background in statis-
tics and calculus.
456. Mathematical Economics (3)
Designed to provide an understanding of the way in which
various mathematical techniques are applied in the formula-
tion and development of economic concepts and theories.
The course may draw on theories of the consumer and of the
firm, the analysis of economic fluctuations and growth,
general equilibrium theory, and other areas of economics
where mathematical techniques have been found to be useful.
Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
461. Methodology in Theory and Research
Foundations of theory construction and empirical research in
economics and related subject matter. Theory, hypothesis
formation and empirical study in the business firm, organiza-
tions, industrial relations, and micro-macro research.
471. Special Topics (3)
An extended study of an approved topic in the field of eco-
nomics.
472. Special Topics (3)
Selected topics not covered in scheduled courses in the de-
partment. May be repeated for credit with the consent of the
chairman of the department.
475. Business Economics Seminar (3)
Independent research for M.S. in Business Economics
candidates.
490. Thesis in Economics (6)
Subjects for theses may be selected by consultation with
major advisor and approval of chairman of the department
and M.A. committee.
Economics 127
Education
Professors
John A. Stoops, Ed. II.. Dean
Glenn J. Christensen, Ph.D.. University Distinguished
Professor
Alfred J. Castaldi, Ed.D.
Andrew J. Edmiston, Ph.D.
John A. Mierzwa, Ed.D.
Norman H. Sam, Ed.D.
Merle W. Tate, Ed.D.
Associate Professors
Warren M. Davis, Ph.D.
Matthew W. Gaffncy, Ed.D.
Charles W. Guditus, Ed.D.
Joseph P. Render, Ed.D.
Robert L. Leight, Ed.D.
Paul VanReed Miller. Ph.D.
Estoy Reddin, Ed.D.
William B. Stafford, Ed.D.
Elvin G. Warfel, Ed.D.
Assistant Professors
Raymond Bell, Ed.D.
Mary A. Conahan, Ed.D.
Thomas Fleck, Jr., Ed.D.
Margaret C. Grandovic, Ed.D.
James G. Lutz, Ed.D.
David March, Ed.D.
ArtisJ.Palmo, Ed.D.
Robert R. Panos, Ph.D.
Dennis A. Pickering, Ed.D.
AJice D. Rinehart, Ed.D.
LeRoy J. Tuscher, Ph.D.
Nan Van Gieson, Ed.D.
Adjunct Professors
Nancy Larrick, Ed.D.
Margaret Melchior Seylar, M.A.
Instructors
David Barrett III, M.Mus.
Frederick Baus III, M.A.
Edward J. Crawford, B.A.
Glenny Dunbar, M.A.
Frederic L. Evans, M.Ed.
Dermot M. Garrett, B.Sc.Ed.
James J. Garrigan, M.A.
Audrey I . Gilmartin, B.S.
I ..ink J. Kidder III, M.Ed.
i irol I. Kinney, B.A.
Mary R. Kleinginna, M.S.Ed.
Paul F. Kr.i.n. M.A.T.
< !ret( hen H. Krasley, M.Ed.
Ella Jane Kunkle, B.A.
Thelma P. I ifland, M.Ed.
Beverly G. Miller, B.A.
John C. Northrup, M.Ed.
Lloyd C. Parker. B.A.
Ruth B. Parr, M.Ed.
Henry J. Schreitmueller, M.A.
Karol Strelecki, M.S.
Joseph Strickland, Jr., B.A.
Robert J. Szabo, M.Ed.
Harry A. Tachovsky, B.S.
Ann Tarola, M.Ed.
George VanDoren, M.A.
Gregory A. Zebrowski, B.S.
Lecturers
Roy C. Claypool, M.Ed.
Alexander L. Crosby, A.B.
George Douris, M.F.A.
James J. Fadule, Ed.D.
LibbyJ. Falk, Ed.D.
Richard W. Hartmann, Ed.D.
Paul Johnson, M.A.
Donald K. Kirts, Ed.D.
William W. Oswalt, Ed.D.
Henry W. Ray, Ed.D.
Richard C. Richardson, Ph.D.
Stephen A. Schafer, Ed.D.
Hilary B. Shuard, M.Sc.
Robert E. Wisser, Ed.D.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
211. Vocational Technical Education (3)
Historical and philosophical foundations. Characteristics of
vocational-technical schools and curricula. Role of school and
teacher in career development. Problems of vocational
choice. Relations with trades, industries, and labor organiza-
tion. Cooperative programs. Prerequisite: admission to certifi-
cation program in career education.
221. Procedures in Trade and Industrial Education (3)
Teaching techniques for trade and industrial subjects. Curri-
culum and evaluation as related to classroom methods. Stu-
dent demonstration and micro-teaching. Concurrent with
Educ. 321 Classroom Practice. Prerequisite: admission to
certification program. Summers only.
128 Education
311. Origins of Western Schools (3-6)
A study and travel seminar for experienced teachers. Empha-
sis is upon the nature and methods of Hellenistic and medi-
eval schools. Relevant traditions in language, art, and philoso-
phy are considered. Influences on American institutions are
shown. Undertaken in cooperation with selected European
universities. Summer session. Prerequisite: consent of the
instructor.
327. Occupational and Manpower Program Development (3)
Methods and standards used in study of manpower needs and
competency requirements. Interdependence of technologies,
trades, and professions. School and teacher responses to
change in business and industry. Labor organizations. Types
of manpower development programs and methods of devel-
opment. Prerequisite: admission to certification program in
career education.
313. Arts and Crafts for the Handicapped (3)
Study of various artistic media (arts, crafts, music, puppetry,
dramatics) which are helpful in promoting development of
handicapped individuals.
315. Teaching the Emotionally and Socially Maladjusted (3)
The nature and causes of emotional and social maladjust-
ment; methods of gaining insight into and modifying of
behavior; appropriate curriculum, methods, materials, and
available resources. Field observations required. Prerequisite:
admission to the special education program or consent of the
program director.
330. Study of the Individual (3-6)
Examinations of individual growth and development,
especially the patterns found in different subcultures. Prere-
quisite: consent of the program director.
331. Shop and Laboratory Management (3)
Systems and procedures for layout, organization, main-
tenance, inventory, and safety of school shops and labora-
tories. Issues in utilization and specialization. Instructional
methods. Relationship of shop practices to curricular objec-
tives and career standards. Prerequisite: admission to certifi-
cation program.
317. Teaching the Mentally Retarded (3)
Special needs of and vocational possibilities for retarded in-
dividuals; current educational practices, curriculum methods
of teaching; materials for promoting maximal social compe-
tency; available resources. Field observations. Prerequisite:
admission to the special education program or consent of the
program director.
319. Career Education for the Handicapped (3)
Promoting attitudes, work habits, and skills which enhance
employability of the handicapped; appraisal of methods for
matching individuals to jobs; job market for the handicapped;
various curricular and administrative designs. Prerequisite:
admission to the special education program or consent of the
program director.
321. Classroom Practice (3)
Experience in elementary and secondary classrooms as re-
lated to theories of child and adolescent development, class-
room didactics, and philosophies of education. Problem-
centered discussions. Prerequisite: consent of dean of School
of Education.
323. Intern Seminar (3)
For undergraduate students admitted to certification pro-
grams in career education only. For further details, see Educ.
429.
325. Intern Teaching (3-6)
For undergraduate students admitted to certification pro-
grams in career education only. For further details, see Educ.
428.
341. The Teacher in Social Restoration (3-6)
The functions of the teacher and the school in prevention
and remediation of anti-social behavior. Field work in re-
medial teaching and experience in social restoration institu-
tions. For the social restoration interns only.
343. The Disadvantaged Student (3)
Philosophical analyses of disadvantagement and relevant
educational theories. Applications and evaluations of special
methods and techniques. For teaching interns only.
351. Statistical Methods in Research (3)
The concept of sampling from populations is introduced.
Various ways of describing and condensing sample data and
drawing inferences about population characteristics are cover-
ed. A brief review of mathematics necessary for statistical
analysis is included. No special background in statistics is
presumed. Emphasis on concepts.
353. Reporting Professional Research (3)
Intensive study of and practice in the application of the prin-
ciples of written exposition to common forms of professional
reporting.
361. Curriculum Construction for Career Education (3)
Identification and clarification of goals and competencies.
Methods of curriculum organization. Development of curri-
culum resources. Providing for individual differences. Organi-
zing special experiences. Development of cooperative pro-
grams. Evaluating, recording, and reporting student progress.
Prerequisite: admission to certification program in career
education.
Education 129
'>si . i (hu.moii.il Systems and Information Processing (3)
introduction to the basic principles oi systems analysis, in-
formation processing, cost analysis, .mil conversion systems.
Emphasis to be placed upon the application of computers
and data processing to administration and instruction in basic
educational institutions.
iS3. Computer Assisted Instruction (3)
design and development of computer assisted instruc-
tional units. Students design, program, and test computer
assisted instructional units in one of several modes such as
drill, practice, tutorial, simulation. Instructional units will be
programmed in the BASIC language. Prerequisite: consent of
program director.
-107. Philosophical Foundations ol Education (3)
Com par. 1 1 n.' philosophical analysis ol educational .inns, prac-
tii es, and institutions. Major philosophical theorists whose
work has influenced educational thought from ancient times
to the present are studied.
•IOH. Comparative Education (3)
A survey of educational practices abroad including all pro-
grams from nursery to graduate education. Major emphasis is
placed upon systems of articulation, social foundations, legal
foundations, and structure in government. The nature and
purposes of the schools are considered with particular re-
ference to cultural patterns. Focus is also placed upon major
problems and trends.
$91-392. Workshop (3, 5, or 6)
Cooperative study of current educational problems. Designed
to provide elementary and secondary school teachers an op-
portunity to work at their own teaching levels and in their
own fields. Students will be limited to six credits during a
summer session but may register tor more than one workshop
provided there is no duplication in subject matter.
393. Instructional Media (3)
Study of principles underlying the use of graphic and sound
projection in teaching. Utilization of commercial, student,
and teacher made materials. Applications of new instruction-
al media such as television, teaching machines, and computer
assisted instruction to classroom teaching.
For Graduates
400. Psychological Foundations of Education (3)
Study and practice of methods involved in making a psycho-
logical analysis of pupils or classroom situations particularly
in relation to school problems.
401. Sociological Foundations of Education (3)
Analysis of the American school as a social institution, its
cultural heritage, its purposes and processes in relation to
social change and educational leadership. Examination of the
school's role in socialization and its responsibilities for rele-
vance to social issues and to subcultural needs.
403. Teaching in the Two-Year College (3)
Major theories of teaching, learning, and measurement are
studied with particular reference to the problems of instruc-
tion in the two-year college. The characteristics of students in
two-year colleges are examined. Participants undertake re-
search in the field.
406. Historical Foundations of Education (3)
The developments of primary, secondary, and higher educa-
tion; the aims, curricula, methods, and systems of education
from early times to the present, in relation to the social con-
ditions and processes.
409. The Two-Ycar College (3)
Historical and philosophical analysis of the two-year college
as an institutional mode in American higher education. The
unique nature of the two-year college is considered in rela-
tion to its service functions and the values in American higher
education. Participants undertake research in the field.
410. Structure and Syntax of the Academic Disciplines (3)
Professors from other departments of the University are pre-
sented in discussions coordinated by the School of Educa-
tion. The patterns which organize and identify the academic
disciplines are emphasized. Study is given the nature and
significance of the conceptual structures which guide inquiry
or research in certain major fields of scholarship. Implications
tor planning of curricula and preparations of teaching
materials are considered.
411. Personality and Adjustment (3)
Theories of personality and adjustment are examined with
emphasis on the adjustment processes in an educational set-
ting. Prerequisite: consent of the program director.
412. Individual Assessment and Interviewing (3)
Various assessment procedures used in school settings includ-
ing interviewing, observational techniques, and individual
psychological testing. Prerequisite: consent of program
director.
413. Theories of Psychological Counseling (3)
Analysis and synthesis of concepts drawn from counseling
theorists. The research and current trends in counseling con-
cerning educational, social, and vocational problems are
studied. Prerequisite: admission to program in counselor
education.
414. Child Development (3)
A study of physical, intellectual, emotional, and social
aspects of child development as they relate to the elementary
schools.
130 Education
416. Classroom Didactics (3-6)
Initial preparation of interns for classroom teaching. Second-
ary interns are trained in special methods of subject fields
and the reading problems of secondary students,. Elementary
interns study the place of subjects in the elementary school.
Open to interns only.
418. Values and Educational Purpose (3)
Modes of philosophical analysis used in justification of educa-
tional purposes. The presence of metaphysical, epistemo-
logical, and metaethical premises in educational opinion.
Canons of rational inquiry as applied to educational deci-
sions. Manifestations of values in contemporary school curri-
cula. Prerequisite: Educ. 407.
422. Education of Exceptional Children (3)
Curriculum, methods ot instruction, and materials for indi-
viduals who differ markedly from the normal intellectually,
physically, emotionally, or socially; the nature and causes of
these differences; available resources. Field trips; direct work
with exceptional encouraged.
423. Diagnostic and Remedial Teaching (3)
The role of the classroom teacher as a diagnostician of correc-
tive learning difficulties. Emphasis is placed on the nature
and methods of educational diagnosis and the specifics of
diagnostic teaching important to daily classroom instruction
at all levels. Opportunities are offered tor experiences in
diagnosis and program prescription.
424. Linguistics in Education (3)
Emphasis on the nature of language, phonetic applications,
and the relationships of linguistics to instruction in the langu-
age arts.
425. The Diagnosis and Adjustment of Reading Difficulties
(3)
A survey of problems in diagnosing and adjusting reading
difficulties. The psychology of reading as related to learning
difficulties; the measurement and diagnosis of reading diffi-
culties; the development of informal tests for identifying
reading difficulties; materials for corrective and/or remedial
instruction. Prerequisite: Educ. 431 or consent of instructor.
426. Independent Study and Research (3-15)
Individual or small group study in the field of specialization.
Approved and supervised by the major advisor. Not more
than six credits may be earned in a semester.
427. Participation in Teaching (3)
Study, directed observation of, and initial practice in the
various phases of teaching in a campus laboratory-demonstra-
tion school or in elementary and secondary schools in the
area.
428. Intern Teaching (3-6)
Intensive practice in the application of the principles of
teaching. Each intern is appointed to a full-time teaching
position for one or two semesters. Supervision is provided
both by the employing school district or community college
and by the University. Prerequisite: Educ. 427.
429. Intern Teaching Seminar (3)
Critical analysis and discussion of classroom instructional
practices. Discussion and illustration will be based on the
experiences of participants as they engage in intern teaching.
Education 428 required concurrently.
431. Developmental Reading (3)
Introductory course spanning the elementary and secondary
levels. Emphasis on the history of reading instruction, basic
premises in reading, the sequence of language development,
directed reading activities and reading in content areas.
434. Mathematics in Elementary Education (3)
435. Social Studies in Elementary Education (3)
436. Science in Elementary Education (3)
437. Language Development of Children (3)
The nature of language and its relation to the development of
communication skills. Critical analysis of related research.
Implications for the elementary school.
438. Fine Arts in Elementary Education (3)
443. Elementary School Administration (3)
The major problem of organization and administration of
elementary schools; types of organization, pupil promotion,
time allotment, service agencies, and plant and equipment.
Required for a principal's certificate.
444. The Elementary School Curriculum (3)
Problems of curriculum development in the first six grades;
subject matter placement, program making for difficult types
of schools, regular vs. special subjects, articulation, and simi-
lar problems.
446. Learning Disabilities (3-6)
Types of specific learning disabilities and their effects on
development and learning; physiological basis of learning and
general learning theory; various theoretical approaches; diag-
nostic and remedial procedures. Can be repeated for credit as
a 90-hour practicum with the consent of the program
director.
447. Seminar in Reading Research (3)
An advanced course dealing with critical appraisal and discus-
sion of classical and current studies in reading.
Education 131
-!•('). children's l iicr.it urc m Reading Instruction
isidcration of the role of liior.it urc in the instructional
program of ilu- elementary schools. Emphasis is given the use
of trade hooks for individual instruction in reading.
153. Secondary School administration (3)
The major problems of organization and administration of
secondary schools; program ot studies, teaching Staff, pupil
personnel, plant and equipment, and community relation-
ships. Required for a principal's certificate.
454. The Secondary School Curriculum (3)
Methods of study of curriculum problems, selection of sub-
ject matter in various fields, principles of program construc-
tion, and similar problems.
455. Statistics 1 (3)
Reduction and description of data. Characteristics of a fre-
quency distribution. Score transformations. Bivariate linear
correlation and regression. Statistical inference: tests of hy-
potheses and estimation of parameters, errors of inference
and their control, power of a statistical test. Uses of the
normal, t and chi-square sampling distributions.
456. Statistics II (3)
Extended applications of the binomial, normal, r, and chi-
square sampling distributions. The F distribution. One-way
and factorial analysis of variance and covariance. Multiple
and partial linear correlation and regression. Application of
packaged programs for computer analysis of data. Prerequi-
site: Educ. 455 or consent of the program director.
457. Statistics III (3)
Extensions of the analysis of variance and covariance to the
complex designs. Topics include: completely randomized,
factorial, incomplete factorial, randomized blocks, nested,
and repeated measures designs. Emphasis on experimental
design and application of packaged programs for computer
analysis of data. Prerequisite: consent of the program
director.
458. Computer Applications (3)
Writing and testing computer programs and the use and
adaptation of packaged programs; applications in behavioral
research and in administration and instruction. Prerequisite:
Educ. 456 or 459.
459. Methods of Statistical Inference and Research Design
(3)
Review of descriptive statistics; multiple correlation and re-
gression; tests of inference; analysis of variance and covari-
ance; application of packaged programs for computer analysis
of data. Prerequisite: Educ. 351 or 455, or consent of the
instructor.
160. c.i on p ( , muscling and (iroup I'roi esses (3)
Study oi group dynamics through critical review ol theories,
Emphasis on group processes as reined to counseling and
guidance through class participation and demonstration. Pre-
requisite: Educ. 483 previously or concurrently.
463. Public School Administration (3)
A systematic treatment of the problems of administration,
local, state and national. The newer developments which arc
modifying educational administration; state authorization
and organization, the board of education, the superintendent
of schools, personnel management, business administration,
financial support, and public relations.
464. Foundations of Curriculum Construction (3)
Principles of curriculum construction which underlie the
reorganization of the program of studies for elementary and
secondary schools; origin and background of the curriculum;
methods of organization; curriculum planning and develop-
ment; and pertinent applications. K-12.
465. Administration of Higher Education (3)
Analysis of legal foundations, administrative controls, and
operational patterns of the various types of higher institu-
tions with special emphasis on the two-year college. Coverage
of traditions which establish duties, responsibilities, and
rights of faculty, administration, and board of control in
American colleges and universities.
466. Supervision of Instruction (3)
Analysis of the principles underlying the organization and
supervision of instruction; application to specific teaching
situations. No lines will be drawn between the elementary
and the secondary school.
468. Administration of Student Service in Higher Education
(3)
Study of the broad scope of the administration of student
services in higher education including welfare functions, con-
trol functions, activities functions, and teaching functions.
Emphasis to be placed upon matter of organization and
operation, the place of these patterns in the total operation
of the institution, and the administrator's role in the develop-
ment and implementation of appropriate policies and prac-
tices affecting students.
469. Practicum in Supervision of Reading Programs (3-6)
For candidates for supervisor's certificate in reading. An over-
view of the organization of the instructional program and the
specific duties involved in the supervisory processes in,
reading programs. Students will observe and participate in
supervisory activities. If taken as a three-hour course, may be
repeated for a maximum of six credits.
132 Education
470. Multivariate Analysis (3)
Topics include fundamentals of: matrix algebra, multinormal
sampling distribution, multivariate tests of significance and
interval estimation, multivariate analysis of variance and co-
variance, discriminant analysis, classification problems,
canonical correlation, introduction to factor analysis. Em-
phasis in on application. Prerequisite: Educ. 455 and Educ.
456 or consent ot program director.
471. Evaluation in Education (3)
Primarily for teachers and counselors. Construction and
evaluation of the teacher-made test. Selection of published
tests and interpretation of individual and group results. Use
and misuse of tests in assessing achievement.
472. Psychometric Theory (3)
Primarily for specialists in measurements and research.
Theory of measurement as applied to various kinds of tests
and scales. Item analysis: pre-testing, scaling and equating;
errors of measurement; reliability and validity; prediction;
factor analysis in test development. Prerequisite: Educ. 455
or permission of the instructor.
473. Advanced Personnel Seminar
An overview of industrial labor relations as a background for
a more detailed study of the movement toward the organiza-
tion of public employees, with special reference to implica-
tions for public school administrators; current developments:
the meaning and scope of negotiations, the development of
grievance procedures, negotiation agreements, and the nego-
tiation process. Prerequisites: Educ. 463, Educ. 478.
474. Seminar in School Building (3)
475. Seminar in Business Management (3)
Systems designed to support educational decision-making.
Analysis of conceptual designs for planning-programming-
budgeting and evaluation systems. (PPBS).
476. Seminar in School Finance (3)
Concepts of school finance including intergovernmental fiscal
relations, state grants-in-aid, taxation, municipal borrowing,
long term capital outlay programs, etc. An examination of
school business office operations is included.
477. Seminar in School-Community Relations (3)
478. Seminar in School Personnel Problems (3)
Overview of the personnel function in educational institu-
tions. Emphasis upon emerging trends in staff planning, re-
cruitment, selection, assignment, and orientation, as well as
tenure, grievances, and related matters.
479. Seminar in School Law (3)
The effect of school law upon the administration of public
school systems, including analysis and synthesis of judicial
interpretations of the constitutions, statutes, rules, regula-
tions, and common law relating to educational issues.
480. Elementary School Guidance (3)
Study of child development as related to guidance in elemen-
tary schools. Analysis of the roles of counselors, teachers,
parents, and other specialists and their influence upon the
child. Prerequisite: Educ. 482 and consent of the instructor.
481. Assessment in School Psychology (3-6)
Assessment processes used in school psychology. Practice in
the administration of tests and preparation of school psycho-
logical reports is emphasized. Prerequisite: admission to pro-
gram in school psychology.
482. Philosophy and Principles of Guidance (3)
Introduction of guidance processes in the elementary and
secondary schools and higher education. Theoretical founda-
tions, principles, and ethics of guidance are considered to-
gether with the functions, services, and organization of a
guidance program.
483. Counseling (3)
Intensive examination of theories and techniques of counsel-
ing. Students will conduct counseling interviews. Prerequi-
site: admission to program in counselor education.
484. Career Development (3)
Study of the process of selecting and pursuing educational
and vocational goals with an emphasis upon decision-making.
Career development is examined as a facet of general human
development. Evaluating and using occupational, educational,
and related information.
485. Elementary School Principal's Clinic (3-6)
486. Secondary School Principal's Clinic (3-6)
487. Counseling and School Psychology Clinic (3-12)
488. School Superintendent's Clinic (3-6)
489. Reading Specialists Clinic (3-12)
491-492. Advanced Seminars in Education (3)
493. Research (3)
Basic principles of research and techniques of gathering and
analyzing data. Exploration and comparison of various ways
of bringing evidence to bear on the identification and solu-
tion of educational problems. Emphasis on critical reviews of
research reports from various fields and representing various
methodologies. A research report is required. Recommended
to be taken before approval for master's candidacy.
494. Field Work (3-6)
Identification of significant problem (s) in an educational
environment, review of the literature, and development of
appropriate research plans. No more than 3 credits may be
earned in a semester.
Education 133
195. i ducational Research Methodology (.\)
i 01 spei ialists in measurements and research. Study ol ex-
perimental and quasi-experimental designs, methods ol data
collection, and instrumentation appropriate for use in educa-
tional settings.
Electrical Engineering
196. Seminar in Research ( SJ
For doctoral students. Researeli design and application to
various kinds ol" educational problems; data collection and
analysis. Seminar will include criticism and evaluation of
student proposals and related research. May be repeated for a
maximum of nine credits.
498. Internship (3-9)
Designed to give advanced students an opportunity to obtain
practical experience in selected school systems. Conference
hours for students and staff members will be devoted to dis-
cussion of work and problems encountered in the schools.
Students will be sectioned as follows: Section A, elementary
school principals; Section B, secondary school principals;
Section C, guidance counselors; Section D, superintendents of
schools: Section E, reading specialists; and Section F, special-
ists in measurements and research.
Professors
Alfred Kriss Susskind, S.M., Chairman
John |. Karakash, D.Eng., Distinguished Professor and Dean
oj tin- College of Engineering
Walter Emil Dahlke, Ph.D.
Nikolai Eberhardt, Ph.D.
Arthur Irving Larky. Ph.D.
Associate Professors
William Avon Barrett, Ph.D.
Bruce Dale Fritchman, Ph.D.
Carl Sanford Holzinger. Ph.D.
Daniel Leenov, Ph.D.
John George Ondria, Ph.D.
Assistant Proicssors
Frank H. Hielscher, Ph.D.
Peggy Anne Ota, Ph.D.
Kenneth Kai-Ming Tzeng, Ph.D.
Instructors
Hans R. Gnerlich, M.S.
Donald Lee Talhelm, M.S.
Lecturers
Francis A. Long, B.S., E.E.
John K. Redmon, M.S.
The electrical engineering curriculum has been formulated to
provide a foundation for competence and growth in the
many challenging areas in electrical engineering. These in-
clude electronic devices, communication, information and
computing systems, control systems, electronic instrumenta-
tion, and electrical power systems. In addition, the under-
graduate program can also serve as a stepping stone into such
related areas as bioengineering, computer science, system
engineering, or management science.
An undergraduate will eventually determine that his in-
terests lie in one or two directions— such as research, develop-
ment, design, or management. His ultimate success will de-
pend upon the depth and breadth of his background, the
effectiveness with which he can utilize his knowledge, and
the keenness with which he can analyze and solve problems.
This is one basic assumption upon which the four-year curri-
culum is based.
The other basic assumption is that the variety of activities
134 Electrical Engineering
in which modern electrical engineers are engaged will con-
tinue to remain large, and so an appropriate curriculum must
provide opportunity for mobility of the individual. Finally,
the undergraduate curriculum reflects the awareness that it
should concentrate on broad fundamentals and not on the
details of current engineering practice.
Subjects in physics and mathematics form one block of
courses in the electrical engineering curriculum, because no
matter which direction the individual will follow, a founda-
tion in the basic sciences and mathematics will serve him
well. Within electrical engineering, the physical sciences pro-
vide a foundation for theoretical and experimental studies of
devices, such as transistors, microwave components, and
energy converters. Mathematics provides the basis for the
analytical study of device models and the tools for the analy-
sis, design and exploitation of systems such as computers,
communication networks, and information or control sys-
tems.
There are two other areas outside of electrical engineering
which are a required part of the curriculum. The first of these
is the general studies program, common to all engineering
curricula at the University. The other area consists of related
engineering sciences, and deals with mechanics, thermody-
namics, and materials.
The required courses in electrical engineering contain the
fundamentals of linear circuits and systems, electronic cir-
cuits, signal theory, computer hardware and software,
physical electronics, electromagnetic theory, and energy con-
version. Some of these courses include laboratory work; two
upper-level laboratory subjects are also required.
The electives in the senior year provide opportunity for
tailoring the individual's program according to his interests
and goals. Some will use the electives for acquiring additional
background in preparation for graduate study, which has
become so important as a consequence of the growth in the
intellectual content of engineering and science. Others will
select terminal courses in preparation for entry into industry
at the completion of the four -year program. Students are free
to select from courses offered by other departments, and are
encouraged to do so whenever it serves their individual needs.
In this manner, they can prepare themselves for activities
which straddle departmental boundaries, or for entry into
professional schools such as medicine or management. For
example, a program aimed toward the computing sciences
might include, in addition to subjects offered in the electrical
engineering department, courses taught by the division of
information science and the department of mathematics.
Individually tailored programs of this nature should be plan-
ned through conference with a department advisor. Early
planning can do much to maximize benefits.
Recommended Sequence of Courses
Freshman Year (see page 45)
Sophomore Year, First Semester (16 credit hours)
EE 11 Introduction to Computer Engineering (3)
Math 23 Analytical Geometry & Calculus III (4)
Phys 21, 22 Introductory Physics II & Lab (5)
Eco 1 Economics (4)
Sophomore Year, Second Semester (1 7 credit hours)
EE 20 Introduction to Circuit Theory (4)
Math 205 Linear Methods (3)
Phys 31 Introduction to Quantum Mechanics (3)
Mech 103 Principles of Mechanics (4)
GS Requirement (3)
Junior Year, First Semester (14-17 credit hours)
EE 104 Linear Systems & Signals (4)
EE 105 Electronic Circuits (4)
Math 231 Statistical Inference
or
Math 309 Theory of Probability (3)
GS Requirement (3)
Elective (0-3)
Junior Year, Second Semester (17 credit hours)
EE 103
EE 106
EE 231
EE 142
Summer
EE 100
Physical Electronics (3)
Electromechanics & Machines (3)
Electric & Magnetic Fields (3)
Junior Lab (2)
Approved Elective (3)
Elective (3)
Industrial Employment
Senior Year, First Semester (15-18 credit hours)
EE 111 Proseminar (1)
EE 151 Senior Lab I (2)
EE 245 Electromagnetic Theory (3)
Approved Electives (6)
Elective (0-3)
GS Requirement (3)
Senior Year, Second Semester (18 credit hours)
Approved Electives (12)
Elective (3)
GS Requirement (3)
Note: the lower number of credit hours represents the mini-
mum load required to meet the graduation requirement; the
higher number is the normal semester load.
Approved electives are subjects predominantly in the
areas of science and technology. They are not restricted to
offerings in the department of electrical engineering. Stu-
dents must choose at least one elective in mathematics and at
least one elective in materials, thermodynamics, fluid
mechanics, or physical chemistry.
Electrical Engineering 135
ll. Introduction to Computei Engineering (3)
Introduction to computer-system organization, data struc-
tures, and the basic concepts behind user oriented languages.
Machine structure; memory organization and its allocation
for data aggregates; assembly language; number representa-
tion and arithmetic. Fundamental types of programming
statements and program structure. Functions and procedures.
Iteration and recursion. Prerequisite: Engr. 1 or equivalent
experience in programming.
.20. Introductory Circuit Theory (4)
Introduction to methods for analyzing lumped circuits con-
taining linear and nonlinear, time-invariant and time-varying,
active and passive elements. Topics include: circuit elements,
formulation of differential equations, mesh and node analy-
sis, state equations, network functions, natural frequencies,
complete response calculations, pole-zero analysis, network
theorems. Includes a weekly laboratory and/or problem-
solving session. Prerequisite: Math. 23.
100. Summer Work
Students are expected to spend at least eight weeks getting
experience in some industrial organization, normally during
the vacation following the junior year. A written report on
the experience gained therein is due on or before November
1.
106. i lectromechanics and Machines (3}
pies ot electro magnet ism and their application in elec-
troinecli.illii.il ilevue-.. An.ilv.i-. and de-,igii il tr .in:. I or mcl's,
solenoidai actuators, multi-phase power systems, AC and DC
rotating machinery, and machine control. Prerequisite: E.E.
20.
111. Electrical Engineering Proseminar (1)
A weekly seminar to acquaint students with current topics in
electrical engineering. Students prepare and present oral and
written reports which are judged on skill of presentation and
technical content. Prerequisite: senior standing.
142. Junior Lab (2)
Experimental work based on E.E. 103, 104, 105, and 106
intended to strengthen proficiency in these fields. Two
three-hour laboratory sessions per week. Prerequisite: junior
standing.
151. Senior Laboratory I (2)
Laboratory projects in any phase of electrical engineering,
frequently in the areas of digital systems, communications,
instrumentation, and electronic circuits. Projects are selected
by the student from topics suggested by the students, staff,
or industrial concerns. Two three-hour sessions per week.
Prerequisite: senior standing.
103. Physical Electronics (3)
Energy levels and band theory. Introduction to quantum
statistics; electron emission and photoelectric effect; electron
ballistics and applications. Conduction in metals and semi-
conductors; theory of p-n junctions and transistors; static and
dynamic characteristics; equivalent circuits. Prerequisite:
Phys. 31.
104. Linear Systems and Signals (4)
Transform theory, including continuous and discrete Fourier
transforms, fast Fourier transform, bilateral and unilateral
Laplace transforms, Hilbert transform and analytic signals.
Application of transforms to the solution of linear system
problems. Introductory treatment of signal theory including
modulation, correlation and filtering. Sampling theorems and
their application to digital signal processing. Prerequisite:
E.E. 20.
105. Electronic Circuits (4)
Introduction to methods for analyzing and designing circuits
containing semiconductor devices such as diodes, bipolar
transistors, and field-effect transistors for both small and
large-signal applications. Topics include operating-point stabi-
lization, basic amplifier configurations, power relationships,
graphical and mathematical analysis techniques, multistage
amplifiers and feedback. Includes a weekly laboratory. Prere-
quisite: E.E. 20.
152. Senior Laboratory II (2)
Two choices open, each occupying two three-hour sessions
per week.
(1) Project laboratory. Similar to E.E. 151.
(2) Microwave laboratory. Introduction to the standard
techniques of measurement in the microwave range, such as
measurement of impedance with the slotted line and the
hybrid tee; two-port parameters after Dechamps and Weiss-
floch; attenuation by substitution and heterodyning. Prere-
quisite: E.E. 346 previously or concurrently.
160. Electrical Circuits and Apparatus (3)
Survey subject for students not majoring in electrical engi-
neering. Elementary network theory. Behavior of simple
linear networks. Principles of semiconductor devices and
their use in functional circuits. Electromechanical energy
conversion. Selected applications. Prerequisites: Math. 23 and
Phys. 21.
161. Electrical Problems (1)
A weekly recitation period intended to supplement the
material in E.E. 160 lectures and to discuss homework assign-
ments. Prerequisite: E.E. 160 concurrently.
162. Electrical Laboratory (1)
Experiments on circuits, machines, and electronic devices.
Prerequisite: E.E. 160 concurrently.
136 Electrical Engineering
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
The following courses are departmental electives with the
exception of E.E. 231 and E.E. 245.
201. Computer Architecture (3)
Digital building blocks, conventional computer structure and
information flow. Mechanization of arithmetic, storage, and
control functions. Input-output systems and controllers.
Priority interrupt, direct memory access and other overlap-
ping techniques. Architecture of small ("mini") computers;
key features of large ("maxi") machines. Digital design simu-
lation. Prerequisites: E.E. 11 or Math. 105; E.E. 241 pre-
viously or concurrently.
205. Pulse and Digital Circuits (3)
Analysis of functional circuits: wave shapers, multivibrators,
logic circuits, pulse and timing generators. Models of semi-
conductor devices. Methods of nonlinear analysis and worst-
case design. Feedback and negative resistance. Prerequisite:
E.E. 105.
212. Control Systems (3)
Introduction to feedback control. Dynamic analysis of linear
feedback systems in the time and frequency domain, with
emphasis on stability and steady-state accuracy. Major analy-
tical tools: signal-flow graphs, root-locus method, Nyquist
plot, Bode analysis. Cascade compensation techniques. Intro-
duction to sampled data and state-variable concepts. Prere-
quisite: E.E. 104.
231. Electric and Magnetic Fields (3)
Fundamentals of static electric and magnetic fields. Laplace's
equation. Polarizability of matter. Boundary conditions. Con-
formal mapping. Numerical methods in potential theory.
Prerequisite: junior standing.
233. Power System Analysis I (3)
Determination of transmission line constants; transmission
line equations. General circuit constants. Regulation efficiency.
Symmetrical components. System faults. Sequence impe-
dances of transmission lines; transformer banks; metering.
Prerequisite: E.E. 106.
234. Power System Analysis II (3)
Steady state and transient power limits of transmission sys-
tems; electromechanical characteristics of electrical machines
and networks. Prerequisite: E.E. 233.
241. Switching Theory and Logic Design (3)
Boolean algebra and its application to networks with bivalued
signals. Function simplification and design of combinational
logic. Sequential machines and their realization in pulse and
level circuits. Design of simple digital systems.
244. Communication Networks (3)
Introductory theory of two-terminal and four-terminal net-
work synthesis. Transmission lines as network elements. Ana-
log and digital filter theory. Prerequisites: E.E. 104 and 105.
245. Electromagnetic Theory (3)
Maxwell's equations. Wave solutions in rectangular and cylin-
drical coordinate systems. Retarded potentials. Poynting's
theorem. Lossy and lossless isotropic media. Skin effect.
Transmission lines, waveguides, and resonant cavities. Prere-
quisite: E.E. 231.
300. Apprentice Teaching in E.E.
(1-3)
307. Transistor Circuit Application (3)
Review of static and dynamic behavior of p-n junctions.
Transistor physical electronics, volt-ampere characteristics,
and circuit models. Dependence of circuit-model parameters
on structure and operating conditions. Tuned amplifiers,
feedback amplifiers, and oscillators. Prerequisite: E.E. 105.
308. Transistor Theory (3)
Large-signal theory of p-n junction devices. Approximate
large-signal models for analysis of switching, including Linvill,
Ebers-Moll, and charge-control models. Deviations from low-
level models at high injection levels. Theory of field-effect
transistors and large-signal models. Prerequisite: E.E. 103.
311. Compiler Design (3)
Principles of artificial language description and design. Sen-
tence parsing techniques, including operator-precedence,
bounded-context and syntax-directed recognizer schemes.
The semantic problem as it relates to interpreters and compi-
lers. Recent developments, including dynamic storage alloca-
tion, table grammars, code optimization, compiler-writing
languages. Prerequisite: consent ot instructor.
31 5. Principles of Computer Software (3)
Machine, assembly and macro language concepts. Study of
assemblers, macro processors, and loaders, and techniques for
their construction. Introduction to operating systems as time
permits. Prerequisite: E.E. 11 or consent of department
chairman.
317. (I.S. 317, Math. 317) Analytical Methods for Informa-
tion Sciences (3)
Series of topics in discrete mathematics chosen for their ap-
plicability to computer science, coding theory, and informa-
tion retrieval. Sets; binary relations; lattices; Boolean algebras
and application to logic design; semigroups and relevance to
automata; groups and application to coding; fields and rele-
vance to circuits and codes; graphs and application to file
searching. Prerequisite: senior standing or consent of depart-
ment chairman.
Electrical Engineering 137
321. Current l opi< s in Magnetics (3)
lies d iwn from current areas of magneci< device thi
and application, such .is ortho-ferrite bubbles, magneto-
optics, magnetic thin films, ferrites, and permanent magnets.
Text material taken primarily from the current literature,
with emphasis on computer applications. No specialized
background assumed. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
.VI 2. Communication Theory (3)
Theory and application of analog and digital modulation.
Sampling theory with application to analog-to-digital and
digital-to-analog conversion techniques. Time and frequency
division multiplexing. Introduction to random processes in-
cluding filtering and noise problems. Introduction to statisti-
cal communication theory with primary emphasis on
optimum receiver principles. Prerequisites: E.E. 104 and
Math. 309 or 231.
346. Microwave Circuits and Techniques (3)
Impedance transformation along waveguides. Matching tech-
niques. Resonant cavities as circuit elements. Scattering and
transfer matrices. Periodic structures. Selected microwave
devices. Basic techniques of microwave measurements. Prere-
quisite: E.E. 245.
350. Special Topics (3)
Selected topics in the field of electrical engineering not in-
cluded in other courses.
351. Microelectronics (3)
Technology ot semiconductor devices and of monolithic inte-
grated circuits, including crystal growth and doping, phase
diagrams, diffusion, epitaxy, thermal oxidation and oxide
masking, photolithography, thin film formation. Effects of
these processes on the design of transistors and integrated
circuits. Prerequisite: E.E. 103 or consent of department
chairman.
For Graduates
Graduate study leading to the M.S. and Ph.D. degrees is avail-
able in the electrical engineering department. Neither of the
advanced degree programs has a fixed curriculum, and
courses are selected by the individual in consultation with his
advisors.
In addition to the uniform requirements set forth by the
graduate school, the electrical engineering department re-
quires the submission of a satisfactory thesis for the master's
degree, unless the candidate is able to demonstrate other
research training.
Subject to approval by departmental advisors, graduate
degree programs frequently include as part of the "major"
courses offered by other departments. This is particularly
appropriate in those areas where courses in physics and
mathematics provide a foundation for advanced work.
Students in the Ph.D. program are required to take the
qualifying examination within one year after obtaining the
master's degree. This examination tests competence in
general areas of electrical engineering. A second examination
m the candidate's area ol specialization is taken at some nine
up to the last year of his program. Competence in a foreign
language is not i required part ol the Ph.D. program in elec-
tric al engineering.
Members ol the department are particularly interested in
advanced work in the following areas: semiconductor devices:
microwave components and circuits; magnetic memory
devices; computer languages; computer hardware and soft-
ware systems; communications and decision theory; pattern
recognition; algebraic coding theory; switching theory and
logical design.
The laboratories of the electrical engineering department
are located primarily in the James Ward Packard Laboratory
of electrical and mechanical engineering. Facilities for experi-
mental work in electronics and communication cover the
spectrum through microwave frequencies. Special research
facilities, including a shielded room, are available for the
study of devices, noise in semiconductor networks, and digi-
tal functions. A laboratory with ultra-high vacuum equip-
ment is available for the investigation of semiconductor sur-
faces and for the preparation of special devices. There are
also facilities for oxidation, diffusion, photolithography,
metallization, and wire bonding. The department has a PDP-8
minicomputer and a variety of ancillary building blocks.
401. Digital Systems (3)
Principles of machine organization; macro- and micro-pro-
gramming. Modern concepts and practices in logical design.
403. Design of Executive Systems (3)
Hardware and software desiderata for executive (operating)
systems in both batch and interactive applications. Brief sur-
vey of contemporary systems. Detailed treatment of elements
of executive systems, such as protection mechanisms, paging
and segmentation, swapping, I/O and file systems, scheduling,
fault handling, crash recovery. Techniques for actual con-
struction of an executive system will be discussed as time
permits.
407. Linear and Nonlinear Optics (3)
Gaussian beams. Optical waveguides and resonators. Intro-
duction to laser physics. Crystal optics with attention to non-
linear effects. Harmonic and subharmonic generation. Para-
metric amplifications. Brillouin and Raman scattering.
Classical diffraction theory. Holography with applications.
409. Advanced Electromagnetic Theory (3)
Maxwell's equations in the scope of modern physics. Wave
propagation in anisotropic and gyrotropic media. Introduc-
tion to nonlinear media. Atmospheric propagation and scat-
tering. Selected topics from antenna theory.
410. Electronics of Microwave Tubes and Bulk
Semiconductors (3)
Ballistic theory of transit-time tubes. Llewellyn-Peterson
equations. Free space-charge waves and their interaction with
slow wave structures. Transit-time effects and microwave
generation in bulk semiconductors.
138 Electrical Engineering
411. Information Theory I (3)
Introduction to information theory. Topics covered include:
development ot information measures for discrete and con-
tinuous spaces, study of discrete-stochastic information
sources, derivation of noiseless coding theorems, investigation
of discrete and continuous memoryless channels, develop-
ment of noisy channel coding theorems.
412. Information Theory II (3)
Channel encoding and decoding problems and development
of random coding bounds. Study of sources and channels
with memory including the development of channel models
and coding theorems. Investigation of source coding with a
fidelity criterion. Prerequisite: E.E. 411.
413. Active Networks (3)
Synthesis of active networks to prescribed frequency charac-
teristics. Stability and realizability criteria. Parameter drift
effects.
415. Pattern Classification Theory and Applications I (3)
Estimation and classification techniques useful in communi-
cation, control, and pattern recognition. Simple decision
theory; likelihood ratios, estimation. Bayesian estimation and
reproducing densities. Discriminant functions; measures of
distance and information. Error-correcting algorithms and
stochastic approximation. Examples of the design of fixed
and adaptive filters, detectors, and pattern classifiers.
416. Pattern Classification Theory and Applications II (3)
Compound decision theory. Learning without a teacher;
Markovian decision processes. Cluster analysis; linguistic
models for pattern analysis and description; feature selection.
State of art of practical pattern recognition systems. Exam-
ples from optical character recognition, adaptive communica-
tion and control systems, and picture processing by compu-
ter. Prerequisite: E.E. 415.
425. Power System Analysis I (3-6)
Distribution-system concepts and components: transformers;
protective devices; voltage control; optimum loading; ground-
ing. Protective relaying: operating principles and system cal-
culations including fault calculations using symmetrical com-
ponents. Surge phenomena: traveling-wave theory; ground-
ing; surge-reduction design and arrester application; insula-
tion coordination. Economics of power systems: analysis and
evaluation of financial structure; rate of return; rate
structures; depreciation.
426. Power System Analysis II (3-6)
Analysis of synchronous machines. Steady-state and transient
modes of operation; per unit representation; d-q equations;
balanced and unbalanced short-circuit stability; saturation.
Stability criteria of power systems. State functions and state
variables; system modelling; computer techniques; state-of-
the-art analysis techniques; dynamic stability.
431. Topics in Switching Theory (3)
Emphasis on structural concepts motivated by recent ad-
vances in integrated circuit technology. Major topics include:
logical completeness, error detection and location; decompo-
sition techniques; synthesis with assumed network forms;
fault masking in switching circuits. Prerequisite: E.E. 241 or
equivalent.
432. Finite State Machines (3)
Description of sequential behavior; Gedanken experiments;
error control; information loss-lessness, iterative systems.
Synthesis of sequential machines in canonic forms and as
asynchronous circuits. Prerequisite: E.E. 241 or equivalent.
435. Coding Theory (3)
General theory of error-correcting codes for error control in
digital computer and communication systems. Topics include
a review of modern algebra as required in the discussion of
codes; the structure and properties of linear, cyclic, and con-
volutional codes for random or burst-error correction (or
both); decoding algorithms and their circuit implementations.
Prerequisite: E.E. 317 or Math. 243 or equivalent.
444. Microwave Devices (3)
Optical masers. Cavity- and traveling wave masers. Devices
using ferrimagnetic resonance: isolators, circulators, electron-
ically controlled phase shifters. Parametric amplifiers.
Amplifiers and oscillators using active semiconductor devices.
447. Nonlinear Phenomena (3)
Investigation of nonlinear effects in active and passive lump-
ed and distributed circuits with emphasis on methods of
analysis as well as physical understanding of the phenomena:
jump phenomena, van der Pol's theory, stability criteria,
phase locking. Transmission line and optical waves in non-
linear media: shock waves, harmonic generation and optical
parametric amplification.
450. Special Topics (3)
Selected topics in the field of electrical engineering not
covered in other courses.
451. Physics of Semiconductor Devices (3)
Energy band structure. Transport theory, lattice vibrations,
electronic conduction. Theory of recombination. Applica-
tions of p-n junctions and metal-insulator-semiconductor
structures. Prerequisites: Phys. 31 and E.E. 103 or
equivalent.
452. Solid State Device Theory I (3)
Hot electrons, secondary ionization, avalanche breakdown,
electron transfer by intervalley scattering. Applications to
microwave oscillators and amplifiers, such as avalanche and
Gunn diodes. Prerequisite: E.E. 451.
Electrical Engineering 139
is ;. Solid State Device Theory li (3)
Properties .>t semiconductor surfaces; tunneling theory.
Applications to tunnel diodes and field effect tr.msistors.
Prerequisite: E.E. 451 .
English
454. Solid State Device Theory 111 (3)
Optical electronics. Theory of radiation, radiative absorption
and emission in semiconductors. Applications to optical e-lec
tronic devices: electroluminescence, light emitting diodes,
lasers. Detection and modulation of optical radiation, solar
cells and photodetectors. Prerequisite: E.E. 451.
457. (M.E. 457) Introduction to Modern Control Theory (3)
See M.E. 457 for description.
4<i 1. Theory of Electrical Noise (3)
Definitions: noise temperature, spectral density. Noise
sources: quantum, thermal, shot, generation-recombination,
(Ticker noise. Representation and optimization of noisy net-
works. Prerequisites: Phys. 31 and E.E. 103, or equivalent.
462. Noise in Microwave Devices and Networks (3)
Noise in electron tubes, bipolar and MOS transistors, mixers,
parametric amplifiers, tunnel diodes, and masers. Prere-
quisite: E.E. 461.
Professors
Albert Edward Hartung, Ph.D., Chairman
Ray Livingston Armstrong, Ph.D.
Glenn James Chris tensen, Ph.D., I nnvrsi/v Distinguished
Professor
Ernest Nevin Dilworth, Ph.D.
James Richard Frakes, Ph.D.
David Mason Greene, Ph.D.
Frank Scott Hook, Ph.D.
John W. Hunt, Ph.D., Dean of the College of Arts and
Science
Carl Ferdinand Strauch, Ph.D., Distinguished Professor
Associate Professors
Peter G. Beidler, Ph.D.
Cloyd Criswell, M.A.
Jack Angelo DeBellis, Ph.D.
Eustace Anthony James, Ph.D.
John F. Vickrey, Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
Addison C. Bross, Ph.D.
Robert C. Cole, Ph.D.
Edward J. Gallagher, Ph.D.
Robert Richard Harson, Ph.D.
George Buchanan MacDonald, Ph.D.
Rosemarie A. Maier, Ph.D.
Albert J. Solomon, Ph.D.
Two majors are offered by the department of English:
English literature, and journalism.
English Literature
Literature is a representation of life at the level of man's
individual, human dealings with his fellow men. It is man's
response to the physical, emotional, intellectual, and moral
conditions of his existence. A literary work is one author's
ordering and interpretation of his experience, revealing what-
ever wisdom and beauty his vision of the universe affords
him. It both illuminates human experience and is a joy for-
ever.
When these works are seen as the diverse and yet unified
expressions of an epoch, they provide insight into the human
problem and solution at a particular moment in time. Put
together epoch after epoch, they thus become, in a peculiarly
rich and inward sense, a form of history. Among world litera-
tures English is perhaps the most varied and splendid and,
140 English
together with American literature, presents in today's inter-
national setting an unusual breadth of national, racial, region-
al, and cultural subjects.
The English major student will come to know the varied
richness of this literature. So that he may learn how to read
thoughtfully and sensitively, he will be taught how to analyze
the basic processes of the literary art. His own skill in using
the written word will grow as he studies intensively the
writings of those who have shown themselves to be the
supreme masters of the skill. Above all, he will be challenged
to formulate honest reactions to his reading just as writers
originally did when contronted by experience; and so, by
integrating his own experience with what Matthew Arnold
called "the best that has been thought and said," he will
come to perceive whatever wisdom and beauty his own en-
riched vision will afford him. The resulting enlargement of
mind and spirit not only should produce a flexible, yet well-
integrated, personality but also can be put at the service of
society in whatever profession or enterprise the student may
undertake.
Required Preliminary Courses
Engl 1, and 2, 10, 14, or 16 Composition and Literature (6)
and
Engl 8, 9 English Literature (6)
Required Major Courses
Engl 323, 324 Shakespeare & Elizabethan Drama (6)
and twenty-four semester hours from the
following courses:
Engl 183, 184 Readings in English Literature (6)
Engl 321, 322 Twentieth-Century Literature (6)
Engl 325 English Literature of the Romantic Era (3)
Engl 326 English Literature of the Victorian Era (3)
Engl 331 Milton (3)
Engl 333 Restoration and Augustan Literature (3)
Engl 334 The Age of Johnson (3)
Engl 335 History of the English Language (3)
Engl 336 Writing for Publication (3)
Engl 337 The Renaissance (3)
Engl 338 The Seventeenth Century (3)
Engl 339 Chaucer (3)
Engl 340 Advanced Composition (3)
Engl 341, 342 Contemporary Literature (6)
Engl 343 American Romanticism (3)
Engl 344 American Realism (3)
Engl 345 Themes in American Literature (3)
Engl 346 Middle English Literature (3)
Note: electives are to be chosen in consultation with the
chairman of the departmental undergraduate major commit-
tee to ensure adequate breadth of coverage.
Up to six hours related courses in other departments may
be substituted with the approval of chairman of department.
Collateral courses are recommended in history, philoso-
phy, religion studies, history and criticism of the fine arts,
and classical and modern languages and literature. Students
planning to pursue graduate studies should acquire a reading
knowledge of German, French, and Latin as undergraduates.
Undergraduate English Composition Courses
All students must meet the requirements of six semester
hours in freshman composition. This may be done through
satisfactory performance in English 1, the regular first-
semester freshman course, and in English 2, 10, 14, or 16, the
regular second semester freshman courses. The student must
elect one course from among the English 2, 10, 14, 16 offer-
ing. Advanced placement and six semester hours of Lehigh
credit for English 1 and 2, 10, 14, or 16 are given to students
who earn scores of 3 or higher on the CEEB Advanced Place-
ment Test in English. Other students who earn a score of 700
or higher on the SAT-Verbal Aptitude Test receive equal
credit.
1. Composition and Literature (3)
Practice in expository writing and the application of rhetori-
cal principles based upon models.
2. Composition and Literature (3)
Continuation of English 1. Further practice in expository
writing in conjunction with the study of the drama, the short
story, and verse. Prerequisite: Engl. 1.
10. Composition and Literature: Short Fiction (3)
Continuation of English 1. Further practice in expository
writing in conjunction with the study of short stories and
novellas by masters of the form. Prerequisite: Engl. 1.
14. Composition and Literature: The Novel (3)
Continuation of English 1. Further practice in expository
writing in conjunction with the study of major works in the
form, both English and Continental. Prerequisite: Engl. 1.
16. Composition and Literature: Drama (3)
Continuation of English 1. Further practice in expository
writing in conjunction with the study of the literary and
theatrical aspects of a group of plays, classic and contempo-
rary. Prerequisite: Eng. 1.
English Literature and Advanced Composition
Students wishing to major in English literature should take as
primary work Engl. 8 and 9, or such equivalent courses as
may be recommended by the chairman of the department.
They should then elect a total of ten advanced English
courses in the junior and senior years. Students working for
honors take a course in which they prepare a thesis as part of
the honors requirement.
4. A Study of the Drama (3)
Reading and critical study of the drama; theories of the
drama; th£ drama and the stage; the drama as a criticism of
life. Prerequisite: Engl. 2, 10, 14, or 16.
English 141
5 \ Stud) .'i the Drama (3)
Continuation "i Engl. -I. Prerequisite: Engl. -. 1 0, I 4, or I (>.
". \ Stud) ol the Shorl Story (3)
A critical study of the short story, English, American, .mil
Continental. Class discussions, extensive coll.itcr.il reading,
and reports. Prerequisite: Engl. 2, 10, 14, or 16.
8. English Literature (3)
A survey of English literature Irom Beowulj through the Prc-
Romantics, with selected readings. Prerequisite: Engl. 2. 11),
14, or 16.
l). English Literature (3)
A survey of English literature from Wordsworth to Auden.
Prerequisite: Engl. 2, 10, 14, or 1(>.
18. The Novel (3)
A study of a selection of novels as noteworthy works of
literature. Prerequisite: Engl. 2, 10, 14, or 16.
19. The Novel (3)
Chronological continuation of Engl. 18. Prerequisite: Engl. 2,
10, 14, or 16.
20. American Major Writers (3)
A study of selected major writers from the settlement of
America to the middle of the nineteenth century. Prerequi-
site: Engl. 2, 10, 14, or 16.
21. American Major Writers (3)
A study of selected major writers from the middle of the
nineteenth century to the present. Prerequisite: Engl. 2, 10,
14, or 16.
23. Survey of American Literature (3)
A survey of major and minor writers from the settlement of
America to the middle of the nineteenth century. Required
of American Studies majors; open to others. Prerequisite:
Engl. 2, 10, 14. or 16.
24. Survey of American Literature (3)
A survey of major and minor writers from the middle of the
nineteenth century to the present. Required of American
Studies majors; open to others. Prerequisite: Engl. 2, 10, 14,
or 16.
35. Poetry (3)
Analytical and critical reading of poetry, to provide such
acquaintance with idiom and technique that poetry may be
read with pleasure and understanding. Prerequisite: Engl. 2,
10, 14, or 16.
36. Masterpieces of World Literature (3)
A study of great works selected from the literature of epic
poetry, the drama, the romance, philosophy, and the essay to
illustrate the humanistic traditions of Western civilization.
Prerequisite: Engl. 2, 10, 14, or 16.
'> 1 . Spe< i.il Topic s in English (3)
Study ol a characteristic theme, mode, lupus, oi approach in
English literature. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of dc-
pariiiienl and Engl. 2, 10, 1 4, or I d.
92. Special Topics in English (3)
Continuation ol English 91. Prerequisite: consent of chair-
man of department and Engl. 2, 10, 14, or 16.
142. Technical Writing (3)
Study and practice in forms and methods of technical exposi-
tion, description, definition, classification; the technical re-
port, abstract. Prerequisite: Engl. 2, 10, 14, or 16.
151. Introduction to Film (3)
A survey of western cinema with emphasis on the technical
and aesthetic properties which distinguish film from the
other arts. Prerequisite: senior standing and consent of chair-
man of department.
181. Undergraduate Thesis (3)
Open to advanced undergraduates who wish to submit theses
in English. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of department.
182. Undergraduate Thesis (3)
Continuation of Engl. 181. Prerequisite: consent of chairman
of department.
183. Readings in English Literature (3)
Open to advanced students who wish to pursue special
courses of reading in English literature. Prerequisite: consent
of chairman of department.
184. Readings in English Literature (3)
Continuation of Engl. 183. Prerequisite: consent of chairman
of department.
English Literature for Advanced Undergraduates and
Graduates
The objective of the graduate program in English is not
merely the impartation of knowledge, however wide or deep.
Rather it is to instruct and train the student in the methods
by which he may pursue the advanced study of literature and
literary history. It is to train him in the techniques of
criticism and research, so that he may go beyond what has
already been done and make an original contribution in his
advanced study. To this end, graduate instruction in the de-
partment is conducted chiefly by seminars in which enroll-
ment is limited to an average of twelve students and there is
opportunity for individual contact between the student and
the professor who is guiding his research.
Advanced degrees may be obtained in all areas of English
and American literature. Members of the department are
particularly interested in advanced work in Chaucer and
medieval literature, in Shakespeare and Elizabethan drama, in
twentieth-century literature, and in American literature. In
1972-73, 22 Ph.D. and 70 M.A. candidates were enrolled in
142 English
the graduate program in English.
Students desiring to qualify for graduate degrees in this
department should have taken an undergraduate major in
English with at least fifteen semester hours of advanced
courses in English literature. Those with undergraduate de-
ficiencies who are admitted though otherwise well qualified
will be expected to make up such deficiencies in addition to
satisfying the minimum requirements for the degree sought.
All candidates for the master's degree in English who ex-
pect to go on for the Ph.D. are required to complete success-
fully eight semester courses (twenty-four semester hours) and
to write a thesis representing the equivalent of six hours of
course work.
Beginning with the academic year of 1973-74, master's
degree candidates who do not wish to continue for the Ph.D.
may, as an alternative option, receive a terminal M.A. degree
by successfully completing nine semester courses (twenty-
seven semester hours) and passing an examination, prepara-
tion for which represents the equivalent of three hours of
course work. Details of the examination are available from
the director of graduate studies of the department.
If his needs and interest make it desirable for him to do
so, the candidate for the master's degree is permitted to take
collateral work in other departments to the extent of six
semester hours in lieu of an equivalent amount in the major
field.
Candidates for the doctor's degree are accepted in English
only after a consultation among the graduate professors con-
cerning the candidate's qualifications. The foreign language
requirement for the Ph.D. in English (usually in Latin,
French, or German) may be satisfied in one of two ways: (1)
the demonstration, through examination, of a reading know-
ledge of two foreign languages; or (2) the successful comple-
tion, concurrent with the graduate program, of a foreign
language course, to be approved by the departmental
Director of Graduate Studies, at the 200-, 300-, or 400-level
(or at a lower level in classical languages). This second option
may be used to satisfy a candidate's extra-departmental
course requirement. Each candidate is required to schedule at
least six hours of course work in History of the Language and
Old English or, depending on his previous preparation, six
hours in Old English alone.
For the doctoral examination each candidate will select
the following to be examined upon:
1. One of the following traditional periods:
Old English and Medieval
Renaissance and Jacobean, 1500-1660
Restoration and Eighteenth Century, 1660-1798
Romantic and Victorian, 1798-1900
American Literature, Colonial-1899
Modern British and American Literature, 1900-present.
2. A major figure (to be selected in consultation with the
chairman of his doctoral committee and subject to the ap-
proval of the departmental graduate committee).
3. A genre, theme, matter, or customary grouping (to be
selected in consultation with the chairman of his doctoral
committee and subject to the approval of the departmental
graduate committee).
In each of the three areas of the examination the candi-
date will be expected to demonstrate the knowledge and
expertise that would be necessary if he were to teach a course
in the subject. The three areas may not overlap— except for,
in certain circumstances, the third.
315. Early American Literature (3)
A survey of American literature up to the Romantic period.
317. The Contemporary Drama (3)
A course in contemporary American and European drama
with particular emphasis upon the development of social and
philosophical conflicts of the present day.
318. American Literature (3)
Movements that have shaped American thought and feelings
as expressed in the national literature: Puritanism,
Americanism, Romanticism, Transcendentalism, Individual-
ism, the Civil War, Democracy, the West, Realism, Inter-
nationalism, and Skepticism, as presented by Jonathan Ed-
wards, Franklin, Paine, Longfellow, Poe, Emerson, Thoreau,
Mark Twain, Henry James, and Henry Adams.
319. The Black in American Literature (3)
The characterization of the Black and the literary treatment
of the Black experience in American fiction and drama from
1850 to the present. A comparative examination of both
Black and white authors, such as H. B. Stowe, W. W. Brown,
Melville, Twain, Hughes, Toomer, Faulkner, Wright, Baldwin,
Ellison, Styron, and Jones. Prerequisite: consent of chairman
of department.
320. The Novel (3)
The great masterpieces of prose fiction produced in England,
in America, and on the Continent during the nineteenth and
twentieth centuries; development of types of the novel; the
theory and techniques of the novel.
321. Twentieth-Century American Literature (3)
American literature before World War II. Lectures and class
discussion of major fiction and poetry.
322. Twentieth-Century European Literature (3)
English and Continental literature before World War II. Lec-
tures and class discussion of major fiction and poetry.
323. Shakespeare and the Elizabethan Drama (3)
The development of the English drama, including the im-
portant plays of Shakespeare.
324. Shakespeare and the Elizabethan Drama (3)
Continuation of Engl. 323.
English 143
325. English Literature •>! the Romantic Bra (3)
Poetry and prose ol the chiel romantic writers Wordsworth,
Coleridge. Scott. Byron, Shelley, Ke.its. Lamb, H.i/litt, De
Quincey with consideration "i the (<oluii.il, religious, and
sociaJ problems of the period .is they are exhibited in the
literature. Readings and class discussions.
Mb. English Literature ol the Victorian Era (3)
Poetry and prose of the chiel Victorian writers— Tennyson,
Browning, Arnold, Clough, Rossetti, Morris, Swinburne.
Mac.iul.iy, Carlyle, Mill, Newman, Ruskin— with consideration
ol the political, religious, and social problems of the period as
they are exhibited in the literature. Readings and class
discussions.
331. Milton (3)
The life and works of John Milton in connection with the
history of his times and chief sources of his inspiration.
333. Restoration and Augustan Literature (3)
Prose and poetry from 1660 to 1745, with special emphasis
upon the works of Dryden, Pope, and Swift.
334. Age of Johnson (3)
English prose and poetry in the middle and later years of the
eighteenth century. Dr. Johnson and his circle, and others
from Fielding to Blake.
335. History of the English Language (3)
A survey of the development of the English language, in
vocabulary, pronunciation, and structure, beginning with its
relation to the other Germanic languages and coming down
to modern English usage.
336. Writing for Publication (3)
Comprehensive study of the short story and practice in the
various techniques of writing short stories, essays, and poems
with a view to publication.
340. Principles ol Advanced Composition (3)
A study ol the principles and rhetorical I or ins "I non-
narrative prose with intensive practice in writing at an ad
vanced level. Attention to the theory of language and gram-
mar. Corollary readings, conferences, and class discussions.
Prerequisite: English major standing or 2.5 average in fresh-
man English,
341. Contemporary American Literature (3)
American literature since World War II. Lectures and class
discussions of new writers and of recent works by established
writers.
342. Contemporary European Literature (3)
English and Continental literature since World War II. Lec-
tures and class discussions of new writers and of recent works
by established writers.
343. American Romanticism (3)
A study of the chief American Romantics, Emerson,
Thoreau, Whitman, Hawthorne, Melville, and Emily
Dickinson. The European and American philosphical,
historical, and social background as well as the formal
aesthetic study of romantic masterpieces.
344. American Realism (3)
The rise of realism in prose and poetry in the period roughly
from the 1870's to 1914; Twain, Howells, James, Robinson,
Norris, Crane, Dreiser, and others.
345. Themes in American Literature (3)
An intensive study of a selected topic in American literature,
primarily for American Studies majors. Readings range from
the colonial period to the present. Sample topics: the
American re-discovery of Europe; the theme of apocalypse;
American humor; the Edenic motif; personal revolt and social
protest. Prerequisite: consent of director of American
Studies.
337. The Renaissance (3)
The growth of English non-dramatic literature in the six-
teenth century and the stimulus of the Italian Renaissance
and northern humanism. Readings in and class discussions of
the works of the chief writers— Petrarch, Erasmus, More,
Wyatt, Surrey, Lyly, Sidney, and Spenser.
346. Middle English Literature (3)
A study of the major literary works of the Middle English
period by authors other than Chaucer. Some works will be
dealt with in translation., some in the original. In addition to
such major figures as Langland, Gower, and the Pearl Poet,
the metrical romances will be emphasized.
338. The Seventeenth Century (3)
The rich variety of English literature from Donne to
Dryden— Donne and the "Metaphysical School"; Jonson and
"The Tribe of Ben"; Cavalier and religious poetry; the prose
of Bacon, Browne, Burton, Walton, and Bunyan.
339. Chaucer (3)
Reading and critical study of the chief works of Geoffrey
Chaucer, with attention to his language and the backgrounds
of his works.
For Graduates
400. Old English (3)
A study of the Old English language and literature.
401. Beowulf (3)
A study of the Beowulf poem and some of the pertinent
scholarship.
404. Literature of the Fourteenth Century (3)
Types of medieval literature, with special attention to
Langland, Gower, and the Pearl Poet.
144 English
405. Chaucer (3)
A study of the life and works of Chaucer. Readings, reports
and class discussions.
406. Chaucer (3)
Continuation of Engl. 405.
407. Middle English Metrical Romances (3)
A study of the Middle English non-Arthurian verse romances.
465. Joyce (3)
A sequential study of the works of James Joyce, their place
in Irish and world literature, and their influence on
twentieth-century prose.
472. Transcendentalism, Hawthorne, and Emerson (3)
Representative works of the Transcendentalist movement;
the major works of Hawthorne and Emerson contrasted and
compared in terms of Transcendentalism and Romanticism.
408. Arthurian Literature of the Middle Ages (3)
A study of the development of Arthurian literature from its
Celtic beginnings to Malory's Morte Darthur.
473. Melville and Whitman (3)
The major works of Melville and Whitman contrasted and
compared in terms of Romantic doctrine.
412. Shakespeare's History Plays (3)
A study of the English history plays as an introduction to
advanced work in Shakespeare.
477. Twain and James (3)
Selected works of Twain and James representing the develop-
ment of American fiction after the Civil War.
413. Shakespeare's Roman Plays (3)
An intensive critical study of Julius Caesar, Antony and
Cleopatra, and Coriolanus.
480. Hemingway and Faulkner (3)
A thematic and stylistic examination of the major works of
Hemingway and Faulkner.
414. Sixteenth-Century Drama (3)
A study of plays representing the development of English
drama before Shakespeare.
415. Seventeenth-Century Drama (3)
A study of representative plays from the major Jacobean and
Caroline dramatists.
486. Literary Criticism (3)
A course aimed to correlate and unify the student's previous
work in literature by means of wide reading in critical litera-
ture and discussions of theories and schools of criticisms.
487. Literary Criticism (3)
Continuation of Engl. 486.
418. Donne (3)
A study of the complete body of Donne's verse, with especial
concern for its meanings.
444. Pope (3)
A study of the works of Pope and their literary background.
447. Eighteenth-Century Prose (3)
Studies in periodical prose, philosophical prose, satire, and
the development of the novel.
448. Studies in the Eighteenth Century (3)
Studies in, and reports on, one or more authors or issues in
eighteenth-century English literature.
452. Keats (3)
A study of the life and works of John Keats. Readings, re-
ports, and class discussions.
457. Carlyle and Arnold (3)
The major works of Carlyle and Arnold contrasted and com-
pared in terms of Romanticism and Victorian social and reli-
gious problems.
461. Conrad (3)
A study of Conrad's major novels and tales, with emphasis on
the author's style, technique, and attitude.
490. Special Topics (3)
Selected topics in the field of English not covered in other
courses. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of
chairman of department.
491. Special Topics (3)
Selected topics in the field of English not covered in other
courses. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of
chairman of department.
492. Bibliography and Methods of Research (3)
A study of the bibliographical tools essential to an advanced
student of English literature. Survey of historical, or critical
bibliography, of both printed books and manuscripts; of
practical bibliography, including direction in the compilation
of a list of books and articles on an assigned subject and in
the procedures of thesis writing; and of enumerative biblio-
graphies of English language and literature.
493. The Teaching of College English (2)
The principles and practice of teaching composition, prose,
and other literature on the college level. A consideration of
standards, organization, grammar, diction, and style in
student writing and the adaptation of a student writing
program to readings in prose and other literature. Class dis-
cussions, actual teaching, and reports.
English 145
I" I. Tlu- Teaching ..I College I nglish (1 )
Continuation of Engl. 49 ;.
495. Graduate Seminar (3)
tensive study of the works ol one or more English or
American authors or ol .i type ol literature.
196. Graduate Seminar (3)
An intensive study of the works oi one oi more English or
rican authors, or a type of literature. Subject and in-
structor vary from semester to semester according to the
needs of the students and the wishes of the department.
Courses available are Johnson's Literary Criticism (Mr.
Dilworth), Approaches to the Short Story (Mr. Frakes), Ap-
proaches to Poetry (Mr. Greene), Approaches to Composition
(Mr. Hartung), Shakespeare for Teachers (Mr. Hook),
Seventeenth-Century Drama (Mr. Hook), Wordsworth (Mr.
Harson), Southern Writers of the Twentieth Century (Mr.
DeBellis).
497. Graduate Seminar (3)
Same as Engl. 496.
498. Graduate Thesis (3)
499. Graduate Thesis (3)
Division of Journalism
Professors
Joseph Brendan McFadden, M.A., Head
Robert Joseph Sullivan, M.A.
Journalism is concerned with the exercise of social responsi-
bility in human affairs. The profession of journalism deals
with the truthful communication of tacts and their explana-
tion. It is the purpose of the program in journalism to bring
its majors: (1) to the point where they can gather significant
information, organize it quickly into effective form, and
communicate it clearly, accurately, and with a disciplined
objectivity; and (2) to an understanding of the legitimate role
ot the press in society.
The first of these objectives is obtained by extensive, pro-
fessionally oriented practice in the writing, reporting, and
editing of news. The skill thus acquired is firmly rooted in
rigorous training in vocabulary, in precision of expression,
and in sophistication in style. It is concerned with clear
writing and careful reporting, the kind that depicts the mean-
ing of events. It develops from a purposeful curiosity and a
capacity to be imaginatively interested in human activity.
The second objective is obtained: (1) by study of the rights
and responsibilities of the press under the constitution, with
emphasis upon the freedom of the press as conditioned by
the liberties of the individual and the needs of society; (2) by
examination of the journalistic tradition in the United States
in relation to the political, economic, and social progress of
the population; and (3) by independent study, culminating in
an undergraduate thesis, of the press and society.
The basii program in journalism provides Opportunity foi
■ oni 'titration in al leasl one ol the following areas:
American studies, business management, economics, govern-
ment, history, international relations, languages, literature,
philosophy, religion studies, science, social relations, and
urban studies.
While the great majority ol graduates in journalism enti t
some phase of written communication as a career— daily news
paper, wire services, magazine, public or industrial relations,
advertising, technical writing-others have used their back-
ground in journalism as a base for the study and practice of
law, service in government, teaching, business management,
and graduate study in a variety of disciplines.
Required Preliminary Courses
Journ 1, 2
Journ 1 1
Brown and White (2)
News Writing (3)
Required Major Courses
Journ 3-8 Brown and White (2-6)
Journ 12 Reporting of Public Affairs (3)
Journ 17 Magazine Article Writing (3)
Journ 113 Editing (3)
Journ 115 Interpretive Writing (3)
Journ 120 Journalism Proseminar (3)
Journ 121, 122 Law of the Press (6)
Note: Brown and White must be rostered each semester while
the student is a journalism major, and a minimum of four
such semesters is required. With the approval of the journal-
ism faculty, current professional newspaper experience may
be substituted semester for semester.
Recommended Electives
Journalism majors are encouraged to concentrate their elec-
tive courses in one or two areas. (See concentration areas in
third paragraph, above.) Areas and elective courses should be
chosen in consultation with the major advisor.
Newspaper Apprenticeships
With the approval of the journalism faculty, qualified majors
may acquire professional experience in apprenticeships with
regional newspapers.
1-10. Brown and White (1 or 2)
Enrollment constitutes membership on the staff of the semi-
weekly paper. Students enrolling for their first semester
register for Journ. 1 ; for their second semester, Journ. 2, etc.
Prerequisite: consent of chairman of department.
11. News Writing (3)
Definition, determinants, and components of news; news
story structure and style; sources; interviewing; practice in
gathering and writing news.
146 English
12. Reporting of Public Affairs (3)
Reporting and writing news of government on the local,
county, state, and federal levels; civil and criminal courts;
labor, science, and entertainment news. Prerequisite: Journ.
11.
17. Magazine Article Writing (3)
Writing and marketing non-fiction magazine articles.
21. Creative Writing (3)
The study and writing of fiction, short stories, especially with
a view to developing each student's particular talent. Prere-
quisite: consent of instructor and Engl. 2, 10, 14, or 16.
22. Creative Writing (3)
Continuation of Journ. 21. Prerequisite: consent of instruct-
or and Engl. 2, 10, 14, or 16.
111. Problems in Advanced Reportage (3)
Intensive practice in the reporting of complex events.
112. Problems in Advanced Reportage (3)
Continuation of Journ. 111.
113. Editing (3)
Study of and practice in newspaper desk work; headline
writing, make-up, and typography; selecting, editing, and
rewriting news and feature copy; use of reference works and
morgue. Prerequisite: Journ. 11.
115. Interpretive Writing (3)
Editorial interpretation of current events; practice in inter-
pretive writing, including editorials. Prerequisite: Journ. 12.
118. History of American Journalism (3)
English background of the American newspaper; develop-
ment of press from Colonial days to the present; influence of
newspaper on American life; contributions of outstanding
journalists.
120. Journalism Proseminar (3)
Survey of the press in its relation to public affairs. Extensive
research and reports. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of
department.
121. Law of the Press (3)
Constitutional development of freedom of the press; rights
and responsibilities of the press.
122. Law of the Press II (3)
Law of and defenses in libel; privacy; contempt; copyright;
obscenity.
Division of Speech and Dramatics
Associate Professors
John Pearson, M.F.A., Head
Thoburn Vail Barker, M.A.
Assistant Professor
Marshall L. Kaufman, M.A.
Instructor
John A. Schnaible, M.A.
Speech Clinic
For the purpose of diagnosis and treatment of speech defects.
Individual instruction provided for students with minor dis-
turbances of voice and speech, as well as those with more
serious handicaps. Open to all students in need of corrective
treatment and to those desiring speech tests. By appoint-
ment. No credit.
Undergraduate Courses
11-13. Basic Production (1)
The aesthetic process by which plays are translated into
theatrical terms for the appreciation and enjoyment of all
forms of dramatic arts. Students enrolling for their first
semester register for Speech 11; for their second semester,
Speech 12, etc. Prerequisite: consent of division head.
21-23. Impromptu Speaking (1)
The organization and presentation of short expository
speeches and of speeches for special occasions. Content
drawn from contemporary events. Students enrolling for
their first semester register for Speech 21; for their second
semester, Speech 22, etc. Prerequisite: consent of division
head.
30. Fundamentals of Speech (3)
A foundation course designed to develop knowledge of the
basic principles of speech and ability to speak effectively on
the platform.
31. Business and Professional Speaking (3)
Development of speech for business and professional prob-
lems: technique of expository speaking; use of visual
graphics; persuasive speaking applied to the emotional or
analytical approach in selling; methods of interviewing; tech-
niques of conference. Prerequisite: consent of division head.
32. Conference and Discussion (3)
The technique of investigation, analysis, evidence, inference,
briefmaking, and refutation in oral argument; participation in
the various forms of discussion— conference table, panel, and
symposium— and in various types of debate— conventional,
cross-examination, and direct clash. Prerequisite: consent of
division head.
English 147
33. P. it li.iiiHiit.il v Procedure (1)
Study .uid drill in modern rules .uul methods ot conducting
organized group-deliberation.
34-.lt.. Debate (1)
A study of the principles and techhiques ot debate, analysis,
evidence, reasoning, refutation, briefing, speech composition,
and delivery skills. Members required to participate in the
activities of the Debate Society. Students enrolling for their
first semester register for Speech 34; for their second semes-
ter. Speech 35, etc. Prerequisite: consent of the head ot the
division.
41. Basic Techniques of Acting (3)
Techniques of the twentieth-century actor. Vocal produc-
tion, stage movement, improvisational acting, characteriza-
tion. Some laboratory projects in special areas. Some scene
study.
42. Problems in Acting (3)
Solving the problems of the actor from the earliest times to
the present. Some scene study; coordinating the craft of
acting in all periods with the basic precepts of honesty in
performance. Prerequisite: consent of division head or
Speech 41.
45. Basic Design and Technical Theatre (3)
Study and practice of design concepts for the theatre design-
er. Includes history of theatre architecture.
46. Lighting (3)
Emphasis on the elements of creativity and their translation
into the practice of stage lighting. Prerequisite: consent of
division head or Speech 45.
47. Oral Interpretation (3)
The analysis and oral presentation of various types of litera-
ture. Consideration of sound values, rhythm, and imagery.
Prerequisite: consent of division head.
1 I I. Basil Directing (3)
Survey of theatrical direction. Study of the emergence of the
director. Prerequisite: consent of division head or Speech 11.
For Advanced ( 'tulvrgraduales and Graduates
2 11. Phonetics (3)
Practice in the use of the international phonetic alphabet.
Consideration of the standard speech characteristics of the
three major American regional dialects. Prerequisite: consent
of division head.
260. Speech for the Teacher (3)
An orientation course in the field of speech and dramatics for
those engaged in classroom teaching.
301. History of the Theatre (3)
The history of the theatre in western Europe from ancient
Greece to the Renaissance. Emphasis on audiences, theatrical
structures, production methods, actors and acting styles.
Some plays included, but whenever possible, students who
have not had a course in history of the drama should sched-
ule English 4 concurrently. Offered in alternate years.
302. History of the Theatre (3)
Continuation of Speech 301 from the seventeenth to the
twentieth century. Students who have not had a course in
history of the drama should schedule English 5 concurrently
when possible. Offered in alternate years.
343. Basic Movement for the Stage (3)
Physical skills for actors. Includes basic choreography, stage-
fighting and fight-choreography, basic pantomime, period
and modern dances. Prerequisite: consent of division head.
346. The Demagogue (3)
Demagoguery from classical times to the present. The role of
the demagogue in creating opinion. Prerequisite: consent of
division head.
48. Persuasion (3)
Study of and practice in persuasive techniques in salesman-
ship, political speaking, law and advertising. The ethical im-
plications of persuasion. Prerequisite: consent of division
head.
61. Theatre Production (3)
The practical technique and production of plays; acting,
stage-lighting, scenic design and execution, and student
direction of plays. Each member must write either an original
one-act play or a thesis upon any practical problems of the
modern theatre.
62. Theatre Production (3)
Continuation of Speech 61. Prerequisite: Speech 61.
148 English
Environmental Sciences &
Resource Management
J. Donald Ryan, Ph.D., Chairman of Geological Sciences and
Director of Environmental Sciences & Resource Management
Program
Society's increasing demands for energy, food, recreational
opportunities, and living space have altered and will continue
to alter the environment of the earth. The need for personnel
trained to evaluate proposed alterations and repair existing
deleterious or critical situations can only be met by an inter-
disciplinary approach.
This is an interdepartmental major fostering basic prepara-
tion for advanced study and/or an immediate career in envi-
ronmental management and conservation. The backgrounds
of fundamental mathematics and science required to under-
stand the complex of man and his environment is established
early within this major, and in the later phases latitude is
available for courses of study leading to an understanding of
the various aspects of the conflicts of society. Basic principles
of ecology are used as the core of the program.
Individual programs can be arranged to provide either a
major concentration on a specific phase of environmental
problems, i.e., water pollution, air pollution, solid waste dis-
posal, or land planning. Programs can be developed to create
a broad awareness and knowledge of the total environment.
Student research into specific problems involving laboratory,
field, or library research is an integral part of the recommend-
ed program.
Graduates of this major can expect to take part in plan-
ning, education, research and coordination of environmental
programs for all levels of government, schools, and industry.
As graduate study is advisable for students contemplating
some of these career areas, the program provides thorough
preparation for further study in specific areas of environmen-
tal sciences.
Program for Bachelor of Science Degree
College and University Requirements (SO credit hours)
Engl 1 Composition and Literature (3)
Engl 2, 10, 14, or 16 Composition and Literature (3)
Electives (39)
Note: Elective courses are non-professional courses designed
to give the student a broad understanding in traditional and
contemporary fields of thought outside of natural science
and mathematics. The courses are chosen by the student. The
elective program shall include a large number of courses
broadly distributed among the various areas of the humani-
ties and the social sciences.
Required Major Courses (66 credit hours)
Math 21 Analytic Geometry and Calculus I (4)
Math 22 Analytic Geometry and Calculus II (4)
Math 23 Analytic Geometry and Calculus III (4)
Physll Introductory Physics 1 (4)
Phys 12 Introductory Physics Lab I (1)
Chem 21 Introductory Chemical Principles (4)
Chem 22 Chemical Principles Lab (1)
Chem 39 Analytical Chemistry (3)
Chem 51 Organic Chemistry (1)
Chem 53 Organic Chemistry Lab (1)
Geol 1 Principles of Geology (3)
Geol 211 Environmental Planning (3)
Geol 281 Geological Research (3)
Biol 21 Principles of Biology (3)
Biol 22 Introduction to Biology Lab (1)
Biol 35 Microbiology (3)
Biol 361 Sanitary Microbiology (3)
Biol 306 Ecology (3)
CE 271 Environmental Engineering II (3)
ChE 52 Transport Phenomena (4)
Engl 142 Technical Writing (3) (or equivalent)
Phys 21 Introductory Physics II (4)
Phys 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)
Plus four courses from the following list (12
credit hours):
Biol 303 Advanced Invertebrate Zoology (3)
Biol 317 (Geol. 317) Evolution (3)
ChE 320 Waste Water Control (3)
ChE 321 Fundamentals of Air Pollution (3)
CE 121 Mechanics of Fluids (3)
CE 170 Sanitary Engineering I (3)
CE 326 Ground Water Hydrology (3)
CE 325 Hydrology (3)
CE 332 Ocean Engineering (3)
CE 371 Environmental Health Engineering (3)
CE 162 Environmental Engineering (3)
CE 222 Hydraulic Engineering (3)
Eco311 Economics of Resource Use (3)
Geol 313 Sedimentology (3)
Geol 363 Introduction to Oceanography (3)
Geol 212 Geomorphology and Surficial Geology (3)
Govt 360 Public Administration (3)
Spch 30 Fundamentals of Speech (3)
Chem 196 Physical Chemistry (3)
Chem 191 Physical Chemistry (3)
Mech 1 Statics (3)
Mech 102 Dynamics (3)
Recommended Sequence of Courses
Freshman Year, First Semester (15 credit hours)
Math 21 Analytic Geometry and Calculus I (4)
Chem 21, 22 Introductory Chemical Principles & Lab (5)
Engl 1 Composition and Literature (3)
Electives (3)
Environmental Sciences and Resource Management 149
Freshman Yr.ir. Second Sent* dii hours
Math An.iKti. Geometry and Calculus II (4)
Phys 11, 12 Introductory Physics I & Lab (5)
l ngl 2, 10, 14, or 1(> Composition and I iterature (3)
Elcctivcs (3)
Sophomore Year, First Semester i /(> credit hours)
Math ' i Analytic Geometry and Calculus III (-1)
Phys 21, 22 Introductory Physics II & Lab (5)
Geol 1 Principles of Geology (3)
Chcm 51, 53 Organic Chemistry & Lab (4)
Sophomore Year, Second Semester (16 credit hours)
Biol 21, 22 Principles of Biology & Lab (4)
Chem 39 Analytic Chemistry (3)
Electives (9)
Junior Year, First Semester (15 credit hours)
Geol 211 Environmental Planning (3)
Biol 361 Sanitary Microbiology (3)
Engl 142 Technical Writing (or equivalent) (3)
Electives (6)
Junior Year, Second Semester (16 credit hours)
Biol 306 Ecology (3)
Biol 35 Microbiology (3)
ChE 52 Transport Phenomena (4)
Electives (6)
Senior Year, First Semester (15 credit hours)
Fine Arts
CE 271
Environmental Engineering II (3)
Electives 12
Senior Year, Second Semester (15 credit hours)
Geol 281 Geological Research (3)
Electives 12
Professors
Richard J. Redd, M.F.A., Chairman
Associate Protcssor
Carlos J. Alvare, M. Arch., M.C.P.
Assistant Professors
Leon N. Hicks, Jr.,M.F.A.
Donald D. Schneider, Ph.D.
The Department of Fine Arts offers three major programs
designed to develop the creative potential of the individual
both on a personal and social level and to provide a founda-
tion for graduate studies in fine arts.
The program for general art offers the student experience
in drawing, painting, printmaking and sculpture which will
nurture creative expression and growth as the artistic skills
develop.
The program in pre-architecture focuses on urban con-
cerns, both functional and aesthetic which deal with prob-
lems of man, society and space. At least two years additional
study beyond the B.A. at Lehigh are necessary to complete
an architectural program.
The art history program gives the student a foundation in
the evolution of European art from ancient to modern times
and in designed for those who wish to pursue this area of the
humanities as a professional art historian.
The resources of a growing Lehigh University art collec-
tion, scheduled art exhibitions, field work and contact with
area architects and planners, extend the art programs into
campus and community. Several major museums within easy
travelling distance facilitate the first-hand study of art.
An intercollegiate exchange with the art department of
Moravian College permits fine arts majors to take courses
offered on both campus. Cross-listed courses are indicated.
General Art Major (39 credit hours)
Required Preliminary Courses (12 credit hours)
FA 5 Fundamentals of Art (3)
FA 10 Color and Design (3)
FA 11 Drawing and Graphics (3)
FA 23 Life Drawing (3)
150 Fine Arts
Required Major Courses (27 credit hours)
FA 220 20th Century Art (3)
Art History Any two courses (6)
Art Studio Six courses, one at the advanced level (18)
Pre- Architecture Major (52 credit hours required)
Required Preliminary Courses (22 credit hours)
Math 21
Math 22
Phys 11
Phys 12
FA 3,4
FA 10, 11,
23
Analytic Geometry and Calculus I (4)
Analytic Geometry and Calculus II (4)
Introductory Physics (4)
Introductory Physics Lab (1)
History of Architecture (6)
One studio course in drawing or design (3)
Required Major Courses (30 credit hours)
Mech 1 Statics (3)
Mech 11 Mechanics of Materials (3)
CE 106 Structural Design (3)
CE 159, 160 May be substituted in some programs (6)
FA 43 Environmental Design (3)
FA 143 Environmental Planning and Project (3)
FA 144 Intermediate Environmental Design (3)
FA 244 Architectural Design (6)
FA 220 20th Century Art (3)
FA 151 History of Urban Design (3)
Art History Major (36 credit hours required)
Required Preliminary Course
FA 5 Fundamentals of Art (3)
Required Major Courses
One of the following:
Color and Design (3)
Drawing and Graphics (3)
Life Drawing (3)
Ceramics I (Moravian) (3)
One of the following:
Archaeology of the Near East (3)
Greek Archaeology (3)
Archaeology of Italy (3)
Introduction to Anthropology (3)
Nine of the following, at least four at the
200-level for 27 credit hours:
History of Architecture I (3)
History of Architecture II (3)
Ancient Art (Moravian) (3)
Medieval Art (Moravian) (3)
Italian Renaissance Art (3)
Baroque and Rococo Art (3)
20th Century Architecture (3)
19th Century Painting (3)
FA 10
FA 11
FA 23
Art 75
Gk201
Gk202
Lat 203
SR31
FA 3
FA 4
Art 105
Art 110
FA 115
FA 117
FA 200
FA 219
FA 220 20th Century Art (3)
FA 271 Readings (3)
Collateral courses are recommended, and in some instances
may be substituted for the above in civil engineering, geolo-
gy, government and social relations. For examples: S.R. 368;
CE. 13; CE. 150; Govt. 357;Geol. 211.
Undergraduate Courses
3. History of Architecture I (3)
A study of man's expression through architecture from the
prehistoric through the Romanesque period. Conditioning
influences, evolution of styles, the development of organic
and inorganic types, in relation to structural purposes, and
social expression.
4. History of Architecture II (3)
Factors determining the development and spread of Gothic,
Renaissance, and succeeding styles, the effects of discovery
and exploration, the rise of romantic, classic, functional,
international, and contemporary movements are examined as
epochal expression. Principles of appreciation and aesthetic
character in the scientific age.
5. Fundamentals of Art (3)
An introduction to principles of visual expression. Examples
of art from various periods are examined in relation to their
historical and cultural context, to their plastic organization
and their significance as reflection of human experience.
10. Color and Design (3)
Basic color theory, painting practice. Principles of design and
composition in two and three dimensional media. Individual
projects are directed toward developing creative expression.
Studio.
11. Drawing and Graphics (3)
Methods, media and concepts of drawing. Practice in repre-
senting 3-dimensional form. First principles in printmaking.
Studio.
23. Life Drawing (3)
Drawing from the life model as the fundamental experience
for acquiring control of hand and eye essential to good
draftsmanship. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of the
department.
33. Painting (3)
An introduction to painting in oil, acrylic or watercolor
oriented toward developing individual creative expression
combined with an understanding of the physical nature of
the materials. Studio prerequisite: F.A. 10 or 11, or consent
of the chairman of the department.
Fine Arts 151
37. Printmaking (3)
Independent practice in graphic techniques. Emphasis on
intaglio, with introductory studies ol .ind combination of
two .iddiiion.il methods ol printmaking. Prerequisite: F.A.
II.
I >. Environmental Design (3)
Basic architectural design. Function, selection and organiza-
tion of spaces. Study of light , color and texture. Emphasis on
. reative concepts in consideration of total environment.
Critiques nid open juries. Prerequisite: engineering or archi-
tectural drawing; or field experience; or consent of
instructor.
75. Ceramics I (3)
Elementary problems in the basic techniques of hand-built
and wheel-thrown pottery. Moravian College campus.
143. Environmental Planning and Project (3)
I 'otu e nl rated I'livininnn'iu.il design pn>iiH Is. Individual anil
Irani planning. Investigatory and cumulation procedures and
problems. Content tailored to contemporary needs and stu-
dent requirements— conferences, critiques. Closed juries. For
majors only. May be repeated for credit.
144. Intermediate Environmental Design (3)
More advanced study in architecture and site design. Increase
in scope and complexity of projects. Critiques and open
juries. Prerequisite: F.A. 43 or consent of instructor.
145. Structure in Architecture (3)
Introduction to structural forms and systems; directed
toward an understanding of various structural elements.
Vocabulary of structural terms. Prerequisite: consent of the
instructor or Mech. 1.
105. Ancient Art (3)
The art of Egypt, Mesopotamia, Greece, Etruria and Rome.
Moravian College campus.
110. Medieval Art (3)
The art of the periods of Early Christian, Byzantine, Carolin-
gian, Romanesque, and Gothic. Moravian College campus.
151. History of Urban Design (3)
The historical development of urban design in the evolution
of the city. City planning theories. Special emphasis will be
given to the social and economic parameters which determine
physical design. Study of the methods and practices used in
the United States today. Seminar course. Prerequisite: F.A.
43 or consent of the chairman of department.
115. Italian Renaissance Art (3)
Painting and sculpture are examined as the outgrowth of
conditions in Italy during the fourteenth, fifteenth, and six-
teenth centuries: the influence of medieval thought and tradi-
tion, the awakening interest in nature, the effect of antiquity,
especially the stimulus it gave to the individual effort.
117. Baroque and Rococo Art (3)
The artistic environment of Europe from the Counter-
Reformation to the French Revolution as illuminated by
examples of painting, sculpture and architecture provides
foundations for better comprehension of artistic principles.
Historical, aesthetic and technical aspects of the art as basis
for appreciation.
123. Advanced Life Drawing (3)
An advanced course in drawing from the live model. Prerequi-
site: F.A. 23. May be repeated for credit.
133. Intermediate Painting (3)
Problems in oil, watercolor, acrylic and mixed media. Prere-
quisite: F.A. 33. Lehigh and Moravian College campuses.
137. Intermediate Printmaking (3)
Studies of any combination of two methods of printmaking,
stressing experimentation and creative application of the
materials and tools of graphics. Prerequisite: F.A. 37. Lehigh
and Moravian College campuses.
152. Physical Planning and Design (3)
Solution of a physical planning problem with special em-
phasis on the relationship between the design functions and
the social, economic and political programs under which the
plan will develop. Studio course. Prerequisite: F.A. 151.
175. Ceramics II (3)
Problems in wheel-throwing construction and decoration.
Emphasis on creative expression and experimentation. Prere-
quisite: F.A. 75. Moravian College campus.
176. Ceramics III (3)
Individual problems in thrown and hand-built pottery. May
be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: F.A. 175. Moravian
College campus.
200. 20th Century Architecture (3)
History and theory of modern architecture from late 19th
century antecedents. Wright, LeCorbusier, and Mies van der
Rohe, and major 20th century schools of architectural de-
sign.
213. Sculpture II (3)
Individual problems in a variety of three dimensional media.
May be repeated for credit. Moravian College campus.
219. 19th Century Painting (3)
From Neoclassicism through the sequential movements of
Romanticism, Naturalism, Impressionism and Post-
Impressionism in the art of Europe and the U.S.
152 Fine Arts
220. 20th Century Art (3)
Sequential movements in contemporary painting and sculp-
ture. Their interrelations as cultural expression. Museum re-
ports and critical interpretation.
233. Advanced Painting (3)
Provides creative work in depth in a variety of painting
media. Prerequisite: F.A. 133 or consent of chairman. May
be repeated for credit. Lehigh and Moravian College
campuses.
237. Advanced Printmaking (3)
Intaglio and one additional method of printmaking. Emphasis
on experimentation and application of mixed media in
graphics. Prerequisite: consent of department chairman or
F.A. 137. Lehigh and Moravian College campuses. May be
repeated for credit.
244. Architectural Design (1-3)
Individual study, project or other assignment for advanced
students or majors capable of progress beyond general course
content or requirement. Content organized by intructor and
chairman of department. Conferences and critiques. May be
repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of
department.
271. Readings (3)
Readings in the visual arts for students who wish to pursue
special interests in art history, art criticism or aesthetics not
covered by the regular course offerings. Prerequisite: consent
of the department chairman.
273. Special Topics in Studio Practice (1-4)
Individually directed projects for advanced students capable
of undertaking independent creative work in applied art.
Prerequisite: consent of chairman of the department.
Five-Year Programs
Other program combinations leading to two degrees can be
found under Arts-Engineering sequences or may be developed
by consulting Graduate School requirements and the chair-
man of the appropriate department.
Electrical Engineering and Engineering Physics
This curriculum is particularly well suited for students seek-
ing thorough preparation in the field of physical electronics.
The program adds to the basic electrical engineering curri-
culum a sequence of upper-level undergraduate physics
courses.
The E.E. degree is conferred on the completion of the
fourth year, and the E.P. degree at the end of the fifth year.
Freshman Year (See page 45)
Sophomore Year, First Semester (1 6 credit hours)
EE 11 Introduction to Computer Engineering (3)
Math 23 Analytical Geometry & Calculus III (4)
Phys 21 Introductory Physics II (4)
Phys 22 Introductory Physics Lab II (1)
Eco 1 Economics (4)
Sophomore Year, Second Semester (1 7 credit hours)
EE 20 Introduction to Circuit Theory (4)
Math 205 Linear Methods (3)
Phys 31 Introduction to Quantum Mechanics (3)
Mech 103 Principles of Mechanics (4)
GS Requirement (3)
junior Year, First Semester (14-17 credit hours)
EE 104 Linear Systems & Signals (4)
EE 105 Electronic Circuits (4)
Math 231 Statistical Inference (3)
or
Math 309 Theory of Probability (3)
GS Requirement (3)
Elective (0-3)
Junior Year, Second Semester (1 7 credit hours)
EE 103 Physical Electronics (3)
EE 106 Electromechanics & Machines (3)
EE 231 Electric & Magnetic Fields (3)
or
Phys 212 Electricity and Magnetism I (3)
EE 142 Junior Lab (2)
Approved Elective (3)
Elective (3)
Five- Year Programs 1 53
Slimmer
IT LOO
Industrial Employmcnl
Senioi Year, First Semester ( 15-1$ credit hours
EE 1 1 Proscminar (1)
BE 15] Senior Lab I (2)
EE 245 Electromagnetic Theory (3)
or
Tins 213 Electricity .ind Magnetism II (3)
Phys 215 Particles & Fields I (3)
EE Departmental Electives (3)
GS Requirement (3)
Elective (0-3)
Senior Year, Second Semester ( IS credit hours)
Phys 21 6 Particles & Fields II (3)
EE Departmental Electives (9)
GS Requirement (3)
Elective (3)
Fifth Year, First Semester (17 credit hours)
Phys 192 Advanced Lab (2)
Phys 340 Heat, Thermodynamics & Pyrometry (3)
Phys 362 Atomic and Molecular Structure (3)
Math 322 Methods of Applied Analysis I (3)
Approved Elective (3)
Elective (3)
Fifth Year, Second Semester (15 credit hours)
Phys 254 Optics Lab (2)
Phys 363 Physics of Solids (3)
Phys 171 Proseminar (1)
Approved Elective (3)
Electives (6)
Note: Approved electives are two courses selected from Phys.
364, 365, 369; Mech. 302; and Met. 362.
Industrial Engineering and Business
Students who desire to pursue both industrial engineering
and business administration may complete the required work
for the degree of bachelor of science in industrial engineering
by the end of the fourth year and that required for the
degree of bachelor of science in business and economics by
the end of the fifth year. The first four years are essentially
the standard industrial engineering curriculum.
At the beginning of the fifth year the student transfers to
a curriculum in business and economics and is required to
complete thirty-three semester hours by selecting a standard
major in the College of Business and Economics, completing
the 15 to 18 credit hours required for the major. The balance
of his program in the fifth year will be selected in consulta-
tion with his advisor from those college core requirements
which he has not already taken for the B.S. in Industrial En-
gineering.
/ reshman 1 eai , Si e page -15)
N, iplh >m< 're Year (Same as Industrial Engineering )
Junior )'iar. First Semester ( 1 8 credit hours)
IE 101 Fundamentals of Manufacturing Engineering
(4)
II 'ii • Engineering Statistics (3)
Math 205 Linear Methods (3)
Engineering Science Elective (3)
GS Requirement (3)
Eco Any Course (3)
Junior Year, Second Semester (18 credit hours)
IE 102 Work Systems (3)
IE 206 Operation Research Techniques (4)
Engineering Science Elective (6)
GS Requirement (3)
Eco 335 Manpower Economics (3)
Those students who will major in accounting in the fifth year
will take Acctg. 51, 52, 215, and one 300-level Accounting
course (excluding Acctg. 390, Internship) in their junior and
senior years instead of Acctg. 108, Mkt. 211, Fin. 225, and
Eco. 335.
Senior Year, First Semester (18 credit hours)
Acctg 108 Fundamentals of Accounting (3)
IE Electives (6)
Engineering Science Elective (3)
Engl Elective (3)
Mkt 211 The American Marketing System (3)
Senior Year, Second Semester (18 credit hours)
IE 154 Project (3)
IE Electives (9)
Engl Elective (3)
Fin 225 Business Finance (3)
Majors in personnel and industrial relations must pursue the
following program for the fifth year:
Required Courses
Fifth Year, First Semester (9 credit hours)
Law 101 Business Law (3)
Eco 129 Money and Banking (3)
Psych 201 Industrial Psychology (3)
Fifth Year, Second Semester (12 credit hours)
Eco 206 Microeconomic Analysis (3)
Eco 338 Labor Market Institutions (3)
SR11 Sociology (3)
Eco 346 Business Cycles (3)
154 Five-Y 'ear Programs
and twelve credit hours from the following:
Fin 323 Investments (3)
Fin 353 Public Finance: Federal (3)
Fin 340 International Finance (3)
Eco 347 National Income Analysis (3)
Eco 371 Readings in Economics (3)
Eco 352 Advanced Statistical Method (3)
Law 102 Business Law (3)
Govt 360 Public Administration (3)
Eco 372 Readings in Economics (3)
IE 334 Organizational Planning and Control (3)
Mgt 321 Organization Behavior (3)
SR 65 Contemporary Problems in Society (3)
Engineering-M.B.A. Program
This program is designed to meet the needs of competent
students in any of the engineering curricula who wish to add
to their engineering studies training in business management
at an advanced level.
The time involved is five years, but a summer session
would be necessary to attain both a bachelor's degree in engi-
neering and a master's degree in business administration or
management science. In addition to a course in economics,
which is required of all engineering undergraduates, twenty-
one to thirty hours of basic business courses are necessary to
meet the background requirements for the M.B.A. degree. If
as much as eighteen hours of such courses can be rostered in
the student's engineering curriculum, the remaining twelve
hours can be obtained in one summer. Otherwise, attendance
at an additional summer session would be necessary. Candi-
dates for each program will be required to take the Admis-
sion Test for Graduate Study in Business, or GRE exam.
For background courses required for the M.B.A., engi-
neering students should see graduate study in business and
economics, and consult with assistant dean ot the college,
Max D. Snider.
Arts-M.B.A. Program
This program is designed to meet the needs of students in the
College of Arts and Science who wish to add to their arts
studies training in business management at an advanced level.
The time involved in the program is five years, but a cer-
tain amount of summer session work may be necessary for
majors in the sciences to attain both a B.A. and a master's
degree in business administration within that period. In addi-
tion to one course in economics, which can be counted as
part of the social science distribution requirements, thirty
hours of basic business courses are needed to meet the back-
ground requirements. Thirty hours of requirements for the
M.B.A. degree must also be completed.
For background courses for the M.B.A., students should
see graduate study in business in economics, and consult with
assistant dean of the college, Max D. Snider. Many of the
background courses can be rostered in the student's arts
curriculum.
B.S. Engineering— M.S. Materials
A special program leading to an M.S. degree in materials is
offered for engineering graduates who complete prerequisite
courses in physical chemistry, metallurgy, mechanics, etc.
Careful selection of technical electives by interested Lehigh
undergraduate students can provide for the required prerequi-
site courses in typical engineering B.S. degree programs; alter-
nately, for other students, the prerequisite courses are taken
before proceeding with the program. This program is intend-
ed to give in-depth training in one of the normal engineering
disciplines during four years, combined with an understand-
ing of materials behavior in graduate study in approximately
15 months. While intended primarily as a terminal degree for
those entering industry, the M.S. in materials provides suffi-
cient flexibility to permit those interested in a career in
materials research to continue for a Ph.D. degree.
A schedule of prerequisite courses together with recom-
mended electives and a typical graduate program for
mechanical engineers is given below. Graduate programs for
other engineering disciplines can be developed by consulta-
tion with the appropriate department advisor and the
director of the Materials Research Center.
Prerequisite Courses
Science Orientation (21 credit hours)
Met 91 Elements of Materials Science (3)
Chem 196 Physical Chemistry (3)
Met 210 Metallurgical Thermodynamics (3)
Met 361 Physics of Materials (3)
Met 362 Structure and Properties of Materials (3)
Electives (6)
Engineering Orientation (21 credit hours)
Met 63 Engineering Materials and Processes (3)
Chem 196 Physical Chemistry (3)
Met 207 Electronic & Crystal Structure (3)
Met 208 Phase Diagrams & Transformations (3)
Met 210 Metallurgical Thermodynamics (3)
Met 218 Mechanical Behavior of Materials (3)
Electives (3)
Note: An alternative to Chem. 196 is Chem. 91 and Chem.
190.
Recommended Electives for Preparatory Program
Structure of Solids Group
Met 315 Introduction to Physical Ceramics (3)
Met 316 Physical Properties of Materials (3)
Met 317 Imperfections in Crystals (3)
Met 333 X-ray Methods (3)
Met 334 Electron Metallography (3)
Met 343 Physical Polymer Science (3)
Geol 333 Crystallography (3)
Phys 362 Atomic and Molecular Structure (3)
Five- Year Programs 1 55
Phys 163 Physics ol Solid
Math Approved Elective (3)
Physical Metallurgy Group
Structure A Bchavioi ol Materials (3)
Met 31 5 Introduction to Physical Ceramics
II (. Physical Properties of Materials (3)
Mel I] Imperfections in Crystals (3)
'' 113 Materials Fabrication (3)
Mel 133 X-ray Methods (3)
Met 3 ) I Electron Metallography (3)
Math Approved Elei th
Met 358 Selection of Materials (3)
Mechanics & Mechanical Behavior Group
ME 166 Procedures for Mechanical Design (2)
Mech 313 Fracture Mechanics (3)
Met 313 Materials Fabrication (3)
Met 317 Imperfections in Crystals (3)
Math Approved Elective (3)
Chemical Behavior Group
Met 304 Extractive Metallurgy 1 (4)
Met 305 Extractive Metallurgy II (3)
Met 312 Fundamentals of Corrosion (3)
Chem 381 Radiation and Structure (4)
Chem 382 Structure, Electrochemistry cV Kinetics (3)
ChE 392 Introduction to Polymer Science (3)
Chem 397 Colloids and Surface Chemistry (3)
Math Approved Elective
Typical M.S. Program in Materials
Mechanical Engineering Graduate
Fifth Year, First Semester
Met 333 X-ray Methods (3)
Met 408 Transformations (3)
Met 315 Physical Ceramics (3)
Met 418 Deformation and Fracture (3)
or
Approved Technical Elective (3)
Materials Research (3)
Fifth Year, Second Semester
Met 412 Electric & Magnetic Properties of Materials
(3)
Met 343 Physical Polymer Sicence (3)
Approved Technical Elective (3)
ME 444 Experimental Stress Analysis (3)
or
Approved Technical Elective (3)
Materials Research (3)
I .mis. ( Mii-rings in Materials
In addition to the courses noted in the list of recommended
el i- 1 I IV!". above, a ii 1 1 lube l i.l i.lliel (;i .ulu.i I •..■•, con-
. ei neil with the behavior ol materials are taught in the engi-
neering and science departments. Pertinent courses are listed
below by department, number and title, and credit hours.
Descriptions of these courses may be found in the respective
departmental listings in this catalog.
ChE 360 Nuclear Reactor Engineering (4)
ChE 394 Organic Polymer Science (3)
ChE 470 Cryogenic Engineering (3)
ChE 401 Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics (3)
ChE 413 Catalysis (3)
ChE 428 Rheology (3)
ChE 492 Topics in Polymer Science (3)
Chem 443 Solid State Chemistry (3)
Chem 497 Topics in Colloid and Surface Chemistry (3)
CE 459 Advanced Topics in Plastic Theory (3)
Geol 336 Mineral Phase Relations (3)
Geol 435 Advanced Mineralogy (3)
IE 344 Metal Cutting Theory (3)
ME 444 Experimental Stress Analysis in Design (3)
Mech 406 Advanced Vibrations (3)
Mech 409 Theory of Elasticity I (3)
Mech 410 Theory of Elasticity II (3)
Mech 412 Theory of Plasticity (3)
Mech 413 Fracture Mechanics (3)
Mech 415 Stability of Elastic Structures (3)
Met 319 Current Topics in Materials Science (3)
Met 320 Analytical Methods in Materials Science (3)
Met 358 Selection of Materials (3)
Met 406 Solidification (3)
Met 407 Theory of Alloy Phases (3)
Met 408 Transformations (3)
Met 410 The Physical Chemistry of Metals I (3)
Met 412 Electrical & Magnetic Properties of Materials
(3)
Met 413 Analysis of Metal Forming Processes (3)
Met 415 Mechanical Behavior of Ceramic Solids (3)
Met 416 Atom Movements (3)
Met 418 Deformation and Fracture (3)
Met 425 Topics in Materials Processing (3)
Met 437 Dislocations and Strength in Crystals (3)
Met 443 Solid State Chemistry (3)
Met 458 Metallurgical Design (3)
Met 461 Advanced Materials Research Techniques
(3)
Phys 340 Heat & Thermodynamics (3)
Phys 431 Theory of Solids (3)
Phys 442 Statistical Mechanics
Phys 471 Non-linear Continuum Mechanics (1-3)
Fifth Year, Summer Semester
Materials Research
156 Five-Y ear Programs
Foreign Careers
Finn B.Jensen, Chairman of Economics, Director of the
Foreign Careers Program
Major in Arts and Science College
The interdepartmental major in foreign careers is designed to
give students the grounding in language, history, economics,
and related subjects needed for successful work with private
industry or governmental agencies in their overseas activities.
Each student in the program will schedule all courses in
the common core and in one of the options. In addition, he
will, in consultation with the director, select courses in lan-
guage, history, and other subjects which will give him an in-
tensive knowledge of the culture of the area in which he is
interested. Students electing the Russian area option will be
expected to study Russian.
The program also affords a broad base for graduate study
in social sciences and business administration. Students inter-
ested in this aspect of the major sequence should consult the
director early in their college careers.
Common Core
Required Preliminary Courses
Eco 1 Economics (4)
Govt 3 Comparative Politics (3)
Math 21 Analytic Geometry and Calculus I (4)
or
Math 41 BMSS Calculus I (3)
Eco 45 Statistical Method (3)
Concentration in the Latin American area
Eco 305 Economic Development of Latin America
(3)
SR 367 Latin American Social Institutions (3)
Hist Six hours of Latin American History (6)
Concentration in the European area
Eco 309 Comparative Economic Systems (3)
Eco 343 European Economic Integration (3)
Hist Six hours of European History (6)
Concentration in the Russian area
Eco 309 Comparative Economic Systems (3)
Govt 362 The Soviet System of Government (3)
IR 133, 134 Diplomacy of Russia (6)
IR 334 The Soviet Union in World Affairs (3)
Foreign Trade Option
Acctg 51 Essentials of Accounting (3)
or
Acctg 108 Fundamentals of Accounting (3)
Eco 129 Money and Banking (3)
Eco 339, 340 International Trade & Finance (6)
Eco In consultation with the advisor
Public Administration Option
Acctg 51 Essentials of Accounting (3)
or
Acctg 108 Fundamentals of Accounting (3)
IR 352 International Organization (3)
or
IR 361 International Law (3)
Eco 353 Public Finance (3)
Govt 360 Public Administration (3)
Govt 363 Contemporary Political Philosophy (3)
or
Govt 364 Contemporary Political Analysis (3)
Govt 361 Comparative Administrative Systems (3)
Govt 322 Developing Countries (3)
A senior comprehensive examination in the appropriate
language is required.
Open Option
In place of any of the three preceding options, a student may
take an open option by meeting the advanced course require-
ments for one of the other arts college majors. The open op-
tion is most feasible with humanities and social science
majors but will require a careful combining of distribution
courses and free electives with the eighteen hours normally
given to the option. Students interested in the open option
should consult the director of the Foreign Careers major as
early as possible.
Major in Business and Economics College
Required: 15 credit hours beyond the core
Eco 303
Eco 309
Eco 339
Eco 340
Eco 305
Eco 343
Economic Development (3)
Comparative Economic Systems (3)
International Trade (3)
International Finance (3)
The Economic Development of Latin
America (3)
or
European Economic Integration (3)
To qualify for this major, include at least one year (beyond
the introductory course) of foreign language of your area in
the language option as well as one year of history of your
area and Government 3 (Comparative Politics) in your social
science option.
Foreign Careers 151
Fundamental Sciences
Robert T. Gallagher, Issociate Dean oj the College of
Engineering, Director oj Fundamental Sciences Program
The curriculum in Fundamental Sciences is designed to en-
able students to achieve a breadth of academic background in
the basic fields of modern science and at the same time,
through an option, to master the discipline of one of them,
about to the level of a minimum bachelor's program. The
options and electives provide flexibility by which a student
may prepare for work in industry or government, or ap-
proach adequacy for graduate study in a field.
The program offers excellent opportunity tor students
who are uncertain of their desire for a career in a particular
field to proceed on a broad program which can lead to a
bachelor's degree. If the student's interest crystallizes in an
established field, transfer to that major will normally be
possible with only a minimum of dislocation, especially if the
student has completed the introductory courses in that field.
Fundamental science majors are required to concentrate
in a major or in a hybrid of two fields. Thus students can
organize acceptable programs including the substantive
course elements related to any one among several areas such
as chemistry, physics and mathematics, biology, earth and
space science, science of living systems, materials, computer
science, and architecture, or meaningful combinations of any
two of these.
Work in the major science subjects is continuous through
all four years. The freshman year is identical with that re-
quired of all students in the College of Engineering. The
general studies (GS) requirements of the engineering college
must also be satisfied. The discipline of a science will be pro-
vided by the inclusion of at least 15 semester hours or from a
combination which constitutes the core of one of the hybrid
fields, for example, geophysics or biochemistry.
The details of the student's program will be worked out
by the student with the advice of the curriculum advisor, and
with the approval of the department chairmen concerned
with the field of concentration.
Sophomore Year, Sei ond Semester ( / 7 credit hours)
Major (3)
Approved Elective (3)
Math 205 Linear Methods (3)
Phys 21 , M Introductory Physics II & Lab (5)
GS Elective (3)
Junior Vcijr, First Semester (15-16 credit hours)
i',co\ 1 Principles of Geology (3)
or
Biol 21, 22 Principles of Biology and Lab (4)
Psych 3 Psychology as a Natural Science (3)
Math 231 Statistical Inference (3)
Major (3)
GS Elective (3)
Junior Year, Second Semester (IS credit hours)
Approved Electives (6)
Major (6)
Elective (3)
Senior Year, hirst Semester (15-18 credit hours)
Approved Electives (6)
Major (6)
GS Elective (3)
Elective (0-3)*
Senior Year, Second Semester (15-18 credit hours)
Phil 42 The Scientific Process (3)
Approved Elective (3)
Major (6)
GS Elective (3)
Elective (0-3)*
*Note: The lower number of credit hours represents the load
required to meet the graduation requirement; the higher
figure represents the normal semester load.
Freshman Year (See page 45)
Sophomore Year, First Semester (15-16 credit hours)
Biol 21, 22 Principles of Biology and Lab (4)
or
Geol 1 Principles of Geology (3)
Chem 51, 53 Organic Chemistry and Lab (4)
Math 23 Analytical Geometry and Calculus III (4)
Eco 1 Economics (4)
158 Fundamental Sciences
Geological Sciences
Professors
J. Donald Ryan, Ph.D., Chairman
James M. Parks, Ph.D., Director, Center for Marine and Envi-
ronmental Studies
Adrian F. Richards, Ph.D.
Charles B. Sclar, Ph.D.
Dale R. Simpson, Ph.D.
Associate Professor
Paul B. Myers, Jr., Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
Bobb Carson, Ph.D.
Richard L. Stocker, Ph.D.
John R. Sumner, Ph.D.
Geology, and related sciences such as geophysics and geo-
chemistry, deal with natural phenomena on or within the
earth. Each is a science which makes use of other more
fundamental sciences in its practice; hence, the student pre-
paring for a career in one of the geological sciences must
combine study in geology with a broad understanding of
physical, chemical, and biological principles.
Lehigh offers two undergraduate programs in geological
science, one leading to the degree of B.S. in geological
sciences, the other to the degree of B.A. The B.A. program
requires fewer credits for graduation (120 vs. 126 credit
hours), fewer courses in collateral sciences and mathematics
(34 vs. 37 credit hours), and fewer geology courses (31 vs. 38
credit hours). Candidates for the B.S. degree are also required
to take 15 credit hours in approved professional electives.
The professional electives permit the student to arrange for
an informal option in an area such as geophysics, geochemis-
try, engineering geology, etc.
Students electing the B.A. program are required to meet
the distribution requirements of the College of Arts and
Science; candidates for the B.S. degree take 30 credit hours
of non-professional electives in place of the distribution re-
quirements. Distribution requirements for the B.A. program
include at least second-year (intermediate level) proficiency in
one foreign language. There is no foreign language require-
ment in the B.S. program. However, it is strongly recom-
mended that all students planning on attending graduate
school, who have not previously studied either French,
German or Russian, should include courses in one of these
languages in their undergraduate programs.
Attendance at an approved summer geology field camp is
required in both programs. Lehigh does not operate its own
field camp but arrangements are easily made for Lehigh stu-
dents to attend field camps operated by other colleges and
universities.
Both the B.S. program and the B.A. program provide pre-
paration for graduate school.
Qualified students may be given permission at the end of
the junior year to enter a program whereby they are able to
begin work toward a graduate degree (M.S. or Ph.D.) during
the senior year. Students enrolled in this program often will
be able to complete all requirements for the M.S. degree with
only one year of study beyond the baccalaureate.
Geological training may be utilized in industry (especially
in the petroleum, mining, highway construction, ceramics,
and metallurgical industries), government service, natural
resource management, and in secondary school and college
teaching. Students planning on careers in industry are advised
to register for the B.S. program.
B.S. in Geological Sciences (126 credit hours)
College and University Requirements (36 credit hours)
Engl 1 Composition and Literature (3)
Engl 2, 10, 14, or 16 Composition and Literature (3)
Electives (30 credit hours)
Elective courses are non-professional courses designed to give
the student a broad understanding in traditional and con-
temporary fields of thought outside of natural science and
mathematics. The courses are chosen by the student. The
elective program shall include a large number of courses
broadly distributed among the various areas of the humani-
ties and the social sciences.
Tile Major Program (90 credit hours)
Mathematics (12 credit hours)
Math 21 Analytic Geometry and Calculus I (4)
Math 22 Analytic Geometry and Calculus II (4)
Math 23 Analytic Geometry and Calculus III (4)
Collateral Sciences (25 credit hours)
Chem 21, 22 Introductory Chemical Principles and Lab
Chem 39
Chem 90
Phys 11, 12
Phys21,22
Biol 21, 22
(5)
Analytical Chemistry (3)
Physical Chemistry (3)
Introductory Physics I and Lab (5)
Introductory Physics II and Lab (5)
Principles of Biology and Lab (4)
Geology (38 credit hours)
Geol 1 Principles of Geology (3)
Geol 10 Computer Applications (1)
Geol 12 Historical Geology (3)
Geol 23 Structural Geology (3)
Geol 33 Introductory Mineralogy and Petrology (3)
Geol 301 Introduction to Geophysics (3)
Geol 311 Paleontology (3)
Geological Sciences 159
Geol l ; Scdimcntology (3)
Gcol 333 Crystallography (3)
tic. 'I Petrology and Petrography (4)
(36 Mineral Phase Relations (3)
Field Camp (6)
Approved Professional Electives (15 credit hours)
Courses approved to fulfill this requirement should form a
coherent package supporting the professional objectives of
the student.
B.A. with Geology Major (120 credit hours)
College and University Requirements
Engl 1 Composition and Literature (3)
Engl 2, 10, 14 or 16 Composition and Literature (3)
Distribution Requirements (See page 35)
Tlie Major Program (65 credit hours)
Mathematics (12 credit hours)
Math 21 Analytic Geometry and Calculus I (4)
Math 22 Analytic Geometry and Calculus II (4)
Math 23 Analytic Geometry and Calculus III (4)
Collateral Sciences (22 credit hours)
Chem 21, 22 Introductory Chemical Principles and Lab
(5)
Chem Approved elective (3)
Phys 11, 12 Introductory Physics I and Lab (5)
Phys 21, 22 Introductory Physics II and Lab (5)
Biol 21, 22 Principles of Biology and Lab (4)
Geology (31 credit hours)
Geol 1 Principles of Geology (3)
Geol 10 Computer Applications (1)
Geol 12 Historical Geology (3)
Geol 23 Structural Geology (3)
Geol 33 Introductory Mineralogy and Petrology (3)
Geol Approved electives (12)
Field Camp (6)
Combined B.A. or B.S. and M.S. Program in Geological
Sciences
The department of geological sciences offers a combined B.A.
or B.S. and M.S. program in geological sciences. Students
working toward the B.A. in geology or the B.S. in geological
sciences who are enrolled in this program are permitted to
take courses which apply toward the M.S. degree during their
senior year. Usually this will permit completion of the M.S.
program within one year (or less) of receiving the bachelor's
degree. During the student's senior year, his normal under-
graduate tuition will cover the costs of all courses taken in-
cluding those which are taken for graduate credit. After re-
ceiving the bachelor's degree, students registered in the pro-
gram who have done satisfactory work may acquire upon
admission to the graduate school full-time graduate status,
and as such, they will become eligible to apply for appoint-
ment to a teaching assistantship, research assistantship, or
graduate fellowship.
The program is designed for those students who upon
completing the junior year and the field camp requirement
need less than 30 credit hours to complete work for the
bachelor's degree. Students accepted into the program
generally also must rank in the upper-half of their class and
must have at least a "B" average in all geology courses com-
pleted.
Application for admission to the program should be made
during the spring semester of the junior year (generally at the
time of preregistration or later) and must be approved by the
department faculty and the Dean of the Graduate School.
The application must include (1) a tentative M.S. program
approved by the department chairman, and (2) a roster, also
approved by the department chairman showing which courses
taken during the senior year apply toward the bachelor's
degree and which courses apply toward the master's degree.
No more than 15 credit hours per semester may be rostered.
A total of 150 credit hours is required for the combined
B.A. -M.S. program and a total of 1 56 credit hours is required
for the combined B.S.-M.S. program. All of the normal re-
quirements for each degree as outlined in this catalog must be
fulfilled.
Students enrolled in the program should make application
for admission to full-time graduate status after completing
the first semester of the senior year.
Undergraduate Courses
1. Principles of Geology (3)
Fundamental concepts of geology; the composition, struc-
ture, and development of the earth; processes of geological
change. Lectures, laboratory work, and field trip.
10. Computer Applications (1)
The use of computers in the solution of geological problems.
Introduction to FORTRAN; the use of published and avail-
able programs.
12. Historical Geology (3)
The origin and evolution of the earth and its parts— the con-
tinents, ocean basins, hydrosphere, and atmosphere; the
origin and evolution of life; regional studies. Lectures, labora-
tory, and field trips. Prerequisite: Geol. 1.
23. Structural Geology (3)
The application of basic concepts of stress and strain and
experimental data to study of the developments of faults,
folds, and other deformational structures in the earth's crust.
Introduction to the larger scale problems of geotectonics.
Prerequisite: Geol. 1.
160 Geological Sciences
33. Introductory Mineralogy and Petrology (3)
Principles of crystallography, mineralogy, and petrology;
megascopic study, identification, and description of common
minerals and rocks. Lectures and laboratory. Prerequisites:
Geol. l,Chem. 21.
101. Geology for Engineering (3)
A study of the materials which make up the earth, the physi-
cal, chemical, and environmental history that they relate, and
the processes that act to change them. Designed primarily for
upperclass science and engineering majors. Lectures and
laboratory -recitation.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
201. Earth Sciences I— Geology (3)
Fundamental concepts of geology; composition and structure
of the earth, dynamics of natural processes, evolution and
development of the earth. Must be taken concurrently with
Geol. 203. Designed for secondary school science teachers.
Prerequisites: graduate standing or consent of chairman of
department.
203. Geology Workshop (3)
Field and laboratory exercises in geology. Must be taken con-
currently with Geol. 201.
211. Environmental Planning (3)
The systems approach to resource development as it relates
to analysis of the need of society. The physical factors of the
environment are presented as a framework of reference for
evaluation of the developmental alternatives facing individu-
als and society. Lectures and laboratory.
212. Geomorphology and Surficial Geology (3)
Systematic examination of the surface features of the earth
and their interpretation as records of geologic and environ-
mental history. Special emphasis on quantitative methods as
applied to geomorphologic investigation, the development
and environmental significance of surficial mantles, the
physical and sociological effects of Pleistocene glaciation.
Lectures and occasional field trips.
281. Geological Research (1-3)
Independent investigation of a special problem in the field,
laboratory, or library. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of
department.
282. Geological Research (1-3)
Similar to Geol. 281. May be elected as a continuation or
separately. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of department.
301. Introduction to Geophysics (3)
The application of the principles and practices of physics to
the solution of problems related to the earth. The origin of
the earth; geochronology; temperature of the earth; seis-
mology, gravitation; geomagnetism, terrestrial electricity.
Prerequisite: senior standing or consent of chairman of
department.
304. Topics in Geophysics (3)
The application of seismic, electrical, magnetic, and gravity
measurements to the solution of problems in crustal geology
and exploration. Includes field exercises. Prerequisite: Geol.
301.
311. Paleontology (3)
Morphology of invertebrate fossils, their use in interpreting
geologic history; evolution of the faunas and floras. Lectures
and laboratory work. Prerequisite: Biol. 21.
313. Sedimentology (3)
The processes that control weathering, transportation, and
deposition of sediments; the characteristics of sediments and
environments of deposition. Lectures and laboratory. Prere-
quisite: Geol. 333.
314. Weathering and Pedogenesis (3)
An introduction to the study or rock weathering and soil
formation. Processes of rock breakdown; alteration of rock
materials at the earth's surface; the development of soil hori-
zonation and soil morphology. Prerequisite: consent of de-
partment chairman.
317. (Biol. 317) Evolution (3)
For course description see Biology 317.
320. Advanced Computer Applications (1-3)
Independent investigation of special problems utilizing com-
puter techniques. Prerequisite: Geol. 10 or consent of chair-
man of department.
321. Statistical Applications (3)
Statistical models applicable to geological, geophysical, and
geochemical field and laboratory studies. Analysis of vari-
ance, applications of the chi-square distribution, analysis of
covariance, linear, non-linear and multiple regression, and
distribution-free methods.
322. Geological Sampling (2)
Consideration of elements of sampling theory applicable to
geological problems. Geological populations and their varia-
bility, sampling techniques and program design, statistical
inference. Prerequisite: consent of department chairman or
Geol. 321.
333. Crystallography (3)
Fundamentals of crystallography and crystal structure;
patterns and symmetries, symmetry notations, crystal mor-
phologies and internal structure, principles of crystal chemis-
try. The anisotropy of crystalline materials with special
reference to crystal optics. Lectures and laboratory. Prere-
quisite: Chem. 21.
Geological Sciences 161
ill. Pctrolupy .1 111.I Petrography (■•)
Evolution of crystalline rocks and their distribution in space
.md time; physical and chemical factors in igneous and meta-
morphic processes. Microscopic study of rocks. Lectures,
laboratory work, and field trips. Prerequisite: Geo). 333.
336. Mineral Phase Relations (3)
Principles o( phase equilibria; unicomponent and multicom-
ponent condensed systems and multicomponent systems with
volatile phases. The application of phase relation studies to
mineralogic.il and geological problems. Prerequisites: Chem.
21, Geol 333. Lectures and laboratory.
337. (Met. 333) X-ray Methods (3)
For description, see Met. 333.
338. (Met. 334) Electron Metallography (3)
For description, see Met. 334.
352. Applied Mineralogy (3)
Methods and approaches to the solution of industrial and
environmental problems employing modern mineralogical
techniques, especially transmitted— and incident-light polari-
zing microscopy and X-ray powder diffraction. Case histories
of interest to geologists, chemists, ceramists, chemical, metal-
lurgical, and mineral engineers, environmental engineers, and
materials scientists. Lectures and laboratory. Prerequisite:
Geol. 333 or consent of chairman of department.
356. Ground Water (3)
The geology and geochemistry of ground water. Techniques
used in prospecting for ground water, ground water law, man-
agement and conservation, evaluation and planning. Prerequi-
sites: Chem. 21, 22, Geol. 23.
357. Economic Geology (3)
The formation of mineral deposits and the occurrence and
characteristics of deposits of economic importance. Includes
metals, non-metals, and fuels. Lectures, laboratory work, and
inspection trips.
363. Introduction to Oceanography (3)
A survey of the physical, chemical, biological, and geological
nature of the oceans. Two lectures, one recitation. Prerequi-
site: one year of science (biology, chemistry, geology or
physics).
372. Principles of Geochemistry (3)
Synthesis of the geological, chemical, physical, and astro-
nomical observations regarding the geochemical evolution of
the earth, its internal constitution, and the physico-chemical
processes which modify the crust. Crystal-chemical controls
on the abundance and distribution of the chemical elements.
Experimental high-pressure studies of geochemical signifi-
cance. Shock metamorphism as a geochemical process on the
surface of the earth, moon, and planets. Prerequisite: consent
of chairman of department.
181. Meteorology (3)
Principles ol meteorology: composition ol the atmosphere,
physics of the air, weather systems, weather instruments and
tore casting. Two lectures, one laboratory.
391. Field Seminar (1)
Study of regional geological problems using field methods of
analysis. Field trips. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of
department.
for Graduates
The graduate program in geology is mainly directed toward
the study of geologic processes. Candidates for the master's
degree receive instruction in most fields of geology and are
expected to take courses in appropriate collateral fields of
science. Advanced graduate students, working toward the
doctorate, specialize in one field of geology.
Research is an important part of the graduate program. In
general, students are encouraged to choose research problems
which for their solution required the use of integrated labora-
tory and field studies.
Candidates for the master's degree are required to take a
comprehensive examination during the semester in which
they expect to take their degree. The examination also serves
as a qualifying examination for admission to candidacy for
the doctoral degree. Students entering with the master's de-
gree take the comprehensive examination at the end of their
first semester of residence.
Candidates for the Ph.D. degree must demonstrate
through examination a thorough reading knowledge of one
foreign language, generally French, German, or Russian.
Other requirements for graduate degrees are listed in the
graduate school section of this catalog.
Special departmental research facilities of interest in-
clude: Norelco X-ray diffraction unit, Beckman DU spectro-
photometer, Bechman infra-red analyzer, Coleman nitrogen
analyzer, pH meters, petrographic and binocular microscopes,
size analysis equipment for sedimentation studies, chemical
balances, hoods, etc., Schmidt-type Askania magnetometer,
Worden gravity meter, Gish-Rooney electrical field equip-
ment, standard equipment for geological mapping, Soltzman
map projector, furnaces for hydrothermal studies.
402. Electrical Methods (3)
Electrical properties of rocks and minerals; the principles of
potential distribution in DC and AC fields. Prerequisites:
mathematics through calculus and consent of the instructor.
405. The Earth's Magnetism (3)
Terrestrial magnetism, rock magnetism, history of the geo-
magnetic field, spherical harmonics, and the interpretation of
magnetic anomalies. Prerequisite: Phys. 21.
411. Advanced Paleontology (4)
Classification, evolution, biometrics, and paleoecology; study
of fossil and modern populations and assemblages. Lectures
and laboratories. Prerequisite: Geol. 311.
162 Geological Sciences
417. Sedimentary Petrography (3)
The theory and application of petrographic methods in the
study and classification of sedimentary rocks. Prerequisite:
Geol. 334.
462. Paleoecology (3)
Reconstruction of paleoenvironments based on principles of
paleoecology and sedimentary petrology. Prerequisites: Geol.
311,313.
418. Sedimentary Petrogenesis (3)
The origin and development of sedimentary rock types;
mineral provenance, environment of deposition, diagenesis,
sediments in time, stratigraphic synthesis. Prerequisite: Geol.
417.
421. Global Tectonics (3)
Topics include upper mantle composition and configuration,
interrelations between the earth's crust and upper mantle,
geophysical data related to hypotheses in global tectonics,
continental drift and the plate model. Seminars and lectures.
422. Regional Tectonics (3)
Concepts of global tectonics as applied to the geology of
specific areas of the earth's crust. The tectonics of the
Alpine-Himalayan chain, Rockies, Caledonides, Appalachian,
coast ranges, and African Rift system are among those sub-
jects considered. Seminars and lectures. Prerequisite: consent
of chairman of department.
424. Advanced Structural Geology (3)
The theory and application of analytical methods in the
study of rock deformation; experimental deformation, petro-
fabric analysis; statistical field methods.
435. Advanced Mineralogy (3)
Topics of contemporary interest in mineralogy. Prerequisite:
Chem. 302 or equivalent.
436. Advanced Mineralogy (3)
Similar to Geol. 435. Prerequisite: Chem. 302 or equivalent.
May be elected separately. Offered as required.
437. Advanced Igneous Petrology (3)
Origin of the diversity of igneous rocks as revealed by field
and laboratory studies. Lectures, laboratory, and field trips.
438. Advanced Metamorphic Petrology (3)
Processes involved in the transformation of rock masses
under high pressure and temperature. Problems of the deep
crust and upper mantle. Lectures, laboratory, and field trips.
454. Genesis of Metalliferous Deposits (3)
Petrological concepts regarding the origin of metalliferous ore
deposits. Laboratory includes ore-mineral synthesis, ore
microscopy, and electron microprobe analysis of ores. Field
examination of ore deposits at operating mines.
461. Marine Geology (3)
Geology of the margins and the floors of the oceans.
471. High-Pressure Petrology (3)
High-pressure phase transformations, phase equilibria, and
melting phenomena in multicomponent systems of petro-
logical importance as applied to problems of the deep crust
and upper mantle in the pressure range 15 to 150 kilobars at
temperatures to 1500 degrees Centigrade. Effect of water as a
free phase at high-pressure, and the pressure dependence of
ionization phenomena in aquaeous systems. Lectures and
laboratories.
472. Solution Geochemistry (3)
The processes of solution, transport, and deposition under
hydrothermal conditions. Prerequisite: consent of chairman
of department.
480. (Biol. 480) Marine Science Seminar (1)
For description, see Biol. 480.
481. Geological Investigation (1-6)
Research on a special problem field, laboratory, or library
study; report required. Credit above three hours granted only
when a different problem is undertaken.
482. Geological Investigation (1-6)
Similar to Geol. 481. Credit above three hours granted only
when a different problem is undertaken.
483. Thesis (3)
May be elected only by master's degree candidates.
484. Thesis (3)
Continuation of Geol. 483.
490. Special Topics (3)
An extensive study of selected topics not covered in more
general courses.
491. Special Topics (3)
Similar to Geol. 490. May be elected separately.
Geological Sciences 1 63
Government
Professors
Charles Allan McCoy, Ph.D., Chairman
Donald Dclylc Barry, Ph.D.
W. Ross Yates, Ph.D.
Associate Professors
Frank Thomas Colon, Ph.D.
Leonard I. Ruchelman, Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
Charles N. Brownstcin, Ph.D.
Howard R. Whitcomb, Ph.D.
The major in government is designed to promote understand-
ing of political ideas, institutions and processes and to devel-
op skills in analyzing and evaluating political problems. These
goals can best be achieved when a student is enabled to
assume a large measure of responsibility for his own educa-
tion. He should be free to study in either structured or un-
structured ways. The government department curriculum is
designed so that the undergraduate can develop, with the
approval of an advisor, a plan of course study in line with his
interests, concerns and knowledge. The only requirements are
that the student majoring in government take one of the two
basic courses in the curriculum, Government 1 and Govern-
ment 3, and that he complete thirty-three (33) semester
hours of study in the department, at least fifteen (15) of
which must be in advanced courses. As an alternative to the
student-designed major program, the department offers a
suggested major as a model for a more structured plan from
which the student may work.
A balanced program within the discipline, one which ex-
poses the student to various areas of inquiry in American
institutions and political processes as well as in the compara-
tive and philosophical perspectives of political analysis, has
been the way in which the goals of the major program
generally have been achieved. While this approach will con-
tinue to be presented to the student by the advisor, individual
differences and the goal of student responsibility militate
against making such a program mandatory.
The faculty advisor to the student majoring in the govern-
ment department is designated by the department. The ad-
visor consults with the student and approves his major pro-
gram. He attempts to help the student relate courses offered
by the department to the student's educational goals. He may
also act as a resource for the student, and may suggest
courses in other disciplines, language courses, and courses in
research techniques which may be of benefit to the student.
Completion ol the government majoi is considered suit-
able training for the undergraduate who wishes to go on to
law school, and to become ;i smi.i! a ieni e teacher, or to
work in such positions as governmental official, party or civic
leader, public affairs commentator or staff member of a
governmental research bureau. Graduate study is advisable
for students contemplating certain careers— college teaching,
research, or public management, for example.
The following is a suggested major program which serves
as a guide to a government major. Such a program would
probably meet the needs of most students.
Preliminary Courses
Govt 1 American Political System (3)
Govt 3 Comparative Politics (3)
Advanced Courses
Govt 103
Govt 321
Electivcs
Modern Political Philosophy (3)
Methods for Political Research (3)
Seven elective courses with at least two courses from each of
the following two fields:
American Politics— Public Law
Govt 74 Political Parties (3)
Govt 77 Urban Politics (3)
Govt 302 Comparative State Politics (3)
Govt 306 Public Policy Process (3)
Govt 325 Electoral Process (3)
Govt 351 Constitutional Law (3)
Govt 352 Civil Rights (3)
Govt 353 Law and Politics (3)
Govt 354 Administrative Law (3)
Govt 358 Community and Regional Politics (3)
Govt 359 The Legislative Process (3)
Govt 360 Public Administration (3)
Political Theory— Comparative Politics
Govt 78 Political Behavior (3)
Govt 308 Classical Political Heritage (3)
Govt 316 American Political Ideas (3)
Govt 322 Politics of Developing Nations (3)
Govt 324 Political Systems in Transition (3)
Govt 362 The Soviet Political System (3)
Govt 363 Contemporary Political Philosophy (3)
Govt 364 Contemporary Political Analysis (3)
Govt 365 Political Values of Neo-Freudians and
Existentialists (3)
Urban Studies Option in Government
The government major is eligible to participate in the Urban
Studies Program which is a multi-disciplinary focus on the
urban process. Interested students should refer for details
under Division of Urban Studies, Government Department.
164 Government
Undergraduate Courses
1. American Political System (3)
Constitutional principles; organization and operation of the
national government; the party system, citizenship, and civil
rights.
3. Comparative Politics (3)
The political systems of foreign countries; approaches to the
study of comparative politics.
74. Political Parties (3)
Organization, function, behavior and effect of parties on the
democratic process.
77. Urban Politics (3)
The structure and processes of city government in the United
States; city-state and federal-city relationships; the problems
of metropolitan areas; political machines and community
power structures; the urban politics of municipal reform; city
planning and urban renewal.
78. Political Behavior (3)
Behavioral approaches to political science. Application to
substantive topics and examples of current research.
103. Modern Political Philosophy (3)
Analysis of schools of political thought, including Contract
Theorists, Utilitarians, Idealists, and Marxists.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
302. Comparative State Politics (3]
Analysis of major questions relating to the role of the states
in the American federal systems and their relationship with
the national government.
306. Public Policy Process (3)
An analysis of the external and internal influences on the
public policy process of formal governmental institutions.
308. Classical Political Heritage (3)
The contribution of significant political theorists from Plato
to modern times.
311. Teaching Civil Liberties (3)
Consideration of fundamental civil liberties issues in constitu-
tional perspective. Designed for improving the teaching of
constitutional freedom in public and private schools. Free-
dom of speech, religious freedom, racial equality, censorship.
Materials and methods for teaching the Constitution and the
Bill of Rights. Designed primarily for secondary school
teachers.
312. Workshop in Teaching Civil Liberties (3)
Research and library work, outside lectures, observation of
court and administrative procedures pertaining to civil liber-
ties. Must be taken concurrently with Govt. 311 when
courses are offered together.
313. Teaching Government (3)
Consideration of contemporary issues which arise in the
teaching of social studies in the public and private schools,
including those governmental decisions which affect the
educational environment. The course during any given year
will focus its attention on a specific issue such as urban prob-
lems, comparative political systems, ideologies and American
political institutions and processes. Designed primarily for
secondary school teachers.
314. Workshop in Teaching Government (3)
Individual research projects on contemporary issues and dis-
cussion of proposals for curriculum revisions in the public
and private schools. Outside speakers will be invited to attend
workshop sessions. Must be taken concurrently with Govt.
313 when courses are offered together.
316. American Political Ideas (3)
A survey of the ideas underlying and associated with the
political institutions and practices of the United States.
321. Methods for Political Research (3)
Introduction to research, research design (survey, experimen-
tal, aggregate), statistical and non-statistical analysis, and
computer applications.
322. Politics of Developing Nations (3)
Theories of political development in non-Western areas, em-
phasizing the tasks of modernization and nation building.
Field studies and methods will be examined. The contribu-
tions of related disciplines such as sociology and psychology
will be explored.
324. Political Systems in Transition (3)
Studies of the responses of selected non-communist states to
contemporary problems. May be repeated for credit with
consent of instructor.
325. Electoral Process (3)
Public opinion, voting behavior, campaigns and elections.
351. Constitutional Law (3)
The law of the Constitution as expounded by the Supreme
Court of the United States. Nature and origins of judicial
review, distribution and scope of governmental powers, and
economic regulation in a federal system. Detailed considera-
tion of judicial and policy decision-making processes.
352. Civil Rights (3)
A study of constitutional development in political and civil
rights. Freedom of speech and of the press, religious freedom,
due process of law and equal protection of the laws. Detailed
consideration of constitution issues concerning criminal pro-
cedure and racial discrimination.
Government 165
(S3. 1 aw and Politii s (3)
An examination ol the techniques ol legal political analysis
and .1 study of the uses of the U-g.il process in the political
sphere. A large part of the course will involve the examina
t ion of law and politics in the United States, but pertinent
materials and examples from oilier countries will also be
drawn on.
154. Administrative L.nv (3)
Consideration of the authority, procedures, and methods
utilized by executive agencies in the administration of public
policy. Analysis of the general problem ol adjusting the ad-
ministrative process to traditional constitutional principles.
358. Community and Regional Politics (3)
Analysis of the changing political dimension of community in
the context of regionalism. Attention directed to "the metro-
politan problem."
359. The Legislative Process (3)
Organization and procedure of legislative and constituent
assemblies. Legislative leadership. Role of administrative and
judicial agencies in law-making. Pressure groups, parties, and
policy determination. Direct legislation.
360. Public Administration (3)
The nature of administration; problems of organization and
management; public personnel policies; budgeting and bud-
getary systems; forms of administrative responsibility.
362. The Soviet Political System (3)
An examination of the roles of the Communist Party, the
Council of Ministers, the Supreme Soviet and other govern-
mental and social organizations in governing the U.S.S.R.
363. Contemporary Political Philosophy (3)
Analysis of selected concepts of contemporary political
science; the alleged decline of political theory; positivistic
and Utopian political thought; the political person, political
elites, and modes of political and governmental control.
364. Contemporary Political Analysis (3)
Contributions of economic, biological, psychological and
communication approaches to understanding political
phenomena.
365. Political Values of Neo-Freudians and Existentialists (3)
The perspectives of Freud, Neo-Freudians such as Fromm
and Marcuse, and Existentialists such as Sartre and Camus.
366. The Politics of Education (3)
An analysis of the political dimensions of the contemporary
crisis in American education. Designed primarily for students
in the School of Education. Summer session.
371. Readings (3)
Readings in political science assigned to properly qualified
students in consideration of ihrir •.po i.il imeresi in particular
political institutions and prai tlces. Prerequisite: consent of
. hail man ol the department.
372. Readings (3)
Continuation of Govt. 371. Prerequisite; consent ol chairman
oi department.
381, 382. Special Topics (3)
A seminar on a topic of special interest in a particular poli-
tical institution, process, or policy. Prerequisite; consent of
chairman of department.
For Graduates
The department of government offers a graduate program
leading to the Doctor of Arts (D.A.) and the Master of Arts
(M.A.) degrees. The applicant for admission must demon-
strate adequate undergraduate preparation and submit GRE
results. Candidates for the master's degree in political science
may qualify by completing thirty (30) hours of approved
course work and passing an examination covering the entire
field or completing twenty-four (24) hours in approved
courses and submitting a satisfactory thesis. Candidates may
also declare an Urban Studies option which includes a multi-
disciplinary focus on the urban process.
Master of Arts. This degree is available for students interested
in a variety of vocations. Principally, M.A. candidates prepare
for careers in local, state or national government; public
school teaching; governmental and private research programs;
journalism; or further graduate study leading to a D.A. or
Ph.D. and a career in community college or university teach-
ing.
Urban Studies Option. Master's degree candidates in govern-
ment can declare an option in the area of Urban Studies. This
is a multi-disciplinary effort, drawing together the expertise
of faculty members of other departments in addition to the
government department. Core course requirements are as
follows: Research in Urban Areas, Advanced Urban Seminar,
Special Topics, Thesis Work. Recommended courses are
Regional Science, Metropolitan Analysis, Community Power
Structure, Urban Policy, Advanced Urban Sociology, Ad-
vanced Urban American History, Operations Analysis, Public
Finance.
Doctor of Arts. The department of government offers a
graduate program leading to the Doctor of Arts degree
(D.A.). The program is designed for students holding the
bachelor's or master's degree who wish to prepare for a career
in college teaching of political science. In every respect, the
evaluation standards will be equal to those of a Ph.D. pro-
gram. Guidelines developed by the Council of Graduate
Schools and American Association of State Colleges and Uni-
versities have been followed in planning this program. The
D.A. program will differ from the Ph.D. program in (a) the
requirement of a broader distribution of graduate courses in
government; (b) a minor area of study for those students who
166 Government
wish to have bi-disciplinary preparation for two-year college
teaching; (c) course work and training in interpersonal aware-
ness; (d) a general examination tailored to the D.A.; (e) a
project of applied research rather than a dissertation, and (f)
supervised internships.
The Doctor of Arts program of government consists of
four parts: a core concentration in interpersonal awareness
and teaching, a major in government, an open-ended major,
and an internship and related project.
The Core Curriculum (12 credit hours)
Training in Interpersonal Awareness (6)
Govt 471 Teaching Government (3)
Govt 472 Workshop in Teaching Government (3)
Major Area— Government (33 credit hours minimum
requirement)
300-level (12 credit hours)
In consultation with his advisor and taking into consideration
his past work in government, the student should select
courses to achieve a balance in the following general areas:
scope and methods; public law and judicial process; sub-
national politics; public administration; political philosophy;
comparative politics or international relations.
400-level (21 credit hours)
The student's courses on the 400-level should focus on
American and community politics, the main area of concen-
tration in the Doctor of Arts program. But on this level, too,
a balance should be achieved by taking available courses in
political philosophy, field research and comparative politics.
Minor Area (12 credit hours)
On the basis of interest and undergraduate education stu-
dents will be encouraged to select their minor from a wide
range of subject areas including both the natural and social
sciences. Where possible this will be related to the internship
experience of the student. Associated with the department of
government will be the departments of social relations, and
history, and the division of urban studies.
Internships and Project (33 credit hours)
The student will participate in an evaluated, supervised, part-
time teaching internship either at the junior or four-year col-
lege level for one semester.
Students will also participate in a community organiza-
tion internship on a part-time basis. The purpose of this in-
ternship is to sensitize them to a broad range of social and
political problems in the larger society.
The student will complete a project of applied research of
a pedagogical nature which is the functional equivalent of the
dissertation in a Ph.D. program. Ideally, it should integrate
his internship experiences.
Examination
Those students entering the D.A. program without the
master's degree in government will be required to take a con-
tinuing proficiency examination prior to their second year of
study.
The general examination for candidates for the D.A. shall
be given not later than the start of their third year and shall
consist of (1) examination in their major and minor fields
and (2) presentation of their proposed project and intern-
ships.
401. Comparative State Politics (3)
The role of the states is analyzed within the American federal
system. Emphasis is placed on the functions and policies of
states and their relations with the national government.
413. Modern Political Philosophy (3)
A study of selected modern political philosophers and their
continuing effect on politics and political philosophy.
414. Democratic Theory (3)
A critical evaluation of democratic theory in light of the con-
temporary challenges to the democratic process.
421. Research Methods (3)
Research approaches, design techniques, statistical and non-
statistical analysis, and computer applications.
424. Administrative Theory (3)
Administrative theory and practice in both the public and
non-public sphere in the United States; model building and
field research emphasizing the concepts of public and private
administrative systems.
431. Public Administration (3)
The study of bureaucracy and the problems of public organi-
zation and management; executive leadership; personnel,
budgeting and regulatory administration.
432. Public Policy Process (3)
Executive, legislative, and judicial interaction in the policy
process. External influences upon formal governmental insti-
tutions. Presidential advisory system and policy politics, in-
ternal congressional process, andjudicial policy-making.
441. Judicial Process (3)
An examination of judicial institutions and decision-making
process from various methodological approaches including
political behavioralism and jurisprudence. Topics to be con-
sidered include judicial selection, interest group involvement,
judicial policy-making, and proposals for judicial reform.
451. Comparative Politics (3)
The political systems of nations, with emphasis on Western
and Western-type democracies. Approaches to the study of
comparative politics.
Government 167
I^J. Comparative Communis! Political Systems (3)
The political systems ol communist h.ui.mis. with emphasis
on the Soviet Union and Eastern Europe. Examination of
methods and approaches used in the comparative study of
, ommunism.
460. Urban Policy (3)
An in-depth examination ol the politics of urban policy areas
such as housing, transportation, law enforcement, planning,
welfare and poverty.
wish to contribute to the solution ol urban problems in a
variety ol ways: city management, urban planning, human
relations, and social rehabilitation are examples of relevant
career programs.
Course schedules are worked out with the advice of the
faculty members who actively participate in the urban studies
division. An advisory council of chairmen from cooperating
departments will assure interdisciplinary planning and coordi-
nation. Students must abide by the following three-level se-
quence of courses. A minimum of 36 credit hours is required.
461. Community Power Structure (3)
A focus on power relations and decision-making on the com-
munity level. Special attention given to theories of communi-
tv power.
471. Seminar in Teaching Government (3)
Theories and techniques of instruction, learning, evaluation,
instructional design on innovation in the teaching of govern-
ment. Prerequisite: Doctor of Arts candidacy or permission
of the chairman of department.
472. Workshop in Teaching Government (3)
Directed experience in teaching and instructional design of
lower division government courses.
481. Special Topics (3)
Individual inquiry into some problems of government. Read-
ing, field work, and other appropriate techniques of investiga-
tion. Conferences and reports. May be repeated for credit.
482. Special Topics (3)
Continuation of Govt. 481.
Division of Urban Studies
Associate Professors
Leonard I. Ruchelman, Ph.D., Head
Carlos Alvare, M. Arch., M.C.P.
John Ellis, Ph.D.
Warren Pillsbury, Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
James R. Mcintosh, Ph.D.
Roger Simon, Ph.D.
Lecturer
David Amidon, M.A.
Required Preliminary Courses (6 credit hours)
US 61 The Study of Urbanization (3)
US 62 Contemporary Urban Issues (3)
At least fifteen (15) credit hours to be chosen from the
following:
Eco 1 Economics (4)
Eco 312 Urban Economics (3)
FA 43 Environmental Design (3)
FA 151 History of Urban Design (3)
Govt 77 Urban Politics (3)
Govt 358 Community and Regional Politics (3)
Hist 333 American Urban History to 1880 (3)
Hist 334 American Urban History, 1880 to Present
(3)
SR 368 Urban Communities (3)
SR 292 Research Methods (3)
or
Govt 321 Research Methods (3)
At least fifteen (15) credit hours to be chosen from the
following:
Eco 354 Public Finance: State and Local (3)
Eco 337 Transportation and Spatial Economics (3)
FA 143 Environmental Planning and Project (3)
FA 144 Intermediate Environmental Design (3)
FA 152 Physical Planning and Design (3)
Govt 360 Public Administration (3)
Hist 331 The Negro in America (3)
SR 75 Minority Groups (3)
SR 320 Urban Ethnology (3)
US 371, 372 Special Topics (3 each)
Undergraduate Courses
61. The Study of Urbanization (3)
Analyses of the city from early historical speculations to
current behavioral analysis.
Undergraduate Curriculum
This is an interdepartmental program intended for students
who wish a broad interdisciplinary focus on urban processes
as the means of comprehending multifaceted city problems.
Tbe urban studies program will help to prepare persons who
62. Contemporary Urban Issues (3)
Review of the literature on urban issues: poverty, law en-
forcement, race relations, planning and education.
371, 372. Special Topics (3 each)
A seminar on a topic of special interest in urban studies. Pre-
requisite: consent of the instructor.
168 Government, Division of Urban Studies
For Graduates
Two courses from the following:
The urban studies graduate program is intended to meet the
pressing need tor urban generalists who possess interdiscipli-
nary knowledge of urban processes. Depending upon interest
and choice of courses, students will be prepared for careers in
city management, urban planning and redevelopment, human
relations, and social rehabilitation.
Master's degree candidates work within the disciplines of
economics, government, history or social relations and are
expected to achieve an urban concentration through the com-
bined offerings of the social science departments. A student
must fulfill the entrance requirements of his chosen depart-
ment which formally admits him into the program. All stu-
dents are required to take the urban seminar described below.
416. Urban Seminar (3)
A multi-dimensional overview of the urban condition. An
examination of the interrelatedness of the social, political,
economic, physical and historical forces which affect urban
life and form.
Curricula
Beyond U.S. 416, Urban Seminar, student schedules are de-
fined by the respective departments. Minimum requirements
for each department are as follows:
Economics, advisor: Mr. Schwartz (30 credit hours)
Eco 312 Urban Economics (3)
Eco 354 Public Finance: State and Local (3)
Eco 440 Regional Science— Metropolitan Analysis (3)
Three additional courses in economics including:
Eco 432 Advanced Microeconomic Analysis (3)
Eco 436 Advanced Topics in Macroeconomics (3)
Two courses from the following:
SR 468 Advanced Urban Sociology (3)
SR 472 Special Topics (3)
Hist 442 Readings in United States History (3)
Hist 452 Research in United States History (3)
Govt 460 Urban Policy (3)
Govt 461 Community Power Structure (3)
A comprehensive examination (general economics, urban
inquiry) is required.
Eco 312 Urban Economics (3)
Eco 440 Regional Science-Metropolitan Analysis (3)
Hist 333 American Urban History to 1880 (3)
Hist 334 American Urban History, 1880 to Present
(3)
SR 468 Advanced Urban Sociology (3)
SR472 Special Topics (3)
Thesis (6)
A comprehensive examination (theory, urban inquiry,
option) is required.
History, advisors: Messrs. Ellis and Simon (30 credit hours)
Hist 401 Methods in Historical Research (3)
Hist 440's Any course, including 442 when urban topic
offered (9)
Hist 450's Any course, including 452 when urban topic
offered (6)
And one course from the following:
SR 468 Advanced Urban Sociology (3)
Govt 321 Methods for Political Research (3)
Govt 460 Urban Policy (3)
or
Eco 440 Regional Science— Metropolitan Analysis (3)
Govt 461 Community Power Structure (3)
Thesis (6)
Satisfactory completion of this plan will enable a student to
apply for candidacy for the Ph.D. in history.
Social Relations, advisor: Mr. Mcintosh (30 credit hours)
Four courses, including:
SR 411 Advanced Research Methods (12)
And two courses from the following:
Eco 312 Urban Economics (3)
Eco 440 Regional Science— Metropolitan Analysis (3)
Govt 460 Urban Policy (3)
Govt 461 Community Power Structure (3)
Hist 333 American Urban History to 1880 (3)
Hist 334 American Urban History, 1880 to Present
(3)
Government, advisors: Messrs. Colon and Ruchelman (30
credit hours)
Govt 460
Urban Policy (3)
Govt 461 Community Power Structure (3)
Govt 357 Urban Government (3)
or
Govt 358 Community and Regional Politics (3)
Govt 321 Methods for Political Research (3)
or
Govt 421 Research Methods (3)
Government, Division of Urban Studies 169
History
Professors
I awrence H. Leder, Ph.D., Chairman
Raymond Gibson Cowherd, Pli.D.
Joseph Albert Dowling, I'h.D.
John McVickar H.iight, Jr., Ph.D.
Charles Leon Tipton, Ph.D.
Adjunct Professor
Winfred Kohls, Ph.D.
Associate Professors
John H. Ellis, Ph.D.
George Mark Ellis, Ph.D.
William Gerald Shade, Ph.D.
Adjunct Assistant Professor
Christa V. Graf, Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
John B. Owens, Ph.D.
James S. Saeger, Ph.D.
Roger D. Simon, Ph.D.
Lecturer
Burns V. Machobane, M.Ed.
History is the study of man's activities. As such, it encom-
passes not only events and public policy, but the whole
sweep of cultural achievements— man's religion and philoso-
phy, literature and art, economic and social life. Some of the
most influential thinkers and public men of our time
(Toynbee, Kennan, Churchill, Kennedy, among others) have
studied contemporary problems by viewing the forces in the
past which have shaped our world.
Students take courses in three culture areas, examining
major developments in each in terms of cause and effect, the
historians' main concern. These courses provide training in
research, analysis of historical problems, and formulation of
historical judgments, as well as in writing. History majors
have the foundation for law school, government service,
journalism, teaching, and graduate study.
A major in history consists of thirty-six hours distributed
in three of four areas: American, British, European, and
Latin American history. No more than eighteen of these
hours may be in one field. Majors are strongly urged during
either their junior or senior years to enroll in History 201; for
chose interested in ihe m-w.-st -.un m, .il .ippi.i.n In", in i In-
discipline, History 395 is strongly recommended.
Admission to honors study in history is by invitation of
the department in the student's junior year. The Studenl
must attain an average of 3.25 in history courses, in addition
to the University honors requirements, .ind must demonstrate
a special competence in history. Those interested in honors
work are urged to consult the chairman of the department
early in their junior year.
Honors students in history may plan special programs,
including more in-depth study of two culture areas rather
than three and elimination of one required preliminary
course. Honors students in history must enroll for three
hours credit of unrostered history as part of their thirty-six
hours and must complete in that course an honors thesis.
Required Preliminary Courses
Hist 1, 2 Course of Civilizations (6)
or
Hist 51, 52 Freshman Seminar (6)
Plus one of the following sequences:
Hist 13, 14 American Civilization (6)
Hist 15, 16 English History (6)
Hist 49, 50 History of Latin America (6)
Required Intermediate Courses
Nine hours chosen from the following:
Hist 21 Ancient History (3)
Hist 22 Ancient History (3)
Hist 67 The Iberian Peninsula (3)
Hist 119 Colonial America (3)
Hist 120 Revolutionary America (3)
Hist 135 United States, 1789-1840 (3)
Hist 136 United States, 1840-1877 (3)
Hist 137 United States, 1877-1920 (3)
Hist 138 United States, 1920 to Present (3)
Hist 159 Modern Europe (3)
Hist 160 Modern Europe (3)
Hist 185-186 Archaeological Field Course (8)
Required Major Courses
Fifteen hours chosen from the following:
Hist 201 Historical Perspectives (3)
Hist 321 Social Class and Mobility in American
History (3)
Hist 322 American Economic History (3)
Hist 323 American Constitutional History (3)
Hist 324 American Constitutional History (3)
Hist 327 American Intellectual History (3)
Hist 328 American Intellectual History (3)
Hist 329 American Foreign Policy (3)
Hist 330 American Foreign Policy (3)
Hist 331 The Negro in America (3)
Hist 333 American Urban History to 1880 (3)
1 70 History
Hist 334
Hist 339
Hist 340
Hist 343
Hist 344
Hist 345
Hist 346
Hist 349
Hist 350
Hist 351
Hist 355
Hist 356
Hist 357
Hist 358
Hist 361
Hist 362
Hist 363
Hist 364
Hist 365
Hist 366
Hist 371, 372
Hist 395
American Urban History, 1880 to Present
(3)
Human Ecology and Public Health in
America (3)
History of American Medicine (3)
English History, 1471-1660 (3)
English History, 1660-1789 (3)
Liberal England (3)
Socialist England (3)
The Early Middle Ages (3)
The High Middle Ages (3)
Conservatism in the Modern Age (3)
European Intellectual History (3)
European Intellectual History (3)
The Renaissance and Reformation (3)
Age of the Baroque (3)
A History of Russia to 1855 (3)
A History of Russia, 1855 to Present (3)
Modern Germany, 1648-1848 (3)
Modern Germany, 1848 to Present (3)
Colonial Latin America, 1492-1825 (3)
Modern Latin America, 1825 to Present (3)
Special Topics in History (3 each)
Quantitative Methods in Historical Studies
(3)
History majors are encouraged to enroll in courses in eco-
nomics, English and American literature, government, inter-
national relations, philosophy, psychology, religion studies,
and social relations. Special notice should be taken of the
possibilities of developing programs emphasizing urban
studies. Students intending to do graduate work should
acquire a reading knowledge of at least one foreign language,
choosing languages appropriate to their area of concentra-
tion.
Undergraduate Courses
1. Course of Civilizations (3)
Civilizations in the East, West, and Africa from earliest times
to 1700.
2. Course of Civilizations (3)
Civilizations in the East, West, and Africa from 1700 to the
present.
13. American Civilization (3)
An integrated survey of political, social, cultural, and eco-
nomic developments from the founding of Jamestown
through Reconstruction.
14. American Civilization (3)
Continuation of History 13; an integrated survey of political,
social, cultural and economic developments from Reconstruc-
tion to the present.
15. English History (3)
The history of England to 1 688. The origins of representative
government, the development of English social institutions,
the unification of England, and the Renaissance and Reform-
ation in England.
16. English History (3)
English political and social institutions from 1688 to the
present. The evolution of parliamentary government, the rise
of modern parties, the Industrial Revolution, and recent
social philosophies.
21. (Greek 21) Ancient History (3)
For course description, see Classics.
22. (Latin 22) Ancient History (3)
For course description, see Classics.
49. History of Latin America (3)
Spanish and Portuguese colonization of America and the
struggles for independence, preceded by a brief view of the
ancient American civilizations and the Iberian backgrounds.
50. History of Latin America (3)
Continuation of History 49. The development of the Latin
American nations in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries.
51. Freshman Seminar (3)
An intensive analysis of a particular period, problem or area
of history, emphasizing readings, discussions, and reports.
The topics and instructor will vary each semester. Open by
invitation to students with Advanced Placement credit in
history or equivalent background, or upon application to the
chairman of the department.
52. Freshman Seminar (3)
A continuation of History 51.
67. The Iberian Peninsula (3)
Spain and Portugal from the eighth century to the present,
emphasizing the historical influence of Iberian culture on the
development of colonial institutions.
119. Colonial America (3)
Founding and growth of colonies in North America through
c. 1750. Attention will be paid to motives behind European
expansion as well as to developments in the colonies.
120. Revolutionary America (3)
American political, economic and cultural development from
the mid-eighteenth century through the adoption of the
Federal Constitution.
135. United States, 1789-1840 (3)
The American political system from the Constitution through
Jacksonianism. Special emphasis upon the first and second
party systems and the democratization of American political
culture.
History 1 11
1 16. I niced States, L840-1877 (3)
i. "i\it W.ir and Reconstruction, emphasizing the causi
Civil War. us impact upon American so, iety and politii s, and
problems ol post-war Reconstruction.
137. United St.itcs, 1877-1920 (3)
Political. economic, jiui -.oii.il responses to iTulustri.il
America. The rise of the Populist and Progressive movements,
coming ot World War I, and post-war developments.
138. United States. ll>20 to Present (3)
American institutions in the modern era, emphasizing critical
changes of the 1920's, the Crash of 1929, the New Deal,
World War II, and later political, social and economic events.
159. Modern Europe (3)
Revolutions and reactions in Western Europe from 1789 to
1870. The rise and spread of liberalism and the origins of
Socialism.
160. Modern Europe (3)
Contemporary Europe; the origins and consequences of two
World Wars; the rise of revolutionary governments in Italy,
Germany, and Russia.
185-186. Archaeological Field Course (8)
This course introduces undergraduate students to a wide
range of topics in archaeology. Undergraduates who wish to
take this course must file a cross-registration form and apply
at Moravian College. Ottered only in summer in conjunction
with Moravian College.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
201. Historical Perspectives (3)
Methodologies and interpretations of Western historians from
ancient times to the present.
321. (S.R. 321) Social Class and Mobility in American
History (3)
The distribution of wealth, concepts of class and social
democracy, life styles and values of different social and eco-
nomic groups, and opportunities for mobility; colonial times
to the present.
322. American Economic History (3)
Economic development since the colonial period, emphasiz-
ing the rapid industrialization from 1820 to 1890 and the
social impact of economic change.
323. American Constitutional History (3)
Legal institutions from the founding of Jamestown through
the Civil War. Emphasis on federalism, judicial review, and
the interplay between judicial and legislative institutions.
I ' I. \inericin CoiiMitiitinii.il History (3)
The response of legal institutions to the crisis of Reconstruc-
tion and the challenge of industrialization. Emphasis on "due
process," the changing legal status of minorities, and the
national government's rise to dominance.
327. American Intellectual History (3)
Development of political, social, and religious ideas in
America from the colonial period to the Civil War.
328. American Intellectual History (3)
Economic, political, and religious thought in industrial
America, 1860 to the present.
329. American Foreign Policy (3)
The French alliance; independence and boundaries; com-
mercial restrictions; French Revolution and neutrality; pur-
chase of Louisiana; War of 1812; acquisition of Florida;
Monroe Doctrine; relations with France and Great Britain;
Oregon and Texas; the Mexican War; Civil War diplomacy.
330. American Foreign Policy (3)
Maximilian in Mexico; Seward and expansion; Alaska
boundary; War with Spain; the new Caribbean policies', the
World War of 1914-1918 and its aftermath; diplomatic events
preceding Pearl Harbor; outbreak and prosecution of the war;
plans for peace; the "Cold War"; diplomacy since 1945.
331. The Negro in America (3)
Negro subculture in America from the colonial period to the
present, emphasizing the struggle for emancipation and equal
rights. Topics include: racialism slavery, Reconstruction,
urbanization, protest movements, and the "Second Recon-
struction."
333. American Urban History to 1880 (3)
Planning and design of colonial and frontier cities. Impact of
transportation innovations and industrialization, emergence
of a national system of cities. Internal problems of early
industrial cities: housing, transportation, public health,
crime, social mobility.
334. American Urban History, 1880 to Present (3)
Physical expansion of the industrial city and its relationship
to current urban problems. Suburbanization, development of
the central business district, reforms in housing and public
health, rise of ghettoes, emergence of city planning profes-
sion and idea of "new towns," impact of New Deal and
"urban renewal."
339. Human Ecology and Public Health in America (3)
The historical relation between human ecology and public
health, emphasizing developments in the nineteenth and
twentieth centuries. Readings and research on population
growth, infectious disease, use and abuse of drugs, public
health administration and environmental control.
1 72 History
340. History of American Medicine (3)
Social history of the theory and practice of medicine, giving
particular attention to the scientific and social processes faci-
litating the rise of physicians as an occupational group, to the
social distribution of medical care, and to the role of the
patient as consumer.
343. English History, 1471-1660 (3)
England under the Tudor monarchy and the problems facing
its successors culminating in the Civil Wars and Interregnum.
Political, economic, intellectual and religious developments
of the period.
344. English History, 1660-1789 (3)
Constitutional monarchy trom the Stuart Restoration to the
French Revolution. English civilization in an age of oligarchy,
especially the political, social, economic and intellectual sec-
tors.
345. Liberal England (3)
Political and social history, 1790-1870; transition from aris-
tocracy to democracy; the influence of the utilitarians;
radical reforms and reactions; the impact of the industrial
and agricultural revolutions.
346. Socialist England (3)
Political and social history, 1870-1970; the expansion of
democracy; the growth of the Labor Party; the impact of the
second industrial revolution; the making of the welfare state;
the consequence of two World Wars.
349. The Early Middle Ages (3)
European institutions and cultural developments from 284
A.D. to the mid-eleventh century. Evolution of the Church,
feudalism and manorialism, the foundations of the Byzan-
tine, Carolingian, and Holy Roman Empires, and the literary
and artistic achievements.
350. The High Middle Ages (3)
A continuation of History 349 to about 1400 A.D. Rise of
the universities and towns; legal developments and the origins
of representative government; rise of the nation-state; the
crusades; Scholasticism and the decline of the medieval
church; expansion of trade; and literary and artistic develop-
ments.
351. Conservatism in the Modern Age (3)
Conservative political, economic, and social thought from the
eighteenth century to the present.
355. European Intellectual History (3)
Political and religious thought and other aspects of the
history of ideas in Europe from the Middle Ages to about
1700.
356. European Intellectual History (3)
A continuation of History 355, with special attention given
to the impact of the Industrial Revolution upon the develop-
ment of nineteenth- and twentieth-century ideologies.
357. The Renaissance and Reformation (3)
The transition from medieval to modern society. Considera-
tion of political, economic, and social forces produced by the
Renaissance and their influence upon the dominant religious
theme of the Reformation era.
358. Age of the Baroque (3)
Europe from 1648 to 1789. The growth of absolutism in
France, the rise of Prussia, and the social and political and
economic conditions in the eighteenth century.
361. A History of Russia to 1855 (3)
Major cultural, social, and political traditions of the Russian
people.
362. A History of Russia, 1855 to Present (3)
The Great Reforms, collapse of Tsarist absolutism, revolu-
tions of 1917, and formation and consolidation of the Soviet
dictatorship.
363. Modern Germany, 1648-1848 (3)
Political, socio-economic, and cultural developments from
the age of triumphant absolutism to the failure of liberalism.
364. Modern Germany, 1848 to Present (3)
Political history from the Second Empire to the federal and
socialist republics. Twentieth-century intellectual and social
problems.
365. Colonial Latin America, 1492-1825 (3)
Individual investigation and reports on selected topics. The
Spanish concept of empire, church-state relations, origins of
the Wars of Independence.
366. Modern Latin America, 1825 to Present (3)
Individual investigation and reports on selected topics.
Nationalism, conservatism, and liberalism in the nineteenth
century; the rightist revolutions, socialism, and communism
in the twentieth century.
371. Special Topics in History (3)
Intensive study in an area of history not adequately covered
in currently listed offerings. The course may be administered
as a reading program or otherwise as may seem best to meet
the needs of students of unusual ability and adequate pre-
paration. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of department.
372. Special Topics in History (3)
Continuation of History 371. Prerequisite: consent of
chairman of department.
374. Themes in American History (3)
An intensive study of a selected topic in American history
primarily for American studies majors. The topic may vary
from time to time as the needs of the American Studies pro-
gram dictate. The seminar will allow study of an aspect of
American history in greater depth than is generally the case.
Prerequisite: permission of director of American Studies.
History 1 13
3'* 5. Quantitative Methods in Historical Studii
Historical uses and methods ol quantitative analysis, includ-
ing the application of descriptive statistics, statistical infei
ence, and computet technology to a variety ol problems
drawn from European, American, and Latin American
history.
graduates
The Lehigh library is especially rich in materials tor advanced
study and research in history, and the department of history
oilers programs leading to master of arts and doctor of philo-
sophy degrees. Graduate programs provide intensive and
specialized study, and limited enrollment maintains close
relations between faculty and students. Admission to gradu-
ate study in history is competitive and dependent upon the
applicant's undergraduate preparation and record, recom-
mendations, and GRE scores. Besides general requirements in
the Graduate School section of the catalog, the following
special requirements apply to graduate study in history.
Master oj Arts. There are two master's programs. Under plan
I, a candidate may earn the degree by successfully completing
twenty-four hours of approved course work and submitting a
satisfactory thesis. Those continuing toward a doctorate must
elect Plan I. Candidates declaring Plan II do not write a
thesis, but take thirty hours of course work in and pass exam-
inations on three fields chosen from Colonial America,
United States since 1789, and Latin American history. Effec-
tive with students entering the master of arts program
beginning in June 1973, all master's candidates must main-
tain a 3.0 average in all graduate work.
Doctor of Philosophy. Candidates for the doctor of philoso-
phy in history must maintain a 3.25 history average and a 3.0
overall average on all graduate work taken at Lehigh or else-
where. Students entering with a master's degree take a quali-
fying examination before beginning their second semester at
Lehigh. During their second semester at Lehigh doctoral stu-
dents select four history fields and one outside field and pre-
pare themselves for written and oral examinations in those
fields. Course work is required in a fifth history field, but it
will not be covered in the comprehensive examinations. An
original dissertation is required and may be written only in a
primary field.
Primary Fields. Primary fields are Great Britain, Colonial
America, Nineteenth-Century America, and Twentieth Cen-
tury America.
Other Fields. Other fields of specialization are Medieval-
Renaissance, Modern Europe to 1789, Modern Europe since
1789, and Latin America.
Language Requirements. The qualifying examination in one
language must be passed before beginning course work be-
yond the master's degree in order that the language may be
used in doctoral course work. The candidate's special com-
mittee, appointed by the chairman of the department, will
designate anyr additional languages for the student if needed.
Languages will normally be chosen from among French,
Spanish, Italian, German and Russian.
All graduate majors must take History 401.
401. Methods in Historical Research (3)
IV, h Hi. | ues ol i I'm' arch in history: (raining in the critical
handling ot documentary materials, in measuring the value of
evidence, and in formal presentation of the results of re-
search. Required ot all graduate students in history.
402. Historiography (3)
A continuation of History 401. The aims, methods, and ac-
complishments of some of the most renowned historians of
Europe and America.
403. Field Work in Archaeology (6)
Application of archaeological methods and techniques in
actual site excavation. Archival research, surveying, mapping,
excavation, archaeological photography, and artifact pro-
cessing and analysis will be included, all culminating in an
anthropological interpretation of the remains uncovered.
Prerequisite: consent of instructor and the chairman of the
department. Note: students must put in a full day's work at
the site. Offered only in summer in conjunction with
Moravian College.
410. Historical Literature: Europe (3)
Designed to familiarize teachers with the important literature
in the field. Students will analyze the major interpretations
of the most significant movements in modern European
history.
420. Historical Literature: America (3)
Designed to familiarize teachers with the important literature
in the field. Students will analyze the major interpretations
of the most significant movements in American history.
441. Readings in Colonial American History (3)
Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty
member of the literature of a particular period, problem or
area of Colonial American history. May be repeated for credit
with permission of chairman of department.
442. Readings in United States History (3)
Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty
member of the literature of a particular period, problem or
area of United States history. May be repeated for credit with
permission of chairman of department.
443. Readings in English History (3)
Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty
member of the literature of a particular period, problem or
area of English history. May be repeated for credit with per-
mission of chairman of department.
444. Readings in Latin American History (3)
Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty
member of the literature of a particular period, problem, or
area of Latin American history. May be repeated for credit
with permission of chairman of department.
1 74 History
445. Readings in Medieval and Renaissance European History
(3)
Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty
member of the literature of a particular period,, problem or
area of Medieval and Renaissance European history. May be
repeated for credit with permission of chairman of depart-
ment.
446. Readings in Early Modern European History (3)
Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty
member of the literature of a particular period, problem or
area of Early Modern European history. May be repeated for
credit with permission of chairman of department.
456. Research in Early Modern European History (3)
An intensive research seminar on a phase of Early Modern
European history. Prerequisite: appropriate course work on
the 300-level (or its equivalent), or an appropriate Readings
Seminar. May be repeated for credit with permission of chair-
man of department.
457. Research in Modern European History (3)
An intensive research seminar on a phase of Modern
European history. Prerequisite: appropriate course work on
the 300-level (or its equivalent), or an appropriate Readings
Seminar. May be repeated for credit with permission of chair-
man of department.
447. Readings in Modern European History (3)
Study in small groups under the guidance of a faculty
member of the literature of a particular period, problem or
area of Modern European history. May be repeated for credit
with permission of chairman of department.
451. Research in Colonial American History (3)
An intensive research seminar on a phase of American colo-
nial history. Prerequisite: appropriate course work on the
300-level (or its equivalent), or an appropriate Readings
Seminar. May be repeated for credit with permission of chair-
man of department.
452. Research in United States History (3)
An intensive research seminar on a phase of United States
history. Prerequisite: appropriate course work on the
300-level (or its equivalent), or an appropriate Readings
Seminar. May be repeated for credit with permission of chair-
man of department.
453. Research in English History (3)
An intensive research seminar on a phase of English history.
Prerequisite: appropriate course work on the 300-level (or its
equivalent), or an appropriate Readings Seminar. May be
repeated for credit with permission of chairman of
department.
454. Research in Latin American History (3)
An intensive research seminar on a phase of Latin American
history. Prerequisite: appropriate course work on the
300-level (or its equivalent), or an appropriate Readings
Seminar. May be repeated for credit with permission of chair-
man of department.
455. Research in Medieval and Renaissance European History
(3)
An intensive research seminar on a phase of Medieval and
Renaissance European history. Prerequisite: appropriate
course work on the 300-level (or its equivalent), or an ap-
propriate Readings Seminar. May be repeated for credit with
permission of chairman of department.
History 1 15
Industrial Engineering
Professors
Arthur Freeman Gould. M.S., Chairman
: e Eugene Kane, M.S.
Sutton Monro, B.S.
U allat i- James Richardson, M.S.
William Adams Smith, Jr.. Ph.D.
Associate Prolcssors
John William Adams, Ph.D.
Gary E. Whitehousc, Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
Mikell Porter Groover, Ph.D.
John D. Landis, Ph.D.
M. Wayne Shiveley, Ph.D.
Instructors
Emory W. Zimmers, Jr., M.S.
David D. Hott, M.S.
Lynne H. Hott, M.S.
Lucius J. Riccio, M.S.
The curriculum is designed with the principal aim of indus-
trial engineering in view, which is the design, improvement,
and installation of integrated systems of men, materials, and
equipment for operations by the application of the principles
of the mathematical, physical, and behavioral sciences.
Throughout the program there is an integrated series or
sequence in the major field which includes not only basic and
fundamental courses but specialized courses as well, in the
fields of production planning and control, quality control,
production engineering, information systems, operations
research, and industrial man-power management. These
specialized courses reflect the impact of recent developments
in operations research, information processing, and automa-
tion, and considerable course work involves use of the high-
speed digital computer.
There is a growing tendency on the part of industries to
select young men from their engineering departments for
managerial positions. Because of this the industrial engineer-
ing courses are oriented to the principles of scientific manage-
ment to enable the industrial engineering graduate to accept
and succeed in these opportunities.
It is the aim of the industrial engineering program to
develop for industry and business a potential manager, a
graduate well grounded in the fundamentals of science,
trained in the principles and methods of engineering analysis
and design, and adequately prepared to practice the profes-
sion of industrial engineering.
I reshman ) eai , See page I i
Sophomore > v./r, hint Semester \ \5 credit hours)
Math 2.1 Analytic Geometry and Calculus III (4)
II Industrial Engineering Models (3)
Phys 21, 22 Introductory Physics II & Lab (5)
Engineering S iem - Elective (3)
Sophomore Year, Sei ond Semester ( 1(> credit hours)
Math 231 Statistical Inference (3)
IE 18 Information Processing Theory (3)
Engineering Science Electives (6)
Eco 1 Economics (4)
Junior Year, First Semester (16-19 credit hours)
IE 101 Fundamentals of Manufacturing Engineering
(4)
IE 205 Engineering Statistics (3)
Math 205 Linear Methods (3)
Engineering Science Elective (3)
GS Elective (3)
Electives (0-3)
Junior Year, Second Semester (16-19 credit hours)
IE 102
IE 206
Summer
IE 100
Work Systems (3)
Operations Research Techniques (4)
Engineering Science Electives (6)
GS Elective (3)
Elective (0-3)
Industrial Employment
Senior Year, First Semester (15-18 credit hours)
Acctg 108 Fundamentals of Accounting (3)
IE Electives (6)
Engineering Science Elective (3)
GS Elective (3)
Elective (0-3)
Senior Year, Second Semester (15-18 credit hours)
IE 154
Project (3)
IE
Electives (9)
GS Elective (3)
Elective (0-3)
Note: The lower number of credit hours represents the load
required to meet the graduation requirement; the higher re-
presents the normal semester load. For explanation of Engi-
neering Science Elective, see IE Bulletin.
1 76 Industrial Engineering
Undergraduate Courses
5. Industrial Engineering Models (3)
Deterministic models in the planning activities associated
with Industrial Engineering, including engineering'economy,
flow chart construction and analysis, and fundamentals of
production control. Prerequisite: Engr. 1 or equivalent ex-
perience in programming.
18. Information Processing Theory (3)
Principles of organizing, sorting and searching data; represent-
ation of data in various file media; analysis of work flow
manual and equipment functions, types of programming sys-
tems; logic representation; validation and control procedures.
Prerequisite: Engr. 1 or equivalent.
100. Industrial Employment (0)
Usually following the junior year, students in the industrial
engineering curriculum are required to do a minimum of
eight weeks of practical work, preferably in the field they
plan to follow after graduation. A report is required. Prere-
quisite: sophomore standing.
101. Fundamentals ot Manufacturing Engineering (4)
Study of metal processing theory with emphasis on machin-
ing, numerical control, special processing techniques, work-
holder design, laboratory experiments.
102. Work Systems (3)
Techniques in methods improvement and work measurement.
The applications of these techniques to the analysis, design
and control of man-machine work systems. Time study, pre-
determined time systems, work sampling and standard data.
Plant layout project. Prerequisites: I.E. 101, I.E. 205.
105. Thesis (3-6)
Candidates for the bachelor's degree in industrial engineering
may, with the approval of the department staff, undertake a
thesis as a portion of the work of the senior year. Prerequi-
site: senior standing.
154. Senior Project (3)
Special study of a particular problem involving laboratory
work and/or work in local industrial plants. Prerequisite:
senior standing in industrial engineering.
166. Production Management (3)
A course for non-engineering majors. Study of production
functions including production planning, scheduling, inven-
tory control, quality control, work measurement, methods
analysis, and facilities planning. Prerequisites: Math. 42,
Eco. 1.
168. Production Analysis (3)
A course for the engineering student not majoring in I.E.
Engineering economy; application of quantitative methods to
facilities analysis and planning, operations planning and con-
trol, work measurement and scheduling, and operating sys-
tems analysis. Prerequisites: Math. 22 or 42; Eco. 1.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
205. Engineering Statistics (3)
Applications of point and confidence interval estimation and
hypothesis testing to the fitting of frequency and regression
models, to acceptance and control sampling and to elemen-
tary design of experiments. Prerequisite: Math. 231, or
equivalent.
206. Operation Research Techniques (4)
The development and use of the techniques of operations
research. Topics include linear programming, queueing
theory, dynamic programming, probabilistic inventory
models, and simulation. Prerequisites: Math. 231 , Math. 205.
212. Elementary Design of Experiments (3)
An introduction to the structure of experiments, the analysis
of experimental data, and their interrelation. Measurement
error, randomization, pairs and blocks; regression and analy-
sis of variance. Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of
instructor.
300. Apprentice Teaching in I.E. (1"3)
307. Information Systems Engineering (3)
Information systems design methods. Graphical and matrix
techniques. Boolean logic. Information network models and
teedback concepts in dynamic information systems. Prerequi-
sites: Math. 205, 231.
309. Data Processing Systems (3)
Analysis and planning of data systems to store and process
data; management of electronic data processing; feasibility
studies and economic analysis; effects on organizational rela-
tionships. Prerequisite: I.E. 18 or equivalent.
310. File Structure and Processing (3)
Organizing data files for effective processing by computer.
Coverage in depth of coding and filing; list processing;
search strategy; scoring techniques; randomizing and chain-
ing; data management procedures; coordinate indices. Demon-
strations, student projects on computer. Prerequisite: I.E.
309.
311. Decision Processes (3)
Application of the techniques of operations research for
making decisions, including decisions under certainty, deci-
sions under risk, and decisions under uncertainty. Emphasis
will be placed on the application of simulation in decision
making. Prerequisite: I.E. 206 or consent of chairman of
department.
321. Experimental Industrial Engineering (1-3)
Experimental projects in selected fields of industrial engineer-
ing, approved by the instructor. A written report is required.
322. Experimental Industrial Engineering (1-3)
Continuation of I.E. 321.
Industrial Engineering 177
125 Pi odiH tion Control (3)
A study of the decision rules, and mathematical and eco-
nomic models of production forecasting, scheduling, order
control, and inventory control. I '.isc problems .tnd labor. i
Prerequisite: I.E. 206 or consent ot chairman of depart-
ment.
''I Organizational Planning and t ontrol (3)
Design of organization and procedures for managing func-
tions of industrial engineering. Analysis and design of re-
sources planning and control, including introduction of
change in man-machine systems; manpower management and
wage administration. Prerequisites: I.E. 102 or 166 or 168.
335. Sampling and Quality Control (3)
Random, stratified and optimal sampling plans, using fixed
and sequentially determined sample sizes. Application to
quality assurance and other analyses of operations. Stochastic
methods for continuous inspection and Bayesian procedures
for acceptance inspection. Prerequisite: I.E. 205 or consent
of the chairman of department.
336. Analysis of Experimental Data (3)
Design of simultaneous experiments including randomization,
blocking, analysis of variance with equal cell frequencies and
general regression. Prerequisite: I.E. 205 or consent of chair-
man of department.
340. Production Engineering (3)
Introduction to mechanization and automation of product
manufacturing. Partial mechanization, engineering materials
utilization, product design analysis, special processing
methods, economic analysis of processing design alternatives.
Term project. Prerequisite: I.E. 101.
344. Metal Cutting Theory (3)
Intensive study of metal cutting emphasizing temperature
and energy relationships and their effect on tool life, power
requirements and surface finish. Economic balancing of metal
cutting variables from application of theory. Lectures and
laboratory experiments including designing and conducting
an original experiment. Prerequisite: I.E. 101.
For Graduates
Programs leading to the M.S. and Ph.D. degrees are offered
by the department of industrial engineering in the following
fields: manufacturing engineering, information systems, and
operations research.
Master of Science in Industrial Engineering
The minimum program for the M.S. degree consists of
twenty-four hours of approved course work and completion
of a satisfactory thesis.
An M.S. program is selected to meet the interests and
needs of the student, and courses in other departments for
which the student has the prerequisites may be integrated
into the major field. Subject to proper approval, nine hours
"i 100-lcvcl ( nurses from outside the department may be
included among the courses required in the major field. As
part of a purposeful majoi program coll.ner.il courses may be
taken in other brain lies ot engineering, mathematics, eco-
nomii . psychology, and information science.
/ 1, ', i, i) . '/ /'',,/, i ., ,pli ,■ ,,| /,,,/,, atrial I ngim ering
The I'll. I), program is organized to meet the individual goals
and interests of industrial engineering students who plan to
engage in teaching, consulting, or research activities in indus
trial, governmental, or educational environments. The objec-
tive of the program is to educate these students to perform
their respective activities at a high level of proficiency. To
this end, each doctoral student is required to: (1) demon-
strate competency in several broad fields of industrial engi-
neering related to his area of interest; (2) prepare himself,
through formal course work and independent study, for ex-
amination in his particular area of specialization by members
of the graduate faculty; and (3) present a dissertation related
to his field of specialization which embodies the results of
original research, shows evidence of high scholarship, and
constitutes a contribution to knowledge.
Further information about the Ph.D. program is con-
tained in the Graduate School section of this catalog and in a
brochure prepared by the department of industrial engineer-
ing entitled, "The Ph.D. Program in Industrial Engineering."
Areas of Graduate Study. The areas of graduate study and
research which are emphasized in the department of indus-
trial engineering are:
Operations Research. Emphasis is placed on both the devel-
opment and applications of Operations Research techniques.
The program is strongly analytical in approach and content.
Emphasis is placed on understanding practical problems so
that suitable mathematical models can be selected or devel-
oped. Such models may be drawn from such areas as inven-
tory theory, queueing theory, simulation, decision theory,
dynamic programming, and mathematical programming
theory. The operations research student is motivated by a
program which emphasizes the mathematical, probabilistic,
statistical, and computer sciences.
Information Systems. The field of information systems em-
bodies management information for decision-making and
planning, operational systems to control man-machine activi-
ty, and methods for system analysis and design. The role of
the human is stressed in data gathering, information process-
ing and interaction with system output. Study and research
work relate to performance of computer-based systems, in-
cluding evaluation criteria and cost effectiveness. Project
management, simulation, data management and economic
analysis principles and techniques are employed as basic tools
in research activities.
Manufacturing Engineering. Graduate study in manufacturing
engineering involves course work and research opportunities
in specific areas related to manufacturing. The department is
currently interested in such areas as metal processing theory
1 78 Industrial Engineering
automation and numerical control, manufacturing systems
and management, and work systems. Additional related
courses are offered in other departments in the College of
Engineering. The Manufacturing Processes Laboratory is
available for the study of metal cutting processes and the lab
is coupled with course offerings in the same area.
Facilities. The offices and laboratories of the department are
located in the James Ward Packard Laboratory. Available for
graduate study and research within the department are a
modern metal processing research laboratory and a SCI 5800
(Computer Systems, Inc.) Analog Computer with over one
hundred operational amplifiers. The University's Computing
Center, located also in Packard Laboratory, is equipped with
a CDC 6400 system. ■
The department offers courses during the late afternoon
for the convenience of students who are employed in local
industry and are taking graduate work on a part-time basis.
There is no evening program, however.
405. Special Topics in Industrial Engineering (3)
An intensive study of some field of industrial engineering.
408. (Acctg. 408) Management Information Systems (3)
Information as a resource for management planning and con-
trol. Integrated and total systems concepts for organizational
data files and information processing. Development and
implementation of computer based information systems.
Prerequisite: Acctg. 311 or I.E. 309 or I.S. 422 or consent of
instructor.
410. Design of Experiments (3)
Fixed, mixed, and random models, fractional factorials, un-
equal cell frequencies. Sequential design for estimation and
optimization. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of de-
partment.
415. Manufacturing Management (3)
Analysis of the factors entering into the development of
manufacturing management philosophy; decision-making
process in areas of organization, planning, operation, and
control of manufacturing. Influence of the social, technical,
and economic environment upon manufacturing management
decisions,
416. Dynamic Programming (3)
The principles of optimality; one-dimensional processes,
multi-dimensional processes, lagrange multiplier technique;
markovian decision processes; applications.
417. (Mgt. 417) Advanced Mathematical Programming (3)
Theory and applications of the extensions of linear program-
ming. Kuhn-Tucker conditions, gradient methods of optimiza-
tion, simplex based methods of non-linear programming,
integer programming, branch and bound, zero-one discrete
programming and stochastic programming. Prerequisite: a
course in linear programming.
418. Simulation (3)
Random number generation and testing; design of simulation
experiments for the reduction of variance of estimators;
simulation languages; application of simulation to industrial
problems.
425. Production Systems (3)
Mathematical models of production systems; adaptive control
applied to production systems; computer process control;
interaction of physical system and information system dy-
namic simulation.
426. Inventory Theory (3)
Optimal policies in deterministic inventory processes; optimal
policies in stochastic inventory processes; operating charac-
teristics of inventory policies. Prerequisite: Math. 309 or I.E.
429 or equivalent.
427. Queueing Theory (3)
Single server queueing processes, Poisson input and exponen-
tial service times, Poisson input and general service times,
derivation of busy period distributions; many server queueing
processes; applications. Prerequisite: Math. 309 or I.E. 429 or
equivalent.
428. Advanced Work Systems (3)
A critical evaluation of methods improvement and work
measurement techniques. Emphasis on the design of complex
work systems, and reporting systems to control work. Work
sampling, construction of standard data, mathematical
models of work systems. Student projects.
429. Stochastic Processes for Engineers (3)
Markov chains. Applications include inventories, queues,
random walk. Also discussed are discrete models of Brownian
motion and diffusion processes. Prerequisites: a course in
probability theory and a course in linear algebra.
430. (Mgt. 430) Management Science Project (3)
An analysis of a management problem and design of its solu-
tion incorporating management science techniques. An in-
dividual written report is required. Recommended to be
taken in the last semester of the program.
431. Operations Research Seminar (3)
Extensive study of selected topics in techniques and models
of operations research.
433. Manufacturing Engineering Seminar (3)
Extensive study of selected topics in the research and devel-
opment of manufacturing engineering techniques.
437. Information Systems Seminar (3)
Extensive investigation of selected topics in theory, analysis
and design of information systems.
Industrial Engineering 1 79
I 18. Real Time Infoi mation (J)
Planning and management of real time, on line information
systems; effect of data Kinks, multi-processing, time-sharing,
and supervisory routines; data gathering and display tech-
niques for interactive systems; data communications. Prere-
quisite: I.E. 310 or consent of chairman of department,
440. Application of Automation (3)
Study of concepts and principles of design in fully automatic
production lines; influence of economic factors; partial auto-
mation; integration into existing production systems. Case
histories witli emphasis on problems involved in application
of principles. Plant visits and guest lecturers.
141. Network Modeling Techniques (3)
A critical study of various network modeling techniques.
Topics include; PERT, CPM, network flows, decision trees,
tlowgraph analysis and GERT. Emphasis will be placed on
the modeling and analysis of systems using these techniques.
444. Design ol Cutting Tools (3)
A study of design paraments including tool materials, tool
geometry and cutting conditions for material removal opera-
tions. Emphasis will be placed on the influence of tool selec-
tion variables, on economy of operation and conformance to
product requirements.
450. Manufacturing Problems (3)
Discussion and solution of manufacturing problems involving
several subfunctions, with emphasis on problem identifica-
tion and definition; selection of techniques of analysis; pro-
cedures for evaluation of proposed solutions.
461. Readings (1-3)
Intensive study of some area of industrial engineering which
is not covered in general courses.
490. Research Methods Seminar (3)
Research methods in industrial engineering; discussion and
critical analysis of current industrial engineering research;
practice in preparation of research proposals.
International Relations
Professors
Carey Bonthron Joynt, Ph.D., Chairman
Henderson Bampfield Braddick, Ph.D.
Auric Nichols Dunlap, Ph.D.
OlesM. Smolansky, Ph.D.
Associate Professor
Zdenek J. Slouka, Ph.D.
The field of international relations poses an unprecedented
challenge to student and teacher alike and provides a stimula-
ting focus of interest for undergraduate education. It de-
mands full recognition and understanding of the vast forces
which are shaping the world— wars, nationalism, political
ideologies, and modern technology. The leadership and re-
sponsibilities of the United States in the world arena have
created a need for broadly educated young men and women
who possess a clear appreciation of the factors which in-
fluence the policies of nations.
Students will approach the study of state behavior
through courses in the theory and techniques of diplomacy,
the history of modern international relations, and special
seminars in international law international organization, and
world politics. The ultimate objective is to shape and develop
well-informed and independent observers and participants in
the field of international affairs. The flexibility of the pro-
gram permits added study in history, government, economics
and other social sciences.
The broad knowledge and understanding acquired can be
utilized in careers in teaching, the Foreign Service of the
United States and other government agencies, international
business, and the legal profession.
Required Preliminary Courses
IR1.2 World Politics (6)
Required Major Courses
IR 341, 342 International Relations (6)
IR 351, 352 International Institutions (6)
IR 361, 362 International Law (6)
IR 371, 372 Readings in International Relations (6)
and twelve semester hours to be selected,
with the approval of the chairman of the
department, from international relations,
history, and government. A senior essay is
required.
180 International Relations
Undergraduate Courses
1. World Politics (3)
An introductory analysis of the major concepts, principles
and problems involved in an understanding of world politics.
An interdisciplinary approach is used, stressing the impacts of
behavioral, political, economic, demographical, military, legal
and institutional factors on international relations. Considera-
ble emphasis is placed upon current international develop-
ments, essentially as case studies.
2. World Politics (3)
An introduction to the foreign policies of the Great Powers—
the United States, the Soviet Union, Britain, France,
Germany, Japan, China and India—and of regional groupings
in Asia, the Pacific, the Middle East, Black Africa and Latin
America. Considerable emphasis is placed upon current inter-
national developments, essentially as case studies.
11. European International Relations, 1815-1919 (3)
Politics of the Great Powers; clashes of interests and inter-
national crises; development of alliances and other associa-
tions of states; wars and peace settlements; unification of
Germany and Italy; European imperialism; World War I and
the peace treaties.
12. European International Relations Since 1919 (3)
The political and strategic structure of Europe in the 1920's;
the rise of Germany under Hitler; the politics of international
crises, 1935-39; World War II and the new distribution of
power in Europe; development of the Cold War; European
functional integration; contemporary European international
problems; European relations with the United States.
21. The Diplomacy of the Far East to 1919 (3)
The opening of China and Japan; the modernization of
Japan; China's failure to modernize; the division of China
into spheres of influence; international rivalries in Korea,
Manchuria, and Southeast Asia; economic and territorial im-
perialism.
22. The Diplomacy of the Far East Since 1919 (3)
An analysis of recent and contemporary political and eco-
nomic problems confronting not only the countries of the
Orient but the other powers with interests in that region;
Japan's attempt to establish a New Order in Greater East
Asia; the defeat and recovery of Japan; the ascendancy of
communism in China and its consequences.
31. The Middle East in World Affairs (3)
An analysis of the political, economic and social forces which
have led to the rise of the modern states in the Middle East.
Emphasis will be placed upon the role of the area in inter-
national politics from the invasion of Egypt by Napoleon to
1918.
32. The Middle East in World Affairs (3)
The mandates system and the Palestine problem; movements
of modernization in Turkey and Iran; the rise of Arab
nationalism; the impact of the Second World War upon the
position of Britain and France; the growth in influence of the
United States and the Soviet Union; the emergence of Israel
and its impact on the Arab states; the rise of Nasserism and
the Suez Crisis; the growth of neutralism.
133. The Diplomacy of Russia to 1917 (3)
Development and expansion of the Russian Empire; princi-
ples of Russian foreign policy and their specific applications
under the Tsarist and Provisional Governments, treated par-
tially as backgrounds of Soviet policy; interaction between
Russian domestic and foreign affairs.
134. The Diplomacy of Russia Since 1917 (3)
A topical and chronological survey of Russian foreign rela-
tions in the Soviet period; philosophical, psychological, eco-
nomic, social, and other factors influencing the formulation
and execution of foreign policy; interaction between Soviet
domestic and foreign affairs.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
300. Apprentice Teaching in I.R. (3)
311. World Affairs, 1919-1945 (3)
The structure and politics of the state system after World War
I; ideals and realities of the League of Nations; rise of
Germany, Japan and Italy to challenge the established order;
analysis of the political and strategic background to appease-
ment; the international crises of the 1930's; the Second
World War. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
312. World Affairs Since 1945 (3)
The impact of World War II upon the state system; the Cold
War and the development of bipolar international politics;
the United Nations as an instrument for international order
and security; the decline of the colonial system and the emer-
gence of new states; development of Communist China and
Western Europe as new power centers; contemporary prob-
lems in international relations. Prerequisite: consent of in-
structor.
313. (Rel. 313) Religion and International Affairs (3)
Theological assessments of the nation-state, the role of power
in international affairs, national sovereignty and internation-
alism, and war, pacificism, and alternative methods of
conflict-resolution.
323. Southeast Asia in World Affairs (3)
Analysis of the period since the beginning of the Second
World War with special attention to the effect of the
Japanese conquest of the area, the rise of independent states,
the development of the foreign policies of the new states,
Great Power influence, and the development of the Vietnam
conflict. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of department.
International Relations 181
324. The l.ii East in World Affairs I
Analysis of the period since the Second World War with
special attention to the foreign policy of Communist China,
the foreign policy ol Japan since the peace treat) and the
roK- of the Great Powers in the various postwar irises in the
Prerequisite: consent ol chairman of department.
334. Tin- Soviet Union in World Affairs (3)
An appraisal ol the objectives and tactics of Soviet diplo-
macy, with particular emphasis upon Russia's status as one ol
the (.'.rc.it Towers, and upon contemporary Soviet American
relations and their backgrounds. Prerequisite: I.R. 134 or
consent oi chairman ol department.
341. International Relations (3)
An examination of contemporary theories and basic concepts
of world politics, with application to historic and current
issues of international politics. Consent of chairman of de-
partment.
342. International Relations (3)
An examination of the role of force in international politics
including an analysis of deterrence, limited war, arms control
and disarmament problems and crisis diplomacy. Prerequi-
site: consent of chairman of department.
351. International Institutions (3)
Theory and functioning of the League of Nations and the
United Nations with particular reference to the problems of
collective security, enforcement, and the pacific settlement
of disputes; functional and regional organizations; diplomacy
by conference; state sovereignty and inter-state organization.
352. International Institutions (3)
Continuation of I.R. 351, with emphasis upon the United
Nations.
361. International Law (3)
General theories of law and their application to international
law; international lawmaking, adjudication and enforcement;
personality of states, international organizations, corpora-
tions and persons; state succession; title to territory; jurisdic-
tion over territory, waters, airspace, outer space and persons;
the state and the foreign corporation.
362. International Law (3)
Privileges and immunities of diplomatic and consular officers
and of international organizations; treaties and agreements;
pacific settlement; measures short of war; collective security;
the legal status of war and the laws of war; war crimes trials
and international criminal jurisdiction.
371. Readings in International Relations (3)
Directed studies and readings in the several fields of inter-
national relations, designed for the student who has a special
competence or interest in some area not covered by regularly
rostered courses. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite:
consent of chairman of department.
372. Readings in International Relations (3)
Continuation of I.R. 371 . May be repi ated lor credit. Prere-
quisite: consent ol chairman of department,
3S1 . Spi'i ial Topics (3)
An intensive study of some aspects of international politics
not covered in another course. Prerequisite: consent of chair-
man of department.
382. Special Topics (3)
A continuation of I.R. 381. Prerequisite: consent of chair-
man of department.
391. The Teaching ol International Relations (3)
Lectures, readings and discussion of fundamental concepts,
principles and problems of international relations, with cur-
rent applications. Open only to present and prospective
junior and senior high school teachers.
For Graduates
Between twelve and fifteen students currently are pursuing
the master of arts degree in the department of international
relations. The Ph.D. is not offered.
Each student's program is planned on an individual basis
to take advantage of his previous academic work and his
career goals.
A thorough understanding is required of basic theoretical
issues and, unless the student comes prepared, he will be ex-
pected to undertake a course in theoretical analysis. Em-
phasis throughout the department is upon the fundamentals
of international politics as they affect international law and
institutions and the policies and activities of the Great
Powers.
The department offers advanced work in theories of inter-
national politics and special work in Soviet affairs, Middle
Eastern politics, European international relations between
the wars, international law and military problems as well as
arms control and disarmament studies. The department feels
this is attractive preparation for a student who wishes to con-
tinue work toward the doctorate, as a great many depart-
mental majors have done at leading institutions in this
country and abroad.
Candidates for the master's degree may qualify either by
completing successfully thirty hours of approved course work
and passing an examination covering the entire field or by
completing twenty-four hours in approved courses and sub-
mitting a satisfactory thesis. Each candidate will select the
plan better suited to his needs and abilities, upon the advice
and with the approval of the chairman of the department,
and will be required to take a comprehensive oral examina-
tion. In addition, each candidate is normally expected to
possess an adequate reading knowledge of one modern
foreign language.
Students will be encouraged to include in their programs
appropriate courses in economics, government, history,
psychology, and social relations.
182 International Relations
441. Seminar in International Relations (3)
Intensive analysis of selected forces and problems of world
politics.
442. Seminar in International Relations (3)
Continuation of I.R. 441.
Management & Finance
451. Seminar in International Organization (3)
Intensive analysis of selected agencies and activities of the
League of Nations and affiliated institutions.
452. Seminar in International Organization (3)
Continuation of I.R. 451, with emphasis upon the United
Nations.
461. Seminar in International Law (3)
Intensive analysis of the principal theories concerning the
nature of international law and its fundamental conceptions,
with special studies of their application and significance in
contemporary international society.
462. Seminar in International Law (3)
Continuation of I.R. 461.
471. Special Topics (3)
Selected topics in the field of international politics not
covered in other courses. May be repeated ior credit. Prere-
quisite: consent of chairman of department.
472. Special Topics (3)
Continuation of I.R. 471. May be repeated for credit. Prere-
quisite: consent of chairman of department.
Professors
James B. Hobbs, D.B.A., Chairman
Brian G. Brockway, LL.M., Dean of the College of Business
and Economics
Eli Schwartz, Ph.D.
L. Reed Tripp, Ph.D.
Associate Professors
Carl R. Beidleman, Ph.D.
John W. Bonge.Ph.D.
Leon Elwood Krouse, Ph.D.
Benjamin Litt, Ph.D.
Max Donald Snider, M.B.A., Assistant Dean of the College of
Business and Economics
Gary E. Whitehouse, Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
Bruce M. Smackey, Ph.D.
Charles F. Vihon, D.J.
Adjunct Professors
Harry A. Dower, LL.B.
Edward H. McGee, LL.B.
Instructors
James A. Greenleaf, M.A.
Jay C. Lacke, M.B.A.
Edward W. Schmitt, M.B.A.
Finance
Major in Arts and Science College
Required Preliminary Courses
Eco 1 Economics (4)
Math 41 BMSS Calculus I (3)
Math 42 BMSS Probability (3)
Math 43 BMSS Linear Algebra (3)
Fin 225 Business Finance (3)
Eco 129 Money and Banking (3)
Eco 45 Statistical Method (3)
Acctg 108 Fundamentals of Accounting (3)
Management and Finance 183
Fin
12 )
Fin
12 i
Fin
Fin
330
Fin
»31
Fin
(Eco
)332
Fin
(Eco
)340
Fin
(Eco
) 553
Fin
(Eco
) 354
Fin
.171
Fin
372
Required: tS credits beyond the core listed on page 35, from
the following:
Investments
Security Analysis (3)
Problems in Financial Management (3)
Financial Flows and Markets (3)
Bank Management (3)
Monetary-Fiscal Policy (3)
International Finance (3)
Public Finance: Federal (3)
Public Finance: State and Local (3)
Directed Readings (1-3)
Special Topics (1-3)
Major in Business and Economics College
Required: IS credits beyond the core listed on page 40, from
the following:
Investments (3)
Security Analysis (3)
Problems in Financial Mangement (3)
Financial Flows and Markets (3)
Bank Management (3)
Monetary-Fiscal Policy (3)
International Finance (3)
Public Finance: Federal (3)
Public Finance: State and Local (3)
Directed Readings (1-3)
Special Topics (1-3)
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
225. Business Finance (3)
An introductory course in corporation finance which stresses
the management approach as it applies to asset management
and capital structure. Emphasis is placed on financial policies
regarding the acquisition of funds and their allocation to
competing assets within the firm. Problems are used to illus-
trate the principles involved. Prerequisites: Eco. 3 and Acctg.
51 or Acctg. 108.
300. Apprentice Teaching in Fin. (1-3)
323. Investments (3)
An introduction to the investment process. The nature of risk
and the form of returns to financial assets are examined. In-
vestor objectives, attitudes and constraints are considered in
conjunction with the risk-return matrix as the basis for in-
vestment decisions. Problems of timing, market characteris-
tics and portfolio management are also treated. Prerequisite:
a course in corporation finance.
324. Security Analysis (3)
Examination of factors which influence the value of financial
securities, including earnings forecasts and expectations, un-
certainty, investor attitudes, required returns, and the supply
and demand for securities and funds. Also considered are
market factors, technical approaches, timing, screening, and
Fin
323
Fin
324
Fin
326
Fin
330
Fin
331
Fin
(Eco
) 332
Fin
(Eco
1 340
Fin
(Eco
) 353
Fin
(Eco
)354
Fin
371
Fin
372
ilio implications. Prerequisite: :i course in corporation
finance.
32d. Problems in I ni.nui.il Management (3)
Consideration is given to tin- financial policies of manage-
ment, with considerable emphasis placed on the corporation's
relationship to government and the general economy. Prere-
quisite: a course in corporation finance.
330. Financial Flows and Markets (3)
The nature and role of financial intermediaries in financial
markets from a flow of-tunds perspective. Emphasis is on the
interrelationships between financial and non-financial flows
in the economy, and the forecasting of interest rate struc-
tures. Prerequisite: junior standing.
331. Bank Management (3)
The management of bank resources and assets within the
framework of economic and legal constraints. Particular
attention is given to optimizing the objectives of profitabili-
ty, safety, and liquidity. Completion of a project in bank
management is required of each student. Prerequisite: senior
standing.
332. (Eco. 332) Monetary-Fiscal Policy (3)
For course description, see Eco. 332.
340. (Eco. 340) International Finance (3)
For course description, see Eco. 340.
353. (Eco. 353) Public Finance: Federal (3)
For course description, see Eco. 353.
354. (Eco. 354) Public Finance: State and Local (3)
For course description, see Eco. 354.
371. Directed Readings (3)
A course of readings in various fields of finance, designed for
the student who has a special interest in some field of finance
not covered in scheduled courses. Prerequisite: preparation in
finance acceptable to the department chairman.
372. Special Topics (1-3)
Special problems and issues in finance for which no regularly
scheduled coursework exists. When offered as group study,
coverage will vary according to interests of instructor and
students. Prerequisite: preparation in finance acceptable to
the department chairman. May be repeated.
For Graduates
415. (Eco. 415) Capital and Interest Theory (3)
Examination of theories of interest and capital. The follow-
ing topics are investigated: present value theory; investment
valuation under certainty and risk; term structure of interest
rates; the theory of savings, cost of capital, and capital forma-
tion. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.
184 Management and Finance
421. Financial Management (3)
A decision-oriented course which integrates the theory and
practice of business finance. Among the topics included are
working capital management, capital expenditure decisions,
functions of the capital markets, mergers, dividend policy,
capital structure, valuation and the cost of capital. The effect
of uncertainty on the problems of financial analysis is con-
sidered. Readings, case problems and decision-oriented re-
ports are utilized to illustrate the principles involved. Prere-
quisite: Fin. 225 and E.co. 129.
425. (Eco. 425) Public Finance (3)
For course description, see Eco. 425.
431. Advanced Investment Analysis and Portfolio
Management (3)
This course is designed to integrate the theoretical and em-
pirical aspects of the economic environment with the invest-
ment analysis associated with portfolio management program
of financial intermediaries and individuals. Particular em-
phasis will be given in the course to the current impingements
of the economic environment upon portfolio management
decisions. Prerequisite: a course in investments.
442. (Eco. 442) Foreign Trade Management (3)
For course description, see Eco. 442.
444. (Eco. 444) Banking and Monetary Policy (3)
For course description, see Eco. 444.
451. Quantitative Financial Models (3)
A survey of quantitative models as they relate to financial
theory and applications. Finance topics include capital bud-
geting, portfolio selection, security evaluation, cash manage-
ment, inventory policy and credit analysis. Prerequisite: con-
sent of instructor.
471. Directed Readings (1-3)
Graduate readings in finance not covered in regularly sched-
uled coursework. Prerequisite: preparation in finance
acceptable to the department chairman. May be repeated.
472. Special Topics (1-3)
Special problems and issues in finance for which no regularly
scheduled graduate coursework exists. When offered as group
study, coverage will vary according to interests in finance
acceptable to the department chairman. May be repeated.
Law
Undergraduate Courses
101. Business Law (3)
The law of contracts, sales and bailments; legal method and
the judicial process.
102. Business Law (3)
The law of negotiable instruments, bank deposits and collec-
tions, secured transactions, and business organizations
(agency, partnerships, and corporations). Prerequisite: Law
101.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
211. Legal Concepts (3)
Study of legal reasoning, law as a process of resolving dis-
putes, law as an instrument of social control; selected prob-
lems in ownership; provisions for the redress of harm; main-
tenance of law and order.
300. Apprentice Teaching in Law (1-3)
320. Social Change and the Law (3)
Examination of how law and the legal process accommodate
society's pressures for change within existing institutional
frameworks. Representative topics include fair employment
practices, open housing, consumer credit and protection, and
private and public access to information. Prerequisite: Law
101 or Law 211.
For Graduates
401. Legal Problems in Business (3)
Specific legal problems involved in making business decisions.
Emphasis is placed on preventive law and the tax conse-
quences of business transactions. Prerequisite: Law 101 or
102.
410. Law and Urban Society (3)
Exploration of the juridical aspects of and conditions for
institutionalized decision-making in urbanized society. Topics
include the relationship between public and private decision-
making and the distribution of legal power between levels of
government. Prerequisite: Law 101 or Law 211.
Management
Major in Business and Economics
Required: IS credits beyond the core listed on page 40 from
the following:
Required Courses
Mgt 301
Mgt 302
Elective Courses
Business Management Policies (3)
Quantitative Models— Conceptual (3)
Three courses (9 credit hours) may be selected from the fol-
lowing, with no more than six credits taken from outside the
College of Business and Economics.
Mgt 304 Quantitative Models— Applications (3)
Mgt 321 Organization Behavior (3)
Mgt 331 Industrial Relations (3)
Management and Finance: Law 185
Mgl ?71 Directed Readings (1-3)
Mgl Special ropics (1-3)
>ll Accounting Information System (3)
Manpower Economics (3)
i i )38 Laboi Market Institutions (3)
Eco 352 Advanced Statistical Methods (3)
Public Administration (3)
IE ) ; 1 Organization and Administration (3)
121 Encountering Self and Others (3)
Psych 201 Industrial Psychology (3)
Psych 251 Psychologic.il Perspectives in Technological
Society (3)
SR 30 ; Group and Organization (3)
SR 304 Human Communication (3)
SR 383 Industrial Sociology (3)
Undergraduate Courses
300. Apprentice Teaching in Mgt.
(1-3)
301. Business Management Policies (3)
A study ot business problems and the formulation of policies
to meet these problems from the viewpoint of general
management, integrating knowledge acquired in other courses
in order to develop skill in policy formulation for particular
functions and for companies as a whole. Long range goals'
attainment and the required administration actions will be
emphasized. The course is supplemented by case studies,
simulation games, and interactions with management of local
industry. Prerequisite: senior standing in management or
marketing major, or senior standing in College of Business
and Economics with consent of department chairman.
302. Quantitative Models— Conceptual (3)
Survey course of various management science models and
methods; mathematical programming, inventory, queueing,
maintenance and replacement, simulation, PERT and CPM,
line of balance, and game theory. Prerequisites: Eco. 45,
Acctg. Ill, and one semester of calculus.
304. Quantitative Models— Applications (3)
Extension and application of selected topics covered in Mgt.
302. Development of term projects to solve practical prob-
lems. Prerequisite: Mgt. 302.
321. Organization Behavior (3)
Focus on three interpersonal processes that underlie most
behavior interactions in work groups: (1) conflict behavior
and modes of conflict resolution; (2) competitive behavior in
individual and small groups; and (3) cooperative behavior
(ritualistic and non-ritualistic). Prerequisite: Mgt. 201 (or a
course in psychology) and permission of the department
head.
371. Directed Readings (1-3)
Readings in various fields of management, designed for the
student who has a special interest in some field of manage-
ment not covered by the regularly scheduled courses. Prere-
quisite: preparation in managemenl acceptable to the de-
partment chairman. May be repeated.
372. Special Topics (1-3)
Special problems and issues in management lor which no
regularly scheduled courscwork exists. When offered as group
study, coverage will vary according to interests of instructor
and students. Prerequisite: preparation in management
ii . eptable to the department chairman. May be repeated.
412. Organization Structures and Processes (3)
An examination ot the structure and processes of organiza-
tions. The traditional bureaucratic model of managing work
and information flow is contrasted with the behavioral
decision-making model of the firm. A synthesis of these per-
spectives is sought through a study of the contemporary
theory of organization. Classroom activity centers around the
discussion of research-based theories and the analysis of case
problems. Prerequisite: Mgt. 201 or a contingency course in
psychology and permission of the instructor.
417. (I.E. 417) Advanced Mathematical Programming (3)
For description, see I.E. 417.
418. Analytical Methods in Management (3)
Application of management science methods to industrial
and commercial problems. Scientific method, decision
theory, linear programming, inventory control, regression
analysis, forecasting, simulation, and related areas are exam-
ined in the context of accounting, finance, marketing and
manufacturing. Prerequisite: Mgt. 302 or consent of in-
structor.
430. (I.E. 430) Management Science Project (3)
As an individual or as a member of a small group, an analysis
is made of a management problem and the design of its solu-
tion is made in corporating management science techniques.
An individual written report is required. Recommended that
it be taken in the last semester of the M.S. in management
science program.
451. Managerial Policy and Decision-Making (3)
Integration of theory and analytic techniques through inten-
sive investigation of complex economic and financial prob-
lems in corporations. A case-study approach is used. Topics
include economic and accounting cost analysis, price determi-
nation, demand forecasting, capital investment analysis, risk
and uncertainty, and the economic evaluation of alternatives.
Prerequisites: graduate level exposure to accounting, eco-
nomics, finance, management and marketing. An MBA stu-
dent should take the course in the last semester of his MBA
program.
471. Directed Readings (1-3)
Graduate readings in management not covered in regularly
scheduled coursework. Prerequisite: preparation in manage-
ment acceptable to the department chairman. May be re-
peated.
186 Management and Finance
472. Special Topics (1-3)
Special problems and issues in management for which no
regularly scheduled graduate coursework exists. When offered
as group study, coverage will vary according to interest of
instructor and students. Prerequisite: preparation in manage-
ment acceptable to the department chairman. May be re-
peated.
Marketing
Major in Business and Economics College
Required: 15 credits beyond the core listed on page 40 fron
the following:
Required Courses
Business Management Policies (3)
Quantitative Models— Conceptual (3)
Marketing Research (3)
Mgt 301
Mgt 302
Mkt312
Elective Courses
Two courses (6 credit hours) from the following:
Mkt 213 Marketing Communications (3)
Mkt 220 Behavioral Aspects of Selling (3)
Mkt 315 Consumer Behavior (3)
Mkt 317 Industrial Marketing (3)
Mkt 319 New Product Planning (3)
Mkt 371 Directed Readings (1-3)
Mkt 372 Special Topics (1-3)
Undergraduate Courses
211. The American Marketing System (3)
Examination and analysis ot the contemporary marketing
system within a conceptual and systems-oriented approach;
as a social institution; specific marketing activities; and evalu-
ation of its socioeconomic strengths and weaknesses.
213. Marketing Communications (3)
The purposes and effects of marketing communications in-
cluding the formation, performance, and dissolution of
channels of communications, and socioeconomic aspects.
Prerequisite: Mkt. 211.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
220. Behavioral Aspects of Selling (3)
Analysis and application of behavioral science concepts to
the sales transaction. The role of personal selling in the total
mix of available marketing communications is examined
through case problems and field work. Prerequisite: Mkt. 211
and consent of instructor.
300. Apprentice Teaching in Mkt.
(1-3)
312. Marketing Research (3)
Use of quantitative and qualitative information in routine
and non-recurring decision-making. Topics include statistical
design of marketing studies, model building, analysis of re-
search studies, and the development of marketing informa-
tion systems. Case problems and presentation of student
research projects examine problems in communicating
research results. Prerequisites: Mkt. 211 and Eco. 45.
315. Consumer Behavior (3)
Examination of principal theories which the fields of psy-
chology, social psychology, anthropology, and economics
contribute toward understanding the behavior and motiva-
tions of consumers. Topics include consumer needs and
wants; learning theory; the perceptual process; decision-
making processes; communication; search behavior; market
segmentation and product differentiation; and the adoption
and diffusion of innovations. Prerequisite: Mkt. 312 or
equivalent.
317. Industrial Marketing (3)
Analysis of marketing problems unique to manufacturers of
industrial products. Focus on planning the product line, de-
veloping pricing strategies, analyzing buyer behavior, and
managing customer relations. Case problems. Prerequisite:
Mkt. 211 or equivalent background.
319. New Product Planning (3)
An advanced marketing course specializing in the organiza-
tion and management of marketing activities related to the
development of new and improved products. The role of
marketing research and pre-production testing in the com-
mercialization process. Application of simulation and risk
analysis to the screening of research and development pro-
jects. Prerequisite: Mkt. 312 or consent of department head.
371. Directed Readings (1-3)
Readings in various fields ot marketing, designed for the stu-
dent who has a special interest in some field of marketing not
covered in regularly scheduled courses. Prerequisite: prepara-
tion in marketing acceptable to the department chairman.
May be repeated.
372. Special Topics (1-3)
Special problems and issues in marketing for which no regu-
larly scheduled coursework exists. When offered as group
study, coverage will vary according to the interests of the
instructor and students. Prerequisite: preparation in market-
ing acceptable to the department chairman. May be repeated.
For Graduates
420. Managing the Sales Effort (3)
Organizing and managing the sales staff, including selection,
training, compensation, motivation, and supervision. Plan-
ning, executing, and controlling aspects are emphasized. Pre-
requisite: graduate coursework in marketing, or the
equivalent.
Management and Finance: Marketing 187
I Ml. Marketing l'l. inning .mhI Organization (3)
iduatc course in marketing with an emphasis on market
ing planning, marketing organization, and the impact ol in-
formation on marketing decision-making, Analytical exam-
ination of pricing, product, promotion, and distribution
ilr, ision: development of competitive strategies.
471. Directed Readings (1-3)
Graduate readings in marketing not covered in regularly
scheduled courses. When offered as group study, coverage
will vary according to the interests of the instructor and stu-
dents. Prerequisite: preparation in marketing acceptable Co
the department chairman. May be repeated.
472. Special Topics (1-3)
Special problems and issues in marketing for which no regu-
larly scheduled graduate coursework exists. When offered as
group study, coverage will vary according to the interest of
the instructor and students. Prerequisite: preparation in mar-
keting acceptable to the department chairman. May be re-
peated.
Mathematics
Professors
Arthur Everett Pitcher, Ph.D., Chairman and Distinguished
Professor
Edward F. Assmus, Jr., Ph.D.
Dominic G. B. Edelen, Ph.D.
Bhaskar Kumar Ghosh, Ph.D.
Theodore Hailperin, Ph.D.
Chuan-Chih Hsiung, Ph.D.
Samir Anton Khabbaz, Ph.D.
Jerry Porter King, Ph.D.
Gilbert Allan Stenglc, Ph.D.
Albert Wilansky, Ph.D.
Associate Professors
Samuel Linial Gulden, M.A.
Gregory T. McAllister, Ph.D.
George E. McCluskey, Ph.D.
Gerhard Rayna, Ph.D.
Murray Schechter, Ph.D.
Andrew Kagey Snyder, Ph.D.
David Trutt, Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
Franklin S. Brenneman, Ph.D.
Paul L. Davis, Ph.D.
Bennett Eisenberg, Ph.D.
Gary Bernard Laison, Ph.D.
Robert W. Johnson, Ph.D.
Viswanatha Raja Gopala Rao, Ph.D.
Ruth Silverman, Ph.D.
Herbert Bancroft Skerry, Ph.D.
Lecturers
Marguerite B. Gravez, M.A.
Gail Chadwell Herz, Ph.D.
The major in mathematics is designed to cover each of the
three main divisions of mathematics: Analysis, Geometry,
and Algebra. Rigor and abstraction, properly motivated, are
introduced early in the major in the firm belief that therein
lies the essence of mathematics, not only as a liberal disci-
pline studied for its own sake, but also in the deeper applica-
tions of mathematics to the sciences. On completion of the
major program, it is expected that the student will have
gained an appreciation of the universal character of the sub-
ject as well as the ability to think in mathematical terms.
With this broad orientation, he could readily become a
188 Mathematics
teacher with a penetrating knowledge of his field, a skilled
user of mathematics in one of the rapidly multiplying posi-
tions in industry and government, or a student in graduate
school, continuing to advance to the frontiers of study and
research in mathematics.
Required Preliminary Courses
Math 21 Analytic Geometry and Calculus I (4)
Math 22 Analytic Geometry and Calculus II (4)
Math 23 Analytic Geometry and Calculus III (4)
or
Math 31 Calculus (4)
Math 32 Calculus (4)
Required Major Courses
Math 205 Linear Methods (3)
Math 219 Principles of Analysis (3)
Math 220 Principles of Analysis (3)
Math 226 Complex Analysis (3)
Math 243 Algebra (3)
Math 244 Algebra (3)
Approved Electives (12)
Note: The elective courses must include Math. 307 or Math.
320. Both may be selected. Students with a special interest,
such as applied mathematics, may include mathematically-
oriented 200- or 300-level courses offered by other depart-
ments. Approval by a designated representative of the chair-
man of the department is required.
Students interested in actuarial science can major in mathe-
matics, choosing appropriate courses in consultation with a
representative of the chairman of the department, to prepare
for certain of the actuarial examinations.
Undergraduate Courses
21. Analytic Geometry and Calculus I (4)
Functions and graphs; limits and continuity; derivative and
differential; indefinite and definite integral; logarithm and
exponential.
22. Analytic Geometry and Calculus II (4)
Trigonometric and hyperbolic functions; integration; vector
algebra and calculus; solid analytic geometry. Prerequisite:
Math. 21.
31. Calculus (4)
Functions and graphs; limits and continuity; derivative and
differential; indefinite and definite integral; logarithm expo-
nential, trigonometric and hyperbolic functions; integration;
vector algebra and calculus. Math. 31 may be used in place of
Math. 21 to satisfy prerequisites. Prerequisite: consent of
chairman of department.
32. Calculus (4)
Vector calculus; solid analytic geometry; series; Taylor's
Theorem approximations; partial derivatives; multiple inte-
grals; line and surface integrals; differential equations. Math.
32 may be used in place of Math. 23 to satisfy prerequisites.
Prerequisite: Math. 31.
Mathematics courses 41-44 are designed primarily for stu-
dents of the Biological, Management, and Social Sciences.
41. BMSS Calculus (3)
The Riemann integral, the derivative, limits and continuous
functions, the mean value theorem, the fundamental theorem
of the calculus, antiderivatives, applications of the integral,
maxima and minima, infinite sequences and series, partial
derivatives.
42. BMSS Probability (3)
Sets, functions, counting methods, probability spaces, condi-
tional probability and independence, random variables, con-
tinuous probability spaces, some useful probability distribu-
tions—binomial, hypergeometric, Poisson, uniform,
exponential and normal.
43. BMSS Linear Algebra (3)
Matrices, vectors, vector spaces and mathematical systems,
special kinds of matrices, elementary matrix transformations,
systems of linear equations, convex sets, introduction to
linear programming.
44. BMSS Calculus (3)
Functions of several variables, applications of partial deriva-
tives, extreme values of functions, Lagrangian multipliers,
complex variables and exponentials, Euler's formula, calculus
of trigonometric functions, linear difference and differential
equations, systems of linear equations, numerical solution of
differential equations. Prerequisite: Math. 41 and 43, or 21
and 43, or consent of chairman of the department.
23. Analytic Geometry and Calculus III (4)
Series; Taylor's Theorem; approximations; partial derivatives,
multiple integrals; line and surface integrals; differential equa-
tions. Prerequisite: Math. 22.
Mathematics 31 and 32 is an accelerated calculus sequence
which is equivalent to Mathematics 21, 22, and 23.
81. Computers and Calculus (1)
Writing and testing digital computer programs to solve prob-
lems arising from the calculus. Designed for students enrolled
in Math. 21, 31, and 41 who are not taking another introduc-
tory course in computing. No previous knowledge of pro-
gramming is assumed. Prerequisite: Math. 21, 31, or 41, con-
currently or previously.
82. Computers and Calculus (1)
A continuation of Math. 81. Prerequisite: Math. 81 or con-
sent of chairman of department.
Mathematics 189
10.S. Computet 1'iogi.immillg (3)
The tr.uisl.uhni of simple mathematical and logical problems
into forms permitting their solution by digital computers,
with emphasis on machine-language programming o I several
typical types ol computers.
110. (I.S. 110) Algorithmic Reasoning (3 J
The role of machines as physical models of abstract pro-
! esses. Computability, practical computability, and unsolva-
bility. Examples drawn from pure mathematics including
recursive function theory and the real number system. Prere-
quisite: Math. 23 or Math. 32.
171. Reading Courses in Mathematics (1)
Credit not to exceed one hour per semester, total credit not
to exceed three hours; approval of program and written re-
port required. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of
department.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
For students who have not taken their elementary mathe-
matics at Lehigh, the prerequisites for certain advanced
courses are stated in terms of the number of semester hours
of calculus.
205. Linear Methods (3)
Matrices; systems of linear equations; determinants and rank;
characteristic roots; linear differential equations; eigenvalue
problems; analytic functions; Bessel's equation. Designed tor
undergraduates in science and engineering. Prerequisite:
Math. 23 or Math. 32.
208. Complex Variables (3)
Functions of a complex variable; calculus of residues; con-
tour integration; applications to conformal mapping and
Laplace transforms. Prerequisite: Math. 23, Math 32, or nine
semester hours of differential and integral calculus.
219. Principles oi Analysis 1 (3)
The real number system; limits; continuous functions; dif-
ferentiation; integration; infinite series. Prerequisite: Math.
23, Math. 32 or nine semester hours of differential and in-
tegral calculus.
220. Principles of Analysis II (3)
Continuation of Math. 219. Absolute and uniform conver-
gence; functions of several variables; line and surface in-
tegrals; implicit functions. Prerequisite: Math. 219.
226. Complex Analysis (3)
A self-contained survey of the fundamentals of complex
analysis. The concept of analytic function from the points of
view of the Cauchy-Riemann equations, power series, com-
plex integration and conformal mapping. Prerequisite: Math.
219.
230. Numerical Methods (3)
Numerical solution of non-line. ir equations and systems;
linear systems and the algebraic eigenvalue problem dif-
ference i alculus and interpolation; numerical differentiation
and quadrature; numerical solution of ordinary differential
equations. Students will use a digital computer. Prerequisite:
Math. 205.
231. Statistical Inference (3)
Probability and distribution of random variables; populations
and random sampling; t, chi-square, and F distributions; esti-
mation and tests of hypotheses; correlation and regression
theory of two variables. Prerequisite: Math. 23, Math 32, or
nine semester hours of calculus.
243. Algebra (3)
An introduction to the basic concepts of modern algebra
beginning with group theory and including ring theory, linear
algebra, and field theory. Prerequisite: Math. 205.
244. Algebra (3)
A continuation of Math. 243. Prerequisite: Math. 243.
251. Mathematical Methods (1-4)
An introductory survey of topics in analysis for graduate
students in fields other than mathematics. Topics may in-
clude: differential equations, techniques of series expansion,
numerical methods, matrix and vector analysis, complex vari-
ables, calculus of vector fields. Formal applications are em-
phasized. Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of the
instructor. With consent of the department chairman, may be
repeated for credit. Offered occasional years.
252. Mathematical Methods (1-4)
A survey of topics in analysis for graduate students in fields
other than mathematics, either continuing topics treated in
Math. 251 or introducing new topics. Prerequisites: graduate
standing and consent of the instructor. With consent of the
department chairman, may be repeated for credit.
284. Number Theory (3)
A survey of elementary and non-elementary algebraic and
analytic methods in the theory of numbers. Includes the
Euclidean algorithm, Diophantine equations, congruences,
quadratic residues, primitive roots, number-theoretic func-
tions as well as one or more of the following topics: distribu-
tion of primes, Pell's equation, Fermat's conjecture,
partitions. Prerequisite: Math. 219 or consent of the chair-
man of the department.
285. Introduction to Geometries (3)
Introduction to synthetic and analytic projective geometry
with emphasis on Euclidean and non-Euclidean geometries as
special cases. Some familiarity with matrices and determi-
nants is desirable.
1 90 Mathematics
301. Vector and Tensor Analysis (3)
Elementary vector identities. Gauss's theorem and Stokes's
theorem. Elementary differential geometry of curves and
surfaces. Calculus of tensors. Prerequisite: Math. 23 or Math.
32 or nine semester hours of differential and integral calcu-
lus.
303. Mathematical Logic (3)
A course, on a mathematically mature level, designed not
only to acquaint the student with the logical techniques used
in mathematics but also to present symbolic logic as an im-
portant adjunct in the study of the foundations of mathe-
matics.
322. Methods of Applied Analysis I (3)
Fourier series, eigenfunction expansions, Sturm Liouville
problems, Fourier integrals and their application to partial
differential equations; special functions. Emphasis is on a
wide variety of formal applications rather than logical devel-
opment. Prerequisite: Math. 205 or consent of chairman of
department.
323. Methods of Applied Analysis II (3)
Green's functions; integral equations; variational methods;
asymptotic expansions, method of saddle points; calculus of
vector fields, exterior differential calculus. Prerequisite:
Math. 322.
304. Axiomatic Set Theory (3)
A development of set theory from axioms; relations and
functions; ordinal and cardinal arithmetic; recursion theorem;
axiom of choice; independence questions. Prerequisite: Math.
219 or consent of the instructor.
307. General Topology I (3)
An introductory study of topological spaces, including metric
spaces, separation and countability axioms, connectedness,
compactness, product spaces, quotient spaces, function
spaces. Prerequisite: Math. 219.
308. Algebraic Topology I (3)
Polyhedra, fundamental groups, simplicial and singular homo-
logy. Prerequisites: Math. 307 and Math. 327.
309. Theory of Probability (3)
Probabilities on discrete and continuous sample spaces;
events on a discrete sample space; random variables and prob-
ability distributions; transformations; simplest kind of law of
large numbers and central limit theorem. The theory will be
applied to problems in physical and biological science. Prere-
quisite: Math. 23, Math. 32, or nine semester hours of dif-
ferential and integral calculus.
310. Probability and its Applications (3)
Continuation of Math. 309. Random variables, characteristic
functions, limit theorems; stochastic processes, Kolmogorov
equations; Markov chains, random walks; time series. Prere-
quisite: Math. 309 or consent of the chairman of the depart-
ment.
317. (E.E. 317, I.E. 317) Analytical Methods for Information
Sciences (3)
For description, see E.E. 317.
320. Ordinary Differential Equations (3)
The analytical and geometric theory of ordinary differential
equations, including such topics as linear systems, systems in
the complex plane, oscillation theory, stability theory, geo-
metric theory of non-linear systems, finite difference
methods, general dynamical systems. Prerequisite: Math. 220
previously or concurrently and Math. 205.
327. Groups and Rings (3)
An intensive study of the concepts of group theory including
the Sylow theorems, and of ring theory including unique
factorization domains and polynomial rings.
331. Numerical Analysis (3)
Examination of some commonly used numerical methods for
the solution of linear and non-linear equations, quadrature,
and the solution of ordinary differential equations. Special
attention is given to the analysis of errors resulting from
rounding, discretization, and truncation. The course work
involves the use of a digital computer. Prerequisite: Math.
219.
333. Difference Methods for Partial Differential Equations
(3)
Maximum principles; theory of characteristics; construction
of convergent and stable difference schemes; error analysis;
variational techniques; iterative methods; Von Neumann's
stability criterion; eigenvalue problems. Prerequisite: consent
of the chairman of the department.
334. Mathematical Statistics (3)
Populations and random sampling; sampling distributions;
theory of statistical estimation; criteria and methods of point
and interval estimation; theory of testing statistical hypo-
thesis; analysis of variance; non-parametric methods. Prere-
quisite: Math. 309 or consent of the chairman of the depart-
ment.
350. Special Topics (3)
A course covering special topics not sufficiently covered in
the general courses. Prerequisite: consent of the chairman of
department. May be repeated for credit. Offered occasional
years.
361. (I.S. 361) Theory of Formal Grammars (3)
For description see I.S. 361.
362. Computer Languages (3)
An examination of a number of high-level computer program-
ming languages, and of the concepts and techniques which
are used in the design of the compilers which translate them.
Prerequisite: Math. 105 or consent of the instructor.
Mathematics 191
371. Readings in Mathematics ;
The study ol a tOpi< in mathematics under appropriate super
vision: designed lor the individual student who has studied
extensively and whose interests lie in .ire.is not covered in the
listed courses. Prerequisite: consent of the chairman of the
department. May be repeated for credit.
381. Probability and Statistics (3)
Combinatorial problems, theory of probability, various fre-
quency distributions, standard deviation, sampling, correla-
tion. Prerequisite: open to secondary school teachers who
present at least eighteen hours of undergraduate mathe-
matics.
382. Algebra (3)
Fundamentals of algebra, axiomatic method, set theory, no-
tions of group, ring, integral domain, and field. Prerequisite:
same as Math. 381 .
385. Higher Geometry 1 (3)
Logical systems, postulates, synthetic projective geometry,
analytic projective geometry, affine, euclidean and non-
euclidean geometry. Prerequisite: same as Math. 381.
387. Intermediate Analysis (3)
The real number system, functions, limits, continuity, deriva-
tive, law of the mean, Taylor's formula, definite integral.
Prerequisite: open only to secondary school teachers of
mathematics who present at least 18 semester hours of under-
graduate mathematics including a course in analysis.
For Graduates— Mathematical Program
The department of mathematics offers a graduate program in
mathematics leading to the Ph.D. degree. The first of these
degrees was awarded in 1939. In the fall of 1972 there were
about fifty-five graduate students of mathematics, of whom
about twenty-five were engaged in writing Ph.D. theses. The
M.S. degree in mathematics may be taken as a terminal de-
gree or as an incidental step on the road to a Ph.D. degree.
To begin graduate work in mathematics, a student must
present evidence of adequate study of mathematics as an
undergraduate. His program should have included at least a
year of advanced calculus, a semester of linear algebra, and a
semester on groups, rings, and fields.
The program for the M.S. degree will ordinarily include
Math. 307, 308, 327, 401, 415, 423, 428. A student with
unusually strong background, or specialized interests, may be
permitted to make substitutions.
The M.S. degree requires either a thesis or a comprehen-
sive examination at the discretion of the department chair-
man. The same examination is used as the comprehensive
examination for the M.S. degree and the qualifying examina-
tion for the Ph.D. degree. Thus it is usually required for the
M.S. degree for those students who plan to continue to the
Ph.D. A syllabus for the examination is available.
The plan of work for the Ph.D. degree will ordinarily
include courses in algebra, analysis, geometry, and topology
at the 400-level and several courses including seminars in the
field in which the dissertation is to be written. The depart-
ment accepts candidates for the Ph.D. who wish to specialize
in and to write a dissertation on some aspect of any of the
following areas of advanced work: analysis with emphasis on
pure mathematics or applied mathematics, algebra, functional
analysis, differential geometry, mathematical logic, probabili-
ty, statistics, and topology.
One may wish to refer to the description of the Center for
the Application of Mathematics.
For Graduates— Computer Science Program
With the cooperation of several other departments, the de-
partment of mathematics also offers a program leading to the
degree of M.S. in Computer Science.
To begin work in this program, the student must have
some skill in programming in a computer language such as
FORTRAN, ALGOL, BASIC, APL, or WIZARD, and some
familiarity with the concepts of machine or assembly langu-
ages. (Math. 105 can be taken, without graduate credit, to
remedy deficiency in these areas.) He must also present at
least two years of college mathematics.
The program must include the following four "core
courses," except as competence in the respective areas results
from past courses, experience, or is demonstrated otherwise:
Math 317 Analytical Methods for Information
Sciences (3)
Math 362 Computer Languages (3)
EE 241 Switching Theory and Logic Design (3)
IE 310 File Structure and Processing (3)
The student's program is to be developed in consultation
with a departmental advisor, and approved by an interdepart-
mental committee.
Further information can be found in a separate announce-
ment available from the department.
401. Real Analysis I (3)
Spaces of continuous functions; the Lebesgue integral; dif-
ferentiation; general theory of measure and integration;
Banach and Hilbert spaces; Lp-spaces. Applications to such
topics in classical analysis as integral equations and Fourier
series. Prerequisite: Math. 307 or consent of the chairman of
the department.
402. Real Analysis II (3)
Continuation of Math. 401. Prerequisite: Math. 401.
404. Mathematical Logic (3)
Advanced topics in quantification theory relevant to formal-
ized theories, recursive functions, Godel's incompleteness
theorem; algorithms and computability. Prerequisite: Math.
303.
192 Mathematics
405. Partial Differential Equations (3)
Classification and transformation of equations; theory of
characteristics; initial and boundary value problems; Cauchy's
problem for hyberbolic equations; Dirichlet's problem for
elliptic equations; potential theory; Green's function; har-
monic and sub-harmonic functions; difference equations;
applications to equations of physics. Prerequisite: Math. 220.
406. Partial Differential Equations (3)
Continuation of Math. 405. Prerequisite: Math. 405.
407. Transforms (3)
The properties and use of the Fourier transform, the Laplace
transform, the finite transform and generalized functions.
Prerequisites: Math. 220 and either Math. 208, Math. 226, or
Math. 415.
408. Boundary Value Problems (3)
The study of boundary value problems with attention to
integral equations, special functions, variational methods, and
eigenvalue problems. Prerequisites: Math. 220 and either
Math. 208, Math. 226, or Math. 415.
409. Mathematics Seminar (3 or 6)
An intensive study of some field of mathematics not offered
in another course. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of de-
partment.
410. Mathematics Seminar (3 or 6)
Continuation of the field of study in Math. 409 or the inten-
sive study of a different field. Prerequisite: consent of chair-
man of department.
415. Complex Function Theory (3)
An intensive study of the theory of analytic functions of one
complex variable emphasizing the following topics: the
Cauchy theory, representation theorems for analytic func-
tions, the geometric theory, analytic continuation and
Riemann surfaces. Prerequisite: consent of the chairman of
the department.
424. Differential Geometry II (3)
Multilinear algebra; differentiable manifolds; tensor bundles;
exterior differential forms; theorems of Stokes and
Frobenius; imbedding theorem; affine connections;
holonomy groups; Riemannian manifolds. Prerequisites:
Math. 423 and Math. 308.
425. Differential Geometry III (3)
Continuation of Math. 424. Curvature tensor; manifolds of
constant curvature; Gauss-Bonnet formula; completeness;
harmonic forms; curvature and homology; infinitesimal trans-
formations; conjugate points and Morse index theorem; Lie
groups and Lie algebras. Prerequisite: Math. 424.
428. Fields and Modules (3)
Field theory, including an introduction to Galois Theory; the
theory of modules, including tensor products and classical
algebras. Prerequisite: Math. 327.
431. Calculus of Variations (3)
Fundamental existence theorems; necessary conditions and
sufficient conditions for relative minima of single integrals;
the index theorem application to boundary value problems.
Prerequisite: Math. 401.
435. Functional Analysis I (3)
Linear topological spaces', local convexity; function spaces;
inductive and weak topologies; duality, separation and exten-
sion theorems; the open mapping and uniform boundedness
principles; Banach algebras; applications to classical analysis.
Prerequisite: Math. 307.
436. Functional Analysis II (3)
Continuation of Math. 435. Prerequisite: Math. 435.
443. General Topology II (3)
A continuation of Math. 307, with such topics as filters and
nets, topological products, local compactness, paracompact-
ness, metrizability, uniformity, function spaces, dimension
theory. Prerequisite: Math. 307.
416. Complex Function Theory (3)
Continuation of Math. 415. Prerequisite: Math. 415 or con-
sent of the chairman of the department.
444. Algebraic Topology II (3)
Continuation of Math. 308. Cohomology theory, products,
duality. Prerequisite: Math. 308.
419. Linear Operators in Hilbert Space (3)
Algebra and calculus of bounded and unbounded operators in
Hubert space, with applications to differential operators and
integral equations. Spectral analysis of self-adjoint, normal,
and unitary operators. Emphasis will be given to those
aspects of the theory which have applications in the physical
sciences. Prerequisite: Math. 208, Math. 226 or Math. 415.
423. Differential Geometry I (3)
The differential geometry of curves and surfaces in Euclidean
space, including problems in the large.
445. Algebraic Topology III (3)
Homotopy theory, obstruction theory, spectral sequences.
Prerequisite: Math. 444.
449. Advanced Topics in Algebra (3)
An intensive study of some topics in algebra with emphasis
on recent developments. May be repeated for credit. Prere-
quisite: consent of chairman of department.
Mathematics 193
151, Measure [Tieory (3)
nts ( hosen from such copies as: ergodie theory;
incisure on topological spaces; harmonic analysis on groups;
invariant measures on transformation groups. May be re-
peated tor credit. Prerequisite: Math. -1(12.
453. Function Theory (3)
The development of one or more topics in function theory,
such as analytic continuation, maximum modulus principle,
conforms! representation, Taylor series analysis, integral
functions, Dirichlct series, functions of several complex
variables. Prerequisite: Math. 416.
457. Summability (3)
The summability of sequences, series, and functions including
the development of one or more of the following topics: the
classical theorems of Toeplitz, Schur, and Kojima; summabili-
ty of Fourier and Taylor series; inclusion, equivalence and
consistency theorems; functional analytic methods in summa-
bility; summability in more general settings such as linear
spaces or topological groups. With permission may be
repeated tor credit. Prerequisite: consent of the chairman of
the department.
461. Mathematical Statistics (3)
An intensive study of one or more topics not sufficiently
covered in Math. 334, such as theory of statistical tests,
statistical estimation, regression and analysis of variance,
nonparametric methods, stochastic approximation, decision
theory. Prerequisites: Math. 334 and Math. 401.
463. Probability Theory (3)
An intensive study of one or more topics not sufficiently
covered in Math. 309 or Math. 310, such as limit theorems,
Markov processes, ergodie theorems, martingales, time series,
stochastic integrals, potential theory. Prerequisites: Math.
310 and Math. 401.
471. Hornological Algebra (3)
Modules, tensor products, categories and functors, homology
functors, projective and infective modules. Prerequisite:
Math. 428.
472. Finite Groups (3)
An intensive study of the structure of finite groups and their
automorphisms. Prerequisite: Math. 428.
2. Stellar Astronomy (3)
Survey of our knowledge of stars and stellar systems.
211. Stellar Structure and Evolution (3)
Physical processes in stellar interiors. Theory of stellar evolu-
tion and interpretation of observations. Prerequisite: Math.
23 or 32, previously or concurrently, and Phys. 21.
221. Stellar Atmospheres (3)
Theory of stellar spectra. Equation of transfer, model at-
mospheres, chemical abundances. Prerequisites: Math. 23 or
32, previously or concurrently, and Phys. 21.
232. High Energy Astrophysics (3)
Relativistic plasmas, x-ray sources, quasars, pulsars, radio
galaxies, origin and evolution of galaxies, current research.
Prerequisites: Math. 23 or 32, previously or concurrently,
and Phys. 21 .
242. Relativity and Cosmology (3)
Introduction to tensor analysis. Einstein's field equations,
origin and evolution of the universe, current research. Prere-
quisites: Math. 23 or 32, previously or concurrently, and
Phys. 21.
Division of Astronomy
Associate Professor
George E. McCluskey, Ph.D.
1. The Solar System (3)
A survey of our knowledge of the solar system.
194 Mathematics: Astronomy
Mechanical Engineering &
Mechanics
Professors
Ferdinand Pierre Beer, Ph.D., Chairman
Russell Edward Benner, Ph.D.
Philip Anthony Blythe, Ph.D.
Forbes Taylor Brown, Ph.D.
John C. Chen, Ph.D.
James Vandeusen Eppes, M.S.
Fazil Erdogan, Ph.D.
Thomas Edgar Jackson, M.S.
Arturs Kalnins, Ph.D.
Jerzy Antoni Owczarek, Ph.D.
Ronald S. Rivlin, Ph.D., Centennial University Professor,
Director, Center for Application of Mathematics
George C. M. Sih, Ph.D., Director, Institute for Fracture and
Solid Mechanics
Gerald Francis Smith, Ph.D.
Alan Hugh Stenning, Sc.D.
Eric Varley, Ph.D.
Robert Peh-Ying Wei, Ph.D.
Associate Professors
Andrew D. Dimarogonas, Ph.D.
Ronald John Hartranft, Ph.D.
Edward Kenneth Levy, Ph.D.
Robert Alan Lucas, Ph.D.
Alistair Kenneth Macpherson, Ph.D.
Joseph C. Osborn, M.S.
Richard Roberts, Ph.D.
Donald O. Rockwell, Ph.D.
Eric P. Salathe, Ph.D.
Robert Guy Sarubbi, Ph.D.
Theodore Alfred Terry, Ph.D.
Dean Pearson Updike, Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
Kemal Arin, Ph.D.
Tony Chen, Ph.D.
Gopal D. Gupta, Ph.D.
Peter D. Hilton, Ph.D.
Mustafa R. Ozgu, Ph.D.
James Peter Ries, Ph.D.
Instructor
Marlin E. Kipp, M.S.
The curriculum in mechanical engineering and engineering
mechanics consists of common freshman, sophomore, and
junior years, and a senior year offering a wide selection of
courses. Depending upon the program chosen during the
senior year, the students are graduated with either the B.S. in
Mechanical Engineering or the B.S. in Engineering Mechanics.
The core of the program includes courses in mathematics
and the physical sciences, in mechanics of solids and fluids, in
dynamics, vibrations analysis, thermodynamics, and design.
Candidates for the B.S. in Mechanical Engineering take an
additional course in thermodynamics and are required to take
at least two professional M.E. courses during their senior
year. They should use the technical electives to develop com-
petence in design, thermofluid sciences, or some other ap-
proved area. Candidates for the B.S. in Engineering
Mechanics must include in their program advanced courses in
mathematics, dynamics and mechanics of continua. They
should use the technical electives to develop additional com-
petence in a related area, such as applied mathematics, thermo-
fluid sciences, or materials science.
The field of mechanical engineering is wide and challeng-
ing. Conventionally mechanical engineering deals with the
design and production of machines and their power sources,
but the field has broadened to include many applications of
the engineering sciences to a variety of engineering systems
for the benefit of mankind. The mechanical engineer has
played an essential role in the exploitation of new engineer-
ing frontiers such as nuclear power, cryogenic systems, rock-
etry, satellite guidance systems, and systems at very high
and very low pressures and temperatures. Mechanical engi-
neers are also heavily involved in solving problems of pollu-
tion control and waste disposal.
On the other hand, there is an increasing demand in indus
try and government service for men with a broad training in
the fundamentals of engineering rather than in a given speci-
fic field. Such training, in which applied mathematics and
mechanics play an important part, is provided by the engi-
neering mechanics option of this curriculum. This option
emphasizes the analytical approach to engineering problems
and the application to their solution of the basic methods
and principles of mechanics.
Graduates in either discipline are equipped for immediate
work in engineering or research and development in govern-
ment service or industry. Those with ability and interest have
suitable backgrounds for further studies at the graduate level.
Because of the flexibility of the curriculum, candidates
for either degree may combine the study of mechanical engi-
neering or engineering mechanics with that of other fields,
such as chemical engineering, materials science, and biology,
into interdisciplinary programs which will prepare them for
further work in the areas of nuclear engineering, environmen-
tal engineering, materials science, or biomechanics.
Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics 1 95
Freshman Yeat See page \S
Sophomore Year, First Semester | 17 credit hoi
Math 23 Analytical Geometry & Calculus 111 (4)
Mech 1 Statics (3)
Phys 21, 22 Introductory Physics II & Lab (5)
CE 1 1 Engineering Graphics (2)
GS Requirement (3)
Sophomore Year, Second Semester (17 credit hours)
Math 205 Linear Methods (3)
ME 104 Thermodynamics I (3)
Mech 11 Mechanics of Materials (3)
Mech 13 Materials Testing Laboratory (1)
Mel 91 Elements of Materials Science (3)
or
Met 63 Engineering Materials (3)
Eco 1 Economics (4)
Junior Year, First Semester (16 credit hours)
ME 101 Mechanical Engineering Design (1)
Mech 102 Dynamics (3)
ME 105 Thermodynamics II
or
Approved Elective (3)
ME 231 Fluid Mechanics (3)
Math 208 Complex Variables
or
Math 231 Statistical Inference (3)
GS Requirement (3)
Junior Year, Second Semester (17 credit hours)
ME 102 Mechanical Engineering Design (2)
Mech 203 Advanced Strength of Materials (3)
CE 123 Fluid Mechanics Lab (1)
ME 242 Mechanical Vibrations (3)
EE 160 Electrical Circuits & Apparatus (3)
EE 161, 162 Electrical Problems & Lab (2)
Elective (3)
Summer
ME 100 Industrial Employment
Senior Year, First Semester (14-1 7 credit hours)
ME 108 Laboratory I (2)
Approved Electives (9)
GS Requirement (3)
Elective (0-3)
Senior Year, Second Semester (14-1 7 credit hours)
ME 109 Laboratory II (2)
Approved Electives (9)
GS Requirement (3)
Elective (0-3)
Note: In their junior year, candidates tor the U.S. in M.E. will
t.ike M.E. 105; candidates for the B.S. in Engineering
Mechanics will take Math 208.
Tin- approved electives must represent .1 coherent group
of approved courses such as 200- and 300-level courses in
mechanical engineering and mechanics, as well as mathl
matics, physics, chemistry and a limited number of other
fields. For candidates for the B.S. in M.E., 6 hours of ap-
proved electives shall be in M.E. and at least 6 more in M.E.
or mechanics. For candidates for the B.S. in Engineering
Mechanics, the following courses shall be required: Mech.
302, Advanced Dynamics; Mech. 305, Advanced Mechanics
of Materials; Mech. 307, Mechanics of Continua; and Math.
322, Methods of Applied Analysis I.
The lower number of credit hours in the senior year re-
presents the load required to meet the graduation require-
ment; the higher represents the normal semester load.
Mechanical Engineering
Undergraduate Courses
100. Industrial Employment (0)
Usually following the junior year, students in the mechanical
engineering curriculum are expected to do a minimum of
eight weeks of practical work, preferably in the field they
plan to follow after graduation. A report is required. Prere-
quisite: sophomore standing.
101. Mechanical Engineering Design I (1)
Objectives and specifications are developed for design pro-
jects to be carried out in the second semester. Alternative
design concepts are proposed and oral and written reports of
feasibility studies are presented.
102. Mechanical Engineering Design II (2)
A continuation of M.E. 101 in which groups are organized to
do preliminary design on a previously defined project. Pro-
gram organization techniques are used and laboratory testing
and data acquisition is carried out as needed to promote
design development. Prototypes are constructed and tested,
when practical. Prerequisites: M.E. 101, Mech. 1 1, M.E. 104.
104. Thermodynamics I (3)
Basic concepts and principles of thermodynamics with em-
phasis on universal applications. First and Second Law devel-
opment. Energy equations. Reversibility and irreversibility.
Entropy and probability. Thermodynamic functions. Proper-
ties of pure substances. Prerequisites: Math. 23, Phys. 3 or
11.
105. Thermodynamics II (3)
Thermodynamics applications. Reversible and irreversible
processes and cycles with various fluids. Gas and vapor mix-
tures. Compressible and incompressible fluid flow. Prerequi-
site: M.E. 104.
196 Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics
108. Laboratory I (2)
Lectures and laboratory exercises relating to various phases
of engineering laboratory technique and procedures. Includes
planning, execution, and analysis of tests and writing of re-
ports. Prerequisite: M.E. 105.
109. Laboratory II (2)
Continuation of M.E. 108 with emphasis on project investiga-
tions.
110. Thesis (1-3)
Candidates for the degree of B.S. in M.E. may, with the ap-
proval of the director of the curriculum, undertake a thesis as
a portion of the work during the senior year.
161. Mechanical Engineering Laboratory (1)
Testing of mechanical engineering equipment. Prerequisite:
M.E. 104.
166. Procedures for Mechanical Design (2)
General design procedures, motion analysis, force analysis,
static, repeated and impact types of loading, modes of
failure, stress analysis, failure theories. Applications to the
design of typical machine elements. Prerequisite: Mech. 11.
242. Mechanical Vibrations (3)
Physical modeling of vibrating systems. Free and forced sin-
gle degree of freedom systems. Matrix formulation and solu-
tion of multi-degree of freedom systems. Simple continuous
and non-linear systems. Engineering applications. Prerequi-
sites: Mech. 102 or 103, Math. 205.
310. Projects (1-6)
Project work on any aspect of engineering, performed either
individually or as a member of a team made up of students
possibly from other disciplines. Direction of the projects may
be provided by faculty from several departments and could
include interaction with outside consultants and local com-
munities and industries. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of
department.
312. Synthesis of Mechanisms (3)
Geometry and constrained plane motion with application to
linkage design. Type and number synthesis. Comparison of
motion analysis by graphical, analytical and computer tech-
niques. Euler-Savery and related curvature techniques as ap-
plied to cam, gear and linkage systems. Introduction to the
analysis of space mechanisms. Prerequisite: Math. 205, Mech.
102.
168. Elements of Mechanical Design (2)
Elements of mechanical design: motion and force analysis,
sizing of members, selection of materials for failure preven-
tion, production requirements. Selected examples of system
design. Prerequisite: Mech. 11.
211. Mechanical Engineering Analysis (3)
Engineering analysis methodology. Basic analog computer
theory and programming. Numerical methods for use with
the digital computer. Performance prediction of selected
mechanical engineering systems using analog and digital com-
puter methods. Prerequisite: M.E. 242.
320. Thermodynamics III (3)
Kinetic theory of gases, statistical thermodynamics. Ad-
vanced and specialized topics in thermodynamics. Prerequi-
site: M.E. 104.
321. Introduction to Heat Transfer (3)
Analytical, numerical, and analog solutions to steady and
transient, one and two-dimensional conduction problems;
thermal radiation, free and forced convection of laminar and
turbulent character inside cylindrical tubes and over external
surfaces; thermal design of heat exchangers. Prerequisites:
M.E. 104, M.E. 231.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
220. Thermodynamics (3)
Principles of classical thermodynamics with applications to
engineering problems. Introduction to statistical thermody-
namics. Prerequisites: Phys. 3 or 11; Math 23.
231. Fluid Mechanics (3)
Fundamental concepts. Physical similarity. Kinematics of
fluid flow. Equations of flow in integral form. Equations of
flow of perfect fluids. Plane irrotational flow of incompressi-
ble fluids. Navier-Stokes equation; hydrodynamic stability;
turbulence. Two-dimensional boundary layers in incompressi-
ble flows; separation of flow; wakes; drag. Effects of com-
pressibility on fluid flow. Hydraulic treatment of losses in
flows in ducts. Flows with free surface. Basic measurements
techniques. Prerequisite: Math. 205.
322. Gas Dynamics (3)
Equations of flow of compressible fluids. Thermodynamic
properties of gases. Shock waves. One-dimensional steady
flow through ducts with variable cross-sectional area, flows
with viscous friction and heat addition. Prerequisites: M.E.
231, M.E. 104, Math. 205.
324. Aerospace Propulsion Systems (3)
Cycle analysis of air-breathing engines. Optimum configura-
tions for different flight regimes. Chemical and nuclear
rocket engines. Electrical propulsion devices. Rankine and
Brayton cycles for space power plants. Component design.
Prerequisite: M.E. 105.
325. Vehicular Propulsion Systems (3)
Thermal analysis of internal combustion engines for vehicular
propulsion. Component design. Unconventional propulsion
systems. Applications to current problems in ground trans-
portation. Prerequisite: M.E. 105.
Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics 197
>31. I luid Mechanics (3)
Kinematics of fluid flow. Conservation equations lor inviscid
and viscous Hows; integral forms of equations. Two-dimen-
sional potential Qow theory of incompressible fluids with
applications. Boundary layers. Introduction to free shear
layer and boundary layer stability and structure of turbu-
lence. Transition from laminar to turbulent boundary layers.
Separation of flow. Steady and unsteady stall. Secondary
flows, flow ^i non-Newtonian fluids. Hydrodynamic lubrica-
tion. Measurement techniques. Prerequisite: M.E. 231.
340. Advanced Mechanical Engineering Design (3)
Optimum design ot mechanical components and systems.
Parameter optimization methods including the theory of
maxima and minima, geometric programming and optimum
seeking methods. Computer-aided and automated design.
Computer programming of design theory, life function of
components and design tor reliability. Prerequisite: Math.
231.
341. Mechanical Systems (3)
Methods for the analysis and design of machine elements
such as springs, gears, clutches, brakes, and bearings. Design
for strength, motion and dynamic response objectives is em-
phasized. Case studies are presented which demonstrate the
synthesis of elements into mechanical systems and the inte-
gration of associated analytical methods into rational design
procedures. Prerequisites: Mech. 203 and M.E. 242.
343. Control Systems (3)
Linear analysis of mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, thermal
and electrical feedback control systems. Transient and fre-
quency response, root locus, stability criteria and compensa-
tion techniques. Prerequisite: Math. 205, M.E. 242.
350. Special Topics (1-3)
A study of some field of mechanical engineering not covered
in the general courses. Prerequisite: consent of the chairman
of department.
360. (Ch.E. 360) Nuclear Reactor Engineering
A consideration of the engineering problems in nuclear reac-
tor design and operation. Topics include reactor fuels and
materials, thermal aspects, instrumentation and control prob-
lems, radiation protection and shielding, fuel processing, and
reactor design. Prerequisite: senior standing in engineering or
physical science.
been constructed to investigate fluid amplifier dynamics and
experiments on plcxiglas in ml, I ■. .n iu-uiy, ■ ■ .iiitin ted i«
determine velocity profiles and pressure distributions in wall
jets on curved walls. Oscillatory flows arc being studied in
conical dil (users. In the area ot heat transfer analytical and
experimental work is being carried out on heat pipes, and
studies of boiling and two phase flow are in progress. A
specially designed closed jet water tunnel is available for re-
search on internal flows. A six inch interferometer can be
used for studies in heat transfer and fluid mechanics.
The department is well-equipped for experimental stress
investigations including instrumentation for research with
resistance strain gages, photo-elasticity, photostress, and
Moire fringes. Recent investigations have been made on visco-
elastic materials as well as metals. Research in crack propaga-
tion and fatigue is underway which involves the interaction
of students and faculty of the department of mechanical
engineering and mechanics with the metallurgy and materials
science department. Equipment is also available for vibration
and other dynamic studies.
A master's degree program in design is available with the
objectives of educating students in advanced design methods
and encouraging the initiation and implementation of cre-
ative design projects. A wide range of interdisciplinary course
offerings permit construction of a program in one or several
of the following areas; mechanical systems, reliability engi-
neering, probabilistic approaches to design, mechanism syn-
thesis, digital and analog computer-aided design, ocean engi-
neering, bio-mechanics, optimum design, and environmental
design. In addition to his formal course work the student will
register for 6 hours of M.E. 460, design project, and submit
an acceptable design project as his thesis.
For the master's degree a thesis will normally be required.
Any student who has not taken the mathematics courses
required in the undergraduate mechanical engineering curri-
culum will be expected to make up for this deficiency in
planning his graduate program. He may then be required to
present a larger number of credits than the minimum re-
quired for graduation.
Subject to proper approval courses from other engineering
curricula, such as mechanics, chemical engineering, and
metallurgy and materials science, may be included in the
major.
A student who plans to work for the doctorate should
submit a general plan to the chairman of the department
during his first year and arrange for the qualifying examina-
tions.
For Graduates
In the thermal-fluid sciences research is in process on a vari-
ety of problems involving fluid mechanics and heat transfer.
Investigation continues on basic fluid phenomena with
special emphasis being given to the area of fluidics including
work on wall jets, confined jets, jet interaction and jet stabili-
ty. In addition studies of the dynamics of fluid amplifiers,
transmission line characteristics, noise and modeling of fluid
amplifiers are underway. A specially designed water table has
420. Advanced Thermodynamics (3)
Critical review of first and second laws, entropy, and general
thermodynamic equations and relations; applications to cur-
rent problems in technology and research.
198 Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics
421. Topics in Thermodynamics (3)
Emphasis on theoretical and experimental treatment of com-
bustion processes including dissociation, flame temperature
calculations, diffusion flames, stabililty and propagation;
related problems in compressible flow involving one-
dimensional, oblique shock waves and detonation waves.
Methods of measurement and instrumentation.
424. Turbulent Flow (3)
Stability of laminar flow;transition to turbulence. Navier-
Stokes equations with turbulence. Bounded turbulent shear
flows; free shear flows; statistical description of turbulence.
Prerequisite: M.E. 331.
426. Radiative and Conductive Heat Transfer (3)
Principles of radiative transfer; thermal-radiative properties of
diffuse and specular surfaces; radiative exchange between
bodies; radiative transport through absorbing, emitting and
scattering media. Advanced topics in steady-state and transi-
ent conduction; analytical and numerical solutions; problems
of combined conductive and radiative heat transfer. Prerequi-
site: M.E. 321 or Ch.E. 421.
427. (Ch.E. 427) Multiphase Heat Transfer (3)
Heat transfer and fluid dynamics of multiphase systems. Sub-
cooled, nucleate, and film boiling; bubble nucleation; dy-
namics of bubble growth and collapse; vapor-liquid co-
current flow regimes; two-phase pressure drop and momen-
tum exchange, low instabilities; convective-flow boiling;
simultaneous heat and mass transfer. Prerequisite: M.E. 321
or Ch.E. 421.
428. Boundary Layers and Convective Heat Transfer (3)
Navier-Stokes and energy equations, laminar boundary layer
theory, analysis of friction dray, heat transfer and separation.
Transition from laminar to turbulent flow. Turbulent bound-
ary layer theory, Prandtl mixing length, turbulent friction
drag, and heat transfer. Integral methods. Flow in ducts,
wakes and jets. Natural convection heat transfer. Prerequi-
sites: M.E. 331 or M.E. 321.
439. Fluid Mechanics of Turbo-machinery (3)
The Euler equation. One-dimensional analysis of turbo-
machinery. Performance characteristics. Limitations on per-
formance imposed by real fluid effects. Cascade flow. Two-
and three-dimensional flow. Surge and stall. Prerequisite:
M.E. 322.
442. Analytical Methods in Engineering I (3)
Analytical methods of solution for discrete and continuous
engineering systems. Theoretical, numerical and approximate
methods of solution applied to equilibrium, characteristic
value and propagation types of engineering problems.
443. Analytical Methods in Engineering II (3)
Continuation of M.E. 442.
444. Experimental Stress Analysis in Design (3)
Applications of experimental stress analysis to mechanical
design problems.
446. Reliability Engineering (3)
Component catastrophic-failure models. System reliability
analysis and design. Drift-failure, component tolerance and
parameter variation. Physical failure models and parameter
estimation. Prerequisite: Math. 231 or Math. 309.
449. Systems Analysis and Optimization (3)
Methods for the analysis and optimization of mechanical
engineering systems. General theory of linear multivariable
dynamic systems, state variable method of solution. Varia-
tional methods of optimization. Applications to electro-
mechanical, machine and control systems design.
450. Special Topics (3)
An intensive study of some field of mechanical engineering
not covered in more general courses.
451. Seminar (1-3)
Critical discussion of recent advances in mechanical engi-
neering.
431. Advanced Gas Dynamics (3)
Method of characteristics. Unsteady continuous flows. Un-
steady flows with discontinuities. Shock tubes. Detonation
waves. Two-dimensional and axisymmetric supersonic flows.
Momentum and energy equation of compressible viscous
fluids. Prerequisite: M.E. 322.
432. Topics in Gas Dynamics (3)
The equilibrium thermodynamic properties of a dissociating
mixture of gases. Equilibrium flow of dissociating gases.
Vibrational and chemical nonequilibrium. Criteria for therm-
odynamic equilibrium of gas flow. Chemical kinetics of
gaseous reactions. Equations of flow of a reacting gas mix-
ture. Nonequilibrium flows. Application to design of ram-jets
and rocket nozzles and of re-entry vehicles. Prerequisites:
M.E. 320, M.E. 322.
457. (E.E. 457) Introduction to Modern Control Theory (3)
State-space analysis in the time and frequency domains. Ob-
servability, controllability, stability. Feedback, feed-forward,
and compensation techniques of control. Quadratic perfor-
mance indices and system optimization; Pontryagin's maxi-
mum principle. Prerequisite: M.E. 343, or E.E. 212, or Ch.E.
386.
458. Modeling of Dynamic Systems
Modeling of complex linear and nonlinear energetic dynamic
engineering systems. Emphasis on subdivision into multiport
elements and representation by the bond graph language,
using direct, energetic, and experimental methods. Field
lumping. Analytical and graphical reductions. Analog, digital
and hybrid simulation. Examples including mechanisms, elec-
tromechanical transducers, electric and fluid circuits, and
thermal systems. Prerequisite: M.E. 343, or E.E. 212; Mech.
302.
Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics 1 99
459. Advanced Topics in Control
Analytic, graphical and numerical methods in nonlinear con-
trol systems, plus one or more of the following: distributed
parameter systems; optim.il and self-optimalizing control;
Stochastic signals and systems; dynamic programming; appli-
cations to a class of engineering devices. Prerequisite; M.E.
449 orCh.E. I 12.
460. Design Project (1-6)
Selected design project in an area of student and faculty in-
terest where the need for creative design work is recognized.
Economic as well as physical and functional aspects are con-
sidered. Laboratory testing and data acquisition is carried out
as needed to promote design development. Prototypes are
constructed and tested, when practical.
Mechanics
Undergraduate Courses
I. Statics (3)
Composition and resolution of forces; equivalent force sys-
tems; equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies; centroids and
centers of gravity; analysis of simple structures; internal
forces in beams; friction; moments and products of inertia;
method of virtual work. Prerequisites: Math. 22 and Phys.
11.
II. Mechanics of Materials (3)
Strength and elasticity of materials; theory of stresses and
strains; deflection of beams and shafts; torsion; buckling of
struts. Prerequisites: Mech. 1; Math. 23, previously or concur-
rently.
13. Materials Testing Laboratory (1)
Experiments to study the mechanical properties of engineer-
ing materials; correlation of the properties of different
materials, of their behavior under different types of load
application, and of mechanical properties of design criteria.
Verification of certain assumptions used in Mech. 11. Prere-
quisite: Mech. 11, preferably concurrently.
102. Dynamics (3)
Kinematics and kinetics of particles and rigid bodies; relative
motion; dynamic equilibrium; work and energy; impulse and
momentum. Prerequisites: Mech. 1; Math. 23.
103. Principles of Mechanics (4)
Composition and resolution of forces; equivalent force sys-
tems; equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies; friction.
Kinematics and kinetics of particles and rigid bodies; relative
motion; work and energy; impulse and momentum. Prerequi-
sites: Math. 23 and Phys. 11.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
203. Advanced Strength of Materials (3)
Elementary consideration of stress and strain at a point.
Stress-strain relations in two dimensions. Basic equations of
motion. Classical theories of failures. Analysis of simple con-
tinuum systems with applications to materials behavior
phenomena. Prerequisites: Mech. 1 1 , Math. 205.
302. Advanced Dynamics (3)
Fundamental dynamical theorems and their application to
the study of the motion of particles and rigid bodies, with
particular emphasis on three-dimensional motion. Use of
generalized coordinates; Lagrange's equations and their appli-
cations. Prerequisites: Mech. 102 or 103; Math. 205.
305. Advanced Mechanics of Materials (3)
Selected problems of stress and strain that are governed by
ordinary differential equations such as combined bending and
torsion of bars, curved bars, beams on elastic foundation.
Membrane analogy. Principles of indeterminate analysis.
Energy methods. Prerequisites: Mech. 203 or equivalent;
Math. 205.
307. Mechanics of Continua (3)
Fundamental principles of the mechanics of deformable
bodies. Study of stress, velocity and acceleration fields. Com-
patability equations, conservation laws. Applications to two-
dimensional problems in the theories of perfectly elastic
materials and also perfectly plastic materials. Prerequisites:
Mech. 203 and 305.
313. Fracture Mechanics (3)
Fracture behavior in solids, the Griffith theory and exten-
sions to linear elastic fracture process models; stress analysis
of cracks; generalization of fracture criteria; plasticity; sub-
critical crack growth, including environmental and thermal
effects; fracture toughness testing; failure analysis and frac-
ture control plans. Prerequisites: Mech. 11, Math. 205.
323. (C.E. 324) Fluid Mechanics of the Ocean & Atmosphere
(3)
Hydrostatics of the ocean and atmosphere. Vertical stability.
Fluid motion in a rotating coordinate system. Geostrophic
flow; ocean currents; surface and internal waves. Prerequi-
sites: M.E. 231 or C.E. 121.
326. Aerodynamics (3)
Application of fluid dynamics to external flows. Simple exact
solutions in two dimensions. Kutta condition at a trailing
edge. Thin aerofoil theory— steady and unsteady flow. Lifting
line theory. Flow past slender bodies. Linearized compressi-
ble flow. Far field solutions— shock formation. Prerequisite:
M.E. 231; Math. 208.
200 Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics
350. Special Topics (3)
A study of some field of engineering mechanics not covered
in the general courses. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of
department.
For Graduates
The graduate courses in mechanics are open in general to
students who have been graduated from a curriculum in engi-
neering mechanics, engineering mathematics, engineering
physics, civil engineering, or mechanical engineering at a re-
cognized institution.
A candidate for the M.S. degree in Applied Mechanics is
expected to possess a thorough knowledge of undergraduate
mathematics and mechanics. Math. 205, 208 and 322, and
Mech. 302 and 305, or their equivalents, are considered pre-
requisites for graduate work in applied mechanics. Any of
these courses which have not been taken by the student as an
undergraduate should be included in his graduate program.
He may then be required to present a larger number of
credits than the minimum required for graduation. A thesis
carrying 3 to 6 credit hours is required of all candidates for
the M.S. degree.
Current departmental research activities of interest in-
clude programs as follows:
Continuum Mechanics. Formulation of field equations and
constitutive equations in non-linear continuum mechanics.
Problems in finite and linear elasticity theories. Mechanics of
viscoelastic solids and fluids. Plasticity theory. Generalized
continuum mechanics. Thermomechanical and elector-
mechanical interactions. Stress bifringence. Wave propaga-
tion. Finite amplitude wave propagation.
Fracture Mechanics. Stress analysis of media containing inclu-
sions or perforations, including visco-elastic, nonhomogene-
ous, and anisotropic materials. Analysis of crack growth
under static, periodic, and random loadings and environmen-
tal effects. Optimizations of fracture control. Crack propaga-
tion theories for non-linear materials. Influence of cracks on
the strength of structural members.
Stochastic Processes. Response of systems to stochastic in-
puts, including the effects of multi-dimensional fields and
non-stationary processes. Prediction theory. Cumulative
damage under random loads.
Theory of Thin Shells. Effects of initial stresses on the de-
formation of thin shells; vibration and stability. Interaction
problems of elastic media with electric and magnetic fields.
Dynamic response of magnetically excited transducer.
Mechanics of tonomety applied to the eye. Construction of a
mathematical model for the deformation of the eye.
Fluid Mechanics. Finite amplitude waves in stratified gases
and fluids. Shock propagation and problems related to the
sonic "boom." Non-equilibrium and low density flows.
Boundary layer separation and wake models. Flows of non-
Newtonian fluids in flexible tubes, with application to hemo-
rheology. Magneto-fluid mechanics. Wing theory. Three-
dimensional flow in planar nozzles and in confined jets. Dy-
namics of unstable jets and jet interaction processes. Behavior
of jets on acoustic fields. Switching dynamics in bistable am-
plifiers. Noise correlation studies in bounded jet flows.
Special departmental facilities of interest to the graduate
student include the latest mechanical, electrodynamic and
servocontrolled hydraulic testing machines.
402. Advanced Analytical Mechanics (3)
Fundamental dynamical theorems and their applications to
advanced problems; generalized coordinates; Lagrange's equa-
tions; fixed and moving constraints; non-holonomic systems;
Hamilton's principle; Hamilton's canonical equations; contact
transformations', Hamilton-Jacobi partial differential equa-
tion. Prerequisite: Mech. 302 or consent of chairman of de-
partment.
405. Response of Systems to Random Loads (3)
Stochastic processes; correlation functions and power spec-
tra; response of mechanical systems to one-dimensional and
multidimensional random load fields; probability theory for
several random variables; statistical properties of the random
vibrations of mechanical systems; applications to failure pre-
diction. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of department.
406. Advanced Vibrations (3)
General theory of eigenvalue problems for discrete and con-
tinuous dynamical systems; Sturm Liouville theory, variation-
al techniques; transient and frequency response. Prerequisite:
M.E. 242 or consent of chairman of department.
407. Wave Propagation in Solids (3)
Wave propagation in deformable elastic solids; problems in
half-space and layered media; application of integral trans-
formations.
409. Theory of Elasticity I (3)
Kinematics of deformation, analysis of stress, stress-strain
relations, strain energy function. Reciprocal theorem.
Methods for two-dimensional boundary value problems
applied to anti-plane, torsion, bending and plane problems.
Approximate and numerical methods of solution. Prerequi-
sites: Math. 205; Mech. 305 or equivalent course in advanced
mechanics of material.
410. Theory of Elasticity II (3)
Advanced topics in the theory of elasticity. The subject
matter may vary from year to year and may include, e.g.,
theory of potential functions, linear thermoelasticity, dy-
namics of deformable media, integral transforms and com-
plex-variable methods in classical elasticity. Problems of
boundary layer type in elasticity; current developments on
the micro-structure theory of elasticity. Prerequisites: Mech.
409, Math. 208, or consent of chairman of department.
Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics 201
411. (Phys. 471) t .Minimum Mechanics (3)
An introduction will be given to the continuum theories of
the mechanics of solids and fluids. This will include a dis
cussion of the mechanical md thermodynamical bases of the
subject, .is well as the use >>t invariance principles in formul-
ating constitutive equations. Applications of the theories to
specific problems will be given.
412. Theory of Plasticity (3)
Mechanical behavior in the plastic range; foundations of the
theory of plasticity; axisymmetric problems; limit analysis
theorems; plane strain and slip line theory, applications to
metal forming; introduction to plastic analysis of structures.
Prerequisites; Math. 205; Mech. 305, or equivalent course in
advanced mechanics of materials.
413. Fracture Mechanics (3)
Introduction to the Griffith-Irwin theory of static strength of
bodies containing cracks; stress-intensity-factor methods;
application to fatigue crack growth; complex variable
methods of stress analysis of cracks for extension and bend-
ing of plates, for torsion and flexure of bars, and for thermal
stress problems; viscoelastic, anisotropic, and non-homogene-
ous effects. Prerequisites: Mech. 203, Math. 208, or consent
of chairman of department.
415. (C.E. 468) Stability of Elastic Structures (3)
Basic concepts of instability of a structure; bifurcation,
energy increment, snap-through, dynamic instability. Analy-
tical and numerical methods of finding buckling loads of
columns. Postbuckling deformations of cantilever column.
Dynamic buckling with nonconservative forces. Effects of
initial imperfections. Inelastic buckling. Buckling by torsion
and flexure. Variational methods. Buckling of frames. In-
stability problems of thin plates and shells. Prerequisite:
Math. 205.
flow. Bernoulli theorems. Vortex motion, velocity potential,
stream funi tion. Potential flow in two and three dimensions.
Compressible flow: sound waves, simple waves; gas dynamic
disi ontinuities.
422. Fluid Mechanics (3)
Similarity and dimensional analysis. Exact solution for
viscous incompressible flow. Singular perturbation theory,
with application to flows at low and high Reynolds number.
Hydrodynamic stability. Depending on interest, additional
topics from magnetohydrodynamics, kinetic theory, wing
theory, turbulence, water waves, flows in flexible tubes. Pre-
requisite: Mech. 421.
424. Unsteady Fluid Flows (3)
Gas dynamics, finite amplitude disturbances in perfect and
real gases; channel flows; three-dimensional acoustics;
theories of the sonic boom. Motions in fluids with a free sur-
face: basic hydrodynamics, small amplitude waves on deep
water; ship waves; dispersive waves; shallow water gravity
waves and atmospheric waves. Hemodynamics: pulsatile
blood flow at high and low Reynolds number. Models of the
interaction of flow with artery walls.
437. (Met. 437) Dislocations and Strengths in Crystals (3)
For course description, see Met. 437.
450. Special Problems (3)
An intensive study of some field of applied mechanics not
covered in more general courses.
416. Theory of Thin Shells
Derivation of the complete linear governing equations for a
thin shell: differential geometry; analysis of strain; stress
resultants and equilibrium; relations between stress resultants
and strain; integral identities in shell theory; layered shells.
Numerical and analytical methods of solution of shell equa-
tions. Governing equations and solutions for thin plates.
Vibrations of plates and shells. Nonlinear theories of plates
and shells. Prerequisites: Math. 205; Mech. 305; or equivalent
course in advanced mechanics of materials.
417. Mixed Boundary Value Problems in Mechanics (3)
General description of mixed boundary value problems in
potential theory and solid mechanics. Solutions by dual
series, dual integral equations and singular integral equations.
Approximate and numerical methods.
421. Fluid Mechanics (3)
Kinematics of fluid flow. Langrangian and Eulerian descrip-
tions. Basic conservation laws. Review of thermodynamics.
Constitutive relations. Vorticity, circulations. Irrotational
202 Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics
Metallurgy & Materials
Science
Professors
George Powell Conard, Sc.D., Chairman
Joseph Francis Libsch, Sc.D., Alcoa Professor and Vice
President— Research
Betzalel Avitzur, Ph.D. Director, Institute for Metal Forming
Ye Tsang Chou, Ph.D.
Walter Charles Hahn, Jr., Ph.D.
Ralph Wayne Kraft, Ph.D., New Jersey Zinc Professor
George Krauss, Jr., Sc.D.
Alan Wiggins Pense, Ph.D.
Richard Moore Spriggs, Ph.D., Vice President-
Administration
Robert Daniel Stout, Ph.D., Dean of the Graduate School
David Alden Thomas, Ph.D., Associate Director, Materials
Research Center
Associate Professors
Sidney Roy Butler, Ph.D.
Joseph Irwin Goldstein, Ph.D.
D. P. H. Hasselman, Ph.D.
Richard Warren Hertzberg, Ph.D.
Donald M. Smyth, Ph.D., Director, Materials Research Center
Stephen Kenneth Tarby, Ph.D.
John Dudley Wood, Ph.D.
Assistant Professor
Michael Richard Notis, Ph.D.
Progress in many fields of engineering depends upon dis-
covery of new materials and a better understanding of the
behavior of existing materials. Interest in new materials for
solid-state devices, for application of nuclear energy and for
space technology, as well as a better understanding of the
behavior of materials in the design of structures, automobiles
and aircraft, plant processing equipment, electrical machin-
ery, etc., have increased the need tor men trained in the
science and technology of metals and other materials. The
curriculum in metallurgy and materials sciences is designed to
train graduates for research, development, operations,
management and sales careers in industry or for graduate
study in metallurgy and materials science.
Training for this field of engineering requires basic studies
in mathematics, chemistry, physics, and mechanics, plus a
general background in engineering principles, followed by
intensive training in the application of scientific and engineer-
ing principles to the development and use of materials in a
technological society. In addition, the curriculum offers an
introduction to humanistic and social studies which broaden
the student's outlook and enhance his professional develop-
ment after graduation.
The objective of the program is to combine a fundamental
understanding of the behavior of materials from the elec-
tronic, atomic, crystallographic, microstructural and macro-
structural viewpoints with knowledge of the technology of
materials preparation and processing. The student will thus
receive a broad education with emphasis on the factors which
govern the mechanical, physical, and chemical properties of
materials to aid him in the analysis, development, selection
and use of materials for all types of industries. While some
graduates go directly into metal producing companies, a large
proportion serve as metallurgists or materials engineers in the
chemical, electrical, transportation, communications, space
and other metal and materials consumer industries. A number
of students pursue graduate study for university teaching and
research careers.
Recommended Sequence of Courses
Freshman Year (See page 45)
Sophomore Year, First Semester (16-19 credit hours)t
Math 23 Analytical Geometry and Calculus III (4)
Phys 21, 22 Introductory Physics II & Lab (5)
Eco 1 Economics (4)
Met 63 Engineering Materials and Processes
or
Met 91 Elements of Materials Science (3)
Elective (0-3)
Sophomore Year, Second Semester (16-17 credit hours)t
Math 205 Linear Methods
or
Math 231 Statistical Inference (3)
EE 160 Electrical Circuits and Apparatus
and
EE 161 Electrical Problems (4)
or
Phys 31 Introduction to Quantum Mechanics (3)
Mech 1 Statics (3)
Met 10 Metallurgy Lab
or
Mech 13 Materials Testing Lab (1)
GS Electives (6)
Junior Year, First Semester (15-18 credit hours)t
ChE 60 Unit Operations (3)
Mech 11 Mechanics of Materials (3)
Met 207 Electronic and Crystal Structure (3)
Met 210 Metallurgical Thermodynamics (3)
GS Elective (3)
Elective (0-3)
Metallurgy and Materials Science 203
Junioi Year, Second Semester | 16-17 credit hours I
ME 166
Mi .1, 102
Mel 101
Met 208
Met 218
Met 304
Summer
Met 100
Procedures lor Mechanical Design (3)
or
Mich.mic.il Engineering Design (3)
Professional Development (1)
Phase Diagrams and Transformations (3)
Mechanical Behavior of Materials (3)
Extractive Metallurgy 1 (4)
Elective (3)
Junior Year
Same as regular program.
Summer Employment
Senior Year, First Semester (18 credit hottrs)f
Met 305 Extractive Metallurgy II (3)
Met 307 Structure and Behavior of Materials (3)
Met 313 Materials Fabrication (3)
Engineering Science Elective (3)*
Electives (6)
Senior Year, Second Semester ( 15-18 credit hours)f
Chem 196 Physical Chemistry (3)
Met 278 Metallurgical Reports (3)
Met 358 Selection of Materials (3)
Met Approved Elective (3)
GS Elective (3)
Elective (0-3)
tThe lower number of credit hours represents the load re-
quired to meet graduation requirements; the higher the
normal semester load.
'Engineering science electives include, for example, Ch.E. 41,
52, 320, 321; E.E. 11,20, 103; Mech. 102, 203, 313; Met.
312,333,334.
In addition to the regular program, there are two options in
the curriculum oriented to emphasize (1) industrial metal-
lurgy, and (2) preparation for graduate research in materials.
Industrial Metallurgy Option
The industrial metallurgy option is designed to prepare stu-
dents in a four-year program as plant metallurgists or
materials engineers. To assist in this objective, students elect-
ing the option take two special courses, Met. 327 and 329, in
place of an equivalent number of other specified courses. The
emphasis in these courses is a team approach to the solution
of actual plant problems. The course is conducted in coopera-
tion with the Bethlehem Steel Corporation, and three days
per week are spent in the Bethlehem plant for investigation
of problems in plant operations. The option is limited to a
small gToup of seniors selected by the department from those
who apply. Summer employment is provided when possible
for those who elect to initiate the program during the sum-
mer preceding the senior year.
Summer
Met 10(1
Industrial Employment
Senior Year, First Semester (17-20 credit hours)t
Met 327 Industrial Metallurgy (4)
Met 329 Industrial Metallurgy (4)
Met 305 Extractive Metallurgy (3)
Met 307 Structure and Behavior of Materials (3)
Met 313 Materials Fabrication (3)
Elective (0-3)
Senior Year, Second Semester (17 credit hours)
Chem 196 Physical Chemistry (3)
Met 338 Metallurgy Colloquium (2)
Met 358 Selection of Materials (3)
Met Approved Elective (3)
GS Elective (3)
Engineering Science Elective (3)*
tThe lower number of credit hours represents the load re-
quired to meet graduation requirements; the higher the
normal semester load.
'Engineering science electives include, for example, Ch.E. 41,
52,320, 321; E.E. 11,20, 103; Mech. 102, 203, 313; Met.
312,333,334.
Research Option
For those students who may be interested in teaching, re-
search, or development, and intend to pursue graduate work,
a research option is offered. In this option, students are re-
quired to take Met. 240 and 291. Financial support may be
awarded to those students who elect to initiate a research
program during the summer preceding the senior year. The
option is limited to a small group of selected students.
Junior Year, Second Semester (18-19 credit hours)t
Same as regular program with the following addition:
Met 240 Research Techniques (2)
Summer
Met 100
Industrial Employment or Undergraduate
Summer Research
Senior Year, First Semester (15-18 credit hours)t
Met 291 Experimental Metallurgy (3)
Met 305 Extractive Metallurgy II (3)
Met 307 Structure and Behavior of Materials (3)
Met 313 Materials Fabrication (3)
Elective (3-6)
204 Metallurgy and Materials Science
Senior Year, Second Semester (1 7 credit hours)
Chem 196 Physical Chemistry (3)
Met 338 Metallurgy Colloquium (2)
Met 358 Selection of Materials (3)
Met Approved Elective (3)
G.S. Elective (3)
Engineering Science Elective (3)*
fThe lower number of credit hours represent the load re-
quired to meet graduation requirements; the higher the
normal semester load.
*Engineering science electives include, for example, Ch.E. 41,
52, 320,321;E.E. 11,20, 103; Mech. 102,203, 313; Met.
312,333, 334.
Undergraduate Courses
10. Metallurgy Laboratory (1)
Application of equipment for laboratory study of structure
and properties of metals. Prerequisite: Met. 63 or 91 pre-
viously or concurrently.
63. Engineering Materials and Processes (3)
A study of engineering materials and properties. Methods and
effect of fabrication and treatment. Application and use of
materials in engineering. Primarily metals, but including plas-
tics, ceramics, and other engineering materials. Prerequisites:
Chem. 21;Phys. 11 or 16.
91. Elements of Materials Science (3)
Introductory study of the relationship between structure (on
the atomic, crystallographic or molecular, micro and macro
scales) and physical and mechanical properties of metallic,
ceramic, and polymeric materials. Influence of processing
variables on structure and properties. Lectures and recitation.
Prerequisites: Chem. 21; Phys. 21 or 16 previously or con-
currently.
100. Industrial Employment
In the summer following the junior year students in the cur-
riculum of metallurgy and materials science are required to
secure at least eight weeks of experience in industrial plants
or research organizations.
101. Professional Development (1)
Meetings with the department staff for the purpose of devel-
oping a professional outlook of the engineering student. Re-
quired reading, oral reports and term papers. Prerequisite:
junior standing. Consent of chairman of the department.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
207. Electronic and Crystal Structure (3)
Atomic theory, chemical bonding, lattice concepts, and
theory of X-rays. Nature of crystalline phases, imperfections,
and atom movements. Electron theories of solids. Lectures
and laboratory. Prerequisites: Met. 10 or Mech. 13, and Phys.
21.
208. Phase Diagrams and Transformations (3)
Thermodynamic basis for equilibrium. The phase rule. Equili-
brium phase diagrams and non-equilibrium considerations.
Solidification and solid state phase changes. Rationalizations
of microstructures. Recovery, recrystallization, and grain
growth. Lectures and laboratory. Prerequisites: Met. 207,
Met. 210.
210. Metallurgical Thermodynamics (3)
The applications of thermodynamic relations to metallurgical
processes with emphasis on solving specific problems for pro-
cesses such as the open hearth for steel, heat treating atmo-
spheres, alloy equilibrium diagrams, and others. Lectures and
problem sections. Prerequisite: Math. 23.
218. Mechanical Behavior of Materials (3)
Study of the deformation and fracture behavior of materials.
Elastic and plastic behavior, with emphasis on crystallo-
graphic consideration. Strengthening mechanisms in solids.
Static and time dependent fracture from metallurgical and
continuum viewpoints. Lectures and laboratory. Prerequi-
sites: Mech. 11, Met. 207, Met. 63 or Met. 91.
240. Research Techniques (2-3)
Study, analysis, and application of experimental techniques
in metallurgical and materials research. Analysis of ex-
perimental data and methods of presentation. Design of ex-
perimental programs. Recitations and laboratory. Restricted
to small numbers of students by the department.
278. Metallurgical Reports (3)
An opportunity for the advanced student to develop famili-
arity with current metallurgical literature and to present oral
reports and a comprehensive written survey. Prerequisite:
senior standing.
291. Experimental Metallurgy (3)
Application of research techniques to a project in metallurgy
or materials science selected in consultation with the senior
staff. Prerequisite: Met. 240.
300. Apprentice Teaching in Met. (1-3)
304. Extractive Metallurgy 1 (4)
A unit process study of extractive metallurgy techniques.
Includes chemical principles, thermochemistry, and kinetics;
also phases in pyrometallurgical systems, combustion of
fuels, and refractories. The preparation, treatment, and hand-
ling of materials for primary crude metal production. Lec-
tures plus laboratory. Prerequisite: Ch.E. 60, Met. 210.
305. Extractive Metallurgy II (3)
Continuation of Met. 304. A detailed engineering analysis of
important metallurgical processes. A study of the thermody-
namic and kinetic aspects of these processes. Development of
mathematical models of processes by computer program-
ming. Lectures, laboratory, and plant trips. A three-day in-
spection trip is required. Prerequisites: Met. 304.
Metallurgy and Materials Science 205
307. Structure and Behavioi ol Materials (3)
: iM.Mi ol structure and properties •>! engineering materi
als. Design of tlu'rm.il. chemical, and mechanical treatments
to develop optimum properties in metals, ceramics, and poly-
mers. Lectures and laboratory. Prerequisites: Met. 218, Met.
U2, Ch.E. 11 2) Fundamentals of Corrosion (3)
Ourse description, see Ch.E. 312.
313. Materials Fabrication (3)
Basic concepts of stress, strain, and stress-strain behavior
under load. Analysis and description of metal forming, metal
cutting, casting, joining, and powder metallurgy. Lectures
and laboratory. Prerequisites: Met. 63 or Met. 91, or equiva-
lent.
315. Introduction to Physical Ceramics (3)
Methods of fabrication, physical properties, and applications
of ceramic materials, including oxides, carbides, nitrides,
borides and silicides. Correlation ot atomic bonding, micro-
structure and physical behavior in service environments.
Special topics, including electronic ceramics, nuclear
ceramics, refractories, cutting tools and abrasives. Prerequi-
site: Chem. 21 and Phys. 11 or consent of chairman of de-
partment.
316. Physical Properties of Materials (3)
Consideration of observed electrical, magnetic, thermal, and
optical properties of crystalline materials with emphasis on
their relationship to electron configuration and crystal struc-
ture. Lectures and laboratory. Prerequisites: Met. 207 or
Phys. 31, or consent of department chairman.
317. Imperfections in Crystals (3)
Study of the types of imperfections in crystals and their
effects on the behavior of crytalline materials with particular
emphasis on dislocations. Prerequisite: Met. 218.
319. Current Topics in Materials Science (3)
A study ot selected topics of current interest in the field of
materials science but not covered in the regular courses. May
be repeated for credit with consent of the chairman of the
department. Prerequisite: Met. 210, Met. 218.
320. Analytical Methods in Materials Science (3)
Selected topics in modern analysis and their application to
materials problems in such areas as thermodynamics, crystal-
lography, deformation and fracture, and diffusion. Prerequi-
site: Math. 231 or Math. 205.
327. Industrial Metallurgy (4)
This course is restricted to a small group of seniors and gradu-
ate students selected by the department from those who
apply. Three full days per week are spent at the plant of the
Bethlehem Steel Corporation for research in plant operations.
Application by a graduate student for admission to this
course must be made prior to March 1 of the previous semes-
ter.
329. Industrial Metallurgy (4)
To lie taken concurrently with Met. 327.
333. (Geol. 337) X-ray Methods (3)
Introduction to the fundamentals and experimental methods
of X-ray techniques. Application to various materials prob-
lems including diffraction, radiography, fluorescent analysis.
Lectures and laboratory work. Prerequisite: Phys. 21 , Met.
91 or equivalent.
334. (Geol. 338) Electron Metallography (3)
Study of the fundamentals and experimental methods of
electron microscopy, scanning electron microscopy, and elec-
tron microprobe analysis. Specific topics include electron
optics, electron beam interactions with solids, electron dif-
fraction, chemical microanalysis, and transmission electron
microscopy. Applications to the study of the structure of
material will be given. Special laboratories will be given in
cooperation with other departments as required. Prerequisite:
consent of chairman of department.
338. Metallurgical Colloquium (2)
An opportunity for the student to develop an acquaintance
with the current metallurgical literature, the ability to inter-
pret such literature clearly, and skill in presenting oral engi-
neering reports. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of depart-
ment.
343. (Ch.E. 393, Chem. 393) Physical Polymer Science (3)
For course description, see Ch.E. 393.
358. Selection of Materials (3)
Study of problems relating to design and service requirements
of material components. Selection of materials-fabrication,
and finishing processes. Failure analysis. Discussion of
specific examples involving materials. Lectures, problems.
Prerequisites: Met. 307 and Met 313, or consent of chairman
of department.
361. Physics of Materials (3)
Consideration of principles of quantum mechanics and sta-
tistical thermodynamics. Intended to provide a basic under-
standing of the principles underlying the study of structure
and properties of materials. Prerequisites: Met. 91 or equiva-
lent, Math. 205.
362. Structure and Properties of Materials (3)
Study of structure and transformation in materials and cor-
relation of structure with the physical and mechanical
behavior of materials. Intended, in conjunction with Met.
361, to provide an integrated background sequence for
further studies in the science of materials. Prerequisite: Met.
91 or equivalent.
For Graduates
The department offers three degrees: an M.S. and Ph.D. in
Metallurgy and Materials Science, and an M.S. in Materials.
This latter degree is part of a special five-year program which
206 Metallurgy and Materials Science
is described on page 156.
There are a diversity of programs and curricula available
to a person interested in graduate study in the area of
materials. The department of metallurgy and materials
science generally is the department from which a degree is
earned. However, thesis and dissertation research may be a
part of programs underway in the department or at the
Materials Research Center or other departments or centers at
Lehigh.
The department of metallurgy and materials science has
both a large enough staff and graduate enrollment to enable
it to suit the needs of students whose interests range from the
science of materials through materials engineering and metal-
lurgy. At the same time, those advanced students who desire
it are usually provided the opportunity to gain experience in
teaching under the guidance of the senior staff.
The foundation for successful graduate work in the de-
partment includes sound preparation in chemistry, physics,
and mathematics, and adequate breadth of general education.
Candidates entering the department who have obtained their
previous degrees in fields other than metallurgy or materials
science may be required to take certain undergraduate
courses without credit toward the graduate degree or to pass
an examination to demonstrate a satisfactory foundation for
advanced work.
The programs of the department are flexible. Upon
acceptance, each student is assigned a faculty advisor. Under
his direction the student plans a course of study to satisfy his
needs and interests. The department has established specific
recommended programs for the master of science or doctor
of philosophy emphasizing the following areas: chemical
metallurgy, materials engineering, materials science, mechan-
ical metallurgy, physical ceramics, and physical metallurgy.
These programs are not rigid. The program in chemical metal-
lurgy offers a cooperative "Chem.-Met." program with the
chemical engineering department. Through cooperation with
the mechanical engineering department similiar arrangements
have been made to extend the materials engineering program
to include an option in materials design. The emphasis of the
mechanical metallurgy program is on the analysis of metal
forming operations. Many students, however, have specialized
in other areas of mechanical metallurgy, such as deformation
and fracture analysis, either through combined programs in
physical and mechanical metallurgy or through cooperation
with the departments of mechanics or mechanical engineering
and the Materials Research Center. The physical ceramics
program emphasizes unique processing techniques as well as
the study of the physical behavior of various ceramic sys-
tems.
Graduate school requirements are explained earlier in this
catalog. In this department, a candidate for the degree of
master of science must complete a thesis. This represents six
of the thirty semester hours required for this degree.
A candidate for the Ph.D. prepares a preliminary program
of courses and research providing for specialization in some
phase of metallurgy, materials science, or materials engineer-
ing (largely through research) in consultation with his ad-
visor. Prior to formal establishment of the doctoral program
by his special committee and its approval by the graduate
school, he must pass a qualifying examination which must be
taken early in the first year of doctoral work. The depart-
ment does not require a foreign language; however, it does
require preparation and defense of a research proposal as a
portion of the general examination. Of the courses listed
above only those in the 300-series are available for graduate
credit for students in metallurgy and materials science. There
are many additional offerings in materials under the listings
of other departments. A partial listing of such courses may be
found under Five-Year Programs. (See page 156.)
Most graduate students receive some form of financial aid.
Several kinds of fellowships, traineeships, and assistantships
are available. This type of aid generally provides for tuition,
an allowance for experimental supplies, and a stipend to the
student. To date, The Internal Revenue Service has allowed
this stipend to be tax free. For details of graduate scholar-
ships, fellowships and assistantships please refer to the
Graduate School section of this catalog.
A number of graduate students in metallurgy and
materials science do their research in the Materials Research
Center. The list of research activities notes the many areas of
interest and the asterisks indicate research of an interdiscipli-
nary nature.
Chemical Metallurgy
Kinetics of metallurgical reactions
Mathematical modeling of metallurgical processes
Thermodynamics of metallic solutions
Thermodynamics and phase equilibria
Materials Science
Characterization of metal oxide films*
Crystal growth*
Deformation and recrystallization texture studies
Deformation of bicrystals
Dislocation studies
Eutectic research including solidification, microstructure, and
property studies*
Magnetic materials
Meteorites and lunar materials
Photoelectric studies of insulators
Preparation and properties of materials for solid state de-
vices*
Processing of metal insulator semi-conductor structures and
their evaluation and application to integrated circuits*
Quantitative metallography
Solidification of tool steels
Structure and behavior of solid state materials*
Structure and properties of sputtered, evaporated, and plated
thin films*
Mechanical Aletallurgy
Cladding and forming of composite materials
Correlation of microstructure with mechanical behavior of
low-alloy high-strength steels, especially fatigue, creep and
brittle fracture
Deep drawing, impact extrusion and ironing
Deformation and fracture of eutectic composites
Ductile fracture
Metallurgy and Materials Science 207
Effects "i holes, inclusions and pressure on the tensile pro-
perties
Electron fractography '
Eiivironineiit.il crack kinetics*
Fatigue crack propagation studies of metals and polymers'
Flow through converging conical dies
Forming of polymers '
Friction measurement
Hydrost.itie extrusion
Influence of welding on fatigue characteristics of weldmcnts'
Mechanical behavior of anisotrophic materials'
Pressure-induced ductility
Theoretical analysis of metal forming methods and correla-
tion with metallurgical parameters
Toughness of weld metal
Weldability of steels
Physical Ceramics
Diffusion in multi-component ceramic systems'
Fracture toughness and crack propagation behavior in refrac-
tory materials*
Kinetics of phase transformations in ceramics*
Mechanism of wear and abrasion in ultra-hard materials*
Microstructure aspects of the strength, elasticity, and creep
behavior of high-purity alumino-silicate ceramics*
Polymer reinforced ceramics*
Pressure-sintering kinetics of ceramics*
Static and cyclic fatigue of ceramics*
Strengthening mechanisms in impregnated porous brittle
materials*
Strengthening mechanisms of glasses and ceramics by surface
compression*
Synthesis and characterization of polycrystalline diamond
compacts'
Synthesis characterization and densification kinetics of ultra-
fine ceramic powders*
Theoretical analysis of deformation, fracture and flow
characteristics of brittle materials*
Thermal stress fracture and spalling mechanisms in brittle
ceramics*
Thermoviscoelastic behavior of ceramics and glasses*
Physical Metallurgy
Creep-rupture and aging, brittle fracture characteristics, and.
fatigue properties of low-alloy, high-strength steels*
Diffusion controlled growth
Kinetics of solid state reactions*
Metallurgical factors affecting machining*
Physical metallurgy of aluminum alloys
Physical metallurgy of sintered carbides*
Recrystallization
Strengthening mechanisms
Structure and morphology of martensite
Tempering
Ternary diffusion
Transmission electron microscopy of crystal defects
X-ray measurement of residual stresses*
Polymers
Environmental effects on polymers to protect concrete
.ig.iinst corrosion '
Fatigue crack propagation in engineering plastics"
Fracture surfaces of crystalline polymers"
Mechanical behavior of interpenetrating networks*
Mechanical behavior of polyvinyl chloride*
Mechanisms of sintering of polymers'
Reinforcement of silicon rubber by silica fillers*
Second-order transitions in cellulose triestcrs*
401. Metallurgical Investigation and Thesis (1-6)
Investigation of some problem in the area of mechanical,
chemical, and physical metallurgy or materials science. The
study must be embodied in a written report. Prerequisite:
undergraduate courses in the field of investigation. May be
repeated for credit. Total of 6 credits to be applied to M.S.
program.
404. Materials in Modern Technology (3)
Detailed study of special processing techniques for, or
chemical, mechanical, and physical behavior of, one or more
of the materials in modern technologies, such as the cyrogen-
ic, nuclear, or aerospace fields. This course may be repeated
for credit beyond three hours with the permission of the
instructor. Prerequisite: consent of department chairman.
406. Solidification (3)
Structure, theory and properties of liquids. Homogeneous
and heterogeneous nucleation, theory and experimental re-
sults. Solidification phenomena in pure, single and multi-
phase materials including the natures of the freezing inter-
face, segregation, constitutional super-cooling, dendritic
growth, crystallographic effects, the origin of defects, crystal
growing. Zone processes. Prerequisites: consent of chairman
of department.
407. Theory of Alloy Phases (3)
Consideration of the application of the principles of thermo-
dynamics, physics, and crystallography to the explanation of
structure, physical properties and behavior of crystalline
materials. Prerequisite: Met. 208. Desirable preparation:
Phys. 363.
408. Transformations (3)
A description of phase equilibria and phase transformations
with emphasis on the solid state. Phase diagrams and their
thermodynamic basis. Physical and kinetic aspects of various
types of phase transformations. Prerequisites: Met. 208, Met.
210.
409. Recent Developments in the Theory of Materials (3)
Current topics and theoretical developments in materials.
This course may be repeated for credit with permission of the
instructor. Prerequisite: consent of the chairman of the de-
partment.
208 Metallurgy and Materials Science
410. Physical Chemistry of Metals (3)
Discussion of the thermodynamic properties of solid and
liquid metals and alloy systems. Treatment of solution laws,
methods of determining thermodynamic properties by exper-
imentation and computation, changing standard states, and
interaction parameters developed for liquid ferrous alloys.
Prerequisite: Met. 210 or equivalent.
411. Modern Joining Methods (3)
The foundations upon which the joining processes rest; the
present limitations of the various processes; the trends in new
developments; the engineering and structural aspects of join-
ing. Prerequisites: Met. 208 and 218.
412. Electrical and Magnetic Properties of Materials (3)
The study of semiconducting, dielectric, magnetic and simi-
lar materials and their properties. Brief discussion of band
theory, conduction and emission mechanisms and related
topics. The relation between structure (including imperfec-
tions) and physical properties. Prerequisites: Met. 316 or
Phys. 363, Chem. 196; or consent of department chairman.
413. Analysis of Metal Forming Processes (3)
Three dimensional stress and strain analysis. Yield criteria,
plastic flow and the upper and lower bound theorems. Analy-
sis of metal forming processes, including drawing and extru-
sion, press work, rolling and spinning. The emphasis is on
presenting several approaches to each problem.
414. Physical Chemistry of Metallurgical Reactions (3)
Development of quadratic formalism for representation of
the thermodynamic properties of binary and ternary metallic
solutions. A study of the thermodynamic and kinetic aspects
of process metallurgy reactions. Emphasis on the kinetic be-
havior of important slag-metal reactions. Prerequisite: Met.
410.
415. Mechanical Behavior of Ceramic Solids (3)
Strength, elasticity, creep, thermal stress fracture, hardness,
abrasion and high-temperature deformation characteristics of
single-and-multi-component brittle ceramic solids. Statistical
theories of strength, static and cyclic fatigue, crack propaga-
tion, fracture toughness. Correlation of mechanical behavior,
microstructure, and processing parameters. Prerequisite: Met.
218 or consent of department chairman.
416. Atom Movements (3)
Phenomenological and atomistic development of the laws of
diffusion and their solution. Influence of gradients of concen-
tration, potential, temperature and pressure. Effects of struc-
tural defects on diffusion in metals and non-metals. Prerequi-
site: Math. 23 and Chem. 196 or the equivalent.
418. Deformation and Fracture (3)
Study of slip and twinning in metals. Theories of deforma-
tion texture formation. Evaluation of atomistic, microstruc-
tural, and continuum fracture theories and their interrelation.
Consideration of ductile and brittle fracture, fatigue, creep,
and failure of composite materials. Utilization of electron
fractography. Prerequisite: Met. 218 or equivalent.
419. Alloy Steels (3)
Structures and transformations in iron and iron based alloys.
Design and heat treatment of alloys for strength, toughness,
creep, and corrosion resistance. Prerequisite: Met. 307.
425. Topics in Materials Processing (3)
Topics such as: ceramics, metal, and polymer synthesis and
compaction phenomena. Theories of sintering and grain
growth. Physical behavior of sintered compacts. Techniques
of fiber and crystal growth. Vapor deposition and ultra-high
purity materials preparation. Desirable preparation: Met.
208, Met. 218, Met. 315. Prerequisite: consent of department
chairman.
437. (Mech. 437) Dislocations and Strength in Crystals (3)
Theory and application of dislocations. Geometrical interpre-
tation; elastic properties; force on a dislocation; dislocation
interactions and reactions; multiplication. Dislocations in
crystal structures. Selected topics in strengthening, plastic
flow, creep, fatigue and fracture will be discussed. Prerequi-
sites: Math. 205 or 221, or Met. 320; Met. 317, or consent of
department chairman.
443. (Chem. 443) Solid State Chemistry (3)
For course description, see Chem. 443.
458. Materials Design (3)
Analysis of design requirements for materials components.
Selection of materials and processes. Study of failures in pro-
cess and service and application of recent metallurgical and
materials science knowledge for improved design. Solution
and discussion of industrial problems, and outline of experi-
mental approach. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of
department.
461. Advanced Materials Research Techniques (3)
Study of the theory and application of selected advanced
techniques for investigating the structure and properties of
materials. May be repeated for credit with the approval of the
department chairman.
Metallurgy and Materials Science 209
Modern Foreign Languages
and Literatures
Professors
Anna Pirsccnok Herz, Ph.D.. Chairman
Victor Manuel Valenzuela, Ph.D.
John Andrews Van Ecrde, Ph.D.
Associate Professor
Arthur Parcel Gardner. Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
Biruta Cap, Ph.D.
Allen E. Hye, Ph.D.
Safeta Juka, Dr. d'Univ.
Anje C. van der Naald, Ph.D.
D. Alexander Waldenrath, Ph.D.
Instructors
Duncan B. Gardiner, M.A.
Alberto Romero, M.A.
language in preparation for the departmental examinations
(oral and/or written) and the graduate record examinations.
Specific courses other than those listed should include
collateral work in ancient and modern European history, fine
arts, music, and the languages and literatures of other
peoples, i.e., English, French, German, Greek, Kiswahili,
Roman, Russian, and Spanish.
The sequence of courses offered in any of the modern
foreign languages is of particular relevance as preparation for
careers in teaching and foreign service.
Interdisciplinary majors combining a program of Russian
studies are encouraged.
Modern Foreign Languages
301. General Linguistics (3)
Historical and descriptive linguistics: emphasis on articula-
tory phonetics, morphology, and structural grammatical
analysis, especially as applied to pedagogy. Conducted in
English.
302. The Teaching of a Foreign Language (3)
Conducted in English.
409. Theory of Literary Criticism (3)
The theory and practice of literary criticism for students of
foreign literatures. Conducted in English.
Visiting Instructor
Gombilenga Mikongomi, Cert.
The department of modern foreign languages and literatures
offers separate major programs in French, German and
Spanish aiming to show the development of the culture and
civilization of the French, German and Spanish-speaking
countries of Europe and Latin America. Required language
and literature courses constitute a core around which the
student can build a program of studies providing a broad and
sound understanding of foreign cultures as part of the culture
of the western world.
Each candidate is assigned a departmental advisor to cor-
relate and integrate supplementary reading and study to meet
special objectives.
All foreign language candidates are urged to participate in
Lehigh University summer language programs abroad. Candi-
dates in German are urged to participate in the Lehigh Uni-
versity spring semester in Germany. "Junior year abroad"
programs and study travel in foreign countries are recom-
mended.
Although the minimum requirement for the major is
eighteen credit hours of which at least six will be selected
from 200-level courses, the normal requirement consists of
eight semester courses above the elementary and intermediate
levels through which the candidate is expected to gain a
knowledge of literature and an adequate command of the
French
Required Preliminary Courses
Fr 3 Elementary French (5)
Fr 4 Intermediate French (5)
Fr 13, 14 Advanced French (7)
Required Major Courses
Eighteen hours of which at least six hours shall be chosen
from courses at the 200- or 300-level.
Fr 43, 44 French Oral and Written Composition (6)
Fr 51, 52 Types of French Literature (6)
Fr 53 Balzac (3)
Fr 54 Malraux (3)
Fr 61, 62 17th Century French Literature (6)
Fr 63, 64 18th Century French Literature (6)
Fr 65, 66 19th Century French Literature (6)
Fr 67, 68 20th Century French Literature (6)
Fr 271, 272 Readings
Fr 303 History of French Language (3)
Fr 304 Old French Literature (3)
Fr 307 Baudelaire (3)
Fr 308 Symbolism (3)
Fr 311, 312 French Classicism (6)
Fr 313, 314 The Age of Enlightenment (6)
Fr 315, 316 Late Medieval and Renaissance Literature
(6)
210 Modern Foreign Languages and Literatures: French
Fr 317 The Romantic Movement (3)
Fr 318 Theatre in the Twentieth Century (3)
Fr 319 The New Novel (3)
Fr 331 French Poets of the TwentiethCentury (3)
Fr 333 The Great Women Writers of France (3)
Fr 381 French Cultural Program (3-6)
Undergraduate Courses
3. Elementary French (5)
Basic conversational French illustrating essential grammatical
principles, reading of simple texts and writing; some laborato-
ry-
4. Intermediate French (5)
A continuation of French 3. Prerequisite: French 3, or
Achievement Test score before entrance, or consent of chair-
man of department.
13. Advanced French (4)
A review of grammar but an emphasis on speaking and writ-
ing on topics affording an opportunity to master the current
idiom through the use of materials of contemporary interest.
Prerequisite: Fr. 4, or Achievement Test score before en-
trance, or consent of chairman of department.
14. Advanced French (3)
Emphasis on readings and discussion. Prerequisite: Fr. 3, or
Achievement Test score before entrance, or consent of chair-
man of department.
43. French Oral and Written Composition (3)
For students who wish a greater opportunity for practice in
the oral and written use of French than can be provided in
the literature courses. Prerequisites: Fr. 14, or consent of
department chairman, or Achievement Test score of 600.
44. French Oral and Written Composition (3)
Designed to aid students who have already satisfied the lan-
guage requirement in French to develop an advanced degree of
skill in speaking and writing the language.
51. A Survey of French Literature (3)
Training in the ability to read and understand representative
works from the Middle Ages to the nineteenth century. Out-
side reading and reports. Conducted in French. Prerequisites:
Fr. 42 or 4 units of entrance French or consent of chairman
of department.
52. A Survey of French Literature (3)
Reading and discussion of representative works of the nine-
teenth and twentieth centuries. Outside reading and reports.
Conducted in French. Prerequisites: Fr. 51 or consent of
chairman of department.
53. Balzac (3)
Conducted in French. Prerequisite: consent of chairman, Fr.
14 and 42, or Achievement Test score of 600.
54. Malraux (3)
Conducted in French. Prerequisite: consent of chairman, Fr.
14 and 42, or Achievement Test score of 600.
61. Seventeenth Century French Literature (3)
A study of the main pre-classical and classical French writers
of the seventeenth century. Lectures, discussion of texts, and
collateral reading. Conducted in French. Prerequisites: Fr.
51-52 or 5 units of entrance French, or consent of chairman
of department.
62. Seventeenth Century French Literature (3)
Continuation of Fr. 61. Conducted in French. Prerequisite:
Fr. 61, or consent of the chairman of the department.
63. Eighteenth Century French Literature (3)
The literature of the Enlightenment and pre-Romanticism.
Lectures, discussion of texts, reports, and collateral readings.
Conducted in French. Prerequisites: French 51-52, or 5 units
of entrance French, or consent of chairman of department.
64. Eighteenth Century French Literature (3)
Continuation of Fr. 63. Prerequisite: Fr. 63, or consent of
chairman of department.
65. Nineteenth Century French Literature (3)
Main literary currents of the nineteenth century; Romanti-
cism and Realism. Lectures, reports, collateral readings. Pre-
requisites: Fr. 51-52, or 5 units of entrance French, or
consent of chairman of department.
66. Nineteenth Century French Literature (3)
Continuation of Fr. 65. Prerequisite: Fr. 65, or consent of
chairman of department.
67. Twentieth Century French Literature (3)
A study of the principal novelists of the 20th century in
France: Proust, Gide, Mauriac, Sartre, Camus, Robbe-Grillet,
Beckett; with a consideration of the trends, philosophy, and
movements they represent. Conducted in French. Prerequi-
site: Fr. 51-52 or consent of the chairman of department.
68. Twentieth Century French Literature (3)
A study of the drama and poetry of 20th century France
with readings chosen to illustrate the principal dramatists and
poets as well as literary movements. Conducted in French.
Prerequisite: Fr. 51-52 or consent of chairman of depart-
ment.
81. French Cultural Program (3-6)
A summer program abroad. Includes formal instruction in the
French language as well as direct contact with the French
people and their culture during two months in France.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
A student wishing to qualify for a master's degree in modern
foreign languages and literature should have an undergraduate
Modern Foreign Languages and Literatures : French 21 1
major or it> equivalent in French. Those with undergraduate
deficiencies, though otherwise qualified, may be admitted
with the stipulation thai they make up such deficiencies in
addition to satisfying the minimum requirements tor the
degree.
The graduate major shall consist ol a minimum of 18
credit hours, 15 of which arc to be selected from the depart-
ment's 400-level course offerings. He may choose to submit a
thesis representing the equivalent of a maximum of 6 hours
of course work. If desired, the candidate is permitted to take
collateral work in related fields to the extent of 12 semester
hours. At the end of his course work he shall be asked to pass
a comprehensive examination.
271. Readings (3)
A study of the works of some author or group of authors, or
of a period. Prerequisite: Fr. 41-42 or 51-52 or consent of
chairman of department.
272. Readings (3)
Continuation of Fr. 271. Prerequisite: Fr. 271 or consent of
chairman of department.
303. History of the French Language (3)
A chronological history of the origins and development of
the French language, from the beginnings to the present.
Particular stages of the development of the language will be
analyzed: Gallo-Romance, Old French, Middle French,
Renaissance, Classicism, Romanticism, and Contemporary
French. Vocabulary, pronunciation, and structure will be
treated. Conducted in English. Prerequisite: Fr. 51-52, or
consent of chairman of department.
304. Old French Literature (3)
Readings in French literature of the Middle Ages, particularly
representative works of the literary renaissance of the twelfth
century: chanson de geste, lyric poetry and roman
d'aventure. Longer treatment will be given to the Arthurian
romances, especially the works of Chrestien de Troyes. Lec-
tures, discussions, and reports. Some of the readings will be
in the original Old French, some in modern French transla-
tions. Conducted in English. Prerequisite: Fr. 51-52, includ-
ing a thorough reading knowledge of the language, or consent
of the chairman of the department.
307. Baudelaire (3)
The major works in prose and poetry of Baudelaire with an
emphasis on theme and influence. Conducted in French. Pre-
requisite: Fr. 51-52 or consent of chairman of department.
308. Symbolism (3)
An intensive study of the symbolist school of poetry follow-
ing Baudelaire through Mallarme and the end of the 19th
century.
31 1. French Classicism (3)
A study of the French classical theatre, novel, and criticism
with emphasis on Corneille, Racine, Moliere, Madame de
Lafayette, Malherbe, and Boileau. Conducted in French. Pre-
requisite: Fr. 51-52 or consent of chairman of department.
312. French Classicism (3)
Continuation of Fr. 311. Conducted in French. Prerequisite:
Fr. 31 1 or consent of chairman of department.
313. The Age ol Enlightenment (3)
A study of the "Philosophes" and "Encyclopedistcs" of the
18th century, with emphasis on Voltaire, Rousseau,
Montesquieu, and Diderot. Conducted in French. Prere-
quisite: Fr. 51-52 or consent of chairman of department.
314. The Age of Enlightenment (3)
Continuation of Fr. 313. Conducted in French. Prerequisite:
Fr. 313 or consent of chairman of department.
315. Late Medieval and Renaissance Literature (3)
Readings, study, and discussion of French prose and dramatic
literature of the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries. Lectures,
reports, and class discussion. Conducted in French. Prerequi-
site: Fr. 52 or consent of chairman of department.
316. Late Medieval and Renaissance Literature (3)
Readings and analysis of representative lyric poetry from the
Troubadors to the Pleiade. Lectures, reports, and class discus-
sions. Conducted in French. Prerequisite: Fr. 51 or consent
of chairman of department.
317. The Romantic Movement (3)
A study and analysis of the Romantic movement in France
with readings chosen from its principal exponents. Con-
ducted in French. Prerequisite: Fr. 51-52 or consent of chair-
man of department.
318. Theatre in the Twentieth Century (3)
Contemporary French drama with an analysis of its origins
and movements. Conducted in French. Prerequisite: Fr.
51-52 or consent of chairman of department.
319. The New Novel (3)
A study of current trends in the novel in France with repre-
sentative readings. Conducted in French. Prerequisite: Fr.
51-52 or consent of chairman of department.
321. French Literature in Translation (3)
The most significant works in French literature with a certain
emphasis on those that relate to other literatures, especially
those written in Romance languages. No knowledge of
French is required. French 321 cannot count as a language
course. Prerequisite: a college course in literature, or consent
of chairman of department.
212 Modern Foreign Languages and Literatures: French
322. French Literature in Translation (3)
A continuation of Fr. 321. Fr. 322 cannot count as a langu-
age course. Prerequisite: Fr. 321, or consent of chairman of
department.
331. French Poets of the Twentieth Century (3)
The leading poets from Valery to Bonnefoy. Conducted in
French. Prerequisite: consent of chairman or two semesters
of French literature in college.
333. The Great Women Writers of France (3)
Women writers of France from the Middle Ages to the
present. Conducted in French. Prerequisite: consent of chair-
man or two semesters of French literature in college.
381. French Cultural Program (3-6)
A summer program in France offering formal language courses
and cultural opportunities to graduate students and teachers
of French.
411. Voltaire (3)
Representatives readings. Conducted in French. Prerequisite:
a 300-level course or equivalent, or consent of chairman ot
department.
412. Stendhal and Flaubert (3)
The major works of Stendhal and Flaubert with particular
consideration to style, theme, and influence. Conducted in
French. Prerequisite: 300-level course or equivalent, or con-
sent of chairman of department.
413. French Heritage (3)
After a brief introductory survey of the development of
France from prehistoric times to the Middle Ages, French
culture will be studied more comprehensively through poli-
tical history, successive changes in social structures and
mores, especially as they appear in literature and art. Con-
ducted in French. Prerequisite: a 300-level course or equiva-
lent or consent of chairman of department.
414. French Heritage (3)
Continuation of Fr. 413. Prerequisite: Fr. 413, or consent of
chairman of department.
415. Proust and Gide (3)
Selected readings in Proust and Gide with particular con-
sideration to style, theme, and influence. Conducted in
French. Prerequisite: a 300-level course or equivalent, or
consent of the chairman of the department.
416. Sartre and Camus (3)
A study of the plays and novels of Sartre and Camus with
particular consideration to their philosophies and relation to
the current literary trends. Conducted in French. Prerequi-
site: a 300-level course or equivalent, or consent of chairman
of department.
417. Moliere (3)
A study of Moliere 's most significant plays with special
reference to staging, technique, and influence. Conducted in
French. Prerequisite: consent of chairman or a 300-level
course in French literature.
418. Writings of Jean-Jacques Rousseau (3)
An emphasis on Rousseau and pre-Romanticism. Conducted
in French. Prerequisite: a 300-level course or equivalent, or
consent of chairman of department.
420. Surrealism (3)
The contributions of Breton, Aragon, Elnard, Desnes, and
others. Relations between painting and poetry. Conducted in
French. Prerequisite: consent of chairman or a 300-level
course in French literature.
422. French Satirical Literature (3)
A survey from the Middle Ages to the present. Conducted in
French. Prerequisite: consent of chairman or a 300-level
course in French literature.
491. Independent Study (1-3)
Special topics to supplement other study for the M.A. degree.
Conducted in French. Prerequisite: a 300-level course or
equivalent, or consent of chairman of the department.
492. Independent Study (1-3)
Special topics to supplement other study for the M.A. degree.
Conducted in French. Prerequisite: a 300-level course or
equivalent, or consent of chairman of departmei*
German
Required Preliminary Courses
Ger 3 Elementary German (5)
Ger 4 Intermediate German (5)
Ger 13 Types of German Literature (4)
or
Ger 31 Conversation and Composition (3)
Ger 14 Types of German Literature (3)
or
Ger 32 Conversation and Composition (3)
Required Major Courses
Ger 52 Goethe's Faust (3)
And at least two of the following:
Ger 250, 25 1 Special Topics (6)
Ger 303 German Romanticism (3)
Ger 305 Twentieth Century German Literature (3)
Ger 311 Introduction to Lyric Poetry (3)
Ger 321 Nineteenth Century German Literature (3)
Ger 341 Advanced Conversation and Composition
(3)
Modern Foreign Languages and Literatures: German 213
Gci 14 i The Age ol Goethe (3)
Survey of Older German Literature (3)
A senior comprehensive examination is required,
( 'iidergraduate Courses
V Elementary German (5)
Fundamentals ol German grammar; pronunciation; simple
conversation and composition; reading ol simple texts. No
previous German required.
•I. Intermediate German (5)
Review of grammar; composition; reading and discussion of
intermediate texts. Prerequisite: German 3, or 2 units ol en
trance German, or consent of chairman of department.
6. Scientific German (3)
Readings in chemistry and physics. Prerequisite: Ger. 1, or
two units lit entrance German.
13. Types ot German Literature (4)
Reading and discussion in German of advanced texts. Prere
quisitc: German 4, or 3 units of entrance German, or consent
ot chairman ot department.
14. Types ol German Literature (3)
Continuation of Ger. 13. Prerequisite: Ger. 4, or Ger. 1 3, or
consent of chairman of department.
31. Conversation and Composition (3)
Exercises in grammar; phonetics; conversation and composi-
tion stressing situations taken from daily life. Prerequisites:
Ger. 12 or four units of entrance German.
I 1 1 . 1 1 ii ii i.ii 1 1 1 ies in Germany (1 II
I ormal participation in approved courses m some branch of
the hum. mines lor a semester at a ( lei man university. Prere
quisitc : t icrman I 02 or its equivalent.
1 12. Humanities in Germany ( 1 -4 )
Continuation >>| German 111. Prerequisite: German 102 or
its equivalent.
113. Humanities in Germany (1-4)
Continuation ol German 112. Prerequisite: German 102 or
its equivalent.
114. Humanities in Germany (1*4)
Continuation of German I 13. Prerequisite: German 102 or
its equivalent.
121. Social Science in Germany (1-4)
Formal participation in approved courses in some branch ot
the social sciences for a semester at a German university.
Prerequisite: German 102 or its equivalent.
122. Social Sciences in Germany (1-4)
Continuation ofGerman 121. Prerequisite: German 102 or
its equivalent.
123. Social Sciences in Germany (1-4)
Continuation ofGerman 122. Prerequisite: German 102 or
its equivalent.
124. Social Sciences in Germany (1-4)
Continuation ofGerman 123. Prerequisite: German 102 or
its equivalent.
32. Conversation and Composition (3)
Continuation of Ger. 31. Oral and written reports, personal
and business letters, fundamentals of good style. Prerequisite:
Ger. 31 or Ger. 43.
131. Sciences in Germany (1-4)
Formal participation in approved courses in some branch of
the sciences for a semester at a German university. Prerequi-
site: German 102 or its equivalent.
52. Goethe's Faust (3)
Reading of the Faust drama and collateral materials. Prere-
quisite: Ger. 31 or 43, or consent of chairman of department.
101. The European Drama (3)
Readings and live theater performances in Germany. Prere-
quisite: 3 semesters of college German or the equivalent. This
course must be taken concurrently with Ger. 103.
102. Conversation and Composition in Germany (4)
Intensive practice with group discussion on selected cultural,
historical and political topics. Prerequisite: German 101 or its
equivalent.
103. Supplemental Language Practice (1)
Prerequisite: 3 semesters of college German or the equivalent.
This course must be taken concurrently with German 101.
132. Sciences in Germany (1-4)
Continuation ofGerman 131. Prerequisite: German 102 or
its equivalent.
133. Sciences in Germany (1-4)
Continuation ofGerman 132. Prerequisite: German 102 or
its equivalent.
134. Sciences in Germany (1-4)
Continuation ofGerman 133. Prerequisite: German 102 or
its equivalent.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
A student wishing to qualify for a master's degree should
have an undergraduate major or its equivalent in German.
Those with undergraduate deficiencies, though otherwise
qualified may be admitted with a stipulation that they make
up such deficiencies, in addition to satisfying the minimum
214 Modern Foreign Languages and Literatures: German
requirements for the degree.
The successful completion of 10 semester courses (30
credit hours) is required for the M.A. degree. A thesis may be
offered in lieu of two semester courses (6 credit hours). Col-
lateral graduate work in other departments may be taken
upon consultation with the chairman of the department.
The prerequisite for all 200-level courses is three years of
college German or the equivalent, or consent of chairman of
the department.
352. Survey of Older German Literature (3)
Survey of older German literature from the beginning to the
Renaissance. Prerequisite: a 200- or 300-lcvel course in
German or consent of chairman.
381. Cultural Studies (3-6)
A program in German-speaking Europe, during the summer,
for in-service teachers of German and advanced or graduate
students.
250. Special Topics (1-3)
Study of literary and linguistic topics not covered in regular
courses, or continuation of study of topics begun in regular
courses. May be repeated for credit.
411. George, Rilke and Hofmannsthal (3)
Study of works by three major figures in German literature
between 1890 and 1933. Prerequisite: three credit hours in
German at the 300-level.
251. German Culture and Civilization (3)
A study of German customs, institutions, and cultural contri-
butions to western civilization. No knowledge of German
required. German majors and graduate students must write a
research paper in German.
303. German Romanticism (3)
Early and late Romanticists. Prerequisites: Ger. 31, 32, 43, or
44, or consent of chairman of department.
421. Renaissance and Baroque (3)
German literature from Der Ackermann aus Bohmen to the
Age of Enlightenment. Prerequisite: three credit hours in
German at the 300-level.
431. Lessing and the Enlightenment (3)
Discussion and analysis of the literature in the pre-Classical
Age. Prerequisite: three credit hours in German at the
300-level.
305. Twentieth Century German Literature (3)
Study of works by representative writers from Naturalism
through the end of World War II. Prerequisite: 3 years of
college German (or equivalent) or consent of chairman of the
department.
311. Introduction to Lyric Poetry (3)
Selected poems from the beginning to the modern periods.
Discussion and analysis. Prerequisite: three years of college
German, or equivalent, or consent of the chairman of the
department.
321. Nineteenth Century German Literature (3)
A study of representative writers from the end of Romanti-
cism up to Naturalism (1830-1885).
322. History of the German Language (3)
The development of the language and its present structure.
Prerequisites: Ger. 31, 32, 43, 44 or consent of chairman of
department.
341. Advanced Conversation and Composition (3)
For undergraduates and teachers. Prerequisites: German 31
or 32, or consent of chairman of department.
344. The Age of Goethe (3)
Selected works from Klopstock to Holderlin; with special
emphasis on Herder, Goethe and Schiller. Prerequisite:
German 31 or 43 or 44, or consent of chairman of depart-
ment.
441. Middle High German (3)
A study and an analysis of the language and some of the out-
standing writers in their work. Prerequisite: three credit
hours in German at the 300-level.
471. Independent Study (3)
Research of an author or area of German literature.
472. Independent Study (3)
Research of an author or area of German literature.
491. Thesis (3)
492. Thesis (3)
Italian
1. Elementary Italian (3)
Grammar; composition; rapid reading of easy modern prose.
No previous study of Italian required.
2. Elementary Italian (3)
Continuation of Ital. 1. Prerequisite: Ital. 1.
11. Intermediate Italian (3)
The age of Dante. Lectures in English on Dante and his con-
temporaries; readings in the Divina Commedia. Prerequisite:
one year of college Italian or two units of entrance Italian.
12. Intermediate Italian (3)
The Romantic Period: lectures in English, and selected read-
ings from the works of Manzoni and Leopardi. Prerequisite:
one year of college Italian or two units of entrance Italian.
Modern Foreign Languages and Literatures : Italian 215
Kiswahili
i. I lementary Kiswahili (3)
An intensive course in vocabulary and pronunciation .is well
.is verb drills b.isrvl on modern Kiswahili geared to the needs
of .in American student in understanding and appreciating
both the structure of the language and its cultural aspects.
2. Elementary Kiswahili (3)
"illation of Ksw. I. Further practice in verb drills, pro-
nunciation, and vocabulary build up. Prerequisite: Ksw. I, or
consent ol chairman of department.
1 1. Intermediate Kiswahili (3)
Exercises in grammar; conversation and composition based
on situational East African daily life. Prerequisite: Ksw. 2. or
consent of chairman of department.
12. Intermediate Kiswahili (3)
Continuation of Ksw. 1 1 with more emphasis on composi-
tion: fundamentals ot good style, essays, letter writing; oral
and written reports; modern Kiswahili readings, and a short
survey of 18th and 19th century Kiswahili literature. Prere-
quisite: Ksw. 1 1 or consent of the chairman of the depart-
ment.
41. Conversation and Composition (3)
Intensive prai tice in oral ami writ ten Russian : laboratory
practice in aural comprehension. Readings and discussions on
Russian literature and culture. Prerequi ite Russian 12, or 3
units "I entrance Russian, or i onsen t ol , h.in in. in ol depart
nielli.
•12. Conversation ami ( (imposition ( \)
Continuation ol Russian 41. Prerequisite: Russian 41 or con-
sent of chairman of department.
251. Special Topics (3)
Intensive study of literary or linguistic topics. Prerequisite:
Russian 42, or consent of chairman of department.
252. Special Topics (3)
Continuation of Russian 251 . Prerequisite: Russian 251 , or
consent of chairman of department.
341. Russian Realism (3)
Selected works by the Russian realists of the 19th Century
including Dostoevsky, Turgenev, Tolstoy. Lectures and class
discussion in English; collateral reading and written reports
either in Russian or in English. No knowledge of Russian is
required.
Portuguese
1. Elementary Portuguese (3)
A study of Portuguese grammar and forms; practice in
writing and speaking Portuguese.
2. Elementary Portuguese (3)
Continuation of Port. 1. Prerequisite: Port. 1.
Russian
3. Elementary Russian (5)
Classroom and laboratory introduction to the fundamentals
of conversational and grammatical patterns; practice in pro-
nunciation, simple conversation, reading and writing.
4. Elementary Russian (5)
Continuation of Russian 3. Prerequisite: Russian 3 or 2 units
of entrance Russian.
13. Intermediate Russian (4)
Classroom and laboratory practice in conversation. Develop-
ment of reading and writing skills. Prerequisite: Russian 4, or
3 units of entrance Russian, or consent of chairman of
department.
14. Intermediate Russian (3)
Continuation of Russian 13. Prerequisite: Russian 4 or 13, or
3 units of entrance Russian, or consent of chairman of
department.
343. Contemporary Soviet Literature (3)
The development of socialist realism in Russian literature
since 1917. Lectures and class discussion in English; collateral
reading and written reports either in Russian or in English.
No knowledge of Russian is required.
Spanish
Required Preliminary Courses
Span 3 Elementary Spanish (5)
Span 4 Intermediate Spanish (5)
Span 13 Intermediate Spanish (4)
Span 14 Advanced Spanish (3)
Required Courses in Major
Eighteen hours from the following of which at least six shall
be chosen from courses at the 200- or 300-level.
Span 51 Cultural Evolution of Spain (3)
Span 52 Cultural Evolution of Latin America (3)
Span 61 Survey of Contemporary Spanish Literature
from Generation of 98 to the Present (3)
Span 62 Women Poets of Latin America (3)
Span 63 Introduction to Spanish Literature up to
1700 (3)
Span 64 Introduction to Spanish Literature from
1700 to the Present (3)
Span 271, 272 Readings (6)
Span 301 The Spanish Essay (3)
Span 302 The Latin American Essay (3)
216 Modern Foreign Languages and Literatures: Kiswahili, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish
Span 303 Cervantes (3)
Span 305 Spanish Literature in the Middle Ages (3)
Span 306 Latin American Literature Since World War
II (3)
Span 307 The Golden Age (3)
Span 308 Spanish Literature Since the Civil War (3)
Span 309 Sixteenth Century (3)
Span 310 Nineteenth Century Spanish Novel (3)
Span 311 The Generation of 98 (3)
Span 321 Latin American Literature in Translation (3)
Span 322 Latin American Literature in Translation (3)
Span 331 Spanish American Literature (3)
Span 332 Spanish American Literature (3)
Span 381 Summer Session in Spain (6)
Undergraduate Courses
3. Elementary Spanish (5)
Basic conversational Spanish illustrating essential grammatical
principles, reading of simple texts and writing.
4. Intermediate Spanish (5)
A continuation of Spanish 3. Prerequisite: Span. 3 or consent
of section head.
13. Intermediate Spanish (4)
Practice in speaking and writing ot topics affording an op-
portunity to master the current idiom through the use of
materials of contemporary interest. Grammar review. Prere-
quisite: Span. 4 or consent of section head.
14. Advanced Spanish (3)
A continuation of Spanish 1 3. Emphasis on readings and
discussion. Prerequisite: Span. 13 or consent of section head.
51. Cultural Evolution of Spain (3)
The historical and cultural evolution of Spain from its begin-
ning to the present. Conducted in Spanish. Prerequisite:
Span. 14 or consent of section head.
52. Cultural Evolution of Latin America (3)
The historical and cultural evolution of Latin America. Con-
ducted in Spanish. Prerequisite: Span. 51 or consent of
section head.
61. Survey of Contemporary Spanish Literature from the
Generation of 98 to the Present (3)
A study of the development of the literature of Spain from
the Generation of 98 to the present. Conducted in Spanish.
Prerequisite: consent of section head.
62. Women Poets of Latin America (3)
Reading and discussion of the works of Sor Juana I. de la
Cruz, Storni, Agustini, Vaz Ferreira, Ibarborou, Gabriela
Mistral, et al. Conducted in Spanish. Prerequisite: consent of
section head.
63. Introduction to Spanish Literature up to 1700 (3)
Systematic study of Spanish literature from the Middle Ages
to 1700. Representative writings of each period will be read
and analyzed. Lectures, discussion. Conducted in Spanish.
Prerequisite: consent of section head.
64. Introduction to Spanish Literature from 1700 (3)
Continuation of Spanish 63, focusing on Spanish literature
since 1700. Conducted in Spanish. Prerequisite: consent of
section head.
81. Summer Session in Spain (3-6)
A summer program abroad. Includes formal instruction in thi
Spanish language as well as direct contact with the Spanish
people and their culture.
271. Readings (3)
A study of the works of some author or group of authors or
of a period. Prerequisite: consent of section head.
272. Readings (3)
A study of the works of some author or group of authors or
of a period. Prerequisite: consent of section head.
301. The Spanish Essay (3)
Reading and discussion of outstanding Spanish thinkers of
the twentieth century with emphasis on the works of
Unamuno and Ortega y Gasset. Oral and written reports.
Conducted in Spanish. Prerequisite: consent of section head
or Spanish 51.
302. The Latin American Essay (3)
Reading and discussion of distinguished Spanish-American
essayists of the twentieth century with emphasis on the
works of Rodo, Vasconcelos, Vaz Ferreira, and Francisco
Romero. Oral and written reports. Conducted in Spanish.
Prerequisite: consent of section head or Spanish 52.
303. Cervantes (3)
Reading and critical study of the chief works of Miguel de
Cervantes with special emphasis on Don Quijote. Collateral
reading and reports. Given in Spanish. Prerequisite: Span. 51
or consent of section head.
305. Spanish Literature of the Middle Ages (3)
Reading and discussion of outstanding works such as: El Cid,
El Libro de Buen Amor, La Celestina. Given in Spanish. Pre-
requisite: Span. 51 or consent of section head.
306. Latin American Literature Since World War II (3)
Reading and discussion of representative works of contempo-
rary Latin American authors. Given in Spanish. Prerequisite:
Span. 52 or consent of section head.
Modern Foreign Languages and Literatures: Spanish 21 7
.107. The Golden Age (3)
A study of the representative works ol the authors ol the
XVII century. Given in Spanish. Prerequisite: Span. 51 ot
consent ol section head.
38 1 . Summer Study in Spain
A summer program in Sp.ini oMcrmg torni.il language inur.es
and cultural opportunities to graduate students ami tea. Iters
of Spanish.
108. Spanish I itcrature Since the Civil War (3)
Reading ami discussion ol representative contemporary
Spanish poets, playwrights ami novelists. Conducted in
Spanish. Prerequisite: Spall. 51 or consent of section head.
411. Twentieth Century Spanish Theater (3)
A study of the development ol twentieth century theater
from Galdos to the present. Conducted in Spanish. Prerequi
site: .i 300-level course or consent of section head.
ill''. Sixteenth Century (3)
Representative readings. Conducted in Spanish. Prerequisite:
Span. SI or consent ol section head.
310. Nineteenth Century Spanish Novel (3)
Realism and Naturalism in Spain. Conducted in Spanish. Pre
requisite: Span. 51 or consent ot section head.
311. The Generation of 98 (3)
A study of the outstanding works by the writers of the Gen-
eration. Conducted in Spanish. Prerequisite: Span. 51 or con-
sent of section head.
321. Latin American Literature in Translation (3)
Reading and discussion of outstanding works of Latin Ameri-
can literature in translation to provide insight into Latin
American culture. No knowledge of Spanish is required.
Spanish 321 cannot count as a language course. Prerequisite:
consent of section head.
322. Latin American Literature in Translation (3)
Reading and discussion of outstanding works of Latin Ameri-
can literature in translation to provide insight into Latin
American culture. No knowledge of Spanish is required.
Spanish 322 cannot count as a language course. Prerequisite:
consent of section head.
412. Neruda and Mistral (3)
A study of the representative works of these authors. Con-
ducted in Spanish. Prerequisite: a 300-lcvel course or consent
of section head.
413. Ruben Dario and "Modernismo" (3)
A study of the poetry of Ruben Dario and his relation to the
"Modernismo" movement. Conducted in Spanish. Prerequi-
site: a 300-level course or consent of section head.
414. Twentieth Century Spanish Poetry before the Civil War
(3)
Readings of the poetry of Unamuno, Antonio Machado, Juan
R. Jimenez and the poets of the generation of 1 927. Con-
ducted in Spanish. Prerequisite: a 300-level course or consent
of section head.
416. Spanish Theater of the 17th Century (3)
The development of the Spanish drama of the Golden Age.
Conducted in Spanish. Prerequisite: a 300-level course or
consent of section head.
417. Seminar on Galdos (3)
A study of the life and works of Perez Galdos. Conducted in
Spanish. Prerequisite: a 300-level course or equivalent, or
consent of section head.
331. Spanish American Literature (3)
Reading and discussion of representative works of the litera-
ture of the Pre-Columbian, Conquest and Colonial periods.
Oral and written reports. Term paper. Conducted in Spanish.
Prerequisite: Span. 51, 52 or consent of section head.
332. Spanish American Literature (3)
Reading and discussion of representative works of the litera-
ture of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. Oral and writ-
ten reports. Term paper. Conducted in Spanish. Prerequisite:
Span. 51, 52 or consent of section head.
341. Conversational Spanish (3)
Practice in fluency and accuracy in Spanish. Prerequisite:
consent of instructor.
342. Spanish Composition (3)
Practice in Spanish composition; special attention to syntax
and style. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
418. Seminar on Borges and Cortazar (3)
A study of the life and works of Jorge L. Borges and Julio
Cortazar. Conducted in Spanish. Prerequisite: a 300-level
course or equivalent, or consent of section head.
419. Nineteenth Century Spanish Theater (3)
From Romanticism to Realism in 19th century Spain. Con-
ducted in Spanish. Prerequisite: a 300-level course or consent
of section head.
491. Independent Study (3)
Special topics to supplement other study for the M.A. degree.
Conducted in Spanish. Prerequisite: a 300-level course or
equivalent, or consent of section head.
492. Independent Study (3)
Special topics to supplement other study for the M.A. degree.
Conducted in Spanish. Prerequisite: a 300-level course or
equivalent, or consent of section head.
218 Modem Foreign Languages and Literatures: Spanish
Music
104. The Twentieth Century (3)
Post-romanticism, impressionism, atonality, dodecaphony,
experimcntalism. Prerequisite: Music 1 and consent of in-
structor and chairman of Lehigh department. Two 70-minute
periods.
Professors
Robert Benjamin Cutler, M.A., Chairman
Jonathan Britton Elkus, M.A.
The aim of the music curriculum is to develop musical skills
and musicality, and to prepare students for admission to
graduate work in music. The major is based on courses offer-
ed both at Lehigh and Moravian College; the greater portion
of the curriculum is currently taught at Moravian College.
A major concentration in music consists of thirty credit
hours, twenty-four of which shall be advanced courses. The
Moravian courses in Fundamentals, Music 1 and 2, are re-
quired for students who have not mastered the rudiments of
music.
Students must demonstrate their ability in sight-singing
and dictation, and must be able to play major and minor
scales and harmonic progressions in all keys, and to read
chorales in open score and from figured bass.
All majors are required to participate regularly in one or
more of the Lehigh University or Moravian College perform-
ing organizations or ensembles. Qualified students present
recitals.
Majors may earn credit for private instruction. Fees must
be borne by the students.
Courses Offered at Moravian College
1-2. Fundamentals (4)
Hearing the materials of music, notation, dictation, sight-
singing and musicianship. Prerequisite: consent of instructor
and chairman of Lehigh department. Five 50-minute periods.
101. Music before 1600 (3)
Music literature from its earliest evidence through the
Renaissance. Extensive score analysis and listening. Prerequi-
site: Music 1 and consent of instructor and chairman of
Lehigh department. Two 70-minute periods.
102. The Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries (3)
Music literature of the Baroque, Rococo and Classic periods.
Extensive score analysis and listening. Prerequisite: Music 1
and consent of instructor and chairman of Lehigh depart-
ment. Two 70-minute periods.
103. The Nineteenth Century (3)
Beethoven and his romantic heirs. Extensive score analysis
and listening. Prerequisite: Music 1 and consent of instructor
and chairman of Lehigh department. Two 70-minute periods.
121. Modal Counterpoint (2)
Theory integrated with Music 101. A study of Medieval
melody. Writing organum and motet-madrigal contrapuntal
style. Prerequisite: Music 2 and consent of instructor and
chairman of Lehigh department. Three 50-minute periods.
122. Traditional Contrapuntal-Harmonic Practice (2)
Theory integrated with Music 102. Writing and playing
chords and harmonic progressions. Dominant-tonic relation-
ship and its extension. Association of voices, contrapuntal
devices and textures. Prerequisite: Music 2 and consent of
instructor and chairman of Lehigh department. Three 50-
minute periods.
123. Chromatic Harmony (2)
Theory integrated with Music 103. The tonal harmonic per-
spective culminating in the music of Wagner. Prerequisite:
Music 2 and consent of instructor and chairman of Lehigh
department. Three 50-minute periods.
124. Contemporary Techniques (2)
Theory integrated with Music 104. Working with composi-
tional ideas that approach a common usage. Manipulating
sound formations expressively. Prerequisite: Music 2 and
consent of instructor and chairman of Lehigh department.
Three 50-minute periods.
141-142. Instrumental Techniques I (1)
Beginning class instruction in playing band and orchestral
instruments with emphasis on teaching and learning. Principal
instruments include flute, clarinet, trumpet, horn, trombone,
snare drum, violin, cello. Prerequisite: Music 1 or equivalent
and consent of instructor and chairman of Lehigh depart-
ment. Two 50-minute periods.
151-152. Instrumental Techniques II (1)
Continuation of Techniques I. Prerequisite: Music 1 or
equivalent and permission of instructor and chairman of
Lehigh department. Two 50-minute periods.
212-213. Conducting (2)
Technique and expression in conducting. Score study of
choral and instrumental literature. Rehearsal procedures.
Field trip observation. Prerequisite: Music 122 or 123. Two
70-minute periods.
223. Orchestration (2)
Integrated with Music 213. Instrumental characteristics, no-
menclature, and notation. Score analysis, scoring and arrang-
ing. Prerequisite: Music 122 or 123. Two 70-minute periods.
Music 219
Performance (Open to Majors < tni
The dcpai tmcnl otters private instruction in piano, voice,
organ, harpsi< hord, re mule r, , oni posit ion. brass, string,
woodwind and percussion instruments. These courses may be
elected by students who first s.itisty the department that
they .ire prepared to undertake the study or writing ot music
literature of artistic worth. One eredit hour is given for each
semester.
In each performing area instruction entails comprehensive
repertory, necessary technical study, sight reading, and musi-
cality. Weekly lessons and practice are scheduled, and atten
dance at stated performance classes, rentals, and concerts is
required. The department may require a student to enroll in
one or more courses which would strengthen and comple-
... nt liis proficiency.
Each term of private instruction carries one credit hour.
When registering, the student lists the course in Performance
as follows: Music: P-name ot instrument, and 1, 2, 3, etc. to
indicate number of terms of study on the instrument. Exam-
ple: "Music: P-Clarinet, 4" (fourth term of private study of
clarinet).
Fees for private instruction must be borne by the student.
Courses Offered at Lehigh
1-4. Instrumental Music (1)
Study and performance of instrumental music. Participation
in the appropriate ensemble, as determined by the depart-
ment of music, is an integral part of the course. Students
enrolling for their first semester register for Mus. 1; for their
second, Mus. 2, etc. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of
department.
5-8. Choral Music (1)
Study and performance of choral music. Participation in the
appropriate vocal ensemble, as determined by the department
of music, is an integral part of the course. Students enrolling
for their first semester register for Mus. 5; for their second,
Mus. 6, etc. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of department.
9. Instrumental Music (0)
Study and performance of instrumental music. Participation
in the appropriate ensemble, as determined by the depart-
ment of music, is an integral part of the course. May be re-
peated. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of department.
10. Choral Music (0)
Study and performance of choral music. Participation in the
appropriate ensemble, as determined by the department of
music, is an integral part of the course. May be repeated.
Prerequisite: consent of chairman of department.
20. Introduction to Musical Literature (3)
An approach to musical style through the study of works by
representative composers from 1600 to the present.
III. Sacred Choral Music (3)
The In"' tional aspects o( choral music and its relationship to
ill. , I mrch, beginning with Gregorian Chant. Compositions of
the Renaissance and Baroque masters are studied, with
special attention given to the works ot l',a. h. A survey is
made of the outstanding sacred choral works of the IHth,
I'lth. and 20th centuries, observing the shift in emphasis
from the church to the concert hall. Prerequisite: consent of
chairman of department.
142. Chamber Music (3)
A survey of works for smaller instrumental ensembles from
the forerunners of Haydn to Stravinsky. Prerequisite: consent
of chairman of department.
143. Keyboard Music (3)
Study of keyboard music with particular reference to the
styles of Scarlatti, Bach, Mozart, Beethoven, Chopin, and
Bartok; demonstration of performance techniques on the
various instruments; description of the mechanics of key-
board instruments, such as the organ, harpsichord, and piano.
Prerequisite: consent of chairman of department.
144. Aesthetics and Criticism of Music (3)
An analytical approach to writings of Hanslick, Nietzsche,
Stravinsky, Thomson, Langer, and others with particular
attention to the questions of meaning, intent, and expressive
values in music. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of depart-
ment.
145. The Viennese Classic Period (3)
Exercises in musical composition in the manner of eighteenth
century common practice; analysis of musical examples.
Knowledge of conventional musical notation required. Prere-
quisite: consent of chairman of department.
146. Viennese Classical Period (3)
Intensive study of works of various media of Haydn, Mozart
and Beethoven, with emphasis on form and style. Prerequi-
site: consent of chairman of department.
251. Special Topics (1-3)
Study of musical topics or work in musical composition not
covered in regular courses, or continuation of study of topics
or of projects in composition begun in regular courses. May
be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of
department.
The Lehigh University Band
Band may be elected by suitably qualified undergraduates.
The band will consist of a concert, varsity, and marching
band and will perform music, as specified by the director, for
concerts, convocations, and athletic events.
Except during the fall season, rehearsals will be held twice
weekly and, in addition, provision may be made for required
section rehearsals.
220 Music
Band uniforms and certain musical instruments are fur-
nished by the University. A deposit of $25 is required from
each member of the band for the uniform issued him. Mem
bers of the Concert Band will purchase their own blazers,
which are worn for certain performances.
Students serving in the band receive the following awards:
a sweater for two years of satisfactory service; for three
years, $20 in cash; and four years, an additional $20 in cash.
Ttie Lehigh University Glee Club
Glee Club may be elected by suitable qualified under-
graduates.
Traditionally, the Glee Club has been a men's chorus. In
addition to performing its own repertoire, it collaborates
with choruses of women's colleges in performing major works
with orchestra, on the campus and away.
The Glee Club invites qualified women to participate in
its activities and to contribute to the development of new
choral programs on the campus.
Natural Science
J. Donald Ryan, Ph.D., Chairman of Geological Sciences and
director of Natural Science program
This major provides students with a broad background in the
fundamentals of mathematics and science and the opportuni-
ty to concentrate to a reasonable degree in one area of
science. The program is designed especially for (1 ) those stu-
dents who desire preparation for graduate work or careers in
certain of the derivative or interdisciplinary sciences or re-
lated professional fields (oceanography, astronomy, psycho-
physiology, geophysics, information science, medicine or
dentistry, conservation, etc.), and (2) those students who
plan to teach in secondary schools or community colleges,
and (3) those students without fixed career objectives who
desire undergraduate training in science.
Students who register tor the program are required to
select an area of concentration (or option) which must be
approved by the dean of the College of Arts and Science and
Professor J. Donald Ryan, department of geological sciences,
director of the program. The option may be chosen in
chemistry, biology, geology, psychology, or in an approved
interdisciplinary area (geophysics, marine science, bio-
chemistry, information science, etc.). Courses included in the
option will be worked out individually for the student by his
major advisor.
A special program leading to a B.A. in Natural Science
and an M.S. in Materials is available for interested students.
See Five-Year Programs.
Qualified students may be given permission at the end of
the junior year to enter a program whereby they are able to
begin work toward a graduate degree (M.A., M.S., or M.Ed.)
during the senior year. Students enrolled in this program
often will be able to complete all requirements for the
master's degree with only one year of study beyond the bac-
calaureate.
Required Preliminary Courses
Math 1, 22, 23 Analytical Geometry and Calculus (12)
Phys 11, 12 Introductory Physics I & Lab (5)
Phys 21, 22 Introductory Physics II & Lab (5)
Chem 21, 22 Introductory Chemical Principles & Lab (5)
Geol 1 Principles of Geology
or
Astron 1 The Solar System (3)
Biol 21,22 Principles of Biology
or
Psych 3 Psychology as a Natural Science (3)
Natural Science 221
mi< Chemistry
Chcm 91, 190 Physical Chcmistrj 6 10
Math
Opi
ind courses included in option taken
with the approval ,>t majoi advisi
dcnl registered for this major normally isex| ;
is option ">> later than the second semester ol his
sophomore year.
Philosophy
Division ol Philosophy
Professors
Thomas Morris Hayncs, Ph.D.
As-..., iate Professors
Robert Featherstonc Barnes, Ph.D.
John Ralph Lindgren, Ph.D., Head, Division of Philosophy
Norman Paul Melchert, Ph.D.
Assist. mi Professors
Nicholas Anthony LaPara, Ph.D.
Students considering a philosophy major need answers to two
main questions: What is the field of philosophy like? And
what career possibilities are there for someone who majors in
philosophy? This description tries to give brief answers to
these questions.
Philosophically inclined thinkers have always asked funda-
mental questions about the intellectual, moral, religious,
social, and political aspects of human life. They have tried to
subject these issues to rigorous analysis and provide
thoughtful answers relevant to their time. The major current
contexts for philosophical inquiry are the dysfunction of
social and political institutions, the impact of technology,
and the challenge of the scientific world view. These lead to
such questions as: What is the relation of the individual to
the state and its laws? What human life styles and institutions
are conceptually viable in a technological society? What are
the implications of the scientific world picture for our con-
cepts of religion, freedom, and creativity? The analysis of the
component issues in these and many more problems, the
unearthing of presuppositions, the proposal of answers, and
the critique of those proposals are the actual elements of
philosophical investigation.
A major in philosophy is excellent preparation for a vari-
ety of careers either immediately after graduation or after
further study beyond the bachelor's degree. Careers requiring
further study for which philosophy is an especially suitable
preparation include: academic philosophy; law; some types
of government service, e.g., urban planning; certain careers in
business, e.g., management consulting, personnel and indus-
trial relations; the ministry; academic careers in areas other
than philosophy, e.g., intellectual history, religious studies,
social and political theory, and information systems; and
primary and secondary education. Students not considering
such fields will find a wide range of other careers open to
them by majoring in philosophy or including philosophy in
222 Philosophy
an interdisciplinary or double major. Capable philosophy
students who choose their electives wisely find that the
analytical, logical, and discursive skills provided by philo-
sophical training enable them to pursue successfully careers
after graduation in such fields as communications, publishing,
insurance, marketing, merchandising, social services, advertis-
ing, transportation, and utilities.
The curriculum tor the philosophy major consists of a
basic framework of required courses and approved electives.
The required courses provide each student with a direct ac-
quaintance with the works ot major thinkers who have
proved to be both influential in shaping our world and useful
as models for our own philosophical thinking. The approved
electives provide a context for focusing and further develop-
ing analytical and critical skills according to each student's
interests and goals. The range and flexibility of the major
curriculum combines with close contact with departmental
faculty to provide each student with the opportunities for
both tailoring programs to his or her own personal goals and
laying the foundations for continued learning throughout
life.
Required Courses
Phil 14 Foundations of Logic (3)
Phil 15 Ethics (3)
Plus three of the following:
Phil 231 Ancient Philosophy (3)
Phil 235 17th and 18th Century Philosophy (3)
Phil 237 19th Century Philosophy (3)
Phil 241 20th Century Continental Philosophy (3)
Phil 242 20th Century Anglo-American Philosophy
(3)
And fifteen hours to be selected with the counsel and ap-
proval of departmental advisor. At least nine of these fifteen
hours must be at the 300-level. Normally these will be
courses in the philosophy curriculum, although substitutions
of courses from other departments may be made with the
approval of the advisor.
Undergraduate Courses
11. Values, the Individual, and the State: An Introduction to
Philosophical Thinking (3)
An introductory course with two goals: (1) to explore some
important current issues such as the objectivity of values; the
moral status of the state; the obligation, if any, to obey the
law; the nature of violence; the metaphysics of punishment;
the nature of personhood; the connection of law and morali-
ty; and (2) to acquaint the student with the sort of disci-
plined reflection characteristic of philosophical thought. Not
available to juniors and seniors. Consent of instructor re-
quired.
14. Foundations of Logic (3)
The development of several symbolic languages as theoretical
models for explaining certain logical features of ordinary
English discourse, such as valid inference and necessary truth.
Some of the significant general properties of these symbolic
languages will be studied.
15. Ethics (3)
A critical study of classic and contemporary ethical theories
as analyses of moral life. Special attention is given to prob-
lems concerning the nature of moral responsibility and moral
judgment, the relation of man to his world, and the scientific
status of moral theory.
42. The Scientific Process (3)
A study of the ways in which scientific conceptions of nature
are generated. Study of the historical development of some
landmark achievements in science provides the background
for understanding the logic of this intellectual activity.
100. Philosophy ot Contemporary Civilization (3)
A philosophical analysis of the theoretical foundations of our
culture, providing a useful method for formulating policies in
private and public life. Special attention is given to the nature
and integration of ideals of family, industry, education, art,
science, religion, law, and politics.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
231. Ancient Philosophy (3)
A historical study of philosophy in ancient times from its
origin in Ionia through its flowering with Plato and Aristotle
to its decline with the Roman Stoics and Neo-Platonists.
Special attention will be given to the interaction of religious,
political and scientific thought with philosophy during the
period.
235. 17th and 18th Century Philosophy (3)
A historical study of the major philosophies from the
Renaissance to the end of the 18th century; the work of
Descartes, Spinoza, Leibniz, Locke, Berkeley, Hume,
Rousseau, and Kant. Special attention will be given to the
interaction of scientific and philosophical thought during the
period.
237. 19th Century Philosophy (3)
A historical study of the major philosophers of the last cen-
tury, including Mill, Hegel, Feuerbach, Marx, and Nietzsche.
Special emphasis will be given to such issues as social philoso-
phy, the philosophy of history and theory of knowledge.
241. 20th Century Continental Philosophy (3)
The main philosophical trends in Europe in this century:
phenomenology, existentialism, and Marxism. Readings from
the work of Husserl, Heidegger, Sartre, Camus, Buber, Lenin,
and others.
Philosophy 223
'i' 'Dili ( .-miii v Vnglo Vmcrican Philosophy I
The main philosophical trends in England and Vmcrii i in this
century i pragmatism, realism, anal) sis, logii al positivism,
ordinary language philosophy, and the move beyond tradi
tional empiricism. Readings from Pcircc, lames, Dewey,
Russell, Aycr, Whitehead .mil others,
•i I Kierkegaard .1
An introduction to the life .mil thought ol S4ren
Kierkegaard, the 19th century Danish forerunner of existen
tialism, with .1 brief look .it Ins impact on philosophy, thcolo
\ cholog) and literature.
2S1 Philosophy oi Religion (3)
A critical look at some of the iuiul.nncnt.il problems of reli-
gion: the nature of religious experience and belief, n ason and
revelation, tin- existence and nature of God, the problem ol
evil, and religious truth.
261. Introduction to Philosophy of Science (3)
An analysis of scientific concepts and the structure of scienti-
fic knowledge. ["opi( • investigated arc explanation, empirical
significance, theory and tact, observation, opcrationalism.
behaviorism; cause, disposition, and law; determinism, emer-
gence, and the human mind: science and value. Philosophy
majors will also study probability and induction.
271. Readings in Philosophy (1-3)
A course of readings designed primarily for undergraduate
philosophy majors. Prerequisite: consent of head of division.
272. Readings in Philosophy (1-3)
A course of readings designed primarily for undergraduate
philosophy majors. Prerequisite: consent of head of division.
301. Philosophy of the Social Sciences (3)
An analysis of the social sciences considered as programs for
achieving understanding and control of man and society.
Study is made of assumptions basic to, and problems incur-
red in. scientific methodology in general; the implications of
these for the various social sciences are stressed.
302. Value Theory (3)
Consideration of types of value and modes of value judg-
ment, evidence and authority in value judgments, techniques
of normative analysis, and the relation of value judgments to
science. Exemplification of these issues will be made in such
fields as psychology, economics, political science, morality,
law, art and religion.
310. Social Philosophy (3)
An analysis of the conditions for and consequences of the
existence of a society among men. The primary objective of
this course is to show what a society is and what it means to
be a member of a society. Attention is devoted to such issues
as obligation, authority, justice, freedom, equality, social
institutions, social choice, social change, and the problem of
sustaining the social dimension ol human existence, Readings
in contemporary social philosophy emphasized,
11 I. 1 ogii (3)
A stud) ol the syntactii and semantit methods ol modem
logil . ■ 1 1 • 1 the relationships between them. Sp. , 1.1I attention
will be given to the philosophical significance ol' tin- major
results in the field.
IIS. ( 'mi temporary I. thus (3)
An examination of recent literature on selected topics such as
moral relativism, the role of reason in morality, conscience
and the law. Prerequisite: Phil. I 5 or consent of the in-
structor.
Hi. Marxist Philosophers (3)
A historical study of philosophers in the Marxist tradition
including Marx, Engels, Kautsky, Plckhanov, Bernstein,
Lenin. Lukacs, Stalin and Mao. Primary sources emphasized.
350. Philosophy of Mind (3)
An examination of classical and current literature on the
concept of mind: mind and body, the other minds problem,
free will and determinism, minds and machines.
362. Issues in the Philosophy of Science (3)
Critical study and review of crucial philosophical problems
arising from research into the logical and epistemological
foundations of science, with attention directed at alternative
approaches to their resolution. Prerequisite: Phil. 261 or con-
sent of head of division.
364. Philosophy of Language (3)
Investigation of the problems centering around the question
of how language, a conventional and arbitrary structure of
symbols, can be a vehicle of meaning, thought, and concept.
Among these problems are those concerning the source of
meaning, reference and meaning, truth and fact, necessary
truth, truth by convention, and the nature of conventions
and linguistic rules.
388. Philosophy of Mathematics (3)
An investigation of the philosophical foundations of mathe-
matics, with special emphasis on the "classical" views of the
nature of mathematics— logicism, formalism, and intuition-
ism— and on their contempory counterparts.
391. Senior Seminar (3)
Examination of selected topics for philosophy majors and
other advanced students. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
224 Philosophy
Division of Information Science
Professors
Donald John Hillman, M.Litt., Chairman, Department of
Philosophy, Head, Division of Information Science, Director,
Center for Information Sciences
Herbert Rubensiein, Ph.D.
Associate Professors
Robert Featherstone Barnes, Ph.D.
Andrew James Kasarda, Ph.D.
John J. O'Connor, Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
James Sproat Green, Ph.D.
Louis W. Stern, Ph.D.
The rate of change in information technology demands that
the practitioner have the conceptual background necessary to
participate in and contribute to existing and developing sys-
tems. Within this framework, the M.S. and Ph.D. degree pro-
grams offered by the division of information science are de-
signed to fulfill several objectives. Each program provides a
broad base of both theory and application. Emphasis is on
fundamentals, rather than techniques. Basic to the program
of information science at Lehigh University is the concept
that research and instruction reinforce one another. Conse-
quently whenever possible, students are expected to partici-
pate in research and operations on a part-time basis.
The curriculum in information science is based on a B.S.
degree in an engineering or scientific discipline. Desirable
preparation consists of at least 12 hours of mathematics,
including 9 hours of differential and integral calculus and one
course beyond the calculus. In recognition of the flexibility
and cross-disciplinary nature of the subject, exception to this
requirement may be granted to those students with training
in a systematic science. A course in computer programming
or programming experience is desirable. Mathematics 105,
Computer Programming, is available, without graduate credit,
for those without computer background.
A candidate for the degree of master of science in inform-
ation science is required to complete at least twenty-four
hours of approved course work and to submit a thesis. Each
student's schedule will be chosen in consultation with the
head of the division. Three core areas are at the heart of the
M.S. program: information processing systems; information
retrieval theory; and analysis of information. Beyond this
basic core, student schedules are planned on an individual
basis to fit previous academic experience and career goals.
Two options are open for specialization, dependent on back-
ground, ability, and interests; systems, the integration of
machine and human capabilities and techniques; and logico-
mathematical, theoretical and systematic consideration of
information systems and processes.
Maximum advantage is taken of courses in other depart-
ments on the campus. Consequently a student's program will
be a combination of courses in information science, together
with offerings by the departments of electrical engineering,
industrial engineering, mathematics, psychology, social rela-
tions, and others.
The Ph.D. in Information Science covers such diverse
topics as mathematical logic, information systems, command
and control systems, computer programming, computer
languages, systems analysis, operations research, computa-
tional linguistics, probability theory, statistics and statistical
inference, switching theory, graph theory, algebra, topology,
automata theory, and artificial intelligence. The division of
information science has ongoing programs of research and
development in these fields, and offers opportunities for
well-qualified students to participate in sponsored research
projects.
In these research and development activities, the division
cooperates closely with the Center for Information Science
and the Mart Library of Science and Engineering. The focus
of development is the LEADERMART project, providing a
fully computerized, on-line, conversational information sys-
tem as a service of the Mart Library to Lehigh's interdiscipli-
nary research centers.
A candidate for the Ph.D. degree is required to submit a
general plan to the chairman of the department at the begin-
ning of the first year of doctoral studies. This plan must be
approved by the candidate's special committee at the time of
his admisssion to candidacy.
The doctoral program in information science will be based
on the candidate's approved plan of original and specialized
research. A program of courses and seminars at the 400-level
will also be formulated in the field in which the dissertation
is to be written.
110. (Math. 110) Algorithmic Reasoning (3)
The role of machines as physical models of abstract pro-
cesses. Computability, practical computability, and unsolva-
bility. Examples drawn from pure mathematics and will in-
clude recursive function theory and the real number system.
Prerequisite: Math. 23 or Math. 32.
201. Computers and Language (3)
The role of computers in such activities as natural language
processing, mechanical translation, speech recognition, and
augmentation of human reasoning.
202. Computers and Society (3)
A general nontechnical survey of the impact of computers on
modern society. Special attention will be given to the use of
large-scale data banks and retrieval systems, the problems of
privacy and file security, and the impact of automation on
everyday life.
203. Fields of Language Study (3)
A general survey of the major fields of language study: de-
scriptive and historical linguistics, psycholinguistics, sociolin-
guistics, computer applications, statistical linguistics, sty-
listics.
Philosophy: Division of Information Science 225
101 . I lest i iprivc I inguistics (3)
Techniques tor the desci iption of the phonology, morpholo
gy, and syntax ol natural languages. Special attention to
transformational generative grammar.
)02. (Psych. 320) Psycholinguistics (3)
Study ol the experimental and obsorv.itioii.il literature on the
production and comprehension of utterances and on (lie
acquisition o( language. Consideration ot performance of the
language user. Prerequisite: l.N. .101.
106. Statistical Linguistics (3)
A Stud) ol statistical properties of natural language usage.
Data sources, measurement techniques and applications will
be examined. Some competence in applied statistical analysis
will be assumed. Offered as required.
J17. (E.E. 317) Analytical Methods lor Information Sciences
(3)
For description see E.E. 317.
321. Introduction to Information Methodology (3)
History, theory, and structure ot indexing and classification
systems for the organization of information; comparative
analysis of selected retrieval schemes; experimental methods
for developing indexing systems and analyzing subject con-
tent.
350. Applications ol Non-Numerical Automata (3)
An introduction to basic automata and their application to
non-numerical processes. Particular emphasis is given to uses
involving artificial languages, simple natural languages, and
basic symbol strings. The course will include a study of ele-
mentary automata theory; string processing compilers; auto-
mated simple grammars; and information retrieval aspects.
Small computer programs will be written by the students,
incorporating the theoretical concepts. Prerequisite: Math.
105 or equivalent.
361. (Math. 361) Theory of Formal Grammars (3)
The study of the structure of formal languages as determined
by their formation-rule grammars. Comparison of grammars
of differing strengths (finite— state, context-free, context-
sensitive, etc.); considerations of applications in logic (Turing
machines, decidability) and in linguistic (phase-structure and
transformational grammars).
362. (Math. 362) Computer Languages (3)
For description see Math. 362.
373. Mathematical Methods in Information Science (3)
A general consideration of the role of mathematical tech-
niques in information science, and a study of specific mathe-
matical structures with applications in information retrieval
theory.
374. Information Retrieval Theory (3)
An introduction to the problems ol theory construction foi
computerized information storage and retrieval systems.
Special attention is given to the logical and iii.itheinatic.il
foundations ol automatic text-processing, file generation for
retrieval, and inquiry negotiation.
379. Introduction to Library Organization (3)
An introduction to libraries .is information organizations,
including their history, function, and structure. This course is
intended to supply a frame of reference for those students
intending to take l.S. .180, Library Automation; and to pro-
vide a background lor students interested in broad applica-
tions of information science to social and educational needs.
380. Library Automation (3)
A study of methods and procedures in the application of
automated equipment in libraries. Special attention is given
to the augmentation of acquisition, cataloguing, circulations
and reference functions. Prerequisite; l.S. 379 or consent of
instructor.
390. Special Topics (1-3)
An opportunity for advanced work through supervised read-
ing and research. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Offered
as required. May be repeated for credit.
402. (Psych. 448) Seminar in Psycholinguistics (3)
Selected topics in psycholinguistics examined in depth and in
detail. Prerequisite: l.S. 301.
418. Special Topics In Linguistics (3)
Selected topics in linguistics not covered in other courses.
(Offered as required.)
422. Analysis of Information Systems (3)
The study of the organization of information systems with
respect to design criteria, information acquisition and entry,
information processing, classification and storage, retrieval
and dissemination, feedback control and evaluation; opera-
tional requirements such as hardware, software and person-
nel, and system economics.
431. Subject Document Retrieval (3)
Technique and systems for retrieval of documents in response
to subject requests. Fundamental ideas, achievements to date,
problems and possibilities. Topics covered include request
negotiation techniques, document indexing (coordinate, rela-
tional, weighted), "Boolean" and weighted term searching
methods, and thesauri and classifications as aids to negotia-
tion, indexing, and searching.
226 Philosophy : Division of Information Science
432. ALP-Aided Document Retrieval (3)
Subject document retrieval aided by automatic language pro-
cessing (ALP). Fundamental ideas, achievements to date,
problems and possibilities. Topics covered include computer
and man-machine performance of the following functions:
subject indexing and classification of documents, abstracting,
construction of thesauri and classification of schedules, re-
trieval by searching natural language text of unindexed docu-
ments, and on-line negotiation of retrieval requests. Prerequi-
site: I.S. 431 or equivalent.
480. Sentence Syntax (3)
Survey ot various linguistic approaches to the analysis of
sentences; co-occurrence, immediate constituents, phrase
structure, kernels, transformations, and discourse considera-
tions. Relevance of the material to language data processing
will be considered. Prerequisite: I.S. 301.
481. Thesis (3)
482. Thesis (3)
433. (E.E. 403) Design of Executive Systems (3)
For description see E.E. 403.
434. Document Retrieval Evaluation (3)
Evaluation of systems and techniques for subject document
retrieval. Fundamental ideas, achievements to date, problems
and possibilities. Topics covered include evaluation of opera-
tion systems, experimental testing of retrieval techniques,
uses of evaluation results, relation of "information needs and
uses" studies, various evaluation measures, and the notion of
"relevance." Prerequisite: I.S. 431 or equivalent.
492. Special Topics in Information Science (3)
Selected topics in the information sciences not covered in
other courses. Offered as required.
442. Evaluation Models (3)
An investigation of the activities necessary to the develop-
ment of formal structures for evaluating complex systems.
Particular treatment is directed toward the evaluation of large
information retrieval systems. Topics covered include estab-
lishment of system objectives, recognition and isolation of
variables, economic aspects, empirical testing.
450. Information Network Theory (3)
Applications of graph theory to the modeling, simulation,
and design of information networks. Prerequisite: I.S. 374.
Offered as required.
462. Retrieval Languages (3)
The study of formal indexing and retrieval languages, with
special attention to the interaction between syntactic struc-
ture and retrieval properties. Examples will be drawn from
actual and experimental systems to show the effect of syntac-
tic structure upon system capabilities.
464. Mathematical Models in Linguistics (3)
Discussion of the goal and function of models in linguistics
and of various criteria of adequacy for such models. Develop-
ment and comparison of relational, algebraic, categorical, and
other mathematical models for description of linguistic struc-
ture. Prerequisite: I.S. 361.
475. Retrieval Structures (3)
Advanced study of the application of mathematics and logic
to the problems of retrieval system design and implementa-
tion, with particular emphasis on large-scale computer-based
information networks. Prerequisite: I.S. 374 or consent of
chairman of department.
Philosophy: Division of Information Science 227
Physics
Professors
I. lines Alan McLennan, Ph.D.. ( '.hairman
Raymond lav Emrich, Ph.D.
Robert Thomas Folk, Ph.D.
Wvm.in Beall Fowler, Ph.D.
Wesley Richard Smith, Ph.D.
Wilbur Devilla Bernhardt Spatz. Ph.D.
Wesley Johnson V.inSciver. Ph.D.
Associate Professors
Brent W. Benson, Ph.D.
Garold J. Borse, Ph.D.
Frank J. Feigl, Ph.D.
Alvin S. Kanofsky, Ph.D.
Shelden H. Radin. Ph.D.
Russell A. Shaffer, Ph.D.
Donald B. Wheeler, Jr., Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
Ernest E. Bergmann, Ph.D.
Colin E. Jones. Ph.D.
Yong Wook Kim, Ph.D.
Students in the College of Engineering or the College of Arts
and Science may major in physics leading to the B.S. or B.A.
degree respectively. With the exception of the college require-
ments, for example the language requirement of the College
of Arts and Science, the curricula are similar.
Major in College of Arts and Science
Required Preliminary Courses
Chem 21, 22 Principles of Chemistry (8)
Math 21, 22, 23 Analytical Geometry and Calculus (12)
Phys 11,12 Introductory Physics I & Lab (5)
Phys 21, 22 Introductory Physics II & Lab (5)
Required Major Courses
Phys 31 Introduction to Quantum Mechanics (3)
Phys 90 Electrical Phenomena (1)
Phys 171 Proseminar (1)
Phys 191 Laboratory Techniques (2)
Phys 192 Advanced Laboratory (2)
Phys 212 Electricity and Magnetism I (3)
Phys 213 Electricity and Magnetism II (3)
Phys 215 Particles and Fields I (3)
Phys 216 Particles and Fields II (3)
Phys 254 I Iptii I il>..t.n..ry (2)
Phys 340 Heat, Thermodynamics and Pyromctry (3)
Phys 362 Atomic and Molecular Structure (3)
Math 219, 220 Principles of Analysis (6)
Math 205 Linear Methods (3)
Approved Electives (6)
Major in College of Engineering
Freshman Year (See page 45)
Sophomore War, First Semester ( 15 credit hours)
Phys 21,22 Introductory Physics II & Lab (5)
Math 23 Analytical Geometry and Calculus III (4)
G.S. Requirement (3)
Elective (3)
Sophomore Year, Second Semester (15-1 7 credit hours)
Phys 31 Introduction to Quantum Mechanics (3)
Phys 90 Electrical Phenomena (1)
Math 205 Linear Methods (3)
Eco 1 Economics (4)
Electives (4-6)
Junior Year, First Semester (14-17 credit hours)
Phys 191 Laboratory Techniques (2)
Phys 212 Electricity and Magnetism I (3)
Phys 215 Particles and Fields I (3)
Math 322 Methods of Applied Analysis I (3)
Electives (3-6)
Junior Year, Second Semester (17 credit hours)
Phys 254 Optics Laboratory (2)
Phys 213 Electricity and Magnetism II (3)
Phys 216 Particles and Fields II (3)
G.S. Requirement (3)
Electives (6)
Senior Year, First Semester (14-17 credit hours)
Phys 340 Heat, Thermodynamics and Pyrometry (3)
Phys 362 Atomic and Molecular Structure (3)
G.S. Requirement (3)
Electives (5-8)
Senior Year, Second Semester (15-18 credit hours)
Phys 171 Proseminar (1)
G.S. Requirement (3)
Electives (11-14)
Notes: The lower number of credit hours represents the load
required to meet the graduation requirement; the higher re-
presents the normal semester load.
The electives must include at least 14 hours of approved
technical electives, including two of Physics 363, 364, 365,
366, 367, and 369.
228 Physics
The required courses in the physics curricula include the
minimum mathematical and subject matter requirements for
entrance into graduate schools.* The intent of the program is
to prepare students for careers in scientific work, either in
physics or in some other science. Usually this involves con-
tinued study at the post-graduate level; however, many stu-
dents who have terminated their formal education with the
B.A. or B.S. in physics have found that it has been an excel-
lent preparation for non-technical activities, as well as for
science or innovative engineering.
The first two years of both programs are similar to most
of the engineering curricula. The exception is Physics 31,
which provides the student with an introduction to quantum
mechanics before he begins the intensive intermediate level
sequences. However, Physics 31 is not a prerequisite for the
junior level course. A strong student in one of the engineering
or science curricula could therefore transfer into physics as
late as the beginning of the junior year with relatively little
difficulty.
A liberal number of electives provides flexibility in allow-
ing the curriculum to be adapted to the needs and interests of
the individual student. Those whose interests lie in the
theoretical or analytical aspects, or who are preparing for
graduate study in physics, elect additional courses in mathe-
matics and physics. Those who are interested in some inter-
disciplinary field will choose some of their electives from
other departments. To name a few possibilities, we mention:
biophysics, chemical physics, geophysics, materials science,
and physical oceanography. Students interested in preparing
for scientific work in these areas would probably elect some
or all of the courses suggested below:
Biophysics:
Biol 21 Principles of Biology (3)
Biol 28 Genetics (3)
Biol 35 Microbiology (3)
Biol 320 Cell Physiology (3)
Chem 51 Organic Chemistry (3)
Chem 90 or 194 Physical Chemistry (3)
Chem 371 Elements of Biochemistry (3)
Chemical Physics:
Chem 90
Chem 191
Chem 381
Phys 363
Phys 369
Physical Chemistry (3)
Physical Chemistry (3)
Radiation and Structure (3)
Physics of Solids (3)
Introduction to Quantum Mechanics (3)
Geophysics:
Geol 1
Geol 23
Geol 301
Geol 304
Phys 363
Principles of Geology (3)
Structural Geology (3)
Introduction to Geophysics (3)
Topics in Geophysics (3)
Physics of Solids (3)
Materials Science:
Met 91 Elements of Materials Science (3)
Met 218 Mechanical Behavior of Materials (3)
Met 315 Introduction to Physical Ceramics (3)
Met 316 Physical Properties of Materials (3)
Met 317 Imperfections in Crystals (3)
Phys 363 Physics of Solids (3)
Phys 369 Introduction to Quantum Mechanics (3)
Physical Oceanography:
Geol 363 Introduction to Oceanography (3)
Mech 323 Fluid Mechanics of the Ocean and Atmo-
sphere (3)
Chem 334 Chemical Oceanography (3)
Phys 365 Physics of Fluids (3)
Phys 366 Ocean Physics (3)
Undergraduate Courses
11. Introductory Physics I (4)
Kinematics, frames of reference, laws of motion in New-
tonian theory and in special relativity, conservation laws, as
applied to the mechanics of mass points; temperature, heat
and the laws of thermodynamics; kinetic theory of gases.
Two lectures and two recitations per week. Prerequisite:
Math. 21, 31 or 41, previously or concurrently.
12. Introductory Physics Laboratory I (1)
A laboratory course to be taken concurrently with Physics
11. Experiments in mechanics, heat, and D.C. electrical cir-
cuits. One three-hour laboratory period per week.
13. General Physics (3)
Introduction to electricity and magnetism, waves, optics, and
atomic physics, intended for students in the colleges of Arts
and Science and of Business and Economics. Prerequisites:
Phys. 11 and Math. 21, 31, or 41.
14. General Physics Laboratory (1)
A laboratory to accompany Physics 13. Prerequisites: Phys.
12; Phys. 13 preferably concurrently.
'Students are to be forewarned that admission to graduate
schools requires a minimum grade average. The level depends
on the particular graduate school, but a typical minimum is
approximately a "B" average. Also, many graduate schools
require a reading knowledge of a modern foreign language.
21. Introductory Physics II (4)
A continuation of Physics 1 1. Electrostatics and magneto-
statics; D.C. circuits; Maxwell's equations; waves; physical
and geometrical optics; introduction to modern physics. Two
lectures and two recitations per week. Prerequisites: Phys.
11, and Math. 23, 32, or 44 previously or concurrently.
Physics 229
22. Introductory Physics I aboratory II (1)
A laboratory course to be taken concurrently with Physics
21 . One three hour laboratory period per week. Prerequisite:
Physics 1 2.
31. Introduction to Quantum Mechanics (3)
Experimental basis and historical dcvclopmeni ol quantum
mechanics; the Schrodinger equation; one dimensional prob
lems; angular momentum and the hydrogen atom; many
electron systems; spectra; selected applications. Three lei
tures per week. Prerequisites; Phys. 21 . and Math. 2i>s. pre
viously or concurrently.
32. Modern Physics Laboratory (1)
Laboratory experiments dealing with quantum physics, and
illustrative of material covered in Physics 31. Prerequisite:
Phys. 21. One three-hour laboratory period per week.
90. Electrical Phenomena (1)
Laboratory studies of elementary electric and magnetic
effects. Elementary laboratory techniques. Prerequisite:
Plus. 21, 22 or 13. 14.
171. Physics Proscminar (1)
Discussion of current problems in physics. Intended for
seniors majoring in the field.
191. Laboratory Techniques (2)
Thermometric, calorimetric and vacuum techniques. Ad-
vanced electrical measurements. Prerequisite: Phys. 21, 22 or
13, 14.
216. Particles and Fields II (3)
Generalized coordinates; variational methods in theoretical
physii ■■; i In I agrangi.in and Haniiltonian; basi cpts of
the spci i.il theory ol relativity; survey ol the general theory
of relativity. Prerequisite: Phj s. 2 1 5.
252. Optics (3)
Wave theory <<i light, interference, diffraction, polarization.
Prerequisites: Math. 23 and Phys. 21 or 13.
254. Optus Laboratory (2)
I Iptical instruments and techniques. Examination of phenom-
ena, of measuring procedures, and of light sources and re-
cording devices. Prerequisite: Phys. 21 or 13.
266. Modem Physics (3)
General foundations of quantum theory, special chcory of
relativity, atomic theory of origin of spectra, wave mechan-
ics, atomic and nuclear structure, interaction of particles with
matter, radioactivity, nuclear structure. Intended for non-
physics majors. Prerequisites: Math. 205, and Phys. 21 or 13.
281. Basic Physics I (3)
A course designed especially for secondary school teachers in
the master teacher program. Presupposing a background of
two semesters of college mathematics through differential
and integral calculus and of two semesters of college physics,
the principles ot physics are presented with emphasis on their
fundamental nature rather than on their applications. Open
only to secondary school teachers and those planning to un-
dertake teaching of secondary school physics.
192. Advanced Physics Laboratory (1-2)
Laboratory experiments in modern physics designed to intro-
duce students to measuring techniques and phenomena of
current interest. Work is of a project nature, and the student
is placed largely on his own initiative. Intended for seniors
majoring in the field.
193. Advanced Physics Laboratory (1-2)
Continuation of Phys. 192. Intended for seniors majoring in
the field.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
212. Electricity and Magnetism I (3)
Electrostatics, magnetostatics, and electromagnetic induc-
tion. Prerequisites: Phys. 21 or 13; and Math. 205 previously
or concurrently.
213. Electricity and Magnetism II (3)
Maxwell's equations; electromagnetic waves with applications
to optics. Prerequisite: Phys. 212.
215. Particles and Fields I (3)
Aims and fundamental concepts of theoretical physics;
foundations of mechanics of mass points, systems of parti-
cles, and continuous media; waves; fields; conservation laws.
Prerequisites: Math. 205, Phys. 21, or Phys. 13 previously or
concurrently.
282. Basic Physics II (3)
Continuation of Phys. 281.
300. Apprentice Teaching in Physics
(1-3)
340. Heat, Thermodynamics and Pyrometry (3)
Basic principles of heat, thermodynamics and kinetic theory
of gases with emphasis on physical systems. Prerequisites:
Phys. 21 or 13 and Math. 23, 32 or 44.
362. Atomic and Molecular Structure (3)
Structure of atoms and molecules, especially as related to
their spectra. Prerequisite: Phys. 31 or Chem. 191.
363. Physics of Solids (3)
Introduction to the theory of solids with particular reference
to the physics of metals. Prerequisite: Phys. 362, or Met.
361, or consent of chairman of department.
364. Nuclear Physics (3)
Properties of stable and unstable nuclei and experimental
methods of measuring them; radioactive decay; detectors of
nuclear radiation; types of nuclear reaction and methods of
producing them; cosmic rays. Prerequisite: Phys. 369.
230 Physics
365. Physics of Fluids (3)
Basic concepts of classical fluid mechanics; continuum and
molecular approaches; shock waves; high temperature proper-
ties of reacting ideal gases; plasma dynamics. Prerequisites:
Phys. 213 and 340.
366. Ocean Physics (3)
Underwater sound and optics, thermodynamics of the
oceans, other topics in physical oceanography such as cur-
rents, tides, and waves. Prerequisites: Math. 205 and Phys. 21
or 13.
367. Introduction to Molecular Biophysics (3)
A development of the molecular basis of life in terms of
physical principles, including applications of selected physical
techniques to problems in molecular biology. Prerequisites:
Phys. 21 or 13.
369. Introduction to Quantum Mechanics (3)
Principles of quantum mechanics; applications to atoms and
molecules. Prerequisites: Phys. 31, 216, Math. 205.
372. Special Topics in Physics (1-3)
Special topics in physics not sufficiently covered in the
general courses. Lecture and recitations or conferences.
For Graduates
The department of physics has concentrated its research
activities within several fields of physics, with the conse-
quence that a number of projects are available in each area.
Current departmental research activities include the
following:
Solid State Physics (Experimental). Optical properties of
insulators, defects in insulators, electron paramagnetic reso-
nance, properties of thin films.
Solid State Physics (Theoretical). Energy band calculations in
insulators, excited states and lifetimes of defects, properties
of impurities in insulators.
Molecular Biophysics. Magnetic resonance studies of nucleic
acid derivatives.
Ocean Physics. Optical absorption and luminescence of or-
ganic and inorganic materials in sea water and ice.
Plasma Spectroscopy. Collisional and collisionless phenomena
of very dense plasmas.
Nuclear Theory. The few nucleon problem, nuclear structure
theory.
Physics of Fluids. Transition from laminar to turbulent flow
in boundary layers, microscopic fluctuations in a flow,
shock-induced reactions in gases, energy transfers, relaxation
times, lifetimes, and phase transitions at liquid-vapor inter-
faces.
Statistical Physics. Kinetic theory, transport in plasmas with
strong magnetic fields, statistical basis of hydrodynamics,
non-linear processes.
Elementary Particles (Experimental). Extensive air shower
studies and high-energy multiple particle production at the
AGS.
Elementary Particles (Theoretical). Properties of leptons, the
vector boson, methods for handling unrenormalized field
theories, electromagnetic interactions.
Laser Physics. Construction of gas lasers and studies of their
characteristics; use of gas lasers in determination of oscillator
strengths and atomic parameters; mode structure; holo-
graphy.
Candidates for advanced degrees normally will have com-
pleted, before beginning their graduate studies, the require-
ments for a baccalaureate degree with a major in physics,
including advanced mathematics beyond differential and
integral calculus. Students lacking the equivalent of this pre-
paration will make up deficiencies in addition to taking the
specified work for the degree sought.
Doctoral candidates may be required by their thesis com-
mittee to demonstrate a reading knowledge of one langu-
age, usually chosen from French, German or Russian. Some
graduate work in mathematics is usually required; and certain
advanced courses in other fields, notably mechanics, metal-
lurgy, and materials science, electrical engineering, and
chemistry, may be included in a graduate program. Further
details regarding the special requirements for degrees in
physics may be obtained on application to the chairman of
the department. At least eight semester hours of general col-
lege physics using calculus are required for admission to all
200- and 300-level courses. Additional prerequisites for indi-
vidual courses are noted in the course descriptions. Admis-
sion to 400 level generally is predicated on satisfactory com-
pletion of corresponding courses in the 200 and 300 groups
or their equivalent.
Special departmental facilities for teaching and research
include six shock tubes with advanced instrumentation;
optical and cryogenic equipment for solid state studies; mag-
netic resonance equipment. Facilities of the Materials Re-
search Center are available, including crystal preparation
equipment, electron microscope facilities, and light scattering
equipment. Extensive use is made for both teaching and re-
search of the Computing Center, which includes a CDC 6400
computer.
Graduate Courses
420. Theoretical Physics (3)
This and the three courses, Phys. 421, 422, and 423, cover the
classical theory of particles and fields. Physics 420 includes
the variational methods of classical methanics, methods of
Hamilton and Lagrange, canonical transformations,
Hamilton-Jacobi theory.
421. Theoretical Physics (3)
Theory of elasticity; fluid dynamics; tensor analysis; electro-
statics and magnetostatics. Prerequisite: Phys. 420.
Physics 231
i ! ' Vdvanccd rhcoretical Physics I)
tromagnctic radiation; dynamics ol i harged parti( Ics;
multipolc fields; special thcorj ol rclativit) and covarianl
formulation of electrodynamics. Prerequisite; Pliys. 421.
423. Advanced Theoretical Physic I
id) namics in anisotropic media; physic al optic s; thcofy
of diffraction and application to holography; applications of
clectrod) namics m various fields of physics. Prerequisite;
Phys. I
424. Quantum Mechanics (3)
General principles ol quantum theor) ; approximation
methods; spectra; symmetry laws; theory ol scattering. Prere
quisite: Pins. )69 oi equivalent.
425. Quantum Mechanics (3)
A continuation of Phys. 424. Rclativistic quantum tlicory of
the electron; theory of radiation.
465. Nuclcai and Elementary Particle Physics (3)
Nuclei i structure and phenomena; interactions among cle
men tar) partic les o i >> I methods ol studying them.
467. Nuclcai Theory (3)
Theory ol low energy nuclear phenomena within the frame
work ol non relativistic quantum mechanics.
471. (Mcch. 411) Continuum Mechanics (1-3)
An introduction will he given to the non-linear continuum
theories of the mechanics of solids and fluids, This will in-
clude a discussion of the mechanical and thci modynamic
bases of the subject, as well as the use of invariancc principles
in formulating constitutive equations. Applications of the
nonlinear theories to specific problems will be given.
472. Special Topics in Physics (1-3)
Selected topics not sufficiently covered in the more general
courses. May be repeated for credit.
42S. Methods of Mathematical Physics (3)
The equations ot theoretical physics and the methods ot their
solution.
429. Methods of Mathematical Physics (3)
Continuation of Phys. 428.
431. Theory of Solids (3)
Advanced topics in the theory of the electronic structure of
solids. Many-electron theory. Theory of transport phenom-
ena. Magnetic properties, optical properties. Superconductivi-
ty. Point imperfections. Desirable preparation: Phys. 363 and
Phys. 424.
474. Seminar in Modern Physics (3)
Discussion of important advances in experimental physics.
475. Seminar in Modern Physics (3)
Discussion of important advances in theoretical physics.
491. Research (3)
Research problems in experimental or theoretical physics.
492. Research (3)
Continuation of Phys. 491. May be repeated for credit.
434. Solids and Radiation (3)
Phenomena in solids resulting from interaction with electro-
magnetic radiation or charged particles. Current theories of
energy adsorption, transport, and emission. Prerequisite:
Phys. 363 or equivalent.
442. Statistical Mechanics (3)
General principles of statistical mechanics with application to
thermodynamics and the equilibrium properties of matter.
Prerequisites: Phys. 340 and 369.
443. Statistical Mechanics (3)
A continuation of Phys. 442. Applications of kinetic theory
and statistical mechanics to non-equilibrium processes; non-
equilibrium thermodynamics. Prerequisite: Phys. 442.
462. Theories of Elementary Particle Interactions (3)
Relativistic quantum theory with applications to the strong,
electromagnetic and weak interactions of elementary parti-
cles. Prerequisite: Physics 425.
232 Physics
Psychology
Professors
Arthur L. Brody, Ph.D., Chairman
Joseph M. Brozek, Ph.D.
Associate Professors
Martin L. Richter, Ph.D.
George K. Shortess, Ph.D.
Sidney I. Stecher, Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
Edwin J. Kay, Ph.D.
Roger C. Loeb, Ph.D.
Donald A. Mankin, Ph.D.
William Newman, Ph.D.
Adjunct Professors
Herbert Rubenstein, Ph.D.
Mervin P. Smolinsky, Ph.D.
There are two major programs available in psychology. The
B.A. program is in the liberal arts tradition with the student
free to include courses from a wide variety of academic disci-
plines and with maximum freedom of course selection in
psychology. With a judicious selection of courses, students
can prepare themselves for careers in areas for which psycho-
logy is a desirable and relevant major, e.g., law, social work,
nursing, or special education.
The B.S. program stresses preparation in mathematics and
science with an emphasis on experimental psychology. This
program is intended for the student who plans on graduate
study in psychology (either experimental or clinical) or medi-
cine or dentistry. Students in the B.A. program who decide
to pursue graduate study are encouraged to use the B.S. pro-
gram as a guide in the selection of courses.
The Bachelor of Arts Major
Required Major Courses
Psychology: 24 semester hours with at least 12 semester
hours in courses numbered 100 or higher.
Additional Required Courses
College of Arts and Science distribution requirements.
Elective courses to bring semester hour total to 120.
The Bachelor of Science Major
Required Major Courses
Psych 3 Psychology as a Natural Science (3)
Psych 4 Psychology as a Social Science (3)
Psych 9 Statistical Analysis (3)
Psych 11 General Experimental Psychology (4)
Psych 51 Elementary Quantitative Psychology (3)
Psych 311 History of Modern Psychology (3)
Psych 371, 372 Learning and Laboratory (4)
Psych 373, 374 Sensory Processes and Laboratory (4)
Psych 375, 376 Physiological psychology and Laboratory (4)
Additional Required Courses
Engl 1 Composition and Literature (3)
Engl 2, 10, 14, or 16 Composition and Literature (3)
Math 21, 22, 23 Analytic Geometry and Calculus (12)
or
Math 31, 32 Calculus (8)
or
Math 41 , 42, 43, 44 BMSS Calculus, Probability, Linear
Algebra, Calculus (12)
Biol 21, 22 Principles of Biology and Laboratory (4)
Chem 21, 22 Introductory Chemical Principles and
Laboratory (5)
Phys 11, 12 Introductory Physics I and Laboratory (5)
Phil selection of a philosophy of science course (3)
Plus 12 semester hours selected from the following:
Math 105 Computer Programming (3)
Math 205 Linear Methods (3)
Math 219 Principles of Analysis I (3)
Math 220 Principles of Analysis II (3)
Math 231 Statistical Inference (3)
Math 309 Theory of Probability (3)
Math 310 Probability and its Applications (3)
Math 334 Mathematical Statistics (3)
Math 362 Computer Languages (3)
Biol 28 Genetics (3)
Biol 306 Ecology (3)
Biol (Geol) 317 Evolution (3)
Biol 320 Physiology (3)
Biol 324 Animal Behavior (3)
Chem 51 Organic Chemistry (3)
Chem 52 Organic Chemistry (3)
Chem (Biol) 371 Elements of Biochemistry (3)
Chem (Biol) 372 Advanced Biochemistry (3)
Phys 21, 22 Introductory Physics II and Laboratory (5)
IS 201 Computers and Language (3)
IS 202 Computers and Society (3)
IS 302 (Psych 320) Psycholinguistics (3)
IS 361 Theory of Formal Grammars (3)
or other courses with the approval of the chairman of the
department. (It is recommended that these 12 semester hours
Psychology 233
m cntraccd in an area, c.^., mathematics, probability and
statistics, biology, biochemistry, compute!
Plus 42 semester hours ol clectives. 16 si mi ;tci hours if
Math, 31 and 32 .ire taken.)
( kidergraduate ( ourses
v Psychology as .i N.mir.il Science (3)
Introduction to psychology .is .i science ol behavior. Em
phasis on principles ol sensation, perception, maturation,
learning, motivation, emotion .md physiological bases ol be
havior.
I. Psychology as a Social Science (3)
Introduction to psychology as a science of behavior. Em-
phasis on principles of human development, intelligence,
abilities, perception, motivation and learning, personality
theory and social psychology.
9. Statistical Analysis (3)
An integrated presentation of the basic methods of evaluating
data in psychological research.
II. General Experimental Psychology (4)
A survey of basic data and research methods in experimental
psychology with emphasis on the areas of learning and psy-
chophysics: laboratory exercises and an independent research
project. Prerequisite: Psych. 3 or 4.
21. (S.R. 21) Social Psychology (3)
For description, see S.R. 21 .
51. Elementary Quantitative Psychology (3)
Quantitative analysis of behavior, including perception,
choice and preference, conditioning, memory, and problem-
solving.
101. Psychological Tests and Measures (3)
Psychological tests of intelligence and personality with princi-
ples of measurement and test construction emphasized.
107. Developmental Psychology (3)
Theories and research dealing with the development of the
human organism. The course of development will be traced
from fetus to adolescent. Prerequisite: Psych. 3 or 4.
121. Encountering Self and Others (3)
An experientially-oriented course to facilitate personal
growth and develop a fuller awareness of personal function-
ing and interpersonal perception and communication. Prere-
quisite: consent of instructor.
160. Independent Study (1-3)
Readings on topics selected in consultation with a staff mem-
ber. Prerequisites: Psych. 3 or 4 and consent of chairman of
department. May be repeated for credit.
I (. I . Independent Research i I
Rcscan h in areas selected in consultation with a staff me in
her. Prerequisites: Psy< h. * or I, II. and i onsent of chairman
of department. May be repeated foi credit.
162. Psychological Field Work (3)
Work-study practice including supervised experience in one
oi several local agencies. Development ol familiarity with the
operations of the agem v and working with individual
patients or students. Prerequisites: Psych. 3 or 4 and consent
of instructor. May be repeated lor credit.
/ oi \dvanced Undergraduates and Graduates
201. Industrial Psychology (3)
The application of psychological concepts and methods to
business and industry. Includes personnel selection, place-
ment and training: studies of work environment, motivation
and morale; consumer research and advertising. Prerequisite:
Psych. 3 or 4.
251. Psychological Perspectives in Technological Society (3)
The relationship between technology and the problems of
society with emphasis on the social and psychological envi-
ronment. Includes problems of work and leisure, values in
post-industrial society, futuristics, and implications of tech-
nological decisions. Prerequisite: Psych. 3 or 4.
300. Apprentice Teaching in Psychology — — (1-3)
301. Psychological Principles in Systems Design (3)
Experimental psychology as applied to the optimal design of
machines, tasks and environments, including a survey of
human capacities, limitations and requirements in systems,
traditional areas of engineering psychology in man-machine
systems and considerations of man in social and environmen-
tal systems. Prerequisite: Psych. 3 or 4.
303. Mathematical Models in Psychology (3)
The application of mathematics in psychology, including
models for psychophysics, learning acquisition curves, dis-
crimination learning, concept formation and probability
learning. Prerequisite: Psych. 11.
306. Psychopathology (3)
Theories of abnormal behavior and its development. Systema-
tic analysis of psychopathological syndromes and their re-
mediation. Lectures supplemented by observations at the
Allentown State Hospital. Prerequisites: Psych. 3 or 4, and 6
additional credit hours of psychology.
307. Perception-Cognition (3)
Processes by which sensory inputs are transformed, reduced,
elaborated, stored, recovered and used. Contemporary
theories of perception and memory, psycholinguistics, com-
puter simulation of cognitive processes, information process-
ing models, and concept learning and formation. Prerequisite:
Psych. 3 or 4.
234 Psychology
311. History of Modern Psychology (3)
History of psychology, with emphasis on the emergence and
growth of scientific study of behavior. Includes the readings
of primary sources and the autobiographies of the major con-
tributors to the field. Prerequisite: Psych. 3 or4.
320. (I.S. 302) Psycholinguistics (3)
For course description, see I.S. 302.
331. Humanistic Psychology (3)
The literature of and metaphors underlying the humanistic
point of view in psychology. These "models of man" will be
contrasted with models underlying other modes of psycho-
logical inquiry. Prerequisite: Psych. 3 or 4.
361. Personality (3)
Survey of basic theoretical and research techniques used to
conceptualize and assess personality. Includes analytic and
learning theory and such methods as interviewing, rating
scales, intelligence tests and projective tests. Prerequisites:
Psych. 3 or 4, and 3 additional credit hours in psychology.
371. Learning (3)
Principles of learning with emphasis on reinforcement, dis-
crimination, motivation, verbal learning and memory. Critical
evaluation of classical and contemporary theories of learning.
Prerequisite: Psych. 3 or 4.
372. Learning Laboratory (1)
Experimentation on the learning process utilizing animal and
human subjects. Prerequisites: Psych. 11; Psych. 371, pre-
viously or concurrently.
373. Sensory Processes (3)
Receptor processes of vision, audition, touch, taste and smell
are considered with particular emphasis on problems of sen-
sory intensity, sensory discrimination functions and percep-
tual processes. Quantitative methods are stressed.
Prerequisite: Psych. 3 or 4.
374. Sensory Processes Laboratory (1)
Laboratory exercises applying quantitative methods to the
study of sensory processes. Prerequisites: Psych. 11; Psych.
373, previously or concurrently.
375. Physiological Psychology (3)
The physiological basis of behavior, both human and animal.
Particular emphasis is placed on the neural mechanisms in-
volved. Prerequisites: Psych. 3 or 4; 8 semester hours of
physics, chemistry or biology.
376. Physiological Psychology Laboratory (1)
A survey of techniques in physiological psychology. Prerequi-
site: Psych. 375 previously or concurrently.
381. Psychological Testing (3)
Psychological tests of intelligence, achievement, and person-
ality with emphasis on applications in educational situations.
Principles of measurement and test construction stressed.
Prerequisite: Psych. 3 or 4, or consent of chairman of de-
partment. Open only to graduate students in the School of
Education.
382. Child Psychology (3)
A systematic analysis of the critical periods of development
from infancy through adolescence. Alternate theories and
recent research will be stressed. Prerequisite: Psych. 3 or 4, or
consent of chairman of department. Open only to graduate
students in the School of Education.
383. Personality (3)
Review and analysis of psychological concepts and data rele-
vant to the development and functioning of personality.
Comparison and critical examination of the major historical
schools of personality theory. Prerequisite: Psych. 3 or 4, or
consent of the chairman of the department. Open only to
graduate students in the School of Education.
For Graduates
Graduate study in psychology at Lehigh University is design-
ed to educate a limited number of students for careers in
teaching and research. There is an emphasis on independent
study and research. A student-faculty ratio of approximately
two to one, makes it possible for all students to establish a
close working relationship with the faculty . Programs are
available leading to the Ph.D. and D.A. (Doctor of Arts) de-
grees. The Ph.D. program is in experimental psychology with
major concentration in the area of learning or visual science.
Additional opportunities for interdisciplinary work exist in
quantitative methods, engineering psychology, and psycho-
linguistics. The D. A. program is designed as preparation for a
career in college teaching of experimental psychology at
two-year and four-year colleges.
The beginning student is required to take (1) Proseminar,
an intensive one-semester course covering topics in experi-
mental psychology, (2) Analysis and Design of Experiments,
a two-semester course in probability, statistics, and research
methodology, and (3) Research, an apprentice program in
which the student works with a faculty member on a current
research project. A required master's thesis may evolve from
the apprentice research. An evaluation of each student is
made at the end of the first year, based on examinations in
Proseminar and Analysis and Design of Experiments. (A
student coming to the department with a master's degree is
permitted to take the examinations without taking these
courses.) Evaluation is also based on progress in research and
performance in other courses.
Each student's program is tailored to his special interests
with the student selecting from a variety of psychology
courses. A required outside minor consists of integrated
course work offered by a department other than psychology,
relevant to the specialization of the student. There are no
foreign language requirements.
Psychology 235
A general examination is administered to .ill candidates
for .1 doctoral degree no later than the end of the third year.
This is intended as an evaluation of the student's ability to
organize, write and speak knowledgeably on the content,
methodology, theory and current issues in experimental psy-
chology. In addition, there is an oral final examination focus-
ing on the Ph.D. dissertation or D.A. project.
The Ph.D. specialization in learning consists of investiga-
tion of both human and animal learning. The facilities for
research include housing for different experimental animals,
electrical and woodworking shops, experimental cubicles,
electromechanical and solid state programming and recording
equipment, desk calculators and a University computer. Cur-
rent ongoing research in the department includes animal al-
ternation learning, human information integration, and
human discrimination learning.
The Ph.D. specialization in visual science integrates the
physical science and engineering approach with that of the
life and behavioral sciences for a better understanding of
human visual interaction with the environment. Areas of
concern include neuroanatomical, neurophysiological and
psychophysical studies of vision, optics and the nature of the
visual stimulus, modern instrumentation and research tech-
niques, and current theory and data of the visual system.
The D.A. program differs from the Ph.D. program in
having a broader distribution of graduate courses, training in
interpersonal awareness, an extensive research project dealing
with problems of teaching and learning rather than a disserta-
tion, and a supervised internship in college teaching. Training
in interpersonal awareness is intended to break down the
barriers which inhibit direct and genuine communication
between student and teacher. The research project may deal
with innovative approaches to curriculum preparation and
presentation such as course structure, curriculum materials,
development of new educational technologies, and novel
means of communicating psychological concepts. Teaching
experience includes service as a supervised teaching assistant
in courses offered at Lehigh University and a supervised
teaching internship outside Lehigh University.
Applications for admission and financial aid may be ob-
tained from the department of psychology. Completed appli-
cation forms plus transcripts, letters of recommendation, and
a report of scores on the G.R.E. aptitude tests and advanced
test in experimental psychology, should be returned to the
Office of Admission not later than February 1 of the year
of admission. Normally, new students are accepted for en-
trance into the program only for the fall semester. Financial
support is available in the form of teaching and research
assistantships, fellowships and scholarships. There are special
fellowships for Black students.
The minimum prerequisites for admission are one course
in each of the following: general psychology, experimental
psychology including a laboratory, and statistics, plus colla-
teral courses in biology, mathematics, and the physical
sciences. Additional course work, the equivalent of a major in
psychology, is desirable but not necessary. Promising stu-
dents with majors other than psychology, especially in the
biological and physical sciences, mathematics, or engineering,
are encouraged to apply.
401 . Proseminar (6)
Intensive examination of the classic work and current issues
in a variety of areas of experimental psychology.
411. Interpersonal Awareness (3)
Designed to improve awareness of personal functioning and
to enhance interpersonal perception and communication.
Application to problems of teaching and learning. Prerequi-
site: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit.
421. Analysis and Design ot Experiments (3)
Set theory, probability theory, inferential statistics, para-
metric and non-parametric statistical tests with emphasis on
the analysis of variance, curve-fitting, trend analysis, regres-
sion analysis.
422. Analysis and Design of Experiments (3)
Continuation of Psych. 421. Emphasis on experimental de-
sign. Prerequisite: Psych. 421.
423. Seminar in Statistical Methods (3)
Selected topics in statistics applied to psychological research.
May be repeated for credit.
428. Thesis (3)
Original investigation for the master's thesis.
429. Thesis (3)
Continuation of Psych. 428.
432. Perception (3)
Evaluation of contemporary research and theories of human
perception.
433. Conditioning and Learning (3)
Coverage of a variety of empirically investigated topics and
theories in learning.
434. Personality (3)
Traditional theories of personality will be reexamined in light
of current research, particularly in the fields of learning and
neurophysiology.
436. Physiological Psychology (3)
A detailed review of the physiological basis of behavior with
particular emphasis on infrahuman vertebrate neural systems.
Prerequisite: Psych. 365.
438. History of Psychology (3)
Interpretation of selected works of authors who have contri-
buted significantly to the growth of scientific psychology.
441. Communicating Psychological Concepts (3)
How to organize facts and ideas into broader meaningful
units that are readily communicable. Includes media aids and
the structured experience as a communication aid. Prerequi-
site: consent of instructor.
236 Psychology
448. (I.S. 402) Seminar in Psycholinguiscics (3)
For course description, see I.S. 402.
450. Special Topics in Mathematical Models (3)
Selected topics from stimulus sampling theory, game and
decision theory, continuous response models, models of
memory. May be repeated for credit.
451. Vision (3)
A systematic study of the methods and chief results in the
study of visual processes.
476. Special Topics in Cognition (3)
Selected topics in cognitive processes including thinking,
imagery, daydreaming, states of consciousness, creativity, and
psychophysiological correlates of these processes. May be
repeated for credit.
478. Special Topics in Information Processing (3)
A topic in human information processing with problems
drawn from the areas of perception, memory, and learning,
e.g., short-term memory, selective attention, pattern percep-
tion, perceptual learning. May be repeated for credit.
453. Advanced Topics in Learning (3)
An intensive study with emphasis on current research of dis-
crimination learning, avoidance learning, concept learning,
problem solving, or verbal learning. May be repeated for
credit.
455. Topics in Engineering Psychology (3)
Application ot experimental psychology to man-machine
systems, e.g., sensory load and performance; perception and
motion; man-computer interaction; system development;
psychophysiology of human performance. May be repeated
for credit.
460. Special Study (1-3)
Study of some special topic not covered in the regular course
offerings.
461. Research (1-3)
Original research not connected with master's or doctoral
thesis.
463. College Teaching of Psychology (1-3)
Consideration of problems in the preparation and presenta-
tion of college courses in psychology; ancillary problems
associated with the profession of psychology; practice in
teaching. May be repeated for credit.
465. Teaching Internship (3-6)
The preparation, teaching and grading of one or two under-
graduate courses with appropriate supervision by Lehigh
faculty. Observation and evaluation of the intern via class-
room visits and videotapes. May be repeated for credit.
472. Special Topics in Physiological Psychology (3)
Selected topics from sensory psychophysiology, drive, short-
term memory mechanisms, etc. Prerequisite: Psych. 365. May
be repeated for credit.
474. Special Topics in Developmental Psychology (3)
Topics selected from such areas as socialization and the
parent-child interaction, personality disorders in childhood,
moral development and cognitive development. May be re-
peated for credit.
Psychology 237
Religion Studies
52. Faiths ol the Wcsi (3)
The rist- . development, and teachings <>i ludaisni,
Christianity, and Islam.
Pi .'lessor
A. Roy Eck.irdt. Ph.D.. Chairman
Assistant Professor
Hubert L. Flesher, M.A.
instructor
Patricia M. Lyons, M.A.
Lecturer
Alice L. Eckardt, M.A.
As an intrinsic dimension of man's culture, religion exerts
abiding influence upon human thought and behavior. This
fact comprises the rationale for the study of religion at
Lehigh University. The department of religion studies is com-
mitted to forms of intellectuality identical with those pur-
sued in other humanistic and scientific disciplines. Our pur-
pose is to help complete and sustain a student's liberal
education. In addition, the scholarly analysis of religion com-
prises one foundation for a mature personal and social faith.
Courses in the department afford a comprehensive under-
standing ot the world's major religious traditions and their
contributions to human culture. The curriculum extends
through the methodology of religion study, the history of
religions ("comparative religion") in East and West, biblical
studies, influential theological movements and issues, and the
relating ot religion to contemporary moral and social
questions.
When this catalog went to press, Lehigh University was in
the process of implementing a major program in religion
studies. Students interested in such a major are advised to
consult with the chairman of the department.
Undergraduate Courses
15. Methods and Issues (3)
introduction to the study of religions. Emphasis upon alter-
native methods of analyzing religious phenomena and upon
such major issues as time and history, "natural" and induced
mystical experience, and good and evil.
51. Faiths of the Orient (3)
The rise, development, and teachings of Hinduism, types of
Buddhism, and several lesser-known religions of India.
ill. Biblical Studies I (3)
Theological examination of the Old Testament writings, with
emphasis upon literary historical and critical problems. The
Exodus tradition and the Patriarchal Period; the conquest of
the Land; the development and dissolution of the Monarchy;
the Prophetic Movement; the Post Exilic Period; the Law;
and the Temple and its related culture.
1 12. Biblical Studies II (3)
Literary-critical and theological study of New Testament
writings, with emphasis on the four Gospels, Acts, and the
major Epistles. The life and teachings of Jesus and of Paul.
The theological viewpoint of the New Testament church.
151. The Jewish-Christian Encounter (3)
Analysis of relations between the Jewish community and the
Christian church in history and the present. Stress upon
moral issues such as antisemitism and upon doctrinal similari-
ties and differences between Judaism and Christianity. Reli-
gious and sociopolitical aspects of the recstablishment of the
State of Israel.
152. American Religions (3)
The historical development of major religious groups in this
country from colonial times to the present. Their place in
social and political life. Emphasis upon the uniqueness of
American religious pluralism and of the church-state relation-
ship.
161. Current Issues in Theology I (3)
Major twentieth-century movements in Protestant theology,
understood as responses to the problems ot modern times.
Study of such theologians as Karl Barth, Dietrich Bonhoeffer
Rudolf Bultmann, James H. Cone, Reinhold Nicbuhr,
Richard Niebuhr, and Ian T. Ramsey. Emphases include dc-
mythologizing, "the death of God," liberalism versus conser-
vatism, new trends in hermeneutics, and the ecumenical
movement.
162. Current Issues in Theology II (3)
Major twentieth-century movements in Roman Catholic and
Jewish theology, understood as responses to the problems of
modern times. Study of such theologians as Martin Buber,
Abraham Heschcl, Hans Kung, Jacques Maritain, and Karl
Rahner. Current issues such as Vatican Council II and its
aftermath, and "radical Judaism."
Vor Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
213. Conflict and Conscience I (3)
The relating of religio-ethical principles to major moral and
social issues of today, with the aid of influential contempo-
rary theologians and movements. Emphasis upon competing
political, social, and economic systems, revolution, inter-
national conflict, and the rule of law.
238 Religion Studies
214. Conflicts and Conscience II (3)
Continuation of Religion Studies 213 {which is not a prere-
quisite). Religious and racial prejudice, ecology, medical-
genetic-eugenic ethics, sex and marriage, and vocational
decision -making.
Reserve Officers' Training Corps
261. Seminar in World Religions (3)
In-depth study of selected topics within Hinduism,
Buddhism, African religions, or other world religions.
272. Religion and the Arts (3)
Examination of religious themes in literature, film, and paint-
ing, with materials drawn from both the Eastern and the
Western traditions.
300. Apprentice Teaching in Religion Studies (1"3)
302. Seminar in Technology and Religious Thought (3)
The understanding and assessment of our technological
society through study of such contemporary thinkers as Ian
Barbour, Harvey Cox, Jacques Ellul, Pierre Teilhard de
Chardin, and Paul Tillich.
313. (I.R. 313) Seminar in Religion and International Affairs
(3)
From the standpoint of theological understandings of man's
nature and of human collective life, an assessment of the
nation-state, of the role of power in international affairs, of
national sovereignty and internationalism, and of war,
pacifism, and alternative methods of conflict-resolution.
371. Readings in Religion (3)
Selected scholarship in religion, particularly for students with
special competence or interest in an area not covered by
rostered courses. Prerequisite: consent of department chair-
man.
Lehigh University offers two voluntary Reserve Officers'
Training Corps programs in cooperation with the United
States Government: the department of military science offers
preparation for a commission in the U.S. Army while the
department of aerospace studies prepares individuals for com-
missioning in the U.S. Air Force.
The general objective of both the Army and Air Force
programs is to instill in each student: (1) a basic understand-
ing of associated professional knowledge; (2) a strong sense
of personal integrity and individual responsibility; (3) an
appreciation of the requirements of national security; and (4)
an opportunity to learn and develop leadership ability.
Army and Air Force ROTC course credits may be substi-
tuted for six hours of electives for those students in the Col-
lege of Arts and Science and the College of Business and Eco-
nomics. Students in the College of Engineering may substi-
tute advanced ROTC credits for six hours of elective general
study courses.
Both departments are basically organized around four-
and two-year programs and offer financial assistance to quali-
fied students in the form of four-, three-, two-, and one-year
scholarships and/or monthly tax-free subsistence allowances.
Department of Military Science
Professor
Lieutenant Colonel Benjamin L. Abramowitz, M.B.A.,
Chairman
372. Readings in Religion (3)
Continuation of Religion Studies 371. Prerequisite: consent
of department chairman.
Associate Professor
Major Donald H. Kunkel, B.S.
Assistant Professors
Captain Joseph F. Dannentelser, B.S.
Captain John S. Ellison, B.S.
Captain Stephen A. Schmidt, B.A.
Instructors
SSG Edward G. Becker
SGM Joseph Kress
SGM Walter Malich
The general objective of the course of instruction is to pro-
duce junior officers who by education, training, and attitude
are suitable for continued development as officers in the
United States Army. The course develops in the student the
Reserve Officers' Training Corps 239
characteristics oi self-disc iplinc, integrity, and responsibility.
The student's ability to evaluate mhi.hi. mis, make dei isions,
work with people, and lead effee tivel) are developed. Addi-
tion.ilk the student gains an appreciation ol the role ol .1
participating citizen in matters dealing with national defense.
I ehigh has li.id an ROTC program since September 1019.
Currently. Army ROTC offers .1 tour year program and .1
two yeai program. The four-year program consists of a two-
ycai Basic Course and a two year Advanced Course, both of
which arc elective. Only students who have demonstrated a
potential tor becoming effective officers are approved for
enrollment in the Advanced Course. The two-year program
consists of a six-week basic summer camp and the two-year
Advanced Course.
Basil Course. The Basic Course, normally taken in the fresh-
man and sophomore years, provides training in basic military
subjects, military history, weapons, equipment and leadership
techniques. To enroll in the Basic Course, an applicant must
be: (1) a citizen ot the United States; (2) between 14 and 23
years old; (3) regularly enrolled as a student.
Two-Year Program. Students who would otherwise be eligible
tor enrollment in the Basic Course but who did not take
ROTC during their first two years of college may apply for
this program. Applicants must successfully complete a six-
week basic summer camp and have two years of undergradu-
ate or graduate studies remaining. Pay for the summer
training is at the rate of $307.20 per month plus transporta-
tion costs to and from this camp.
Advanced Courses. The Advanced Course is normally taken
in the junior and senior years. The instruction includes mili-
tary tactics, logistics, administration, communications, mili-
tary law, teaching methods, leadership techniques and the
exercise of command. Students in this course receive SI 00.00
per month subsistence pay during the school year. A six-week
Advanced Course summer training camp is normally held
between the junior and senior year. Pay for this camp is at
the rate ot S283.05 per month, plus travel expenses. The
summer camp experience, in coordination with respective
engineering curricula, may be used to fulfill the requirements
of the engineering courses Ch.E. 100, C.E. 100, E.E. 100, I.E.
100, M.E. 100, and Met. 100, "Industrial Employment." To
enroll in the Advanced Course, an applicant must: (1) com-
plete either the Basic Course or the six-week basic summer
camp; (2) be accepted for enrollment by the University and
the department of military science.
Uniforms and Equipmoit. All uniforms, textbooks and
equipment needed by the student for these courses are
supplied by the department. A cash deposit of S25 is re-
quired of all students at the time of registration. This deposit
is returned upon his return of all issued property.
ROTC Scholarship Program. The ROTC scholarship program
is designed to offer financial assistance to outstanding young
men entering the four-year ROTC program who are inter-
ested in an Army career. Each scholarship provides free
tuition, textbooks, .md laboratory fees, in addition to paj ot
S loii.on pci 11 1 on th for the period that tin- scholarship is in
effect. Four-year scholarships .0.' open to .ill students enter-
ing ROTC as freshmen. Applications must be made to the
Army Headquarters serving their state ol reside n< e during the
senioi year of high school, normally before 15 January.
Three . two , .md one yeai scholarships are available to out-
standing cadets who arc currently enrolled in the four-year
R( )TC program and are completing eithci theit freshman,
sophomore, or junior years of college.
Distinguished Military Graduate (DMG) Program. This is a
competitive program which permits outstanding ROTC stu-
dents to apply for a Regular Army commission immediately
upon graduation. At the end of the junior year and prior to
the Advanced Course summer camp, approximately one-third
of each junior ROTC class may be designated as potential
Distinguished Military Students (DMS). A student who main-
tains the same high standards throughout summer camp and
his senior year may qualify for designation as a Distinguished
Military Graduate (DMG) and be offered a Regular Army
commission upon graduation.
plight 'Training Programs. For those students interested and
qualified, a Flight Training Program may be offered. Flight
training is an extra-curricular activity conducted by an ap-
proved FAA flying school near the University. The instruc-
tion consists of 35 hours ot ground training and more than
36 hours of flight instruction in single engine, fixed wing
aircraft. Students who take flight training must agree to parti-
cipate, if selected, in the Army Aviation Program upon enter-
ing active service.
'Transfers. A qualified student transferring from another insti-
tution may enter the ROTC program at the appropriate ad-
vanced level and year, providing he has received the necessary
credits, the recommendation of his former professor of mili-
tary science, and the approval of this University.
Obligation after Graduation. Usually upon graduation a stu-
dent will receive a Reserve commission as a second lieutenant
and will be required to serve on active duty for two years and
four years in a Reserve status. Depending on Army require-
ments, a 3-6 month active duty for training with an 8-year
reserve commitment is ottered. Recipients of a Regular Army
commission must serve at least three years on active duty.
Scholarship students must agree to accept a Regular Army
commission if offered and also serve at least four years on
active duty. Graduates accepted for the Army Aviation Pro-
gram must serve at least three years on active duty after com-
pleting the Army Aviation School at Fort Rucker, Alabama.
Graduate Studies. Under normal circumstances an ROTC
graduate may delay his active service to pursue a full-time
course of instruction leading to an advanced degree. This
delay status does not lengthen the active service obligation
unless the degree is obtained at government expense.
Course Credit. Students in the colleges of Arts and Science
and of Business and Economics may substitute advanced
240 Reserve Officers' Training Corps
military science credits tor six hours ot electives. Students in
the College of Engineering may substitute advanced military
science for six hours of general study (elective) courses. The
2 credits allotted for apprentice teaching will be in addition
to the six hours of electives aforementioned. All military
science credits are credited toward the student's overall cum-
ulative academic average.
Basic Course
13. Basic Military Science (1)
This introductory course examines the purpose, history and
organization of ROTC, the Army and the Department of
Defense, and the evolution of military weapons with stress
placed on present-day weapons and their functioning. The
course consists of one recitation period and two hours of
leadership laboratory per week.
14. Basic Military Science (1)
This course examines the organization of the Army, the in-
tegration of small units into larger teams, the missions and
function of Army units in relation to the roles of the Depart-
ment of Defense and the other Armed Services, and the U.S.
objectives of national security and defense. The course con-
sists of one recitation period and two hours of leadership
laboratory per week.
21. Basic Military Science (2)
This course presents map and aerial photography, to include
use of the compass, an introduction to military tactics and
operations, and the organization and functions ot basic mili-
tary teams. The course consists ot two recitation periods and
two hours of leadership laboratory per week.
22. Basic Military Science (2)
This course is a study of the application of the principles of
war observed in American military history. Historical engage-
ments of U.S. Armed Forces are examined at the tactical
level in order to foster an appreciation of tactical considera-
tions, and to develop military planning ability among the
students. The course consists of two recitation periods and
two hours of leadership laboratory per week.
Advanced Course
105. Advanced Military Science (1)
This course examines the systems, principles and techniques
of military communications, the principles ot military in-
struction, the techniques used in planning, presenting and
evaluating instruction and an overview of problems in under-
developed countries and the role of the Army in their aid.
This course consists of two recitation periods and two hours
of leadership laboratory per week.
106. Advanced Military Science (2)
This course examines the leader's role in directing and coordi-
nating small tactical units in the execution of offensive and
defensive operations, the roles, missions and job opportuni-
ties of the various branches of the Army, and the
psychological, physiological, and sociological factors which
affect human behavior with individual and group solutions of
case studies of leadership problems common to small units.
The course consists of three recitation periods and two hours
of leadership laboratory per week.
Advanced ROTC Summer Camp
This is a six-week training program conducted at an active
Army post. Prerequisites are completion of the basic military
science courses or their equivalent and Military Science 105
and 106. Under special circumstances and upon approval of
the professor of military science, this camp may be delayed
until after graduation or completion of the Advanced Course.
The summer camp experience, in coordination with respec-
tive engineering curricula, may be used to fulfill the require-
ments of the engineering courses Ch.E. 100, C.E. 100, E.E.
100, I.E. 100, M.E. 100, and Met. 100, "Industrial Em-
ployment."
107. Advanced Military Science (2)
This course is a study of military combat operations and the
organization and roles of the various components of the mili-
tary team, the coordination and planning necessary between
the elements of the team, and the basic concepts of military
intelligence, staff organization and functions, and logistics.
The course consists of three recitation periods and two hours
of leadership laboratory per week.
108. Advanced Military Science (1)
This course examines selected leadership and management
problems involved in unit administration and military justice,
the position of the United States in the contemporary world
and the military implications of world change, and the obliga-
tions, problems, and responsibilities of an officer entering on
active duty. This course consists of two recitation periods
and two hours ot leadership laboratory per week.
300. Apprentice Teaching in Military Science (2)
Enrollment limited to two MS IV students approved by the
department chairman.
Leadership Laboratory
Leadership Laboratory is conducted for all courses at the
same time. The Corps of Cadets is organized as a tactical unit
and must plan, organize and conduct its own unit training
program during the laboratory period. Cadets assume posi-
tions in the organization commensurate with their know-
ledge, experience and demonstrated performance. Each
semester cadets move up the chain of command to positions
of greater responsibility. During leadership laboratory cadets
practice the technical skills learned in the classroom and de-
velop their leadership skills through performance. Cadets
learn the basic fundamentals of leadership, techniques of
exercise of command, development of command voice, the
school of the soldier with and without arms, the conduct of
ceremonies, the duties and responsibilities of junior leaders,
the conduct of tactical operations, the functioning of a staff
and the development and coordination of a unit training
Reserve Officers' Training Corps 241
program. One four-hour leadership laboratory will be con-
ducted on a Saturday morning during each of the semesters.
Attendance at these sessions will eliminate the requirement
for at least the equivalent number of the regular two-hour
weekly sessions during the winter months.
Department of Aerospace Studies
Professor
Colonel William F. Shimonkcvitz, M.S., Chairman
Assistant Protcssors
Major Richard C. Brace, M.S.
Captain Delford G. Britton, M.A.
Captain John A. Fratto, M.B.A.
Assistants
Master Sergeant Carl L. Young, Jr.
Staff Sergeant Jesse F. Marsh
Staff Sergeant David J. Adkins
Staff Sergeant Gregory B. Wilson
Air Force ROTC at Lehigh University was established in
October 1946. The department'of aerospace studies offers
two programs for students to qualify for commission as a
second lieutenant in the Air Force: one of four years and one
of two years. Any student who will meet the baccalaureate
degree requirements at the end of his university education
may enroll in the four-year program or apply for entry into
the two-year program. Students in the advanced Air Force
ROTC courses receive a $100 monthly tax-free subsis-
tence allowance. Students must complete their AFROTC
training and university education and be commissioned by
their 28th birthday.
Four-Year Program. The four-year program consists of class-
room and laboratory work during the four undergraduate
years and a field training period of four weeks, usually be-
tween the junior and senior years, at an Air Force base.
During the first two years, the program acquaints students
with aerospace technological advances and current research
and development activities. Students also begin leadership
training. During the last two years, emphasis is placed on
personal development. Students practice leadership talents
and ability by assuming positions of responsibility in the
Cadet Corps.
Two-Year Program. All requirements for commissioning can
be completed in the two-year program. Students may apply
for entry not later than March of their sophomore year. This
program is also available to select graduate students, on a
limited basis, who have two full years of academic study re-
maining at Lehigh. Prior to formal enrollment, each student
must successfully complete six weeks of field training at an
Air Force Base.
Scholarship Program. Air Force ROTC awards scholarships at
the freshman, sophomore, and junior levels. They arc availa-
ble to qualified cadets in the two-year and four-year pro-
grams. Once awarded a scholarship, a cadet continues on
scholarship status until graduation. These scholarships cover
full tuition, laboratory expenses, incidental fees, and books.
Scholarship cadets also receive a J 100 monthly tax-free sub-
sistence allowance throughout the activation of the scholar-
ship.
Flight Instruction Program. Senior cadets who arc physically
qualified may take flight instruction in their senior year at no
cost to themselves. The FIP provides 36'/i hours of flying
time, 35 hours of instruction (20 hours dual and 15 hours
solo), plus l'/i hours for a final flight progress check. Cadets
who complete the 35 hours of instruction, and pass the FAA
written examination and the final flight check, may receive
an FAA private pilot's license.
Field Training. Two field training courses are offered. One
course covers four weeks for cadets in the four-year program,
and the other covers six weeks for two-year applicants.
Cadets normally attend the four-week course after their
sophomore year. Candidates for the two-year program must
successfully complete the six-week course before they enter
the Professional Officer's course.
The six-week course includes substantial classwork in
"United States Military Forces in the Contemporary World."
Both courses include orientation, survival training, junior
officer training, aircraft and aircrew orientation, physical
training, small arms marksmanship training, organization and
function of an Air Force base, career orientation, and supple-
mental training.
Travel pay is provided for those attending the field train-
ing courses. During their stay, Air Force ROTC applicants in
the six-week course receive $460.00, and those in the four-
week course receive $566.00. All cadets are provided room
and board while attending field training.
Eligibility Requirements. To be eligible for the Air Force
ROTC program, a student must be: (1) a citizen of the
United States; (2) physically qualified for commission in the
United States Air Force in accordance with existing Air
Force regulations; (3) not under 14 years of age and, upon
graduation, not more than 28 years of age; (4) planning to
pursue work leading to at least a bachelor's degree; (5) willing
to sign a formal agreement and enlist in the Air Force Re-
serve at the beginning of the third year or, upon initiation of
a college scholarship obligating him to remain in the ROTC
program, to accept a commission and to serve the required
period in the Air Force upon graduation.
21. Freshman Aerospace Studies (1)
A study of the doctrine, mission, and organization of the U.S.
Air Force; a study of U.S. strategic offensive and defensive
forces, their mission, function, and employment of nuclear
weapons; and a study of civil defense.
242 Reserve Officers' Training Corps
22. Freshman Aerospace Studies (1)
A study of aerospace defense; missile defense; U.S. general
purpose and aerospace support forces; the mission resources
and operations of tactical air forces with special attention to
limited war; and a review of Army, Navy, and Marine general
purpose forces.
23. Sophomore Aerospace Studies (1J
An examination of the developmental growth of air power
over the past sixty years by reviewing the various concepts of
employment and focusing upon the factors which prompted
research and technological change.
24. Sophomore Aerospace Studies (1)
A continuation of A.S. 23 with emphasis on a variety of
events and elements in the history of air power, especially
where these provide significant examples of the impact of air
power on strategic thought.
111. Aerospace Studies— Air Force Officer Development (3)
Development of the knowledge and skills required of the
junior officer of the Air Force. This includes communicative
skills, the development of air power, aerospace power today,
and the future of manned aircraft.
112. Aerospace Studies— Air Force Officer Development (3)
Continuation of the development of knowledge and skills
required of a junior Air Force officer with emphasis on the
history and importance of the national space effort, orbits
and trajectories, space vehicle systems, ground support sys-
tems, manned space flight, and operations in space.
113. Aerospace Studies— The Professional Officer (3)
Concepts of Air Force leadership. A study of the meaning of
professional responsibilities of the professional officer, the
foundations of the military profession, the military justice
system, theories of leadership, discipline and human rela-
tions.
114. Aerospace Studies— The Professional Officer (3)
Concepts of Air Force management. Includes principles and
functions of management. Air Force personnel policies, chan-
nels of communication, problem-solving, quantitative models
and simulation, the command-staff team, the subordinate,
performance standards, data processing, and Air Force con-
trols.
Social Relations
Professors
Robert Clifford Williamson, Ph.D., Chairman
Morris H. Sunshine, Ph.D.
Associate Professor
Roy Cecil Herrenkohl, Jr., Ph.D.
Assistant Professors
James Rathburn Mcintosh, Ph.D.
Robert E. Rosenwein, Ph.D.
Instructor
Barbara Brown Frankel, M.A.
Visiting Instructor
Philip W. Marden,Ph.D.
There are three major sequences combined in the department
of social relations: social psychology, sociology, and anthro-
pology—behavioral sciences. Students majoring in the depart-
ment usually select one option to fulfill requirements.
With rapid expansion of the significance of the social
sciences in contemporary society, these three fields provide
useful background not only for graduate work in the disci-
plines, but also for careers as diverse as law, government ser-
vice, community relations, or the ministry. As an interdisci-
plinary department, social relations provides a unique
opportunity for the student to maintain a broad scope of
interests within the context of his major program.
Required Preliminary Courses
SR 292 Research Methods (4)
Two of the following:
Principles of Sociology (3)
SR 11
SR21
SR31
Social Psychology (3)
Introduction to Anthropology (3)
(One course must be in the major option of the student.)
Option in Social Psychology
One of the following:
SR 201 Social Psychology of Education (3)
SR 203 Social Ecology (3)
Social Relations 243
Two ol the following:
SR 10 ; The Social Psychology of Groups (3)
SR 304 1 liiin.m i 'omnium. .iiM n i i
SR 305 Personality and Social Processes (3)
SR 307 Attitudes .md Social Influence (3)
SR 300 Socialization Through the Life Span (3)
One of the following in the senior year:
SR 308 Seminar on Social Psychology (3)
SR 394 Individual, Society and Culture (3)
SR One 300-level course in either sociology or
anthropology (3)
Psych One approved course (3)
Option in Sociology
Five ot the tollowing:
SR 360 Social Change in Africa (3)
SR 364 The Family (3)
SR 366 Population Problems (3)
SR 367 Latin American Social Institutions (3)
SR 368 The Urban Community (3)
SR 369 Social Disorganization (3)
SR 370 Juvenile Delinquency (3)
SR 373 Seminar in Sociology (3)
SR 374 Social Stratification (3)
SR 381 Development of Sociological Theory (3)
SR 382 Political Sociology (3)
SR 383 Industrial Sociology (3)
SR 384 Social Structure (3)
SR 300-level courses in anthropology or social
psychology (6)
Minor in Anthropology-Behavioral Sciences
Eighteen hours of which at least twelve will be chosen from
S.R. 332, 335, 336, 339, 341, 343, 394, and I.S. 301. The
remainder will be selected with the approval of the depart-
mental advisor.
Undergraduate Courses
3. Introduction to Social Relations (3)
An interdisciplinary study of man's evolution, culture,
society and individuality. Social psychological, anthropologi-
cal and sociological materials will be discussed to explore the
contrasting definitions of man developed in contemporary
social science.
4. Introduction to Social Relations (3)
A continuation of S.R. 3 with attention placed on man's
participation in the social process and theories of social
change. Cross-cultural investigations and research into con-
temporary issues in American society will be studied to ex-
amine how the individual is affected by and affects his social
environment.
1 1 . Principles of Sociology (3)
An introduction to the field of sociology and its concepts
and methods. Among the topics are the nature of the group,
social organizations and structure, socialization, stratifica-
tion, social institutions, ethnic relations, social change.
21. (Psych. 21) Social Psychology (3)
An introduction to the theories, methods of investigation,
and research results of social psychology with emphasis on
psychological processes in social behavior, social attitudes,
group behavior and social interaction.
31. Introduction to Anthropology (3)
Examination of the scope, aims and methods of anthropolo-
gy. The nature of culture, cultural-biological relationships,
human evolution, archaeology and cultural evolution, lan-
guage and cultures, cultural phenomena with emphasis on eco-
nomic organization, kinship and social organization, religion
and political organization. Analysis of the characteristic
features of life, thought and culture of selected non-Western
peoples.
41. Human Sexuality (3)
Analysis of the socialization of sex roles and the life cycle,
premarital and marital sex behavior, human reproduction and
its control. Some attention to deviant sex roles.
65. Contemporary Social Problems (3)
An exploration of major problems facing contemporary man,
the social contexts giving rise to these problems, and the
social consequences of alternative strategies for dealing with
them. Selected problems such as mental health, crime, the
population explosion, racial tensions, the modern city, and
war will be studied in detail.
75. Minority Groups (3)
Ethnic minorities and intergroup relations. Consideration of
the historical and social character of minority groups and an
examination of theory and research focusing on intergroup
cooperation and conflict.
101-102. Social Research in the Field Setting (3 or 4)
Independent study of community problems by participation
in community efforts to solve them. Students will conduct
research or a relevant project under faculty supervision. Pre-
requisite: consent of instructor.
For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates
201. Social Psychology of Education (3)
An examination of the manner in which teaching and learn-
ing are influenced by interpersonal, group and institutional
factors. The influence of family dynamics, peer-group
pressures, teacher-expectations and social status on the in-
dividual's educational adjustment.
244 Social Relations
203. Social Ecology (3)
An examination of the manner in which the physical environ-
ment and the organization of society interacting with in-
dividual needs shape human behavior. Consideration of
factors such as technology, architectural design, environmen-
tal awareness, the need for privacy and interpersonal space.
231. Non-Western People (3)
An introduction to the variety of man's social life. A number
of tribal and peasant societies are examined in relation to
their social and technological complexity. Emphasis is placed
on whole societies rather than societal mechanisms. Atten-
tion is also given to man's relationship to the physical envi-
ronment and the degree to which cultural change is influ-
enced by extra-cultural factors.
292. Research Methods (4)
Training in the methods of research used in the study of
social relations. Study of selected problems and applications
in research design, execution, analysis, and interpretation.
Introduction to major techniques of research including
laboratory experimentation, field study, and participant ob-
servation; questionnaire construction and interview proce-
dure. Introduction to different levels of analysis. Prerequi-
site: six credit hours in social relations or consent of
chairman of department.
303. Groups and Organizations (3)
Survey of theories and empirical research on interpersonal
behavior in groups and organizations. Emphasis on such
topics as: structure and process, group size, communication
networks, leadership, power, decision-making and effective-
ness. Prerequisite: six credit hours in social relations or con-
sent of chairman of department.
304. Human Communication (3)
Problems in understanding the processes and functions of
communicative behavior. Analysis of speech and language
theories of communication, and the effects of communica-
tion in groups. Prerequisite: one course in social relations or
equivalent.
305. Personality and Social Processes (3)
An examination of the relationship between personality and
social behavior. Topics include small-group behavior, personal
attraction, competition, cooperation, and communication.
Prerequisite: S.R. 21.
307. Attitudes and Social Influence (3)
An examination of the concept of attitude in social psycholo-
gy and the determinants of attitude-change. Attention to
problems and issues in persuasive communication, propa-
ganda, brainwashing, conformity, and other social processes.
Prerequisite: S.R. 21.
308. Seminar in Social Psychology (3)
Intensive consideration of selected topics in current theory
and research in social psychology. The subject matter will
vary from semester to semester, and will include such topics
as the social psychology of education, the applications of
perception and learning theory to social psychological prob-
lems, the social psychology of science, and the social environ-
ment of communication. Prerequisite: S.R. 21 or consent of
chairman of department. May be repeated for credit.
309. Socialization Through the Life Span (3)
An examination of interpersonal influences on human devel-
opment from birth through aging. Consideration of social
influences on the development of the ability to communi-
cate, the learning of social roles, the development of socially-
oriented motivation, personality dynamics, and the impact of
societal pressures on the processes of maturing and aging.
Prerequisite: S.R. 21.
320. (U.S. 320) Urban Ethnology (3)
Ethnocultural groups in urban settings. Patterns of conflict,
accommodation and assimilation studied with particular
reference to the United States.
321. (Hist. 321) Social Class and Mobility in American
History (3)
The distribution of wealth, concepts of class and social demo-
cracy, life styles and values of different social and economic
groups, and opportunities for mobility; colonial times to the
present.
332. Peasant Societies (3)
Analysis of peasants as members of transitional societies;
relationships between peasant groups and larger political en-
tities. Examination of peasant cultures in their economic,
social, and structural similarities. Intensive treatment of eth-
nographies of peasant societies. Prerequisite: S.R. 31 or con-
sent of chairman of department.
335. Cultural Dynamics (3)
Critical evaluation of approaches to the problems of cultural
change; analysis of invention and intergroup cultural borrow-
ing; agents and conditions conducive to change; mechanics of
culture growth; and applications of techniques for inducing
change. Attention to the impact of Western civilization upon
traditional native societies; socio-cultural adjustments to the
impact; and community disintegration and reintegration.
336. Religion and Magic (3)
A comparative analysis of the origins, elements, forms and
symbolism of religious beliefs and behavior; the role of reli-
gion in society with particular reference to nonliterate
societies. Anthropological theories and methods of analysis
of religion, both historical and contemporary, will be con-
sidered.
Social Relations 245
Inthropological Theory (3)
An examination ol the theoretic al foci ol anthropology and
it,', relation to disciplines, e.g., ecology, linguist >< .. eilmo
nistoi j . the a oss cultural study of cognition, et< .
33'). Siiiiiii.il 111 Anthropology (3)
Intensive consideration ot' selected topics in contemporary or
past research in cultural anthropology. The subject matter
will vary from semester to semester. May be repeated for
credit. Prerequisite: six credit hours in social relations or
consent of the chairman ol department.
341. Comparative Institutions (3)
A cross-cultural examination of topics such as kinship, social
institutions, politics* law, and economic organization. Types
nt systems and their (unctions: anthropological theory and
methods of analysis. May be repeated for credit.
343. Area Studies (3)
Particular cultural-geographic areas examined from cultural,
historical, environmental and linguistic perspectives. The
relation of area research to anthropological theory. May be
repeated for credit.
361. Social Conflict (3)
An examination of theory and research on interpersonal,
inter-group and international conflict and conflict resolution.
Consideration of the characteristics of individuals and of the
dynamics of groups which predispose them to conflict or
enable them to avoid or resolve conflict.
364. The Family (3)
A sociological study of man's basic institution. Includes: an
analysis ot historical backgrounds, interactions within the
family, relation to other groups and institutions, problems of
family disorganization, legal aspects of marriage and divorce,
family adjustment, the family in a changing society.
366. Population Problems (3)
Quantitative and qualitative aspects of U.S. and world popu-
lation. Includes: causes and effects of migrations, racial com-
positions and race relations, population theories, legal
aspects, social consequences of population trends, present
trends and future predictions.
367. Latin American Social Institutions (3)
An introduction to the contemporary indigenous, mestizo
and Creole cultures of Latin America with analysis of specific
communities. An investigation of familial, educational, reli-
gious, and recreational institutions with particular emphasis
on intellectual developments. Attention to the problem of
change and social planning. Prerequisite: one course in social
relations or consent of chairman of department.
368. The Urban Community (3)
A study of urban communities in the world and the United
States. A history of the city, ecological and demographic
patterns and growth, institutional organization, status sys-
tems, suburban development, resources and problems, future
development and planning. Prerequisite: six credit hours in
SOI ill relations or consent ol I hail m.in of department.
369. Social Disorganization (3)
Social disorganization in contemporary society, with em
pli.i si "ii il" " mi epi ol ,mi nine and alii nal ion E\ .ilu.it ion
of various theories of social disorganization. Prerequisite: six
credit hours in social relations or consent of chairman of
department.
370. Juvenile Delinquency (3)
The development of delinquent behavior within its social
context: an analysis of delinquent gangs and subcultures and
the variable patterns of anti-social activity; and evaluation of
institutional controls and treatment of the problem.
371. Special Topics in Social Relations (1-3)
An opportunity for advanced work through supervised read-
ing and research. Prerequisite: consent of chairman of depart-
ment.
372. Special Topics in Social Relations (1-3)
Continuation of S.R. 371.
373. Seminar in Sociology (3)
Intensive consideration of selected topics in contemporary
theory or research in sociology. The subject matter will vary
from semester to semester. Prerequisite: six credit hours in
social relations or consent of chairman of department. May
be repeated for credit.
374. Social Stratification (3)
Examination of concepts of stratification, such as social class,
and of theories using these concepts. Consideration also of
research findings which indicate the significance of stratifica-
tion for society. Prerequisite: six credit hours in social rela-
tions or consent of chairman of department.
381. Development of Sociological Theory (3)
A critical and comparative study of the principal schools of
social thought which have contributed to the development of
sociological theory. The origins and development of sociolo-
gy, major contributors, current trends. Prerequisite: six credit
hours in social relations or consent of chairman of de-
partment.
382. Political Sociology (3)
Organization and development of political action struc-
tures—movements, parties, systems— under varying societal
conditions. Comparative analysis of ideology, stratification,
leadership, and patterns of political participation.
383. Industrial Sociology (3)
Course and consequence of industrialization in different
societal settings. The industrial plant as a composite and a
component of local, regional and national structures of or-
ganization in transaction with other institutional areas.
246 Social Relations
384. Social Structure (3)
The theory of social structure considered as a basic key to
the understanding of social phenomena, with attention to
such concepts as interaction, position, role and role-set,
status, institutionalization, equilibrium, norm, and culture.
Selected propositions concerning structural relationships and
processes will be examined. Prerequisite: six credit hours in
social relations or consent of chairman of department.
394. The Individual, Society and Culture (3)
This course will explore the interdisciplinary implications of
the materials and methods of social psychology, sociology,
and anthropology. Prerequisite: six credit hours in social
relations or consent of chairman of department.
467. Latin American Social Structure (3)
Analysis of given Latin American societies with special atten-
tion to economic and political structures. Individual projects.
468. Advanced Urban Sociology (3)
Selected problems in urban research, urban and community
planning and redevelopment. Relation of the city and the
region to economic development and government functions.
470. Contemporary Sociological Theory (3)
An examination of current developments in theoretical soci-
ology. Functional theory and conflict theory as reflected in
Parsons, Merton, Coser and Dahrendorf and others. A
critique of current theoretical schools.
For Graduates
411. Advanced Research Methods (3)
A basic course given in research theory and methods. Con-
sideration given the nature of theory, hypotheses testing, the
definition of variables and methods of measurement.
412. Practicum in Research Methods (3)
Laboratory in the design and execution of research. Emphasis
on the design of measurement instruments, the application of
statistical techniques, and the analysis and interpretation of
data. The student will pursue an independent research project
and write a research report based on it. Prerequisite: S.R.
411.
423. Social Psychology (3)
An examination of theory and research in social psychology.
The objective of the course is to consider major topics and
issues in relation to current research.
432. Culture Patterns and Personality (3)
The psychological implications of cultural variation, includ-
ing the analysis of national character.
434. Advanced Social Psychology (3)
Intensive consideration of selected topics in social psycholo-
gy. The subject matter will vary from semester to semester on
topics such as socialization, social attitudes, person percep-
tion, small group processes and communication.
464. Seminar on the Family (3)
Societal functions of marriage and the family and the relation
of the institution to the social structure and demographic
variables. Particular emphasis on the treatment of family
disorganization.
465. Organizational Behavior (3)
Theory and research concerning the development and func-
tioning of organizations. Structure, goals, authority and
power, communication, role conflict in large organizations.
Cross-institutional comparisons of industrial, research,
governmental, medical, and academic organizations.
471. Special Topics (3)
Intensive study in an area of social relations, which is appro-
priate to the interests and needs of the staff and students.
472. Special Topics (3)
Continuation of S.R. 471.
Social Relations 247
Physical Education & Athletics
Professoi
William Badcr Leckonby, B.S. , Dm,
Assistant Professors
John Nelson Covert, B.S.
Frederick Homer Dunlap, B.A.
Leroy Arlan Heckman, M.A.
Gerald Grant Leeman, B.A.
Anthony Packer, B.S.
John Stohler Steckbcck, M.Sc.
B. Thayer Turner, B.S.
Instructors
Helen Bond, B.S.
Barry J. Fetterman, B.S.
Thomas M. Gilburg, B.A.
Lawrence D. Glueck, B.A.
Charles R. McNaron, B.S.
Stanley R. Schultz, B.A.
John Calvin Whitehead, B.S.
Thomas Pugliese, B.A.
Bruce Gardiner, M.Sc.
The division consists of the department of intercollegiate
athletics and the department of physical education and intra-
mural sports. It has supervision over the entire field of inter-
collegiate athletics and physical education at the University.
Its activities consist of intercollegiate athletics, intramural
athletics, and physical education, including corrective exer-
cises.
Experience indicates that it is essential that the physical
education program emphasize the physical fitness and effi-
ciency benefits to be derived from a well-rounded and athlet-
ic phase of the program. The purpose of the athletic, physical
education, and intramural sports program is designed to: (1)
raise and maintain the physical standards of the University:
(2) develop and maintain a high level of all-round physical
fitness so that the undergraduate student may more readily
assimilate instruction; (3) encourage regular and healthful
exercise by the development of skills, techniques, and atti-
tudes; (4) foster an aggressive and cooperative team spirit, to
increase the confidence of the individual, to develop sports-
manship, and to increase University pride through participa-
tion in vigorous competitive athletics.
Facilities for accomplishing these are afforded in Taylor
Gymnasium, Grace Hall, Taylor Field, and Sayre Park field,
an area of seven acres located above the lookout on the top
of South Mountain and only a short distance from the
fraternity houses and residence halls, and Saucon Valley
Fields located south of the campus and on the south side of
South Mountain. These 500 acres have the following facili-
ties: all-weather quarter mile track, nine all-weather tennis
courts, lacrosse and soccer fields, three football practice
fields, Varsity Mouse, two baseball diamonds, twelve to six-
teen intramural fields, and a football field which is the site of
a future stadium. Almost all of the outdoor intramural sports
contests and all uppcrclass intramural activities are held in
this area; a shuttle bus service is provided to and from this
field.
Department of Intercollegiate Athletics
The department of intercollegiate athletics offers opportuni-
ty to the undergraduate student body to participate in inter-
collegiate competition both at home and away with institu-
tions which are Lehigh's natural rivals and also other institu-
tions which are at some distance.
The intercollegiate program consists of varsity teams in
football, cross country, soccer, wrestling, basketball, swim-
ming, tennis, track, baseball, golf, lacrosse, hockey, winter
track, and rifle. In addition, there are junior varsity and/or
freshman teams in all of the above.
Department of Physical Education,
Intramural Sports and Recreation
The department of physical education has supervision and
control of the intramural sports and the recreational physical
activities of the student body. The aim is to insure the health
and physical development of every student of the University.
Through its program in physical education and intramural
sports the University endeavors to maintain among its stu-
dents a high degree of physical fitness, to establish habits of
regular and healthful exercise, to foster the development of
such valuable by-products as self-confidence, good sports-
manship, and a spirit of cooperation, and to provide each
student with ample opportunity for acquiring an adequate
degree of skill in sports of the type in which participation can
be continued after graduation.
Prior to his arrival on campus, each new or transfer stu-
dent must submit to the Health Service a record of physical
examination filled in and signed by a physician, and a com-
pleted health history form. All such forms are carefully
checked by the Health Service and each student thereby
classified for activities in the department of physical educa-
tion in accordance with his current health status.
The physical education program is voluntary, but all
physically qualified students are required to take a swimming
test and physical fitness test for the purpose of guidance and
counseling in the voluntary program of personal develop-
ment. Both tests are scheduled during the first week of the
first semester. Based on the results of the tests, each student
is urged to follow the recommendations of counselors in
improving his physical condition.
248 Physical Education and Athletics
A wide variety of instruction courses are available on a No credit is given for these courses; they are voluntarily
voluntary basis. Courses stress the history, rules, fundamen- elected subject to permission of the instructor. A periodic
tals and playing situations and are taught on an elective basis. announcement of class schedules is published.
Corecreation (for men and women simultaneously) opportu-
nities are available. Coed instruction and competition are
available in a number of activities. Individual sports are
offered on a voluntary basis.
In the gymnasium, opportunity is offered in the following
activities: recreational swimming, beginner's swimming,
dance, physical development, boxing, fencing, apparatus ex-
ercises, life-saving, controlled weight training, badminton,
judo, karate, and sports fundamentals.
A comprehensive program in intramural sports is sponsor-
ed for the student body including fraternity, residence hall,
interclass, town, and independent groups in touch football,
tennis, soccer, badminton, handball, individual athletics,
basketball, swimming, wrestling, track, Softball, squash, vol-
leyball, and recreative games. Students are encouraged to
participate in these sports, and awards are given for excel-
lence in performance.
Individual exercises are prescribed for the correction of
physical and functional defects. Students of this group are
carefully examined and individually guided.
The University maintains a well-equipped Health Center
for medical treatment. If a student is injured while engaged in
any sport he must report as soon as possible to the first-aid
room or to the University Health Service.
Courses Open to All Lehigh Students
Nonswimmers
Basic Swimming
Senior Life Saving
Water Safety Instructors
Scuba Diving (fee)
Fencing
Field Archery
Target Archery
Bowling
Golf
Basic Tennis
Intermediate Tennis
Advanced Tennis
Modern Dance
Horsemanship (fee)
Physical Fitness
Personal Defense (fee)
Stunts and Tumbling
Basketball
Volleyball
Softball
Squash
Handball
Paddle Ball
Running
Physical Education and Athletics 249
Board of Trustees
Board ot Trustees
Officers of the Hoard ol Trustees
Monroe Jackson Rathbonc, President (until 6/30/73)
Harold Scheaffer Mohler, President (after 7/1/73)
Elmer William Click, Secretary and Treasurer
Paul Justus Franz, Jr., Assistant Secretary
Corporate Members
Monroe Jackson Rathbone, Ch.E. '21, Eng.D., Sc.D., LL.D.
Chairman of the Board (Retired)
Standard Oil Company (New Jersey)
Leonard Mead Horton, B.S. in Bus. Adm. '28, LL.D.
Chairman oj the Board (Retired)
Aubrey C. Lanston & Company, Inc.
Edward A. Curtis, B.S. in Bus. Adm. '26, LL.B., LL.D.
Vice President for Public Affairs (Retired)
New Jersey Bell Telephone Company
Hugh Paul McFadden, B.A. '25, LL.B., LL.D.
Partner
McFadden, Riskin & Huston
Ivor Donald Sims, B.S. in Bus. Adm. '33, LL.D. '70
Executive Vice President (Retired)
Bethlehem Steel Corporation
Edwin Henry Snyder, E.E. '23, Eng.D. '68
Board Chairman & Chief Executive Officer (Retired)
New Jersey Public Service Electric & as Company
William Boa! Eagleson, Jr., B.S. in Bus. Adm. '49,
M.B.A. '51
President
Girard Bank
C. Lester Hogan, B.S., M.S., Ph.D., Hon. A.M., Eng.D., D.Sc.
Eng.D. (Hon.)
President
Fairchild Camera and Instrument Corporation
Donald Billman Stabler, B.S. in C.E. '30, M.S.
President
Stabler Construction Company
Edwin Hays Gott, B.S. in I.E. '29, Eng.D. '68, Sc.D., LL.D.
Chairman of the Board (Retired)
United States Steel Corporation
Coi pur. tie Members I 'merit ii
Nevin EIwcll Funk, E.E. '05, Eng.D.
Exci utive l 'ice President (Retired)
Philadelphia Electric Company
Frank William Sterrctt. A.B., B.D., D.D., S.T.D., LL.D.
Bishop (Retired)
Episcopal Diocese oj Bethlehem
Andrew Edward Buchanan, Jr., Ch.E. '18, Eng.D.
General Manager (Retired)
DuPont
Frank Lynn Magce, E.E. '17, Eng.D., LL.D.
Chairman of the Board (Retired)
Aluminum Company of America
Allen Corson Dubois, B.A. '25, LL.D.
Partner (Retired)
Wertheim & Company
Kenneth Lothaire Isaacs, M.E. '25, M.B.A., LL.D.
Chairman, Board of Trustees (Retired)
Massachusetts Investors Trust
Henry Randolph Maddox, M.E. '21
Vice President (Retired)
American Telephone and Telegraph Company
Members Elected by Alumni
(Number in parentheses indicates year term expires)
Frank Gregg Kear, E.E. '26, S.M., Sc.D. (1973)
Partner
Kear & Kennedy
John Dickson Harper, B.S. in Bus. Adm. '65,
M.B.A. '67 (1973)
Chairman
Cinemette Corporation of America
Malcolm Carrington, Jr., B.S. in Bus. Adm. '39 (1974)
Vice President and Secretary
New Jersey Public Service Electric & Gas Company
Kirk P. Pendleton, B.S., B.A. '63 (1974)
Vice President
Pitcairn, Incorporated
The Rt. Rev. Dean T. Stevenson, B.A. '37, M.A. '49,
S.T.B. '40, S.T.D., D.D. '69 (1975)
Bishop
Episcopal Diocese of Harrisburg
Alfred Greene Blake, C.E. '25 (1976)
Chairman of the Board
Engelhard Minerals & Chemicals Corporation
Harold Sheaffer Mohler, B.S. I.E. '48 (1977)
President
Hershey Foods Corporation
250 Board of Trustees
William C. Hittinger, B.S. in Met. E. '44 (1977)
Executive Vice President
Consumer & Solid State Electronics
Radio Corporation of America
Appointed Trustees
(Number in parentheses indicates year term expires)
Ralph Lawrence Wilson, El.Met. '21, L.H.D. '68 (1973)
Director of Metallurgy (Retired)
Timken Roller Bearing Company
William Frederic Colclough, B.A. '25, LL.B. (1974)
Chairman of the Board (Retired)
American Bank Note Company
Stirling Murray Rust, Jr., B.S." in M.E. '34 (1974)
Chairman of the Board (Retired)
Rust Engineering Company
Frank Cornelius Rabold, B.S. in E.E. '39, Eng.D. '70 (1975)
Manager of General Services
Bethlehem Steel Corporation
James Herron Walker, B.A. in Econ., M.B.A. (1975)
Vice President, Finance (Retired)
Bethlehem Steel Corporation
Leonard Parker Pool, Eng.D. '65, Sc.D., D.S.S. (1976)
Chairman and Chief Executive Officer
Air Products & Chemicals, Inc.
Frederick Seitz, A.B., Ph.D., LL.D. '66 (1976)
President
The Rockefeller University
Edmund Fible Martin, M.E., Eng.D., LL.D. '67 (1977)
Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer (Retired)
Bethlehem Steel Corporation
Honorary Trustee
Leonard Jerome Buck, B.S. in E.M. '15
President (Retired)
Leonard ] . Buck Company, Inc.
Departmental Visiting Committees
The University is eager to strengthen fruitful communication
with the society which it serves, and that desire motivated
the establishment of Visiting Committees of the Board of
Trustees. These committees annually bring to the University
representatives of industry, government, and education who
study those areas of the University which they are most com-
petent to judge, and report periodically on their evaluation of
those areas. Members of the Board of Trustees often serve as
chairman of the Visiting Committees.
Athletics
G. Douglas Reed
Vice Presiden t—Man ufac tu ring
McCormick & Co., Baltimore
B. L. Bishop
Vice President— Sales
Bethlehem Steel Corporation
Edwin H. Gott
Chairman of the Board
United States Steel Corporation
Edward A. Curtis
Vice President for Public Affairs (Retired)
New Jersey Bell Telephone Co.
Kirk P. Pendleton
Vice Presiden t
Pitcairn Incorporated
E. H. Snyder
Board Chairman and Chief Executive Officer (Retired)
Public Service Electric & Gas Company
Biology
Robert K. Enders
Professor and Chairman of the Department of Biology
Swarthmore College
Dr. David Pratt
Professor of Oceanography
Narragansett Marine Laboratory
Dr. George W. de Villafranca
Professor of Zoology
Smith College
Dr. Robert P. Gilbert
Associate Dean
T\\e Jefferson Medical College of Philadelphia
Dr. Frederick J. Pearson
Physician
Bethlehem, Pa.
H. P.McFadden
Partner
McFadden, Riskin and Huston
Business and Economics
Ross Robertson
School of Business Administration
Syracuse University
Ralph Gomory
T.J. Watson Research Center
York town Heights, N.Y.
Board of Trustees: Departmental Visiting Committees 251
Morris Goldstein
Francis '. DuPont 6 ( o., Sew York
Willis I. Winn
Deem, The Wharton School
University oj Pennsylvania
Leonard M. Horton
Chairman of the Hoard
[ubrey (.'. / anston & Company, Inc., New York City
Frank L. Magee
Chairman of the Hoard (Retired)
Aluminum Company of America
Chemical Engineering
John Arnold
I 'ice President for Engineering
Air Products & Chemicals, Inc.
P. L. T. Brian
Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Vernon W. Weekman, Jr.
Mobil Research Labs
Paulsboro, N.J.
Dr. Norman A. Copeland
Corporate Engineering Department
E. I. duPont de Nemours and Company
Dr. Stephen F. Goldmann
Esso Mathematics and Systems, Inc.
Dr. J. V. R. Kaufman
Deputy Director of Research, Development and Engineering
U. S. Army Material Command, Washington, D. C.
Alfred G. Blake
Chairman of the Board
Englehard Minerals and Chemical Corporation
Chemistry
John C. Bailar, Jr.
Professor of Inorganic Chemistry
University of Illinois
Ralph Connor
Chairman of the Board
Rohm and Haas Company
Frank G. Kear
Partner
Kear and Kennedy, Washington, D.C.
Edward E. Smissman
Chairman, Department of Medicinal Chemistry
University of Kansas
Charles N. Reilley
Department of Chemistry
University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill
Civil Engineering
S. M. Rust, Jr.
i 'hairman oj the Board (Retired)
The Rust Engineering Company
Samuel S. Baxter
Consulting Engineer
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania
Hunter Rouse
Carver Professor of Mechanics and Hydraulics
Tlie University of Iowa
Roblcy Winfrey
Consulting Engineer
Washington, D.C.
G. A. Leonards
Professor of Civil Engineering
Purdue University
Anton Tedesko
Consulting Engineer
Bronxville, New York
Classics
Dr. Frank C. Bourne
Professor of Classics
Princeton University
W. C.McDermott
Professor of Classical Studies
University of Pennsylvania
The Rev. Dr. Richard W. Corney
Department of Old Testament
The General Theological Seminary
The Rt. Rev. Dean T. Stevenson
Bishop
Diocese of Harrisburg
Computing Activities
Thomas E. Kurtz
Director, Kiewit Computation Center
Dartmouth College
S.J. Fenves
Professor of Civil Engineering
University of Illinois
R. G. E. Franks
Consultant, Engineering Services Department
E. I. duPont de Nemours and Company
L. R. Dimmick
General Manager, Corporate Data Processing
Bethlehem Steel Corporation
Dr. James F. Poage
Director of University Computing
Princeton University
252 Board of Trustees: Departmental Visiting Committees
Creative Arts
Philip Berman
President
Hess's Department Store, Allentown
Paul Kozelka
Professor of Speech and Theatre
Teachers College, Columbia University
Robert K. Beckwith
Professor and Chairman, Department of Music
Bowdoin College
Robert Spillman
Partner
Lovelace and Spillman, Bethlehem
Minott Coombs
Director of Dramatic Activity
Lafayette College
Ralph L. Wilson
Director of Metallurgy (Retired)
Timken Roller Bearing Company
Iva Dee Hiatt
Department of Music
Smith College, Northampton, Massachusetts
Electrical Engineering
Herbert J. Carlin
Head, Department of Electrical Engineering
Cornell University
W. Crawford Dunlap
Science Administrator to U. S. Transportation Systems
Center, Cambridge, Massachusetts
William O. Fleckenstein
Executive Director
Bell Telephone Laboratories, Holmdel, N.J.
Charles H. Titus
Manager— Engin eers
General Electric Company, Philadelphia
Joseph A. Waldschmitt
Presiden t
Page Communications, Washington, D.C.
Wayne H. Chen
Chairman, Department of Electrical Engineering
University of Florida
John F. Linvill
Executive Head, Department of Electrical Engineering
Stanford University
Edwin H. Snyder
Board Chairman (Retired)
Public Service Electric & Gas Co., New Jersey
G. B. Herzog
Director, Solid State Technology Center
RCA, Somerville, N.J.
English
James T. Nardin
Professor of English
Louisiana State University
Robert M. Lumiansky
Professor and Chairman of the Department of English
University of Pennsylvania
Edwin H. Miller
Professor of English
New York University
David C. Phillips
Professor and Head of the Department of Speech
University of Connecticut
Maurice J. Quinlan
Professor of English
Boston College
John Strohmeyer
Vice President and Editor
Bethlehem (Pa.) Globe-Times
Charles T. Prouty
Professor of English
Yale University
Geological Science
James Boyd
Executive Director
National Commission on Materials Policy, Washington, D. C.
Richard H. Jahns
Dean, School of Earth Sciences
Stanford University
Edwin W. Roedder
U.S. Geological Survey , Washington, D.C.
Donald B. Stabler
Presiden t
Stabler Construction Co.
MelvinJ. Hill
Vice President and Coordinator
Gulf Oil Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Gilbert L. Hole
Chief Geologist, Mining-Geology
Bethlehem Steel Corporation
Board of Trustees: Departmental Visiting Committees 253
Govemmcnl
Industrial Engineering
Henry J. Abraham
Professoi oj Political Science
I University of Pennsylvania
Edward N. Cahn
Partner
Dower, Huston ami Calm, Allentown
Carl Schier
Issistant Professor of Law
Urban Law Program, School of Law, University of Detroit
H. Gordon Payrow
Mayor
City of Bethlehem
Alfred E. Driscoll
President
Warner-Lambert Pharmaceutical Co.
Peter W. Rodino, Jr.
Member, U.S. House of Representatives
(10th District, New Jersey)
Edward A. Curtis
Vice President (Retired)
New Jersey Bell Telephone Company
History
Robert D. Cross
Dean of Faculty
University of Virginia
Laurence C. Howard
Dean, Graduate School
University of Pittsburgh
George T. Peck
Vice President (Retired)
Peck and Peck
Joseph R. Strayer
Dayton-Stockton Professor
Princeton University
Paul A. Varg
Professor of History and Dean of the College of Arts
and Letters
Michigan State University
Henry R. Winkler
Vice President for Academic Affairs
Rutgers University
Morgan J. Cramer
President and Chief Executive Officer (Retired)
P. Lorillard and Company, Inc.
Marvin E. Gantz
Vice President Manufacturing
aluminum Company of Arm n, a
Andrew Schultz
Dean of Engineering
Cornell University
E. H.Gott
Chairman of the Hoard
United States Steel Corporation
J. E. Angle
Executive Vice President— Production
United States Steel Corporation
Paul D. O'Donnell
Director— Manufacturing, Planning and Control
Westinghouse Electric Corporation
International Relations
Morton Blaustein
President
Blaustein Industries
Robert Bowie
Director
Center for International Affairs, and Clarence Dillon
Professor of International Affairs
Harvard University
Richard A. Falk
Albert G. Milbank Professor of International Law
and Practice
Princeton University
Monroe J. Rathbone
Chairman of the Board (Retired)
Standard Oil Company (New Jersey)
Frederick Seitz
President
Rockefeller University
Library
John H. Berthel
Librarian, Milton S. Eisenhower Library
The Johns Hopkins University
Carl Jackson
Dean of Library Administration
Indiana University
Thomas R. Adams
Librarian, John Carter Brown Library
Brown University
254 Board of Trustees: Departmental Visiting Committees
David Kaser
Director of Libraries
Cornell University
Thomas H. Mott
Demi, Graduate School of Library Science
Rutgers University
Dr. Jack Vanderryn
Technical Assistant to the Director of the Division of
Applied Technology, U. S. Atomic Energy Commission,
Washington, D. C.
Center for Marine and Environmental Studies
Dr. Scott C. Daubin
Chairman, Ocean Engineering Department
University of Miami, Florida
Melvin W. First
Professor of Environmental Health Services
School of Public Health, Harvard University
George H. Keller
Director, Marine Geology & Geophysics Laboratory
Atlantic Oceanographic Laboratory, National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration, Miami, Florida
J. M. Prescott
Dean, College of Science
Texas A & M University
George T. Scott
Professor of Biology
Oberlin College
Robert Wright, Jr.
Manager, Permasep Products
E. I. duPont de Nemours and Company
Mathematical Science
The Visiting Committee for the Mathematical Sciences over-
sees the work not only of the Department of Mathematics,
but also that of the Center for the Application of Mathe-
matics, Department of Philosophy and Center for the In-
formation Sciences.
Vincent E. Guiliano
Arthur D. Little, Inc.
Paul Halmos
Professor of Mathematics
University of Indiana
Henry O. Pollack
Bell Telephone Laboratories, Inc.
F.J. Weyl
Dean of Sciences and Mathematics
Hunter College
Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics
Howard W. Emmons
Professor of Mechanical Engineering
Harvard University
Edward G.Uhl
President and Chief Executive Officer
Fairchild Industries, Inc.
G. Douglas Reed
Vice President— Manufacturing
McCormick and Company, Baltimore, Md.
George F. Carrier
Professor of Mechanical Engineering
Harvard University
Daniel C. Drucker
Dean, College of Engineering
University of Illinois
Leo Steg
Manager
Space Science Laboratory, General Electric Company,
Valley Forge, Pa.
Metallurgy and Materials Science
Donald Blickwede
Vice President and Director of Research
Bethlehem Steel Corporation
Morris Fine
Professor of Materials Science
Northwestern University
Walter Hibbard
Vice President, Research and Development
Owings-Cornmg Fiberglas
Nathan Promisel
Executive Director
Materials Advisory Board, National Research Council,
National Academy of Sciences
Ralph T. Wilson
Director of Metallurgy (Retired)
Timken Roller Bearing Co.
L. H. Van Vlack
Department of Metallurgy and Materials Science
University of Michigan
Dr. N. Bruce Hannay
Bell Telephone Laboratories
Eric Baer
Case Western Reserve University
W. O. Philbrook
Department of Metallurgy and Materials Science
Carnegie-Mellon University
Board of Trustees: Departmental Visiting Committees 255
Modern Foreign I .manages .nul I itiraturcs
William Hittingcr
Vice President and General Manager
Radio i orporation oj [merica
Dr. Harold Jantz
Professoi oj i lerman
Johns Hopkins University
Dr. Robert G. Mead, Jr.
Professor of Foreign Languages
University oj Connecticut
Dr. Edward D. Sullivan
Dean of the College and Professor of French
Princeton University
Physics
John F. Clark
Director
Coddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Md.
Ira G. Hedriclc
Vice Presiden t— Engineering
Gntmmaii Aircraft Engineering Corporation, Bethpage, N.Y.
Frederick C. Brown
Physics Department
University of Illinois
Sidney Millman
Director of Physics Research
Bell Telephone Laboratories, Murray Hill, N.J.
Robert Serber
Professor of Physics
Columbia University
Robert H. Dicke
Department of Physics
Princeton University
John Gait
Director, Solid State Electronics Research Laboratories
Bell Telephone Laboratories
Psychology
Frank Geldard
Professor of Psychology
Princeton University
Harold Gulliksen
Center for Psychological Studies
Educational Testing Service, Princeton, N.J.
Richard Solomon
Professor of Psychology
University of Pennsylvania
Richard Trumball
<>//,,, (>/ \aval Research, Washing/mi, /).(.'.
H. P. McFaddcn
Partner
W. I adden, Riskin and Huston, Bethlehem
Social Relations
Robert Bierstcdt
Department of Sociology
University of Virginia
Kenneth J. Gergen
Chairman, Department of Psychology
Swarthmorc College
Donald R. Young
President (Retired)
Russell Sage Foundation
H. P. McFadden
Partner
McFadden, Riskin and Huston, Bethlehem
Harry C. Bredemeier
Department of Sociology
Rutgers University
256 Board of Trustees: Departmental Visiting Committees
University Administration
Administration
Office of the President
Willard Deming Lewis, Ph.D., LL.D., L.H.D.
President
Albert Charles Zettlemoyer, Ph.D., D.Sc.
Provost and Vice President
Paul Justus Franz, Jr., M.A.
Vice President— Development
Joseph Francis Libsch, Sc.D.
Vice President— Research
Preston Parr, M.S.
Dean and Vice President— Student Affairs
Elmer William Glick, B.A.
Vice President and Treasurer
Richard Moore Spriggs, Ph.D.
Vice President— Administration
Eric Van Tine Ottervik, Ph.D.
Vice Provost and Coordinator of University Planning
Mary Isabelle Malone, B.A.
Secretary to the President
Robert Sayre Taylor, LL.B.
Legal Counsel
Academic Offices
John J. Karakash, M.S.
Dean, College of Engineering
John A. Stoops, Ed.D.
Dean, School of Education
Robert Daniel Stout, Ph.D.
Dean, Graduate School
Brian George Brockway, LL.M.
Dean, College of Business and Economics
John W. Hunt, Ph.D.
Dean, College of Arts and Science
George Mark Ellis, Ph.D.
Assistant Dean, College of Arts and Science
Robert Taylor Gallagher, D.E.M.
Associate Dean, College of Engineering
Max Donald Snider, M.B.A.
Assistant Dean, College of Business and Economics
Norman Harold Sam, Ed.D.
Director, Summer Session
Nan Van Gieson, Ph.D.
Assistant Dean, School of Education and Assistant Director,
Summer Session
Berry Gargal Richards, M.L.S.
Secretary to the Faculty
Student Personnel Services
Office of the Dean of Students
Charles Wilfrid Brennan, M.B.A.
Dean of Students
Arthur Howard Mann, S.T.B.
Associate Dean of Students
Office of the Dean of Student Life
William Leroy Quay, Ph.D.
Dean of Student Life
Ruth Ann Hurley, M.S.
Associate Dean of Student Life
Nathan Walter Harris, B.S.
Assistant Dean of Student Life
Joseph Hurley Reynolds, M.A.
Assistant to the Dean of Student Life
Barbara Elizabeth Solt, M.S.S.W.
Coordinator of Volunteer Community Services
Office of the Dean of Residence
Clarence Bowen Campbell, M.A.
Dean of Residence
Robert Peter Shurtleff, M.Ed.
Director of Residence Halls, Assistant Dean of Residence
Evelyn Strawn Eberman, B.A.
Assistant Director of Residence Halls
James A. Tiefenbrunn, M.B.A.
Assistant Director of Residence Halls, Assistant Dean of
Residence
Business Offices
Donald Walter Schmoyer, B.S. in Bus. Adm.
Assistant Treasurer
Joseph Petronio, B.S.
Bursar
Lou V. Forcum
Assistant Bursar
University Administration 257
Albert Charles Molter, M.S.
Purchasing \gcnl
John Lester Kcm merer
Issistant Purchasing Igent
William Monroe Glose 111, B.S. in Bus. Adm.
mntant
Larry M. Milcy, B.S. in Bus. Adm.
Assistant Accountant
Clark W. Il.ihn. B.A.
issistant lecountant
Robert Warren Numbers, B.S.
Director, Physical Plant
Paul Theodore Miller
Superintendent, Buildings and Grounds
Kenneth E. Orben, B.S. in E.E.
Assistant Superintendent, Buildings and Grounds
Frank S. Donchcz
Captain of Police
Robert W. Bell, M.S.
Director, Bookstore
Stanley Frederick Heffner
Manager, Bookstore
Kenneth M. Trumbore, B.A.
Assistant Manager, Bookstore
Office of the Registrar
James Harold Wagner, M.A.
Registrar
Frederick Eugene Ressler, A.B.
Associate Registrar
Rodney Earl Ressler
Assistant Registrar
Claire C. Biser
Assistant Registrar
Office of Development
Robert Mark Holcombe, M.S.
Director of Development
Michael G. Bolton, M.B.A.
Director of Corporate and Foundation Resources
Charles Keller Zug, B.S.
Advisor, Bequests, Trusts and Insurance
Austin V. McClain, M.A.
Consultant
Stuart R. Christie, B.A.
Assistant to the Director
Office <>i Community Relations
I. lines W. Harper, M.S.
I Hrector
Office o( Physical Planning
H. Joris Rossc, B.A.
Director
Ronald J. Horvath, B.A.
Assistant Planner
Anne C. Solderitsch
Assistant to the Planner
Office ot Public Information
Samuel Irvin Connor, B.A.
Director
Roy Foster, Jr., B.A.
Assistant Director
Joseph Hardy Whritenour
Assistant Director
Janet Donna Connor, M.A.
Assistant to the Director
Diane Kay Shaffer, B.S.
Assistant to the Director
Office of University Publications
George Leonard Beezer, B.A.
Director
Marvin Howard Simmons, M.A.
Assistant Director
Lynn Dianne Klein, B.A.
Production Assistant
Sara Louise Paden, B.A.
Administrative Assistant
Office of Admission
Samuel Harold Missimer, B.A.
Director
James Willard McGeady, B.A.
Associate Director
Robert F. Reeves, B.A.
Assistant Director
Linda L. Tipton, B.A.
Assistant to the Director
258 University Administration
Office of Undergraduate Financial Aid
William Edward Stanford, B.A.
Director
Deborah J. Dwyer, B.S.
Assistant to the Director
Alumni Association
James W. Niemeyer, B.S.
Executive Director
Harry B. Ramsey, B.A.
Associate Executive Director, Editor, Alumni Bulletin
Dennis R. Diehl, M.B.A.
Assistant to the Executive Director
Lucile Barrett, A.B.
Assistant to the Editor, Alumni Bulletin
Margaret E. F. Rocheleau, B.A.
Assistant to the Editor, Alumni Bulletin
University Libraries
James Decker Mack, M.A.
Director of Libraries
Lorraine C. Abel
Assistant to the Director
Brian Sanders, M.A.
Associate Librarian, Linderman Library
Berry Gargal Richards, M.L.S.
Associate Librarian, Mart Library
Margaret Linn Dennis, B.S. in L.S.
Assistant Librarian, Readers' Service
Mary Gruber Riley, M.S. in L.S.
Head Reference Librarian, Linderman Library
Alice Frances Bahr, B.A.
Assistant Reference Librarian
Margaret N. Smith, M.L.S.
Assistant Librarian, Acquisitions
Georgia Emily Raynor,M.S. in L.S.
Assistant Librarian, Cataloging
Catherine Riley Flecksteiner
Serials Cataloger
William J. Fincke.Jr., M.L.S.
Social Science Cataloger
Caroline Cochrane Nippert, M.L.S.
Science Cataloger
Daniel J. Weine, A.M. L.S.
Humanities Cataloger
Sharon Matley Siegler, M.L.S.
Reference Librarian, Mart Library
Kenneth J. Veprek, M.S. L.S.
Reference Librarian, Mart Library
Olive Stengel
Circulation Supervisor
Clara M. Fistner
Xerox Technician
Packer Memorial Chapel
The Rev. Hubert L. Flesher, M.A.
Chaplain
Robert Benjamin Cutler, M.A.
Organist
University Placement and Personnel Services
Everett Anderson Teal, M.A.
Director
Edward J. Trost, M.A.
Assistant Director of Personnel
Richard B. Fisher, M.A.
Assistant Director of Placement
Helen Z. Rayner
Administrative Assistant
University Counseling Services
Andrew J. Edmiston, Ph.D.
Director
Robert Roupen Panos, Ph.D.
Assistant Director
William Joseph Sibley, M.Ed.
Counselor
Patricia A. Finady, B.A.
Administrative Assistant
University Health Service
P. Lawrence Kreider, M.D.
Acting Director
Duane E. Stackhouse, M.D.
Associate Director
Lucille H. Pleiss, R.N.
Administrative Assistant
Doris Transue, R.N.
Nurse
Dorothy Delp, R.N.
Nu rse
University Administration 259
James P. Mathews
Physical Therapist
Division of Intercollegiate Athletics ami Physical Education
William Bader Lcckonby, B.S.
Direi tor oj Athletics and Physical Education
Gerald Grant Leeman, B.S.
Assistant fi> the Director of Athletics
N. Craig Anderson
Business Manager
John S. Steckbcck, M.Sc.
Director of Intramurals and Recreation and Assistant Director
of Physical Education
Helen S. Bond, B.S.
Assistant Director of Women's Physical Education
J. Bruce Gardiner, M.Sc.
Physical Education Assistant
Administrative Services
Thomas Joseph Verbonitz, M.B.A.
Director
Administrative Systems Office
William J. McGarry, M.B.A.
Director
Wayne Hotfman
Assistant Director
David L. March, Ph.D.
Systems Programmer
Kathleen A. Kemmerle, B.S.
Systems Programmer
Barbara Long
Systems Programmer
Mailing and Central Copying Office
Catherine Franklin
Director
(cuter lor the Application ol Mathematics
Ronald S. Rivlin, Sc.D.
Director
Philip A. Blythc, Ph.D.
Dominic G. B. Edelcn, Ph.D.
Gregory T. McAllister. PhD.
Gerald F. Smith, Ph.D.
Eric Varley, Ph.D.
Eric P. Salathc.Ph.D.
Rolf K. Adenstcdt, Ph.D.
Anastasios Kydoniefs, Ph.D.
Ramamirtham Venkataraman, Ph.D.
Yakovos Kazakia, Ph.D.
Kenneth N. Sawyers, Ph.D.
Executive Officer
Computing Center
John E.Walker, Ph.D.
Director, Computing Center & Associate Professor, Economics
John E. Smith, M.A.
Manager, Computer Service
William F. Hollabaugh, Ph.D.
Manager, Systems Programming
Joseph F. Scullion, Jr., B.S.
Manager, Special Projects and Program Development
Joseph P. Holzer
Administrative Assistant
Robert A. Pfenning, M.B.A.
Coordinator, User Services
Carol D. Rauch
Librarian
Gary E. McConnell, B.S.
Group Leader, Applications Programming
John H. Morrison
Operations Supervisor
William E. Schiesser, Ph.D.
Analyst, Computing Center & Professor of Chemical Engineering
Centers and Institutes
Office of Research
George Robert Jenkins, Ph.M.
Director
John M. Cheezum, B.S.
Fiscal Associate
Mary Jo Hill, M.A.
Editorial Associate
Center for Health Sciences
Institute for Pathobiology
Thomas C. Cheng, Ph.D.
Director
Experimental Parasitology; Immunology; Invertebrate Pathology
Edward J. Benz, M.D.
Medical Microbiology
Ann Cali, Ph.D.
Protozoology; Electron Microscopy
260 University Administration: Centers and Institutes
Henry N. Fremount, Dr. PH.
Protozoology; Electron microscopy; Malariology
Sidney S. Herman, Ph.D.
Director of the South Jersey Wetlands Institute; Pollution
Biology
Richard G. Malsberger, Ph.D.
Virology; Tissue Cultures
Randall W. Snyder, Jr., M.D.
Medical Parasitology ; Gastrointestinal physiology
Division of Biological Chemistry and Biophysics
Ned D. Heindel, Ph.D.
Director
Medicinal Chemistry; Bioorganic Chemistry
Brent W. Bensen, Ph.D.
Radiation biophysics; Tructure of nucleic acids
Frederick M. Fowkes, Ph.D.
Physical chemistry of biological surf aces
Joseph R. Merkel, Ph.D.
Microbial enzyme biochemistry
William E. Ohnesorge, Ph.D.
Clinical chemistry
Keith Schray, Ph.D.
Intermediary metabolism; Enzyme kinetics
Thomas E. Young, Ph.D.
Biosynthetic pathways; Melanin biochemistry
Eugene W. Rice, Ph.D.
Clinical chemistry
Division of Bioengineering
Arturs Kalnins, Ph.D.
Director
Physical properties of cell surfaces
Russell E. Benner, Ph.D.
Prosthetics
Nikolai Eberhart, Ph.D.
Bioinstrumen tation
George Krauss, Jr., Ph.D.
Fine structure; Biological implants
Dean P. Updike, Ph.D.
Properties of biological surfaces
Division of Visual Science
George K. Shortess, Ph.D.
Director
Psy chobiology of vision; Neurophysiology
Eugene Allen, Ph.D.
Color Science
William A. Barrett, Ph.D.
Instrumentation as applied to vision research
Ernest E. Bergman, Ph.D.
Optics; Laser physics
Sidney Stecher, Ph.D.
Visual discrimination
Center for Information Science
Donald John Hillman, M.Litt.
Director
Andrew James Kasarda, Ph.D.
Associate Director
Herbert Rubenstein, Ph.D.
Psy cholinguis tics
John J. O'Connor, Ph.D.
Information Retrieval
Robert Featherstone Barnes, Jr., Ph.D.
Mathematical Linguistics
James Sproat Green, Ph.D.
Special Projects
Louis W. Stern, Ph.D.
Batch Services
Lawrence J. Davis, M.S.
Assistant to the Director
Associates
Robert Clifford Williamson, Ph.D.
Man-Machine Interface
James D. Mack, M.A.
Library Systems
Berry Gargal Richards, M.L.S.
Library Automation
Sharon L. Siegler, M.L.S.
LEADERMART User Services
JohnE. Walker, Ph.D.
Computing Liaison
LynnS. Beedle, Ph.D.
Tall Buildings Information Systems
Center for Marine and Environmental Studies
James Marshall Parks, Ph.D.
Director
Joseph R. Merkel, Ph.D.
Director, Marine Biochemistry Laboratory
University Administration: Centers and Institutes 261
Adrian F. Richards, Ph.D.
Director, Marine Geotechnii al I aboratory
Sidney Samuel Herman, Ph.D.
DiVi ■ tor, South Jersey Wetlands Institute
Robert L. Johnson, Ph.D.
Director, Environmental Engineering Laboratory
Saul Benjamin Barber, Ph.D.
Physiology i>/ Invertebrates
Arthur William Brune, Ph.D.
Hydrology
Bobb Carson, Ph.D.
( leeanie Sedimentology
Robert William Coughlin, Ph.D.
Air Pollution Studies
Jacob De Rooy, Ph.D.
Econometric Modeling
Alfred James Diefenderfer, Ph.D.
Analytical Chemistry
Walter H. Graf, Ph.D.
River and Occanographic Hydraulics
Terence J. Hirst, Ph.D.
Associate Director, Marine Geotechnical Laboratory
Matthew H. Hulbert, Ph.D.
Analytical Chemistry
John B. Pearce, Ph.D.
Benthic Ecology
John Donald Ryan, Ph.D.
Sedimentology
Alan Hugh Stenning, Sc.D.
Geophysical Fluid Dynamics
Theodore Alfred Terry, Ph.D.
Instrument Design
Wesley J. Van Sciver, Ph.D.
Marine Optics, Nuclear Applications
Center for Surface and Coatings Research
Henry Leidheiser, Jr., Ph.D.
Director
John W. Vanderhoff, Ph.D.
Associate Director— Coatings, and Director, NPIRI
Jacqueline Marie Fetsko, M.S.
Administrative Assistant
Eugene M. Allen, Ph.D.
Color Science Laboratory
Robert William Coughlin, Ph.D.
Fine Particle Dispersions
Frederick M. Fowkes, Ph.D.
Surface Chemistry
Kamil Klicr, Ph.D.
Catalysis
Fortunato Joseph Micalc, Ph.D.
Colloid Chemistry
Gary Wayne Poehlein, Ph.D.
Rheology
Gary W. Simmons, Ph.D.
Electron Spectroscopy
Robert Peh-Ying Wei, Ph.D.
Stress Corrosion, Corrosion Fatigue
John D. Wood, Ph.D.
Stress Corrosion
Albert C. Zettlemoyer, Ph.D.
Surface Chemistry and Wetting
Research Associates
Mohammed S. El-Aasser, Ph.D.
Elsie Kellerman, Ph.D.
Richard Kellerman, Ph.D.
Mladen Topic, Ph.D.
Center for Social Research
L. Reed Tripp, Ph.D.
Acting Coordinator
Director, Manpower Research
Roy Herrenkohl, Ph.D.
Director, Behavioral Science Program
J. Richard Aronson, Ph.D.
Director, Business and Economics Program
Leonard Ruchelman, Ph.D.
Director, Urban Studies Program
Charles Brownstein, Ph.D.
Urban Studies Program
Robert Thornton, Ph.D.
Manpower Studies
Fritz Engineering Laboratory
Lynn Simpson Beedle, Ph.D.
Director
George C. Driscoll, Jr., Ph.D.
Associate Director
John W. Fisher, Ph.D.
Associate Director
262 University Administration: Centers and Institutes
Bruce A. Laub, M.B.A.
Administrative Assistant
Deborah J. Ritter, B.A.
Administrative Assistant
Lambert Tall, Ph.D.
Director, Fatigue and Fracture Division
Hsai-Yang Fang, Ph.D.
Director, Geotechnical Engineering Division
Walter H. Graf, Ph.D.
Director, Hydraidics and Sanitary Engineering Division
Le-Wu Lu, Ph.D.
Director, Building Systems Division
Ti Huang, Ph.D.
Director, Structural Concrete Division
John W. Fisher, Ph.D.
Director, Structural Connections Division
Alexis Ostapenko, Ph.D.
Director, Structural Stability Division
Roger C. Slutter, Ph.D.
Director, Operations Division
Celal N. Kostem, Ph.D.
Chairman, Computer Systems Group
Kenneth R. Harpel
Laboratory Superintendent
Hugh T. Sutherland
Instruments Associate
Associates
Arthur W. Brune, Ph.D.
Wai-Fah Chen, Ph.D.
J. Hartley Daniels, Ph.D.
Terence J. Hirst, Ph.D.
Robert L. Johnson, Ph.D.
Willard A. Murray, Ph.D.
Richard Roberts, Ph.D.
Paul J. Usinowicz, Ph.D.
David A. VanHorn, Ph.D.
Robert P. Y. Wei, Ph.D.
B. T. Yen, Ph.D.
Materials Research Center
Donald M. Smyth, Ph.D.
Director
David A. Thomas, Ph.D.
Associate Director, and Director, Materials Liaison Program
Sidney R. Butler, Ph.D.
Director, Advanced Materials Laboratory
Walter E. Dahlke, Ph.D.
Advanced Materials Laboratory
Frank J. Feigl, Ph.D.
Advanced Materials Laboratory
D. P. H. Hasselman, Ph.D.
Director, Physical Ceramics Laboratory
Richard Warren Hertzberg, Ph.D.
Director, Mechanical Behavior Laboratory
R. Wayne Kraft, Ph.D.
Advanced Materials Laboratory
George Krauss, Jr., Sc.D.
Electron Microscopy Laboratory
John Alexander Manson, Ph.D.
Director, Polymer Laboratory
Michael R. Notis, Ph.D.
Advanced Materials Laboratory
Richard Roberts, Ph.D.
Mechanical Behavior Laboratory
Leslie H. Sperling, Ph.D.
Polymer Laboratory
Richard Moore Spriggs, Ph.D.
Physical Ceramics Laboratory
Lawrence Henry Gipson Institute for Eighteenth-Century
Studies
Lawrence H. Leder, Ph.D.
Coordinator
Peter Beidler, Ph.D.
Josef M. Brozek,Ph.D.
Ernest N. Dilworth, Ph.D.
Jonathan B. Elkus, M.A.
Edward J. Gallagher, Ph.D.
E. Anthony James, Ph.D.
J. Ralph Lindgren, Ph.D.
JohnB. Owens, Ph.D.
Richard J. Redd, M.F.A.
James S. Saeger, Ph.D.
John A. Van Eerde, Ph.D.
D. Alexander Waldenrath, Ph.D.
Robert C. Williamson, Ph.D.
W. Ross Yates, Ph.D.
Institute of Fracture and Solid Mechanics
George C. M. Sih, Ph.D.
Director
Robert Badaliance, M.S.
Tony E.P.Chen, Ph.D.
Fazil Erdogan, Ph.D.
Ronald J. Hartranft, Ph.D.
University Administration: Centers and Institutes 263
Peter D. Hilton, Ph.D.
Arturs K.ilnins, Ph.D.
Martin E. Kipp, M.S.
Robert A. 1 ucas, Ph.D.
Richard Roberts, Ph.D.
Robert G. Sarubbi, Ph.D.
Dean P. Updike. Ph.D.
Robert P. V. Wei. Ph.D.
H.iydcn N. Pritchard, Ph.D.
Chemical •■• i sni igraphy
J.Donald Ryan, Ph.D.
Geological history of coastal salt marshes, sedimentation
Institute lor Mct.il Forming
Betzalel Avitzur, Ph.D.
Director
Walter C. Hahn, Ph.D.
Program Manager
South Jersey Wetlands Institute
Sidney S. Herman, Ph.D.
Director
Biological oceanography, marine ecology, food chain
relationships
Saul B. Barber, Ph.D.
Physiology of invertebrates
David M. Bell, Ph.D.
Behavior of marine animals
Bobb Carson, Ph.D.
Geological oceanography
Thomas C. Cheng, Ph.D.
Marine symbiosis, shellfish pathobiology, invertebrate
hn munobiology, parasitology
A. James Diefenderfer, Ph.D.
Analytical chemistry, instrumentation
Walter Graf, Ph.D.
Hydraulics of sediment transport
Ned D. Heindel, Ph.D.
Photochemistry
Matthew H. Hulbert, Ph.D.
Chemical oceanography
Robert L. Johnson, Ph.D.
Tertiary sewage treatment
Richard G. Malsberger, Ph.D.
Viral diseases offish
Joseph R. Merkel, Ph.D.
Biochemistry of marine bacterial enzymes
James M. Parks, Ph.D.
Beach preservation
264 University Administration: Centers and Institutes
Faculty & Staff
David C. Amidonjr. (1965, 1971)
Lecturer in Social Relations
B. A., Juniata College, 1957; M.A., Penn State, 1959.
The first date after the name indicates the date of first
appointment to continuous service on the faculty or staff;
the second date, when the first fails to do so, indicates the
date of appointment to present professional rank. Listings of
emeriti faculty, and those members of the faculty and staff
deceased, retired, or resigned in the past year are noted at the
end of this section.
Lorraine C. Abel (1969)
Assistant to the Director of Libraries
Benjamin L. Abramowitz (1972)
Professor of Military Science
B.S., Virginia Polytechnic Institute, 1955; M.B.A., George
Washington, 1971.
Lt. Col., Army.
Ljubisa S. Adamovic (1973)
Visiting Professor of Economics
John William Adams (1969)
Associate Professor of Industrial Engineering
B.S., University of Nebraska, 1952; Ph.D., University of
North Carolina, 1962.
Rolf K. Adenstadt (1969)
Assistant Professor, Center for the Application of Mathematics
B.S., Brown, 1963; Ph.D., 1967.
David Adkins (1972)
Staff Assistant, Aerospace Studies
Staff Sergeant, U.S.A.F.
Eugene Murray Allen (1967)
Professor of Chemistry and Director, Color Science
Laboratory, CSCR
B.A., Columbia, 1938; M.S., Stevens Institute of Technology,
1944; Ph.D., Rutgers, 1952.
Goren Alpstein (1967)
Postdoctoral Research Associate in Civil Engineering
Teknologie Licentiat— Royal, Institute of Technology
(Sweden), 1967.
Carlos J. Alvare (1968, 1969)
Associate Professor of Fine Arts
B.A., Yale, 1947; M.C.P., Penn, 1952; M.Arch.,
Yale, 1973.
Norman Craig Anderson (1966, 1968)
Business Manager, Athletics
B.S., Lehigh, 1960; M.S., Southern Illinois, 1964.
Kemal Arin (1969)
Assistant Professor of Mechanics
M.S., Technical University of Istanbul, 1963; Ph.D., Lehigh,
1969.
Ray Livingstone Armstrong (1946, 1970)
Professor of English
B.A., Williams, 1930; B.A., Oxford, 1932; M.A., 1936;
Ph.D., Columbia, 1941.
Jay Richard Aronson (1965, 1972)
Professor of Economics
A.B., Clark, 1959; M. A., Stanford, 1961; Ph.D., Clark, 1964.
Edward F. Assmus, Jr. (1966, 1970)
Professor of Mathematics
A.B., Oberlin, 1953; A.M., Harvard, 1955; Ph.D., 1958.
Betzalel Avitzur (1964, 1968)
Professor of Metallurgy and Materials Science and Director,
Institute for Me tal Forming
B.Sc. and Dip. Ing., Israel Institute of Technology, 1949;
M.S., Michigan, 1956; Ph.D., 1960.
Dunham R. Bainbridge (1972)
Instructor in Accounting
B.S., Rider, 1963; M.S., Lehigh, 1972. C.P.A., 1971.
Alice Frances Bahr (1971)
Assistant Reference Librarian, Linderman Library
B.A., Temple, 1968; M.L.S., Drexel, 1971.
Nicholas W. Balabkins (1957, 1966)
Professor of Economics
Dipl. rer. pol., Gottingen, 1949; M. A., Rutgers, 1953;
Ph.D., 1956.
Saul Benjamin Barber (1956, 1965)
Professor of Biology
B.S., Rhode Island State, 1941; Ph.D., Yale, 1954.
Thoburn Vail Barker (1953,1962)
Associate Professor of Speech
B.A., Ohio Wesleyan, 1943; M.A., Columbia, 1951.
Robert Featherstone Barnes, Jr. (1965)
Associate Professor of Philosophy
B.S., M.I.T., 1957; M.A., Dartmouth, 1959; Ph.D., Berkeley,
1965.
Faculty and Staff 265
David Barrett III (1071)
Instructor in Education
B.S., West Chester, L954;M.Mus., Boston, 1962.
Lucile Lewis Barrett (1944, 1970)
Assistant to the Editor, llumni Bulletin
A.B., Syracuse, 1939.
William A. Barrett (1966, 1968)
Issoi tare Professor oj Electrical Engineering
B.S., Nebraska, 1952; M.S., 1953; Ph.D., Utah, 1957.
Donald Delyle Barry (1963, 1970)
Professor of Government
A.B., Ohio, 1956; M.A., Syracuse, 1959; Ph.D., 1963.
Sandra Lee Bartoli (1970)
Instructor in Education, Centennial School
B.S., St. Joseph's College (Maryland), 1963; M.S.,
Shippcnsburg. 1968.
Frederick Baus (1971)
Instructor in Education
A.B., Muhlenberg, 1967; M.A., Lehigh, 1968.
Edward G. Becker (1971)
Instructor in Military Science
SSG, U.S. Army.
Lynn Simpson Beedle (1947, 1957)
Professor of Civil Engineering; Director, Fritz Engineering
Laboratory
B.S. in C.E., Berkeley; M.S., Lehigh, 1949; Ph.D., 1952.
Ferdinand Pierre Beer (1947, 1957)
Professor and Chairman of the Department of Mechanics and
Mechanical Engineering
B.S., Geneva (Switzerland), 1933; M.S., 1935; Ph.D., 1937;
M.S., Paris, 1938.
George L. Beezer (1973)
Director, University Publications
B.A., Lehigh, 1957.
Carl Robert Beidleman (1967, 1972)
Associate Professor of Finance
B.S., Lafayette, 1954; M.B. A., Drexel, 1961; Ph.D., Penn,
1968.
Peter Grant Beidler (1963, 1972)
Associate Professor of English
B.A., Earlham, 1962; M.A., Lehigh, 1965; Ph.D., 1968.
David Morgan Bell (1972)
Assistant Professor of Biology
B.A., Lehigh 1967; Ph.D., Stanford, 1972.
Raymond Bell (1966, 1971)
Assistant Professor oj Education
Teaching Certificate, St. John's College, York (England),
1961; B.A., Leed U. Institute of Education (England); M. A.,
Temple, 1966; Ed.D., Lehigh, 1971.
Robert W. Bell (1969)
Director, University Bookstore
B.S., New York at Albany, 1952; M.S., 1960.
Russell Edward Benner (1962)
Professor of Mechanical Engineering
B.M.E., Cornell, 1947; M.S. in M.E., Lehigh, 1951 ; Ph.D.,
1959. P.E., Pennsylvania, 1970.
Grahame Bennett (1970)
Visiting Lecturer in Mathematics
B.Sc, Newcastle, 1966.
Brent W. Benson (1972)
Associate Professor of Physics
B.A., Knox College, 1963; M.S., 1965; Ph.D., Penn State,
1969.
Edward John Benz (1956, 1963)
Adjunct Professor of Medical Microbiology
B.S., Pittsburgh, 1944; M.D., 1946; M.S., Minnesota, 1952.
Ernest E. Bergmann (1969)
Assistant Professor of Physics
A.B., Columbia, 1964; M.A., Princeton, 1966; Ph.D., 1969.
Bartus Hendrik Bijsterbosch (1969)
Visiting Assistant Professor, Center for Surface and
Coatings Research
B.S., State University of Utrecht (Netherlands), 1965;
M.S., 1959; Ph.D., 1965.
Claire C. Biser (1970, 1972)
Assistant Registrar
Hartwig R. F. Blume (1967)
Research Associate in Physics
Dipl. Phys., University of Freiburg (Germany), 1962;
Ph.D., 1967.
Philip Anthony Blythe (1968, 1970)
Professor, Center for the Application of Mathematics
B.S., University of Manchester (England), 1958; Ph.D., 1961.
George H. Bodnar (1973)
Instructor in Accounting
B.S. Bucknell, 1970.
Michael G. Bolton (1971)
Director of Corporate and Foundation Resources
B.A., 1966; M.B.A., Lehigh, 1967.
266 Faculty and Staff
HelenS. Bond (1972)
Assistant Director of Women's Physical Education
B.S., Youngstown, 1956.
John W. Bonge (1972)
Associate Professor of Management
B.S., Princeton, 1957; M.B.A., 1959; Ph.D., Northwestern,
1968.
Garold Joseph Borse (1966, 1971)
Associate Professor of Physics
B.S., Detroit, 1962; M.S., Virginia, 1964; Ph.D., 1966.
Richard C. Brace (1970)
Assistant Professor of Aerospace Studies
B.A., Buffalo, 1957; B.S., Air Force Institute of
Technology, 1965; M.A.O.M., Berkeley, 1967. Major, USAF.
Henderson Bampfield Braddick (1956, 1972)
Professor of International Relations
A.B., Washington, 1942; LL.B., Harvard, 1949;
Ph.D., Washington, 1957.
Charles Wilfrid Brennan (1955, 1964)
Dean of Students
B.S., Alabama, 1934; M.B.A., 1953.
Frank S. Brenneman (1968)
Assistant Professor o^ Mathematics
B.A., Goshen, 1960; M.A., Penn State, 1965; Ph.D.,
Oklahoma State, 1967.
DelfordG. Britton (1971)
Assistant Professor of Aerospace Studies
B.A., Santa Clara, 1961; M.A., Southern California, 1969.
Captain, USAF.
Brian George Brockway (1971)
Dean of the College of Business and Economics, Professor of
Law
B.S., Northwestern, 1957; LL.B., Georgetown, 1961;
LL.M., 1963.
Arthur L. Brody (1957, 1971)
Professor and Chairman of Psychology
B.A., George Washington, 1951; Ph.D., Indiana, 1956.
Addison C. Bross (1967)
Assistant Professor of English
B.A., Davidson, 1959; M.A., Duke, 1960; Ph.D., Louisiana
State, 1967.
Forbes Taylor Brown (1970)
Professor of Mechanical Engineering
S.B., M.I.T., 1958; S.M., 1959; Sc.D., 1962.
Charles W. Brownstein (1971)
Assistant Professor of Government
A. B., Temple, 1965; M.A., 1967; Ph.D., Florida State, 1971.
Josef M. Brozek (1959, 1963)
Research Professor of Psychology
Ph.D., Charles (Prague), 1937.
Arthur William Brune (1952, 1971)
Associate Professor of Civil Engineering
B.S. in E.M., Missouri School of Mines, 1941; M.S. in E.M.,
1946; Ph.D., Penn State, 1952. P.E., Pennsylvania, 1957.
John Joseph Burbridge, Jr. (1962, 1964)
Instructor in Industrial Engineering
B.S. , Lehigh, 1962; M.S., 1964.
Sidney R. Butler (1969)
Associate Professor of Metallurgy and Materials Science
B.S., Maine, 1954; M.S., Penn State, 1956; Ph.D., 1960.
Ann Cali (1972)
Assistant Professor of Biology
B.S., Florida, 1964; M.S., Ohio State,
1966;Ph.D., 1970.
Clarence Bowen Campbell (1955, 1966)
Dean of Residence
B.A., Temple, 1937; M.A., Lehigh, 1947.
BirutaCap (1969)
Assistant Professor of French, Modern Foreign Languages and
Literatures
B.A., Connecticut, 1960; M.A., Rutgers, 1961; Ph.D., 1968.
Bobb Carson (1971)
Assistant Professor of Geology
B.A., Carleton College, 1965; M.S., Washington, 1967; Ph.D.,
1971.
Alfred Joseph Castaldi (1964, 1972)
Professor of Education and Director, Division of Elementary
Education, School of Education
B.S., Penn, 1951; M.S., 1956; Ed.D., 1964.
Edward Charles (1969)
Instructor in Education
B.A., Bluffton, 1953; LL.B., Rutgers, 1953; M.A., Temple,
1961; Ed.D., Lehigh, 1970.
Marvin Charles (1970)
Assistant Professor of Chemical Engineering
B.S., Brooklyn Polytechnic, 1964; M.S., 1967; Ph.D., 1970.
John Mcllvain Cheezum, Jr. (1964, 1972)
Fiscal Associate, Office of Research
A.B.,Penn, 1964.
Faculty and Staff 267
John C. Chen il970)
Professoi oj Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics
B.Ch.E., Coopci Union, L 95 6; M.S., Carnegie-Mellon, 1959;
Ph.D., Michigan, 1961.
Tony E. P. Chen (1972)
Assistant Professor oj Mechanics
B.S., National Chung-hsing University (Taiwan), 1966: M.S.,
Lehigh, 1969; Ph.D., 1972.
Wai-FahChen (1966, 1971)
Associate Professor of Civil Engineering
B.S., Cheng-Kung University, 1959; M.S., Lehigh, 1963;
Ph.D., Brown, 1966.
Chang-Shuei Cheng (1965)
Instructor iti Physics
B.S., National Taiwan University, 1958; M.S., National Tsing
Hua University, 1960; Ph.D., Lehigh, 1968.
Thomas C. Cheng (1969, 1970)
Professor of Biology and Director, Center for Health Sciences
and Institute for Pathobiology
A. B., Wayne State, 1952; M.S., Virginia, 1956; Ph.D., 1958.
YeT. Chou (1968, 1970)
Professor of Metallurgy and Materials Science
B.S., Chungking University, 1945; M.S., Carnegie-Mellon,
1954; Ph.D., 1957.
Glenn James Christensen (1939, 1969)
University Distinguished Professor
B.A., Wooster, 1935; Ph.D., Yale, 1939; LL.D., College of
Notre Dame (Md.), 1966.
Stuart R.Christie (1971)
Assistant to the Director of Development
B.A., Washington and Jefferson, 1969.
Maria C.Chun (1969)
Postdoctoral Research Assistant in Chemistry
B.S., Manila University (Philippines), 1965; Ph.D.,
Perm State, 1969.
Charles K. Clarke (1969)
Instructor in Metallurgy and Materials Science
B.S., Alabama, 1968.
Curtis William Clump (1955, 1960)
Professor of Chemical Engineering
B.S., Bucknell, 1947; M.S., 1949; Ph.D., Carnegie-Mellon,
1954.
Alvin Cohen (1962, 1970)
Professor of Economics
B.A., George Washington, 1953; M.B.A., Columbia, 1955;
Florida, 1962.
Robert Carlton Cole (1964, 1972)
Assistant Professor oj English
A.B., Marshall, 1959; M. A., Wake Forest, 1964; Ph.D.,
Lehigh, 1971.
Frank Thomas Colon (1965, 1967)
IsjVi iate Professor oj Government
A.B., Geneva College, 1954; M.A., Pittsburgh, 1960;
Ph.D., 1963.
Mary A. Conahan (1971)
Assistant Professor of Education
B.A., Penn State, 1949; E.D., Lehigh, 1971
George Powell Conard II (1952, 1960)
Professor and Chairman of Metallurgy and Materials Science
B.S., Brown, 1941; M.S., Stevens Institute, 1948; Sc.D.,
M.I.T., 1952.
Janet Donna Connor (1971)
Assistant to the Director, Public Information
B. A. .Moravian, 1969; M. A., Rutgers, 1971.
Samuel Irvin Connor (1961)
Director of Public Information
B.A., Lehigh, 1949.
Robert William Coughlin (1965, 1971)
Professor of Chemical Engineering
B.S., Fordham, 1956; Ph.D., Cornell, 1961. P.E..
1964.
New Jersey,
John Nelson Covert (1967)
Assistant Professor of Physical Education, Varsity Cross
Country and Track Coach
B.S.Ed., Buffalo State, 1953.
Raymond Gibson Cowherd (1956, 1963)
Professor of History
A.B., William Jewell, 1933; M.A., Penn, 1936; Ph.D., 1940.
Edward J. Crawford (1972)
Instructor in Education, Centennial School
B.A., Lehigh, 1971; M.Ed., Syracuse, 1972.
Cloyd Criswell (1947, 1971)
Associate Professor of English
B.S. in Ed., Millersville State, 1933; M.A., New York, 1937.
Robert Benjamin Cutler, (1954, 1962)
Professor and Chairman of Music, University Organist
A.B., Bucknell, 1934; M.A., Columbia, 1935.
Walter Emil Dahlke (1964)
Professor of Electrical Engineering
Diploma, University of Berlin; Ph.D., 1936; Ph.D. (habil),
University of Jena, 1939.
268 Faculty and Staff
George F. Dalton (1970)
Executive Director, Institute for the Development of
Riverine and Estuarine Systems
B.S., United States Naval Academy, 1938.
John Hartley Daniels (1964, 1970)
Associate Professor in Civil Engineering
B.S., University of Alberta (Canada), 1955; M.S., Illinois,
1959; Ph.D., Lehigh, 1967. P.E., Alberta, Canada, 1955.
Joseph F. Dannenfelser (1971)
Assistant Professor of Military Science
B.S., Loyola College, 1967. Captain, U.S. Army.
Paul L. Davis (1969)
Assistant Professor of Mathematics
A.B., West Virginia, 1962; M.S., 1962; Ph.D.,
Carnegie-Mellon, 1969.
Warren B. Davis (1971)
Associate Professor of Education
A.B., Ohio, 1933; M.A., Ohio State,
1939; Ph.D., 1952.
Edna Sophia DeAngeli (1963, 1970)
Associate Professor of Classics
B.S., Temple, 1938; M.A., Penn, 1960; Ph.D.:
1965.
1959; Ph.D., 1964.
Jack Angelo DeBellis (1964, 1969)
Associate Professor of English
A.B., Florida, 1957; A.M., U.C.L.A.
Dorothy Delp (1971)
Nurse, Health Service
R.N., St. Luke's Hospital, 1946.
Margaret Linn Dennis (1953, 1968)
Assistant Librarian, Readers' Service
A.B., Allegheny, 1939; B.S. in L.S., Syracuse, 1940.
Jacob De Rooy (1967, 1969)
Assistant Professor of Economics
A.B., Rutgers, 1963; A.M., 1965; Ph.D., 1969.
Alfred James Diefenderfer (1961, 1965)
Associate Professor of Chemistry
B.S., Pittsburgh, 1957; Ph.D., M.I.T., 1961.
Dennis Roby Diehl, (1972)
Assistant to the Executive Director, Alumni Association
B.S., Lehigh, 1970;M.B.A., 1971.
Doris Dillman (1970)
Assistant to the Dean, Graduate School
Andrew D. Dimargonas (1972)
Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering
Mechanical Engineer, Athens National University of Technology,
1961; Ph.D., Rensselaer, 1970.
George Anson Dinsmore (1955, 1967)
Associate Professor of Civil Engineering
B.E., Yale, 1946; M.S., Colorado, 1955.
Thomas L. Dinsmore (1965, 1967)
Administrator, Metallurgy and Materials Science
B.S., Rochester, 1946; M.S., Princeton, 1948.
Harry A. Dower (1970)
Adjunct Professor of Law
A.B., Lafayette, 1940; L.L.B., Yale, 1948.
Joseph Albert Dowling (1958, 1967)
Professor of History
A.B., Lincoln Memorial, 1948; M. A., New York, 1951; Ph.D.,
1958.
George Clarence Driscoll, Jr. (1950, 1965)
Professor of Civil Engineering; Associate Director, Fritz
Engineering Laboratory
B.S. in C.E., Rutgers, 1950; M.S., Lehigh, 1952; Ph.D.,
1958. P.E., Pennsylvania, 1969.
Glenny Dunbar (1972)
Instructor in Education
A.A., Finch, 1965; B. A., Boston, 1967; M.A., Fordham, 1972.
Aurie Nichols Dunlap (1948, 1972)
Professor of International Relations
A.B., Union (New York), 1929; A.M., Columbia, 1931; Ph.D.,
1955.
Frederick Homer Dunlap (1965)
Assistant Professor of Physical Education, Varsity Head
Football Coach
B.A., Colgate, 1950.
Deborah J. Dwyer (1971)
Assistant to the Director of Undergraduate Financial Aid
A. A., Green Mountain, 1967; B.S., Springfield (Mass.), 1969.
Nikolai Eberhardt (1962, 1970)
Professor of Electrical Engineering
Dipl. Engr., University of Munich, 1957; Ph.D., 1962.
Evelyn Strawn Eberman (1955, 1972)
Assistant Director of Residence Halls
B.A., Swarthmore, 1921.
Ernest Nevin Dilworth (1949, 1967)
Professor of English
Ph.B., Kenyon, 1933; M.A., Pittsburgh, 1937; Ph.D..
Columbia, 1948.
Faculty and Staff 269
Arthur Roy Bckardt (1951, 1956)
Professoi and I hairman oj Religion Studies
B. \ . Brooklyn, 1942; B.D., Yale. L944; Ph.D., Columbia,
1947; L.H.D., Hebrew Union College, Jewish Institute of
Religion, 1969.
Dominic G. B. Edelen (1969)
Professor, Center for the Application oj Mathematics
B.E.S., Johns Hopkins, 1954;M.S.E., 1956; Ph.D., 1965.
Andrew J. Edmiston (1967)
<sor of Education, Director, Counseling Service
A.B., West Virginia, 1951; M.S., Miami, 1953; Ph.D., Pcnn
State. 1960.
Bennett Eisenberg (1972)
Assistant Professor of Mathematics
A.B., Dartmouth, 1964; Ph.D., M.I.T., 1968.
Hsia-Yang Fang (1966, 1969)
issoi iate Professor oj t 'ivil Engineering
B.S., Hangchow University, 1947; M.S., Purdue, 1956; Ph.D.,
West Virginia, 1966.
Douglas David Feavcr (1956, 1966)
Professor of Classics
B.A., Toronto, 1948; M. A., Johns Hopkins, 1949; Ph.D., 1951.
Frank Joseph Fcigl (1967, 1970)
Associate Professor of Physics
A.B.. Notre Dame, 1958; Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh,
1965.
Jacqueline Marie Fetsko (1949, 1966)
Administrative Assistant, Center for Surface and Coatings
Research
B.A., Penn, 1946; M.S., Lehigh, 1953.
Mohammed S. El-Aasser (1972)
Research Associate, Center for Surface and Coatings Research
B.S., Alexandria U. (Egypt), 1962; M.S., 1966; Ph.D., McGill,
1972.
Jonathan Britton Elkus (1957, 1965)
Professor of Music
B.A., Berkeley, 1953; M.A., Stanford, 1954.
George Mark Ellis (1967)
Assistant Dean, College of Arts and Science, and Associate
Professor of History
A.B., Yale, 1943; A.M., Harvard, 1947; Ph.D., 1952.
John H. Ellis (1971)
Associate Professor of History
B.S., Memphis State, 1955; M.A., 1957; Ph.D., Tulane, 1962.
John Stuart Ellison (1970)
Assistant Professor of Military Science
B.S., Illinois, 1964. Captain, U.S. Army.
Raymond Jay Emrich (1946, 1958)
Professor of Physics
A.B., Princeton, 1938; Ph.D., 1946.
James Vandeusen Eppes (1950, 1972)
Professor of Mechanical Engineering
B.A., Virginia, 1928; M.E., Cornell, 1931; M.S. in M.E.,
Lehigh, 1943.
Fazil Erdogan (1952, 1963)
Professor of Mechanics
Yuk. Muh., Technical Institute of Istanbul, 1948; Ph.D.,
Lehigh, 1955.
Barry J. Fetterman (1968)
Instructor in Physical Education
B.S., Delaware, 1963.
Patricia A. Finady (1971)
Administrative Assistant, Counseling
B. A. .Moravian, 1965.
William J. Finckejr. (1972)
Social Sciences Cataloger
B.A., New York at Oneonta, 1970; M.L.S., New York at Albany,
1971.
John William Fisher (1961, 1969)
Professor of Civil Engineering and Associate Director,
Fritz Engineering Laboratory
B.S., Washington, 1956; M.S., Lehigh, 1958; Ph.D., 1964.
P.E., Illinois, 1960.
Richard B. Fisher (1970)
Assistant Director of Placement and Personnel Services
B.A., Moravian, 1966; M.A., Lehigh, 1970.
Thomas Fleck, Jr. (1965, 1970)
Assistant Professor of Education and Principal, Centennial
School
B.S., West Chester, 1956; M.Ed., Temple, I960.; Ed.D.,
Lehigh, 1970.
Catherine L. Flecksteiner (1945, 1965)
Serials Cataloger
Hubert L. Flesher (1971)
Chaplain and Assistant Professor of Religion Studies
B.A., Pomona College, 1954; B.D., Yale, 1958; M.A., 1961.
F. Laird Evans (1969)
Instructor in Centennial School
B.A., Perm State, 1966; M.Ed., Lehigh, 1969.
270 Faculty and Staff
Robert Thomas Folk (1961, 1966)
Professor of Physics
B.S., in E.E., Lehigh, 1953; B.S., in Phys., 1954; M.S.,
1955; Ph.D., 1958.
Lou V. Forcum (1971)
Assistant Bursar
Roy Foster (1967)
Assistant Director, Public Information
A.B., Ursinus, 1951.
Alan Shivers Foust (1952, 1965)
McCann Professor of Chemical Engineering
B.S., Texas, 1928; M.S., 1930; Ph.D., Michigan, 1938. P.E.,
Michigan, 1947.
Frederick Mayhew Fowkes (1968)
Professor and Chairman of Chemistry
B.S., University of Chicago, 1936; Ph.D., 1938.
Wyman Beall Fowler, Jr. (1966, 1969)
Professor of Physics
B.S., Lehigh, 1959; Ph.D., Rochester, 1963.
Edward J. Gallagher (1969, 1970)
Assistant Professor of English
B.S., St. Joseph's, 1964; Ph.D., Notre Dame, 1970.
Robert Taylor Gallagher (1942, 1964)
Professor of Mining Engineering; Associate Dean, College of
Engineering
B.S. in E.M., Penn State, 1927; M.A., in Geol., Missouri,
1938; D.E.M., Colorado School of Mines, 1941. P.E.,
Pennsylvania, 1945; New Jersey, 1955.
Gerald Garb (1967)
Professor of Economics
B.S. , Penn, 1948; M. A., Berkeley, 1951; Ph.D., 1957.
Arthur Parcel Gardner (1958, 1966)
Associate Professor of German, Modern Foreign Languages and
Literatures
A.B., Duke, 1944; A.M., Harvard, 1945; Ph.D., 1950.
Duncan Buchanan Gardiner, Jr. (1972)
Instructor in Russian, Modern Foreign Languages and
Literatures
B.A., Miami of Ohio, 1961; M. A., Indiana, 1965.
James Richard Frakes (1958, 1967)
Professor of English
B.A., Penn State, 1948; M.A., Chicago, 1949; Ph.D., Penn,
1953.
J. Bruce Gardiner (1972)
Head Swimming Coach, and Assistant Director of Intramurals
and Recreation
B.S., Springfield, 1968; M.Sc, 1972.
Barbara Brown Frankel (1973)
Instructor in Cultural Anthropology
Ph.B., Chicago, 1947; B.A., Goddard, 1966; M.A., Temple,
1970; M.A., Princeton, 1971.
Catherine Franklin (1959, 1971)
Director of Central Copying and Mailing
Dermot M. Garrett (1973)
Instructor in Education
B.Sc.Ed., Christ's College (Liverpool, England), 1970.
James J. Garrigan (1972)
Instructor in Education
A.B., Seton Hall, 1963; M.A., 1965.
Paul Justus Franz, Jr. (1944, 1962)
Vice President— Development
B.S. in Bus. Adm., Lehigh, 1944; M.A., 1955.
John A. Fratto (1972)
Assistant Professor of Aerospace Studies
B.A., Fairmount State, 1967; M.B. A., Missouri, 1972.
Captain, U.S. A. F.
Bruce Dale Fritchman (1969, 1972)
Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering
B.S., Lehigh, 1960; E.P., 1961; M.S., 1963; Ph.D., 1967.
Matthew W. Gaffney (1971)
Associate Professor of Education
A.B., Hobart, 1935; M.A., Rochester, 1941; Ed.D., Buffalo,
1953.
Juraj Gebauer (1969)
Postdoctoral Research Associate in Chemical Engineering
M.S., Komensky University (Bratislava), 1958; Slovak
Academy of Sciences, 1965.
Jacob Myer Geist (1959)
Lecturer in Chemical Engineering
B.S., Purdue, 1940; M.S., Penn State, 1942; Ph.D., Michigan,
1950.
Bhaskar Kumar Ghosh (1961, 1968)
Professor of Mathematics
B.Sc, Calcutta (India), 1955; Ph.D., London, 1959.
Thomas de Magnin Gilburg (1971)
Assistant Varsity Football Coach and Varsity Lacrosse Coach
B. A., Syracuse, 1961.
Linda Galda (1971)
Assistant Operations Supervisor of Administrative Systems
B.A., Rider, 1969.
Faculty and Staff 271
Jerome J. Gillen (1973)
Idjunct \ssistant Professot o] History
A.B., St. Petei's (New Jersey), 1956; M.A., 1968; Ph.D.,
Lehigh, 1972.
Frederick Robert Gladeck (1966)
Instructor in International Relations
B.A., Lehigh, I960; M.A., Perm, 1964.
Elmer William Glick (1949, 1972)
Vice President and Treasurer
B.A., Lehigh, 1933.
William Monroe Glosc III (1960, 1967)
Accountant
B.S. in Bus. Adm., Lehigh, 1958.
Lawrence D. Glueck (1971)
Assistant Football Coach
B.S., Villanova, 1963; B.A., 1970.
Hans Rueniger Gnerlich (1967, 1969)
Instructor in Electrical Engineering
Dipl. Ing., Technical University (Karlsruhe), 1967; M.S.,
Lehigh, 1969.
Joseph I. Goldstein (1968, 1970)
Associate Professor of Metallurgy and Materials Science
B.S., M.I.T., 1960; S.M., 1962; Sc.D., 1964.
Arthur Freeman Gould (1947, 1953)
Professor and Chairman of Industrial Engineering
S.B., M.I.T., 1938; M.S., Lehigh, 1949. P.E., Pennsylvania,
1949.
Christa V. Graf (1970)
Adjunct Assistant Professor of History
B.A., Berkeley, 1962; M.A., Cornell, 1965; Ph.D., 1970.
Walter H. Graf (1968)
Associate Professor of Civil Engineering
Dipl. Ing., University of Vienna (Austria), 1959; Ph.D.,
Berkeley, 1963.
Margaret C. Grandovic (1962, 1969)
Assistant Professor of Education
B.S., Temple, 1938; M.Ed., 1957; Ed.D., 1968.
Marguerite B. Gravez (1957, 1971)
Lecturer in Mathematics
B.A., Hunter, 1950; M.A., Radcliffe, 1951.
James Sproat Green V (1966, 1969)
Assistant Professor of Information Science
B.A., Lehigh, 1966; M.A., 1968; Ph.D., 1969.
David Mason Greene (1958, 1964)
Professot oj English
H.A., San Diego State, 1951-.M.A., Berkeley, 1952
1958.
Ph.D.,
James A. Grcenleaf (1970)
Instructor in Management ami Finance
B.S., Penn State, 1964; M.S., Lehigh, 1 966.
Mikcll Porter Groover (1966, 1969)
Assistant Professor of Industrial Engineering
B.A., Lehigh, 1961; B.S. , 1962; M.S., 1966; Ph.D., 1969.
Charles Guditus (1964, 1968)
Professor of Education and Director, Division of Educational
Administration, School of Education
B.S., Penn State, 1950; M.S., Bucknell, 1952; Ed.D., Lehigh,
1965.
Samuel Linial Gulden (1953, 1967)
Associate Professor of Mathematics
B.S., City College of New York, 1949; M. A., Princeton, 1950.
Gopal D. Gupta (1972)
Assistant Professor of Mechanical Engineering
B.Tech., Indian Institute of Technology (Kanpur, India),
1967; M.S., Lehigh, 1968; Ph.D., 1970.
Clark W. Hahn (1967)
Assistant Accountant
B. A. .Muhlenberg, 1972.
Walter Charles Hahn, Jr. (1963, 1972)
Professor of Metallurgy and Materials Science and Program
Manager, Institute for Metal Forming
B.S., Lafayette, 1952; M.S., Penn State, 1958; Ph.D., 1960.
John McVickar Haight, Jr. (1949, 1967)
Professor of History
A.B., Princeton, 1940; M.A., Yale, 1947;Ph.D.,
Northwestern, 1953.
Theodore Hailperin (1946, 1961)
Professor of Mathematics
B.S., Michigan, 1939; Ph.D., Cornell, 1943.
James W. Harper (1971)
Director, Community Relations
B.S., Northwestern, 1954; M.S., 1956.
Nathan Walter Harris (1970)
Assistant Dean of Student Life
B.A., Lincoln University, 1965.
Robert Richard Harson (1966)
Assistant Professor of English
B.A., Wagner, 1963; M.A., Ohio, 1964; Ph.D., 1966.
272 Faculty and Staff
Ronald John Hartranft (1966, 1972)
Associate Professor of Mechanics
B.S., Lehigh, 1963; M.S., 1964; Ph.D., 1966.
Miloslav Hartman (1969)
Postdoctoral Research Associate in Chemical Engineering
M.S., Technical University (Prague), 1960; Ph.D., Czech
Academy of Science (Prague), 1965.
Albert Edward Hartung (1947, 1968)
Professor and Chairman of English
B.A., Lehigh, 1947; M.A., 1949; Ph.D., 1957.
D. P. H. Hasselman (1970)
Associate Professor of Metallurgy and Materials Science
B.Sc, Queen's University, 1957; M.A., Sc, University of
British Columbia, 1960; Ph.D., Berkeley, 1966.
Emil Andrew Havach (1941, 1949)
Head Trainer
D. Surg. Chirop., Temple, 1936.
Michael P. Hayes (1968)
Visiting Associate Professor in Center for Application of
Mathematics
B.Sc, University College (Galway), 1956; M.Sc, 1957; Ph.D.
Thomas Morris Haynes (1952, 1969)
Professor of Philosophy and Director, Freshman Seminars
A.B., Butler, 1941; M. A., Illinois, 1949; Ph.D., 1949.
Leroy Arlan Heckman (1967)
Assistant Professor of Physical Education and Varsity
Basketball Coach
B.S. Ed., Kutztown State, 1949; M. A., Colorado State, 1961.
Stanley Frederick Heffner (1930, 1946)
Manager, Bookstore
Ned D. Heindel (1966, 1969)
Associate Professor of Chemistry and Director, Division of
Biological Chemistry and Biophysics, Center for Health
Sciences
B.S., Lebanon Valley, 1959; M.S., Delaware, 1961; Ph.D.,
1963.
Sidney Samuel Herman (1962, 1971)
Professor of Biology and Director, South Jersey Wetlands
Institute
B.S., Georgetown, 1953; M.S., Rhode Island, 1958; Ph.D.,
1962.
Richard Warren Hertzberg (1964, 1968)
Associate Professor of Metallurgy and Materials Science
B.S., City College of New York, 1960; M.S., M.I.T., 1961;
Ph.D., Lehigh, 1965.
AnnaPirscenok Herz (1966, 1972)
Professor of Russian and Chairman of Modern Foreign
Languages and Literatures
B.S., Penn, 1949; M. A., 1950; M. A., Columbia, 1951; Ph.D.,
Penn, 1956.
Gail Chadwell Herz (1972)
Lecturer in Mathematics
B.S., Nevada, 1964; M.S., Lehigh, 1970; Ph.D., 1972.
Leon Nathaniel Hicks, Jr. (1970)
Assistant Professor of Fine Arts
B.S., Kansas State, 1959; M.A., M.F.A., Iowa, 1963.
Frank H. Hielscher (1971)
Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering
B.S., Drexel, 1961; M.S., Denver, 1963; Ph.D., Illinois,
1966.
Mary Joanne Hill (1967)
Editorial Associate, Office of Research
B.S., Carnegie-Mellon, 1959; M.A., Pittsburgh, 1964.
Donald John Hillman (1960, 1964)
Professor and Chairman of Philosophy and Director, Center
for Information Science
B.A., Cambridge (England), 1955; M.A., 1959; M.Litt., 1962.
Peter Daniel Hilton (1969)
Assistant Professor of Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics
B.S., Lehigh, 1965; M.S., Harvard, 1966; Ph.D., 1969.
Terence John Hirst (1968, 1972)
Assistant Professor of Civil Engineering and Associate
Director, Marine Geotechnical Laboratory
B.A.S., University of British Columbia, 1962;M.A.S., 1966;
Ph.D., Berkeley, 1968.
James B. Hobbs (1966, 1970)
Professor of Management and Accounting and Chairman of
Management and Finance
A.B., Harvard, 1952;M.B.A., Kansas, 1957;D.B.A., Indiana,
1962.
Wayne Hoffman (1968, 1973)
Assistant Director, Administrative Systems Office
Roy Cecil Herrenkohl, Jr. (1966, 1969)
Associate Professor of Social Psychology and Methodology and
Director, Behavioral Science Program, Center for Social
Research
B.A., Washington & Lee, 1954; Ph.D., N.Y.U., 1966.
Frank Holcombe (1969)
Postdoctoral Fellow in Chemistry
B.S., Old Dominion College, 1964.
Faculty and Staff 273
Robert Mark Holcombe . 1963, 1 168)
Director oj Development
B.S., I ehigh, 1958; M.S., 1969.
William Fowler Hollabaugh (1960, 1 072)
Manager oj Systems Programming, Computing Center
B.S., Lehigh, 1959; M.S., I960; Ph.D., 1966.
foseph I'. Holzer(1970)
Administrative Assistant, Computing Center
Carl Sanford Holzingcr (1959, 1968)
Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering
B.S., Lehigh, 1956; M.S., 1957; Ph.D., 1963.
John W. Mum (1972)
Dean oj thet ollege oj Irts and Science and Professo) oj
l-nglish
B.A., Oklahoma, 1949; B.D., 1952; Ph.D., Chicago, 1961.
Ruth A. Hurley (1971)
Associate Dean oj Student Life
B.A.. New Hampshire, 1963; M.S., Indiana, 1966.
Allen E. Hye (1973)
Assistant Professor of German, Modern Foreign Languages and
Literatures
B.A., Franklin and Marshall, 1966; M.A., Middlcbury, 1967;
Ph.D., Connecticut, 1972.
Frank Scott Hook (1952, 1965)
Professor of English
A.B., Missouri, 1942; M.A., 1947; Ph.D., Yale, 1952.
Donald Gary Ingalls (1969)
Electronics Specialist, Center for Marine and Environmental
Studies
Ronald F. Horvath (1972)
Issistant Planner, Campus Planning Office
B.A., Lehigh, 1972.
David D. Hott (1971)
Instructor in Industrial Engineering
B.S., Salem, 1964; M.S., Pittsburgh, 1967; M.S., N.Y.U., 1971.
LynneH. Hott (1971)
Instructor in Industrial Engineering
B.S., Pittsburgh, 1967; M.S., Stevens Institute, 1970.
Richard Hsia (1969)
Postdoctoral Fellow in Chemistry
B.S., Cheng Kung University (Taiwan), 1963; Ph.D., McGill
University (Canada), 1969.
Chuan-Chih Hsiung (1952, 1960)
Professor of Mathematics
B.S., National Chekiang (China), 1936; Ph.D., Michigan
State, 1948.
Jon Terence Innes (1965, 1968)
Assistant Professor of Economics
B.S., Penn State, 1958; M.A., Oregon, 1961; Ph.D., 1967.
George Irwin (1967)
Faculty Associate, Fritz Lab
A.B., Knox College, 1930; M.S., Illinois, 1933; Ph.D., 1937.
George John Jackson (1972)
Adjunct Professor of Biology
B.A., Chicago, 1952; M.S., 1954; Ph.D., 1958.
Thomas Edgar Jackson (1937, 1969)
Professor of Mechanical Engineering
B.S., Carnegie-Mellon, 1934; M.S., Lehigh, 1937. P.E.,
Pennsylvania, 1946.
Eustace Anthony James (1962, 1972)
Associate Professor of English
A.B., Princeton, 1958; M. A., Pennsylvania, 1960; Ph.D.,
1965.
Ti Huang (1967)
Associate Professor of Civil Engineering
B.S., Tangshan Engineering College, 1948; M.S., Michigan,
1952; Ph.D., 1960.
John Joseph Huber (1968)
Assistant Professor of Military Science
B.A., Pennsylvania Military College, 1963. Major,
Transportation Corps, U.S. Army.
Volker Huelck (1968)
Research Associate in Chemical Engineering
B.S., University of Karlsruhe (Germany), 1967.
Matthew H. Hulbert (1969)
Assistant Professor of Chemistry
B.S., Washington & Lee, 1964; M.S. Wisconsin, 1967; Ph.D.
1969.
M. M. P.Janssen (1967)
Research Associate in Chemistry
M.S., Technological University Eindhoven (Netherlands),
1960; Chemistry Engineering, 1963; Ph.D., Technological
Sciences, 1966.
George Robert Jenkins (1948, 1963)
Director of the Office of Research and Professor of Geology
B.A., Colorado, 1936; Ph.M., Wisconsin, 1938.
Finn Bjorn Jensen (1947, 1954)
MacFarlane Professor in Theoretical Economics and
Chairman of Economics
A.B., Southern California, 1934; M.A., 1935; Ph.D., 1940.
274 Faculty and Staff
Robert Leroy Johnson (1970, 1972)
Associate Professor of Civil Engineering and Director,
Environmental Engineering Laboratory, CMES
B.S., Iowa State, 1957; M.S., 1963; Ph.D., 1969. P.E., Iowa.
Robert W. Johnson (1969)
Assistant Professor of Mathematics
A.B., Columbia, 1962; M.S., City University of New York,
1965; Ph.D., 1969.
Colin E. Jones (1970)
Assistant Professor of Physics
B.S., Carnegie-Mellon, 1963; M.S., Illinois, 1965; Ph.D..
1970.
Marshall L. Kaufman (1972)
Assistant Professor of English and Technical Director of
Special University Events
B.A., Bridgeport, 1969; M.A., Trinity at San Antonio, 1972.
Edwin J. Kay (1971)
Assistant Professor of Psychology
B.S., Rensselaer, 1964; M.S., Lehigh, 1966; Ph.D.
(mathematics), 1968; Ph.D. (psychology), 1972.
Yakovos Kazakia (1972)
Research Associate, Center for the Application of Mathematics
M.Sc, Istanbul Technological University, 1968; Ph.D., Lehigh,
1972.
Reese D.Jones (1969)
Adjunct Professor of Economics
B.S., Wilkes, 1955; M.S., Penn, 1957.
Robert Griffith Jones (1965, 1969)
Associate Professor of Social Psychology
A.B., Davidson, 1958; B.D., Yale, 1961; Ph.D., Duke, 1966.
John Daniel Keefe (1965, 1971)
Assistant Professor of Economics
B.S., Lehigh, 1948; M.A., Miami (Florida), 1955.
C. Merris Keen, Jr. (1967)
Manager, Fraternity Services
B.S., Lehigh, 1948.
Carey Bonthron Joynt (1951, 1960)
Professor and Chairman of International Relations
B.A., Western Ontario, 1945; M.A., 1948; Ph.D., Clark, 1951.
Safeta Sophie Juka (1972)
Assistant Professor of French, Modern Foreign Languages and
Literatures
Lie. Litt., Sorbonne, 1950; Dr. d'Univ., 1969.
Arturs Kalnins (1965, 1967)
Professor of Mechanics and Director, Division of
Bioengineering, Center for Health Sciences
B.S., Michigan, 1955; M.S., 1956; Ph.D., 1960.
George Eugene Kane (1950, 1964)
Professor of Industrial Engineering
B.S., Penn State, 1948; M.S., Lehigh, 1954. P.E.,
Pennsylvania, 1955.
Alvin Sheldon Kanofsky (19 67, 1971)
Associate Professor of Physics
B.A., Penn, 1961; M.S., 1962; Ph.D., 1966.
John J. Karakash (1946, 1966)
Distinguished Professor and Dean, College of Engineering
B.S., Duke, 1937; M.S., Penn, 1938. P.E., Pennsylvania,
1948.
William E. Keim (1967)
Lecturer in Education
B.S., Millersville State, 1949; M.A., 1953; D.Ed., 1956.
Elsie L. Kellerman (1966)
Research Associate, Center for Surface and Coatings Research
A.B., Mt. Holyoke, 1959;Ph.D., Penn, 1963.
Richard Kellerman (1967)
Research Associate, Center for Surface and Coatings Research
B.S., Manchester (England), 1966; Ph.D., Lehigh, 1972.
John L. Kemmerer (1966)
Assistant Purchasing Agent
Kathleen A. Kemmerle (1970)
Systems Programmer, Administrative Systems Office
B.S., Moravian, 1969.
Joseph P. Kender (1968, 1971)
Associate Professor of Education
A.B., Mt. St. Mary's College, 1952; M. A., Villanova, 1955;
Ed.D., Penn, 1967.
Robert W. Kennedy (1968)
Instructor in Physical Education
B.S., West Virginia, 1962.
Andrew James Kasarda (1968, 1971)
Associate Professor of Information Sciences, and Associate
Director, Center for Information Science
B.A., Penn State, 1962; M.S., Lehigh, 1966; Ph.D., 1968.
Samir Anton Khabbaz (1960, 1968)
Professor of Mathematics
B.A., Bethel, 1954; M.A., Kansas, 1956; Ph.D., 1960.
Frank J. Kidder III (1972)
Instructor in Education
B.S., Ursinus, 1969; M.Ed., Lehigh, 1971.
Faculty and Staff 215
Vong Wook Kim ,1'H>8)
[ssistant Pi < Physics
B.S., Seoul National University, I960; M.S., 1962; Ph.D.,
Michigan, 1968.
Jerry Porter King (1962, 1968)
Professor o] Mathematics
B.S., Kentucky, 1958; M.S., 1959; Ph.D., 1962.
Martin Eugene Kipp (1972)
Instructor in Mechanics
B.S., Lehigh, 1967; M.S., 1968.
Charles Edward Klatt (1969)
Assistant Professor of Military Science
B.S., Michigan, 1963. Captain, U.S. Army.
Lynn Diannc Klein (1970)
Production Assistant, University Publications
B. A., Muhlenberg, 1970.
Mary R. Kleinginna (1972)
Instructor in Education
B.A., Wilkes, 1963; M.S.Ed., Temple, 1971.
Kamil Klier (1967, 1968)
Associate Professor of Chemistry
B.S., Chemico-Technological University (Prague), 1954.
Gretchen A. Krasley (1970)
Instructor in Education
B. A., Muhlenberg, 1968; M.Ed., Lehigh, 1970.
Michael R. Krasley (1971)
instructor in Education
B.S., Moravian, 1965.
George Krauss, Jr. (1963, 1972)
Professor of Metallurgy and Materials Science
B.S., Lehigh, 1955; M.S., M.I.T., 1958; Sc.D., 1961.
Steven Krawiec (1970)
Assistant Professor of Biology
A.B., Brown, 1963; Ph.D., Yale, 1968.
Philip L. Kreider (1970)
Acting Director, University Health Service
A.B., Dartmouth, 1953; M.D., Temple, 1957.
Joseph R. Kress (1971)
Instructor in Military Science
MSG, U.S. Army
Leon Elwood Krouse (1951, 1963)
Associate Professor of Finance
B.A., Susquehanna, 1941; M.S., Bucknell, 1947; Ph.D..
New York, 1958.
Alfred Paul Koch (1946, 1961)
Professor of Accounting
B.S., Bloomsburg State, 1939; M.S., Bucknell, 1940. C.P.A.,
Pennsylvania, 1952.
Winfred Kohls (1969)
Adjunct Professor of History
B.A., Augustana, 1951; M.A., California at Berkeley, 1959;
Ph.D., 1967.
Celal Nizamettin Kostem (1966, 1972)
Associate Professor of Civil Engineering
B.S., Technical University of Istanbul, 1960; M.S., 1961;
Ph.D., Arizona, 1966.
Ralph Wayne Kraft (1962, 1965)
New Jersey Zinc Professor of Metallurgy and Materials
Science
B.S., Lehigh, 1948; M.S., Michigan, 1956; Ph.D., 1958.
Charles Stephen Kraihanzel (1962, 1970)
Professor of Chemistry
Sc.B., Brown, 1957; M.S., Wisconsin, 1959; Ph.D., 1962.
Paul F. Kram (1971)
Instructor, School of Education
B.A., Moravian, 1965; M.A., Lehigh, 1967.
John Milton Kulicki (1971)
Instructor in Civil Engineering
B.A., Lafayette, 1965; M.S., Lehigh, 1967.
Donald H. Kunkel (1971)
Associate Professor of Military Science
B.S., St. Peter's (New Jersey), 1960. Major, U.S. Army.
EUa Jane Kunkle (1971)
Instructor in Education
B.A., Fairleigh Dickinson, 1963.
Albert Barry Kunz (1962, 1968)
Research Associate in Physics
B.S., Muhlenberg, 1962; M.S., Lehigh, 1964; Ph.D., 1966.
Anastasios Kydoniefs (1969)
Assistant Professor, Center for the Application of
Mathematics
B.Sc, Athens (Greece), 1963; M.Sc, Nottingham (England
1965; Ph.D., 1967.
JayC. Lacke (1969)
Instructor in Marketing
B.A., Lehigh, 1964; M.B.A., Columbia, 1966.
Gary Bernard Laison (1961, 1970)
Assistant Professor of Mathematics
B.A., Penn, 1958; M.A., 1960; Ph.D., 1969.
27f5 Faculty and Staff
Eugene M. Landis (1967)
Adjunct Professor of Biology
B.S., Penn, 1922; M.S., 1924; M.D., 1926; Ph.D., 1927; M.S.
(Hon.), Yale 1938.
John D. Landis (1967, 1971)
Assistant Professor of Industrial Engineering
B.S., Lehigh, 1965; M.S., 1967; Ph.D., 1971.
Nicholas Anthony Lapara (1964, 1970)
Assistant Professor of Philosophy
B.S., Lehigh, 1959; B. A., 1961; M. A., Pittsburgh, 1962;
Ph.D., 1970.
Arthur Irving Larky (1954, 1964)
Professor of Electrical Engineering
B.S., Lehigh, 1952; M.S., Princeton, 1953; Ph.D., Stanford,
1957.
Nancy Larrick (1964, 1967)
Adjunct Professor of Education
B.A., Goucher, 1930; M.A., Columbia, 1937; Ed.D.:
1955.
N.Y.U..
Bruce Alan Laub (1965, 1968)
Administrative Assistant, Fritz Engineering Laboratory
B.S., Lehigh, 1961; M.B.A., 1968.
Leslie Leber (1969)
Computer Analyst
B.S., Dayton (Ohio), 1967.
William Bader Leckonby (1946, 1962)
Professor of Physical Education and Director of the Division
of Athletics and Physical Education
B.S., St. Lawrence, 1939.
Robert Lewis Leight (1963, 1969)
Associate Professor of Education and Director, Division of
Secondary Education, School of Education
B.S., Kutztown State, 1959; M. A., Lehigh, 1961; M.Ed., 1964;
Ed.D., 1966.
Edward Kenneth Levy (1967, 1972)
Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics
B.S., University of Maryland, 1963; S.M., M.I.T., 1964;
Sc.D., 1967.
Willard Deming Lewis (1964)
President
A.B., Harvard, 1935; B.A., Oxford, 1938; Ph.D., Harvard,
1941; M.A., Oxford, 1945; LL.D., Lafayette, 1965; L.H.D.,
Moravian, 1966; LL.D., Muhlenberg, 1968.
Joseph Francis Libsch (1946, 1969)
Alcoa Foundation Professor of Metallurgy and Materials
Science and Vice President— Research
B.S., M.S., M.I.T., 1940; Sc.D., 1941. P.E., Pennsylvania,
1947.
John Orth Liebig, Jr. (1946, 1970)
Professor of Civil Engineering, Undergraduate Officer
B.S., Lehigh, 1940; M.S., 1949. P.E., Pennsylvania, 1951.
Thelma Lifland (1971)
Instructor in School of Educatiori
B.A., Brooklyn, 1956; M.Ed., Rutgers, 1960.
John Ralph Lindgren (1965, 1969)
Associate Professor of Philosophy and Head, Division of
Philosophy
B.S., Northwestern, 1959 ; M.A., Marquette, 1961; Ph.D.,
1963.
Lawrence H. Leder (1968)
Professor and Chairman of History and Coordinator, Lawrence
Henry Gipson Institute for Eighteenth-Century Studies
B.A., Long Island, 1949; M.A., N.Y.U., 1950; Ph.D., 1960.
Benjamin Litt (1970)
Associate Professor of Management and Marketing
B.S., Brooklyn Polytechnic, 1950; M.S., Stevens Institute,
1957; M.B.A., N.Y.U., 1964; Ph.D., 1970.
Gerald Grant Leeman (1950, 1970)
Assistant Professor of Physical Education and Assistant
to the Director of Athletics
B.A., State College of Iowa, 1948.
Daniel Leenov (1963)
Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering
B.S., George Washington, 1943; M.S., Chicago, 1948; Ph.D. ,
1951.
Henry Leidheiser, Jr. (1968)
Professor of Chemistry and Director of Center for Surface
and Coatings Research
B.S., Virginia, 1941; M.S., 1943; Ph.D., 1946.
Roger C.Loeb (1971)
Assistant Professor of Psychology
A.B., Bucknell, 1967; Ph.D., Cornell, 1972.
Joanne K. LoGiudice (1971)
Visiting Instructor in Social Relations
B.S., Penn State, 1959; M.S., Lehigh, 1962.
Barbara Long (1971)
Systems Programmer, Administrative Systems Office
Francis A. Long (1971)
Lecturer in Electrical Engineering
B.S., Northeastern.
Faculty and Staff 277
Roland Willi.un i 1962)
Issociate Professoi oj ( 'hemistry
B.A., Reed College, 1955; Ph.D., Washington State, 1060.
1969)
Professoi oj < ivil Engineering, Graduate Officer
B.S., National Taiwan, 11>M: M.S., Iowa State, 1956; Ph.D.,
Lehigh, 1960.
Robert Alan Lucas (1958, 1969)
issociate Professor oj Mechanical Engineering
B.S., Lehigh, 1957; M.S., 1959; Ph.D., 1964.
Feng-Shyang Luh (1965, 1968)
\ssociatc Professor of Accounting
B.A., National Taiwan, 1957; M.S.,
Ohio State, 1965.
linois, 1961; Ph.D.,
J.Gary Lutz (1971)
Assistant Professor of Education
B.S., Lehigh, 1965; M.A., 1968; Ed.D., 1969.
William L. Luyben (1967)
Associate Professor of Chemical Engineering
B.S., Penn State, 1955; M.B.A., Rutgers, 1958; M.S., 1962;
Ph.D., Delaware, 1963.
Patricia M. Lyons (1972)
Instructor in Religion Studies
B.S., Ohio, 1968; M.A., Princeton, 1971.
George Buchanan MacDonald (1964, 1972)
Assistant Professor of English
A.B., Boston College, 1962; M.A., Lehigh, 1964.
James Decker Mack (1946, 1950)
Director of Libraries
B.A., Lehigh, 1938; M. A., 1949.
Alistair Kenneth MacPherson (1971)
Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics
B.S., University of Sydney (Australia), 1957; M.S., 1965;
Ph.D., 1967.
Rosemarie A. Maier (1972)
Assistant Professor of English
B.A.. Nazareth, 1966; A.M., Illinois,
Walter Malich (1971)
Instructor in Military Science
SGM, U.S. Army.
Mary Isabelle Malone (1966)
Secretary to the President
B.A., Rosary College, 1945.
1967; Ph.D., 1972.
Richard Griffith Malsberger (1959, 1972)
I't, /. .'.,•> ,(m</ I 'hairman <>/ Hi* 'logv
B.A., Lehigh, 1948;M.S., L949;Ph.D., 1958.
Donald A. Mankin (1968)
■\ssislant Profess, 'i of Psychology
B.S.E.E., Drexel, 1964; M.A., Johns Hopkins, 1966; Ph.D.,
1968.
Arthur Howard Mann (1965, 1970)
Associate Dean of Students
B.A., Weslcyan, 1 940; S.T.B., General Theological Seminary,
1944.
John Alexander Manson (1966, 1971)
Professor of Chemistry, and Director of the Polymer
Laboratory, Materials Research Center
B.Sc, McMaster University (Ontario), 1949; M.Sc, 1950;
Ph.D., 1956.
David L.March (1969, 1971)
Systems Analyst, Administrative Systems Office, and Professor
of Education
B.S., Lehigh, 1964;M.Ed., 1965;Ph.D., 1970.
Philip W. Marden (1973)
Visiting Instructor in Social Relations
B.A., Rutgers, 1955; M. A., Illinois, 1960; Ph.D., 1963.
Jesse F. Marsh (1970)
Instructor in Aerospace Studies
Sergeant, USAF.
James Patrick Mathews (1947)
Physiotherapist, Health Service
Joseph Abele Maurer (1947, 1964)
Professor and Chairman of Classics
B.A., Moravian, 1932; M.A., Lehigh, 1936; Ph.D., Penn, 1948.
Gregory T. McAllister, Jr. (1965, 1972)
Professor of Mathematics
B.S., St. Peter's College, 1956; Ph.D., Berkeley, 1962.
Austin V. McClain (1971)
Consultant, Office of the Vice President— Development
B.S., 1930; M.A., 1933; L.H.D., Washington & Jefferson.
George E. McCluskey (1965)
Associate Professor of Astronomy
A.B., Penn, 1960; M.S., 1965; Ph.D., 1965.
Gary E. McConnell (1972)
Croup Leader, Applications Programming, Computing Center
B.S., Lehigh, 1968.
278 Faculty and Staff
Charles Man McCoy (1968)
Professor and Chairman of the Department of Government
B.S. Ed., Illinois, 1948; M.A., Colgate, 1950; Ph.D.,
Boston University, 1958.
Joseph Brendan McFadden (1948, 1961)
Professor and Head, Division of Journalism
B.A., St. Joseph's (Canada), 1941; M. A., Syracuse, 1948.
William J. McGarry (1969, 1973)
Director, Administrative Systems Office
B.S., King's College, 1965; M.B. A., University of Scran ton,
1967.
James Willard McGeady (1950, 1959)
Associate Director of Admission
B.A., Lehigh, 1950.
Edward H. McGee (1970)
Adjunct Professor of Law
A.B., Lehigh, 1952; LL.B., Yale, 1955.
Norman Paul Melchert (1962, 1967)
Associate Professor of Philosophy
B.A., Wartburg, 1955; B.D., Lutheran Theological Seminary,
1958;M.A.,Penn, 1959; Ph.D., 1964.
Joseph Robert Merkel (1962, 1965)
Professor of Biochemistry and Director, Marine Biochemistry
Laboratory, CMES
B.S., Moravian, 1948; M.S., Purdue, 1950; Ph.D., Maryland,
1952.
Fortunato Joseph Micale (1962, 1970)
Associate Professor of Chemistry
B.A., St. Bonaventure, 1956; B.S. , Niagara, 1959; M.S.,
Purdue, 1961; Ph.D., Lehigh, 1965.
John Anthony Mierzwa (1966, 1972)
Professor of Education and Director, Division of
Counselor Education, School of Education
B.S., Ohio, 1954; M.A., 1955; Ed.M., Harvard, 1958; Ed.D.,
1961.
Anthony J. McHugh (1971, 1972)
Assistant Professor of Chemical Engineering
B.S., Cleveland, 1966; M.S., Delaware, 1970; Ph.D., 1972.
Donald Mcllvain (1970)
Lecturer in Industrial Engineering
B.S., Penn, 1952; M.S., 1959.
James Rathburn Mcintosh (1966, 1970)
Assistant Professor of Sociology
B.A., Colby, 1960; M.A., Syracuse, 1963; Ph.D., 1969.
James Alan McLennan, Jr. (1948, 1968)
Professor and Chairman of Physics
A.B., Harvard, 1948; M.S., Lehigh, 1950; Ph.D., 1952.
Grayson E. McNair (1970)
Lecturer in Electrical Engineering
B.S.E.E., Virginia, 1962.
Judith E. McNally (1972)
Serials Assistant, Linderman Library
John R. McNamara (1973)
Assistant Professor of Economics
B.A., Columbia College, 1959; M.S., Rensselaer, 1965; Ph.D.,
1971.
Charles R. McNaron (1969)
Head Football Trainer and Instructor in Physical Education
B.S., Mississippi State, 1965.
Albert E. Meder, Jr. (1968)
Adjunct Professor of Education
A.B., Columbia, 1922; M.A., 1923; LL.D., Fairleigh Dickinson,
1956; L.H.D. (Hon.), Bloomsburg, 1961.
Gombilenga Mikongomi (1970)
Visiting Instructor in Kiswahili, Modern Foreign Languages
and Literatures
Certificate, Kivukoni College (Tanzania), 1962; Certificate,
Mlonot Company Ltd. (Tel Aviv), 1965.
Larry M. Miley (1967)
Assistant Accountant
B.S.,Penn State, 1964.
Paul Theodore Miller (1961, 1972)
Superintendent of Buildings and Grounds
Paul Van Reed Miller (1966, 1968)
Associate Professor of Education and Director, Division of
Educational Measurements and Research, School of Education
B.A., Yale, 1946; M.A., Penn, 1948; Ph.D., 1965.
Richard W. Miller (1968)
Intern Supervisor of Education
B.S., Kutztown State, 1958; M.A., Lehigh, 1962.
Robert Hugh Mills (1964, 1967)
Professor and Chairman of Accounting
B.S., Colorado, 1949; M.S., 1955; Ph.D., Wisconsin, 1960.
C.P.A., Illinois, 1957.
Samuel Harold Missimer (1950, 1962)
Director of Admission
B.A., Lehigh, 1950.
Sitsansu S. Mittra (1968, 1970)
Adjunct Assistant Professor of Mathematics
M.A., Calcutta; M.S., University of Toronto; Ph.D., Lehigh,
1971.
Faculty and Staff 279
Albert Charles Moltcr (19 10
Purchasing Agent
U.S.. Norwich, 1928; M.S., Lehigh, 1969.
Sutton Monro (1959, 1964)
Professoi .'/ Industrial Engineering
B.S.. M.I.T., L942.
William Edward Ohncsorge (1965, 1971)
Pn ■/. mi * of l hcmist) y
Sc.B., Brown, 1953; Ph.D., M.I.T., 1956.
JohnOndria (1967, 1970)
Associate Professor oj Electrical Engineering
B.S., Lehigh, 1960; M.S., 1963; Ph.D., 1967.
Carl l.eland Moore (1948, 1963)
Professor of Accounting
A.B.. Bucknell, I 943; M.A., Pittsburgh, 1948. C. P. A..
Pennsylvania, 1952.
Charles M. Morris (1967)
Adjunct Professor of Psychology
A.B., Bucknell, 1931; M.Ed., 1932; Ph.D., N.Y.U., 1938.
John H. Morrison (1968)
Operations Supervisor, Computing Center
Willard Austin Murray (1972)
Assistant Professor of Civil Engineering
B.S., Wisconsin, 1965; M.S., 1966; Ph.D., 1970.
Paul Benton Myers, Jr. (1962, 1965)
Associate Professor of Geology
A.B., Colgate, 1955; M.S., Lehigh, 1597; Ph.D., 1960.
Benjamin Edward Nevis (1960, 1968)
Adjunct Professor of Mechanical Engineering
B.S., Lehigh, 1955: M.S., 1960; Ph.D., 1965.
William Newman (1968)
Assistant Professor of Psychology
B.S., CUNY (Brooklyn), 1964; Ph.D., Stanford, 1968.
James Walter Niemeyer (1968, 1970)
Executive Director, Alumni Association
B.S., Lehigh, 1943.
Caroline Gladys Nippert (1971)
Science Cataloger
B.A., Dowling, 1968; M.L.S., Pittsburgh, 1971.
Michael Richard Notis (1967, 1969)
Assistant Professor of Metallurgy and Materials Science
B.S., Lehigh, 1960; M.S., 1963; Ph.D., 1969.
Robert Warren Numbers (1960, 1972)
Director of Physical Plant
B.S., Lehigh, 1950.
John J. O'Connor (1967)
Research Associate Professor of Philosophy, Center for
Information Science
B.A., Columbia, 1945; M.A., Cornell, 1947; Ph.D., Columbia,
1952.
Kenneth Everett Orbcn (1963)
Assistant Superintendent of Buildings and Grounds
B.S., Pcnn State, 1947.
Joseph C. Osborn (1946, 1961 )
Associate Professor of Mechanics
B.S.M.E., Purdue, 1933; M.S., Michigan, 1946. P. E.,
Michigan, 1955.
Alexis Ostapenko (1957, 1965)
Professor of Civil Engineering
Dipl. Ing., Munich Institute of Technology, 1951; Sc.D.,
M.I.T., 1957.
Peggy A.Ota (1971)
Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering
B.A., Cornell, 1966; M.S., Penn, 1969.
Eric Van Tine Ottervik (1966, 1969)
Vice Provost and Coordinator of University Planning
B.S., Carnegie-Mellon, 1959; M. A., Pittsburgh, 1961; Ph.D.,
1966.
Jerzy Antoni Owczarek (1960, 1965)
Professor of Mechanical Engineering
Dipl. Ing., Polish University College (London), 1950; Ph.D.
University of London, 1954.
Bradford Breckenridge Owen (1945, 1948)
Associate Professor of Biology
B.A., Williams, 1934; M.A., 1936; Ph.D., Harvard, 1940.
John B. Owens (1973)
Assistant Professor of History
B.A., Oberlin, 1966; M.A., Wisconsin, 1960; Ph.D., 1972.
Mustafa R. Ozgu (1972)
Assistant Professor of Mechanical Engineering
B.S., Middle East Technical University (Ankara, Turkey),
1967; M.S., 1968; Ph.D., Lehigh, 1971.
Anthony Packer (1946, 1950)
Assistant Professor of Physical Education and Assistant to
the Director in Charge of Fields
B.S., St. Lawrence, 1938.
Sara Louise Paden (1971)
Administrative Assistant, University Publications
B. A., Moravian, 1971.
280 Faculty and Staff
Artis J. Palmo (1971)
Assistant Professor of Education
B.S., California State (Pennsylvania), 1967; M.A., West
Virginia, 1968; Ed.D., 1971.
Robert Roupen Panos (1964, 1969)
Assistant Director of Counseling and Testing and Assistant
Professor of Education
B.A., Queen's College, 1956; M.S., Penn State, 1958; Ph.D.,
1968.
Basil Waldo Parker (1940, 1954)
Professor of Biology
S.B., M.I.T., 1933; A.M., Harvard, 1935; Ph.D., M.I.T.,
1939.
Lloyd C. Parker (1971)
Instructor in Education
B.A., Connecticut College, 1956.
James Marshall Parks (1967, 1970)
Professor of Geology and Director, Center for Marine and
Environmental Studies
A.B., Kansas, 1948; M.S., Wisconsin, 1949; Ph.D., 1951.
Preston Parr (1949, 1970)
Dean and Vice President for Student Affairs
B.S., Lehigh, 1943; M.S., 1944.
Ruth B. Parr (1967, 1968)
Instructor in Education
B.S., Simmons, 1945; M.A., Lehigh, 1969.
Elizabeth Patterson (1970)
Administrative Secretary, Forum Office
John B. Pearce (1966)
Adjunct Professor of Biology
A.B., Humboldt State, 1957; M.S., Washington, 1960; Ph.D.,
1962.
John M. Pearson (1972)
Associate Professor of English and Head, Division of Speech
B.A., Baylor, 1958; M.F.A., Penn State, 1968.
Alan Wiggins Pense (1957, 1971)
Professor of Metallurgy and Materials Science
B.S., Cornell, 1957; M.S., Lehigh, 1959; Ph.D., 1962.
Joseph Petronio (1968)
Bursar
B.S., King's College, 1960.
Robert L. Pettigrew (1969)
Computer Analyst
B.S., Lehigh, 1969.
Robert A. Pfennig (1969, 1972)
Coordinator, User Services, Computing Center
B.A., Wesleyan, 1962; M.B.A., Michigan, 1964.
Dennis A. Pickering (1972)
Assistant Professor of Education
B.S., Ohio State, 1965; M.A., 1967; Ed.D., Ball State, 1972.
Warren Aiken Pillsbury (1962, 1965)
Associate Professor of Economics
A.B., New Hampshire, 1953; M.S., Florida State, 1958; Ph.D.,
Virginia, 1963.
Arthur Everett Pitcher (1938, 1960)
Distinguished Professor and Chairman of Mathematics
A.B., Case-Western Reserve, 1932; A.M., Harvard, 1933;
Ph.D., 1935; D.Sc. (Hon.), Case-Western Reserve, 1957.
Lucille H. Pleiss (1961, 1971)
Administrative Assistant to Director, Health Service
R.N., St. Luke's, 1949.
Gary Wayne Poehlein (1965, 1969)
Associate Professor of Chemical Engineering
B.S., Purdue, 1958; Ph.D., 1966.
Hayden Nelson Pritchard (1964, 1970)
Associate Professor of Biology
A.B., Princeton, 1955; M.S., Lehigh, 1960; Ph.D., 1963.
Thomas A. Pugliese (1972)
Head Basketball Coach
A. A., Sacramento City College, 1961; B.A., Sacramento State,
1963.
William Leroy Quay (1963, 1970)
Dean of Student Life
A.B., Muhlenberg, 1956; A.M., Penn, 1957; Ph.D., Lehigh,
1969.
Clifford Steven Queen (1972)
Assistant Professor of Mathematics
Ph.D., Ohio State, 1969.
Shelden Henry Radin (1963, 1968)
Associate Professor of Physics
B.S., Worcester Polytechnic, 1958; M.S., Yale, 1969; Ph.D.,
1963.
Beegamudre Rakosh-Das (1967)
Instructor in Electrical Engineering
B.Sc, Engineering, Banaras, 1949; A.I.I.Sc, Bangalore,
1952.
Harry B. Ramsey (1963, 1971)
Associate Executive Director, Alumni Association and
Editor, Lehigh Alumni Bulletin
B.A., Lehigh, 1950.
Faculty and Staff 281
Viswanatha R.ij.i Gopala Rao (1972)
\ssistanl Pi ■: Mathematics
B S< . Vndhra U. (Waltair, India), 1964; M.S.. 1965; A.M.,
Illinois, I'll.": Ph. II., 1972.
Berry C.irg.il Richards (1969)
Associate I ibrarian, Mart Si fence and Engineering Library
,iii, y Sci retary tf the Faculty
A.B., Vassar, 1952; M.L.S., New York at Albany, 1969.
Carol D. Ranch (1968. 1970)
Librarian, Computing Center
Gerhard Rayna (1955. I "(.'>'
\ssociate Professor of Mathematics
A.B., Harvard, 1952; M.A., Princeton, 1953: Ph.D., 1965.
Helen Z. Rayner (1963, 1969)
Administrative Assistant, Placement and Personnel Services
Georgia Emily Raynor (1961, 1968)
Issistant Librarian, Cataloging
A.B., Chatham, 1945; M.A., Lehigh, 1954; M.S. in L.S.,
Columbia, 1954.
Richard James Redd (1958, 1970)
Professor and Chairman of Fine Arts
B.Ed., Toledo, 1953; M.F.A., Iowa, 1958.
Estoy Reddin (1964, 1967)
Associate Professor of Education
B.S.. Penn, 1932; M.S., 1956; Ed.D., 1964.
John K. Redmon (1970)
Lecturer in Electrical Engineering
B.S., Newark College of Engineering, 1942; M.S., Stevens
Institute, 1949; M.S., Worcester Polytechnic, 1970. P.E.,
New Jersey, 1961 ; Pennsylvania, 1970.
Robert F. Reeves (1968, 1972)
Assistant Director of Admission
B.A., Drew, 1966.
Robert E. Reidnauer (1961, 1972)
Operations Supervisor of Administrative Systems
Frederick Eugene Ressler (1952, 1964)
Associate Registrar
B.A., Lehigh, 1952.
Rodney Earl Ressler (1947, 1964)
Assistant Registrar
Joseph H. Reynolds (1970)
Assistant to the Dean of Student Life
B.A., Lehigh, 1968; M.A., 1972.
Adrian F. Richards (1969)
Professor of Oceanography and Ocean Engineering and Director,
Marine Geotechnical Laboratory, CMES
B.S., New Mexico, 1951; Ph.D., University of California,
Scripps Institution of Oceanography, 1957.
Wallace James Richardson (1952, 1959)
Professor of Industrial Engineering
B.S..U.S. Naval Academy, 1941 ; M.S., Purdue, 1948. P. E.,
Delaware, 1956.
Martin L. Richtcr (1965, 1972)
Associate Professor of Psychology
B.A., Rutgers, 1960; Ph.D., Indiana, 1965.
James Peter Ries (1967)
Assistant Professor of Mechanical Engineering
B.S.M.E., Iowa, 1964; Ph.D., 1967.
Mary Gruber Riley (1953, 1968)
Head Reference Librarian, Linderman Library
B.A., Penn State, 1952; M.S. in L.S., Drexel, 1953.
Alice Duffy Rinehart (1964, 1969)
Assistant Professor of Education and Coordinator of
Educational Placement
B.A., Smith, 1947; M.Ed., Lehigh, 1965; Ed.D., 1969.
Deborah J. Ritter (1972)
Administrative Assistant, Fritz Engineering Lab
B.A. in Fine Arts, Toepaste Kunsten (Maastericht, Holland),
1969.
Donald L. Ritter (1969)
Assistant to the Vice President— Research
B.S., Lehigh, 1961 ; S.M., M.I.T., 1963; Sc.D., 1966.
Ronald Samuel Rivlin (1967)
Centennial University Professor of Mathematics and
Mechanics and Director, Center for the Application of
Mathematics
B.A., Cambridge (England), 1937; M.A., 1939; Sc.D., 1952.
Richard Roberts (1964, 1969)
Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering
B.S., Drexel, 1961; M.S., Lehigh, 1962; Ph.D., 1968.
Margaret Ellen Felice Rocheleau (1971)
Assistant to the Editor, Alumni Bulletin
B.A., Muhlenberg, 1968.
Donald O. Rockwell, Jr. (1970, 1972)
Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics
B.S., Bucknell, 1964; M.S., Lehigh, 1965; Ph.D., 1968.
282 Faculty and Staff
Alberto Romero (1967)
Instructor in Spanish, Modern Foreign Languages and
Literatures
B.A., S. Esteban (Salamanca), 1960; Lie, Angelicum (Rome),
1961; M.A., Penn, 1971.
Robert E. Rosenwein (1972)
Assistant Professor of Social Relations
B.A., Berkeley, 1962; M.A., 1963; Ph.D., Michigan, 1970.
H. Joris Rosse (1972)
Director of Physical Planning
B.A., Idaho, 1954.
Herbert Rubenstein (1967, 1973)
Professor of Philosophy and Adjunct Professor of Psychology
B.A., Penn, 1942; M.A., 1943; Ph.D., Columbia, 1949.
Leonard I. Ruchelman (1969, 1972)
Associate Professor of Government and Head, Division of
Urban Studies
B.A., Brooklyn College, 1954; Ph.D., Columbia, 1965.
Sylvia Rutkoff (1966)
Lecturer in Education
B.A., Hunter, 1940; M.A., Columbia Teacher's College, 1958.
J. Donald Ryan (1952, 1962)
Professor of Geology and Chairman of Geological Sciences
B.A., Lehigh, 1943; M.S., 1948; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins, 1952.
James S. Saeger (1967, 1969)
Assistant Professor of History
B.A., Ohio State, 1960; M.A., 1963; Ph.D., 1969.
Stephen Alan Schafer (1967)
Visiting Lecturer in Education
B.A., Delaware, 1949;M.H.L., Hebrew Union College, 1955;
Ed.D., Lehigh, 1971.
Murray Schechter (1963, 1968)
Associate Professor of Mathematics
A.B., Brooklyn, 1957; M. A., N.Y.U., 1959; Ph.D., 1964.
William Edward Schiesser (1960, 1963)
Professor of Chemical Engineering and Analyst, Computing
Center
B.S., Lehigh, 1955; M. A., Princeton, 1958;Ph.D., 1960.
Stephen Allen Schmidt (1971)
Assistant Professor of Military Science
B.S., LaSalle, 1963. Captain, Infantry, U.S. Army.
Edward Wilfred Schmitt (1968)
Instructor in Marketing and Management
B.S., Drexel, 1960;M.B.A., 1964.
Donald Walter Schmoyer (1946, 1962)
Assistant Treasurer
B.S., Lehigh, 1944.
John A. Schnaible (1969)
Instructor in Speech
B.A., Indiana, 1967; M.A., Colorado State, 1969.
Donald D. Schneider (1972)
Assistant Professor of Fine Arts and Director of Exhibitions
and Curator
A.B., Wesleyan, 1957; M.F.A., Princeton, 1960; Ph.D., 1971.
Eric Paul Salathe (1967, 1970)
Associate Professor, Center for the Application of
Mathematics
Sc.B., Brown, 1960; M.S., Princeton, 1963; Ph.D., Brown,
1965.
Norman Harold Sam (1962, 1970)
Professor of Education and Director, Summer Session
B.S., Pittsburgh, 1951; M.Ed., 1955; Ed.D., 1962.
Brian Sanders (1969)
Associate Librarian, Linderman Library
B.A., Nottingham, 1959; M.A., London, 1964; M.L.S., Rutgers,
1967.
Robert Guy Sarubbi (1968)
Associate Professor of Mechanics
B.Sc.E., Cooper Union, 1953; M.S., Lehigh, 1957; Ph.D.,
1963.
Kenneth N. Sawyers (1969)
Assistant Professor, Center for the Application of
Mathematics
B.S., I.T.T., 1962; Ph.D., Brown, 1967.
Keith J. Schray (1972)
Assistant Professor of Chemistry
B.S., University of Portland, 1965; Ph.D., Penn State, 1970.
Henry J. Schreitmueller (1972)
Instructor in Education
A.B., Seton Hall, 1952; M.A., 1970; M.A., Catholic University,
1971.
Stanley Robert Schultz (1966)
Instructor in Physical Education, Varsity Baseball Coach
B. A. .Trenton State, 1964.
Eli Schwartz (1954, 1962)
Professor of Economics and Finance
B.S., Denver, 1943; M.A., Connecticut, 1948; Ph.D., Brown,
1952.
Charles Bertrand Sclar (1968)
Professor of Geology
B.S.,CUNY, 1946; M.S., Yale, 1948; Ph.D., 1951.
Faculty and Staff 283
I, -soph l . Scullion.Jr. (1972)
Manager, Special Projei ts and Program Development, and
Director of Computing issociates Program, l omputingt
B.S., Drcxcl. 1966.
Andrea Jane Sedlak (1971)
Visiting Instructor in Social Relations
A.B., Rutgers. 1968.
Margaret Melchior Seylar (1966)
idjunct Professor in Education
B.S., Kutztown State, 1945, M. A., Lehigh, 1956.
Sandra Shaber (1972)
I 'isiting Instructor in Government
B.S., Ohio State, 1957; M.A., 1959.
William Gerald Shade (1966, 1969)
Associate Professor of History
A.B., Brown, 1961; M. A., 1962; Ph.D., Wayne State, 1966.
Diane Kay Shaffer (1971)
Assistant to the Director, Public Information
B.S., Syracuse, 1970.
Russell Allen Shaffer (1964, 1967)
Associate Professor of Physics
B.S.,Drexel, 1956; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins, 1962.
Ching Sheng Shen (1964, 1968)
Associate Professor of Economics
B.A., Yen-Ching University, 1941; M.A., Boston University,
1951 ; Ph.D., North Carolina, 1957.
William F. Shimonkevitz (1972)
Professor of Aerospace Studies
B.S., Nebraska, 1952; M.S., George Washington, 1966.
Colonel, U.S.A.F.
M. Wayne Shiveley (1968, 1971)
Assistant Professor of Industrial Engineering
B.S., Missouri, 1960; B.S., 1965; M.S., 1967; Ph.D., Lehigh,
1971.
George K. Shortess (1969)
Associate Professor of Psychology and Director, Division of
Visual Science, Center for Health Sciences
A.B., Lycoming, 1954; M.A., Brown, 1960; Ph.D., 1962.
Thomas D. Shreiner (1970)
Assistant Football and Lacrosse Coach and Instructor in
Physical Education
B.S., Gettysburg, 1963.
Robert Peter Shurtleff (1963, 1972)
Director of Residence Halls and Assistant Dean of Residence
B.A., Lehigh, 1955; M.Ed., 1964.
William Joseph Sibley (1964)
Counselor, ( ounseling Service
B.S., East Stroudsburg State, 1955; M.Ed., Lehigh, L964.
Sharon Lois Sicglcr (1971)
Reference Librarian, Mart Library
B.A., University of Maine, 1969; M.L.S., New York at Albany,
1971.
George CM. Sih (1958, 1965)
Professor of Mechanics and Director, Institute of Fracture
and Solid Mechanics
B.S., Portland, 1953; M.S., New York, 1957; Ph.D., Lehigh,
1960.
David K.Silhanek (1972)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Classics
A.B., Princeton, 1957; M.A. (Latin), Michigan, 1968; M.A.
(Greek), 1969; Ph.D., N.Y.U., 1972.
Ruth Silverman (1971)
Assistant Professor of Mathematics
A.B., Syracuse, 1956; M.S., Cornell, 1958; Ph.D.,
University of Washington, 1970.
Gary W. Simmons (1970)
Assistant Professor of Chemistry
B.S., West Virginia, 1961; Ph.D., 1967.
Marvin Howard Simmons (1970, 1973)
Assistant Director of University Publications
B.A., Juniata, 1964; B.F.A. and M.F.A., Yale, 1970.
Roger D. Simon (1970, 1971)
Assistant Professor of History
A.B., Rutgers, 1965; M.A., Wisconsin, 1966, Ph.D., 1971.
Dale Rodekohr Simpson (1960, 1966)
Professor of Geology
B.S.,Penn State, 1956; M.S., Cal Tech, 1958; Ph.D., 1960.
Kenneth P. Sinclair (1972)
Assistant Professor of Accounting
B.A., Massachusetts, 1968; M.S., 1970; Ph.D., 1972.
Herbert Bancroft Skerry (1967)
Assistant Professor of Mathematics
A.B., Harvard, 1954; M.S., Wisconsin, 1958; Ph.D., Michigan,
1967.
ZdenekJ. Slouka (1972)
Visiting Associate Professor of International Relations
B.A., Masaryk University (Czechoslovakia), 1948; M.A., N.Y.U.
1958; Ph.D., Columbia, 1965.
284 Faculty and Staff
Roger George Slutter (1961, 1969)
Associate Professor of Civil Engineering and Director of
Operations, Fritz Engineering Laboratory
B.S., Lehigh, 1953; M.S., 1956; Ph.D., 1968.
Bruce M. Smackey (1971)
Assistant Professor of Management and Marketing
B.S., Rensselaer, 1962; M.S., Case-Western Reserve, 1964;
Ph.D., Rensselaer, 1969.
David B. Smith (1972)
Instructor in Economics
B.S., Lehigh, 1969; M.S., 1970.
Gerald Francis Smith (1965)
Professor, Center for the Application of Mathematics
B.S., Buffalo, 1953; Ph.D., Brown, 1956.
John Edwin Smith (1967, 1972)
Manager, Computer Services, Computing Center
B.A., Wesleyan, 1950; M.A., 1952; B.S., Camsius, 1958.
Margaret N. Smith (1968)
Assistant Librarian, Acquisitions
A.B., Oberlin, 1940; M.L.S., Drexel, 1966.
William J. Snyder (1967)
Postdoctoral Fellow in Chemical Engineering
B.S., Penn State, 1963; M.S., 1965; Ph.D., 1967.
Anne C. Solderitsch (1972)
Assistant to the Planner, Campus Planning Office
Albert J. Solomon (1969)
Assistant Professor of English
B.A., University of Scranton, 1962; M.A., 1964; Ph.D., Penn
State, 1969.
Barbara E. Solt (1970)
Coordinator of Volunteer Community Services
A.B., Muhlenberg, 1965; M.S. S.W., Columbia, 1967.
Erwin Alfred Sommer (1967)
Research Associate in Mechanics
Dipl. Phys., University of Gottingen (Germany), 1962;
Dr. Rer. Nat., University of Freiburg (Germany), 1966.
Wilbur Devilla Bernhart Spatz (1946, 1970)
Professor of Physics
B.S., Lafayette, 1930; M.S., Purdue, 1934; Ph.D., New York,
1943.
Wesley Richard Smith (1958, 1968)
Professor of Physics
B.S., Lehigh, 1950; M.S., 1951; Ph.D..
Princeton, 1957.
Leslie H. Sperling (1967)
Assistant Professor of Chemical Engineering
B.S., Florida, 1954; M.A., Duke, 1957; Ph.D., 1959.
William Adams Smith, Jr. (1955, 1968)
Professor of Industrial Engineering
B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, 1951; M.S., Lehigh, 1957; Ph.D..
N.Y.U., 1966. P.E., Pennsylvania, 1959.
Oles M. Smolansky (1963, 1970)
Professor of International Relations
A.B., N.Y.U., 1953; A.M., Columbia, 1955; Ph.D.
1959.
Robert Steacy Sprague (1957, 1966)
Professor of Chemistry
B.S., Washington & Jefferson, 1943; Ph.D., Illinois, 1949.
Richard Moore Spriggs (1964, 1972)
Vice President— Administration and Professor,
Metallurgy and Materials Science
B.S., Penn State, 1952;M.S., Illinois, 1956; Ph.D., 1958.
Mervin Philip Smolinsky (1970)
Adjunct Associate Professor of Psychology
B.A., Temple, 1951; M.S., Pittsburgh, 1966; Ph.D., 1969.
Duane E. Stackhouse (1969)
Associate Director, Health Service
B.S., Juniata, 1957; M.D.; Temple, 1961.
Donald Morgan Smyth (1971)
Director, Materials Research Center and Associate Professor,
Metallurgy and Materials Science and Chemistry
B.S., Maine, 1951; Ph.D., M.I.T., 1954.
Max Donald Snider (1946, 1967)
Associate Professor of Marketing and Assistant Dean of the
College of Business and Economics
B.S., Illinois, 1936; M.S., 1937; M.B.A., Stanford, 1941.
Andrew Kagey Snyder (1967, 1969)
Associate Professor of Mathematics
B.A., Swarthmore, 1959; M.A., Colorado, 1961; Ph.D., Lehigh,
1965.
William Butler Stafford (1967, 1972)
Associate Professor of Education
A.B., Ohio, 1954; M.A., 1955; Ed.D., Indiana, 1965.
William Edward Stanford (1967, 1970)
Director of Undergraduate Financial Aid
B. A., Drew, 1962.
Sidney Stecher (1972)
Associate Professor of Psychology
B.B.A., CCNY, 1957; M.S., 1959; Ph.D., CUNY, 1966.
Faculty and Staff 285
I,.hn Stohlct Steckbecl 196
Assistant Professoi oj Physical Education and Assistant
Direi tor, Physical Education and {ntramurals
B.S., Wesl Chester State, 1936; M.Sc, Penn, 1951.
Fred P. Stein . 1963, 1971)
• of( hemical Engineering
B.S., Lehigh, 1956; M.S.E., Michigan, 1957; Ph.D., 1960.
Olive Stengel (1966)
ilation Supervisor, Library
fames Edward Sturm (1956, 1972)
Pi i/ oi 7 ( 'hemistry
B.A., St. John's (Minnesota), 1951; Ph.D., Notre Dame, 1957
Robert Joseph Sullivan (1962, 1969)
Professor of Journalism
B.A., Syracuse, 1947; M. A., 1951.
John R. Sumner (1972)
Assistant Professor of Geology
B.S., Arizona, 1966; M.S., 1968; Ph.D., Stanford, 1971.
Gilbert Allan Stengle (1960, 1970)
Professor oj Mathematics
B.E. P., Cornell, 1954; M.S., Wisconsin, 1957; Ph.D.
1961.
Morris H. Sunshine (1972)
Associate Professor of Social Relations
B.A., Missouri, 1949; M.A., 1954; Ph.D., Northwestern, 1962
Alan Hugh Stenning (1965)
Professor of Mechanical Engineering
B.Sc, Glasgow University, 1950; M.S., M.I.T., 1951; Sc.D.,
1955.
Alfred Kriss Susskind (1968)
Professor and Chairman of Electrical Engineering
B.B.E., B.S., Brooklyn Polytechnic, 1948; S.M., M.I.T.,
1950.
Theodore M. Stephens, Jr. (1971)
Instructor in Education
B.S., Patterson State, 1957; M.S., 1959.
Harry O. Tachovsky (1971)
Instructor in Education
B.S., Kutztown State, 1970.
Louis W. Stern (1970)
Assistant Professor of Philosophy
B.A., Temple, 1964; M.A., Lehigh, 1966; Ph.D..
1970.
Donald Lee Talhelm (1960)
Instructor in Electrical Engineering
B.S., Lehigh, 1959; M.S., 1960.
Richard L. Stocker (1973)
Assistan t Professor of Geology
B.A., Lehigh, 1964; M.S., 1966; M.Phil., 1969; Ph.D., Yale,
1972.
Lambert Tall (1955, 1970)
Professor of Civil Engineering
B.E., Sydney (Australia), 1954; M.S., Lehigh, 1957; Ph.D.
1961.
John A. Stoops (1959, 1966)
Professor and Dean of the School of Education
B.S., California State College, 1948; M.S., Penn, 1949;
Ed.D., 1960.
Robert Daniel Stout (1939, 1960)
Professor of Metallurgy and Materials Science and Dean of
the Graduate School
B.S., Penn State, 1935; M.S., Lehigh, 1941; Ph.D., 1944;
D.Sc, Albright, 1967. P.E., Pennsylvania, 1946.
Carl Ferdinand Strauch (1934, 1953)
Distinguished Professor of English
A.B., Muhlenberg, 1930; M.A., Lehigh, 1934; Ph.D., Yale,
1946.
Karol Strelecki (1971)
Instructor in Education
B.S., Rutgers, 1961; M.S., Temple, 1970.
Joseph Strickland, Jr. (1972)
Instructor in Education
B.A., Lehigh, 1972.
Stephen Kenneth Tarby (1961, 1967)
Associate Professor of Metallurgy and Materials Science
B.S., Carnegie-Mellon, 1956; M.S., 1958; Ph.D., 1962.
AnnTarola (1972)
Instructor in Education
B.S., Penn State, 1965; M.Ed., Lehigh, 1972.
Catherine Tarrant (1972)
Assistant Professor of History
B.A., Illinois, 1968; Ph.D., Rice, 1972.
Merle W.Tate (1965)
Professor of Education, Graduate Student Advisor
A.B., Central Wesleyan, 1926; M.A., Montana, 1943; Ed.M.
Harvard, 1946; Ed.D., 1947.
Robert Sayre Taylor, Jr.
Legal Counsel
B.A., Lehigh, 1925; LL.B., Penn, 1928.
Everett Anderson Teal (1945)
Director of Placement and Personnel Services
B.S., Ball State Teachers, 1932; M.A., Columbia, 1941.
286 Faculty and Staff
Theodore Alfred Terry (1951, 1968)
Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering
B.S., Drexel, 1950; M.S., Lehigh, 1951; Ph.D., 1963. P. E.,
Pennsylvania, 1957.
David Trutt (1965, 1971)
Associate Professor of Mathematics
B.S., Lafayette, 1959; M.S., Brown, 1962; Ph.D., Purdue,
1964.
David A. Thomas (1968, 1970)
Professor of Metallurgy and Materials Science and Associate
Director, Materials Research Center
B.S., Cornell, 1953; Sc.D., M.I.T., 1958.
John H. C. Thompson (1968)
Visiting Professor, Center for the Application of Mathematics
B.A., New College (Oxford), 1930; M.A., D.Ph.L., 1933.
B. Thayer Turner (1970)
Varsity Wrestling Coach
B.S., Lehigh, 1961.
LeRoy J. Tuscher (1971)
Assistant Professor of Education
B.S., Northern State, 1958; M.A., Stanford, 1964; Ph.D.
Florida State, 1971.
H. Louis Thompson (1969, 1972)
Adjunct Professor of Accounting
B.S., Lehigh, 1930; M.B.A., 1965.
Robert J. Thornton (1970)
Assistant Professor of Economics
A.B., Xavier, 1965; M.A., Illinois, 1967; Ph.D.,
1970.
James A. Tiefenbrunn (1969, 1972)
Assistant Director of Residence Halls and Assistant Dean of
Residence
B.S., Lehigh, 1966; M.B.A., 1972.
Charles Leon Tipton (1964, 1971)
Professor of History
B.A., Southern California, 1958; M.A., 1961; Ph.D., 1964.
Linda L. Tipton (1972)
Assistant to the Director of Admission
B.A., Dickinson, 1971.
Doris Mae Transue (1964)
Nurse, Health Service
R.N., St. Luke's, 1947.
Louis Reed Tripp (1964)
Frank L. Magee Professor of Business Administration and
Acting Coordinator, Center for Social Research
B.A., Union, 1934; Ph.D., Yale, 1942.
Edward J. Trost (1971, 1972)
Assistant Director of Placement and Personnel Services
A.B., Michigan, 1941; M. A., Lehigh, 1971.
Kenneth Mangold Trumbore (1946)
Assistant Manager, Bookstore
B.A., Moravian, 1940.
Wendell Piggott Trumbull (1957, 1958)
Professor of Accounting
B.S., Illinois, 1937; M.A., Michigan, 1941; Ph.D., 1954.
C.P.A., Mississippi, 1949.
Kenneth Kai-Ming Tzeng (1969)
Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering
B.S., National Taiwan, 1959; M.S., Illinois, 1962; Ph.D.,
1969.
S. Herbert Unterberger (1965)
Adjunct Professor in Economics
B.S.,Penn, 1934; M. A., 1935; Ph.D., 1960.
Dean Pearson Updike (1965)
Assistant Professor of Mechanics
B.S., Princeton, 1957; M.S., N.Y.U., 1960; Ph.D., Brown,
1964.
Paul J. Usinowicz (1972)
Assistant Professor of Civil Engineering
B.S., Iowa, 1968; M.S., 1969; Ph.D., Michigan, 1970.
Victor Manuel Valenzuela (1957; 1969)
Professor of Spanish, Modern Foreign Languages and
Literatures
B.A., San Francisco State, 1951; M. A., Columbia, 1952;
Ph.D., 1965.
John W. Vanderhoff (1970)
Associate Professor of Chemistry, Director, National
Printing Ink Research Institute and Associate Director,
Center for Surface and Coatings Research
B.S., Niagara, 1947; Ph.D., Buffalo, 1951.
Anje C. van der Naald (1969)
Assistant Professor of Spanish, Modern Foreign Languages and
Literatures
B.A., Carleton University (Ottawa), 1963; M.A., Illinois,
1965; Ph.D., 1967.
George VanDoren (1971)
Instructor in Education
B.A., Lehigh, 1969; M.A., 1971.
Faculty and Staff 287
John Andrews Van Eerdc (1960, 1963)
Prof iic/i, Modem Foreign Languages and Literatures
A.B., Harvard, 1938: M. A., 1939; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins, 1953.
Nan Van Gieson (1973)
Assistant Director of Summet Session aiul issistant Dean oj
Education
B.A., Russell Sage, 1958; M.Ed.. Lehigh, 1967; Ed.D., 1969.
David Alan VanHorn (1962. 1967)
ssor and Chairman oj Civil Engineering
B.S., Iowa State, 1951; M.S., 1956;Ph.D., 1959. P. E., Iowa,
1957.
Wesley Johnson Van Sciver (1962, 1965)
Professor of Physics
B.S., M.I.T., 1940; Ph.D., Stanford, 1954.
Eric Varley (1967)
Professor, Center for the Application of Mathematics
B.Sc., University of Manchester (England), 1955; M.Sc,
1957; Ph.D., Brown, 1961.
Ramamirthan Venkataraman (1968)
Assistant Professor, Center for the Application of
Mathematics
B.S., St. Joseph's College (Madras, India), 1960; M.A.,
1961; Ph.D., Brown, 1968.
Kenneth J. Veprek (1968)
Reference Librarian, Mart Science and Engineering Library
B.S., Newark College of Engineering, 1953; M.S.L.S., Drexel,
1966.
Thomas Joseph Verbonitz (1967, 1973)
Director of Administrative Services
B.S., Lehigh, 1958; M.B. A., 1960.
John F. Vickrey (1961, 1966)
Associate Professor of English
Ph.B., Chicago, 1949; A.M., 1952; Ph.D., Indiana, 1960.
Charles F. Vihon (1969)
Assistant Professor of Law
B.S., Northwestern, 1959; J. D., Chicago, 1962.
Edwin M. Wagner (1966)
Assistant Professor of Aerospace Studies
B.G.E., Omaha, 1965. Major, USAF.
James Harold Wagner (1949, 1951)
Registrar
B.A., Gettysburg, 1947; M. A., Pennsylvania, 1950.
D. Alexander Waldenrath (1968, 1969)
Assistant Professor of German, Modern Foreign Languages
and Literatures
B.A., Berkeley, 1961; M.A., 1964; Ph.D., 1969.
John E. Walker (1967. 1972)
Director <>/ Computing Center anil Associate Professor of
Economics
B.S.,Clemson, 1958; Ph.D., Virginia, 1963.
Elvin Galen Warfcl (1966, 1971)
Associate Professor of Education
B.S., Shippcnsburg State, 1950; M.Ed., Pcnn State, 1958;
Ed.D., Columbia, 1967.
Stuart K. Webster (1972)
Instructor in Accounting
B.A., Heidelberg College, 1964; M.B. A., Bowling Green, 1965.
C.P.A., Iowa, 1969.
Robert Pey-Ying Wei (1966, 1970)
Professor of Mechanics
B.S., Princeton, 1953; M.S., 1954; Ph.D., 1960.
Daniel Jacob Roger Weine (1972)
Humanities Cataloger
B.A., Vermont, 1961 ; M.A.T., Harvard, 1962; A.M.L.S.,
Michigan, 1967.
Andrew R. Weintraub (1966)
Assistant Professor of Economics
B.A., Rutgers, 1961; M.A., 1964; Ph.D., 1966.
Leonard Andrew Wenzel (1951, 1962)
Professor and Chairman of Chemical Engineering
B.S.,Penn State, 1943; M.S., Michigan, 1948; Ph.D., 1950.
P. E., Pennsylvania, 1958.
NilsH. Wessell (1972)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Government
A.B., Stanford, 1964; M.A., 1970; Ph.D., Columbia, 1972.
Donald Bigham Wheeler, Jr. (1947, 1957)
Associate Professor of Physics
B.S., Lehigh, 1938;Ph.D., Cal Tech, 1947.
Howard R. Whitcomb (1967)
Assistant Professor of Government
A.B., Brown, 1961; M. A., Lehigh, 1963.
John Calvin Whitehead (1967)
Instructor in Physical Education and Assistant Varsity
Football Coach
B.S., East Stroudsburg State, 1950.
Gary E. Whitehouse (1965, 1969)
Associate Professor of Industrial Engineering
B.S., Lehigh, 1960; M.S., 1962; Ph.D., Arizona State, 1966.
P.E., Pennsylvania, 1966.
Joseph Hardy Whritenour (1965)
Assistant Director of Public Information
288 Faculty and Staff
Albert Wilansky (1948, 1957)
Professor of Mathematics
B.A., Dalhousie (Canada), 1941; B.S., 1942; Ph.D..
1947.
Brown,
Robert Clifford Williamson (1963, 1964)
Professor of Sociology and Chairman of Social Relations
B.A., U.C.L.A., 1938; M.A., 1940; Ph.D., Southern
California, 1951.
Gregory B. Wilson (1972)
Staff Assistant, Aerospace Studies
Staff Sergeant, USAF.
Kenneth E. Wolf (1966)
Adjunct Professor of Biology
B.S., Utah, 1951; M.S., 1951; Ph.D., 1956.
John Dudley Wood (1960, 1965)
Associate Professor of Metallurgy and Materials Science
B.S., Case-Western Reserve, 1953; M.S., Lehigh, 1959; Ph.D.,
1962.
Willard Ross Yates (1955, 1963)
Professor of Government
B.A., Oregon, 1948; M.A., 1949; Ph.D., Yale, 1956.
Bung-Tseng Yen (1957, 1968)
Associate Professor of Civil Engineering
B.S., National Taiwan, 1955; M.S., Lehigh, 1959; Ph.D.,
1963.
CarlL. Young (1972)
Staff Assistant, Aerospace Studies
Master Sergeant, USAF.
Thomas Edwin Young (1958, 1966)
Professor of Chemistry
B.S., Lehigh, 1949; M.S., 1950; Ph.D., Illinois, 1952.
Gregory A. Zebrowski (1972)
Instructor in Education
B.S., East Stroudsburg, 1971.
Daniel Zeroka (1967)
Assistant Professor of Chemistry
B.S., Wilkes, 1963; Ph.D., Penn, 1966.
Albert Charles Zettlemoyer (1941, 1969)
Provost and Vice President, and Distinguished Professor of
Chemistry
B.S., Lehigh, 1936; M.S., 1938; Ph.D., M.I.T., 1941; D.Sc,
Clarkson, 1965.
Earl R. Zimmerman (1968)
Instructor in Education
B.S., California State, 1944; M.Ed., Penn State, 1954.
Emory W. Zimmers, Jr. (1969)
Instructor in Industrial Engineering
B.S., Lehigh, 1966; B.S., 1967; M.S., 1967.
Charles Keller Zug (1961)
Advisor on Bequests, Trusts, and Insurance
B.S. in I.E., Lehigh, 1927; B.S. in E.E., 1927.
Emeriti
Carl Elmer Allen (1930, 1964)
Professor Emeritus of Accounting
B.S., Illinois, 1923; M.S., 1925; Ph.D., 1930. C.P.A.,
Pennsylvania, 1939.
Edward Delbert Amstutz (1938, 1972)
Howard S. Bunn Distinguished Professor Emeritus of Chemistry
B.S., Wooster, 1930; M.S., Institute of Paper Chemistry,
1932; Ph.D., Cornell, 1936; D.Sc, Wooster, 1969.
Lloyd William Ashby (1966, 1971)
Professor Emeritus of Education
A.B., Hastings (Nebraska), 1927; M.A., Columbia Teachers
College, 1935; Ed.D., 1950.
Allen Jennings Barthold (1939, 1967)
Professor Emeritus of Romance Languages
B.A., Lehigh, 1921; Ph.D., Yale, 1931.
Jacob Lynford Beaver (1917, 1952)
Professor Emeritus of Electrical Engineering
E.E., Lehigh, 1904; M.S., 1921; Sc.D., Harvard, 1932.
Lois Reed Benson (1955, 1971)
Chief Nurse and Administrative Assistant Emeritus, Health
Service
B.A., Michigan, 1932; R.N. , Allentown Hospital, 1939.
Robert Dominick Billinger (1923, 1965)
Associate Professor Emeritus of Chemistry
B.S., Lehigh, 1921; M.S., 1925; Ph.D., Cincinnati, 1929.
Natt Bryant Burbank (1964, 1971)
Professor and Assistant Dean Emeritus, School of Education
A.B., Vermont, 1925; M. A., Columbia, 1931; LL.D., Vermont,
1963.
Allison Butts (1957, 1961)
Professor Emeritus of Metallurgy and Materials Science
A.B., Princeton, 1911; B.S. , M.I.T., 1913.
Cassius Wild Curtis (1946, 1971)
Professor Emeritus of Physics
A.B., Williams, 1928; Ph.D., Princeton, 1936.
Faculty and Staff 289
.! Hutchins Cutlci 1 1" 10, 1947)
I or Emeritus of Mathematics
A. II.. Harvard, 1925; A.M., 1926; Ph.D., 1930.
II. Barrett Davis [1946, 1972)
Professoi Emeritus of Speech
B.L.I., Emerson, 1920; Cert., American Academy of Dramatic
Arts. 1" 10; M.A. (Hon.), Emerson. 1958.
Albert William dc Ncufville (1948, 1957)
[ssoi iati Professor Emeritus oj Mechanics
Dipl. Ing., Berlin, 1922; M.S., Stevens Institute, 1948;
Ph.D., Lehigh. 1952.
Herbert Maynard Diamond (1927, 1964)
Professor Emeritus of Economics
B.A., Yale, 1914; Ph.D., 1917.
William Joseph Eney (1936, 1971)
Joseph T. Stuart Professor Emeritus of Civil Engineering
B.S., Johns Hopkins, 1927; M.S., Lehigh, 1938. P. E.,
Pennsylvania, 1939.
George Dormer Fame (1927, 1945)
Assistant Professor Emeritus of Romance Languages
A.B., Columbia, 1926; M.A., 1927.
Adelbert Ford (1931, 1955)
Professor Emeritus of Psychology
A.B., Michigan, 1920; A.M., 1923; Ph.D., 1926.
George Dewey Harmon (1925, 1964)
Professor Emeritus of American History
B.A., Duke, 1921; M.A., 1922; Ph.D., Penn, 1930.
Robert Austin Harrier (1951, 1970)
Executive Secretary Emeritus, Alumni Association
E.M., Lehigh, 1927.
Ladd E. Hoover (1960, 1967)
Associate Director Emeritus of the University Health Service
B.Sc, University of Nebraska College of Medicine, 1924;
M.D., 1926.
George Rankin Irwin (1967, 1972)
Boeing University Professor Emeritus of Mechanics
A.B., Knox College, 1930; M.S., Illinois, 1933; Ph.D., 1937.
Voris V. Latshaw (1931, 1947)
Associate Professor Emeritus of Mathematics
B.A., Indiana, 1927; A.M., 1928; Ph.D., 1930.
John Douglas Leith (1945, 1964, 1966)
Dean Emeritus of Students
A.B., North Dakota, 1920; A.M., Columbia, 1924.
Ethel M.iv M.fnrmick (l')ti-l. I')6<))
\ ■, iate Professor Emeritus oj Education
B.S., Northwestern, 1931; M.Ed., Penn State, 1941 ; D.Sc.Ed.,
Cedar Crest, 1963.
George Walter McCoy, Jr. (1956, 1970)
University Physician Emeritus
B.S., Penn, 1929; M.D., 1932.
Archie Roscoe Miller (1922, 1961)
Professor Emeritus of Electrical Engineering
B.S., Illinois, 1918;M.S., Lehigh, 1925.
Harvey Alexander Neville (1927, 1964)
President Emeritus
A.B., Randolph-Macon, 1918; M.A. , Princeton, 1920; Ph.D.,
1921; LL.D. (Hon.), Randolph-Macon, 1952; L.H.D. (Hon.),
Moravian, 1962; LL.D. (Hon.), Lafayette, 1962; Sc.D. (Hon.)
Lehigh, 1965.
Howard Charles Pieper (1967, 1973)
University Physician Emeritus
B.S., Iowa State, 1926; M.D., 1932.
Francis Joseph Quirk (1950, 1972)
Professor Emeritus of Fine Arts
Dipl., Rhode Island School of Design, 1929.
George Emil Raynor (1931, 1964)
Professor Emeritus of Mathematics
B.S., Washington, 1918; M.A., Princeton, 1920; Ph.D., 1923.
Joseph Benson Reynolds (1907, 1948)
Professor Emeritus of Mathematics and Theoretical Mechanic:
B.A., Lehigh, 1907; M.A., 1910; Ph.D., Moravian, 1919.
Edgar Heisler Riley (1926, 1958)
Associate Professor Emeritus of English
A.B., Cornell, 1915; Ph.D., 1925.
Raymond Burkert Sawyer (1946, 1964)
Associate Professor Emeritus of Physics
Ph.B., Ripon, 1921; M.S., Wisconsin, 1925; Ph.D., Chicago,
1930.
Ernest Bernhard Schulz (1927, 1965)
Professor Emeritus of Political Science
B.S., Michigan, 1920; M. A., 1921; Ph.D., 1927.
Charles Augustus Seidle (1948, 1962)
Vice President Emeritus
B.A., Pittsburgh, 1931; M.A., Columbia, 1936; Ed.D., 1948.
Edith Amanda Seifert (1923, 1969)
Bursar Emeritus
290 Faculty and Staff
Jonathan Burke Severs (1927, 1969)
Distinguished Professor Emeritus of English
A.B., Rutgers, 1925; A.M., Princeton, 1927; Ph.D., Yale,
1935. F.R.S.A., 1962.
Earl Kenneth Smiley (1934, 1964)
Vice President Emeritus
A.B., Bowdoin, 1921; M. A., Lehigh, 1935; L.H.D. (Hon.).
Moravian, 1947; LL.D., (Hon.), Waynesburg, 1952.
Fred Assenheimer (1970, 1971)
Assistant Executive Secretary, Alumni Association
Howard J. Axon (1971)
National Science Foundation Visiting Senior Scientist in
Metallurgy and Materials Science
John Ross Baker (1962, 1971)
Lecturer in English
Judson Gray Smull (1919, 1950)
Associate Professor Emeritus of Chemistry
B.S., Lehigh, 1906; M.S., 1921.
Milton Caleb Stuart (1926-, 1952)
Professor Emeritus of Mechanical Engineering
B.S., Penn, 1909; M.E., 1924.
Francis John Trembley (1928, 1972)
Professor Emeritus of Ecology
B.S., Hobart, 1928; M.S., Lehigh, 1931; Ph.D., Penn, 1934;
D.Sc, Hobart, 1964.
John Schrader Tremper (1939, 1968)
Associate Professor Emeritus of German
A.B., Colgate, 1928; M.A., Cornell, 1932; Ph.D., 1938.
John Harms Ubben (1960, 1973)
Professor Emeritus of German
A.B., Central College (Iowa), 1936; M.A., Kentucky, 1937;
Ph.D., Chicago, 1942.
Ralph Newcomb vanArnam (1928, 1967)
Associate Professor Emeritus of Mathematics and Astronomy
E.E., Cornell, 1926; M.S., 1927.
Lawrence Whitcomb (1930, 1965)
Associate Professor Emeritus of Geology
Ph.B., Brown, 1922; A.M., Princeton, 1928; Ph.D., 1930.
Richard H. Barkalow (1970)
Instructor in Metallurgy and Materials Science
Allen Merril Barstow (1967)
Instructor in Romance Languages
Inge F. Bennett (1971)
Research Associate, Psychology
Raymond W. Bennett (1971)
Assistant Professor of Psychology
Vahram Biricikoglu (1966, 1968)
Assistant Professor of Mechanics
Harold Clarke (1967)
Lecturer and Technician in Physics
Percy Elwood Corbett (1964)
Adjunct Professor of International Relations
Keith H.Corkum (1970)
Instructor in Economics
Joseph A. Corrado (1963, 1967)
Instructor in Civil Engineering
Mildred J. Crosby (1962)
Psychometrician, Counseling
Bradford WiUard (1939, 1959)
Professor Emeritus of Geology
B.A., Lehigh, 1921; A.M., Harvard, 1922; Ph.D., 1923.
Ralph Charles Wood (1958, 1961)
Professor Emeritus of German
B.A., and B.E., Cincinnati, 1928; M.A., 1930; Ph.D.,
Cornell, 1933.
Osman A. El-Ghamry (1969)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Civil Engineering
George Tyler Embley (1970)
Assistant Professor of Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics
David M. Fairhurst (1969)
Research Associate, Center for Surface and Coatings Research
Resignations and Retirements
Thomas Althouse (1971)
Visiting Assistant Professor of Fine Arts
Robert Donald Gaines (1971)
Instructor in Military Science
Leanor Ruth Gilbert (1930, 1943)
Recorder
Charles Arthur Apple (1970)
Instructor in Metallurgy and Materials Science
Richard Allyn Gonce (1965)
Assistant Professor of Economics
Faculty and Staff 291
James B. Covin' I'li.'ii
Psychiatrist, Health Service
Lloyd Hitchcock, [r. ^1966)
idjunct Professor oj Psychology
John Wilham Humes (1969)
[ssistant Professor of Philosophy and Information Science
Sam path N. S. Iyengar (1969)
Instructor in Civil Engineering
Pierre Juliard* (1968)
Assistant Professor oj History
Miguel Angel Macias, Jr. (1965)
Instructor in Civil Engineering
Ronald Bennett Madison (1964)
Instructor in Civil Engineering
George D. Marsh, Jr. (1965)
Assistant Professor of Psychology
Lynne Carol Marsh (1971)
Social Science Cataloger
Walter Frederick Marshall (1967)
Instructor in Romance Languages
Leslie Guy McCracken, Jr. (1956)
Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering
Donald Frazier McLeroy (1966)
Assistant Professor of Geology
Michael P. Mortell (1967, 1972)
Associate Professor, Center for the Application of
Mathematics
John Wayne Murphy (1962, 1964)
Director of University Publications
Linda A. Myers (1970)
Humanities Cataloger
LajosG. Nagy (1970)
Visiting Research Associate Professor, Center for Surface
and Coatings Research
Judith Neale (1969)
Instructor in Centennial School
William L. Nelson (1969)
Instructor in Centennial School
Julius Nimmons (1970)
Lecturer in History
Monroe C. Nichols (1968)
Instructot m Physical Education
Thomas Russell Ortolano (1965)
Assistant I'rofessoi of Chemistry
Paul Croce Paris (1955, 1965)
l'r,<fi-<i,n .'I Mr, hani, s
Donald G.Podoll (1969)
Staff Sergeant, Aerospace Studies
Betty Potash (1970)
Assistant Professor of Cultural Anthropology
Donald L. Prullage (1968)
Assistant Professor of Mathematics
Peter Jules Richetta (1965, 1966)
Assistant Professor of Mathematics
Fred S. Sauerwine (1966, 1971)
Visiting Assistant Professor in Metallurgy and Materials
Science
Richard N. Sopko (1961)
Photographer— Draftsman in Civil Engineering
Glenn E.Stauffer (1969)
Professor of Aerospace Studies
Joseph C. Surico (1969)
Assistant Professor of Aerospace Studies
Hugh T. Sutherland (1967)
Instrument Associate in Civil Engineering
Douglas Henley Taylor (1964, 1965)
Assistant Professor of Mathematics
Peter Tinker (1971)
Instructor in English
John Thomas Hanley Timm (1967)
Instructor in Romance Languages
Frank Van der Woude (1970)
Postdoctoral Research Associate in Civil Engineering
LeoF. VanHoey (1969)
Associate Professor of Sociology
Bruce A. Wagaman (1969)
Assistant Accountant
Walter Barry Wagner (1968)
Instructor in Mechanical Engineering
292 Faculty and Staff
ussian
John Loren Washburn (1965)
Assistant Professor of Government
Richard A. K. Watt (1969)
Assistant Professor of German and R
Ben L. Wechsler (1969)
Professor of Military Science
Michael Wilkinson (1971)
Postdoctoral Research Associate in Center for Surface and
Coatings Research
Elizabeth E. M. Williams (1969)
Visiting Lecturer in Education
Deceased
Fay Conant Bartlett (1917, 1956)
Assistant Professor Emeritus of Physical Education
December 28, 1971.
Francis Mario Brady, Jr. (1955, 1970)
Associate Professor of Accounting
July 30, 1972.
Merton Otis Fuller (1912, 1955)
Associate Professor Emeritus of Civil Engineering
September 25, 1972.
E. Everett MacNamara (1968)
Assistant Professor of Geology
December 16, 1972.
Registration Statistics
Spring. 1 ') 7 0
Undcrgr.idu.ito Students 30-12
Graduate Students 1788
Special Students 24
Total 4854
Summer, 1970
Undergraduate Students 335
Graduate Students 1254
Total 1589
Fall, 1970
Undergraduate Students 3166
Graduate Students 1933
Special Students 46
Total 5145
Students in Undergraduate Curricula Spring, 1970
Curriculum
Seniors
Juniors
Sophomores
Freshmen
Arts and Science
249
237
234
244
^Arts and Engineering
22
16
27
27
Business and Economics
160
145
139
105
Chemical Engineering
40
50
51
■" Chemistry
13
16
23
Civil Engineering
32
37
44
Electrical Engineering
64
74
66
Engineering Mechanics
3
2
6
,, Engineering Physics
13
3
15
, Fundamental Science
5
8
17
Industrial Engineering
37
47
47
Mechanical Engineering
67
62
52
Metallurgy and Materials Science
36
23
20
Unclassified Engineers
1
10
451
--General College Division
Total
741
721
748
827
G.C.D.
Total
Students in Undergraduate Curricula Fall, 1970
Curriculum
Seniors
Juniors
Sophomores
Freshmen
Arts and Science
230
232
241
234
Arts and Engineering
18
22
17
43
Business and Economics
144
131
127
128
Chemical Engineering
52
48
67
Chemistry
13
22
14
Civil Engineering
34
41
64
Electrical Engineering
70
66
84
Engineering Mechanics
2
7
1
Engineering Physics
14
13
Fundamental Science
7
20
18
Industrial Engineering
44
43
44
2
Mechanical Engineering
68
56
55
Metallurgy and Materials Science
25
18
33
Unclassified Engineers
6
30
510
General College Division
Total
707
726
808
917
G.C.D.
Total
937
100
530
167
49
139
220
10
27
45
133
179
76
546
8
3166
294 Registration Statistics
Geographical Distribution of Undergraduate Students Fall, 1970 f
/
Alabama
1
California
10
Colorado
4
Connecticut
105 -
Delaware
26
District of Columbia
13
Florida
14
Georgia
3
Illinois
21
Indiana
6
Iowa
2
Kentucky
Louisiana
1
7
Maine
Maryland
I
Massachusetts
59
Michigan
Missouri
7
4
Nebraska
2
Nevada
1
New Hampshire
6
New Jersey
663 y
New Mexico
3
New York
450
North Carolina
5
Ohio
41
Pennsylvania
1513 x
Rhode Island
8
South Carolina
1
Tennessee
5
Texas
5
Vermont
4
Virginia
31
West Virginia
6
Wisconsin
5
Africa
1
Argentina
4
Arabia
1
Belgium
2
Bermuda
1
Canada
3
Chile
Colombia
Ecuador
Germany
Ghana
Greece
Hong Kong
India
Liberia
Malaysia
Pakistan
Panama
Peru
Phillipines
Puerto Rico
Switzerland
Taiwan
United Kingdom
3
Total
3170
Spring, 1971
Undergraduate Students 3049
Graduate Students 1940
Special Students 32
Total 5021
Summer, 1971
Undergraduate Students 313
Graduate Students 1382
Special Students 8
Total 1703
Fall, 1971
Undergraduate Students 3438
Graduate Students 1935
Special Students 37
Total 5410
Students in Undergraduate Curricula Spring, 1971
Curriculum
Seniors
Juniors
Sophomores
Freshmen
G.C.D.
Total
Arts and Science
279
208
224
226
937 - ~
Arts and Engineering
28
14
6
21
69/
Business and Economics
150
134
139
152
575 ^
Chemical Engineering
52
45
51
148
Chemistry
12
23
12
47 X
Civil Engineering
39
36
47
122
Electrical Engineering
74
60
63
197
Engineering Mechanics
2
7
9
Engineering Physics
4
12
7
41 K
Fundamental Science
13
14
14
Industrial Engineering
48
41
32
121
Mechanical Engineering
70
48
51
169
Metallurgy and Materials Science
22
22
32
76
Unclassified Engineers
9
28
469
506
General College Division
9
9
Total
793
673
706
868
9
3049
Registration Statistics 295
Student-, in UnJt-igr.Klti.iu- Curricula I'.ill, 1**71
Curriculum
Seniors
Juniors
Sophomores
Freshmen
\i : . mil Science
215
256
286
389
\i is and Engineering
23
1 1
15
•II
Business .mJ Economics
126
146
168
149
Chemical Engineering
43
52
62
1
Chemistry
26
14
25
Civil Engineering
46
47
61
Electrical Engineering
66
61
86
Engineering Mechanics
6
3
3
Engineering Physics
12
6
15
Fundamental Science
16
19
15
Industrial Engineering
43
36
42
Mechanical Engineering
51
51
61
Metallurgy and Materials Science
16
38
29
Unclassified Engineers
2
10
48
475
General College Division
Total
691
750
916
1055
(. I I)
Total
1146
90
589
158
65
154
213
12
33
50
121
163
83
535
26
26
26
3438
Geographical Distribution of Undergraduate Students Fall, 1971
Alabama
2
Arizona
1
California
9
Colorado
3
Connecticut
105 y
Delaware
30
District of Columbia
9
Florida
15
Georgia
5
Illinois
20
Indiana
4
Kentucky
3
Louisiana
7
Maine
4
Maryland
107 '
Massachusetts
55
Michigan
7
Mississippi
1
Missouri
3
Nebraska
2
New Hampshire
8
New Jersey
788
New Mexico
2
New York
480
North Carolina
4
Ohio
42
Oklahoma
1
Pennsylvania
1647
Rhode Island
10
South Carolina
1
Tennessee
2
Texas
7
Vermont
4
Virginia
25
West Virginia
3
Argentina
2
Belgium
1
Bermuda
1
Canada
5
Colombia
2
Dominican Republic
1
France
2
Ghana
1
Greece
1
Holland
1
Hong Kong
India
3
1
Iran
4
Italy
Korea
1
1
Liberia
1
Malaysia
Mexico
1
2
Norway
Panama
1
2
Peru
2
Philippines
Puerto Rico
1
1
Switzerland
1
Taiwan
1
United Arab Republic
United Kingdom
2
2
Venezula
2
West Germany
1
Total
3468
296 Registration Statistics
Index
Academic calendar, 3
Academic opportunities, special, 49
Academic regulations, 24
Accelerated programs, 50
Accident and sickness reimbursement
insurance, 19, 65
Accounting, 86
Graduate study, 88
Major in Arts and Science College,
86
Major in Business and Economics
College, 86
Achievement tests, C.E.E.B., 8
Admission
Graduate, 57
Undergraduate, 7
Advanced placement, 9
Aerospace studies, 242
Afro-American studies, 52
Alcoholic beverages, regulations
concerning, 28
American studies, 89
Application for admission fee, 14
Application of Mathematics, Center
for the, 71, 260
Applied mathematics, graduate study
in, 70
Apprentice Teaching program, 51, 85
Arts and Science College, 35
Arts-Engineering, 37
Bachelor of arts degree, 35
Bachelor of science degree, 36
Distribution requirements, 35
Interdisciplinary major, 36
Multiple major, 36
Special opportunities, 38
Arts, Doctor of, 63
Arts-Engineering, 37, 47, 90
Arts-Chemical Engineering, 90
Arts-Civil Engineering, 90
Arts-Electrical Engineering, 91
Arts-Engineering Physics, 91
Arts-Industrial Engineering, 92
Arts-Mechanical Engineering and
Engineering Mechanics, 92
Comprehensive examinations, 38
Graduation requirements, 37
Senior thesis, 38
Special requirements, 37
Assistantships, 66
Astronomy, 194
Athletics, intercollegiate, 22, 148
B
Bachelor of arts degree, College of
Arts and Science, 36
Bachelor of science degree
College of Arts and Science, 36
College ot Business and Economics,
39
College of Engineering, 44
Band, University, 22, 220
Berman Lectures in Economics, 23
Bethlehem area map, 34
Bioengineering Division, Center for
Health Sciences, 74, 261
Biological'Chemistry and Biophysics
Division, Center for Health
Sciences, 73, 261
Biology, 94
Bachelor of arts major, 94
Bachelor of science major, 95
Graduate study, 98
Blaustein Lectures in International
Relations, 23
Board of Trustees, 250
Brown and White, student newspaper,
22
Buildings, campus, 29
Business and Economics College, 39
Bachelor of science curricula, 40
Core requirements, 40
Graduate study, 41
Programs of study, 39
Bureau of Educational Research, 84
Calendar, academic, 3
CAM, Center for the Application of
Mathematics, 71, 260
Campus buildings, 29
Campus events, 64
Campus map, 32
Candidacy for degree, notice of, 24
Center for Health Sciences (CHS), 73,
260
Bioengineering Division, 74, 261
Biological Chemistry and Biophysics
Division, 73, 261
Institute for Pathobiology, 73, 260
Visual Science Division, 74, 261
Center for Information Science (CIS),
74,261
Center for Marine and Environmental
Studies (CMES), 75, 261
Center for Surface and Coatings
Research (CSCR), 76, 262
Center for Social Research (CSR), 77,
262
Center for the Application of Mathe-
matics (CAM), 71,260
Centers, research, 71, 260
Change of major, 49
Change-of-roster fee, 13
Chapel services, 22
Chaplain's Council, 22
Chemical engineering, 100
Graduate study, 103
Recommended sequence of courses,
100
Chemistry, 106
Bachelor of arts major, 107
Bachelor of science major, 107
Five-year program, 107
Graduate program, 110
Specialized undergraduate curri-
cula, 106
Chemistry breakage fee, 13
CHS, Center for Health Sciences, 73,
260
CIS, Center for Information Sciences,
74,261
Civil engineering, 113
Graduate study, 117
Recommended sequence of courses,
114
Class honors, 26
Classics, 121
Greek, 121, 122
Latin, 121, 122
Major programs, 121
CMES, Center for Marine and Environ-
mental Studies, 75, 261
College of Arts and Science, 35
Arts-Engineering, 37
Bachelor of arts degree, 35
Bachelor of science degree, 36
Distribution requirements, 35
Interdisciplinary major, 36
Multiple major, 36
Special opportunities, 38
College of Business and Economics, 39
Bachelor of science curricula, 40
Core requirements, 40
Graduate study, 41
Programs of study, 39
College of Engineering, 44
Curricula, 44
General studies program, 45
Graduation requirements, 47
Honors programs, 47
Inspection trips, 47
Recommended freshman year, 45
College Work-Study Program
(CW-SP), 17
Completion of academic requirements,
final date for, 24
Index 297
Comprehensive honors program,
Computer science, master ol science
in, 69, l":
Computing Associates Program, 72
Computing Center, 72, 260
Cooperative college program, 52
Core requirements. College of Busi-
ness .ind Economics, 40
Council for Research in Teaching and
Learning, 84
Counseling and assistance, 18
Counseling Service, 20
Course numbering, 85
Course prerequisites, 86
Creative Arts, Globus Series in
Avant-Garde, 23
Creative Concepts Seminars, 53
Credit and grades, 24
Credit hours, 85
Cross-registration with area
colleges, 52
Crossroads Africa, 22
CSCR, Center for Surface and Coatings
Research, 76, 262
CSR, Center for Social Research, 77,
262
Degree candidacy, notice of, 24
Degree eligibility, 24
Departmental honors, 53
Departmental visiting committees,
251
Deposit, admission, 10
Description of courses, 85
Dining services, 13
Distribution requirements, College
of Arts and Science, 35
Doctor of Arts degree, 63
Doctor of Education degree, 63
Doctor of Philosophy degree, 61
Dramatics society, 22
Drugs, regulations concerning, 28
Early decision admission, 9
Economics, 124
Graduate study, 126
Major in Arts and Science College,
124
Major in Business and Economics
College, 124
Economics, Berman Lectures in, 23
Economics statistics major, 124
Education courses, 128
Education, Doctor of, 63
Education, School of, 67
Educational Research, Bureau of, 84
IK. ii I, al engineering, I $4
Graduate study, I 38
Recommended course sequence,
135
Eligibility for degree, 24
Emeriti faculty, 289
Engineering College-, -14
Curricula, 44
General studies program, 45
Graduation requirements, 47
Honors programs, 47
Inspection trips, 47
Recommended freshman year, 45
English, 140
Composition courses, undergraduate
141
English literature major, 140
Graduate study in English litera-
ture, 142
Journalism, 146
Speech, 147
English requirement for freshmen, 35
Entrance examinations, 8
Environmental sciences and resource
management, 149
Environmental Studies, Center for
Marine and, 75, 261
Epitome, student yearbook, 22
Evening classes, 65
Examination fee, 13
Examinations, physical, 19
Faculty and staff listing, 265
Fees, special, 13
Final date for completion of academic
requirements, 24
Finance courses, 183
Financial aid
Graduate, 65
Undergraduate, 16
Fine arts, 150
Art history major, 151
General art major, 150
Pre-architecture major, 151
Five-year programs, 50, 153
Arts-M.B.A., 155
B.S. engineering-M.S. materials,
155
Electrical engineering and
engineering physics, 153
Engineering-M.B.A., 155
Industrial engineering and
business, 154
Foreign careers, 157
Foreign Opportunities Committee, 22
Foreign study, 51
Forum for Visiting Lecturers, 23
Forum, University, 21
l racture and Solid Mechanics, Insti
tute of, 81, 263
Fraternities, social, 12
French, 210
Graduate study, 2! 1
Required courses, 210
Freshman English requirement, 35
Freshman honors, 52
Freshman Seminars, 52
Freshman year, engineering, 45
Fritz Engineering Laboratory, 78, 262
Fundamental sciences, 158
General College Division, 24
General studies program, engineering
College, 45
Geological sciences, 159
Bachelor of arts program, 160
Bachelor of science program, 159
B.A./B.S. and M.S. program, 1 60
Graduate study, 162
German, 213
Graduate study, 214
Required courses, 213
German semester abroad, 51
Gipson Institute for 18th Century
Studies, 81, 263
Glee Club, 22, 221
Globus Series in Avant-Garde Creative
Arts, 23
Grades, 24
Graduate assistantships, 66
Graduate degrees, 60
Doctor of Arts, 42, 63
Doctor of Education, 63
Doctor of Philosophy, 61
Master's, 41, 43, 60
Graduate programs, interdisciplinary,
69
Graduate School, 57
Admission, 57
Areas of study, 57
Degrees offered, 60
Financial assistance, 65
Housing, 64
Registration, 58
Resident graduate student, 58
Resources, 64
Special student, 58
Tuition and fees, 59
Graduate-standing prerequisite,
waiver of, 53
Graduate study, areas of, 57
Graduating thesis, undergraduate, 24
Graduation honors, 26
298 Index
Government, 164
Graduate study, 166
Suggested course sequence, 164
Urban studies division, 168
Greek, 121, 122
Guests, regulations concerning, 28
H
Health Service, Students', 19
Health Sciences, Center for, 73, 260
High Immediate Relevancy courses, 49
Hillel Foundation, 22
H.I.R. courses, 49
History, 170
Graduate study, 174
Required courses, 170
History of Lehigh University, 5
Honorary societies, national, 21
Honors programs, 26, 52
Housing, graduate, 64
I
Industrial engineering, 176
Graduate study, 178
Recommended course sequence, 176
Information Science, Center for, 74
261
Information science courses, 225
Inspection trips, engineering, 47
Institute for 18th Century Studies,
81, 263
Institute for Metal Forming, 82, 264
Institute for Pathobiology, 73, 260
Institute of Fracture and Solid
Mechanics, 81, 263
Institutes, research, 81, 263
Insurance, accident and sickness
reimbursement, 19, 65
Intercollegiate athletic program,
22, 148
Interdepartmental honors, 53
Interdisciplinary graduate programs,
69
Applied mathematics, 70
Computer science, 69, 192
Management science, 43, 70
Interdisciplinary major, 36
Interdisciplinary study, 49
International relations, 180
Graduate study, 182
Required courses, 180
International Relations, Blaustein
Lectures in, 23
International study, 51
Intramural sports program, 23, 248
Italian, 215
J
Journalism, 146
Junior honors, 53
Junior-standing prerequisite, waiver
of, 52
Junior year abroad, 51
K
Kiswahili, 216
Late fees, 13
Latin, 121, 122
Law, business, 185
Leadership awards, 16
Lecturers, Forum for Visiting, 23
Lecture series
Berman in Economics, 23
Blaustein in International
Relations, 23
Lehigh University Merit Scholarships,
16
Lehigh Valley Association of Indepen-
dent Colleges (LVAIC), 52
Listener's fee, 14
Loan programs
College Work-Study Program
(CW-SP), 17
National Direct Student Loan
(NDSL), 17, 67
Supplementary Educational Oppor-
tunity Grant (SEOG), 17
State aid, 17
LVAIC program, 52
M
Major, change of, 49
Management courses, 185
Management and finance, 185
Finance, 183
Law, 185
Management, 185
Marketing, 187
Management science, master of science
in, 43, 70
Maps
Bethlehem area, 34
Campus, 32
Marketing, 187
Marine and Environmental Studies,
Center for, 75, 261
Master's degrees, 57, 60
Materials course offerings, 156
Materials Research Center, 79, 263
Mathematics, 188
Astronomy, 194
Graduate study, 189
Required courses, 189
Mathematics, applied, 70
Mathematics, Center for the Applica-
tion of, 71,260
Mechanical engineering and mechanics,
195
Graduate study
Mechanical engineering, 198
Mechanics, 201
Mechanical engineering courses,
196
Mechanics courses, 200
Recommended course sequence, 196
Merit Scholarships, 16
Metal Forming, Institute for, 82, 264
Metallurgy and materials science, 203
Graduate study, 206
Industrial metallurgy option, 204
Recommended sequence of courses,
203
Research activities, 207
Research option, 204
Military deposit, 13
Military science studies, 239
Modern foreign languages and litera-
tures, 210
French, 210
German, 213
Italian, 215
Kiswahili, 216
Portuguese, 216
Russian, 216
Spanish, 216
Motor vehicles, regulations concern-
ing, 28
Multiple major, Arts and Science
College, 36
Music, 219
Courses offered, 219
Band, 220
Glee Club, 221
Mustard and Cheese dramatics society,
22
N
National Direct Student Loan (NDSL)
progam, 17, 67
National honorary and recognition
societies, 21
National Printing Ink Research Insti-
tute (NPIRI), 76
Natural science program, 221
Newman Club, 22
Newspaper, student, 22
Night classes, 65
Notice of candidacy for degree, 24
O
Office of Research, 84, 260
Index 299
Parking regulations, 65
Pass fail grading, 25
Pathobiology, Institute for, 73, 260
Ph.D. degree. (.1
Philosophy, 2 22
Division of information science,
225
Division of philosophy, 222
Physical education 6V athletics, 248
Courses available, 249
Intercollegiate athletics, 248
Intramural sports, 248
Physical education, 248
Physical examinations. 19
Physics, 228
Graduate study, 231
Major in Arts and Science
College, 228
Major in Engineering College, 228
Physiotherapy, 19
Placement Service, 20
Portuguese, 216
Post-doctoral work, 63
Pre-law program, 50
Pre-med program, 50
Prerequisite, course, 86
Prerequisite, waiver of
Graduate standing, 53
Junior standing, 52
Presidential Prizes, 10, 17, 54
Probation, academic, 26
Psychology, 233
Bachelor of arts major, 233
Bachelor of science major, 233
Graduate study, 235
Publications, student, 22
Purpose of Lehigh University, 5
R
Reading and Study Clinic, 20
Recommended freshman year,
engineering, 45
Refunds
Graduate tuition, 59
Residence hall rental and dining
service fee, 14
Undergraduate tuition, 14
Registration date, latest, 25
Registration, graduate, 58
Registration statistics, 294
Regulations
Academic, 24
Social, 27
Religion studies, 238
Religious activities, 22
Requirements, final date for comple-
tion of academic, 24
300 Index
Requirements, undergraduate
admission, 7
Resean h assistantships, 66
Research centers and organizations,
71
Research initiates, 50
Research, Office of, 84, 260
Reserve Officers' Training Corps, 239
Aerospace studies, 242
Military science, 239
Residence halls, 12
Resource management, environmental
sciences and, 1 49
Review-Consultation-Study (RCS)
period, 25
R.O.T.C., 239
Russian, 216
Scholarships and loans, under-
graduate, 16
Scholastic probation, 26
School, Graduate, 57
School of Education, 67
Seminars for freshman, 52
Senior honors, 53
Short-term loans, 17
Social fraternities, 12
Social regulations, 27
Social relations, 243
Graduate study, 247
Required preliminary courses, 243
Social Research, Center for, 77, 262
Social Welfare Education Program,
49,52
Sophomore honors, 52
South Jersey Wetlands Institute, 83,
264
Spanish, 216
Special academic opportunities, 49
Special student, graduate, 58
Speech, 147
Sports, intramural, 23, 248
Staff and faculty listing, 265
State grants and loans, 17
Statistics of registration, 294
Student activities and events, 21
Student Loan Fund, 67
Student personnel services, 18
Student publications, 22
Students' Health Service, 19
Study in foreign countries, 51
Summer language and literature pro-
grams, 51
Summer Session, 65
Supplementary Educational Oppor-
tunity Grant (SEOG), 17
Surface and Coatings Research,
Center for, 76, 262
Teaching assistantships, 66
Teaching and Learning, Council for
Research in, 84
Theses, undergraduate, 24
Transcripts, 14, 59
Transfer students, 1 1
Trustee scholarships, 1 6
Trustees, Board of, 250
Tuition and lees
Graduate, 59
Undergraduate, I 1
Tuition refunds
Graduate, 59
Undergraduate, 14
Two-degree programs, 50
U
Undergraduate admission, 7
Undergraduate scholarships and loans,
16
University Forum, 21
University Scholar, 53
University Tuition Loan Program, 67
Urban Studies, Division of, 168
Graduate study, 169
Required courses, 168
Visiting Committees, Departmental,
251
Visiting Lecturers, Forum for, 23
Visual Science Division, Center for
Health Sciences, 74, 261
Volunteer services, 21
W
Washington Semester, 51
Welfare Education Program, Social,
49,52
Wetlands Institute, South Jersey, 83
264
Yearbook, student, 22
Lehigh
University Catalog
Second class postage paid at
Bethlehem, Pennsylvania 18015
/